63003en1.PDF Fanuc

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i Model A

Connection Manual (Function)
GFZ-63003EN-1/02
September 1999
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
Copyright 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
CONSTITUTION OF THIS MANUAL
This Manual (B63003EN1) is composed of the following 2 volumes.
Vol. 1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
PREFACE
1. AXIS CONTROL
CONTROLLED AXES/SETTING EACH AXIS/ERROR COMPENSATION/
SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVOCONTROLLED AXES/
SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS/SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL/
TANDEM CONTROL/SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (T SERIES)/
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL(T SERIES (TWOPATH CONTROL))/
BAXIS CONTROL (T SERIES)/ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL/ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL/
CHOPPING FUNCTION (M SERIES)/HOBBING MACHINE FUNCTION (M SERIES)/
SIMPLE ELECTRIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81) (M SERIES)
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
EMERGENCY STOP/CNC READY SIGNAL/OVERTRAVEL CHECK/ALARM SIGNAL/
START LOCK/INTERLOCK/MODE SELECTION/
PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES (TWOPATH CONTROL)/
STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL/VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL/
ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION/SERVO/SPINDLE MOTOR SPEED DETECTION
3. MANUAL OPERATION
JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED/MANUAL HANDLE FEED/MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION/
TOOL AXIS DIRECTION HANDLE FEED FUNCTION/
TOOL AXIS DIRECTION HANDLE FEED FUNCTION B/MANUAL LINEAR/
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION/MANUAL RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES)/
MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/
SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS/REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT/
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/
3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/
BUTTTYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING/
LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING REFERENCE MARKS
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
CYCLE START/FEED HOLD/RESET AND REWIND/TESTING A PROGRAM/
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF/OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP/PROGRAM RESTART/
TOOL RETRACTION AND RETURN/EXACT STOP/EXACT STOP MODE/TAPPING MODE/
CUTTING MODE (M SERIES)/BALANCE CUT (2PATH CONTROL FOR T SYSTEM)/DNC OPERATION/
MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN/RETREAT AND RETRY FUNCTIONS (M SERIES)/
RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES)
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
POSITIONING/LINEAR INTERPOLATION/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION/THREAD CUTTING/
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES)/HELICAL INTERPOLATION/
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION (M SERIES)/POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION/
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION/POLYGONAL TURNING (T SERIES)/
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES)/EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES)/
SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (M SERIES)/
HYPONENTIAL AXIS INTERPOLATION/HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (M SERIES)/
SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES)/
NURBS INTERPOLATION (M SERIES)
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL
FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION/AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK/
MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK/HIGHSPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE/
WAITING M CODE (TWOPATH CONTROL)/M CODE GROUP CHECK FUNCTION
Vol. 2
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT)/
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT/SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL/
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL FOR TWOPATH LATHE/CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL/
SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION/ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES)/
SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES)/Cs CONTOUR CONTROL/MULTISPINDLE CONTROL/
RIGID TAPPING/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL/SPINDLE ORIENTATION/
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING/THREESPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/
SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
TOOL FUNCTION/TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY/TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT/CUTTER COMPENSATION
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/
G CODE SYSTEM (T SERIES)/PROGRAM CONFIGURATION/INCH/METRIC CONVERSION/
HIGH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING/CUSTOM MACRO/CANNED CYCLE (M SERIES)/
CANNED CYCLE FOR HOLE MACHINING (T SERIES)/EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION (M SERIES)/
CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/
MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRETS (T SERIES)/
INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION (M SERIES)/SCALING (M SERIES)/
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION/THREEDIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION (M SERIES)/
RETRACE (M SERIES)/MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER/
SMALL HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (M SERIES)/HIGHSPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACTING
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE/REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 INTERFACE/DNC2 INTERFACE/
EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL/SIMULTANEOUS INPUT AND OUTPUT OPERATIONS (M SERIES)/
EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT/DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BASED ON THE I/O LINK
14. MEASUREMENT
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M
SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)/SKIP FUNCTION/ENTERING COMPENSATION
VALUES/TOOL LENGTH/WORKPIECE ORIGIN MEASUREMENT B (M SERIES)
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
PMC AXIS CONTROL/EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH/SPINDLE
OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC/EXTERNAL KEY INPUT/DIRECT OPERATION BY PMC/MMC
16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO
SIGNALS USED BY MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION (20iFA/TA)/
SIGNALS USED FOR POLYGON LIMIT MACHINING (20iFA)
APPENDIX
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
LIST OF ADDRESSES/SIGNAL SUMMARY
B63003EN1/02
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s1
B63003EN1/02
Table of Contents
Volume 1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p1
1. AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SETTING EACH AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2.1
Name of Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2.2
Increment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.3
Specifying the Rotation Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.2.4
Controlled Axes Detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.5
Outputting the Movement State of an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2.6
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2.7
Followup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.8
Servo Off (Mechanical Handle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2.9
Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.3.1
Stored Pitch Error Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.3.2
Backlash Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.3.3
Straightness Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVOCONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.4.1
Parameters Related to Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.4.2
Absolute Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1.4.3
FSSB Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.5.1
Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.5.2
Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.5.3
Rotary Axis Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
TANDEM CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL
(T SERIES (TWOPATH CONTROL)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1.9.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
1.9.2
Synchronous Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1.9.2.1 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.9.2.2 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.9.2.3 Signal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.9.2.4 Examples of applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1.9.2.5 Reference position return and its check during synchronous control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.9.2.6 Outofsynchronization detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.9.2.7 Move command after switching between independent control and synchronous control . . . . 122
1.9.2.8 Automatic setting of a workpiece coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
c1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
1.9.3
1.9.3.1
1.9.3.2
1.9.3.3
1.9.3.4
1.9.3.5
1.9.3.6
1.9.3.7
1.9.3.8
Composite Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spindle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tool offset during composite control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference position return during composite control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move commands after the control mode is switched between independent control and
composite control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4
Superimposed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4.1 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4.2 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4.3 Signal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4.4 Examples of applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4.5 Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4.6 Differences between superimposed control and ordinary synchronous control . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.5
Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.6
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.7
Alarms and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.7.1 P/S alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.7.2 Servo alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.8
Definition of Warning, Caution, and Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.8.1 Items common to synchronous, composite, and superimposed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.8.2 Items related only to synchronous control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.8.3 Restrictions imposed during synchronous, composite, and superimposed control . . . . . . . . .
1.9.8.4 Reading the coordinates during synchronous, composite, or superimposed control . . . . . . . .
1.9.8.5 Terminating synchronous, composite, or superimposed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.8.6 Status output signals for an axis under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control . .
1.9.9
Examples of Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.9.1 Independent control and synchronous control of the Z1 and Z2axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.9.2 Independent control and interpolation for the X1 and Z2axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.9.2.1 Using synchronous control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.9.2.2 Using composite control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.9.3 Independent control and interpolation between the X1 and Z2axes and
between the X2 and Z1axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.9.4 Independent control and superimposed control for the Z1 and Z2axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.9.5 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.10 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10 BAXIS CONTROL (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.11
ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL/ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12 CHOPPING FUNCTION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.13 HOBBING MACHINE FUNCTION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.14 SIMPLE ELECTRIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81) (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c2
124
124
124
124
125
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
128
128
129
129
131
141
141
142
142
143
144
145
147
147
148
149
149
151
152
153
156
160
162
163
167
182
186
197
210
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

2.1
2.2
2.3
EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CNC READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OVERTRAVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
Overtravel Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2
Stored Stroke Check 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3
Stored Stroke Check 2, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4
Chuck/Tailstock Barrier (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5
Tool Post Interference Check (T series, Twopath Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.6
Stroke Limit Check Before Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
ALARM SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5
START LOCK/INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6
MODE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7
PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES (TWOPATH CONTROL) . . . . .
2.8
STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9
VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10 ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11
SERVO/SPINDLE MOTOR SPEED DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
223
226
228
228
231
235
243
249
254
258
260
264
272
274
276
278
288
3. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MANUAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOL AXIS DIRECTION HANDLE FEED FUNCTION/
TOOL AXIS DIRECTION HANDLE FEED FUNCTION B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2
Tool Axis Perpendicular Direction Handle Feed Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANUAL RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDLESYNCHRONOUS FEED (Series 20i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
303
311
314
314
319
325
342
345
350
4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN/3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . .
FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUTTTYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING REFERENCE MARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c3
358
371
378
381
384
387
390
397
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

5.1
5.2
5.3
CYCLE START/FEED HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESET AND REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESTING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Machine Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2
Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3
Single Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7
PROGRAM RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8
TOOL RETRACTION AND RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9
EXACT STOP/EXACT STOP MODE/TAPPING MODE/CUTTING MODE (M SERIES) . . . . . .
5.10 BALANCE CUT (2PATH CONTROL FOR T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11
DNC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
404
409
414
414
417
420
423
426
430
431
434
438
440
442
445
446
6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINEAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THREAD CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
Thread Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2
Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5
SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6
HELICAL INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 POLYGONAL TURNING (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.1 Polygonal Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.2 Polygonal Turning with Two Spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.13 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.14 HYPONENTIAL AXIS INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.15 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.16 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17 NURBS INTERPOLATION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
453
455
458
465
465
472
474
476
478
479
482
485
486
491
508
512
514
516
517
518
521
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . 523

7.1
FEEDRATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1
Rapid Traverse Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Cutting Feedrate Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Feed Per Minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c4
524
524
527
529
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
7.1.4
Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
F1-digit Feed (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6
Feedrate Inverse Time Specification (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.2 Feedrate override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.3 Second feedrate override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.7.4 Override cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.8
Automatic Corner Override (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.9
External Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.10 Feed Stop Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.11 Feedrate Clamping by Arc Radius (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.12 Automatic Corner Deceleration (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.13 Advanced Preview Control (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14 Highprecision Contour Control by RISC (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14.1 Lookahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14.2 Automatic feedrate control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14.3 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14.4 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14.5 Alarm and message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14.6 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.14.7 Reference item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.15 Positioning by Optimul Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.16 AI Contour Control (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.17 Highspeed Linear Interpolation (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Rapid Traverse Bellshaped Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3
Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4
BellShaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5
Linear Acceleration/Deceleration before Cutting Feed Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6
Corner Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6.1 Inposition check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6.2 Inposition check independently of feed/rapid traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6.3 Error detect (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7
Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
532
534
537
538
538
541
543
544
545
549
551
552
555
563
572
575
587
597
598
608
609
610
611
615
635
638
638
643
646
650
653
659
659
661
663
664
8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIGHSPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WAITING M CODE (TWOPATH CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M CODE GROUP CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c5
666
680
682
686
691
693
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
Volume 2
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
9.1
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL FOR TWOPATH LATHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6
SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7
ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8
SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.9
Cs CONTOUR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.10 MULTISPINDLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11
RIGID TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.2 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.3 Rigid Tapping Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.4 Display Data on the Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.5 Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.6 Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.6.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.6.2 Signals related to S code output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.6.3 Signals related to gear switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.6.4 Signals related to second spindle rigid tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.6.5 Signal addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.6.6 Notes on interface with the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.7 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.7.1 When M29 is specified before G84 (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.7.2 M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.7.3 Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.7.4 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.8 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.9 Alarm and Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.10 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11.11 Reference Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.12 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.14 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.15 THREESPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.16 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
698
699
707
735
747
754
759
760
781
797
810
810
812
817
818
822
826
826
827
828
830
832
832
835
836
840
844
848
850
865
867
871
872
876
879
881
891
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

10.1
10.2
10.3
TOOL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
c6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
10.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922

10.4.1 Cutter Compensation B, C (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
10.4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
11. PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

11.1
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/

POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
11.2
G CODE SYSTEM (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
11.3
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
11.4
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
11.5
HIGH SPEED CYCLE CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
11.6
CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
11.6.1
Custom Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
11.6.2
Interruption Type Custom Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
11.6.3
Custom Macro Variables Common to Twopath Control (Twopath Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
11.7
CANNED CYCLE (M SERIES)/CANNED CYCLE FOR HOLE MACHINING (T SERIES) . . . 966
11.8
EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
11.9
CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) . . . . 979
11.10 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRETS (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
11.11 INDEX TABLE INDEXING FUNCTION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
11.12 SCALING (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
11.13 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
11.14 THREEDIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
11.15 RETRACE (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
11.16 MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
11.17 SMALL HOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
11.18 HIGHSPEED CYCLE MACHINING RETRACTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

12.1 DISPLAY/SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Displaying Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.4 Displaying Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.5 Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.6 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.7 Waveform Diagnosis Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.8 Selfdiagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.9 Display of Hardware and Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.10 Position Display Neglect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.11 Run Hour and Parts Count Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.12 Graphic Display/Dynamic Graphic Display/Background Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.13 Displaying Operating Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.14 Stamping the Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.15 Software Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.16 Multilanguage Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.17 Remote Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c7
1027
1027
1028
1030
1031
1031
1032
1033
1035
1036
1037
1038
1044
1053
1055
1057
1068
1069
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
12.1.18 External Operator Message Logging and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.1.19 Erase Screen Display/Automatic Erase Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.20 Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.21 Periodic Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 No. of Registered Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 Memory Protection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.4 Password Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.5 Background Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.6 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.7 Conversational Programming with Graphic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1071
1073
1076
1080
1088
1088
1089
1090
1092
1094
1096
1097
13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098

13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOTE BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNC1 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNC2 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMULTANEOUS INPUT AND OUTPUT OPERATIONS (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BASED ON THE I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1099
1106
1107
1116
1117
1125
1128
1133
14. MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

14.1
14.2
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3 SKIP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.1 Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.2 Highspeed Skip Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.3 Multistep Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.4 Torque Limit Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.5 Continuous Highspeed Skip Function (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4 ENTERING COMPENSATION VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4.1 Input of Offset Value Measured A (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4.3 Input of Measured Workpiece Origin Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5 TOOL LENGTH/WORKPIECE ORIGIN MEASUREMENT B (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1159
1160
1167
1167
1170
1174
1178
1181
1185
1185
1187
1197
1198
15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202

15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
PMC AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXTERNAL DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL KEY INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIRECT OPERATION BY PMC/MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1203
1250
1259
1262
1270
1276
16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277

16.1
16.2
SIGNALS USED BY MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION (20iFA/TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

SIGNALS USED FOR POLYGON LIMIT MACHINING (20iFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290
c8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B63003EN1/02
APPENDIX
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
A.1
LIST OF ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.1
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i List of Addresses (Onepath Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.2
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i List of Addresses (Twopath Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.3
Series 21i/210i Address List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.4
Series 20i Address List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2
SIGNAL SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2.1
Signal Summary (In Order of Functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2.2
List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2.3
List of Signals (In Order of Addresses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c9
1296
1296
1315
1351
1369
1387
1387
1405
1423
PREFACE
B63003EN1/02
PREFACE
This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine

tool builders to design their CNC machine tools. The following items are
explained for each function.
1. General
Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operators manual as
requied.
2. Signals
Describes names, functions, output conditions and addresses of the
signals required to realize a function.
3. Parameters
Describes parameters related with a function.
4. Alarms and messages
Lists the alarms and messages related with a function in a table.
5. Reference item
List the related items of the related manuals in a table.
A list of addresses of all signals and a list of signals are described in the
appendix of this manual. Refer to it as required.
p1
PREFACE
Applicable models
B63003EN1/02
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

Model name
Abbreviation
FANUC Series 16iTA
16iTA
FANUC Series 16iMA
16iMA
FANUC Series 160iTA
160iTA
FANUC Series 160isTA
160isTA
FANUC Series 160iMA
160iMA
FANUC Series 160isMA
160isMA
FANUC Series 18iTA
18iTA
FANUC Series 18iMA
18iMA
FANUC Series 180iTA
180iTA
180isTA
FANUC Series 180iMA
180iMA
180isMA
FANUC Series 21iTA
21iTA
FANUC Series 21iMA
21iMA
FANUC Series 210iTA
210iTA
210isTA
FANUC Series 210iMA
210iMA
210isMA
FANUC Series 20iTA
20iTA
FANUC Series 20iFA
20iFA
Series 16i
Series 160i
Series 18i
Series 180i
Series 21i
Series 210i
Series 20i
For ease of understanding, the models are categorized as follows:

T series: 16iTA, 160iTA, 160isTA, 18iTA, 180iTA, 180isTA,
21iTA, 210iTA, 210isTA, 20iTA
M series: 16iMA, 160iMA, 160isMA, 18iMA, 180iMA,
180isMA, 21iMA, 210iMA, 210isMA
F series: 20iFA
NOTE
Some functions described in this manual may not be applied
to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual
(B63002EN).
p2
PREFACE
B63003EN1/02
Signal description
Relation of interface signals among the CNC, the PMC and the machine
tool is shown below:
[For onepath control]
G000
CNC
F000
X000
PMC
Y000
Machine
tool
[For twopath control]

CNC
Path 1
G000
X000
F000
Y000
PMC
G1000
Path 2
Machine
tool
F1000
NOTE
1 In twopath control, the signals of the same functions are
prepared for both of path 1 and path 2. These signals have
suffix #1 and #2 to their signal names on path 1 and path 2,
respectively.
When a signal is common to both paths, the signal is
prepared only to path 1 and the suffix #1 and #2 are not
attached.
2 In the context, signals are described on path 1 only. Refer
to Appendix A.1.2 List of addresses for twopath control for
signals on path 2.
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits.
Each bit has a different meaning.
p3
PREFACE
B63003EN1/02
Expression of signals
One address accommodates eight signals.
Address
F000
Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)

#7
OP
#6
SA
#5
STL
#4
SPL
#3
#2
#1
#0
RWD
In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals
) in the signal address figure as shown
are covered with shade (
below. This means either T series or M series does not have this signal.
Upper part is for T series and lower part is for M series.
[Example 1]
Signal EXLM, ST is a common signal, STLK is for T series only and
RLSOT and RVS are for M series only.
#7
RLSOT
G007
Parameter description
#6
EXLM
#2
ST
#1
STLK
#0
RVS
T series
M series
Parameters are classified by data type as follows :

Dta type
Valid data range
Remarks
Bit
0 or 1
Bit axis
Byte
0
"127
127
0 255
Byte axis
In some parameters,
arameters, signs are ig
ignored.
Word
"32767
"99999999
Word axis
2word
2word axis
NOTE
1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single data
number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different
meaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for each
control axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general
range. The range varies according to the parameters. For
the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the
explanation of the parameter.
p4
PREFACE
B63003EN1/02
D Notation of bit type and
bit axis type parameters

Data No.
Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)

#7
#6
0000
#5
SEQ
#4
#3
#2
INI
#1
ISO
#0
TVC
Notation of parameters
other than bit type and
bit axis type
Data No.
Data
1023
Servo axis number of a specific axis
NOTE
In an item where both T series and M series are described,
parameters having different meanings between the T series
and M series and parameters that are valid only for the T or
M series are indicated in two levels as shown below.
Parameters left blank are unavaliable.
[Example 1]
Parameter 5010 has different meanigs for the T series and M series.
Tool nose radius compensation . . .
T series
Cutter compensation C . . .
M series
5010
[Example 2]
DPI is a parameter common to the M and T series, but GSB and GSC
are parameters valid only for the T series.
#7
GSC
#6
GSB
3401
#0
DPI
T series
DPI
M series
[Example 3]
The following parameter is provided only for the M series.
T series
1450
F1 digit feed . . .
p5
M series
PREFACE
RelatedManuals
B63003EN1/02
The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 16i, Series
18i, Series 160i and Series 180i.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name
Manuals related to
Series 21i/210iMODEL A
Specification
Number
DESCRIPTIONS
B63002EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
B63003EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
B63003EN1
OPERATORS MANUAL For Lathe
B63004EN
OPERATORS MANUAL For Maching Center
B63014EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B63005EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
B63010EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(Macro Compiler / Macro Executer)
B61803E1
FAPT MACRO COMPILER PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B66102E
FANUC Super CAP T / Super CAP II T OPERATORS

MANUAL
B62444E1
FANUC Super CAP M / Super CAP II M OPERATORS

MANUAL
B62154E
FANUC Super CAP M PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B62153E
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING

FUNCTION I FOR LATHE OPERATORS MANUAL
B61804E1

FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATORS MANUAL
B61804E2

FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER OPERATORS
MANUAL
B61874E1
The table below lists the manuals related to the FANUC Series
21i/210iMODEL A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*).
Table 2 Manuals related to the Series 21i/210iMODEL A
Manual name
Order No.
DESCRIPTION
B63002EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
B63083EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
B63003EN1
OPERATORS MANUAL (For Lathe)
B63084EN
OPERATORS MANUAL (For Machining Center)
B63094EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B63085EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
B63090EN
MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTOR,

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B61803E1
FAPT MACRO COMPILER (For PCs),

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B66102E
p6
PREFACE
B63003EN1/02
The following table lists the manuals related to the FANUC Series 20iA.
This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*).
Table 3 Manuals related to the Series 20i
Specification
number
Manual name
Manuals related to the

SERVO Motor series
Descriptions
B63002EN
Connection Manual (Hardware)
B63003EN
Connection Manual (Function)
B63003EN1
Operators Manual (for Lathe)
B63374EN
Operators Manual (for Milling)
B63384EN
Maintenance Manual
B63005EN
Parameter Manual
B63380EN
Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro Executor)
B61803E1
The table below lists manuals related to the SERVO Motor series.
Table 4 Manuals related to the SERVO Motor series
Document name
Document
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR series

DESCRIPTIONS
B65142E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series

DESCRIPTIONS
B65152E
Major contents
D Specification
D Characteristics
D External dimensions
D Connections
D Specification
D Characteristics
D External dimensions
D Connections
D Specifications and
functions
FANUC SERVO MOTOR AMPLIFIER

series DESCRIPTIONS
B65162E
D Installation
D External dimensions and
maintenance area
D Connections
FANUC SERVO MOTOR series

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B65165E

PARAMETER MANUAL
B65150E
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series

PARAMETER MANUAL
B65160E
p7
D Start up procedure
D Troubleshooting
D Maintenance of motor
D Initial setting
D Setting parameters
D Description of parameters
D Initial setting
D Setting parameters
D Description of parameters
Major usage
D Selection of motor
D Connection of motor
D Selection of
amplifier
D Connection of
amplifier
D Start up the system

(Hardware)
D Troubleshooting
D Maintenance of motor
D Start up the system
(Software)
D Turning the system

(Parameters)
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
AXIS CONTROL
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.1
CONTROLLED AXES
General
Series 16i, Series 160i
Item
M series
T series
No. of basic
1path
controlled axes
2path
3 axes
2 axes
3 axes per path
2 axes per path
Controlled axes 1path

expansion
(total)
2path
Max. 8 axes
(Including the Cs axis)
Max. 8 axes
Max. 7 axes per path

(Feed 6 axes + Cs axis)

Basic
1path
simultaneously
controlled axes 2path
2 axes
2 axes
2 axes per path
2 axes per path
Simultaneously 1path
controlled axes
expansion
2path
(total)
Max. 6 axes
Max. 6 axes
Item
M series
T series
No. of basic
1path
controlled axes
2path
3 axes
2 axes
2 axes per path

expansion
(total)
2path
Max. 6 axes
Max. 6 axes

Basic
1path
simultaneously
controlled axes 2path
2 axes
2 axes
2 axes per path
controlled axes
expansion
2path
(total)
Max. 4 axes
Max. 4 axes
Item
M series
T series
No. of basic
1path
controlled axes
3 axes
2 axes

expansion
(total)
Max. 4 axes
Max. 4 axes
Basic
1path
simultaneously
controlled axes
2 axes
2 axes
controlled axes
expansion
(total)
Max. 4 axes
Max. 4 axes
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Series 20i
Item
F series
M series
Number of
One
basic controlled path
axes
Three axes
Two axes
Total number of One

controlled axes path
including
extensions
Up to four axes
Up to two axes
Number of
One
basic
path
simultaneously
controlled axes
Three axes
Two axes
Total number of One

simultaneously path
controlled axes
including
extensions
Up to four axes
Up to two axes
Parameter
1010
Number of CNCcontrolled axes
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again
so that the setting will take effect.
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., the number of controlled axes
Set the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by the CNC.
[Example] Suppose that the first axis is the X axis, and the second and subsequent
axes are the Y, Z, A, B, and C axes in that order, and that they are
controlled as follows:
X, Y, Z, and A axes: Controlled by the CNC and PMC
B and C axes: Controlled by the PMC
Then set this parameter to 4 (total 4: X, Y, Z, and A)
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
015
Message
Description
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED

(M series)
The number of the commanded axes

exceeded that of simultaneously controlled axes. Correct the program.
TOO MANY AXES

COMMANDED
An attempt was made to move the machine along the axes, but the number of
the axes exceeded the specified number of axes controlled simultaneously.
Alternatively, in a block where the skip
function activated by the torquelimit
reached signal (G31 P99/P98) was
specified, either moving the machine
along an axis was not specified, or
moving the machine along multiple
axes was specified. Specify movement
only along one axis.
(T series)
Note
NOTE
When the 9 CRT is fitted, the overall position display screen
and the position display screen for manual handle interrupt
can display up to eight axes. The positions of the 9th and
10th axes are not displayed on these screens when used
with 2path control having nine or more axes.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(For Machining Center)
(B63014EN)
II.2.1
Controlled Axes
OPERATORS MANUAL
(For Lathe) (B63004EN)
II.2.1
Controlled Axes
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.2.1
Controlled Axes
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.1
Controlled Axes
OPERATORS MANUAL
(For Milling) (B63384EN)
II.2.1
Controlled Axes
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.1
Controlled Axes
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.2
SETTING EACH AXIS
1.2.1
Name of Axes
General
Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by the
PMC) must be named. Select and set names from among X, Y, Z, A, B,
C, U, V, and W (with parameter 1020).
The names of the basic axes, however, are fixed (X, Y, and Z for the M
series and X and Z for the T series). The names of additional axes can be
selected, as desired, from the names other than those for the basic axes.
The same name cannot be assigned to more than one axis.
With 2path control, the name of basic axis for one path is fixed; the
names of additional axes can be optionally selected from axes names
except axes names of basic axes by using parameter No. 1020. For one
path, the same axis name cannot be assigned to multiple axes, but the
same axis name can be used with the other path.
Parameter
1020
Name of the axis used for programming for each axis
[Data type] Byte axis

Set the name of the program axis for each control axis, with one of the
values listed in the following table:
Axis
name
Set value
Axis name
Set value
Axis name
Set value
88
85
65
89
86
66
90
87
67
NOTE
1 In the T series, when G code system A is used, neither U,
V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G code
system B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axis
names.
2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.
3 When the secondary auxiliary function is provided, address
used for the secondary auxiliary function (address B in the
T series, address set in parameter No. 3460 in the M series)
cannot be used as an axis name. In the T series, when CCR,
#4 of parameter 3405, is set to 1, address A and C may not
be used with functions such as chamfering, corner R, or
direct drawing dimensions programming.
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
With 2path control, when information (such as the current
position) about each axis is displayed on the screen, an axis
name may be followed by a subscript to indicate a path
number (e.g.,X1 and X2). This is an axis name to help the
user to easily understand which path an axis belongs to.
When writing a program, the user must specify X, Y, Z, U,
V, W, A, B, and C without attaching a subscript.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.2.2
NAMES OF AXES
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.2
NAMES OF AXES
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.2.2
NAMES OF AXES
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.2
NAMES OF AXES
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.2.2
Increment System
General
The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input ) and
least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the
least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command
increment is the least increment for moving the tool on the machine. Both
increments are represented in mm, inches, or degrees.
The increment system is classified into ISB and ISC (Tables 1.2.2(a)
and 1.2.2 (b)). Select ISB or ISC using bit 1 (ISC) of parameter 1004.
When selecting ISC, the option of increment system 1/10 is necessary.
Table 1.2.2 (a) Increment system ISB

Least input increment
Metric
system
t
machine
mm
i
input
t
inch
i
input
t
Inch
system
t
machine
mm
i
input
t
inch
i
input
t
Least command increment
0.001mm(Diameter)
0.0005mm
0.001mm(Radius)
0.001mm
0.001deg
0.001deg
0.0001inch(Diameter)
0.0005mm
0.0001inch(Radius)
0.001mm
0.001deg
0.001deg
0.001mm(Diameter)
0.00005inch
0.001mm(Radius)
0.0001inch
0.001deg
0.001deg
0.00005inch
0.0001inch(Radius)
0.0001inch
0.001deg
0.001deg
Table 1.2.2 (b) Increment system ISC

Metric
system
t
machine
mm
i
input
t
inch
i
input
t
Inch
system
t
machine
mm
i
input
t
inch
i
input
t
0.0001mm(Diameter)
0.00005mm
0.0001mm(Radius)
0.0001mm
0.0001deg
0.0001deg
0.00005mm
0.00001inch(Radius)
0.0001mm
0.0001deg
0.0001deg
0.0001mm(Diameter)
0.000005inch
0.0001mm(Radius)
0.00001inch
0.0001deg
0.0001deg
0.000005inch
0.00001inch(Radius)
0.00001inch
0.0001deg
0.0001deg
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Diameter programming is used only for T series. Whether
diameter programming or radius programming is used is
selected by parameter DIAx (No. 1006#3) on each axis.
Also, parameter IPR (No. 1004#7) can make the least input
increment of ISB and ISC ten times the least command
increment on each axis.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
INI
#1
#0
#3
#2
#1
#0
INM
0000
Setting entry is acceptable.

[Data type] Bit
INI Unit of input
0 : In mm
1 : In inches
#7
#6
#5
#4
1001
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0 : In mm (metric system machine)
1 : In inches (inch system machine)
1004
#7
IPR
#6
#5
#4
IPR
#3
#2
#1
ISC
#0
ISC
ISA
NOTE
[Data type] Bit
ISA
Least input increment and

Symbol
ISC

least command increment
ISA, ISC The least input increment and least command increment are set.
0.001mm, 0.001deg, or 0.0001inch
0.01mm, 0.01deg, or 0.001inch
IS-A
0.0001mm, 0.0001deg, or 0.00001inch
IS-C
IS-B
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
ISA cannot be used at present.
IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value 10 times as
large as the least command increment is specified, in increment systems
of ISB and ISC, mm input.
0 : The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as large as the
least command increment.
1 : The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large as the least
command increment.
If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows:

Input increment
IS-B
0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.0001 inch
IS-C
0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.00001 inch
NOTE
For ISA, the least input increment cannot be set to a value
10 times as large as the least command increment.
When inch of input is specified, the least input increment
does not become 10 times as large as the least command
increment.
#7
#6
#5
#4
1006
#3
DIAx
#2
#1
#0
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
[Data type] Bit axis

DIAx Either a diameter or radius is set to be used for specifying the amount of
travel on each axis.
0 : Radius
1 : Diameter
1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.2.3
Increment System
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.3
Increment System
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.2.3
Increment System
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.3
Increment System
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.3
Increment System
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.2.3
Increment System
1.2.3
Specifying the Rotation
Axis
General
Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter 1006 can be used to set each axis to a linear
axis or rotation axis. Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter 1006 can be used to select
the rotation axis type, A or B, for each axis. See the explanation of the
parameters for details of types A and B.
When the roll over function is used, the values displayed for absolute
coordinates are rounded by the shift amount per rotation, as set in
parameter No. 1260. This can prevent coordinates for the rotation axis
from overflowing. Displayed values for relative coordinates are also
rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008 is set to 1. The rollover function is enabled by
setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter 1008 to 1.
For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has moved are
values rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation set in
parameter No. 1260. The tool moves in the direction in which the final
coordinates are closest when bit 1 of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0. For
an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in the
command.
10
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1006
#1
ROSx
#0
ROTx
NOTE
ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis.
#7
ROSx
ROTx
Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(Not rounded in 0 to 360)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type
(Refer to parameter No. 3624)
Rotation axis (A type)

(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values
are rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0
and #2.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in
the reference position return direction and the move
amount does not exceed one rotation.
Setting is invalid (unused)
Rotation axis (B type)

(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values
and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not
rounded in 0 to 360_)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer
to parameter No. 3624)
(4) The rotation axis roll over function and index table indexing function (M series) cannot be used.
#6
Meaning
#5
1008
#4
#3
#2
RRLx
#1
RABx
#0
ROAx
NOTE
ROAx The rollover function of a rotation axis is
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
11
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1 : Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
RRLx Relative coordinates are

0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
1260
Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis
NOTE
1 After setting the parameter, turn off the power once and turn
it on again to operate the machine.
2 This parameter is valid only when ROAx = 1.
[Data type] Twoword axis
[Unit of data] Increment system
Unit of data
Standard value
ISA
0.01 deg
36000
ISB
0.001 deg
360000
ISC
0.0001 deg
3600000
[Valid data range] 1000 to 9999999
Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis.
12
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
Rotary axis rollover function cannot be used together with
the indexing function of the index table.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.20.2
Rotary Axis Rollover
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.20.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.18.1
13
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.2.4
Controlled Axes
Detach
General
These signals release the specified control axes from control.

When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), these
signals are selected according to whether the attachments are mounted.
The signals can also be used for switching the C axis and spindle on lathes.
When multiple rotary tables are used in turn, the tables must use motors
of the same model. Absolute pulse coders cannot be used.
Signal
Controlled axis detach

signals
DTCH1 DTCH8 <G124>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals detach the control axes from control.
These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed number of the
signal name shows the control axis number.
DTCH 1
1 ..... The 1st axis is detached.
2 ..... The 2nd axis is detached.
:
:
:
:
8 ..... The 8th axis is detached.
[Operation] When the signals are 1, the control unit operates as follows:
1) Position control is not executed at all. Servo motor excitation is cut.
2) Servo alarm on the axis is ignored.
3) Axis interlock signal is assumed to be zero on the detached axis.
4) A command for automatic or manual operation is effective for the axis,
but do not execute the command. The command is accepted but the
operation is restrained, because the axis interlock is 0. In an automatic
operation, the execution may stop and hold at the block.
5) Position display also displays the position of the detached axis.
14
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Controlled axis detach

status signals
MDTCH1 MDTCH8
<F110>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals notify the PMC that the corresponding axes have been
released from control.
These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed number of the
signal name shows the control axis number.
MDTCH 1
1 ..... The 1st axis is detached.
2 ..... The 2nd axis is detached.
:
:
:
:
8 ..... The 8th axis is detached.
[Output condition] These signals are 1 in the following case:
When the corresponding axes are released from control
These signals are 0 in the following case:
When the corresponding axes are under control
Signal address
G124
#7
DTCH8
#6
DTCH7
#5
DTCH6
#4
DTCH5
#3
DTCH4
#2
DTCH3
#1
DTCH2
#0
DTCH1
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F110
MDTCH8 MDTCH7 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1
Parameter
0012
#7
RMVx
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0

RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis
0 : Not released
1 : Released
NOTE
RMVx is valid when RMBx in parameter 1005 is 1.
1005
#7
RMBx
#6
MCCx
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0

RMBx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis (signal input
and setting input)
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
15
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
MCCx When an axis is released from control, control for the MCC signal for the
corresponding servo amplifier is
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
If the servo motor for an axis is connected to a 2axis or
other multiaxis amplifier, releasing the axis from control
causes servo alarm 401 (V ready off) to be output. This
alarm can be disabled by this parameter. When the servo
motor is disconnected from the CNC, however, servo alarm
401 is output, regardless of the value of the parameter, due
to the nature of multiaxis amplifier.
Caution
CAUTION
When a 2axis or 3axis amplifier is used, releasing only
one axis from control results in the output of servo alarm 401
(V ready off). Use 1axis amplifiers for those axes to be
released from control, e.g., by replacing the rotary table.
Note
NOTE
1 Controlled axis detach signals DTCH1 <G124#0>, DTCH2
<G124#1>, DTCH3 <G124#2>, can be changed from 1
to 0 or from 0 to 1 when the power is first turned on or when
no movement is being executed along the corresponding
axis. If these signals are changed from 0 to 1 when the tool
is moving along the corresponding axis, the axis is released
from control upon completion of the movement.
2 For these signals to be attached, parameter No. 1005#7
must be set, indicating the axes are detachable.
3 Setting parameter No. 0012#7 from the MDI panel detaches
the axes in the same way as these signals.
4 Those axes that are released from control lose their
reference positions. Reference position return must,
therefore, be performed for the axes prior to executing move
commands for the axes. Specifying a move command
before reference position return has been performed
causes alarm 224 to be output (the alarm can be disabled
by setting bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter 1005).
16
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.2.5
Outputting the
Movement State of an
Axis
General
The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC.
Signal
Axis moving signals

MV1 MV8 <F102>
[Function] These signals indicate that a control axis is moving.
The signals are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
MV 1
1 ..... The 1st axis is moving.
2 ..... The 2nd axis is moving.
3 ..... The 3rd axis is moving.
:
:
:
:
[Output condition] The signals turn to 1 in the following cases:
. The corresponding axis has started moving.
. In manual handle feed mode, the handle feed axis of the corresponding
axis has been selected.
The signals turn to 0 in the following case:
. When the move command for the corresponding axis has been
distributed (when bit 6 (MVX) of parameter 3003 is 0)
. When deceleration for the corresponding axis has been completed and
the axis is set to the inposition condition. If inposition check is not
performed, when the deceleration for the corresponding axis is
completed. (When bit 6 (MVX) of parameter 3003 is 1)
Setting 1 in bit 7 (MVG) of parameter 3003 prevents these signals from
being output during drawing in dynamic graphics mode (drawing without
movement of the machine) in the T system.
17
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Axis moving direction

signals
MVD1 MVD8 <F106>
[Function] These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name
corresponds to the control axis number.
MVD 1
1 ..... The moving direction of the 1st axis is minus.
2 ..... The moving direction of the 2nd axis is minus.
3 ..... The moving direction of the 3rd axis is minus.
:
:
:
:
[Output condition] 1 indicates the corresponding axes are moving in the minus direction,
and 0 indicates they are moving in the plus direction.
CAUTION
These signals maintain their existing condition during a
stop, indicating the direction of the axes movement before
being stopped.
Signal address
F102
#7
MV8
#6
MV7
#5
MV6
#4
MV5
#3
MV4
#2
MV3
#1
MV2
#0
MV1
F106
MVD8
MVD7
MVD6
MVD5
MVD4
MVD3
MVD2
MVD1
#7
MVG
#6
MVX
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter
Setting the output format

of the axis moving signal
3003
MVX
[Data type] Bit

MVX The axis moving signal is set to 0 when:
0 : Distribution for the axis is completed. (The signal is set to 0 in
deceleration.)
1 : Deceleration of the axis is terminated, and the current position is in the
inposition.
When the decelerationtime inposition check is suppressed by
setting bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601, the signal is set to 0 at the
end of deceleration.
MVG While drawing using the dynamic graphics function (with no machine
movement), the axis moving signal is:
0: Output
1: Not output
18
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
Axis moving signals and axis moving direction signals are
output in both automatic and manual operations.
1.2.6
Mirror Image
General
Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by

parameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions are
reversed during automatic operation along axes to which a mirror image
is applied.
When MI1 signal turned to 1 at point A
Mirror image (Example for T series)
However, the following directions are not reversed:

Direction of manual operation and direction of movement, from the
intermediate position to the reference position during automatic
reference position return (for the M and T series)
Approach direction for single direction positioning (G60) and shift
direction for boring cycles (G76 and G87) (for M series only)
Mirror image check signals indicate whether mirror image is applied to
each axis. System variable #3007 contains the same information (refer
to the operators manual).
Signal
Mirror image signal

MI1 MI8 <G106>
[Function] Apply mirror image to the specified axes.
[Operation] Apply mirror image to those axes for which the signals are 1.
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a onetoone basis.
A number appended to a signal represents the controlled axis number.
19
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
MI 1
1 ..... Applies mirror image to the 1st axis.
2 ..... Applies mirror image to the 2nd axis.
3 ..... Applies mirror image to the 3rd axis.
:
:
:
:
The mirror image signal can be turned to 1 in the following cases:

a) During offset cancel;
b) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the
feed hold state.
Mirror image check

signal
MMI1 MMI8<F108>
[Function] These signals indicate the mirror image condition of each axis. The mirror
image is set by taking the logical sum of the signal from the MDI panel
and the input signal of the machine tool, then relaying the information to
the machine tool.
These signals are provided for every control axis; the numeral in the signal
name indicates the relevant control axis number.
MMI 1
1 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 1st axis
2 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 2nd axis
3 ..... Mirror image is applied to the 3rd axis
:
:
:
:
[Output condition] These signals turn to 1 when:
Mirror image signal MIn of the corresponding axis is 1; or

Mirror image of the corresponding axis is turned on by setting data
from the MDI panel.
These signals turn to 0 when:
Mirror image signal (MIn) of the corresponding axis is 0 and the

setting of the mirror image in the control unit is turned off.
Signal address
G106
#7
MI8
#6
MI7
#5
MI6
#4
MI5
#3
MI4
#2
MI3
#1
MI2
#0
MI1
F108
#7
MMI8
#6
MMI7
#5
MMI6
#4
MMI5
#3
MMI4
#2
MMI3
#1
MMI2
#0
MMI1
20
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
0012
#0
MIRx

MIRx Mirror image for each axis
0 : Mirror image is off.
1 : Mirror image is on.
Warning
WARNING
1 When programmable mirror image and ordinary mirror
image are specified at the same time, programmable mirror
image is applied first.
2 No programmable mirror image affects mirror image check
signals MMI1 to MMI8 <F108>.
Caution
CAUTION
Even when the mirror image is applied, commands which do
not actuate mirror image (such as automatic reference
position return and manual operation) do not affect mirror
image check signals MMI1 to MMI8 <F108>.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.4.9
Mirror Image
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.7
Mirror Image
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.4.8
Mirror Image
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.7
Mirror Image
21
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.2.7
Followup
General
When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servo
is off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine is
moved, a positional error occurs. Followup is a function for changing
the current position of the CNC and reset the error counter to zero,
assuming a command corresponding to the error has been specified.
You can select whether to perform followup for axes for which the servo
is turned off.
Followup is always performed during emergency stop or a servo alarm.
When followup is not

performed for the axes
for which the servo is
turned off
When signal *FLWU is 1 or bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter 1819 is 1,

followup is not performed. The error is added to the error counter as a
servo error. In this case, the machine moves to compensate for the error
when the servo off signal changes to 0.
In general, followup is not used if the machine is mechanically clamped
when position control is disabled for the controlled axes.
When followup is
performed for the axes
for which the servo is
turned off
When *FLWU is 0, the follow-up function is engaged. The present

position of the CNC is changed to reset the error counter to zero. The
machine tool remains in a deviated position, but since the present position
of the CNC changes correspondingly, the machine moves to the correct
position when the absolute command is next applied.
In general, followup should be used when motors are driven by
mechanical handles.
Signal
Followup signal
*FLWU <G007#5>
[Function] Select whether to perform followup when the servo is turned off for those
axes for which bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter 1819 is 0.
[Operation] 0: Performs followup.
1: Does not perform followup.
Signal address
#7
G007
#6
#5
*FLWU
22
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
1819
#3
#2
#1
#0
FUPx

FUPx To perform followup when the servo is off is set for each axis.
0 : The followup signal, *FLWU, determines whether followup is
performed or not.
When *FLWU is 0, followup is performed.
When *FLWU is 1, followup is not performed.
1 : Followup is not performed.
CAUTION
When the index table indexing function (M series) is used,
be sure to set FUPx of the 4th axis to 1.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
1.2.8
23
Servo Off (Mechanical handle)
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.2.8
Servo Off
(Mechanical Handle)
General
Place the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop the current
to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the
position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position
is not lost.
These signals are used to prevent the servo motors from overloading when
the tools on the axes are mechanically clamped under certain machining
conditions on the machine, or to move the machine by driving the motors
by mechanical handles.
Signal
Servo off signal

SVF1 SVF8 <G126>
[Function] Select whether to place each axis in the servo off state.
These signals are provided for the controlled axes on a onetoone basis.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
SVF 1
1 ..... Servo off for the first axis
2 ..... Servo off for the second axis
3 ..... Servo off for the third axis
:
:
[Operation] These signals place those axes for which the signals are 1 in the servo off
state (the current to the servo motor is stopped), thus disabling position
control. However, the position detection feature continues to function, so
the current position is not lost.
Signal address
G126
#7
SVF8
#6
SVF7
#5
SVF6
24
#4
SVF5
#3
SVF4
#2
SVF3
#1
SVF2
#0
SVF1
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off
signal for that axis is 1.
2 When one of these signals turns to 1, the servo motor is
turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the
auxiliary function. Set the timing for the auxiliary function,
mechanical clamp and servo off signals as shown in the
diagram below. The clamp command auxiliary function
should be executed only after the distribution end signal
(DEN) turned to 1.
Clamp command
MF
Machine
clamp
Unclamp command
Servo off state
SVF1, ...
FIN
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
1.2.7
25
Followup
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.2.9
Position Switch
General
Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine
coordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges.
Signal
Position switch signal

PSW01 PSW10
<F070#0 F071#1>
[Function] Notifies that the machine coordinates along the controlled axes specified
by parameters (6910 to 6919) are within the ranges specified by
parameters (6930 to 6939 and 6950 to 6959). Up to ten position switch
signals can be output.
[Output condition] These signals are 1 in the following case:
When the machine coordinates along the controlled axes are within the
specified ranges.
These signals are 0 in the following case:
When the machine coordinates along the controlled axes are not within
the specified ranges.
Signal address
F070
#7
PSW08
#6
PSW07
#5
PSW06
F071
26
#4
PSW05
#3
PSW04
#2
PSW03
#1
PSW02
#0
PSW01
PSW10
PSW09
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Setting the
correspondence
between the position
switch signals and the
controlled axes
6910
Axis corresponding to the first position switch
6911
Axis corresponding to the second position switch
6912
Axis corresponding to the third position switch
6913
Axis corresponding to the fourth position switch
6914
Axis corresponding to the fifth position switch
6915
Axis corresponding to the sixth position switch
6916
Axis corresponding to the seventh position switch
6917
Axis corresponding to the eighth position switch
6918
Axis corresponding to the ninth position switch
6919
Axis corresponding to the tenth position switch
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, . . . , control axis count
These parameters specify the controlaxes numbers corresponding to the
first through tenth position switch functions. A corresponding position
switch signal is output to PMC when the machine coordinate value of a
corresponding axis is within the range that is set using a parameter.
NOTE
Set 0 for those position switch numbers that are not to be
used.
27
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Setting the machine

coordinate ranges for
which the position
switch signals are output
Maximum operation
range
6930
Maximum operation range of the first position switch
6931
Maximum operation range of the second position switch
6932
Maximum operation range of the third position switch
6933
Maximum operation range of the fourth position switch
6934
Maximum operation range of the fifth position switch
6935
Maximum operation range of the sixth position switch
6936
Maximum operation range of the seventh position switch
6937
Maximum operation range of the eighth position switch
6938
Maximum operation range of the ninth position switch
6939
Maximum operation range of the tenth position switch
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
[Valid data range] 99999999 to +99999999
These parameters set the maximum operation range of the first through
tenth position switches.
28
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Minimum operation
range
6950
Minimum operation range of the first position switch
6951
Minimum operation range of the second position switch
6952
Minimum operation range of the third position switch
6953
Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch
6954
Minimum operation range of the fifth position switch
6955
Minimum operation range of the sixth position switch
6956
Minimum operation range of the seventh position switch
6957
Minimum operation range of the eighth position switch
6958
Minimum operation range of the ninth position switch
6959
Minimum operation range of the tenth position switch
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
These parameters set the minimum operation range of the first through
tenth position switches.
29
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.3
ERROR
COMPENSATION
1.3.1
Stored Pitch Error
Compensation
General
If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can
be compensated in detection unit per axis.
Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation position at the
intervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is the
reference position to which the tool is returned.
Pitch error compensation data can be set with external devices such as the
Handy File (see Operators manual). Compensation data can also be set
directly with the MDI panel.
The following parameters must be set for pitch error compensation. Set
the pitch error compensation value for each pitch error compensation
position number set by these parameters.
In the following example, 33 is set for the pitch error compensation
number at the reference position.
Pitch error compensation value (absolute value)
Compensation number for
the compensation position
having the largest value
(No. 3622)
Compensation number for the

reference position (No. 3620)
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Reference position
Compensationmagnification
parameter (No. 3623)
Compensation number for the

compensation position having the
smallest value (No. 3621)
Compensation interval
parameter (No. 3624)
Compensation
position number
31
32
33
34
35
Compensation
value to be set
+1
+1
+1
+2
36
1
37
3
Number of the pitch error compensation position at the reference

position (for each axis): Parameter 3620
Number of the pitch error compensation position having the smallest
value (for each axis): Parameter 3621
Number of the pitch error compensation position having the largest
value (for each axis): Parameter 3622
Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis): Parameter
3623
30
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each axis):

Parameter 3624
Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data
1 Set the following parameters:
Number of the pitch error compensation position at the
reference position (for each axis): Parameter 3620
Number of the pitch error compensation position having the

smallest value (for each axis): Parameter 3621
Number of the pitch error compensation position having the

largest value (for each axis): Parameter 3622
Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis):

Parameter 3623
Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each

axis): Parameter 3624
2 Press function key
PITCH
Continuous menu key
SYSTEM
3 Press the continuous menu key

, then press chapter selection soft
key [PITCH].
The following screen is displayed:
PITERROR SETTING
NO.
0000
0001
0002
0003
(X)0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
DATA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O0000 N00000
NO.
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
DATA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NO.
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
DATA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
> _
MEM **** *** ***
16:05:59
[ NO.SRH ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ]
4 Move the cursor to the compensation position number to be set in

either of the following ways:
Enter the compensation position number and press the

[NO.SRH] soft key.
Move the cursor to the compensation position number using the
PAGE
page keys,
and
PAGE
and
, and cursor keys,
5 Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [INPUT] soft key.
31
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Explanations
D Specifying the
compensation position
D Compensation position
number
To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positive
direction or the negative direction in reference to the compensation
position No. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceeds the
specified range on either the positive direction or the negative direction,
the pitch error compensation does not apply beyond the range.
1024 compensation positions from No. 0 to 1023 are available on the
pitch error setting screen. Assign arbitrary positions for each axis using
parameters.
The number of the compensation position at the reference position
(parameter 3620), number of the compensation position having the
smallest value (parameter 3621), and number of the compensation
position having the largest value (parameter 3622) must be set for each
axis.
The name of each axis is displayed before the smallest compensation
position number on the pitch error setting screen.
Examples
For linear axis
Machine stroke: 400 mm to +800 mm

Interval between the pitch error compensation positions: 50 mm
No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 40
If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in
the negative direction is as follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position (Machine
stroke on the negative side/Interval between the compensation
positions) + 1
= 40 400/50 + 1= 33
No. of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is as
follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position + (Machine
stroke on the positive side/Interval between the compensation
positions)
= 40 + 800/50= 56
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the
compensation position No. is as follows:
400 350 100
50
50
100
750
800
Machine
coordinate (mm)
Compensation
position number.
33
39
40
41
42
Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by
32
56
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Therefore, set the parameters as follows:

Parameter
Setting value
3620 : Compensation number for the reference position
40
3621 : Smallest compensation position number
33
3622 : Largest compensation position number
56
3623 : Compensation magnification
3624 : Interval between pitch error compensation positions
50000
The compensation amount is output at the compensation position No.

corresponding to each section between the coordinates.
The following is an example of the compensation amounts.
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
No
Compensation
2 1 1 +2 0 +1 0 +1 +2 +1 0 1 1 2 0 +1 +2
value
56
1
Pitch error compensation value

(absolute value)
+4
+3
+2
+1
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
0
400 300
200 100
200
300
400
1 100
2
Reference
position
3
4
33
(mm)
1. AXIS CONTROL
D For rotary axis
B63003EN1/02
Amount of movement per rotation: 360

Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45
No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 60
If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in
the negative direction for the rotating axis is always equal to the
compensation position No. of the reference position.
The No. of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is
as follows:
No. of the compensation position of the reference position + (Move
amount per rotation/Interval between the compensation positions)
= 60 + 360/45= 68
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the
compensation position No. is as follows:
0.0
Reference position
45.0
(62)
(61)
315.0
(68)
(60)
(67)
(+)
90.0
270.0
(63)
(66)
(64)
(65)
135.0
225.0
180.0
Compensation values are output at the positions indicated by
Therefore, set the parameters as follows:
Parameter
Setting value
3620 : Compensation number for the reference position
60
3621 : Smallest compensation position number
60
3622 : Largest compensation position number
68
3623 : Compensation magnification
3624 : Interval between pitch error compensation positions
45000
If the sum of the compensation values for positions 61 to 68 is not 0, pitch

error compensation values are accumulated for each rotation, causing
positional deviation.
The same value must be set for compensation positions 60 and 68.
34
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
The following is an example of compensation amounts.

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
No
Compensation
+1 2 +1 +3 1 1 3 +2 +1
value
+4
+3
68
(60)
Pitch error compensation value

(absolute value)
Reference position
+2
+1
61 62 63 64 65 66 67
45 90 135 180 225 270 315
1
68
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 (60) 61 62
0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 0 45 90 (deg)
2
3
4
Parameter
3620
Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position
for each axis
NOTE
[Data type] Word axis

[Unit of data] Number
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference
position for each axis.
3621
Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative

position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely
negative position for each axis.
35
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
3622
Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis
NOTE
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely
positive position for each axis.
NOTE
This value must be larger than set value of parameter (No.
3620).
3623
Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis
NOTE
[Unit of data] 1
Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis.
If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is used
for the compensation data.
3624
Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis
NOTE
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
36
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02

The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equally spaced.
Set the space between two adjacent positions for each axis.
The minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is
limited and obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation positions = maximum
feedrate (rapid traverse rate)/3750
Unit:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation positions: mm, inches,

deg.
Maximum feed rate: mm/min, inch/min, deg/min
[Example] When the maximum rapid traverse rate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum
interval between pitch error compensation positions is 4 mm.
Warning
WARNING
1 Compensation value range
Compensation values can be set within the range from 7
x compensation magnification (detection unit) to +7 x
compensation magnification (detection unit).
The
compensation magnification can be set for each axis within
the range from 0 to 100 in parameter 3623.
2 Intervals of compensation positions
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with
equally spaced. Set the space between two adjacent
positions for each axis to the parameter (No. 3624).
3 Pitch error compensation of the rotary axis
For the rotating axis, the interval between the pitch error
compensation positions shall be set to one per integer of the
amount of movement (normally 360) per rotation. The sum
of all pitch error compensation amounts per rotation must be
made to 0. Also, set the same compensation value to a
position and the same position with one rotation.
4 Conditions where pitch error compensation is not
performed
Note that the pitch error is not compensated in the following
cases:
When the machine is not returned to the reference
position after turning on the power. This excludes the
case where an absolute position detector is employed.
If the interval between the pitch error compensation
positions is 0.
If the compensation position Nos. on the positive or
negative direction do not fall within the range of 0 to
1023.
If the compensation position Nos. do not conform to the
following relationship:
Negative side x Reference position < Positive side
37
1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.8.6.3
Inputting pitch error compensation data
III.8.6.4
Outputting pitch error compensation data
III.11.5.2 Displaying and setting pitch error

compensation data
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.6.3
III.8.6.4

compensation data
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.8.6.3
III.8.6.4

compensation data
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.6.3
III.8.6.4

compensation data
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.6.3
III.8.6.4

compensation data
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.6.3
III.8.6.4

compensation data
38
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.3.2
Backlash
Compensation
General
Backlash compensation
Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a

compensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to
" 9999 pulses for each axis.
for each rapid traverse
and cutting feed
More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlash

compensating value depending on the feedrate, the rapid traverse or the
cutting feed.
Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be A and the measured backlash
at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensating value is shown below
depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed or rapid traverse) and
the change of the direction of movement.
Cutting feed to
cutting feed
Rapid traverse
to rapid traverse
Same direction
Opposite direction
" A
Change of feedrate
Rapid traverse
to cutting feed
Cutting feed to
rapid traverse
Change of direction
of movement
"
" B
" (* )
"
" (B+)
(B+)
@ a = (AB)/2
@ The positive or negative direction for compensating values is the
direction of movement.
Stopped during cutting feed
Stopped during rapid traverse
a : Overrun
@ Assign the measured backlash at cutting feed (A) in parameter No.

1851 and that at rapid traverse (B) in parameter No. 1852.
39
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1800
#4
RBK
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid
traverse
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
1851
Backlash compensating value for each axis

[Unit of data] Detection unit
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When RBK is 1, set the backlash compensating value for cutting feed.
When the machine moves in the direction opposite to the reference
position return direction after the power is turned on, the first backlash
compensation is performed.
1852
Backlash compensating value used for rapid traverse for each axis

Set the backlash compensating value used in rapid traverse for each axis.
This parameter is valid when RBK is set to 1.
Caution
CAUTION
The backlash compensation for each rapid traverse and
cutting feed is not performed until the first reference position
return is completed after the power is turned on. Under this
state, the normal backlash compensation is performed
according to the value specified in parameter No. 1851
irrespective of a rapid traverse and a cutting feed.
Note
NOTE
When backlash compensation is applied separately for
cutting feed and rapid traverse, jog feed is regarded as
cutting feed.
40
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.3.3
Straightness
Compensation
General
For a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightness between

axes may deteriorate machining accuracy. For this reason, when an axis
moves, other axes are compensated in detection units to improve
straightness. This improvement results in better machining accuracy.
When an axis (parameter Nos. 5711 to 5713) moves, the corresponding
compensation axis (parameter Nos. 5721 to 5723) is compensated.
That is, the compensation axis is compensated at the pitch error
compensation position (See 1.3.1) of the moving axis.
Pitch error compensation points on moving axis

0
60
61
126
127
Machine coordinates for moving axis

a
a, b, c, d
Compensation position numbers of the moving axis

(parameter No. 5501 to 5524)
a, b, g, e Compensation for compensation axis
(parameter No. 5551 to 5574)
The compensation from point a to point b is calculated from the formula:
(ba )/(ba).
Parameter
5711
Axis number of moving axis 1
5712
5713
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.)
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of moving axes.
41
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
5721
Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis 1
5722
5723
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.)
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of compensation axes.
5731
Compensation position number a of moving axis 1
5732
Compensation position number b of moving axis 1
5733
Compensation position number c of moving axis 1
5734
Compensation position number d of moving axis 1
5741
5742
5743
5744
5751
5752
5753
5754
[Data type] Word

(Compensation position numbers in stored pitch error compensation)
Set four compensation positions for each moving axis.
42
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
5761
Compensation corresponding to compensation position number a of moving axis 1
5762
Compensation corresponding to compensation position number b of moving axis 1
5763
Compensation corresponding to compensation position number c of moving axis 1
5764
Compensation corresponding to compensation position number d of moving axis 1
5771
5772
5773
5774
5781
5782
5783
5784
[Data type] Word

Set compensation for each compensation position.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
5046
ILLEGAL PARAMETER
(ST. COMP)
Description
Parameters related to straightness compensation have been erroneously specified.

Possible causes are as follows:
1. Invalid axis numbers have been assigned
to move or compensation axes.
2. The number of pitcherror compensation
positions between the maximum positive
and maximum negative positions exceeds
128.
3. Straightness compensation position numbers have been assigned in other than ascending order.
4. Straightness compensation positions
could not be located between the maximum positive and maximum negative
pitcherror compensation positions.
5. The amount of compensation per compensation position is too large or too small.
43
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 The straightness compensation function can be used after
a moving axis and its compensation axis have returned to
the reference position.
2 After setting parameters for straightness compensation, be
sure to turn off the NC power.
3 Set parameters for straightness compensation according to
the following conditions:
S The compensation at a compensation position must be
within the range 128 to 127.
S Compensation positions must be set so that
ax bx cx d is satisfied.
S Compensation positions must exist between the
compensation position with the largest positive value
and that with the largest negative value in the stored
pitch error compensation data for each axis. Four
compensation positions can be set to 0 at a time. In this
case, compensation is not performed.
4 To add the straightness compensation function option, the
stored pitch error compensation option is needed.
In this case, the number of compensation positions of each
axis between the compensation position with the largest
positive value and that with the largest negative value in the
stored pitch error compensation data must be equal to or
less than 128.
5 Straightness compensation data is superposed on stored
pitch error compensation data and output.
44
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.4
SETTINGS RELATED
TO SERVO
CONTROLLED AXES
The servo interface of the Series 16 features the following:

Digitally controlled AC servo motor
Motor feedback with serial pulse coders
(1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/rev
(2) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 65,536 pulses/rev
(3) Incremental pulse coder with a resolution of 10,000 pulses/rev
Scale feedback with A/B/Z signal interface
1.4.1
Parameters Related to
Servo
General
Explanation of terms frequently used in CNC

The minimum unit of a command to be given from CNC to the
machine tool
Detection unit
The minimum unit which can detect the machine tool position
Command multiplier (CMR)
A constant to enable the weight of CNC command pulses to meet the
weight of pulses from the detector
Detection multiplier (DMR)
A constant to enable the weight of CNC command pulses to meet the
weight of pulses from the detector
CAUTION
The relations among the least command increment,
detection unit, CMR, and DMR are as specified below.
Least command increment = CMR
detection unit
Detection unit =
DMR
Move amount per revolution of motor

number of pulses of detector per revolution
The flexible feed gear function in the digital servo defines

constant DMR using two parameters (Nos. 2084 and 2085)
n and m (DMR = n/m).
45
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1800
#1
CVR
#0
[Data type] Bit

CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position
control ready signal PRDY comes ON
0 : A servo alarm is generated.
1 : A servo alarm is not generated.
#7
#6
1815
#5
APCx
#4
APZx
#3
#2
#1
OPTx
#0
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
OPTx Position detector
0 : A separate pulse coder is not used.
1 : A separate pulse coder is used.
APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the
absolute position detector is used
0 : Not corresponding
1 : Corresponding
WARNING
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary
adjustment is performed or after the absolute position
detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power
must be turned off and on, then manual reference position
return must be performed. This completes the positional
correspondence between the machine position and the
position on the absolute position detector, and sets this
parameter to 1 automatically.
APCx Position detector
0 : Other than absolute position detector
1 : Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
#7
1816
#6
DM3x
#5
DM2x
#4
DM1x
#3
#2
#1
#0
NOTE
46
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplier

Set value
DM3x
DM2x
DM1x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Detection multiplier
m ltiplier
1/2
1
3/2
2
5/2
3
7/2
4
NOTE
When the flexible feed gear is used, do not use these
parameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR
to an appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085
respectively.
1820
Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTE

Set a command multiplier indicating the ratio of the least command
increment to the detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit x command multiplier
Relationship between the increment system and the least command
increment
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
The value set in the parameter is obtained as follows:
(1) When command multiplier is 1/2 to 1/27

1
Set value =
+ 100
(Command multiplier)
Valid data range: 102 to 127
47
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(2) When command multiplier is 1 to 48

Set value = 2
command multiplier
Valid data range: 2 to 96
NOTE
When command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must be
determined so that an integer can be set for command
multiplier.
1821
Reference counter size for each axis

Set the size of the reference counter.
NOTE
1825
Servo loop gain for each axis

[Unit of data] 0.01 s 1
Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
When the machine performs linear and circular interpolation (cutting), the
same value must be set for all axes. When the machine requires
positioning only, the values set for the axes may differ from one another.
As the loop gain increases, the response by position control is improved.
A too large loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of pulses
counted by the error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as follows:
feedrate
Positioning deviation =
60 (loop gain)
Unit : Positioning deviation: mm, inches, or deg
Feedrate: mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min
Loop gain: s1
1828
Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

48
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.

If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during
movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stopped
immediately (as in emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some
margin in this parameter.
1829
Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning
deviation limit set for stopped state, a servo alarm is generated, and
operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
1832
Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis

Set the feed stop positioning deviation for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the feed stop positioning deviation
during movement, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration
control are stopped temporarily. When the positioning deviation drops to
the feed stop positioning deviation or below, pulse distribution and
acceleration/deceleration control are resumed.
The feed stop function is used to reduce overshoot in acceleration/
deceleration mainly by large servo motors.
Generally, set the middle value between the positioning deviation limit
during movement and the positioning deviation at rapid traverse as the
feed stop positioning deviation.
1850
Grid shift for each axis

A grid shift is set for each axis.
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in
this parameter. Up to the maximum value counted by the reference
counter can be specified as the grid shift.
NOTE
49
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.4.2
Absolute Position
Detection
General
Even when the power to the CNC is turned off, a batterypowered pulse
coder stores the current position. No reference position return is required
when the power to the CNC is turned on next.
Parameter
#7
#6
1815
#5
APCx
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NOTE

APCx Position detector
0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
50
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.4.3
FSSB Setting
Overview
Connecting the CNC control section to servo amplifiers via a highspeed

serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one fiber
optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in machine
tool electrical sections.
In a system using the FSSB, it is necessary to set up the following
parameters to specify its axes. (The other parameters should be specified
as usual.)
D Parameter No. 1023
D Parameter No. 1905
D Parameter Nos. 1910 to 1919
D Parameter Nos. 1936 and 1937
These parameters can be specified using the following methods:
1. Manual setting 1
Parameters are defaulted according to the setting of parameter No.
1023. There is no need to specify parameter Nos. 1905, 1910 to 1919,
1936 and 1937. No automatic setting is used. Note that some
functions are unusable.
2. Automatic setting
Axis settings are calculated automatically according to the
interrelationships between axes and amplifiers entered on the FSSB
setting screen. Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and
1937 are specified automatically according to the results of the
calculation.
3. Manual setting 2
Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and 1937 are
specified according to manually entered values. The user must be
totally familiar with the meaning of each parameter before entering
any values.
51
1. AXIS CONTROL
Slave
B63003EN1/02
In an FSSBbased system, a fiber optics cable is used to connect the CNC

to servo amplifiers and pulse modules. These amplifiers and pulse
modules are called slaves. The twoaxis amplifier consists of two slaves,
and the threeaxis amplifier consists of three slaves. The slaves are
numbered 1, 2, ..., 10 (slave number) sequentially, with that nearest to the
CNC starting at number 1.
CNC
Slave
No.
Controlled Program
axis
axis name
number
(No. 1020)
Singleaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
M1
Singleaxis
amplifier
M2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
M1/M2: First/second pulse module
Manual setting 1
The manual setting 1 is usable when the following parameter

specifications made:
Bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 0
Parameter Nos. 1910 to 1919 = all 0s
By manual setting 1, the value set for parameter No. 1023 when the power
is switched on is regarded as a slave number. Specifically, an axis for
which parameter No. 1023 is set to 1 is connected to the amplifier nearest
to the CNC, while an axis for which parameter No. 1023 is set to 2 is
connected to the amplifier nearest but one to the CNC.
CNC

Controlled Program
Servo axis
axis
axis name number
number
(No. 1020) (No. 1023)
52
Twoaxis
amplifier
Singleaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
Singleaxis
amplifier
X
A
Y
Z
B
C
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
By manual setting 1, some of the following functions and values cannot

be used, as described below. They should be used in automatic setting or
manual setting 2.
D No pulse module can be used; hence, no separate position detectors
can be used.
D No number can be skipped in parameter No. 1023; for example,
number 3 cannot be used for any axis unless number 2 is used.
D The following servo functions cannot be used:
Learning control
Highspeed current loop
Highspeed interface axis
Simple electronic gearbox (EGB)
Automatic setting
Automatic setting can be used on the FSSB setting screen, if the following
parameter is set as follows:
On the FSSB setting screen, automatic setting should be enabled by
means of the following procedure:
1. On the amplifier setting screen, specify the axis number of a controlled
axis to be connected to each amplifier.
2. Press the [SETING] soft key. (If a warning message is displayed,
restart from step 1.)
3. On the axis setting screen, specify information about each axis, such
as a pulse module connector No.
4. Press the [SETING] soft key. (If a warning message is displayed,
repeat the procedure, starting from step 3.)
In this way, parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and 1937 are
set according to the results of automatic calculation. In addition, bit 1 of
parameter No. 1902 is set to 1 to indicate that each parameter has been set
up. Switching the power off then back on again causes axis setting to be
performed according to these parameter settings.
For details of the FSSB setting screen, see the FSSB data display and
setting procedure, described below.
NOTE
To use the simple electronic gearbox (EGB), perform EGB
axis setting (parameter No. 7771) before automatic setting
on the FSSB setting screen. Otherwise, automatic setting
cannot be performed correctly.
53
1. AXIS CONTROL
Manual setting 2
B63003EN1/02
If the following parameter is set, manual setting 2 can be used for each
parameter axis setting.
To perform manual setting 2, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to
1919, 1936, and 1937. Refer to the Parameter Manual for the meaning
of each parameter.
Example of axis configuration and manual setting 2
(Refer to the corresponding description for the meaning of each parameter.)
CNC
Controlled Program
axis
axis name
number
(No. 1020)
Pulse
module
connector
No. 1 in the
first module
No. 2 in the
second module
No. 1 in the
second module
(Not used)
No. 2 in the
first module
No. 3 in the
second module
Axis
Singleaxis
amplifier
X
A
Twoaxis
amplifier
Y
Z
Twoaxis
amplifier
M1
Singleaxis
amplifier
M2
No.
1902#0
FMD
1
No.
1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919
0
16
48
40
40
No.
1023
1905#0
FSL
1905#6
PM1
1905#7
PM2
1936
1937
54
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
FSSB display and setting

procedure
Display
The FSSB setting screen displays FSSBbased amplifier and axis

information. This information can also be specified by the operator.
1. Press the
SYSTEM
function key.
2. To display [FSSB], press the
next menu page key several times.
3. Pressing the [FSSB] soft key causes the [AMPLIFIER SETTING]

screen (or the previously selected FSSB setting screen) to appear, with
the following soft keys displayed.
[
AMP
][
AXIS
][ MAINTE ][
][ (OPRT) ]
The FSSB setting screens include: [AMPLIFIER SETTING], [AXIS

SETTING], and [AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE]
Pressing the [AMP] soft key causes the [AMPLIFIER SETTING]
screen to appear.
Pressing the [AXIS] soft key causes the [AXIS SETTING] screen to
appear.
Pressing the [MAINTE] soft key causes the [AMPLIFIER
MAINTENANCE] screen to appear.
(1) Amplifier setting screen
The amplifier setting screen consists of two sections: the first section
displays information about the amplifiers, while the second section
displays information about the pulse modules.
AMPLIFIER SETTING
NO. AMP SERIES
1 A1L
2 A1M
3 A2L
4 A3L
5 A3M
7 A4L
UNIT
SVMHV
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVU
CUR.
40AL
12A
40A
20A
40A
240A
O1000 N00001
AXIS NAME
1
X
2
Y
3
Z
4
A
5
B
6
C
NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB ID

6
M1
A
0000 DETECTOR(8AXES)
8
M2
B
12AB
>_
MDI **** *** ***
13:11:56
[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][
][ (OPRT) ]
The amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:
NO. . . slave number

The numbers of up to ten slaves (up to eight amplifiers and up to
two pulse modules) connected via the FSSB are displayed
sequentially, with the one nearest the CNC being number 1.
55
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
AMP . . . . amplifier type

The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for
amplifier, a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, as
counted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (first
axis) or M (second axis) indicating the placing of the axis in the
amplifier.
D AXIS . . . . controlled axis number
The axis number of each controlled axis specified in parameters
(Nos. 1920 to 1929) is displayed. If a number specified in these
parameters falls outside the range of between 1 and the maximum
number of controlled axes, 0 is displayed.
D NAME . . . controlled axis name
The axis name assigned to a parameter (No. 1020) corresponding
to a particular controlled axis number is displayed. If the controlled
axis number is 0, is displayed.
D The following items are displayed as amplifier information:
S UNIT . . . . . servo amplifier unit type
S SERIES . . . servo amplifier series
S CUR. . . . . . maximum rating current
D The following items are displayed as pulse module information:
S EXTRA
This display consists of the letter M, which stands for pulse
module, and a number indicating the placing of the pulse
module, as counted from that nearest to the CNC.
S TYPE
This display is a letter indicating the type of the pulse module.
S PCB ID
This display consists of four digits indicating the pulse module
ID (hexadecimal). The pulse module ID is followed by
DETECTOR (8AXES) when 8axes pulse module or
DETECTOR (4AXES) when 4axes pulse module.
(2) Axis setting screen
The axis setting screen displays the information shown below:
AXIS SETTING
AXIS NAME
1
X
2
Y
3
Z
4
A
5
B
6
C
AMP
A1L
A1M
A2L
A3L
A3M
A4L
>_
MDI **** *** ***
[ AMP ][ AXIS
M1 M2
0 0
1 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
O1000 N00001
1DSP CS TNDM
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
13:11:56
][ MAINTE ][
][ (OPRT) ]
The axis setting screen displays the following items:

56
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
AXIS . . . . controlled axis number

This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis.
D NAME . . . controlled axis name
D AMP . . . . type of the amplifier connected to each axis
D M1 . . . . . . connector number for pulse module 1
This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 1,
specified in parameter No. 1931.
D M2 . . . . . . connector number for pulse module 2
This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 2,
D 1DSP
This item is the value specified in bit 0 (parameter 1DSP) of
parameter No. 1904. It is 1 for an axis (such as a learning control
axis, highspeed current loop axis, or highspeed interface axis)
that exclusively uses a DSP, which is usually shared by two axes.
D CS . . . . . Cs contour controlled axis
This item is the value specified in parameter No. 1933. It is 1 for
the Cs contour controlled axis.
D TNDM
This item is the number specified in parameter No. 1934.
Consecutive odd and even numbers are displayed for the master
and slave axes for tandem control.
(3) Amplifier maintenance screen
The amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance information
for servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the following two pages,
either of which can be selected by pressing the
AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE
AXIS NAME AMP
SERIES UNIT
1
X A1L
SVMHV
2
Y A1M
SVM
3
Z A2L
SVM
4
A A3L
SVM
5
B A3M
SVM
6
C A4L
SVU
>_
MDI **** *** ***
[ AMP ][ AXIS
57
13:11:56
][ MAINTE ][
PAGE
O1000
AXES
2
2
1
2
2
1
][
or
PAGE
N00001
CUR.
40AL
12A
40A
20A
40A
240A
key.
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE
AXIS NAME
EDITION
1
X
01A
2
Y
01A
3
Z
01A
4
A
02B
5
B
02B
6
C
02B
TEST
970123
970123
970123
970123
970123
970123
>_
MDI **** *** ***
13:11:56
O1000 N00001
MEINTENO.
01
01
01
01
01
01
][
The amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:

D AXIS . . . . . . . . . controlled axis number
D NAME . . . . . . . . controlled axis name
D AMP . . . . . . . . . type of amplifier connected to each axis
D SERIES . . . . . . . servo amplifier series of an amplifier
connected to each axis
D UNIT . . . . . . . . . unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each
axis
D AXES . . . . . . . . . maximum number of axes controlled by an
amplifier connected to each axis
D CUR. . . . . . . . . . maximum rating current for amplifiers
D EDITION . . . . . . unit version number of an amplifier connected
to each axis
D TEST . . . . . . . . . date of test performed on an amplifier
Example) 970123 = January 23, 1997
D MEINTENo. . . engineering change number for an amplifier
Setting
On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenance screen),

pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the following soft keys:
[ SETING ][
][ CANCEL ][
][ INPUT ]
To enter data, place the machine in MDI mode or the emergency stop state,
position the cursor to the point where a desired item is to be input, then
enter the desired data and press the [INPUT] soft key (or the
INPUT
key on
the MDI panel).

When the [SETING] key is pressed after data has been entered, a warning
message is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the data
is satisfactory, the corresponding parameter is set up.
To restore the previous value of a parameter if, for example, an entered
value is incorrect, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
58
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
When the power is switched on, values are read from the parameters and
displayed on the screen.
NOTE
1 For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB setting
screen, do not attempt to enter values on the parameter
screen using the MDI or a G10 command. Use only the
FSSB screen to enter values for these parameters.
2 If pressing the [SETING] key results in a warning message
being displayed, retry data entry, or press the [CANCEL] key
to clear the warning message. Note that pressing the reset
key does not clear the warning message.
(1) Amplifier setting screen
AMPLIFIER SETING
NO. AMP SERIES
1 A1L
2 A1M
3 A2L
4 A3L
5 A3M
7 A4L
UNIT
SVMHV
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVU
CUR.
40AL
12A
40A
20A
40A
240A
O1000 N00001
AXIS NAME
1
X
2
Y
3
Z
4
A
5
B
6
C
NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB ID

6
M1
A
0000 DETECTOR(8AXES)
8
M2
B
12AB
>_
MDI **** *** ***
13:11:56
][ (OPRT) ]
The amplifier setting screen displays the following items:

D AXIS . . . controlled axis number
For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum number
of controlled axes. If a number that falls outside this range is
entered, the warning message FORMAT ERROR appears. If the
entered controlled axis number is duplicate or 0, the warning
message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE appears when the [SETING]
soft key is pressed to assert the entered value. In this case, no value
can be entered for the parameter.
59
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(2) Axis setting screen

AXIS SETTING
AXIS NAME
1
X
2
Y
3
Z
4
A
5
B
6
C
AMP
A1L
A1M
A2L
A3L
A3M
A4L
>_
MDI **** *** ***
[ SETING ][
M1 M2
0 0
1 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
O1000 N00001
1DSP CS TNDM
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
13:11:56
][ CANCEL ][
][ INPUT ]
On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:

D M1 . . . connector number for pulse module 1
For an axis that uses pulse module 1, enter a connector number
using a number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number
of axes for pulse module 1. When pulse module 1 need not be used,
enter 0. If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the
message FORMAT ERROR is displayed.
D M2 . . . connector number for pulse module 2
For an axis that uses pulse module 2, enter a connector number
using a number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number
of axes for pulse module 2. When pulse module 2 need not be used,
enter 0. If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the
message FORMAT ERROR is displayed.
D 1DSP
Enter 1 for the following axes, each of which exclusively uses a
DSP, which is usually shared by two axes. If a number other than
0 or 1 is entered, the message FORMAT ERROR is displayed.
S Learning control axis
S Highspeed current loop axis
S Highspeed interface axis
D CS . . Cs contour controlled axis
Enter 1 for the Cs contour controlled axis. If a number other than
0 or 1 is entered, the message FORMAT ERROR is displayed.
D TNDM
Enter odd and even numbers for the master and slave axes for
tandem control. These numbers must be consecutive and in the
range of between 1 and 8. If a number that falls outside the valid
range is entered, the message FORMAT ERROR is displayed.
When the [SETING] soft key is pressed on the axis setting screen after
data entry, the message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE is displayed if any
of the following conditions is satisfied.
D Both M1 and M2 are nonzero for an axis.
D Any two of the 1DSP, CS, and TNDM are nonzero for an axis.
60
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
D
D
D
D
D
A duplicate value is specified for M1.

A duplicate value is specified for M2.
A duplicate value is specified for CS.
A duplicate value is specified for TNDM.
An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TNDM.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1902
#1
ASE
#0
FMD
[Data type] Bit

FMD Specifies the FSSB setting mode.
0 : Automatic setting mode.
(If the interrelationships between axes and amplifiers are specified on
the FSSB setting screen, parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919,
1936, and 1937 are set automatically.)
1 : Manual setting 2 mode.
(Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and 1937 must be
set manually.)
ASE Indicates whether automatic setting is complete, if bit 0 of parameter No.
1902 is 0 (automatic setting mode).
0 : Incomplete.
1 : Complete.
(This bit automatically becomes 1 upon the completion of automatic
setting.)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1904
#0
DSP

DSP 0 : Two axes share a DSP. (Ordinary axis)
1 : One axis occupies a DSP. (Learning control axis, and so on)
Usually, the user should not attempt to manipulate this bit, because it is
set using the FSSB setting screen. It need not be used in FSSB manual
setting 2 mode.
1905
#7
PM2
#6
PM1
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
FSL

FSL Specifies whether to use a fast or slow interface between a servo amplifier
and the servo software.
0 : Fast type
1 : Slow type
There are two types of servo data transfer interfaces: fast and slow types.
They are selected as described below.
D Both types are usable for singleaxis amplifiers.
61
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
D
D
D
For twoaxis amplifiers, do not use fast type interfaces for both axes
simultaneously. Slow types can be used simultaneously for both axes.
For threeaxis amplifiers, the same rules as those for twoaxis
amplifiers apply to the first and second axes, while the same rules as
those for singleaxis amplifiers apply to the third axis.
For those axes for which an odd number is set for parameter No. 1023,
the fast type must be used, except for the EGB workpiece, learning
control, highspeed current loop, and highspeed interface axes, for
which the slow type can also be used.
For those axes for which an even number is set for parameter No.
1023, only the slow type is usable; this bit must be set to 1.
CNC
Controlled Program
Servo axis
axis
axis name number
number
(No. 1020) (No. 1023)
Interface
type
(fast/slow)
Twoaxis
amplifier
Singleaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
Singleaxis
amplifier
X (Fast)
A (Slow)
Y (Fast)
Z (Slow)
B (Fast)
C (Slow)
PM1 Specifies whether the first pulse module is to be used.

0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
PM2 Specifies whether the second pulse module is to be used.
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
If automatic setting is set as the FSSB setting mode (bit 0 of parameter
No. 1902 = 0), this parameter is set automatically when data is entered
using the FSSB setting screen. For manual setting 2 (bit 0 of parameter
No. 1902 = 1), the user must set this parameter. When using a pulse
module, a connection number must be specified separately (parameter
Nos. 1936 and 1937).
62
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1910
Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR)
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 16, 40, and 48
An address conversion table value must be specified for each of slaves 1
to 10. The term slave refers to any of the servo amplifiers and pulse
modules connected to the CNC. Each slave is assigned a number of
between 1 and 10 sequentially, with the one nearest to the CNC assigned
number 1. A twoaxis amplifier is regarded as being two slaves, while
a threeaxis amplifier is regarded as being three slaves. Each of these
parameters is set depending on whether the slave is an amplifier or pulse
module, as follows:
f When the slave is an amplifier:
The parameter is set to the value in parameter No. 1023 for an axis
to which the amplifier is assigned, minus 1.
f When the slave is a pulse module:
The parameter is set to 16 for the first pulse module (that nearest to the
CNC) or to 48 for the second pulse module (that farthest from the
CNC).
f When there is no slave:
The parameter is set to 40 except when the simple electronic gearbox
(EGB) is used, in which case the following should be observed.
D When the simple electronic gearbox (EGB) is used:
The EGB axis (that axis specified with parameter No. 7771) requires
no amplifier. It should be regarded as being connected to a dummy
amplifier; that is, the address conversion table value for one of the
nonexisting slaves should be set to the value set in parameter No.
1023 for the EGB axis, minus 1, rather than 40.
If automatic setting is set as the FSSB setting mode (bit 0 of parameter
No. 1902 = 0), this parameter is set automatically when data is entered on
the FSSB setting screen. For manual setting 2 (bit 0 of parameter No.
1902 = 1), the parameter must be set manually.
63
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting

CNC
ATR
No.1910
to 1919
Axis
16
(M1)
48
(M2)
40
(None)
10
40
(None)
ATR
No.1910
to 1919
Axis
Twoaxis
amplifier
M1
16
(M1)
48
(M2)
40
(None)
10
40
(None)
Slave
number
Controlled Program Servo axis

axis
axis name number
number
(No. 1020) (No. 1023)
Singleaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
M1
Singleaxis
amplifier
M2
CNC
Slave
number

axis
axis name number
number
(No. 1020) (No. 1023)
Singleaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
Singleaxis
amplifier
M2
64
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting when the simple

electronic gearbox (EGB) function is used
(EGB workpiece axis = Aaxis; EGB axis = Baxis (parameter No.
7771 = 5))
CNC
ATR
No.1910
to 1919
Axis
Twoaxis
amplifier
M1
16
(M1)
M2
48
(M2)
(Dummy)
40
(None)
10
40
(None)
Slave
number

axis
axis name number
number
(No. 1020) (No. 1023)
Singleaxis
amplifier
Twoaxis
amplifier
1920
Controlled axis number for slave 1 (FSSB setting screen only)
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
[Data type] Byte

Each of these parameters is set using a controlled axis number for a slave
numbered 1 to 10. This parameter is set automatically when data is
entered using the FSSB setting screen; do not specify it manually. For
manual setting 2, the parameter need not be set.
65
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1931
Connector number for first pulse module (FSSB setting screen only)
1932
Connector number for second pulse module (FSSB setting screen only)

[Valid data range] 0 to the number of connectors in each pulse module
To use a pulse module, the user must specify a connector number for the
pulse module on each axis. This parameter is set automatically when data
is entered using the FSSB setting screen; do not specify it manually. For
1933
Cs contour controlled axis (FSSB setting screen only)

[Valid data range] 0 and 1
To use Cs contour control, this parameter must be set to 1 for the
corresponding axis. This parameter is set automatically when data is
entered using the FSSB setting screen; do not specify it manually. For
1934
Master/slave number for tandemcontrolled axes (FSSB setting screen only)

To use tandem control, this parameter must be set to an odd number (for
the master axis) or to an even number (slave axis). This parameter is set
automatically when data is entered using the FSSB setting screen; do not
specify it manually. For manual setting 2, the parameter need not be set.
1936
Connector number for first pulse module
1937
Connector number for second pulse module

To use a pulse module, this parameter must be set to connection number
for the pulse module, minus 1; that is, 0 for connector number 1, 1 for
connector number 2, and so on. It is also necessary to set up bits 6 and
7 of parameter No. 1905. For an axis that does not use a pulse module,
0 is specified for the parameter. Basically, each axis can be combined with
any connector, but the smaller connector numbers must be used first. For
example, connector number 4 cannot be used unless connector number 3
is in use.
66
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Example)
Controlled
axis
Connector
number for
first pulse
module
Connector
number for
second pulse
module
No.1936
No.1937
No.1905
(#7, #6)
Not used
0,1
Not used
1,0
Not used
1,0
Not used
Not used
0,0
Not used
0,1
Not used
1,0
If the FSSB setting mode is automatic setting (bit 0 of parameter No. 1902
= 0), this parameter is set automatically when data is entered using the
FSSB setting screen. For manual setting 2 (bit 0 of parameter No. 1902
= 1), the user must set this parameter.
Alarm and message
Servo alarms
Number

Message
Description
460
n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT
FSSB communication was interrupted.

The most likely causes are:
1. The FSSB communication cable is
disconnected or has a broken conductor.
2. The amplifier power supply was
turned off.
3. A lowvoltage alarm condition occurred in the amplifier.
461
n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP

INTERFACE
The fast type interface was assigned to

both axes of a twoaxis amplifier.
462
n AXIS : SEND CNC

DATA FAILED
The slave could not receive data correctly because of an FSSB communication error.
463
n AXIS : SEND SLAVE

DATA FAILED
The servo section failed to receive data

correctly because of an FSSB communication error.
464
n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA

FAILED
An attempt to write maintenance information to the amplifier maintenance

screen failed.
465
n AXIS : READ ID DATA

FAILED
An attempt to read the initial ID information for the amplifier failed when the
power was switched on.
67
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Number
Number
Message
P/S alarms
Description
466
n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP
COMBINATION
The maximum current rating for the amplifier does not match that for the motor.
467
n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF AXIS
The servo function for the following has

not been enabled when an axis occupying a single DSP is specified on the
axis setting screen.
1. Learning control
(bit 5 of parameter No. 2008 = 1)
2. Highspeed current loop
3. Highspeed interface axis
Message
Description
5134
FSSB : OPEN READY

TIME OUT
The FSSB did not become ready to

open during initialization.
5135
FSSB : ERROR MODE
The FSSB entered an error mode.
5136
FSSB : NUMBER OF
AMPS IS SMALL
The number of amplifiers recognized

by the FSSB is insufficient, compared
with the number of controlled axes.
5137
FSSB : CONFIGURATION The FSSB detected a configuration erERROR

ror.
5138
FSSB : AXIS SETTING

NOT COMPLETE
Axis setting has not been performed in

automatic setting mode. Perform axis
setting using the FSSB setting screen.
5139
FSSB : ERROR
The initialization of the servo was not

completed normally. Probable cases
are a defect of optical cable or a mistake of the connection between the amplifier and other modules.
5197
FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT
The FSSB did not open when the CNC

had allowed the FSSB to open.
5198
FSSB : ID DATA NOT

READ
The initial ID information for the amplifier cannot be read because of a failure
in the temporary assignment.
68
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.5
SETTINGS RELATED
WITH COORDINATE
SYSTEMS
1.5.1
Machine Coordinate
System
General
Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point

proper to the machine system.
A coordinate system in which the reference position becomes the
parameter-preset (No. 1240) coordinate value when manual reference
position return is performed, is set. With G53 command, the machine
coordinate system is selected and the axis can be moved at rapid traverse
to the position expressed by the machine coordinates.
Parameter
1240
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine

coordinate system
NOTE

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Set the coordinate values of the reference positions in the machine

coordinate system.
Warning
WARNING
Since the machine coordinate system must be set before
the G53 command is specified, at least one manual
reference position return or automatic reference position
return by the G28 command must be performed after the
power is turned on. This is not necessary when an
absoluteposition detector is attached.
69
1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.7.1
MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.7.1
MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.7.1
MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.7.1
MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.7.1
MACHINE COORDINATE
SYSTEM
1.5.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System/Addition of
System Pair
General
A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a

workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set
with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system).
A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system (selecting a
workpiece coordinate system).
A set workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting its origin
(changing a workpiece coordinate system).
Setting a workpiece
coordinate system
A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:

(1) Method using G92 (G50 for G code system A)
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value after G92
(G50) in the program.
(2) Automatic setting
If bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is set beforehand, a workpiece
coordinate system is automatically set when manual reference
position return is performed.
This method can be used when no option is specified for the workpiece
coordinate system.
(3) Method of using G54 to G59
Six workpiece coordinate systems are set in advance, using the MDI
panel, and the workpiece coordinate system to be used is selected
using program commands G54 to G59.
70
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Selecting a workpiece
coordinate system
The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described
below.
(1) Selecting a workpiece coordinate system set by G92 (G50) or
automatic workpiece coordinate system setting
Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected, absolute commands
work with the workpiece coordinate system.
(2) Choosing from six workpiece coordinate systems set using the
MDI panel
By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece
coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be selected.
G54
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
Workpiece coordinate system 1

Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference

position return after the power is turned on. When the power is turned
on, G54 coordinate system is selected.
Changing workpiece
coordinate system
The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be
changed by changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or
workpiece zero point offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece zero point
offset value or workpiece zero point offset value.
(1) Inputting from the MDI panel
(2) Programming by G10 or G92 (G50)
(3) Using external data input (refer to 15.2)
Workpiece
coordinate
system 1 (G54)
ZOFS1
Workpiece
coordinate
system 2 (G55)
ZOFS2
Workpiece
coordinate
system 3 (G56)
ZOFS3
ZOFS4
ZOFS5
EXOFS
ZOFS6
Machine zero
EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value
ZOFS1ZOFS6 : Workpiece zero point offset value
Workpiece
coordinate
system 4 (G57)
Workpiece
coordinate
system 5 (G58)
Workpiece
coordinate
system 6 (G59)
Changing an external workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece zero point offset value
71
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Workpiece coordinate
system shift (T series)
When the coordinate system actually set by the G92 (G50) command or
the automatic coordinate system setting deviates from the programmed
workpiece coordinate, the set coordinate system can be shifted.
Set the desired shift amount in the workpiece coordinate system shift
memory.
XZ: Coordinate system in programming

xz : Current set coordinate system with shift
amount 0
(coordinate system to be modified by
shifting)
Shift
Set the shift amount from O to O in the workpiece coordinate system shift memory.
Workpiece Coordinate System shift
Addition of workpiece
coordinate system pair
(M series)
Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiece

coordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 or 300 additional
workpiece coordinate systems (additional workpiece coordinate systems)
can be used.
Parameter
#7
#6
1201
#5
AWK
#4
#3
#2
#1
ZPI
#0
ZPR
[Data type] Bit

ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference
position return is performed
0 : Not set automatically
1 : Set automatically
NOTE
If a workpiece coordinate system option is available,
automatic coordinate system setting is not performed.
Whenever manual reference position return is performed,
the workpiece coordinate system is established according
to the workpiece origin offset (parameter Nos. 1220 to
1226).
72
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate system is set

automatically
0 : Value set in parameter No. 1250 is used.
1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used, or for input in
inches, the value set in parameter No. 1251 is used.
AWK Action taken after the workpiece zero point offset value is changed
0 : The absolute coordinate value is changed when the first automatic
operation is performed.
1 : The absolute coordinate value is changed immediately.(If automatic
operation is not in the startup sequence)
NOTE
In either case, the change becomes effective when the next
block is buffered.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
G50
1202
#1
EWS
#0
EWD
[Data type] Bit

EWD The shift direction of the workpiece coordinate system is:
0 : The direction specified by the external workpiece zero point offset
value
1 : In the opposite direction to that specified by the external workpiece
zero point offset value
EWD=0
EXOFS
EWD=1
EXOFS
Z (Shifted workpiece
coordinate system)
Z
(Original workpiece
coordinate system)
EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value
EWS Shift value of the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece
zero point offset value are
0 : Stored in the separate memory areas.
1 : Stored in the same memory area, that is, the shift and the offset values
are the same.
G50 When the CNC has commands G54 to G59 specifying workpiece
coordinate systems (optional function), if the G50 command for setting a
coordinate system (or the G92 command in G command system B or C) is
specified,
0 : The G50 (or G92) command is executed without an alarm.
1 : P/S alarm No. 010 is issued and the G50 (or G92) command is not
executed.
73
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1220
External workpiece zero point offset value

[Unit of data]
Input increment
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Linear axis (input in mm)
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis (input in inches)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
This is one of the parameters that give the position of workpiece

coordinate system (G54 to G59). It gives an offset of the workpiece zero
point common to all workpiece coordinate systems. In general, the offset
varies depending on the workpiece coordinate systems. The parameter
value can also be set from the PMC by using the external data input
function.
1221
Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system1 (G54)
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226

[Unit of data]
Input increment
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
The workpiece zero point offset values in workpiece coordinate systems 1

to 6 (G54 to G59) are set.
74
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
Workpiece zero point offset
Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)
Origin of machine coordinate system
Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate

system setting is performed
1250

[Unit of data]
Input increment
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used
for setting a coordinate system automatically.
1251
Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate

system setting is performed with inch input
Input increment
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
for setting a coordinate system automatically when input is performed in
inches.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201 is set
to 1.
75
1. AXIS CONTROL
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.7.2
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.7.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.7.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.7.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.7.2
76
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.5.3
Rotary Axis Roll Over

General
The rollover function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from
overflowing. The rollover function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx)
of parameter 1008 to 1.
For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in the
command. For an absolute command, the coordinates after the tool has
moved are values rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation set
in parameter No. 1260. The tool moves in the direction in which the final
coordinates are closest when bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set
to 0. Displayed values for relative coordinates are also rounded by the
angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.
1008 is set to 1.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
1006
#2
#1
ROSx
#0
ROTx
NOTE
ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis
ROSx
ROTx
Description
Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type.
(Not rounded in 0 to 360_)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
Rotation axis (A Type)

(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute
coordinate values and relative coordinate values are rounded or
not rounded by parameter No. 1008 #0 and #2.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one rotation.

(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to
360_)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
(4) The rotation axis roll over function and index table indexing function (M series) cannot be used.
77
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
1008
#3
#2
RRLx
#1
RABx
#0
ROAx
NOTE
ROAx The rollover function of a rotation axis is
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction
0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1 : Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
RRLx Relative coordinates are
0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
1260
Move amount per rotation of rotary axis
NOTE
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Unit of data
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Standard setting
value
36000
360000
3600000

Set move amount per rotation of rotation axis.
78
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
This function cannot be used together with the indexing
function of the index table (M series).
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.20.2
ROTARY AXIS ROLLOVER
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.20.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.18.1
79
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.6
SIMPLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
General
A movement along an axis can be executed simply by executing a move

command specified for that axis or by synchronizing the movement with
another axis. Either of these two types can be selected by means of a signal
sent from the machine.
In synchronous operation, that axis for which move commands can be
specified is called the master axis, while an axis along which the tool
moves in sync with the master axis is called a slave axis.
Simple synchronous
control for the M series
and T series
The M series and T series support different simple synchronization

control functions. One of the greatest differences is that:
<T series> The function can synchronize only automatic operations. It
cannot synchronize manual operations. Only one master/slave axis pair
can be used.
<M series> The function can synchronize both automatic and manual
operations.
The following functions are provided only for the M series:
D Synchronization error check function

D Synchronization compensation function
D
Synchronization error
check based on
positional deviation (M
series)
Any difference between the servo positional deviation of the master axis
and that of the slave axis is monitored constantly. A P/S alarm condition
(No. 213) is detected if a limit set in parameter No. 8313 (if only one
master/slave axis pair is in sync) or 8323 (if more than one master/slave
axis pair is in sync) is exceeded.
Synchronization error
check based on machine
coordinates (M series)
The function monitors the difference between the machine coordinates on

the master and slave axes. If the function detects a difference greater than
or equal to a preset value, it stops the machine. This function constantly
monitors the difference. Even if the synchronization control signal is
erroneously set to 0, thus disabling synchronization control, the function
can issue an alarm, stop the machine, and thus prevent damage.
If the detected difference is greater than or equal to the maximum error
set in parameter 8314, servo alarm 407 is output.
80
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
WARNING
1 Before using the synchronization error check function, set
identical values for the reference positions of the master
and slave axes.
2 To clear the alarm, first increase the maximum
synchronization error set in parameter 8314, then press the
reset key. Next, perform handle operations or other manual
operations so that the machine coordinates agree. Then,
restore the original value in parameter 8314.
3 If an alarm is detected during a synchronous operation, set
the signals indicating that a synchronous operation is in
progress (G138, G140) to off, then follow the procedure for
clearing an alarm.
NOTE
If the synchronization error check function is not used, set
parameter 8314 to 0.
Synchronization
compensation function
If the agreement between the positions of the master and slave axes is lost
when the system power is turned off, the function compensates for the
difference between them. After performing a followup at power on, the
function sends compensation pulses to the slave axis to adjust its position
such that it agrees with that of the master axis. This function is enabled
only when the slave axis of synchronization control supports the
absoluteposition detection function.
This function, however, cannot be used for rotation axes.
WARNING
1 The synchronization compensation function is enabled
after reference position returns have been performed. The
function is not executed if the parameter is set before
reference position returns are performed.
2 The synchronization compensation function is not executed
when the servo alarm is eliminated.
CAUTION
The synchronization deviation is processed as a position
error on the slave axis while at rest. The position error is
displayed as diagnostic data 300, in the same units as used
to detect the error. If the error exceeds the value set in
parameter 8315 (if only one master/slave axis pair is in
sync) or 8325 (if more than one master/slave axis pair is in
sync), servo alarm 410 is triggered. The alarm can be
cleared by pressing the reset key. As the position error for
the slave axis remains even after the alarm is cleared,
however, the positions must be adjusted.
81
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 To use the synchronization compensation function, set the
SOF bit, bit 7 of parameter 8301 (if only one master/slave
axis pair is in sync) or SOFx bit, bit 7 of parameter 8303 (if
more than one master/slave axis pair is in sync), to 1.
2 The synchronization compensation function is also enabled
when emergency stop is canceled.
Automatic setting of grid

positioning (M series)
To use simple synchronous control, it is necessary to perform reference

position return for the master and slave axes. This function causes the
CNC to automatically perform reference position return (grid position)
for both the master and slave axes in simple synchronization.
[Operating procedure] This procedure can be applied only when one master/slave axis pair is in
sync, and when bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8302 is set to 1. If more than
one master/slave axis pair is in sync, it is necessary to use parameters
ATEx (bit 0 of parameter No. 8303) and ATSx (bit 1 of parameter No.
8303).
1 Set bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8302 to 1.
2 Power off/on.
3 Enter REF mode (or JOG mode for reference position setting without
dogs), and move along the axis toward the reference position.
4 Motion along the master and slave axes stops automatically, and the
grid deviation is set in parameter No. 8316. At the same time, bit 1
(ATS) of parameter No. 8302 becomes 0, and a poweroff request
alarm (No. 000) occurs.
5 Switch the power off then back on.
6 Perform ordinary reference position return.
NOTE
Parameter setting
When parameter ATS (bit 1 of parameter No. 8302) or ATSx
(bit 1 of parameter No. 8303) is set, parameter APZ (bit 4 of
parameter No. 1815) for the master and slave axes and
parameter No. 8316 become 0. If the operator specifies
parameter No. 8316 (MDI, G10L50), parameter ATE (bit 0
of parameter No. 8302) becomes 0.
82
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Torque difference alarm

detection (M series)
If the master and slave axes operate independently while simple

synchronous control is applied, the machine may be damaged. To prevent
this, the torque command difference between the axes is monitored. If the
difference is found to be abnormal, an alarm can be issued.
[System configuration]
Position gain
+
Master axis
position
command
Kp
Master axis
torque command
Velocity control
Master axis position

feedback
Slave axis
position
command
Position gain
+
-
Kp
Torque command
difference
The absolute value is

compared with the
threshold value.
Alarm
detection
Velocity control
Slave axis
torque command
Slave axis position

feedback
[How to use]
Determine the threshold parameter using the following procedure.
1 Set up the following parameters:
Parameter No. 2031 = 0 : Disable torque difference alarm detection.
Bit 0 of parameter No. 8950 = 1 : Display the memory screen.
Parameter No. 8960 : Specify the following values as data addresses.
1304 if the servo axis numbers for two axes in sync are 1 and 2
Parameter No. 2115 : Display, on the memory screen, the absolute
value of the torque difference between the two
axes that are in sync. This parameter No. must
be set to the same value for both axes.
Value: 22160
2 Display the memory screen using:
[SYSTEM] function key [
] soft key [MEMORY] soft key
The absolute value of the torque difference between the two axes that
are in sync is displayed as No.1C0 on the memory screen.
3 Read the maximum torque difference absolute value during ordinary
operation, and convert it to decimal. The threshold parameter should
be specified with a margin.
If it is difficult to read the absolute torque difference value on the memory
screen it can be observed, using an oscilloscope by means of the following
procedure:
83
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
4 Set parameter No. 2115 to 22160.

5 Connect a check board, and observe a signal at CH7 with the rotary
switch on the check board set to 1.
6 Convert the observed value, using the formula 1 V = 410 (specified
threshold value). Read the maximum value during ordinary operation,
and allow an appropriate margin.
[Timing chart]
SA<F000#6>
Alarm detection
1
0
Enabled
Disabled
Value in parameter No. 8317 (if only one master/slave axis
pair is in sync) or 8327 (if more than one master/slave axis
pair is in sync), or 512 ms (if neither parameter is set).
If the servo preparation completed signal SA <F000#6> is 0, torque

difference alarm detection is not performed.
The simple synchronous control functions are described separately for the
T series and M series in the following explanations.
Signal
<T series and

M series>
Signals to select the
slave axis for simple
synchronous control
SYNC1 to SYNC8 <G138>
[Function] synchronous control is performed for memory or MDI operation.
The signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the end
of the signal name represents the number of the controlled axis.
SYNC 1
1. ... The first axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
2. ... The second axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
3. ... The third axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
:
:
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as described below:
During memory or MDI operation, the control unit supplies the move
command, specified for the master axis, to both the master and slave
axes of synchronous control.
The master axis is specified with a parameter.
84
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
<M series>
Signals for selecting the
manual feed axis for
simple synchronous
control
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8
<G140>
[Function] synchronous control is performed in jog, handle, or incremental feed
mode.
The signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the end
of the signal name represents the number of the controlled axis.
SYNCJ 1
1. ... The first axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
2. ... The second axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
3. ... The third axis becomes the slave axis for synchronous control.
:
:
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as described below:
In jog, handle, or incremental feed mode, the control unit supplies the
move command, specified for the master axis, to both the master and
slave axes of synchronous control.
The master axis is specified with a parameter.
Signal address
T series
G138
#7
SYNC8
#6
SYNC7
#5
SYNC6
#4
SYNC5
#3
SYNC4
#2
SYNC3
#1
SYNC2
#0
SYNC1
G138
#7
SYNC8
#6
SYNC7
#5
SYNC6
#4
SYNC5
#3
SYNC4
#2
SYNC3
#1
SYNC2
#0
SYNC1
G140
SYNCJ8 SYNCJ7 SYNCJ6 SYNCJ5 SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
M series
85
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
T series
8311
Axis number of master axis in synchronous control

Select a master axis for simple synchronous control. Set a master axis
number for the axis used as a slave axis. If the value of this parameter is
0, the first axis is the master axis. In this case, when the synchronous
control select signal G138 is set to 1, operation starts with the 1st axis
being the master axis.
Units digit in the parameter for the first axis
Set the master axis number for the first axis.
Tens digit in the parameter for the first axis
Set the master axis number for the second axis.
Units digit in the parameter for the second axis
Set the master axis number for the third axis.
Tens digit in the parameter for the second axis
Set the master axis number for the fourth axis.
Units digit in the parameter for the third axis
Set the master axis number for the fifth axis.
Tens digit in the parameter for the third axis
Set the master axis number for the sixth axis.
Units digit in the parameter for the fourth axis
Set the master axis number for the seventh axis.
Tens digit in the parameter for the fourth axis
Set the master axis number for the eighth axis.
Number
Tens digit
Units digit
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Second axis
Fourth axis
Sixth axis
Eighth axis
First axis
Third axis
Fifth axis
Seventh axis
NOTE
The axis number settings are: 0 for the first axis, 1 for the
second axis, 2 for the third axis, and so on.
Example) To set the 3rd axis to teh master axis and the 4th axis to the slave
axis, set as follows:
No. 8311
1st axis 00
2nd axis 20
3rd axis 00
4th axis 00
86
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8312
Enabling/disablingmirror image in synchronous control

This parameter sets the mirror image function. When 100 or a greater
value is set with this parameter, the mirror image function is applied to
synchronous control. Set this parameter to the slave axis.
Example: To establish reversed synchronization when using the third axis
as the master axis and the fourth axis as the slave axis, set parameter No.
8312 as follows:
Parameter No. 8312 (first axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8312 (second axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8312 (third axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8312 (fourth axis) = 100
M series
3105
#7
SMF
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

SMF During simple synchronous contorol, movement along a slave axis is:
0 : Included in the actual speed display
1 : Not included in the actual speed display
NOTE
This parameter is valid when simple syncronous contorol is
applied according to the setting of parameter No. 8311
(master and slave axes can be arbitrarily selected).
8301
#7
SOF
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

SOF The synchronization compensation funciton under simple synchronous
control (one master/slave axis pair) is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
87
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
8302
#1
ATS
#0
ATE
NOTE
The system power must be turned off then back on in order
for this parameter setting to become effective.
[Data type] Bit
ATE Specify whether to enable the automatic setting of grid positioning under
simple synchronous control (one master/slave axis pair)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
ATS Specify whether to start the automatic setting of grid positioning under
simple synchronous control (one master/slave axis pair)
0 : Not started
1 : Started
NOTE
1 Setting this parameter resets parameter APZx (bit 4 of
parameter No. 1815) for the master and slave axes and
parameter No. 8316 to 0.
2 This parameter automatically becomes 0 upon the
completion of grid positioning.
8303
#7
SOFx
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
ATSx
#0
ATEx

ATEx Specify whether to enable the automatic setting of grid positioning under
simple synchronous control (more than one master/slave axis pair)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
ASTx Specify whether to start the automatic setting of grid positioning under
simple synchronous control (more than one master/slave axis pair)
0 : Not started
1 : Started
NOTE
To start the automatic setting of grid positioning, set ATSx
to 1. ATSx automatically becomes 0 upon the completion
of automatic setting.
SOFx Specify whether to enable synchronization compensation during simple
synchronous control (more than one master/slave axis pair)
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
88
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8311
Axis number of master axis in synchronous control

Select a master axis and slave axis for simple synchronous control. Set
a master axis number for the slave axis side.
Example1: When using the first axis (Xaxis) as the master axis, and the
third axis (Zaxis) as the slave axis, set parameter No. 8311 as follows:
Parameter No. 8311 X (first axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8311 Y (second axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8311 Z (third axis) = 1
Parameter No. 8311 A (fourth axis) = 0
Example2: If there are three master/slave axis pairs under simple
synchronous control:
To specify the:
master axis as the 1st axis, and the slave axis as the 6th axis
master axis as the 2nd axis, and the slave axis as the 5th axis
master axis as the 3rd axis, and the slave axis as the 4th axis,
set the following:
Parameter No. 8311 X(1st axis) = 0
Y(2nd axis) = 0
Z (3rd axis) = 0
(4th axis) = 3
(5th axis) = 2
(6th axis) = 1
NOTE
Specifying the third axis (Zaxis) as the master axis, and the
first axis (Xaxis) as the slave axis is not allowed. The
master axis number must always be smaller than the slave
axis number.
It is impossible to specify more than one slave axis for a
master axis.
8313
Limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the master
and slave axes (one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)
[Data type] Word

This parameter specifies a limit imposed on the positional deviation
difference between the master and slave axes. If the limit is exceeded, a
P/S alarm (No. 213) is issued.
89
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8314
Allowable error in synchronization error check

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg

This parameter sets, in the detection unit, the allowable error when a
synchronization error check is made. The mechanical coordinates of the
master axis and slave axis are monitored. When a synchronization error
equal to or greater than the value set in this parameter is detected, servo
alarm No. 407 is issued, and the machine is stopped. Set this parameter
to the master axis. When 0 is set with this parameter, no synchronization
error check is performed.
8315
Maximum compensation value for synchronization compensation
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for
synchronization. When a compensation value greater than the value set
in this parameter is used, servo alarm No. 410 is issued.
8316
Reference counter difference between the master and slave axes

(one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)
NOTE
for this setting to become effective.
[Data type] Twoword

This parameter is set to the reference counter difference between the
master and slave axes.
NOTE
Upon the completion of grid positioning, the reference
counter difference is set automatically. At the same time,
parameter ATS (bit 1 of parameter 8302) is reset to 0.
90
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8317
Torque difference alarm detection timer (one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (if 0 is specified, the system assumes 512 ms.)
This parameter specifies the time between the servo preparation
completed signal SA <F000#6> becoming 1 and the torque difference
alarm detection function starting to check for a torque difference alarm
condition. The specified value is rounded up to the nearest multiple of
16 ms.
(Example) If 100 is specified, 112 ms is assumed.
8323
Limit imposed on the positional deviation difference between the master and slave
axes (more than one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)

This parameter specifies a limit imposed on the positional deviation
difference between the compensation and slave axes. If the limit is
exceeded, a P/S alarm (No. 213) is issued. This parameter must be set for
the master axis. If 0 is specified, a positional deviation difference check
is not performed.
8325
Maximum compensation to be applied during synchronization matching (more than

one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)

This parameter specifies the maximum compensation to be applied
during synchronous compensation. If the compensation exceeds the set
value, a servo alarm (No. 410) is issued. This parameter must be set for
the master axis. For this setting to become effective, parameter SOFx (bit
7 of parameter No. 8303) must be set to 1.
8326
Reference counter difference between the master and slave axes (more than one
master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)

This parameter is automatically set to the reference counter difference
(grid deviation) between the master and slave axes, when automatic grid
position setting is performed. This parameter setting, together with an
ordinary grid shift, is transferred to the servo section, when the user
subsequently switches the power off then back on. This parameter must
be set for the master axis.
91
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8327
Torque difference alarm detection timer (more than one master/slave axis pair
under synchronous control)

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter specifies the time between the servo preparation
completed signal (SA [F000#6]) becoming 1 and the torque difference
alarm detection function starting to check for a torque difference alarm
condition during simple synchronous control. The specified value is
rounded up to the nearest multiple of 16 ms.
(Example) If 100 is specified, 112 ms is assumed.
This parameter must be specified for the master axis. If the set value is
0, 512 ms is assumed.
Alarm and message

T series
Number

Number
Message
M series
Description
213
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A move command was specified for the

SYNCHROMODE
slave axis of synchronous control.
214
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A command for coordinate system setSYNCHROMODE

ting or shifttype tool compensation
was executed during synchronous
control. Correct the program.
Message
213
Description
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN One of the following errors occurred

SYNCHROMODE
during synchronous operation (simple
synchronous control):
(1) The program contains a move command
for the slave axis.
(2) A command for jog feed, manual handle

feed, or incremental feed was issued for
the slave axis.
(3) After power on, the command for automatic reference position return was specified before a manual reference
position return had been performed.
(4) The difference in position error between
the master and slave axes exceeded
the value set in parameter 8313 or 8323.
92
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Servo alarm
Number
Message
Diagnostic data
Description
407
SERVO ALARM:
EXCESS ERROR
The difference in position error between the master and slave axes exceeded the value set with the parameter 8314.
410
SERVO ALARM:
n AXIS EXCESS ERR
The most likely causes are:

1 For the n axis, the positional deviation observed when the axis is
stopped has exceeded the value
set in parameter No. 1829.
2 In simple synchronous control, the
compensation used during synchronous compensation has exceeded the value set in parameter
No. 8315 or 8325. This alarm occurs only for the slave axis.
420
SERVO ALARM:
n AXIS SYNC TORQUE
A torque command issued for the master or slave axis is greater than the value specified in parameter No. 2031.
This alarm condition occurs only for the
master axis.
Number
Message
Description
540
SYNCHRO ERROR
The data represents the difference in

position error between the master and
slave axes during synchronous control.
(One master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)
541
SYNCHRO ERROR
The positional difference between the

master and slave axes under synchronous control is displayed. (More than
one master/slave axis pair under synchronous control)
93
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 When a manual reference position return is executed,
identical movements are performed along the master and
slave axes until deceleration commences. Subsequently,
grids are detected separately.
2 Pitch error compensation and backlash compensation are
executed separately for the master and slave axes.
3 If control of more than one master/slave axis pair is specified
in parameter No. 8311, parameters to perform setting for,
and display diagnostic information about, only one
master/slave axis pair are invalid, and if control of only one
master/slave axis pair is specified, parameters to perform
setting for, and display diagnostic information about, only
one master/slave axis pair are valid (except for common
parameter Nos. 8311 and 8314).
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.20.1
Simple synchronous control
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.20.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.3
94
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.7
TANDEM CONTROL
General
If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large table,

for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By means of this
function, two motors can be used to perform movement along a single
axis.
Positioning is carried out only for the master axis. The slave axis is used
only to produce a torque. By means of this function, double the amount
of torque can be obtained.
Table
Master axis
Ball screw
Slave axis
Sample application
The CNC generally processes the two axes of tandem control as a single
axis. In the management of servo parameters and the monitoring of servo
alarms, however, the two axes are handled individually.
95
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
PC: Pulse coder
Master
axis
Slave axis
PC
Power
line
PC
Power
line
Servo
amplifier
PWM
Servo
amplifier
PWM
Current
loop
PRM. 2087
Preload (L)
+
+
Rotor
position
Current
loop
PRM. 2087
Preload (M)
Speed FB
+ +
Rotor
position
Speed FB
Reverse?
Reverse?
PRM. 2022
Velocity
loop
+
Position
loop
+
Specified
pulse
PRM. 2008#2

Average?
PRM: Parameter
Scale
Builtin detector
Separate
detector
PRM.1815#1
(Example)
Block Diagram of Tandem Control
96
PRM. 2022
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Explanations
Axis configuration in
tandem control
To specify the axis configuration in tandem control, follow the procedure

below:
(1) Tandem control can be performed for up to four pairs of axes.
(2) In terms of controlled axes, the pair of axes is handled as two separate
axes. In terms of CNCcontrolled axes (command axes), the pair of
axes is handled as a single axis (master axis). Specify the number of
CNCcontrolled axes with parameter 1010, excluding the slave axis
of tandem control. The slave axis must be handled as if it were
controlled only by the PMC.
(3) The pair of axes is handled as two separate axes in the management of
servo parameters and the monitoring of servo alarms.
(4) Assign two consecutive numbers, that is one odd and one even
number, to the master and slave axes as their servo axis numbers
(parameter 1023). Assign the smaller number to the master axis.
(Example) If the servo axis number of the master axis (parameter
1023) is set to 1, specify servo axis number 2 for the corresponding
slave axis. If the servo axis number of the master axis is set to 3,
specify servo axis number 4 for the corresponding slave axis.
(5) If tandem control is performed for two or more pairs of axes, assign
servo axis numbers to the master and slave axes in identical order.
(6) Specify a unique axis name for the slave axis.
(7) The slave axis is handled as a controlled axis. Set the NDPx bit (bit
0 of parameter 3115) to 1 to suppress the position display.
The following sample axis configuration is for a machine with six axes
X, Y, Z, A, B (PMC axis), and C. The Xaxis and Yaxis are the master
axes of tandem control.
Number of controlled axes (optional parameter): 6
Number of CNC controlled axes (parameter 1010): 3
Axis
number
Axis
name
Servo axis
number
(PRM. 1023)
CNC axis (master axis of tandem control)
CNC axis (master axis of tandem control)
CNC axis
Slave axis of tandem control (master axis:

Xaxis)
PMC axis
Slave axis of tandem control (master axis:

Yaxis)
97
1. AXIS CONTROL
Preload function
B63003EN1/02
By adding an offset to the torque controlled by the position (velocity)

feedback device, the function can apply opposite torques to the master and
slave axes so that equal and opposite movements are performed for both
axes. This function can reduce the effect of backlash on the master and
slave axes caused by the tandem connection of the two motors via a gear.
This function, however, cannot reduce backlash between the ball screw
and table or other backlash inherent to the machine.
If a preload of x is set for the master axis and x for the slave axis, the
opposing preload torques are continuously applied to the two axes, even
at rest, as shown below:
Master axis
Slave axis
-X
CAUTION
1 Specify as low a preload as possible. Avoid specifying a
preload higher than the rated torque. Too high a preload will
trigger an overload alarm because the specified torques
continue to be applied, even at rest. A preload that is very
slightly higher than the frictional force is recommended.
Thus, the recommended preload may be about onethird of
the rated torque.
2 If the motors rotate in opposite directions (different signs are
specified in parameter 2022), specify the preload values
with the same sign.
Velocity feedback
average function
As shown in the block diagram of tandem control, the motor of the slave
axis is not subject to velocity control. A machine with a large amount of
backlash may become unstable if the motor of the slave axis vibrates as
a result of backlash in the gear. This can be overcome by applying
velocity control to the slave axis also. This velocity feedback average
function is enabled when bit 2 of parameter 2008 is set to 1.
Improved stability of a
closedloop system
The following two functions can increase the stability and position gain
of a closedloop system having a linear scale:
@Dual position feedback function
@Machine velocity feedback function
For details of these functions, refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a
series PARAMETER MANUAL (B65150E).
Notes on stability of
tandem control
An important factor affecting stability in tandem control is the capability

of back feed. Back feed is to cause movement along either the master or
slave axis from the other axis, via the transmission mechanism connecting
the two axes. A machine without this capability may be inclined to
become unstable and require adjustments.
98
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Connection of axis
signals
The DI/DO signals, generally connected to each axis, must be connected

only to the master axis of two axes of tandem control. The signals need
not be connected to the slave axis. The following signals, however, may
have to be connected depending on the application.
i) Controlled axis detach signal and servo off signal
Connect these signals so that the master and slave axis signals are
simultaneously input.
ii) Overtravel limit signal
Connect the signal so that 1 is always output as the overtravel limit
signal for the slave axis.
If the slave axis stroke limit must also be detected, connect the signals so
that the signal detected on the slave axis is sent to the overtravel limit
signal of the master axis.
Connecting motors
Connect the motors according to the servo axis numbers. Connect the
feedback cable of the slave axis.
(Sample connection for position feedback cable)
Axis control
JF1
JF2
Feedback cable for motor of master axis
Feedback cable for motor of slave axis
Adapter for separate

detector
JF21
Servo alarms
Feedback cable for separate detector
Motor overload and other servo alarms are displayed separately for the
Parameter
Setting data
(parameters)
The parameters that are generally set for each axis can, when set for axes
under tandem control, be classified into the following three groups:
i) Parameters in which identical values must be set for the master and
slave axes
ii) Parameters that must be specified only for the master axis (The
corresponding parameter for the slave axis is not used.)
iii) Parameters for which different values may be set for the master and
slave axes
99
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
The classifications of the parameters are described below. Any parameter

that is not listed in the tables for the three classifications should be
processed as a parameter of type i) and, specify identical values for the
WARNING
Note that, if different values are set for the master and slave
axes in a parameter of type i), the operations for the two
axes of tandem control will not be performed correctly.
Care must be taken to specify the following two servo parameters,

according to the directions of rotation around the master and slave
axes.
Parameter 2022: Direction of rotation of the motor
Parameter 2087: Preload value
In parameter 2022, specify 111 for forward rotation and 111 for the
reverse rotation.
In parameter 2087, specify values having identical signs when the
motors of the master and slave axes rotate in opposite directions.
Specify values having different signs when the motors of the master
and slave axes rotate in the same direction.
If a separate pulse coder is used, use of the separate pulse coder must
be set for the master axis. For the slave axis, use of a builtin pulse
coder must be set. Therefore, pay particular attention to setting the
following parameters.
Bit 1 of parameter 1815: Separate pulse coder
Bits 6 to 4 of parameter 1816: Detection multiplier (DMR)
Parameter 2024: Number of position detection feedback pulses
(PPLS)
Parameter 1821: Capacity of an optional reference counter
Parameter 2084: Numerator of flexible feed gear ratio
Parameter 2085: Denominator of flexible feed gear ratio
If, for example, a motor with serial pulse coder A is used with a linear
scale capable of detecting a position in 1mm units, and if a single
rotation of the motor produces a movement of 4 mm, specify the
parameters as shown below:
Master axis
Slave axis
No. 1815#1
No. 1816
=
=
1
01110000
0
01110000
No. 2024
4000
12500
No. 1821
No. 2084
=
=
4000
0
4000
4
No. 2085
1000
100
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameters that should

be set to only the master
axes

be set different values
between the master and
slave axes
Parameter No.
0012#0
0012#7
1004#7
1005#4
1005#5
1005#7
1022
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1423
1424
1425
1427
1430
1815#1
1815#5
2008#2
Meaning of parameters
Mirror image
Servo control off
Input unit 10 times
External deceleration in plus direction
External deceleration in minus direction
Servo control off
Parallel axis specification
External workpiece coordinate shift
Workpiece zero point offset by G54
Jog feedrate
Manual rapid traverse
FL rate in manual reference position return
External deceleration rate at rapid traverse
Maximum feedrate
Separate type pulse coder
Absolute pulse coder
Velocity feedback average function
Parameter No.
1020
1023
2022
2087
3115
Axis name
Servo axis number
Motor rotation direction
Preload value
Current position display
1310#0
1310#1
1320
1321
1322
1323
Soft OT2
Soft OT3
1st stroke limit of plus side
1st stroke limit of minus side
2nd stroke limit of plus side
2nd stroke limit of minus side
1816#6 to #4
1821
2024
2084
2085
Detection multiplier (DMR)

Arbitrary reference counter capacity
Position detection feedback pulses (PPLS)
Numerator of flexible feed gear ratio
Denominator of flexible feed gear ratio
101
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02

be set the same values
to the master and slave
axes
Parameter No.
1005#0
1005#1
1006#0
1006#1
1006#3
1006#5
1240
1241
1242
1243
1260
1420
1421
1620
Movement before reference position return

Dogless reference position setting
Rotary axis
Machine coordinate of rotary axis is rotary type
Diameter/radius specification
Direction of reference position return
Reference position as viewed from machine zero
Coordinate of 2nd reference position
Coordinate of 3rd reference position
Coordinate of 4th reference position
Move distance per rotation of rotary axis
Rapid traverse rate
F0 of rapid traverse override
Time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration
Time constant of rapid traverse bell shaped acceleration/deceleration
Time constant of feed exponential acceleration/deceleration
FL of feed exponential acceleration/deceleration
Time constant of manual continuous exponential acceleration/deceleration
FL of manual continuous exponential acceleration/deceleration
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration
during thread cutting cycle
FL of exponential acceleration/deceleration during
thread cutting cycle
Command multiplier (CMR)
Digital servo parameters
Digital servo parameters
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1820
18XX
20XX
#7
1817
#6
TAN
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#2
VFBAVE
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit axis (set to each axis)

Set both master and slave axes.
TAN Tandem control is
1 : ignored
0 : valid
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
2008
[Data type] Bit axis (set to each axis)

Set only to the master axes.
VFBAVE Velocity feedback average function
1 : invalid
0 : valid
102
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
2087
Preload of each axis (Tcmd offset)

[Unit of data] (Preamplifier limit) /7282
An offset is added to a torque command to reduce backlash.
Set a slightly large value than friction torque.
As a reference set a value onethird the rated torque.
[Example] To set a torque of 3A in the opposite direction under amplifier limit of
40A:
3 / (40 / 7282) = 546
Master side
= 546
Slave side
= 546
2021
Load inertia

Set the same value to the master and slave axes.
[Unit of data] (All load inertia) / (Motor inertia)
2022
256 / 2
Direction of rotation of motor

Set the direction of motor rotation.
If the rotation directions of master and slave axes are opposite, set them
by this parameter.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
417
Reference item
SERVO ALARM:
n AXIS DGTL PARAM
Description
Illegal values are set for parameter 1010,

1023, or 1817 when tandem control is performed.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
103
II.20.4
Tandem control
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.8
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL (T SERIES)
General
This function enables synchronous control, in which an axis can be

synchronized with another axis.
An axis can be moved in synchronization with another axis. This is done
by issuing a move command for one axis (synchronous master axis) to
another axis so that both axes behave in the same way. When this function
is used in conjunction with the parking function, which keeps an axis at
a rest by ignoring a move command for it, the following operations can
be performed.
(1) Two axes move in synchronization. (Both master and slave axes
move.)
(2) One axis moves according to a move command originally issued
to another axis, but the latter is kept at a stop. (The master parks,
but the salve moves.)
(3) The coordinate values for one axis are updated according to the
amount of movement specified for another axis, but the former is
kept at a rest. (The master moves, but the slave parks.)
CAUTION
1 The term synchronous control used here only refers to an
operation in which issuing the same move command to two
different servo systems at one time. Note that synchronous
control does not involve outofsynchronization
compensation, in which the deviation between two servo
motors is constantly checked and one of the servo motors
is subjected to compensation to reduce the deviation.
2 The term parking means to issue no move command to a
servo system. No coordinate values are updated during
parking. However appropriate parameter setting can
change absolute and relative coordinate systems.
3 If synchronous control is terminated during automatic
operation, a move command or coordinate system setting
may not be specified for the synchronous slave axis in the
current block and two blocks that follows it (or three blocks
for toolnose radius compensation).
104
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Automatic setting of
workpiece coordinate
system
D Explanation
D Setting and command
D Workpiece coordinate
value calculation method
When synchronous control is started for a workpiece coordinate system,

it is possible to specify the workpiece coordinate system automatically.
When synchronous control for a workpiece coordinate system is
terminated, it is possible to return the workpiece coordinate system to
ordinary machining (not synchronous control). The explanation of the
workpiece coordinate system used during synchronous control follows:
For example, when synchronous control is used to move an axis
differently from the way originally specified, the master axis may be
placed in a parking state, while the slave axis is allowed to move. In such
a case, it will be convenient if a coordinate system used to represent the
current position of the slave axis is used as a workpiece coordinate system
for the master axis. Conventionally, this workpiece coordinate system
must be specified by program when synchronous control is started,
because the workpiece coordinate system does not originally belong to
the master axis. This automatic workpiece coordinate system setting
function for synchronous control sets up this workpiece coordinate
system automatically. This function can also resume the original
workpiece coordinate system for the master axis automatically. This
function does not work for the slave axis.
In addition to setting ordinary synchronous control, parameters must be
specified as follows:
(1) To set up a workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control
automatically when starting synchronous control
Set parameter No. 8163 (SPMx) to 1. (Master axis parameter
only)
Set parameter No. 8185 with the coordinates of the master axis
when both master and slave axes are at the reference position.
(2) To resume the ordinary workpiece coordinate system
automatically when synchronous control is terminated
Set parameter No. 8163 (SPSx) to 1. (Master axis parameter
only)
Set parameter No. 1250 with the workpiece coordinates of the
master axis when the master axis is at the reference position.
This synchronous control can be specified using the G0138 signal
similarly to the ordinary synchronous control. When the signal is raised
to start synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system for the
master axis is automatically set up. Likewise, when the signal is dropped
to terminate synchronous control, the original workpiece coordinate
system for the master axis is set automatically.
(1) Workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control
(Master axis workpiece coordinate value)
= (parameter No. 8185 for the master axis)
" (slave axis machine coordinate value) .
) (master axis machine coordinate value)
) :Master axis parameter SCDx = 0

* :Master axis parameter SCDx = 1
Master axis parameter SCMx = 1 only
105

1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(2) Workpiece coordinate system for ordinary operation

+ (master axis machine coordinate value)
Others
S
If many slave axes are synchronized with one master axis, the master
axis is set with the workpiece coordinate system that corresponds to
the current position of the first slave axis that is synchronized with the
master axis.
S The same least command and input increments must be applied to both
S The tool offset is taken into consideration when the coordinate system
is set up. So, the coordinate system is set up normally even when tool
geometry compensation is applied.
S If synchronous control that involves automatic coordinate system
setting is started or terminated during automatic operation, a move
command or other commands that reference the current position of an
axis may not be specified in the current block and two blocks that
follows it (or three blocks for toolnose radius compensation), except
for an M code in which the current block is not buffered; for the M
code, a move command can be executed in the block next to the block
that involves synchronous control.
Signal
Synchronous control
axis selection signals
SYNC1 to SYNC8 <G138>
[Function] These signals perform synchronous control.
[Operation] When one of these signals becomes 1, the control unit:
S Begins synchronous control in such a way that the corresponding axis
becomes a slave axis.
The axis with which the slave axis is synchronized is determined by
parameter No. 8180.
Parking signals PK1 to

PK8 <G122>
[Function] These signals place each axis in a parking state.
S Places the corresponding axis in a parking state.
If the corresponding axis is under synchronous control, it enters a parking
state immediately regardless of whether the axis is moving. If a parking
signal is set to 1 without specifying synchronous control, it is ignored.
106
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Synchronous control
under way signals
SYN1O to SYN8O <F118>
[Function] These signals indicate each axis is being subjected to synchronous
control.
[Operation] These signals become 1 under the following condition:
S The corresponding axis is under synchronous control.
These signals become 0 under the following condition:
S
The corresponding axis is not under synchronous control.

CAUTION
Whether each axis is under synchronous control does not
always match whether the corresponding selection signal
(synchronous control axis selection signal) has been issued
or not. For example, if these signals are set to 1 during an
alarm, they are ignored. If a servo alarm occurs during
synchronous control, it is terminated automatically. Before
attempting to perform synchronous control, always check
the state of these signals.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
SYNC4
#2
SYNC3
#1
SYNC2
#0
SYNC1
PK8
PK7
PK6
PK5
PK4
PK3
PK2
PK1
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
SYN4O
#2
SYN3O
#1
SYN2O
#0
SYN1O
#7
NRS
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G0138
G0122
F0118
Parameter
8160
[Data type] Bit

NRS When the system is reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control is:
0 : Released.
1 : Not released.
107
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
8162
#2
PKUx
#1
#0
SMRx

SMRx Synchronous mirrorimage control is:
0 : Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.)
1 : Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.)
PKUx In the parking sate,
0 : The absolute, relative, and machine coordinates are not updated.
1 : The absolute and relative coordinates are updated. The machine
coordinates are not updated.
#7
#6
#5
8163
#4
SCDx
#3
SCMx
#2
SPSx
#1
SPMx
#0

Set the parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx for the master axis.
These settings are referenced during automatic workpiece coordinate
setting for the master axis at the start of synchronous control.
SPMx When synchronous control is started, automatic workpiece coordinate
system setting for the master axis is
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
NOTE
When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at
the start of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
system is calculated from the current machine coordinates
and the workpiece coordinates of each axis at the reference
position set in parameter No. 8185.
SPSx When synchronous control terminates, automatic workpiece coordinate
system setting for the master axis is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
NOTE
the end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
and the workpiece coordinates for each axis at the
reference position set in parameter No. 1250.
SCMx When workpiece coordinates are calculated in synchronous control:
0 : The workpiece coordinates are calculated from the machine
coordinates of the slave axis.
coordinates of the master axis and slave axis.
108
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the
coordinate system in synchronous control are:
0 : Identical.
1 : Opposite.
8180
Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control

[Valid data range] 201, 202, 203, ... to 200 plus the maximum number of control axes
This parameter specifies the number of the master axis with which an axis
is synchronized. When zero is specified, the axis does not become a slave
axis and is not synchronized with another axis. When an identical number
is specified in two or more axes, one master axis has two or more slave
axes.
In the parameter of a slave axis, specify 200 plus the number of the master
axis with which the slave axis is to be synchronized.
Setting: 201 to 208
The value specified here must not exceed 200 plus the maximum number
of control axes.
[Example] Synchronizing the Yaxis with the Zaxis
Parameter No. 8180x
0
Parameter No. 8180z
0
Parameter No. 8180c
0
Parameter No. 8180y 202
8185
Workpiece coordinates on each axis at the reference position

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
This parameter sets the workpiece coordinates on each master axis,

subject to synchronous control, when the master and slave axes are at the
reference position. This parameter is enabled when SPMx of bit 1
parameter No. 8163 is set to 1. Set this parameter for the master axis.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
225
Axis recomposition error
Description
This alarm occurs under either of the following conditions. (It is detected when synchronous control is specified.)
(1) There is an error in axis number parameter setting.
(2) There is an error in a control command.
226
A move command was issued A move command was issued to an axis to be

to a synchronous axis.
synchronized with another axis.
109
1. AXIS CONTROL
Warning, Caution, and

Note for synchronous
control
B63003EN1/02
WARNING
1 When synchronous control is started or terminated, the
target axes must be at a stop.
2 All axes subjected to synchronous control must have the
same least command increment, detection unit, and
diameter/radius specification. Otherwise, the amount of
movement will differ from one axis to another.
3 During synchronous control, do not change the parameters
related to synchronous control.
4 Before starting synchronous control after an emergency
stop, servooff, or servo alarm is released, be sure to make
a return to the reference position and set up the necessary
coordinate system.
5 Before starting synchronous control, make sure that for the
target axes, a reference position return after poweron has
been made and a reference position has been set up
according to the absolute pulse coder.
6 Acceleration/deceleration control, pitch error compensation, backlash compensation, and stored stroke limit check
are performed independently of synchronization control.
7 The program cannot issue a move command to the slave
axis under synchronization control.
8 The same acceleration/deceleration time constants and
servo parameters should be used for the axes subjected to
synchronous control as much as possible.
9 The workpiece coordinate system of a synchronous slave
is not affected by the synchronous master axis operations
that affect the workpiece coordinate system but do not
cause the machines to move, such as workpiece coordinate
system set/shift and geometry offset commands.
10 If a wear offset command or tooltip radius compensation
is performed for a synchronous master axis, the travel path
of the slave axis is shifted by the offset, but the offset is not
set (no offset vector is created).
11 When using parking signal PK7 or PK8 while both spindle
synchronous control and simple spindle synchronous
control are being applied, set the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter
No. 4800) to 1. This sets parking signals PKESS1 and
PKESS2, used for simple spindle synchronous control, to
#6 and #7 of G031.
CAUTION
1 Acceleration/deceleration control, pitch error compensation, backlash compensation, and stored stroke limit check
are carried out regardless of synchronous control.
2 A move command should not be issued to a synchronous
slave axis during synchronous control.
110
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 More than one axis can be placed in synchronous state at
the same time. However, an axis cannot be synchronized
with more than one axis simultaneously.
2 Synchronous control and simplified synchronous control
cannot be specified simultaneously.
Restrictions imposed
during synchronous
control
Function
During synchronous control
Acceleration/deceleration control
The same type of acceleration/deceleration control is performed for the synchronous axes, but different time constants are
used.
Linear acceleration/deceleration Not carried out for any axes during synchroafter cutting feed interpolation
nous control.
Feedrate clamping
The axes are clamped at the feedrate of the

master axis.
Reference position return
A reference position return is possible for

the master axis unless it is in a parking
state. In a parking state, only automatic reference position return (G28) is possible for
the master axis (*1).
Reference position return check
Possible (*2)
PMC axis control
Possible for other than synchronous slave

axes.
Polar coordinate interpolation and Possible

cylindrical interpolation
Handle interrupt
Performed regardless of synchronous control
Axial mirror image
Each signal originally belonging to a particular axis is effective for that axis.
Machine lock
Each signal originally belonging to a particular axis is effective for that axis.
Interlock
The signals for the master axis are effective

for the slave axes.
Override

for the slave axes.
External deceleration

for the slave axes.
Skip function
Ineffective for slave axes.
Automatic tool compensation
Tool setter
Followup
Impossible during synchronous control.
Program restart
Impossible for a program involving synchronous control.
Cs axis
Synchronous control is impossible.
111
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
WARNING
If a reference position return command is issued for a
synchronous master axis during synchronous control, it is
executed normally for the master axis, but the slave axis
does not return to their reference position (the slave axis
only moves in synchronization with the reference position
return of the master axis) except for an automatic reference
position return (G28) issued when the master axis is in a
parking state, in which case the amount of movement is
calculated so that the slave axis returns to its reference
position provided that a reference position return has been
carried out for the slave axis. If more than one slave axis
belongs to one master axis, a reference position return
command is executed so that the lowestnumbered slave
axis returns to its reference position. A return to the second
(third or fourth) reference position by the G30 command
works in the same way as G28.
CAUTION
If a reference position return check (G27) is specified during
synchronous control, the master and slave axes move to the
specified position. Upon completion of axis movement, a
check is made to see whether the master axis is at its
reference position (no check is made for the slave axes)
unless the master axis is in a parking state, in which case
a check is made to see whether the lowestnumbered slave
axis is at its reference position after completion of
positioning.
Reading the coordinate

values during
synchronous control
The following list summarizes how positional information such as

custom macro system variables and current coordinates from the PMC
window are read during synchronous control.
Positional information
During synchronous control
Absolute coordinate
Readable
Machine coordinate
Readable
End of each block
Readable only for the master axis
Skip signal position
112
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Terminating
synchronous control
Synchronous control is terminated not only when the corresponding

synchronization signal becomes off but also when one of the following
conditions occurs.
(1) Emergency stop
(2) Reset
(3) Servo alarm
(4) Servo off
(5) Overtravel
(6) Alarm related to synchronous control
(7) P/S000 alarm
The above conditions terminate synchronous control for all axes.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
113
II.19.4
Synchronous control
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL AND
COMPOSITE
CONTROL (T SERIES
(TWOPATH
CONTROL))
1.9.1
The T series CNC has two independent control paths. For example, it can
be used to control two turrets of a multipleturret lathe independently.
The axes (such as X1and Z1axes) belonging to path 1 are controlled by
commands in path 1, and the axes (such as X2 and Z2axes) belonging
to path 2 are controlled by commands in path 2.
Overview
Independent control in
each path
Z1
Machining is performed by
a path 2 program.
Turret 1
X1
Workpiece 1
Machining is performed by a path

1 program.
Workpiece 2
X2
Turret 2
Z2
This function enables synchronous control between paths or within a

path, composite control between paths, and superimposed control
between paths, as explained below.
(1) Synchronous control
S Synchronization of an axis in one path with an axis in the other path
(Example) Synchronization of the Z1axis with the Z2axis
114
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Turret 1
X1
Workpiece
Z1
Z2 (synchronized with the Z1axis)

Machining is performed by a path 1 program.
Synchronization of an axis in one path with another axis in the same

path
(Example) Synchronization of the Z1axis with the B1axis
Turret 1
X1

Workpiece 1
Z1
115
Tail stock

B1
(synchronized with the Z1axis)
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(2) Composite control

S Interchanging move commands for an axis in one path with those for
an axis in the other path.
(Example) Interchanging commands between the X1 and X2axes
Control both X2 and Z1axes by commands in a path 1 program
Control both X1 and Z2axes by commands in a path 2 program
a path 1 program.
X1
Workpiece 1
Z1
Turret 1
Turret 2
Workpiece 2
116

Z2
X2
Machining is performed by a
path 2 program.
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(3) Superimposed control

S Superimposing move commands for an axis in one path on an axis in
the other path
(Example) Superimposing the movement of the Z1axis on the Z2axis
Machining is performed by a
path 1 program.
Turret 1
X1
Workpiece 1

Z1
X2
Turret 2
Z2
1.9.2
Synchronous Control
An axis in one path can be synchronized with another axis in the same path
or an axis in another path. This is done by issuing the same move
commands for one axis (synchronous master axis) to another axis
(synchronous slave axis). Using parameter SMRx (bit 0 of parameter No.
8162) can cause the slave axis to move in the direction opposite to that
of the master axis. It is possible to place either the master or slave axis
in a parking state. The term parking here means to discontinue giving
move commands to a servo system. No coordinates are updated in the
parking state. Note however that absolute and relative coordinates can be
updated using parameter PKUx (bit 2 of parameter No. 8162).
117
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter No. 8180 specifies which axis is to be synchronized with which

axis.
1.9.2.1
Setting
(Example)
To synchronize the Z1axis with the Z2axis:
Parameter No. 8180z of path 1 = 2
To synchronize the Y2axis with the X1axis:
Parameter No. 8180y of path 2 = 1
To synchronize the Y1axis with the X1axis:
Use M codes for wait, beginning, and terminating synchronization in a

machining program in the stated order. It is also possible to begin and
terminate synchronous control without using M codes.
1.9.2.2
Programming
When synchronization begins or ends (when an M code is issued, for

example), the synchronous control axis selection signals SYNC1 to
SYNC7 for the slave axis (from the PMC to the CNC) are changed from
0 to 1 (to begin synchronization) or from 1 to 0 (to terminate
synchronization). To place an axis in a parking state, a parking signal PK1
to PK7 is set to 1 for the target axis.
1.9.2.3
Signal operation
1.9.2.4
Examples of applications
The following operations can be performed by using the synchronization

functions together with the parking function, which causes move
commands for an axis to be ignored and keeps the axis at a rest.
(1) Moving an axis in one path in synchronization with an axis in the other
path (Both master and slave axes move.)
(Example 1) Synchronizing the Z2axis with the Z1axis
(machining with both ends of a workpiece chucked)

Turret 1
X1
Z1
Z2 (synchronized with the Z1axis)
(Example 2) Synchronizing the X2 and Z2axes with the X1 and

Z1axes (balanced cutting)
118
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Z1
Turret 1
X1

X2
Turret 2
Z2
(Example 3) Synchronizing the B1axis (tail stock axis) with the

Z1axis

Turret 1
X1
Workpiece 1
Z1
Tail stock
B1
(synchronized with the Z1axis)
(2) Moving an axis in one path using move commands for an axis in the
other path (The master axis parks and the slave axis moves.)
(3) Updating the coordinates of an axis in one path by the amount of
movement for an axis in the other path (The master axis moves and the
slave axis parks.)
Using method (2) or (3) can control one motor from both paths.
(Example 4) Sharing one motor with the Z1 and Z2axes
(assuming that the motor is linked to the Z1axis)
119
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Master axis parking
Turret 1
The X2 and Z1axes are moved by

commands in a path 2 program (by
synchronizing the Z1axis with the
Z2axis). At this point, the Z2axis is
kept in a parking state. The coordinates of both Z1 and Z2axes are updated.
X1
X2
Z1
Turret 2
Slave axis parking
The X1 and Z1axes are moved by

commands in a path 1 program (by synchronizing the Z2axis with the Z1axis).
At this point, the Z2axis is kept in a parking state. For the Z2axis, only the coordinates are updated.
Turret 1
Z1
X1
X2
Turret 2
Because the coordinates of both Z1 and Z2axes are updated, move

commands can be executed immediately, without resetting up the
coordinate system, when the synchronization state is switched.
120
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.2.5
Reference position
return and its check
during synchronous
control
If a reference position return command is issued for a synchronous master

axis during synchronous control, it is executed normally for the master
axis, but the slave axis does not return to its reference position (the slave
axis only moves in synchronization with the reference position return of
the master axis) except for an automatic reference position return (G28)
issued when the master axis is in a parking state, in which case the amount
of movement is calculated so that the slave axis returns to its reference
position provided that a reference position return has been carried for the
slave axis. If more than one slave axis belongs to one master axis, a
reference position return command is executed so that the
lowestnumbered slave axis returns to its reference position. If the master
axis in one path is subjected to both synchronization with an axis in the
same path and synchronization with an axis in the other path
simultaneously, the lowestnumbered slave axis in the two paths is
moved to the reference position.
A return to the second (third or fourth) reference position by the G30
command works in the same way as G28. In other words, usually only
the master axis moves to the second (third or fourth) reference position.
If the master axis is parking, the lowestnumbered axis is caused to move
to its second (third or fourth) reference position.
If a reference position return check (G27) is specified during synchronous
control, the master and slave axes move to the specified position. Upon
completion of movement, a check is made to see whether the master axis
is at its reference position (no check is made for the salve axes) unless the
master axis is in a parking state, in which case a check is made upon
completion of positioning to see whether the lowestnumbered slave axis
is at its reference position.
1.9.2.6
Outofsynchronization
detection
The term synchronous control used here only refers to an operation in

which the same move command is issued to two different servo systems
at one time. Note that synchronous control does not involve
outofsynchronization compensation, in which the positional deviation
between two servo motors is constantly checked and one of the servo
motors is subjected to compensation to reduce the deviation. However,
using parameter SERx (bit 1 of parameter No. 8162) can specify detection
of outofsynchronization.
If outofsynchronization is detected, synchronous control is
immediately terminated, turning off the servo ready signal.
CAUTION
Outofsynchronization detection is
synchronous control within one path.
121
not
applied
to
1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.2.7
Move command after
switching between
independent control and
synchronous control
B63003EN1/02
If synchronous control is terminated during automatic operation, do not

issue a move command or coordinate system setting for the synchronous
slave axis in the current block and one or two (during toolnose radius
compensation) subsequent blocks. This restriction is intended to reflect
the coordinates changed during synchronous control in the preprocessing
for the subsequent blocks.
(Example) Terminating synchronous control of the Zaxis (slave axis)
in block N200
N190 ..... ;
N200 M55 ; (This M code terminates synchronous control.)
N210 ..... ;
N220 ..... ;
N230 ..... ;
In this example, block N210 (and N220 during toolnose radius
compensation) cannot issue a move command to the Zaxis. However,
if the M55 code does not involve buffering, it can be issued in block N210
to move the Zaxis or update its coordinates. For other than the Zaxis,
block N210 can issue move commands. These restrictions do not apply
to the synchronous master axis.
1.9.2.8
Automatic setting of a
system
Setting and commands
When synchronous control is started in a workpiece coordinate system,

it is possible to specify the workpiece coordinate system automatically.
When synchronous control for a workpiece coordinate system is
terminated, it is possible to return the workpiece coordinate system to
ordinary machining (not synchronous control). The explanation of the
workpiece coordinate system used during synchronous control follows.
When synchronous control is used to move an axis differently from the
way originally specified, for example, the master axis may be placed in
a parking state, while the slave axis is allowed to move. In such a case,
it will be convenient if a coordinate system that indicates the current
position of the slave axis is used as a workpiece coordinate system for the
master axis. Conventionally, this workpiece coordinate system must be
specified by program when synchronous control is started, because the
workpiece coordinate system does not originally belong to the master
axis. This automatic workpiece coordinate system setting function for
synchronous control sets up this workpiece coordinate system
automatically. This function can also resume the original workpiece
coordinate system for the master axis automatically. This function does
not work for the slave axis.
In addition to setting ordinary synchronous control, parameters must be
specified as follows:
(1) To set up a workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control
automatically when starting synchronous control
Set parameter SPMx (bit 1 of parameter No. 8163) to 1.
Set parameter No. 8185 with the coordinates of the slave axis reference
position relative to the coordinates of the master axis when the master
axis is at the reference position.
122
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(2) To resume the ordinary workpiece coordinate system automatically

when terminating synchronous control
Set parameter SPSx (parameter No. 8163) to 1.
Set parameter No. 1250 with the master axis coordinates in the
workpiece coordinate system when the master axis is at the reference
position.
D Workpiece coordinate
calculation method
This synchronous control can be specified using the synchronous control

axis selection signal (SYNC1 to SYNC7) similarly to the ordinary
synchronous control. When the signal is raised to start synchronous
control, a workpiece coordinate system for the master axis is
automatically set up. When the signal is dropped to terminate
synchronous control, the original workpiece coordinate system for the
master axis is resumed automatically.
(1) Workpiece coordinate system for synchronous control
" (slave axis machine coordinate value) . . . . . .
+ (master axis machine coordinate value) . . . . .

+: Master axis parameter SCDx (bit 4 of parameter No. 8163) = 0

: Master axis parameter SCDx (bit 3 of parameter No. 8163) = 1
Master axis parameter SCMx (bit 3 of parameter No. 8163) = 1 only
(2) Workpiece coordinate system for ordinary operation

+ (master axis machine coordinate value)
Caution
CAUTION
1 The same least command and input increments must apply
to both master and slave axes.
2 If synchronous control that involves automatic coordinate
system setting is started or terminated during automatic
operation, a move command or other commands that
reference the current position of an axis may not be
specified in the current block and one or two (during
toolnose radius compensation) blocks, except when the M
code in the current block does not involve buffering.
123
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 If more than one slave axis is synchronized with one master
axis, the master axis is set with the workpiece coordinate
system that corresponds to the current position of the first
slave axis that is synchronized with the master axis.
2 The tool offset is taken into account when the coordinate
system is set up. So, the coordinate system is set up
normally even when tool geometry compensation is
applied.
1.9.3
Composite Control
1.9.3.1
Setting
Move commands can be interchanged between an axis in one path and an

axis in the other path. In other words, when a machining program is
executed for one path, actual machining can be performed with an axis in
the other path. Coordinate systems can also be switched automatically
between independent control and composite control.
Parameter No. 8183 of path 2 specifies the axes between which

commands are to be interchanged.
(Example) Between the X1 and X2axes:
Parameter No. 8183x of path 2 = 1
Between the Y1 and X2axes:
Parameter No. 8183x of path 2 = 4
Between The X1 and Y2axes:
To set up coordinate systems automatically when composite control
begins or ends, set parameters MPMx and MPSx (bits 4 and 5 of
parameter No. 8162) to 1, and specify the positional relationship
between the coordinate systems in parameter No. 8184.
1.9.3.2
Programming
1.9.3.3
Signal operation
Use M codes for wait, beginning, and terminating composite control in

a machining program in the stated order. It is also possible to begin and
terminate composite control without using M codes.
When composite control begins or ends (when an M code is issued), the

composite control axis selection signals MIX1 to MIX7 for the target axis
in path 1 (from the PMC to the CNC) are changed from 0 to 1 (to
begin composite control) or from 1 to 0 (to end composite control).
124
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Suppose that a machine has the X1 and Z1axes belonging to path 1 and
the X2 and Z2axes belonging to path 2 and that a workpiece moves
along the Z1 and Z2axes as directed by move commands. The
following examples interchange commands between the X1 and
X2axes.
1.9.3.4
(1) Independent control
X1
Turret 1
Workpiece 2
Workpiece 1
Z2
Z1
X2
Turret 2
(2) Composite control

Turret 1
X1

Workpiece 2
Workpiece 1
Z1
X2
Z2
Turret 2
During composite control, the X2 and Z1axes are moved by a path 1

program, and the workpiece coordinates of the Xaxis in path 1 indicates
the position of turret 2. Similarly, the X1 and Z2axes are moved by a
path 2 program, and the workpiece coordinates of the Xaxis in path 2
indicates the position of turret 1.
125
1. AXIS CONTROL
1.9.3.5
Spindle control
1.9.3.6
Tool offset during
composite control
1.9.3.7
Reference position
return during composite
control
1.9.3.8
Move commands after
the control mode is
switched between
independent control and
composite control
B63003EN1/02
The composite control function does not switch the spindle speed
command or the feed per rotation command based on feedback pulses
from the position coder. Therefore, the spindle speed command and
feedback pulses should be switched using the following signals. (See
Section 9.4.2 for details.)
S
Spindle command selection signal SLSPA <G063#2> and SPSPB

<G063#3>
Spindle feedback selection signal SLPCA <G064#2> and SLPCB

<G064#3>
A preset offset or toolnose radius compensation is not changed when the

control mode is switched between independent control and composite
control. It is necessary to reset the offset using a T code after the control
mode is switched.
If G28 is issued to specify an automatic reference position return for an

axis in one path during composite control, an amount of movement is
calculated so that the associated axis in the other path can move to the
reference position. In this case, the reference position for that axis must
have already been established. A manual reference position return is not
allowed.
If the control mode is switched between independent control and

composite control during automatic operation, do not issue a move
command or coodinate system setting for the switched axis in the current
block and one or two (during toolnose radius compensation) subsequent
blocks. This restriction is intended to reflect the coordinates changed due
to coordinate system setting during control mode switching in the
preprocessing for the subsequent blocks.
(Example) Starting composite control to switch between the X1 and
X2axes in block N200
N190 ..... ;
N200 M55 ; (This M code starts composite control.)
N210 ..... ;
N220 ..... ;
N230 ..... ;
In this example, block N210 (and N220 during toolnose radius
compensation) cannot issue a move command to the Xaxis. However,
if the M55 code does not involve buffering, it can be issued in block N210
to move the Xaxis or update its coordinates. For other than the Xaxis,
block N210 can issue move commands.
126
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.4
Superimposed Control
1.9.4.1
Setting
The superimposed control function adds the amount of movement of an

axis (superimposed control master axis) in one path to an axis
(superimposed control slave axis) on the other path for which ordinary
move commands are being executed. This function is similar to
synchronous control but differs from it in that move commands can be
issued not only for the master axis but also for the slave axis. The slave
axis moves by the sum of the amount of movement specified by its own
move commands and the amount of movement specified by move
commands for the master axis. Appropriate setting of parameter OMRx
(bit 3 of parameter No. 8162) can reverse the direction in which the master
and slave axes move.
Parameter No. 8186 specifies between which axes move commands are
to be superimposed.
(Example) To superimpose the amount of movement of the Z2axis to
that of the Z1axis: Parameter No. 8186z of path 1 = 2
To superimpose the amount of movement of the X1axis to
that of the Y2axis: Parameter No. 8186y of path 2 = 1
1.9.4.2
Programming
1.9.4.3
Signal operation
Use M codes for wait, beginning, and terminating superimposed control

in a machining program in the stated order. It is also possible to begin and
terminate superimposed control without using M codes.
When superimposed control begins or ends (when an M code is issued),

the superimposed control axis selection signals OVLS1 to OVLS7 for the
target slave axis (from the PMC to the CNC) are changed from 0 to 1
(to begin superimposed control) or from 1 to 0 (to terminate
superimposed control).
127
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.4.4
Suppose that a workpiece on the spindle (Z1axis) that moves along the
axis is to be cut with a tool in path 1 and a tool in path 2 simultaneously.
This example superimposes the amount of movement of the Z1axis on
that of the Z2axis.
a path 1 program.
Turret 1
X1
Workpiece 1
Z1
X2
Turret 2
Z2
1.9.4.5
Feedrate
Because the amount of movement of the master axis is added to that of

the slave axis, the resulting speed of the slave axis may become much
more larger than a normal speed (such as rapid traverse speed specified
in a parameter). To solve this problem, it is necessary to set feedrates that
are used only during superimposed control. The feedrates and time
constants that are used only during superimposed control include:
S
S
S
S
(S
Rapid traverse rate: Parameter No. 8190

Rapid traverse override F0 rate: parameter No. 8191
Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration time constant:
Parameter No. 8192
Maximum cutting feedrate: Parameter No. 8193
Manual rapid traverse rate:
Parameter No. 8190 or 1424 whichever is smaller)
128
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
These special parameters are used for both master and slave axes during
superimposed control. Appropriate values should be specified with the
resulting feedrate taken into account. When superimposed control begins
or ends during automatic operation, it is impossible to switch the
maximum cutting feedrate in the current block and the next block. If an
M code that does not involve buffering is used to direct superimposed
control to begin or end, the maximum cutting feedrate is switched in a
block next to the current block. The rates other than the maximum cutting
feedrate are switched immediately when superimposed control begins or
ends.
1.9.4.6
Differences between
superimposed control
and ordinary
synchronous control
Neither outofsynchronization compensation or detection is

performed between the master and slave axes during superimposed
control.
S A parking signal is ineffective for axes under superimposed control.
S When superimposed control is terminated during automatic operation,
move commands and coordinate system setting can be executed for the
slave axis immediately. Unlike synchronous control, superimposed
control does not inhibit move commands in two or three blocks
including the current block.
S A reference position return cannot be specified for the salve axis under
superimposed control.
1.9.5
Signal
Synchronous control
SYNC1 to SYNC7
<G138#0 to G138#6>
[Function] These signals perform synchronous control.
S Begins synchronous control in such a way that the corresponding axis
becomes a slave axis.
The axis with which the slave axis is synchronized is determined by
parameter No. 8180.
Parking signals PK1 to

PK7 <G122#0 to G122#6>
[Function] These signals place each axis in a parking state.
S Places the corresponding axis in a parking state.
129
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
If the corresponding axis is under synchronous control, it enters a parking

state immediately regardless of whether the axis is moving. If a parking
signal is set to 1 without specifying synchronous control, it is ignored.
Composite control axis

selection signal MIX1 to
MIX7 <G128#0 to
G128#6>
[Function] These signals perform composite control.
S Begins composite control over the corresponding axis.
The axis with which the corresponding axis is controlled together is
determined by parameter No. 8183.
NOTE
These signals are available only for path 1.
Superimposed control
OVLS1 to OVLS7
<G190#0 to G190#6>
[Function] These signals perform superimposed control.
S Begins superimposed control over the corresponding axis.
The master axis is selected according to parameter No. 8186.
Synchronous/composite/
under way signals
SYN1O to SYN7O
<F118#0 to F118#6>
[Function] These signals indicate each axis is being
synchronous/composite/superimposed control.
subjected
to
[Output condition] These signals become 1 under the following condition:

S The corresponding axis is under synchronous, composite, or
130
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
These signals become 0 under the following condition:

S
The corresponding axis is not under synchronous, composite, or

CAUTION
Whether each axis is under synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control does not always match whether the
corresponding selection signal (synchronous control axis
selection,
composite control axis selection, or
superimposed control axis selection signal) has been
issued or not. For example, if these signals are set to 1
during an alarm, they are ignored. If a servo alarm occurs
during these types of control, they are terminated
automatically. Before attempting to perform these types of
control, always check the state of these signals.
Signal address
G122
#7
#6
PK7
#5
PK6
#4
PK5
#3
PK4
#2
PK3
#1
PK2
#0
PK1
G128
MIX7
MIX6
MIX5
MIX4
MIX3
MIX2
MIX1
G138
SYNC7
SYNC6
SYNC5
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
G190
OVLS7
OVLS6
OVLS5
OVLS4
OVLS3
OVLS2
OVLS1
#7
#6
SYN7O
#5
SYN6O
#4
SYN5O
#3
SYN4O
#2
SYN3O
#1
SYN2O
#0
SYN1O
#7
NRS
#6
SPE
#5
#4
#3
#2
ZSI
#1
XSI
#0
MXC
F118
1.9.6
Parameter
8160
[Data type] Bit

MXC During mixed control of the X or Zaxis, measurement direct input of
tool offset value measured B performs calculation based on:
0 : Machine coordinates for the path being controlled
1 : Machine coordinates for another path subject to mixed control
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid for setting tool compensation values
for the X or Z axis and setting shift of the workpiece
coordinate system for the Zaxis in direct input of tool offset
value measured B.
2 This parameter cannot be used when mixed control is
applied to paths for which different minimum command
increments (metric or inch) are specified.
131
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
XSI When MXC = 1, the machine coordinates along the Xaxis for the other
path subject to mixed control are fetched:
0 : With the sign as is
1 : With the sign inverted
ZSI When MXC = 1, machine coordinates along the Zaxis for the other path
subject to mixed control are fetched:
0 : With the sign as is
1 : With the sign inverted
SPE The synchronization deviation is:
0 : The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis
and that of the slave axis.
1 : The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis
and that of the slave axis plus the acceleration/deceleration delay.
NOTE
When the master and slave axes have different
acceleration/deceleration time constants, set 1.
NRS When the system is reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control is:
0 : Released.
1 : Not released.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
8161
#1
CZM
#0
NMR
[Data type] Bit

NMR When an axis subject to mixed control is placed in servooff state:
0 : Mixed control is stopped.
1 : Mixed control is not stopped, provided bit 0 (FUP) of parameter No.
1819 is set to 1 to disable followup for the axis.
NOTE
Mixed control is not stopped only when bit 0 (FUP) of
parameter No. 1819 is set to 1. If followup is disabled with
the followup signal (*FLWU <G007 bit 5> =1), mixed
control is stopped.
CZM When two Cs contour axes are subject to mixed control, the function for
mixing reference position return commands for Cs contour axes is:
0 : Not used
1 : Used
8162
#7
MUMx
#6
MCDx
#5
MPSx
#4
MPMx
#3
OMRx
#2
PKUx
#1
SERx
#0
SMRx

SMRx Synchronous mirrorimage control is:
0 : Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.)
1 : Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.)
132
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
SERx The synchronization deviation is:

0 : Not detected.
1 : Detected.
NOTE
When both master and slave axes move in synchronization,
the positioning deviations of the corresponding axes are
compared with each other. If the difference is larger than or
equal to the value specified in parameter No. 8181, an alarm
occurs.
When either axis is in the parking or
machinelocked state, however, the synchronization
deviation is not detected.
PKUx In the parking state,
0 : The absolute, relative, and machine coordinates are not updated.
1 : The absolute and relative coordinates are updated. The machine
coordinates are not updated.
WARNING
Set the parameter to 1 for any axes for which polar
coordinate interpolation will be specified. Otherwise,
coordinates may shift when single block stop or feed hold
is specified in polar coordinate interpolation mode.
OMRx Superimposed mirrorimage control is:
0 : Not applied. (The superimposed pulse is simply added.)
1 : Applied. (The inverted superimposed pulse is added.)
MPMx When composite control is started, the workpiece coordinate system is:
0 : Not set automatically.
1 : Set automatically.
NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set
at the start of composite control, it is calculated from the
following: Current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates at the reference point of each axis (parameter
No. 8184).
MPSx When composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system
is:
0 : Not set automatically.
1 : Set automatically.
NOTE
When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set
at the end of composite control, it is calculated from the
following: Current machine coordinates and the workpiece
coordinates at the reference point of each axis under
composite control (parameter No. 1250)
133
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have the
coordinate systems placed:
0 : In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (The axes
of paths 1 and 2 move in the same direction.)
1 : In opposite directions. Mirrorimage composite control is applied.
(The axes of paths 1 and 2 move in opposite directions.)
This parameter determines the direction in which an axis moves. The
parameter is also used to automatically set the coordinate system when
composite control is started or terminated.
X1
MCDz MCDz
0
0
X2
Z1
Z2
X1
MCDz MCDz
0
1
Z1
Z2
X2
X1
MCDz MCDz
1
0
X2
Z1
Z2
X1
MCDz MCDz
1
1
Z1
Z2
X2
MUMx In mixed control, a move command for the axis:

0 : Can be specified.
1 : Cannot be specified.
NOTE
Upon the execution of a move command along an axis for
which MUMx is set to 1 during mixed control, alarm P/S 226
is issued.
134
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
8163
#4
SCDx
#3
SCMx
#2
SPSx
#1
SPMx
#0
MDXx
NOTE
Set the parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx for the
master axis.
These settings are referenced during
automatic workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis
at the start of synchronous control.
MDXx In mixed control, the current position (absolute/relative coordinates)
display indicates:
0 : Coordinates in the local system.
1 : Coordinates in the other system under mixed control.
SPMx When synchronous control is started, automatic workpiece coordinate
system setting for the master axis is
0 : Not Performed.
1 : Performed.
NOTE
the start of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
and the workpiece coordinates of each axis at the reference
position set in parameter No. 8185.
SPSx When synchronous control terminates, automatic workpiece coordinate

system setting for the master axis is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
NOTE
the end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate
and the workpiece coordinates for each axis at the
reference position set in parameter No. 1250.
SCMx When workpiece coordinates are calculated in synchronous control:

coordinates of the slave axis.
coordinates of the master axis and slave axis.
SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the
coordinate system in synchronous control are:
0 : Identical.
1 : Opposite.
135
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx must be specified for the
master axis. These parameter settings are referenced in automatic setting
of the workpiece coordinates for the master axis when synchronization
control begins.
8180
Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... to the maximum number of control axes, or 201, 202, 203, ...
to 200 plus the maximum number of control axes
This parameter specifies the number of the master axis with which an axis
is synchronized. When zero is specified, the axis does not become a slave
axis and is not synchronized with another axis. When an identical number
is specified in two or more axes, one master axis has two or more slave
axes.
S Exercising synchronous control between two paths
In the parameter of a slave axis, specify the axis number of the master
axis with which the salve axis is to be synchronized.
Setting: 1 to 8
The value specified here must not exceed the maximum number of
control axes.
(Example 1) Synchronizing the Z2axis with the Z1axis
Path 1
Path 2
Parameter No. 8180x 0
Parameter No. 8180z 0
Parameter No. 8180c 0
S Exercising synchronous control in a path
In the parameter of a slave axis , specify 200 plus the number of the
master axis with which the slave axis is to be synchronized.
Setting: 201 to 208
The value specified here must not exceed 200 plus the maximum
number of control axes.
(Example 1) Synchronizing the Y1axis with the Z1axis
Path 1
Path 2
Parameter No. 8180x
Parameter No. 8180z
0
Parameter No. 8180z
Parameter No. 8180c
0
Parameter No. 8180c
Parameter No. 8180y
8181
0
0
0
0
Synchronization error limit of each axis (Synchronous or composite control)

[Unit of data] Unit of detection
When the synchronization deviation detected (SERx of Bit #1 parameter
No. 8162 is set to 1), this parameter specifies the limit of the difference
between the positioning deviation of the slave axis and that of the master
axis. Set this parameter to the slave axis.
136
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8182
Display of the synchronization error of an axis (synchronous or composite control)

[Unit of data] Unit of detection
[Valid data range] 0 or more
When the synchronization deviation is detected (SERx of Bit #1
parameter No. 8162 is set to 1), this parameter specifies the difference
between the positioning deviation of the slave axis and that of the master
axis. (The value is used for diagnosis.) The deviation is displayed on the
slave side
The parameter is only of display. It should not be set.
The difference between the positioning deviation is:
(Positioning deviation of the master axis)
8183
" (Positioning deviation of the slave axis)

Plus for a mirrorimage synchronization
command
Minus for a simple synchronization
command
Axis under composite control in path 1 corresponding to an axis of path 2

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... to the maximum number of control axes
This parameter specifies an axis of path 1 to be placed under composite
control with each axis of path 2. The value specified here must not exceed
the maximum number of axes that can be used in path 1. When zero is
specified, control of the axis is not replaced under composite control. An
identical number can be specified in two or more axes, but composite
control cannot be exercised for all of tem at a time.
NOTE
Specify this parameter only for path 2.
(Example 1) Exercising composite control to replace the X1axis with
the X2axis
Path 1
Path 2
(Example 2) Exercising composite control to replace the Y1axis with
the X2axis
Path 1
Path 2
137
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8184
Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the coordinate system of

another axis under composite control

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
[Valid data range] 0 to
"99999999
This parameter specifies the coordinates of the reference point of an axis

on the coordinate system of another axis under composite control.
The parameter is validated when MPMx of bit 4 parameter No. 8162 is set
to 1.
(Example) Exercising composite control to replace the X1axis with the

X2axis
Z2m
X1m
Refernce point
of path 1
X1
Z1m
X2m
Zero point of the

system of path 2
Zero point of the

system of path 1
Z1
Z2
X1m
X2
Z1m
Z2m
Refernce point
of path 2
X2m
(X1m, Z1m) are the coordinates of the reference point of path 2 on the
workpiece coordinate system of path 1. (X2m, Z2m) are the coordinates of
the reference point of path 1 on the workpiece coordinate system of path 2.
X1m is specified for the Xaxis of path 1 and X2m for the Xaxis of path 2.
If bit 4 of parameter No. 8162 MPMx is set to 1 when composite control is
started, the workpiece coordinate system satisfying the following
conditions is specified:
138
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
X1 = (Value specified for the Xaxis of path 1) (Machine coordinates of X2)
Plus when parameter

No. 8162#6 MCDx of
path 1 is set to 0
Minus when parameter
No. 8162#6 MCDx of
path 1 is set to 1
X2 =(Value specified for the Xaxis of path 2)" (Machine coordinates of X1)
Plus when parameter
No. 8162#6 MCDx of
path 2 is set to 0
Minus when parameter
No. 8162#6 MCDx of
path 2 is set to 1
If bit 5 of parameter No. 8162 MPSx is set to 1 when composite control is

terminated, the workpiece coordinate system satisfying the following
conditions is specified:
X1 = Parameter No. 1250 of path 1 + Machine coordinate of X1
X2 = Parameter No. 1250 of path 2 + Machine coordinate of X2
8185
Workpiece coordinates on each axis at the reference position

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
This parameter specifies the reference position coordinates along the

slave axes, according to the workpiece coordinate system for the master
axis, when the tool is positioned to the reference position along the master
axis. This parameter is enabled when SPMx of bit 1 parameter No. 8163 is
set to 1. Set this parameter for the master axis.
8186
Master axis under superimposed control

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... to number of control axes
This parameter specifies the axis number of the master axis under
When zero is specified , the axis does not become a slave axis under
superimposed control and the move pulse of another axis is not super
imposed.
139
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8190
Rapid traverse rate of an axis under superimposed control

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
30 to 240000
30 to 100000
30 to 96000
30 to 48000
30 to 240000
30 to 100000
Set a rapid traverse rate for each of the axes when the rapid traverse
override of the axes (master and slave axes) under superimposed control is
100%. A manual rapid traverse rate depends on this parameter or No.
1424 (When No. 1424 is set to 0, No. 1420) whichever is smaller.
8191
F0 velocity of rapid traverse override of an axis under superimposed control

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
6 to 6000
6 to 4800
6 to 150000
6 to 12000
This parameter specifies the F0 velocity of rapid traverse override for each
of the axes (master and slave axes) under superimposed control.
8192
Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rapid traverse of an axis under


[Unit of data] ms
This parameter specifies the linear acceleration/deceleration time
constant in rapid traverse for each of the axes (master and slave axes)
under superimposed control.
8193
Maximum cutting feedrate under superimposed control
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
30 to 240000
30 to 100000
30 to 96000
30 to 48000
30 to 240000
30 to 100000
This parameter specifies the maximum cutting feedrate under

140
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8194
Maximum cutting feedrate of an axis under superimposed control

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
6 to 240000
6 to 100000
6 to 96000
6 to 48000
6 to 240000
6 to 100000
This parameter specifies the maximum cutting feedrate for an axis under
1.9.7
Alarms and messages
1.9.7.1
P/S alarms
If one of the alarms listed below occurs, it terminates synchronous,

composite, and superimposed control for all axes.
Message
Number
225
Description
Synchronous or composite This alarm occurs under either of the

control error
following conditions (detected when
synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is terminated).
(1) There is an error in an axis number parameter (parameter No. 1023).
(2) An invalid control command is issued.
If this alarm occurs when synchronous,

composite, or superimposed control is
terminated, place the machine in an
emergency stop state before resetting
the alarm.
226
A move command was is- When an axis is in a synchronization

sued to a synchronous mode, a move command was issued to
axis.
that axis. (Only during synchronous
control)
During composite control, a move command was issued to an axis for which
parameter MUMx (bit 7 of parameter
No. 8162) is 1. (Only during composite control)
In a control mode other than synchronous or composite control, a move
command was issued to an axis for
which parameter NUMx (bit 7 of parameter No. 8163) was 1.
141
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
229
Description
Synchronization cannot be This alarm occurs under either of the

maintained.
following conditions.
(1) Synchronous or composite control cannot be maintained because of system

overload.
(2) Synchronous or composite control cannot be maintained because of a hardware failure. (This alarm does occur during normal use.)
000
1.9.7.2
Servo alarms
Turn the power off.
This message is issued if superimposed control is suspended because of

an alarm that occurs when the axis is
moving. Turn the power of the CNC off,
then on gain.
Number
Message
407
Servo alarm: Excessive

error
1.9.8
Definition of Warning,
Caution, and Note
142
Description
A positional deviation for a synchronous axis exceeded the specified value. (Only during synchronous control).
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.8.1
Items common to
synchronous,
composite, and
WARNING
1 When synchronous, composite, or superimposed control
begins or ends, the target axes must be at a stop.
2 All axes subjected to synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control must have the same least command,
detection increment, and diameter/radius specification.
Otherwise, the amount of movement will differ from one axis
to another.
3 When an axis is under synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control, do not change the parameters
related to that axis.
4 Before starting synchronous, composite, superimposed
control, make sure that for the target axis, a reference
position return after poweron has been made or a
reference position has been set up according to the
absolute pulse coder.
5 Before starting synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control after an emergency stop, servooff, or servo alarm
is released, be sure to make a return to the reference
position and set up the necessary coordinate system.
6 Acceleration/deceleration
control,
pitch
error
compensation, backlash compensation, and stored stroke
limit check are carried out regardless of synchronous or
composite control. During superimposed control, these
operations except acceleration/deceleration are performed
on the position where superimposed pulses have been
added.
7 The following servo software functions cannot be used for
synchronization
control,
composite
control,
or
superposition control.
Feedforward function
Advanced feedforward function
Fine acceleration/deceleration
Function for switching abnormalload detection by
cutting and rapid traverse
Learningcontrol function
Function for switching fine acceleration/deceleration by
Function for switching speed and gain by cutting and
rapid traverse
Function for switching current and PI by cutting and
rapid traverse
Function for switching the torque command filter by
Learning tandem function
8 Advanced preview control cannot be used together with
synchronization
control,
composite
control,
or
superposition control.
143
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 More than one axis can be subjected to synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control. On the other hand, an
axis cannot be synchronized with more than one axis
simultaneously. Moreover, an axis under composite control
cannot be synchronized with another axis or cannot doubly
be subjected to composite control.
2 Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot
be performed between a linear axis and a rotation axis.
3 Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot
be specified simultaneously with simplified synchronous
control. Synchronous control within one path provides the
same functions as simplified synchronous control.
1.9.8.2
Items related only to
synchronous control
CAUTION
1 The same acceleration/deceleration time constants and
servo parameters should be used for axes subjected to
synchronous control as much as possible. If there is a large
difference in a set value between the axes, a deviation will
occur in the actual movement of the machine.
2 The workpiece coordinate system of a synchronous slave
axis is not affected by the synchronous master axis
operations that affect workpiece coordinate systems but do
not cause the machine to move, such as workpiece
coordinate system set/shift and geometry offset
commands.
3 If a wear offset command or toolnose radius compensation
is performed for the synchronous master axis, the travel
path of the slave axis is shifted by the offset, but the shift is
not set as an offset (no offset vector is created).
4 A move command should not be issued to a synchronous
slave axis during synchronous control.
144
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.8.3
Restrictions imposed
during synchronous,
composite, and
Function
Acceleration/deceleration
control
During synchronous
control
During composite
control
During superimposed
control
The acceleration/deceleration control for the master

axis is performed also for the
synchronous slave axes, but
different time constants are
used.
The acceleration/deceleration control originally specified for one path is used also
for the other path, but different time constants are used
(*3).
The move pulses that are effective after acceleration/deceleration for the superimposed control master axis are
added to those for the slave
axes.
Possible
Possible
Linear acceleration/decel- Possible

eration after cutting feed interpolation
Feedrate clamping
The axes are clamped at the The axes in both paths are The axes are clamped to the
feedrate of the master axis. clamped at the feedrate origi- feedrate specified for supernally specified for one path imposed control.
(*4).
A reference position return is

possible for the master axis
unless it is in a parking state.
If the master axis is in a parking state, only automatic reference position return (G28)
is possible for the master
axis. ( Section 1.9.2.5)
A reference position return is Impossible for superimposed

possible for axes not under control slave axes.
composite control. For axes
under composite control, only
an automatic reference position return (G28) is possible.
Second, third, or fourth Possible ( 1.9.2.5).

reference position return
Possible
Impossible for superimposed

control slave axes.
Reference position return Possible ( 1.9.2.5).

check
Possible

control slave axes.
PMC axis control
Possible for other than syn- Possible

chronous slave axes.
Polar coordinate interpola- Possible

tion and cylindrical interpolation
Possible
Switching between indepen- Possible

dent control and composite
control should be carried out
during cancel mode.
Handle interrupt
Performed regardless of syn- Possible for axes having Performed regardless of suchronous control.
nothing to do with composite perimposed control (*5).
control.
Mirror image
Each signal originally belong- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
ing to a particular axis is effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superimtive for that axis (*1).
the other path (*4).
posed control pulses (*5).
Machine lock
Each signal originally belong- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
ing to a particular axis is effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superimtive for that axis (*1).
the other path (*4).
145
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Function
During synchronous
control
During composite
control
During superimposed
control
Interlock
The signals for the synchro- Signals originally specified Signals for the master axis
nous master axis are effec- for one path are effective for are effective as superimtive for the synchronous the other path (*4).
slave axes (*2).
Override
posed control pulses (*5)
slave axes (*2).
posed control pulses (*5)
slave axes (*2).
Skip function
Impossible for slave axes.
Possible for axes having Possible.

nothing to do with composite
control.
Automatic tool compensation Impossible for slave axes.
Possible for axes having Impossible for superimposed

nothing to do with composite control slave axes.
control.
Direct tool compensation Impossible for slave axes.

measurement input B
Possible (*7)

control slave axes.
Followup
Impossible during synchro- Impossible during composite Impossible during superimnous control.
control.
posed control.
Program restart
Impossible for a program in- Impossible for a program in- Impossible for a program involving synchronous control. volving composite control.
volving superimposed control.
Cs contour control
Synchronous control is pos- Composite control is possible Superimposed control is possible (*6).
(*6).
sible (*6).
Spindle positioning
Synchronous control is im- Composite control is impossi- Superimposed control is impossible.

ble.
possible.
(*1) Processed after synchronization pulses are sent to the slave axes.
(*2) After it is processed on the master side, synchronization pulses are
sent.
(*3) Composite control pulses and acceleration/deceleration type are
sent. The time constant for the slave axis is used.
(*4) Composite control pulses are sent after processed on the master side.
(*5) Performed normally for move commands originally intended to the
master or slave axes, but not performed on the slave side for
superimposed control pulses received from the master axis.
(*6) Restricted to a combination of Cs axes. Necessary signal operations
and orientation should be performed for each axis separately. Also
specify parameter CZM (bit 1 of parameter No. 8161).
(*7) Specify parameters MXC, XSI, and ZSI (bits 0, 1, and 2 of parameter
No. 8160).
146
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.8.4
Reading the coordinates
during synchronous,
composite, or
The following list summarizes how positional information such as

custom macro system variables and current coordinates from the PMC
window are read during synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control.
Positional information
During synchronous
control
During composite
control
During superimposed
control
Absolute coordinate
Readable
Readable (*1)
Readable (*2)
Machine coordinate
Readable
Readable
Readable
End of each block
Readable (*1)
Readable (*2)
Skip signal position
Unreadable
Readable (*2)
(*1) The coordinates are represented in the coordinate system that is

effective during composite control. Their relationship with the
machine coordinate system differs from the relationship that exists
during independent control.
(*2) No superimposed control pulse is added.
1.9.8.5
Terminating
synchronous,
composite, or
Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is terminated not only

when the corresponding synchronization signal becomes off but also
when the following conditions occur.
(1) Emergency stop
(2) Reset
(3) Servo alarm
(4) Servo off (*1)
(5) Overtravel
(6) Alarm related to synchronous, composite, or superimposed control
(7) P/S000 alarm
If one of the above conditions occurs for either path, it terminates
synchronous control, composite, and superimposed control for all axes.
If one of the above conditions occurs for one path during synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control, the other path is placed in a feed hold
state (during automatic operation) or interlock state (during manual
operation).
(*1) Setting parameter NMR (bit 0 of parameter No. 8161) specifies that
synchronous, composite, or superimposed control be not terminated
even when an axis under composite control enters a servooff state.
(If an axis under synchronous or superimposed control enters a
servooff state, synchronous, composite, and superimposed control is
terminated.
147
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.8.6
Status output signals for
an axis under
synchronous,
composite, or
Status output signal
During synchronous
control
During composite
control
During superimposed
control
Axis moving signal MVn S The master axis moving S The moving signal for an S The master axis moving
F0102/F1102
signal becomes 1 when
axis to which a move comsignal works as usual.
(See Section 1.2.5.)
the master or slave axis is
mand is originally issued S The slave axis moving sigmoving.
becomes 1. The moving
nal reflects the state of
signal for the axis that is acS The slave axis moving sigmovement due to a comtually moving does not benal is always 0 (*1).
mand for the slave axis
come 1 (*1).
rather than superimposed
control pulses.
Axis movement direction sig- S The master axis movement S The axis movement direc- S The master axis movement
nal MVDn F0106/F1106
direction signal indicates
tion signal indicates the acdirection signal indicates
(See Section 1.2.5.)
the direction in which the
tual movement direction
the direction in which the
master axis is moving.
(that is, direction after commaster axis is moving.
posite
control
mirror
image
S The slave axis movement
S The slave axis movement
processing).
the direction of movement
the direction of movement
after synchronous control
after superimposed control
mirror image processing.
pulses are added.
Axis in position signal INPn S The master axis in position S The in position signal for an S The master axis in position
F0104/F1104
signal becomes 1 when
axis in a path for which a
signal works as usual.
(See Section 7.2.6.1.)
both master and slave axes
move command is issued S The slave axis in position
are in position.
reflects the state of the axis
signal is always 1.
that is driven by that move
S The slave axis in position
command.
signal is always 1.
(*1) A positional deviation check does not depend on the state of this
signal. If move command pulses have been output to a motor (either
master or slave), parameter No. 1828 is used as a limit. Otherwise,
parameter No. 1829 is used.
148
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.9
Examples of
Applications
1.9.9.1
Independent control and
synchronous control of
the Z1 and Z2axes
Path 1 (X1 and Z1axes)

performs machining separately from path 2 (X2 and
Z2axes).
(1) Machine configuration

(a) Independent control
Turret 1
X1
Z1
Spindle S1
Z2
Spindle S2
X2
Turret 2
(b) Synchronous control of the Z1 and Z2axes

One workpiece is chucked at
both ends. Commands originally
issued to the Z1axis move both
Z1 and Z2axes.
Z1
Turret 1
X1
Spindle S1
Z2
Spindle S2
Turret 2
(2) Parameter setting

S To synchronize the Z2axis with the Z1axis, set parameter No.
8180z of path 2 to 2.
149
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
To apply mirrorimage synchronization (because initially the

positive direction of one axis is opposite to that of the other axis),
set SMRz (bit 0 of parameter No. 8162) of path 2 to 1.
S To detect outofsynchronization (because both axes should move
by the same amount), set SERz (bit 1 of parameter No. 8162) to 1.
Set a value from 100 to 1000 as a limit to outofsynchronization
in parameter No. 8181z of path 2 (this limit varies from one
machine to another).
S A difference in the positional deviation between the Z1 and
Z2axes is indicated in parameter No. 8182z during
synchronization.
(3) Signal operation
S Set signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to 1 when the Z1 and Z2axes start
moving in synchronization.
S Reset signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to 0 when synchronization is
terminated.
S Also reset signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to 0 if an emergency stop, NC
reset, or alarm occurs.
S Keep signals other than G1138#1 SYNC2 reset to 0.
(4) Sample program
Path 1
N1000
Path 2
N2000
Machining under control

independent of the other path
N1010 Z80. ;
N2010 Z150. ;
Moves the workpiece and

chuck to the specified
position.
N1020 M200 ;
N2020 M200 ;
Waits for completion of

movement.
N1030 M61 ;
Clamps the workpiece and

begins synchronization
N1040 M3 S800 ;
Turns the spindle in normal

direction.
N1050 Z- 25. ;
Moves the Z1axis.
N1060
Machining with the X1 and

Z1axes
N1070 M62 ;
Terminates synchronization
and unclamps the workpiece.
N1080 M201 ;
N2080 M201 ;
Waits for synchronization to

be terminated.
N1090 ;
N2090 ;
Dummy block (performing no

move command)
N1100
N2100

150
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
In this example, assume that M61 clamps the workpiece and sets signal
G1138#1 SYNC2 to 1 and that M62 resets signal G1138#1 SYNC2 to
0 and unclamps the workpiece.
NOTE
It is necessary to make the speed of spindle S1 equal that
of spindle S2. For example, issue spindle commands of
path 1 to both S1 and S2.
1.9.9.2
interpolation for the X1
and Z2axes
Z2axes).

Turret 1
X1
Z1
Z2
Spindle S1
Spindle S2
Turret 2
X2
(b) Interpolation for the X1 and Z2axes

Machining is performed
using turret 1 (X1axis)
and spindle S2 (Z2axis).
X1
Z1
Spindle S1
Turret 1
Z2
Spindle S2
Turret 2
Interpolation for the X1 and Z2axes can be carried out by either of the
following two methods.
151
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1. The path 2 program directs the X2 and Z2axes, synchronizes the

X1axis with the X2axis, and causes the X2axis to park. The
path 1 program issues no move command.
2. Composite control is performed in which move commands are
switched between the X1axis in one path and the X2axis in the
other path. Path 1 does not issue move commands.
The following sections describe a case in which synchronous control is
used and a case in which composite control is used, separately.
1.9.9.2.1
Using synchronous
control

S To synchronize the X1axis with the X2axis, set parameter No.
8180x of path 1 to 1.
S Do not specify mirror image, because for both X1 and X2axes,
the direction in which they go away from the workpiece center is
defined as positive.
S Do not specify outofsynchronization detection for the X2axis
because it is caused to park.
S Parameter No. 8182x indicates a difference in the positional
deviation between the X2 and X1axes during synchronous
control.
S Set signals G0138#0 SYNC1 and G1122#0 PK1 to 1 when
synchronous control begins for the X2 and X1axes.
S Reset signals G0138#0 SYNC1 and G1122#0 PK1 to 0 when
synchronization is terminated.
S Also reset signals G0138#0 SYNC1 and G1122#0 PK1 to 0 if an
emergency stop, NC reset, or alarm occurs.
S Keep signals other than G0138#0 SYNC1 or G1122#0 PK1 reset
to 0.
(3) Sample program
Path 1
N1000
Path 2
N2000
N1010 Z0 ;
N2010 Z20. ;

independent of the other
path
Moves the workpiece to
the specified position.
N1020 X120. ; N2020 X120. ;
Moves each Xaxis to their

start position for
synchronization (X1 = X2)
N1030 M200 ;
N2030 M200 ;

movement.
N2040 M55 ;
Synchronizes the X2 and

X1axes and causes the
X2axis to park.
152
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
N2050 T0212 ;
Specifies an offset for

turret 1.
N2060 S1000 M4 ;
Reverses the spindle.
N2070 G0 X30. Z55. ;

N2080 G1 F0. 2 W- 15. ;
N2090
Performs machining
using the X1 and
Z2axes.
N2100 M56 ;
Terminates
synchronization and
parking.
N1110 M201 ;
N2110 M201 ;
Waits for synchronization

to be terminated.
N1120 ;
N2120 ;
Dummy block (performing

no move command)
N1130
N2130

independent of the other
path
In this example, assume that M55 begins control of turret 1 in path 2 and
that M56 terminates control of turret 1 in path 2.
NOTE
When the Xaxis is under synchronous control, path 1
cannot issue a move command to the X1axis, but can
move the Z1axis.
1.9.9.2.2
Using composite control

S To specify composite control in which commands for the X1axis
are interchanged with those of the X2axis, set parameter No.
S Set MCDx (bit 6 of parameter No. 8162) of path 2 to 1, because
the direction of the X1axis is opposite to that of the X2axis.
S To cause the position of turret 1 to be specified automatically in the
workpiece coordinate system in path 2 when composite control
begins, set MPSx (bit 5 of parameter No. 8162) to 1.
S To cause the position of turret 1 to be specified automatically in the
workpiece coordinate system in path 1 when composite control
ends, set MPMx (bit 4 of parameter No. 8162) to 1.
S Assuming that the Xcoordinate of the reference position of turret
1 in the workpiece coordinate system in path 2 is 150.0 mm as
shown below, set 150000 in parameter No. 8184x of path 2 for
automatic coordinate system setting.
153
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Reference position
of turret 1
150.0mm

Z2
X2

S Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to 1 when composite control begins
for the X2 and X1axes.
S Reset signal G0128#0 MIX1 to 0 when composite control ends.
S Also reset G0128#0 MIX1 to 0 when an emergency stop, NC
S Keep signals other than G0128#0 MIX1 reset to 0.
(3) Sample program
Path 2
Path 1
N1000
N2000
N1010 Z0 ;

N2010 Z20. ;
Moves each workpiece to the

specified position.
N2020 X120. ; Moves the X2axis to a position

where no interference occurs.
N1030 M200 ;
N2030 M200 ;

movement.
N2040 M55 ;
Begins composite control of the

X2 and X1axes (the position of
turret 1 is set up as workpiece
coordinates in path 2.)
N2050 ;

move command)
N2060 T0212 ;
Specifies an offset for turret 1.
N2070 S1000 M4 ; !
N2080 G0 U10. W- 20. ;
N2090 G1 F0. 2 W- 15. ;
N2100
154
Performs machining
using the X1 and
Z2axes.
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
N2110 M56 ;
Terminates composite control

(the position of turret 1 is set up as
workpiece coordinates in path 1.)
N1120 M201;
N2120 M201 ;
Waits for composite control to be

terminated.
N1130 ;
N2130 ;

move command)
N1140
N2140

In this example, assume that M55 begins control of turret 1 by a path 2

program and that M56 terminates control of turret 1 by a path 2 program.
NOTE
1 It is not always necessary to cause a coordinate system to
be set up automatically when composite control begins or
ends. If automatic coordinate system setting is not
specified, an appropriate coordinate system is set by
program.
2 When the Xaxis is under composite control, the X2axis
can be moved in path 1 using move commands for the
Xaxis.
3 The above parameter setting specifies that turret 1 is
located on the negative side of the Xcoordinate in the
workpiece coordinate system of path 2. So, for example, to
move turret 1 toward the center of the workpiece, specify
U+10, and to move it away from the center, specify U10
(note the sign is a minus). If this is inconvenient, set the
following parameters as follows:
Bit 6 of parameter No. 8162 (MCDx) = 0
Parameter No. 8184x = 150000
This parameter setting specifies that turret 1 be located
virtually on the positive side of the Xcoordinate.
Actual position of turret 1
MCDx (No.8162#6) =1
No. 8184x
Z2
=150000
X2
Virtual position of turret 1
155
MCDx (No.8162#6) =0
No. 8184x
=150000
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.9.3
interpolation between
the X1 and Z2axes and
between the X2 and
Z1axes

Z2
Spindle S2
Workpiece 1 and turret 1

are controlled by a path
1 program.
Turret 1
X1
Spindle S1
Z1
X2
Turret 2
156
Workpiece 2 and turret 2

are controlled by a path
2 program.
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(b) Interpolation between the X1 and Z2axes and between the X2 and
Z1axes
Workpiece 2 and turret 1 are

controlled by a path 2 program.
Z2
Spindle S2
X1
Turret 1
Turret 2
Spindle S1
X2
Workpiece 1 and turret 2 are

controlled by a path 1 program.
Z1

S To specify composite control in which commands for the X1axis
are interchanged with those for the X2axis, set parameter No.
S Set MCDx (bit 6 of parameter No. 8162) of paths 1 and 2 to 1,
because the direction of the X1axis is opposite to that of the
X2axis.
S To cause the position of a turret in one path to be specified
automatically in the workpiece coordinate system of the other path
when composite control begins, set MPMx (bit 4 of parameter No.
8162) to 1.
S To cause the position of a turret in each path to be specified
automatically in the workpiece coordinate system of that path
when composite control ends, set MPSx (bit 5 of parameter No.
8162) to 1.
S Assuming that the relationships between the workpiece
coordinates and reference position of each path are as shown below,
set 200000 in parameter No. 8184x of path 1 and 180000 in
parameter No. 8184x of path 2 for automatic coordinate system
setting.
157
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Z2
180.0mm
Reference position
for turret 1
Reference position
for turret 2
X1
X2
120.0mm
200.0mm
Z1

S Set signal G0128#0 MIX1 to 1 when composite control begins
for the X2 and X1axes.
S Reset signal G0128#0 MIX1 to 0 when composite control ends.
S Also reset G0128#0 MIX1 to 0 when an emergency stop, NC
S Keep signals other than G0128#0 MIX1 reset to 0.
(4) Sample program
Path 1
N1000
Path 2
N2000
N1010 M350 ;
Machining under
control
independent of
the other path
N2010 M350 ;
Waits for
composite
control to begin.
N2020 M55 ;
Begins
composite
control for the
X1 and
X2axes.
N1030 M351 ;
N2030 M351 ;
Composite
control has
begun.
N1040 ;
N2040 ;
Dummy block
(performing no
move command)
158
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
N1050 T0313
N2050 T0212 ;
Selects a tool for

composite
control and sets
the offset.
N1060 G50 W120. ;
N2060 G50 W120. ;
Shifts the Zaxis

workpiece
coordinate
system.
N1070 S1000 M4 ;
N2070 S1500 M4 ;
N1080 G0 X20. Z15. ;
N2080 G0 X15. Z30.;
N1090 G1 F0. 5 W- 8. ; N2090 G1 F0. 1 W- 5. ;

N1100
N2100
N1110 M360 ;
Performs
machining
under
composite
control.
N2110 M360 ;
Waits for
composite
control to be
terminated.
N2120 M56 ;
Terminates
composite
control.
N1130 M361 ;
N2130 M361 ;
Composite
control has
ended.
N1140 ;
N2140 ;
Dummy block
(performing no
move command)
N1150 G50 W- 120. ;
N2150 G50 W- 120. ; Shifts the Zaxis

workpiece
coordinate
system.
N1160
N2160
Machining under
control
independent of
the other path
In this example, assume that M55 begins composite control (sets signal
G0128#0 MIX1 to 1) and that M56 terminates composite control (resets
signal G0128#0 MIX1 to 0).
NOTE
It is not always necessary to cause a coordinate system to
be set up automatically when composite control begins or
ends. If automatic coordinate system setting is not
specified, an appropriate coordinate system is set by
program.
159
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.9.4
for the Z1 and Z2axes
Z2axes).

Z1
Turret 1
X1
Spindle S1
Spindle S2
Turret 2
Z2
X2
(b) Superimposed control for the Z1 and Z2axes

A workpiece mounted on
spindle S1 is machined using
paths 1 (X1 and Z1axis) and
2 (X2 and Z2axes).
Turret 1

X1
Z1
Spindle S1
Spindle S2
X2
Turret 2
Z2

S To superimpose the move commands for the Z1axis on the
Z2axis, set parameter No. 8186z of path 2 to 2.
S To apply mirrorimaged superimposed control (because the
positive directions of the Z1 and Z2axes do not match), set
parameter No. 8162 (OMRz) of path 2 to 1.
160
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Set the feedrate along each Zaxis for superimposed control in

parameter Nos. 8190z, 8191z, and 8193 of both paths. Each value
to be set must be about half the one for independent control.
S Set the rapid traverse time constant for each Zaxis under
superimposed control in parameter No. 8192z of both paths. Each
value to be set must be 1 to 2 times the one for independent control.
(3) Signal setting
S Set signal G1190#1 OVLS2 to 1 when superimposed control
begins for the Z1 and Z2axes.
S Reset signal G1190#1 OVLS2 to 0 when superimposed control
ends.
S Also reset G1190#1 OVLS2 to 0 when an emergency stop, NC
S Keep signals other than G1190#1 OVLS2 reset to 0.
(4) Sample program
Path 2
Path 1
N1000
N2000
N1010 M300 ;
N2010 M300 ;
N1020 M55 ;
N1030 M301 ;
Machining under
control independent of
the other path
Waits for superimposed
control to begin.
Begins superimposed
control in which
commands for the
Z1axis are
superimposed on those
for the Z2axis.
N2030 M301 ;
has begun.
N2040 T0414 ;
Selects a tool for

and sets the offset.
N1050 S1000 M3 ;
N1060 G0 X20. Z15. ;
N2060 G0 X18. Z120. ;
N1070 G1 F0. 5 W- 8. ; N2070 G1 F0. 1 W5. ;

N1080
N2080
N1090 M302 ;
N2090 M302 ;
N1100 M56 ;
N1110 M303 ;
161
Performs
machining
with turrets 1
and 2.
Waits for superimposed

control to end.
Terminates
N2110 M303 ;
has ended.
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
N1120
N2120
Machining under
control independent of
the other path
WARNING
When using constant surface speed control, be careful
about which path has the spindle command that is effective
for spindle S1.
NOTE
The speed of spindle S1 (feedback pulses from the position
coder) is specified for both paths 1 and 2.
1.9.9.5
Miscellaneous
Synchronous control and composite control were described so far. In

reality, however, it is possible to perform more than one set of
synchronous control and/or composite control selectively or
simultaneously. For this purpose, specify all necessary parameters
and select which synchronous control or composite control to be
performed using the appropriate signals. However, be careful not to
perform more than one set of synchronous control or composite
control for one axis at one time.
S Usually, it is possible to specify only one pair of axes for synchronous
control and one pair for composite control. If it is necessary to specify
more than one pair, specify so in a parameter with a program, using the
programmable parameter input function (G10). This must be done
when the related axes are not under synchronous or composite control.
(Example) Changing the parameter so that the Z2axis is synchronized
with the Y1axis
(To set parameter No. 8180z of path 2 to 4, run the
following program in path 2.)
N0200
N0210 G10 L50 ;
Begins parameter setting.
N0220 N8180 P2 R4 ;
Sets parameter No. 8180z

to 4.
N0230 G11 ;
Terminates parameter
setting.
N0240
The blocks with G10 to G11 must be run when the Z2 or

Y1axis is not under synchronous or composite control.
162
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.9.10
Troubleshooting
1.Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot be started,

but no alarm is issued.
(1) The synchronous or composite control option has not been
specified.
The synchronous and composite control must be specified.
(2) The G0128, G0138, G0190, G1128, G1138, or G1190 signal has
not risen.
Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control begins on
the positivegoing edge of the G0128, G0138, G0190, G1128,
G1138, or G1190 signal. If synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control ends because of a reset or alarm, merely
releasing the reset or alarm cannot restart synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control. It is also necessary to raise
the signal.
(3) The axis number of an axis to be subjected to synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control has not been specified in a
parameter.
To use synchronous control, specify the axis number of the
target master axis in parameter No. 8180. To use composite
control, specify the axis number of the target axis in parameter
No. 8183 of path 2. To use superimposed control, specify the
axis number of the target master axis in parameter No. 8186.
(4) Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control cannot be
started when the NC unit is under one of the following conditions.
S Emergency stop
S Reset
S Servo alarm
S P/S000 alarm
S Alarm related to synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control
In addition, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control
cannot be started when the NC unit is under one of the following
conditions.
S Servooff
S Overtravel
163
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
2. The P/S225 alarm occurs when a signal for synchronous, composite,

or superimposed control arises.
(1) An attempt was made to perform synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control for an axis that was already under
synchronous, composite, or superimposed control.
It is impossible to place an axis under more than one
combination of synchronous, composite, and/or superimposed
control simultaneously. However, a synchronous master axis
can be the master of more than one synchronous slave axis, and
other slave axes can be added under the same synchronous
control.
(2) The axis number specified in a parameter is greater than the number
of controllable axes.
The axis number of a synchronous master axis, an axis under
composite control, or the master axis under superimposed
control in one path must not be greater than the number of
controllable axes in the other path (or in the same path if
synchronous control is performed within one path).
(3) An axis to be placed in synchronization is already moving.
When synchronous, composite, or superimposed control
begins, the target axis must be at a stop. An axis being at a stop
means that the speed that is effective after
acceleration/deceleration is zero.
3. The P/S225 alarm occurs when synchronous, composite, or
superimposed control ends.
(1) An axis to be released from synchronization is moving.
When synchronous, composite, or superimposed control ends,
the target axis must be at a stop. An axis being at a stop means
that the speed that is effective after acceleration/deceleration is
zero. When terminating synchronization, make sure that the
axis moving signal F0102/F1102 is 0.
NOTE
Before the P/S225 alarm that occurs when synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control is terminated can be
reset, it is necessary to place the machine in an emergency
stop state.
4. The P/S226 alarm occurs during synchronous or composite control.
(1) A move command was issued to a synchronous slave axis.
A move command (either automatic or manual) cannot be used
for a synchronous slave axis.
164
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(2) A move command was issued to an axis under composite control

for which parameter MUMx (bit 7 of parameter No. 8162) is 1.
No move command (either automatic or manual) can be issued
to an axis under composite control for which parameter MUMx
(bit 7 of parameter No. 8162) is 1.
5. Servo alarm No. 407 occurs during synchronous control.
(1) There is an excessive difference in the positional deviation between
the synchronous master and slave axes.
Alarm SV407 can occur only when a check is being made for
synchronous error. This alarm occurs typically when there is a
large difference in acceleration/deceleration constants or servo
parameters between the synchronous master and slave axes or
when the actual machine movement is incorrect for any reason
(such as incorrect synchronization).
6. The machine position deviates during synchronous control.
(1) The acceleration/deceleration constants or servo parameters (such
as loop gain) do not match between the master and slave axes.
During synchronous control, acceleration/deceleration and
servo control are performed for master and slave axes
separately. (Instead, move commands are placed in
synchronization.) Acceleration/deceleration time constants or
servo characteristics may vary between the master and slave
axes. In such cases, the actual machine movement does not
match between axes.
7. The amount of movement is incorrect during synchronous, composite,
or superimposed control.
(1) The diameter/radius specification or inch/metric input setting does
match between the master and slave axes.
Synchronous, composite, superimposed control does not make
conversion on diameter/radius or inch/metric input
specifications between the master and slave axes. The least
command input must match between the master and slave axes.
165
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8. An axis does not move to a specified position after synchronous or

composite control switching.
(1) A move command was issued within two blocks after synchronous
or composite control.
The coordinate system in the CNC must be reset at synchronous
or composite control switching. No move command can be issued
to an axis subjected to synchronous or composite control during
automatic operation within two (or three for tooltip radius
compensation) blocks (including the current one) after
synchronous or composite control switching. However, this
restriction does not apply when the current block is an M code that
does not buffer the next block or when the target axis is a
synchronous master axis.
9. Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control was terminated
when the G0128, G0138, G0190, G1128, G1138, or G1190 did not
drop.
Synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is terminated
automatically, if one of the following conditions occurs in either
path.
S Emergency stop
S Reset
S Servo alarm
S P/S000 alarm
S Alarm related to synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control
In addition, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is
terminated for all axes, if one of the following conditions occurs for
any axis under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control.
S Servooff
S Overtravel
166
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.10
BAXIS CONTROL
(T SERIES)
General
This function sets an axis (Baxis) independent of the basic controlled

axes X1, Z1, X2, and Z2 and allows drilling, boring, or other machining
along the Baxis, in parallel with the operations for the basic controlled
axes. The X2 and Z2 axes can be used in twopath control mode
X1
First
tool post
Z1
Third
tool post
Workpiece
Z2
Second
tool post
X2
Format
G101G100
G102G100
G103G100
G100
:
:
:
:
Starts registering the first program.

Starts registering the second program.
Starts registering the third program.
Ends registering of the programs.
Three operations (programs) on the Baxis can be registered. (In two

path control mode, three programs can be registered for each tool post.)
The Baxis operation program must be specified in the blocks between
G101, G102, or G103 and G100, allowing it to be discriminated from the
normal NC program.
The registered operation is started upon executing the corresponding M
code, described below.
O1234 ;
Normal NC program
Starts registering of a Baxis
operation program.
G101 ;
Registering operation
programs
Baxis operation program
G100 ;
Ends registering of the Baxis

operation program.
M30 ;
Normal NC program
Note) In the block of G101, G102, G103, or G100, specify no other codes.
167
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Command used to start

the operation
To start an operation, the miscellaneous functions (M**) specified in

parameters 8251 to 8253 are used.
Parameter 8251:
M code used to start operation of the first program
Parameter 8252:
M code used to start operation of the second program
Parameter 8253:
M code used to start operation of the third program
O1234 ;
Starts executing the registered Baxis operation. In

subsequent blocks, the normal NC program and the
Baxis operation program are executed in parallel.
(** is specified in parameters 8251 to 8253.)
M** ;
M30 ;

Starts registering of an
operation program.
Blocks of the Baxis
operation program
Ends registering of the
operation program.
Example
01234 ;
G50 X100. Z200. ;
G101 ;
G00 B10. ;
M03 ;
G04 P2500 ;
G81 B20. R15. F500 ;
G28 ;
G100 ;
G00 X80. Z50. ;
G01 X45. F1000 ;
G00 X10. ;
M** ;
G01 Z30. F300 ;
Command used to start the

programmed operation
M30 ;
to :
Specify the Baxis operation program in blocks between

G101, G102, or G103 and G100. The program is registered
in program memory.
: Starts executing the Baxis operation registered with to above.
In subsequent blocks, the normal NC operation and the Baxis

operation are executed in parallel. An M code of the miscellaneous
function is used to start the Baxis operation. The M code, used to
start the operation, is specified in parameters 8251 to 8253.
Singlemotion operation
G110 [operation command];
A singlemotion operation for the Baxis can be specified and
executed as shown above. Such an operation need not be registered as a special (first to third) program. Nor does it need to be
by a special command, as described above.
168
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Explanations
Specifying twopath
control mode
One of the following three twopath control modes can be selected:

1 Baxis control is executed for either tool post 1 or 2.
2 Baxis control is executed separately for tool posts 1 and 2.
3 Identical Baxis control is executed for tool posts 1 and 2.
The mode is selected according to the value specified for parameter 8250
for each tool post.
Codes that can be used

in a Baxis operation
program
The following 13 G codes, and the M, S, and T codes of the miscellaneous

functions, can be used in a Baxis operation program:
Code
Description
G00
Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01
Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
G04
Dwell
G28
Reference position return, automatic coordinate system setting
G80
Canned cycle, cancel
G81
Drilling cycle, spot drilling
G82
Drilling cycle, counterboring
G83
Peck drilling cycle
G84
Tapping cycle
G85
Boring cycle
G86
Boring cycle
G98
Feed per minute
G99
Feed per rotation
M**
Auxiliary function
S**
Auxiliary function
T**
Auxiliary function, tool offset
G28 (reference position return)

Unlike the normal G28 cycle, the G28 cycle for a Baxis operation does
not include intermediate point processing. For example, the following
cannot be specified:
G28 B99.9;
169
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
G80 to G86 (canned drilling cycle)

Of the canned drilling cycles supported by the CNC for machining
centers, those cycles equivalent to G80 to G86 can be executed.
Data can be specified in the same way as for the CNC for machining
centers, except for the following points:
1. The drilling position is not specified with X and Y.
2. The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole is specified with
B.
3. All operations are executed in the initial level return mode.
4. The repetition count (K) cannot be specified.
5. In canned cycle mode, point R must be specified. (If point R is
omitted, P/S alarm No. 5036 is output.)
6. The drilling start point (d) for the G83 (peck drilling) cycle is specified
with parameter 8258.
G98, G99 (feed per minute, feed per rotation)
The MDF bit (bit 2 of parameter 8241) specifies an initial
continuousstate G code for G110, or the G code to start registration of
the operation program (G101, G102, G103).
When the MDF bit is set to 0, the initial continuousstate code is G98.
When the MDF bit is set to 1, the initial continuousstate code is G99.
Example)
When MDF is set to 0
G110 B100. F1000. ; 1000 mm/min
G110 G99 B100. F1 ; 1 mm/rev
NOTE
In twopath control mode, the system uses the actual
spindle speed, calculated from the feedback signal output
by the position coder connected to the tool post to which the
controlled axis belongs.
M, S, and T codes (auxiliary functions)
According to a numeric value subsequent to address M, S, or T, the binary
code and strobe signal are sent to the PMC. The codes and signals for
addresses M, S, and T are all output to an identical interface (auxiliary
function code signals (EM 11g to EM 48g) and auxiliary function strobe
signals (EMFg)) and can be used to control on or off of the PMC machine.
For this purpose, the PMC axis control interface is used, which differs
from that used for the miscellaneous functions for the normal NC
program. The following M codes, used to control the spindle, are
automatically output during the G84 (tapping) or G86 (boring) cycle:
M03: Forward spindle rotation
M04: Reverse spindle rotation
M05: Spindle stop
T** to T(** + 9), where ** is the number specified in parameter 8257, are
used as the codes of the auxiliary functions to adjust the tool offset.
Example)
T50 to T59 if parameter 8257 is set to 50
170
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 Range of commands of M, S, and T codes
2 An M, S, or T code must not be specified in a block
containing another move command. The M, S, and T codes
must not be specified in an identical block.
3 Usually, normal NC operation and Baxis operation are
independent of each other. Synchronization between
operations can be established by coordinating the
miscellaneous functions of the normal NC program and
Baxis operation program.
(Normal NC operation) (Registered Baxis operation)
:
:
M11 ;
G00 B111 ;
G01 X999 :
G01 B222 ;
G28 Z777 ;
G28 ;
M50 ;
M50 ;
G00 X666 ;
G81 B444 R111 F222 ;
:
:
Upon receiving M50 of both the normal NC program and the Baxis
program in the PMC ladder, the completion signals (FIN and EFINg) are
turned 1. G00 X666 of the normal NC program and G81 B444 R111
F222 of the Baxis program are executed simultaneously.
Custom macro
Custom macro variables (local variables, common variables, system
variables #****) can be used in an operation program between G101,
G102, or G103 and G100.
1. The value of the macro variable is calculated not from the data existing
upon execution of the Baxis operation, but from the data existing at
registration of the operation program.
2. An instruction that causes a branch to a location beyond the range of
G101, G102, or G103 to G100 is processed without being checked.
3. In the twopath control mode, tool posts 1 and 2 use different macro
variables.
Operation program
When a new operation program is registered, the previous operation

program is automatically deleted.
If an error is detected in an operation program to be registered, the
program is initialized but is not registered.
Modal
In the same way as a normal NC program, the Baxis operation program

can use the following as modal data: modal G codes, F codes, and P, Q,
and F codes in the canned cycle. These codes do not affect the modal
information of the normal NC program. When a Baxis operation
program is started (by G101, G102, or G103), the initial modal data is set
for the program. It is not affected by the previous modal information.
171
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Example)
:
G01 X10. F1000 ;
G101 (G102, G103) ;
B10. ;
G01 B10. F500 ;
G100 ;
X10. ;
:

Irrespective of the modal information for normal operation (G01

specified in block), block
specifies G00 if the MDG bit (bit 1 of
parameter 8241) is set to 0, or G01 if the MDG bit is set to 1.
Block
causes movement with F1000, specified in block .
Operation start
command
The MST bit (bit 7 of parameter 8240) specifies the method used to start
the Baxis operation as described below:
If the MST bit is set to 1, the Baxis operation is started when the M code
to start the operation is executed.
If the MST bit is set to 0, the Baxis operation is started when the M code
used to start the operation is executed and the PMC outputs the
completion signal (FIN).
Up to five M codes for starting the programs can be stored. The programs
corresponding to these M codes are executed in succession. (In twopath
control mode, up to five codes can be stored for each tool post.)
Example)
When the first, second, and third programs are started by M40, M41,
and M42, respectively
O1234. ;
:
:
M40 ; M code for starting the first program
M41 ; M code for starting the second program
M42 ; M code for starting the third program
M40 ; M code for starting the first program
M41 ; M code for starting the second program
:
:
M30 ;
As M41 is specified while the program started by M40 is being executed,
the second program is automatically started upon termination of the first
program.
M42, M40, and M41, specified during execution of the first program, are
stored such that the corresponding programs are executed in the same
order as that in which the M codes are specified.
If six or more M codes for starting the programs are specified while a
program is being executed, P/S alarm 5038 is output.
In twopath control mode, the M code specified for tool post 1 starts the
Baxis program registered for tool post 1. The M code specified for tool
post 2 starts the Baxis program registered for tool post 2.
172
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Specifying absolute or
incremental mode
The amount of travel along the Baxis can be specified in either absolute
or incremental mode. In absolute mode, the end point of travel along the
Baxis is programmed. In incremental mode, the amount of travel along
the Baxis is programmed directly.
The ABS bit (bit 6 of parameter 8240) is used to set absolute or
incremental mode. When the ABS bit is set to 1, absolute mode is
selected. When the ABS bit is set to 0, incremental mode is selected. The
mode is specified with this parameter when the program is registered.
Specifying a tool offset
The T**; command shifts the end point of the specified Baxis travel, in
either the positive or negative direction, by the amount specified with the
Baxis offset screen. If this function is used to set the difference between
the programmed tool position and actual tool position in machining, the
program need not be modified to correct the tool position.
The value specified with parameter 8257 is assigned to the auxiliary
function to cancel the offset. The subsequent nine numbers are assigned
to the tool offset functions. These auxiliary function numbers are
displayed on the Baxis offset screen. For details, see Operators Manual.
If a G110 block is specified, a singlemotion operation along the Baxis

can be specified and executed. In singlemotion operation mode, a single
block results in a single operation. The singlemotion operation is
executed immediately provided if it is specified before the Baxis
operation is started. If the operation is specified while a registered
program is being executed, the operation is executed once that program
has terminated.
After the specified singlemotion operation has been executed, the next
block is executed.
:
G110 G01 B100. F200 ;
Block for singlemotion

operation along Baxis
G00 X100. Z20. ;

:
Program memory
An operation program is registered in program memory as a series of

different blocks of the move, dwell, auxiliary, and other functions.
Program memory can hold a desired number of blocks, up to a maximum
of 65535 blocks for each program. If the program memory contains no
free space when an attempt is made to register a Baxis program, P/S
alarm 5033 is output. Six blocks require 80 characters of program
memory. A canned cycle (G81 to G86) is also registered as a series of
blocks, such as travel and dwell.
The entire program memory is backed up by battery. The programs
registered in program memory are thus retained even after the system
power is turned off. After turning the system power on, the operation can
be started simply by specifying the M code for starting the program.
173
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Example)
:
G101 ;
G00 B10. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G04 P1500 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G81 B20. R50. F600 ; . . . . . . . .
G28 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M15 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G100 ;
:
One block
One block
Three blocks
One block
One block
(Total 7 blocks)
Reset
When the NC is reset by pressing the MDI reset key or by the issue of an
external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop, Baxis
control is also reset. The reset signal (ECLRg) can reset only Baxis
control.
PMCcontrolled axis
A Baxis operation can be executed only when the Baxis can be

controlled by the PMC. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
Limitations
1. Only a singlemotion operation can be specified with G110.
G110 G00 B100. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . OK
G110 G28 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OK
G110 G81 B100. R150.0 F100 ; . . . P/S alarm No.5034
2. A canned cycle (G81 to G86), and other operations containing
multiple motions, cannot be specified with G110.
If an inhibited operation is specified, P/S alarm No.5034 is output.
3. modal information specified with G110 does not affect the subsequent
blocks. In the G110 block, the initial modal value specified at the start
of the operation becomes valid, irrespective of the modal information
specified the previous blocks.
Example)
When the MDG bit (bit 1 of parameter 8241) is set to 1 and the
MDF bit (bit 2 of parameter 8241) is set to 1
G98 G00 X100. F1000 ; . . . . . . . . . (1)
G110 B200. F2.; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2)
X200. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3)
G01 X200. ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4)
Block (2) instigates cutting feed (G01) at 2.0 mm/rev (G99).
Block (3) instigates rapid traverse (G00).
Block (4) instigates cutting feed (G01) at 1000 mm/min (G98).
4. During toolnose radius compensation, two or more G110 blocks
cannot be specified in succession. If such blocks are specified in
succession, P/S alarm No. 5041 is output. To specify two or more
G110 blocks in succession for a Baxis operation, register the blocks
as a program with G101, G102, or G103 and G100.
174
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Examples
Absolute or incremental
mode
Absolute or incremental mode

0
100
200
(1)
300
400
500
600
(200)
(350)
(2)
(450)
Dwell
(200)
(350)
(3)
(550)
Dwell
(200)
(100)
(
Rapid traverse,
Cutting feed, Dwell
(***) Absolute value

)
Incremental mode
Absolute mode
G101 (G102, G103) ;

(1) G01 B200. F100 ;
(2) G82 B100. R150. P5000 F200 ;
(3)
B200. R150. P5000 ;
(4) G00 B100. ;
G100 ;
:
M** ;
:
M30 ;
G101 (G102, G103) ;

(1) G01 B200. F100 ;
(2) G82 B450. R350. P5000 F200 ;
(3)
B550. R350. P5000 ;
(4) G00 B100. ;
G100 ;
:
M** ;
:
M30 ;
Tool posts 1 and 2

If a single axis is used as the common Baxis of the two tool posts in
twopath control, tool posts 1 and 2 share the B coordinate.
For example, after program 1 for tool post 1 and program 2 for tool post
2 are executed in that order, the total travel along the Baxis appears to
be +100.
<Program 1>
G101 ;
:
G00 B200. ; (Absolute mode)
G100 ;
:
M30 ;
<Program 2>
G101 ;
G00 B300. ; (Absolute mode)
:
G100 ;
:
M30 ;
175
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Tool offset
Example)
When parameter 8257 is set to 50
Auxiliary function used to cancel the offset: T50
Auxiliary functions used to adjust a tool offset: T51 to T59
-10
10
20
30
40
50
(350)
(Absolute mode)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(10)
(Incremental mode)
1
( 0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(30)
(25)
(5)
(0)
(20)
(20)
( 0)
( 0)
Program
G101 (G102, G103) ;
(1) G01 B10. F100 ;
(2) T51 ;
(3) G00 B20. ;
(4) T52 ;
(5) B0. ;
(6) T50 ;
G100 ;
:
M**;
:
176
(35)
(35)
Where the offset of T51 is 10.0 and the offset

of T52 is 5.0
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
8240
#7
MST
#6
ABS
#5
SOV
#4
TEM
#3
REF
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

REF Reference position return operation by G28:
0 : Always uses deceleration dogs in the same way as a manual reference
position return operation.
1 : Uses deceleration dogs when a reference position has not yet been set,
but is performed by rapid traverse when a reference position has
already been set (in the same way as an ordinary G28 command).
TEM When an offset movement is made in a block containing a T code:
0 : Auxiliary function code signal and auxiliary function strobe signal are
output before a movement along an axis.
1 : Auxiliary function code signal and auxiliary function strobe signal are
output after a movement along an axis.
SOV A G110 block:
0 : Overlaps the next block.
1 : Does not overlap the next block.
ABS The Baxis command is:
0 : An incremental command.
1 : An absolute command.
MST When an M code for starting a movement along the Baxis is specified:
0 : Operation is started after a ready notice using the FIN signal is
received.
1 : Operation is started without waiting for a ready notice.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
8241
#2
MDF
#1
MDG
#0
FXC
[Data type] Bit

FXC In canned cycle G84:
0 : The spindle is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise after M05 is
output.
1 : The spindle is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise without first
outputting M05.
MDG The initial continuousstate value for starting Baxis operation command
registration is:
0 : G00 mode (rapid traverse).
1 : G01 mode (cutting feed).
MDF The initial continuousstate value for starting Baxis operation command
registration is:
0 : G98 (feed per minute).
1 : G99 (feed per rotation).
177
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
8242
#1
#0
COF
[Data type] Bit

COF For tool post 1 and tool post 2 (under twopath control):
0 : A separate Baxis offset value is set.
1 : A common Baxis offset value is set.
8250
Axis number used for Baxis control
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes (in onesystem control)
11 to ((number of controlled axes for tool post 1) + 10), or
21 to ((number of controlled axes for tool post 2) + 20) (in twopath
control)
This parameter sets which axis is to be used for Baxis control.
In onesystem control, set the controlled axis number of a selected
Baxis.
In twopath control, set the axis number, used for Baxis control on tool
post 1, added to 10 when a tool post 1 axis is used.
Set an axis number, used for Baxis control on tool post 2, added to 20
when a tool post 2 axis is used.
Example of setting:
(1) For onesystem control
When the fourth axis is controlled as the Baxis, set 4 in this
parameter. Furthermore, specify a DI/DO number to be used for the
fourth axis in parameter No. 8010.
(2) For twopath control
(a) When Baxis control is applied to tool post 1 only
When the fourth axis of tool post 1 is controlled as the Baxis,
set 14 with this parameter of tool post 1. Furthermore, specify
the DI/DO number to be used for the fourth axis with parameter
No. 8010 for tool post 1.
(b) When Baxis control is applied to tool post 2 only
When the fourth axis on tool post 2 is controlled as the Baxis,
set 24 with this parameter of tool post 2. Furthermore, specify
a DI/DO number to be used for the fourth axis in parameter No.
8010 for tool post 2.
(c) When Baxis control is applied separately to tool post 1 and tool
post 2
Make the settings described in (a) and (b) above.
(d) When Baxis control is simultaneously applied to both tool post
1 and tool post 2
When the fourth axis for tool post 1 is controlled as the common
Baxis, set 14 with this parameter for both tool post 1 and tool
post 2. Furthermore, specify a DI/DO number to be used for the
fourth axis in parameter No. 8010 for tool post 1.
178
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8251
M code (G101) for specifying the start of first program operation
8252
M code (G102) for specifying the start of second program operation
8253
M code (G103) for specifying the start of third program operation
[Data type] 2word

These parameters set M codes for starting previously registered Baxis
operation programs. M codes (such as M30, M98, and M99), already
used for other purposes, cannot be set.
8257
T code number for tool offset cancellation
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets a T code number for tool offset cancellation. When
a T code from (setting + 1) to (setting + 9) is specified, tool offset is
specified.
8258
Clearance, used in canned cycle G83, for the Baxis
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the clearance used for peck drilling cycle G83.
Point B
179
G83
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message

Number
Message
Contents
5030
ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100)
The end command (G110) was specified before the registration start
command (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the Baxis.
5031
ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102, While a registration start command (G101, G102, or G103) was being
G103)
executed, another registration start command was specified for the B
axis.
5032
NEW PRG REGISTERED IN BAXS While the machine was moving about the Baxis, at attempt was made
MOVE
to register another move command.
5033
NO PROG SPACE IN MEMORY Commands for movement about the Baxis were not registered beBAXIS
cause of insufficient program memory.
5034
PLURAL COMMAND IN G110
5035
NO
FEEDRATE
BAXIS
5036
ADDRESS R NOT DEFINED IN Point R was not specified for the canned cycle for the Baxis.
G81G86
5037
ADDRESS Q NOT DEFINED IN G83
5038
TOO MANY
COMMAND
5039
START UNREGISTERED BAXIS An attempt was made to execute a program for the Baxis which had
PROG
not been registered.
5040
CAN NOT COMMANDED BAXIS The machine could not move about the Baxis because parameter
MOVE
No.8250 was incorrectly specified, or because the PMC axis system
could not be used.
5041
CAN NOT
BLOCK
Multiple movements were specified with the G110 code for the Baxis.
COMMANDED A feedrate was not specified for cutting feed about the Baxis.
START
Depth of cut Q was not specified for the G83 code (peck drilling cycle).
Alternatively, 0 was specified in Q for teh Baxis.
MCODE More than six M codes for starting movement about the Baxis were
specified.
COMMANDED
G110 Blocks containing the G110 codes were successively specified in tool
tip radius compensation for the Baxis.
Caution
CAUTION
Baxis control uses the PMC axis control interface. This
means that, before a Baxis command can be executed,
the axis used as the Baxis must be placed under PMC axis
control. To specify operations such as single block and feed
hold, use PMC axis control signals.
Referring to Section 15.1, set the PMC axis control
parameters and signals.
180
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
181
III.11.2.7
Displaying the Baxis Operation State
III.11.4.15
Setting and Displaying Baxis

Tool Compensation
III.11.2.6
Displaying the Baxis Operation State
III.11.4.15
Setting and Displaying Baxis

Tool Compensation
15.1
PMC Axis Control/PMC Axis

Speed Control Function
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.11
ANGULAR AXIS
CONTROL/
ARBITRARY
ANGULAR AXIS
CONTROL
General
When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90 with the
perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distance
traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For the
ordinary angular axis control function, the Xaxis is always used as the
angular axis and the Zaxis is always used as the perpendicular axis. For
angular axis control B, however, arbitrary axes can be specified as the
angular and perpendicular axes, by specifying parameters accordingly.
A program, when created, assumes that the angular axis and perpendicular
axis intersect at right angles. However, the actual distance traveled is
controlled according to an inclination angle.
+X Program coordinate system
+X Coordinate system actually used

(angular axis)
+Z (perpendicular axis)
: Inclination angle
Explanations
When the angular axis is the Xaxis and the perpendicular axis is the
Zaxis, the amount of travel along each axis is controlled according to the
formulas shown below.
The distance to be traveled along the Xaxis is determined by the
following formula :
Xa +
Xp
cos q
The distance traveled along the Zaxis is corrected by the inclination of

the Xaxis, and is determined by the following formula:
Za + ZpXp tan q
The speed component along the Xaxis of feed rate is determined by the
following formula:
Fa +
Fp
cos q
Xa, Za, Fa:Actual distance and speed

Xp, Zp, Fp:Programmed distance and speed
182
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Method of use
The angular and perpendicular axes to which angular axis control is to be

applied must be specified beforehand, using parameters (No. 8211 and
8212).
Parameter AAC (No. 8200#0) enables or disables the angular axis control
function. If the function is enabled, the distance traveled along each axis
is controlled according to an inclination angle (No. 8210).
Parameter AZR (No. 8200#2) enables angular axis manual reference
point return only with a distance along the angular axis.
If perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal NOZAGC has been
set to 1, the angular axis control function is enabled only for the angular
axis. In such a case, the move command for the angular axis is converted
to angular coordinates. The perpendicular axis is not affected by the move
command for the angular axis.
Absolute and relative

position display
An absolute and a relative position are indicated in the programmed

Cartesian coordinate system. Machine position display
Machine position display
A machine position indication is provided in the machine coordinate

system where an actual movement is taking place according to an
inclination angle. However, when inch/metric conversion is performed,
a position is indicated which incorporates inch/metric conversion applied
to the results of inclination angle operation.
Signal
Perpendicular/angular
axis control disable
signal NOZAGC
<G063#5>
[Function] Disables angular axis control for the perpendicular axis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit behaves as follows:
Converts an angular axis move command to angular coordinates. The
perpendicular axis is, however, not affected by an angular axis move
command.
Signal address
#7
#6
G063
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#4
#3
#2
AZR
#1
#0
AAC
NOZAGC
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
8200
NOTE
183
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
[Data type] Bit

AAC 0 : Does not perform angular axis control.
1 : Performs angular axis control.
AZR 0 : The machine tool is moved along the Cartesian axis during manual
reference position return along the slanted axis under angular axis
control.
1 : The machine tool is not moved along the Cartesian axis during
manual reference position return along the slanted axis under angular
axis control.
8210
Inclination angle for angular axis control
[Data type] 2 words

[Unit of data] 0.001 degree
8211
Axis number of a slanted axis subject to slanted axis control
8212
Axis number of a Cartesian axis subject to slanted axis control
[Data type] Word

[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
These parameters set the axis numbers of a slanted axis and Cartesian axis
subject to slanted axis control.
Warning
WARNING
1 After angular axis control parameter setting, be sure to
perform manual reference point return operation.
2 If bit 2 (AZK) of parameter No. 8200 has been set to 0, such
that manual reference position return along the angular axis
also causes movement along the perpendicular axis, once
manual reference position return has been performed along
the angular axis, also perform manual reference position
return along the perpendicular axis.
3 Once the tool has been moved along the angular axis with
perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal NOZAGC
set to 1, manual reference position return must be
performed.
4 Before attempting to manually move the tool along both the
angular and perpendicular axes simultaneously, set
perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal NOZAGC
to 1.
184
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 If an inclination angle close to 0 or 90 is set, an error can
occur. A range from 20 to 60 should be used.
2 Before a perpendicular axis reference point return check
(G27) can be made, angular axis reference point return
operation must be completed.
3 For arbitrary angular axis control, if the same axis number
has been specified in both parameters No. 8211 and 8212,
or if a value outside the valid data range has been specified
for either parameter, the angular and perpendicular axes
will be as follows:
Angular axis: First axis
Perpendicular axis: Second axis
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.20.5
Augular axis control/axis control
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.6
Augular axis control/axis control
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.5
Augular axis control
185
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.12
CHOPPING
FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General
When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used

to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while
the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved
vertically, a contour program can be executed to instigate movement
along other axes.
In addition, a servo delay compensation function is supported for
chopping operations. When the grinding axis is moved vertically at high
speed, a servo delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These
delays prevent the tool from actually reaching the specified position. The
servo delay compensation function compensates for any displacement by
increasing the feedrate. Thus, grinding can be performed almost up to the
specified position.
There are two types of chopping functions: that specified by
programming, and that activated by signal input. For details of the
chopping function activated by signal input, refer to the manual provided
by the machine tool builder.
Format
G81.1 Z__ Q__ R__ F__ ;
Z : Upper dead point
(For an axis other than the Zaxis, specify the axis address.)
Q : Distance between the upper dead point and lower dead point
(Specify the distance as an incremental value, relative to the
upper dead point.)
R : Distance from the upper dead point to point R
(Specify the distance as an incremental value, relative to the
upper dead point.)
F : Feedrate during chopping
G80;
Cancels chopping
186
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Explanations
Chopping activated by
signal input
Before chopping can be started, the chopping axis, reference position,

upper dead point, lower dead point, and chopping feedrate must be set
using the parameter screen (or the chopping screen).
Chopping is started once chopping start signal CHPST has been set to 1.
This signal is ignored, however, during chopping axis movement.
When chopping hold signal *CHLD is set to 0 during chopping, the tool
immediately moves to point R. Again setting the chopping hold signal to
1 restarts chopping.
Chopping can also be stopped by setting chopping start signal CHPST to
0, but only when chopping was started by using that signal.
Methode of starting chopping

Signal CHPST = 1
G81 1
G81.1
Methode of stopping chopping
State
Signal CHPST = 0
Stopped
G80
Stopped
Signal CHPST = 0
Not stopped
G80
Stopped
NOTE
1 Switching to manual mode or suspending automatic
operation, by means of feed hold, does not stop chopping.
2 In chopping mode, a chopping axis move command or
canned cycle command cannot be specified.
3 If a G81.1 command is specified during chopping started by
the signal, chopping is not stopped. If point R, the upper
dead point, lower dead point, or chopping feedrate has
been modified by using the G81.1 command, chopping is
continued, but using the modified data.
4 The use of chopping start signal CHPST to start chopping
is not enabled immediately after poweron; it is not enabled
until the completion of manual reference position return.
Chopping feedrate
(feedrate of movement to
point R)
From the start of chopping to point R, the tool moves at the rapid traverse
rate (specified by parameter No. 1420).
The override function can be used for either the normal rapid traverserate
or chopping feedrate, one of which can be selected by setting CPRPD (bit
0 of parameter No. 8360).
When the chopping feedrate is overridden, settings between 110% and
150% are clamped to 100%.
Chopping feedrate
(feedrate of movement
from point R)
Between point R, reached after the start of chopping, and the point where
the chopping is canceled, the tool moves at the chopping feedrate
(specified by parameter No. 8374).
The chopping feedrate is clamped to the maximum chopping feedrate (set
with parameter No. 8375) if the specified feedrate is greater than the
maximum chopping feedrate.
The feedrate can be overridden by 0% to 150% by applying the chopping
feedrate override signal.
187
1. AXIS CONTROL
Setting chopping data
B63003EN1/02
Set the following chopping data:
D
D
D
D
D
D
Chopping axis:
Reference point (point R):
Upper dead point:
Lower dead point:
Chopping feedrate:
Maximum chopping feedrate:
Parameter No. 8370

Parameter No. 8371
Parameter No. 8372
parameter No. 8373
Parameter No. 8374
Parameter No. 8375
All data items other than the chopping axis and maximum chopping
feedrate can be set on the chopping screen.
For details of how to set chopping data on the chopping screen, refer to
the operators manual (III 11.4.13 Displaying and Setting Chopping
Data.)
Chopping after the upper

dead point or lower dead
point has been changed
When the upper dead point or lower dead point is changed while chopping
is being performed, the tool moves to the position specified by the old
data. Then, chopping is continued using the new data.
While chopping is being performed, data can be changed only on the
chopping screen. Changing the data on the parameter screen has no effect
on the current chopping operation.
When movement according to the new data starts, the servo delay
compensation function stops the servo delay compensation for the old
data, and starts the servo delay compensation for the new data.
The following describes the operations performed after the data has been
changed.
(1) When the upper dead point is changed during movement from the
upper dead point to the lower dead point
New upper dead point
Previous upper dead point
Previous lower dead point
The tool first moves to the lower dead point, then to the new upper
dead point.
Once movement to the lower dead point has been completed, the
previous servo delay compensation is set to 0, and servo delay
compensation is performed based on the new data.
188
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the
upper dead point to the lower dead point
New lower dead point
The tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the upper
dead point, and finally to the new lower dead point.
Once movement to the upper dead point has been completed, the
(3) When the upper dead point is changed during movement from the
lower dead point to the upper dead point
New upper dead point
The tool first moves to the previous upper dead point, then to the lower
dead point, and finally to the new upper dead point.
Once movement to the lower dead point has been completed, the
(4) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the
lower dead point to the upper dead point
New lower dead point
The tool first moves to the upper dead point, then to the new lower
dead point.
Once movement to the upper dead point has been completed, the
189
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Servo delay
compensation function
When highspeed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servo

delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent the
tool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unit
measures the difference between the specified position and the actual tool
position, and automatically compensates for the displacement of the tool.
To compensate for this displacement, an amount of travel equal to the
distance between the upper and lower dead points, plus an appropriate
compensation amount, is specified. When a chopping command is
specified, the feedrate is determined so that the chopping count per unit
time equals the specified count. When the difference between the
displacement of the tool from the upper dead point and the displacement
of the tool from the lower dead point becomes smaller than the setting of
parameter No. 8377, after the start of chopping, the control unit performs
compensation.
When compensation is applied, the chopping axis moves beyond the
specified upper dead point and lower dead point, and the chopping
feedrate increases gradually.
When the difference between the actual machine position and the
specified position becomes smaller than the effective area setting
(parameter No. 1826), the control unit no longer applies compensation,
allowing the tool to continue moving at its current feedrate.
A coefficient for the compensation amount for the displacement
generated by the servo delay incurred by chopping and the delay incurred
during acceleration/deceleration can be specified in parameter No. 8376.
Point R
Upper dead point
L2
Lower dead point
L1
L3
L4
L6
L5
Time
Displacement between the tool and the upper dead point: L2, L4, L6
Displacement between the tool and the lower dead point: L1, L3, L5
Compensation starts when:
| L3 L2 | < (parameter No. 8377)
When the following condition is satisfied, compensation is no longer applied,
and the tool continues to move at its current feedrate:
| L6 | < effective area setting (parameter No. 1826)
190
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
D
D
Acceleration
Exponential acceleration/deceleration is used for chopping axis.
Mode switching during

chopping
If the mode is changed during chopping, chopping does not stop. In

manual mode, the chopping axis cannot be moved manually. It can,
however, be moved manually by means of the handle interrupt.
Reset during chopping
When a reset is performed during chopping, the tool immediately moves

to point R, after which chopping mode is canceled.
If an emergency stop or servo alarm occurs during chopping, mode is
canceled, and the tool stops immediately.
Stopping chopping
The following table lists the operations and commands that can be used
to stop chopping, the positions at which chopping stops, and the operation
performed after chopping stops:
Operation/command
Stop position
Operation after
chopping stops
G80
Point R
Canceled
CHPST: 0
The tool moves to the lower

dead point, then to point R.
Canceled
*CHLD: 0
Point R
Restart after *CHLD

goes 1
Reset
Point R
Canceled
Emergency stop
The tool stops immediately.
Canceled
Servo alarm
The tool stops immediately.
Canceled
P/S alarm
The tool moves to the lower

dead point, then to point R.
Canceled
OT alarm
The tool moves from the upper Canceled

or lower point to point R.
Background editing
Single block signal
Even when single block signal SBK is input during chopping, chopping
continues.
Part program storage

length
When this function is used, a part program storage length of

approximately 0.6 m is required.
When an alarm of background editing or battery alarm is issued, the tool

does not stop at point R.
Limitations
system
While chopping is being performed, do not change the workpiece

coordinate system for the chopping axis.
PMC axis
When the chopping axis is selected as the PMC axis, chopping is not
started.
Mirror image
While chopping is being performed, never attempt to apply the mirror

image function about the chopping axis.
Move command during

chopping
If a move command is specified for the chopping axis while chopping is

being performed, a P/S 5050 alarm is issued.
191
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Lookahead control
This function does not support the lookahead control function.
Program restart
When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) and

stopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in a
P/S 5050 alarm being output.
When a program that does not include the chopping axis is restarted
during chopping, the coordinates and amount of travel set for the
chopping axis are not affected after the restart of the program.
Examples
G90 G81.1 Z100. Q25. R10. F3000 ;
D
D
Point R
(Z110. )
Perform rapid traverse to position the tool to Z110. (point R).

Then, perform reciprocating movement along the Zaxis between
Z100. (upper dead point) and Z75. (lower dead point) at 3000
mm/min. Chopping override is enabled.
Upper dead point

(Z100. )
Lower dead point

(Z75. )
Time
To cancel chopping, specify the following command:

G80 ;
The tool stops at point R.
Signal
Chopping hold signal

*CHLD <G051#7>
[Function] Suspends chopping.
[Operation] Once this signal has been set to 0, the tool is moved from the current
position to point R, thus suspending chopping. Again setting this signal
to 1while chopping is suspended causes chopping to be restarted.
192
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Chopping start signal

CHPST <G051#6>
[Function] Starts and stops chopping.
[Operation] Setting this signal to 1 starts chopping.
Again setting this signal to 0 during chopping causes chopping to be
stopped.
NOTE
1 If an attempt to start chopping using chopping start signal
CHPST is ignored, set the signal to 0 then back to 1.
2 This signal is not enabled until the completion of manual
reference position return.
Chopping feedrate
override signals *CHP0
to *CHP8
<G051#0 to G051#3>
[Function] Overrides the chopping feedrate.
[Operation] The actual feedrate during chopping becomes the specified feedrate
multipled by the override value specified with this signal. The following
table lists the correspondence between the signal states and the override
value:
*CHP8
*CHP4
*CHP2
*CHP0
Override value
150%
140%
130%
120%
110%
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
193
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Choppinginprogress
signal CHPMD <F039#2>
[Function] Posts notification of chopping in progress.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
Upon chopping start signal CHPST being set to 1 to start chopping
This signal is set to 0 in the following cases:
Upon chopping start signal CHPST being set to 0 to stop chopping
Upon chopping being terminated by a reset.
Chopping cycle signal

CHPCYL <F039#3>
[Function] Posts notification of a chopping cycle being performed between the upper
and lower dead pionts.
Upon a chopping cycle being started between the upper and lower dead
pionts
Once chopping has been stopped

When the tool is stopped at the upper or lower dead point
Upon chopping hold signal *CHLD being set to 0
Signal address
G051
#7
*CHLD
#6
CHPST
#5
#4
#3
*CHP8
#2
*CHP4
#1
*CHP2
#0
*CHP0
#1
#0
CPRPD
CHPCYL CHPMD
G039
Parameter
8360
#7
CHPX
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
[Data type] Bit

CPRPD For the chopping function, a rapid traverse override for a section from the
current position to the R point is determined as follows:
0 : A chopping override is enabled.
1 : An ordinary rapid traverse override is enabled.
CHPX On the chopping screen, the chopping speed can:
0 : Be set.
1 : Not be set.
194
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8370
Chopping axis
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 to the number of controlled axes
This parameter specifies which servo axis the chopping axis corresponds
to.
8371
Chopping reference point (R point)
8372
Chopping upper dead point
8373
Chopping lower dead point
[Data type] 2word

[Valid data range]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
The data set in these parameters are absolute coordinates.

8374
Chopping speed
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Linear axis (metric input)
1.00 mm/min
Linear axis (inch input)
0.01 inch/min
Valid data range : For ISA and B, 240000 mm/min or 9600 inches/min
For ISC, 100000 mm/min or 4800 inches/min
8375
Maximum chopping feedrate
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
Metric machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
30 to 240000
30 to 100000
30 to 96000
30 to 48000
30 to 240000
30 to 100000
The chopping speed is clamped at a value specified in this parameter.

When the parameter is 0, no chopping operation occurs.
195
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
8376
Chopping compensation scaling factor
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter specifies a scaling factor used to multiply the
compensation value for a servo delay or acceleration/deceleration delay
in an chopping operation. When this parameter is 0, servo delay
compensation will not be applied.
8377
Compensation start tolerance
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Compensation is applied when the difference between an amount of

shortage at the upper dead point and that at the lower dead point is less
than the value specified in this parameter. In other words, this parameter
is used to enable compensation after the chopping operation settles.
When the parameter is 0, compensation will not be applied.
Alarm and message
Number
5050
Reference item
Message
ILLCOMMAND IN
CHOPPING MODE
Contents
When the chopping function is used, a move command was specified for a chopping axis in chopping mode (during reciprocation between a upper
dead point and a lower dead point).
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
196
II.20.6
Chopping function (G80,

G81.1)
III.11.4.13
Displaying and setting chopping data
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.13
HOBBING MACHINE
FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General
Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (Caxis) in sync with the
rotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob.
Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (Caxis) in sync
with the motion of the Zaxis (axial feed axis).
Helical gear
Hob
Spindle
Caxis
Gear material
Format
G81 T _ L _ Q _ P _ ;
T : Number of teeth (specifiable range: 1 to 5000)
L : Number of hob threads (specifiable range: 1 to 20 with a sign)
S The sign of L specifies the direction of rotation of the Caxis.
S If L is positive, the Caxis rotates in the positive direction (+).
S If L is negative, the Caxis rotates in the negative direction ()
Q : Module or diametral pitch
For metric input, specify a module.
(Units = 0.00001 mm; specifiable range = 0.01 to 25.0 mm)
For inch input, specify a diametral pitch.
(Units = 0.00001 inch1; specifiable range = 0.01 to 250.0 inch1)
P : Gear helix angle
(Units = 0.0001 deg; specifiable range = 90.0 to +90.0 deg)
P and Q must be specified when a helical gear is to be cut.
G81 ;
Cancels synchronization between the hob axis and Caxis.
197
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Explanations
Setting the Caxis
The Caxis (workpiece) is usually the fourth axis. However, any axis can
be set as the Caxis by setting the corresponding parameter appropriately
(parameter No. 7710).
Maintaining the
synchronization status
The synchronization status is maintained provided:

D The interlock signal for the Caxis is turned on.
D The feed hold state exists.
Releasing the
synchronization status
Synchronization between the hob axis and Caxis can also be canceled
when:
D
D
D
The power is turned off.

An emergency stop or servo alarm occurs.
A reset (external reset signal ERS, reset & rewind signal RRW, or reset
key on the MDI panel) is issued.
By setting bit 0 (HBR) of parameter No. 7700, the release of the
synchronization status by a reset can be suppressed.
Helical gear
compensation
When a helical gear is to be cut, compensation for the Caxis, according

to the amount of travel along the Zaxis (third axis) (axial feed) and gear
helix angle, is required.
Helical gear compensation is performed by adding compensation pulses,
calculated using the following formula, to the Caxis which is
synchronized with the hob axis:
Z
sin (P)
Compensation angle =
360 (For metric input)
p
T
Q
or
Z
Q sin (P)
360 (For inch input)
p
T
where
Compensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg)
Z : Amount of travel along the Zaxis after the specification of G81
(mm or inches)
Total amount of travel along the Zaxis in both automatic and
manual modes
P : Signed gear helix angle (deg)
T : Number of teeth
Q :Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch1)
The values of P, T, and Q must be programmed.
198
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Direction of the helical

gear compensation
(a)
+Z
+C
1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1
(b)
+Z
(c)
+C

(e)
+Z
C : +
Z : +
P :
Compensation
direction
:

+Z
(f)
+C
+Z
+Z
C :
Z : +
P :
Compensation
direction
: +
+C
C : +
Z :
P :
Compensation
direction
: +
(g)
(d)
C : +
Z :
P : +
Compensation
direction
:
Z
C :
Z : +
P : +
Compensation
direction
:
+Z
Z
C : +
Z : +
P : +
Compensation
direction
: +
(h)
+Z
C :
Z :
P : +
Compensation
direction
: +
C :
Z :
P :
Compensation
direction
:
2 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 0 (Items (a) to (d) are the
same as for 1.)
(e)
+Z
Z
C :
Z : +
P : +
Compensation
direction
: +
(f)
Setting the helical gear

axial feed axis
+Z
(g)
+Z
C :
Z : +
P :
Compensation
direction
:
(h)
C :
Z :
P : +
Compensation
direction
:
+Z
C :
Z :
P :
Compensation
direction
: +
The Zaxis (axial feed axis) is usually the third axis. However, any axis
can be set as the Zaxis by setting the corresponding parameter
appropriately (parameter No. 7709).
199
1. AXIS CONTROL
D Caxis servo delay
compensation (G82, G83,

G84)
B63003EN1/02
The servo delay is proportional to the speed of the hob axis. Therefore,
in a cycle where rough machining and finish machining are performed at
different hob axis speeds, compensation for the servo delay is required.
The servo delay is calculated as follows:
Fc
1
E={(
)
(
+ C M + L) Sup}
N
60
Ks
where
E : Caxis servo delay compensation (deg)
Fc : Caxis speed when G83 is specified (deg/min)
Ks : Servo loop gain (LPGIN of parameter No. 1825) (s1)
C : Delay incurred in the CNC (s)
M : Delay compensation magnification 1 in the CNC
(SVCMP1 of parameter No. 7715)
L : Delay incurred by smoothing, as specified by parameter No. 7701
(s)
Sup : Remaining pulse error caused by acceleration/deceleration (deg)
N : Caxis servo delay compensation magnification 2
(SVCMP2 of parameter No. 7714)
When the hob axis speed is changed, Caxis servo delay compensation
is performed using either of the following two methods:
Compensation is specified both before and after the speed is
changed. Each time G83 is specified, compensation for the delay
at that time is applied.
Before the speed is changed, the servo delay is recorded. After the
speed is changed, compensation for the difference between the
recorded delay and that observed when the command is specified
is performed.
The latter method, in which the compensation before speed change is
recorded, can be used by setting bit 5 (DLY) of parameter No. 7701 to 1.
This method, in comparison with that where the amount of compensation
is not recorded, offers the advantage of increasing the processing speed.
Method in which compensation for the delay when a command is
specified is performed (G82, G83)
G82 : Cancels Caxis servo delay compensation.
G83 : Executes Caxis servo delay compensation.
(Example)
G81 T___ L___ ;
. . Starts synchronization.
M03 S100 ;
. . Rotates the hob axis.
G04 P2000 ;
. . Causes the tool to dwell to assure
constant hob axis rotation.
G01 G83 F___ ;
. . Performs Caxis delay compensation.
G01 X___ F___ ;
.
.
G82 ;
. . Cancels Caxis servo delay.
S200 ;
. . Changes the speed.
G04 P2000 ;
G01 G83 F___ ;
. . Performs Caxis delay compensation.
S
S
200
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Method in which the delay before change is recorded (G82, G83, G84)
G82 : Cancels Caxis servo delay compensation.
G83 : Applies compensation for the difference between the Caxis
servo delay, observed when G83 is specified, and the delay
recorded by G84.
G84 : Records the Caxis servo delay observed when G84 is
specified. (The recorded value remains as is until G81 is
specified or another G84 is specified.)
(Example)
G81 T___
L___ ;
. . Starts synchronization.
M03 S100 ;
. . Rotates the hob axis.
G04 P2000 ;

G84 ;
. . Records the Caxis servo delay at the

current speed.
G01 X___ F___ ;

.
.
.
S200 ;
. . Changes the speed.
G04 P2000 ;
. . Records the Caxis servo delay at the

current speed.
G01 G83 F___ ;
. . Applies Caxis delay compensation.
Notes
S
S
S
S
Caxis synchronous
shift
Specify the G83 block in G01 mode. Also, specify a feedrate using
the F code.
Once G83 has been specified, another G83 command cannot be
specified until compensation is canceled by specifying G82, or
Caxis synchronization is canceled.
Specify G83 once a constant hob axis rotation speed has been
achieved.
In Caxis servo delay compensation (G83), compensation is not
applied to the integer part of the gear pitch. The compensation
direction is opposite to that of the Caxis rotation.
Caxis handle interrupt

During synchronization between the hob axis and Caxis, manual
handle interrupt can be performed for the Caxis. The Caxis is
shifted by the amount of the handle interrupt.
For details of handle interrupts, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
Synchronous shift by programming
During synchronization between the hob axis and Caxis, the Caxis
can be interrupted using G01. In this case, be careful not to exceed the
maximum cutting speed.
Example: Hob shifting during synchronization
G01 Y___ C___ F___ ;
201
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Manual setting of
onerotation signal
When the rotation of the position coder is stopped, setting the

onerotation signal set signal MSPC to 1 causes the position of the
onerotation signal to shift in the CNC as if the onerotation signal had
been output with the position coder at the current position.
When the shift request is accepted, the onerotation position setting
completed signal MSPCF is output. According to this signal, the operator
knows when the onerotation signal position is shifted. The shift request
is accepted if the Caxis is in syncoff state (G80). The shift request is
canceled when the synchronization cancel command (such as G80 or a
reset) is issued.
Retract function
In both automatic and manual operation modes, setting the retract signal
RTRCT to 1 (the rising edge is detected) enables retraction over the
distance specified by parameter No. 7741, along the axis set by bit 0
(RTRx) of parameter No. 7730.
Upon the completion of retraction, the retract completed signal RTRCTF
is output.
D The feedrate used for retracting is that specified using parameter No.
7740. Feedrate override is not supported for retracting.
D Feed hold is not supported for retraction.
D If the retract signal becomes 1 during automatic operation, retraction
occurs, and automatic operation is discontinued.
D The retract completed signal becomes 0 when any retract axis is
shifted.
Limitations
Setting a rotation axis
Set a rotation axis as the Caxis (workpiece axis). (Bit 0 (ROTx) of

parameter No. 1006 = 1)
Gear ratio of the spindle

and position coder
The gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder must be 1. (Bits 0 and
1 of parameter No. 3706 = 0)
Signal
Retract signal
RTRCT<G066#4>
[Function] Causes retraction along an axis specified using bit 0 (RTR) of parameter
No. 7730.
[Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit behaves as follows:
D The control unit detects the positivegoing edge of this signal, and can
cause retraction along an axis specified using bit 0 (RTR) of parameter
No. 7730 on that positivegoing edge. The amount and speed of
retraction are those specified in advance using parameter Nos. 7741
and 7740. Upon the completion of retraction, the retract completed
signal RTRCTF becomes 1. The retract signal is usable for both
automatic operation (such as MEM and MDI) and manual operation
(such as HNDL and JOG) modes. If the retract signal is set to 1 during
automatic operation, retraction is started, and automatic operation is
discontinued.
202
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Retract completed signal

RTRCTF<F065#4>
[Function] Indicates when retraction is complete.
[Operation] The signal becomes 1 when:
D Retraction ends.
The signal becomes 0 when:
D Any movement along the axis occurs once retraction along that axis
has been completed.
Onerotation position
manual set signal
MSPC<G066#5>
[Function] Shifts the onerotation signal position of the position coder.
D The position of the position coder when the signal becomes 1 is
recorded as the onerotation signal position in the CNC. In addition,
the onerotation signal setting completed signal MSPCF becomes 1
to indicate that the onerotation signal position has been recorded.
Once the onerotation position manual set signal is issued,
synchronization between the hob axis and Caxis is established
according to the specified onerotation signal position specified by
G81. This signal is ignored when:
S The hob axis and Caxis are already in sync (G81 mode).
S The onerotation signal setting completed signal MSPCF is
already 1.
When bit 1 (CMS) of parameter No. 7700 is 0, issuing a synchronization
cancel command (such as G80 or a reset) cancels a specified onerotation
signal position. Once the onerotation signal position is canceled,
synchronization between the hob axis and Caxis is established according
to a onerotation signal from the position coder as specified by the G81.
Onerotation position
setting completed signal
MSPCF<F065#5>
[Function] Indicates that the onerotation signal position has been set up according
to onerotation position manual set signal MSPC.
D The onerotation signal position is set up according to onerotation
position manual set signal MSPC.
D The onerotation signal position is canceled, that is, a synchronization
cancel command (such as G80 or a reset) is issued when bit 1 (CMS)
of parameter No. 7700 is 0.
203
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
SyncwithCaxis signal
HOBSYN<F065#7>
[Function] Indicates that the hob axis is in sync with the Caxis.
[Operation] The signal is 1 when:
D The hob axis is in sync with the Caxis (during G81 mode).
The signal is 0 when:
D The hob axis is not in sync with the Caxis (during G80 mode).
CancelsyncwithC
axis signal
HOBCAN <G066#2>
[Function] Cancels synchronization between the hob axis and Caxis.
[Operation] When the signal is 1, the control unit behaves as follows:
D The control unit cancels synchronization between the hob axis and
Caxis (G81 mode). The specified onerotation position (MSPCF)
varies with bit 1 (CMS) of parameter No. 7700.
Signal address
#7
#6
G066
#7
F065
#6
HOBSYN
#5
MSPC
#4
RTRCT
#3
#5
MSPCF
#4
#3
RTRCTF
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#2
#1
#0
#2
#1
#0
ROTx
HOBCAN
Parameter
#7
#6
1006

ROTx Specifies whether each axis is a linear or rotation axis.
0 : Linear axis
1 : Rotation axis
The Caxis (workpiece axis) must always be a rotation axis.
#7
#6
#5
3706
#4
#3
#2
#1
PSG2
#0
PSG1
[Data type] Bit

PSG2, PSG1 PSG2 and PSG1 Gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder. Both bits
must be 0 (magnification = 1).
204
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
7700
#6
DPS
#5
RTO
#4
#3
MLT
#2
HDR
#1
CMS
#0
HBR
[Data type] Bit

HBR Specifies whether to cancel synchronization between the Caxis and hob
axis (G81) when a reset occurs.
0 : Canceled.
1 : Not canceled.
CMS Specifies whether to cancel the manually set onerotation signal position
when a synchronization cancel command (such as G80 or a reset) is
issued.
0 : Canceled.
1 : Not canceled.
HDR HDR Specifies the direction of helical gear compensation
(This bit is usually set to 1.)
MLT Specifies the data unit for the Caxis servo delay compensation amount
magnification (parameter No. 7714).
0 : 0.001
1 : 0.0001
RTO Specifies whether to enable the gear ratio of the spindle to the position
coder specified in parameter No. 3706.
0 : Disabled. (This bit must always be 0.)
1 : Enabled.
DPS Specifies what is to be displayed as the actual spindle speed.
0 : Rotational speed of the hob axis
1 : Rotational speed of the spindle
7701
#7
HBD
#6
#5
DLY
#4
JHD
#3
#2
SM3
#1
SM2
#0
SM1
[Data type] Bit

SM1, SM2, SM3 Specify how many times the hobbing machine is to sample feedback
pulses from the position coder.
SM3
SM2
SM1
Number of times sampling

is to be performed
16
32
205
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
JHD Specifies whether to enable Caxis jog and handle feed during
synchronization between the Caxis and hob axis (G81 mode).
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
DLY Specifies whether to enable Caxis servo delay compensation based on
G84.
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
HBD Specifies whether to enable the specification of diametral pitch for inch
input.
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
7709
Axis number of a helical gear axial feed axis
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., number of controlled axes
This parameter specifies the placing of the helical gear axial feed axis.
If a value that falls outside the valid data range is specified, the helical gear
axial feed axis is specified as the third axis.
NOTE
7710
Axis number of a synchronous axis
NOTE
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., number of controlled axes
This parameter specifies the placing of an axis (workpiece) in sync with
the hob axis (tool). If a value that falls outside the valid data range is
specified, the synchronous axis is specified as the fourth axis.
7711
Gear ratio of the hob axis to the position coder
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 1
This parameter specifies the gear ratio of the hob axis to the position
coder.
206
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
7712
Acceleration/decelerationtime constant applied to the Caxis when it is in sync

with the hob axis
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter specifies an acceleration/deceleration (exponential
acceleration/deceleration) time constant applied to the Caxis when it is
in sync with the hob axis.
NOTE
In G01, G83, and helical gear compensation, acceleration/
deceleration is performed according to the acceleration/
deceleration time constant for cutting feed and FL feedrate
(parameter Nos. 1622 and 1623).
7713
Acceleration/decelerationFL feedrate applied to the Caxis when it is in sync with

the hob axis
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
1 deg/min
ISB
ISC
6 X 15000
6 X 12000
This parameter specifies the FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration

(exponential acceleration/deceleration) applied to the Caxis when it is
in sync with the hob axis.
7714
Magnification 2 for a G83based Caxis servo delay compensation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.0001/0.001
This parameter specifies magnification 2 for a G83based Caxis servo
delay compensation.
7715
Magnification 1 for a G83based Caxis servo delay compensation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.0001/0.001
This parameter specifies magnification 1 for a G83based Caxis servo
delay compensation.
207
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
7730
#0
RTRx

RTRx Specifies whether to apply the retract function for each axis.
0 : Not applied.
1 : Applied.
7740
Retract speed for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISB
ISC
Metric machine
1 mm/min
30 X 240000
30 X 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
30 X 96000
30 X 48000
This parameter specifies a retract speed for each axis.
7741
Retract amount for each axis
[Valid data range] " 99999999

[Unit of data]
Unit of data
Increment system
ISB
ISC
Metric input
0.001 mm
0.0001 mm
Inch input
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
This parameter specifies a retract amount for each axis.
208
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Reference item
Description
181
FORMAT ERROR IN G81 The G81 block is not of the correct forBLOCK
mat.
1 T (number of teeth) has not been
specified.
2 Data specified for T, L, Q, or P falls
outside the valid data range.
182
G81 NOT COMMANDED
183
DUPLICATE G83 (COM- G83based Caxis servo delay comMANDS)

pensation was requested again before
the previous request had been canceled using G82.
184
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN An invalid command was issued during

G81
G81based synchronization.
1. Caxis commands based on G00,
G27, G28, G29, and G30
2. G20 or G21based commands for
switching between inch and metric
inputs
185
RETURN
TO
ERENCE POINT
186
PARAMETER
ERROR
G83 (Caxis servo delay compensation) was specified when G81based

synchronization had not been specified.
REF- G81 was issued before no reference

position return was made after the power was switched on or an emergency
stop occurred.
SETTING A value for a parameter related to G81

is invalid.
1. The Caxis has not been specified
as a rotation axis (bit 0 (ROT) of parameter No. 1006).
2. A value specified as the gear ratio of
the hob axis to the position coder is
invalid (parameter No. 7711).
Note)These errors may be detected
when G81 is issued.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
209
II.20.7
Hobbing machine
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
1.14
SIMPLE ELECTRIC
GEAR BOX
(G80, G81)
(M SERIES)
General
Example control axis

configuration
To machine (grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axis

connected to a servo motor is synchronized with the rotation of the tool
axis (grinding wheel/hob) connected to the spindle motor. To
synchronize the tool axis with the workpiece axis, an electric gear box
(EGB) function is used for direct control using a digital servo system.
With the EGB function, the workpiece axis can trace tool axis speed
variations without causing an error, thus machining gears with great
precision.
The 4th axis is always assigned as the workpiece axis.
Another servo axis is dedicated to the tool axis, which is connected to the
spindle motor and for which the rotational position must be read directly
by the digital servo system (this axis is called the EGB axis). It is
necessary to assign these axes as odd and even servo axes in succession
(parameter No. 1023). See Section 1.4.3 for an example showing how to
specify the parameters for configuring the simplified electronic gearbox.
Format
G81 T _ L _ Q _ P _ ;
S_ M03 (or M04) ;
M05 ;
G80 ;
Starts synchronization.
Starts tool axis rotation.
Stops tool axis rotation.
Cancels synchronization.
T : Number of teeth (Specifiable range: 1 to 1000)

L : Number of hob threads
(Specifiable range: 21 to +21 with 0 excluded)
Q : Module or diametral pitch
Specify a module in the case of metric input.
(Unit: 0.00001 mm, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0 mm)
Specify a diametral pitch in the case of inch input.
(Unit: 0.00001 inch1, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0 inch1)
P : Gear helix angle
(Unit: 0.0001 deg, Specifiable range: 90.0 to 90.0 deg.)
* When specifying Q and P, the user can use a decimal point.
210
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Explanations
Synchronization control
1 Start of synchronization
When synchronization mode is set with G81, the synchronization
switch of the EGB function is closed, and synchronization between the
tool axis and workpiece axis starts. At this time, synchronization
mode signal SYNMOD is turned on. During synchronization, the
rotation of the tool axis and workpiece axis is controlled so that the
relationship between T (number of teeth) and L (number of hob
threads) can be maintained. Moreover, the synchronous relationship
is maintained regardless of whether the operation is automatic or
manual during synchronization.
G81 cannot be specified again during synchronization. Moreover, the
specification of T, L, Q, and P cannot be modified during
synchronization.
2 Start of tool axis rotation
When the rotation of the tool axis starts, the rotation of the workpiece
starts so that the synchronous relationship specified in the G81 block
can be maintained.
The rotation direction of the workpiece axis depends on the rotation
direction of the tool axis. That is, when the rotation direction of the
tool axis is positive, the rotation direction of the workpiece axis is also
positive; when the rotation direction of the tool axis is negative, the
rotation direction of the workpiece axis is also negative. However, by
specifying a negative value for L, the rotation direction of the
workpiece axis can be made opposite to the rotation direction of the
tool axis.
During synchronization, the machine coordinates of the workpiece
axis and EGB axis are updated as synchronous motion proceeds. On
the other hand, a synchronous move command has no effect on the
absolute and relative coordinates.
3 Termination of tool axis rotation
In synchronism with gradual stop of the tool axis, the workpiece axis
is decelerated and stopped. By specifying the command below after
the spindle stops, synchronization is canceled, and the EGB
synchronization switch is opened. At this time, the synchronization
mode signal (SYNMOD) is turned off.
4 Cancellation of synchronization
The position of the workpiece axis after travel during synchronization
is reflected in the absolute coordinates when synchronization is
canceled; from this point, absolute command programming is enabled
for the workpiece axis. By setting bit 0 (HBR) of parameter No. 7700
to 0, synchronization can also be canceled upon reset.
* The synchronization mode is canceled by a servo alarm, PS000
alarm, or emergency stop.
211
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Example timing for

starting/terminating
synchronization
Synchronization start command (G81)
Synchronization mode
EGB mode confirmation
signal SYNMOD
<F065#6>
Tool axis rotation command (SM03)
Tool axis stop command

(M05)
Tool axis rotation speed
Workpiece axis rotation

command
Synchronization termination command (G80)
Helical gear
compensation
When a helical gear is to be produced, the compensation of workpiece axis

rotation is needed according to the travel distance on the Zaxis (axial
feed).
Helical gear compensation is performed by adding compensation pulses
calculated from the formula below to the workpiece axis:
Z
sin (P)
360 (For metric input)
p
T
Q
or
Z
Q sin (P)
360 (For inch input)
p
T
212
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
where
Compensation angle: Signed absolute value (deg)
Z : Amount of travel on the Zaxis after the specification of G81
(mm or inch)
P : Signed gear helix angle (deg)
T : Number of teeth
Q: Module (mm) or diametral pitch (inch1)
The values of P, T, and Q are to be programmed.
Direction of helical gear

compensation
(a)
+Z
+C
(b)
+Z

(e)
+C
C : +
Z : +
P :
Compensation
direction
:

+Z
+C
C : +
Z :
P : +
Compensation
direction
:
(f)
+Z
C :
Z : +
P :
Compensation
direction
: +
C :
Z :
P : +
Compensation
direction
: +
(d)
+Z
+C
C : +
Z :
P :
Compensation
direction
: +
(g)
Z
C :
Z : +
P : +
Compensation
direction
:
+Z
(c)
Z
C : +
Z : +
P : +
Compensation
direction
: +
+Z
1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1
(h)
+Z
C :
Z :
P :
Compensation
direction
:
2 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 0 (Items (a) to (d) are
the same as for 1.)
213
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
(e)
+Z
C :
Z : +
P : +
Compensation
direction
: +
(f)
+Z
(g)
+Z
C :
Z : +
P :
Compensation
direction
:
(h)
C :
Z :
P : +
Compensation
direction
:
+Z
C :
Z :
P :
Compensation
direction
: +
Coordinates in helical
compensation
In helical compensation, the machine coordinates and absolute

coordinates of the workpiece axis (4th axis) are updated by the amount of
helical compensation.
Retraction
By turning on the retract signal RTRCT (on a rising edge) in automatic

operation mode or manual operation mode, a retract movement can be
made over the distance specified in parameter No. 7741 on the axis set in
bit 0 (RTRx) of parameter No. 7730. Upon completion of retract
operation, the retract completion signal RTRCTF is output.
Feedrate at retraction
For retract operation, the feedrate specified in parameter No. 7740 is used.
During retract operation, the feedrate override capability is disabled.
Retraction during
automatic operation
When the retract signal is turned on in automatic operation, retract

operation is performed, and automatic operation is stopped at the same
time.
Synchronization
coefficient
A synchronization coefficient is internally represented using a fraction

(K2/K1) to eliminate an error. The formula below is used for calculation.
(a , b : Number of detector pulses per rotation of the tool axis, and number
of detector pulses per rotation of the workpiece axis (parameter Nos. 7772
and 7773), respectively)
K2
L
b
Synchronization coefficient =
=
K1
T
a
In the formula above, K2/K1 is obtained by reducing the right side to
lowest terms, but K1 and K2 must satisfy the following restriction:
2147483648 x K2 x 2147483647
1 x K1 x
65535
When this restriction is not satisfied, the PS181 alarm is issued when G81
is specified.
Manual handle interrupt
During synchronization, a manual handle interrupt can be used for the

workpiece axis and other servo axes.
Move command during

synchronization
During synchronization, a move command can be programmed for the

workpiece axis and other servo axes. Note, however, that incremental
command programming for cutting feed must be used to specify a
workpiece axis move command.
214
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Limitations
Feed hold during

retraction
For retract movement, the feed hold capability is disabled.
Retraction when alarm is

issued
This function does not include a retract function used when an alarm is
issued.
Rapid traverse during

synchronization
In synchronization mode, a cutting feedrate can be specified for the

workpiece axis (4th axis). Rapid traverse cannot be specified using G00.
Maximum speed
The maximum speeds of the tool axis and workpiece axis depend on the
detectors used.
G code command during

synchronization
During synchronization, G00, G28, G27, G29, G30, G53, G20, and G21
cannot be specified.
Drilling canned cycle
When this function is used, the drilling canned cycle cannot be used.
Examples
O1000 ;
N0010 M19 ;
N0020 G28 G91 C0 ;
Performs tool axis orientation.

Performs reference position return
operation of the workpiece axis.
N0030 G81 T20 L1 ;
Starts synchronization between the tool
axis and workpiece axis.
(The workpiece axis rotates 18 when
the tool axis makes one rotation.)
N0040 S300 M03 ;
Rotates the tool axis at 300 rpm.
N0050 G01 X
F
; Makes a movement on the Xaxis
(for cutting).
N0060 G01 Z
F
; Makes a movement on the Zaxis
(for machining).
;
;
N0100 G01 X
F
; Makes a movement on the Xaxis
(for retraction).
N0110 M05 ;
Stops the tool axis.
N0120 G80 ;
Cancels synchronization between the
tool axis and workpiece axis.
N0130 M30 ;
Signal
Retract signal RTRCT

<G066#4>
[Function] Performs retraction for the axis specified with a parameter.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit performs the following:
215
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Performs retraction on the axis specified with bit 0 (RTRx) of parameter

No. 7730. The retract speed and amount of retraction are specified with
parameter Nos. 7740 and 7741.
The retract signal is effective both in automatic operation mode and
manual operation mode. Setting the retract signal to 1 during automatic
operation suspendsautomatic operation and causes retraction to be
performed.
Retract completion
signal RTRCTF <F065#4>
[Function] Posts notification of the completion of retraction.
Upon the completion of retraction
This signal is set to 0 in the following case:
Upon the completion of retraction, when a move command follows
immediately after
NOTE
The retract signal is not accepted while the retract
completion signal is set to 1.
EGB mode signal

SYNMOD <F065#6>
[Function] Posts notification that synchronization using the EGB is in progress.
While synchronization using the EGB is in progress
Once synchronization using the EGB has terminated
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#6
#5
G066
#7
F065
#4
RTRCT
#3
#2
#1
#0
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RTRCTF
SYNMOD
216
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
When setting the parameters for the simple electric gear box, note the
following:
(1) Set SYNMOD (bit 0 of parameter No. 2011) to 1 for the workpiece
(4th) axis and EGB axis.
(2) If FFALWY (bit 1 of parameter No. 2011) is set to 1, the values set in
parameters No. 2068 and 2069 are used as the feedforward factor and
velocity loop feedforward factor, respectively. For details, refer to
Feedforward setting in Geometric error suppression function in
the FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR Series Parameter Manual
(B65150E).
(3) Set the servo parameters for the EGB axis (No. 2000 and subsequent
parameters) such that they do not conflict with the settings made for
the 4th (workpiece) axis.
(4) Set the command multiplication (CMR) for the EGB axis (No. 1820)
in the same way as for the 4th axis.
(5) The following EGB axis parameters need not be set:
Reference counter capacity (No. 1821)
Inposition width (No. 1826)
Excessive error while moving/stopped (No. 1828 and 1829)
Stored stroke limits (No. 1320 to 1327)
(6) Set the flexible feed gear parameters (No. 2084 and No. 2085) for the
EGB axis as follows:
No.2084=1 No.2085=1
(7) Set the servo axis numbers in parameter No. 1023, using as many bits
as the number of servo axes.
(Example)
When using the Yaxis as the EGB axis in a 4axis

configuration
No. 1023 1st axis: . . . . . . . . . 1
No. 1023 2nd axis: . . . . . . . . . 4
No. 1023 3rd axis: . . . . . . . . . 2
No. 1023 4th axis: . . . . . . . . . . 3
When using the 5th axis as the EGB axis in a 6axis

configuration
No. 1023 1st axis: . . . . . . . 1
No. 1023 2nd axis: . . . . . . . 2
No. 1023 3rd axis: . . . . . . . 5
No. 1023 4th axis: . . . . . . . 3
No. 1023 5th axis: . . . . . . . 4
No. 1023 6th axis: . . . . . . . 6
(8) Parameter setting related to feedforward control

1) To set the velocity loop to 1 msec, modify the motor type for the
workpiece axis and EGB axis, thus reperforming automatic setting.
Parameter No. 2020 = Motor number for 1 msec velocity loop
Parameter No. 2000 bit 1 = 0
Set the above, then turn the power off then back on again.
2) Reset the parameters related to the EGB.
Parameter No. 2011 bit 0 = 1 (for both the workpiece and EGB
axes)
Parameter No. 2011 bit 1 = 1 (for both the workpiece and EGB
axes)(Note)
217
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Set this parameter when applying feedforward control to
rapid traverse also.
(3) Other parameters
Parameter No. 2003 bit 3 = 1 (PI control)
Parameter No. 2005 bit 1 = 1 (feedforward control enabled)
Parameter No. 2068 = 10000 (feedforward factor)
(4) Suppressing load variation
Increase the value of parameter No. 2021 (within the range in which
the motor does not oscillate).
Set this parameter to the value obtained from the following:
256 x (machine load inertia)/(motor rotor inertia)
For details of parameter setting, refer to Feedforward setting in
Geometric error suppression function in the FANUC AC SERVO
MOTOR Series Parameter Manual (B65150E).
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
2011
#1
#0
FFALWY SYNMOD
SYNMOD EGB synchronous control is:

0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
FFALWY The feedforward function is:
0 : Enabled only for cutting feed.
1 : Always enabled.
#7
#6
#5
7700
#4
#3
#2
HDR
#1
#0
HBR
[Data type] Bit

HBR 0 : Performing a reset cancels synchronous of the Caxis
(G81).
1 : Performing a reset does not cancel synchronous of the Caxis (G81).
HDR Setting of the direction for compensating a helical gear (1 is usually
specified.)
7709
Number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear
[Data type] Byte

[Valid range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. If
the value out of the valid range is specified, 3 (the 3rd axis) is specified.
NOTE
After setting this parameter, the power must be turned off
then on again.
218
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RTRx
7730

RTRx Specifies whether the retraction function is effective for each axis.
0 : Retraction is disabled.
1 : Retraction is enabled.
7740
Feedrate during retraction for each axis
[Data type] 2word axis
[Unit of data and valid range]
Valid range
Increment system
Millimeter machine
Inch machine
Unit of data
ISB
ISC
1 mm/min
30 to 240000
30 to 100000
0.1 inch/min
30 to 96000
30 to 48000
This parameter sets the feedrate during retraction for each axis.
7741
Retracted distance for each axis
[Valid range] " 99999999
Valid range
Unit of data
Millimeter input
Inch input
7771
ISB
ISC
0.001 mm
0.0001 mm
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
Number of EGB axis
NOTE
After setting this parameter, turn off the power. Then,
turn the power back on to enable the setting.
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 to the number of controlled axes
This parameter specifies the number of the EGB axis.
NOTE
1 You cannot specify four because the fourth axis is used as
the workpiece axis.
2 For a machine using the inch increment system, linear
axes cannot be used as the EGB axis.
219
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
7772
Number of position detector pulses per rotation about tool axis
[Data type] 2word

[Data unit] Detection unit
This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about the tool
axis (on the spindle side), for the position detector.
NOTE
Specify the number of feedback pulses per rotation about
the tool axis for the position detector, considering the gear
ratio with respect to the position coder.
7773
Number of position detector pulses per rotation about workpiece axis
[Data type] 2word

[Data unit] Detection unit
This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about the
workpiece axis (on the fourth axis side), for the position detector.
[Example] The number of feedback pulses for the position detector is 360000 for a
rotation axis for which the detection unit is 0.001 deg.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Contents
181
FORMAT ERROR IN G81 BLOCK
G81 block format error (hobbing machine)
1) T (number of teeth) has not been instructed.
2) Data outside the command range was instructed by either T, L, Q or

P.
3) Calculation of the synchronous coefficient has overflowed.
184
(gear hobbing machine, EGB)
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G81
A command not to be instructed during synchronous by G81 was

instructed. (hobbing machine)
1) A C axis command by G00, G27, G28, G29, G30, etc. was
instructed.
186
2) Inch/Metric switching by G20, G21 was instructed.
PARAMETER SETTING ERROR
Parameter error regarding G81 (hobbing machine)
1) The C axis has not been set to be a rotary axis.
2) A hob axis and position coder gear ratio setting error
220
1. AXIS CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
221
II.20.8
Simple electric gear box

(G80, G81)
B63003EN1/02
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION
222
B63003EN1/02
2.1
EMERGENCY STOP
General
If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operators panel, the
machine movement stops in a moment.
Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. 2.1 (a) EMERGENCY STOP
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the

machine tool builder, the button can usually be unlocked by twisting it.
Signal
Emergency stop
*ESP<X008#4,G008#4>
[Function] Outputting an emergency stop signal stops the machine instantly.
[Operation] When the emergency stop signal *ESP turns to 0, the emergency stop
is applied to the machine and the CNC is reset. This signal is controlled
by the B contacts of a pushbutton switch. The emergency stop signal turns
the servo ready signal (SA) to 0.
Overtravel detection by this CNC is handled by the stored stroke check
function, and a limit switch for normal overtravel detection is not needed.
To prevent the machine from moving beyond the software limit through
servo feedback error, always install a stroke end limit switch (shown in
Fig. 2.1 (b) as follows).
223
B63003EN1/02
Emergency stop limit switch

Relay power
supply
Emergency stop
+X
=X
+Y
=Y
+Z
=Z
+4
=4
Emergency stop temporary release

EMG
SK
Spark killer
Fig. 2.1 (b) Connection of emergency stop limit switch
The distance from the position where the dynamic brake is applied to that
where the tool stops moving is given in the AC Servo Motor
Descriptions.
WARNING
Software limit setting point and operating point of limit switch
for emergency stop
The stop point by the software limit goes beyond the setting
point by as much as the following distance.
R (mm)
7,500
R: Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
The actual stopping point may exceed the position set by a
parameter (Nos.1320 and 1321) by as much as R/7500
(mm). Set the limit switch for emergency stop including the
allowance for the above value.
Software limit setting point
Stroke end direction
R
7,500
The machine stops in this

range.
224
Set the limit switch for emergency stop in

this range.
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
*ESP
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
*ESP
#3
#2
#1
#0
X008
G008
Reference item

DESCRIPTIONS
225
B65142E
B63003EN1/02
2.2
CNC READY SIGNAL
General
When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC
ready signal is set to 1.
Signal
CNC Ready Signal

MA<F001#7>
[Function] The CNC ready signal reports that the CNC is ready.
[Output condition] When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the signal
is set to 1. Normally, it takes several seconds to establish this state after
the power is turned on. If a system alarm is issued, the signal is set to 0.
The signal remains set to 1, however, when an emergency stop or a similar
operation is performed.
F001
#7
MA
#6
#5
226
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Servo Ready Signal

SA <F000#6>
[Function] Signal SA turns to 1 when the servo system is ready to operate. For an
axis that is to be braked, release the brake when this signal is sent and
apply the brake when this signal is not sent.
Time chart of this signal is as follows:
Power off
Power on
Servo ready
signal (SA)
Ready signal (MA)
60A100 msec
Brake on
Servo alarm
Servo alarm
Overload
Reset
Reset
1 to 2 seconds
Emergency stop
About 1 second
Fig. 2.2 Time chart for servo ready signal
#7
F000
#6
SA
#5
227
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
2.3
OVERTRAVEL
CHECK
2.3.1
Overtravel Signal
General
When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool
limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit
switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed.
Signal
Overtravel signal
*+L1 to *+L8<G114>
*+L1 to *L8<G116>
[Function] Indicates that the control axis has reached its stroke limit. There are
signals for every direction in every control axis. The +/ in the signal
name indicates the direction and the number corresponds to the control
axis.
+ L 1
1
No. 1 axis is at stroke limit.
:
8
:
Has moved to and reached a + direction.
Has moved to and reached a direction.
[Operation] When it is 0 , the control unit operates as given below.

@ In automatic operation, if even one axis overtravel signal turns to 0,
all axes are decelerated to stop, an alarm is given and operation is
halted.
@ In manual operation, only the axis whose movement signal has turned
to 0 is decelerated to a stop, and the axis can be moved in the
opposite direction.
@ Once the axis overtravel signal has turned to 0, the axis direction is
registered. Even if the signal returns to 1, it is not possible to move
that axis in that direction until the alarm is cleared.
228
B63003EN1/02
The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel.

(i) Rapid traverse
VR
Command pulse
deceleration
*+La limit switch
Servo system delay
t1
t2
TR
TR
1
+TS)
[mm or inch]
2
60000
L1:Deceleration distance
VR: Rapid traverse speed (mm/min or inch/min)
t1: Limit switch signal delay time (from limit switch operation to *+La
signal turn off (ms))
t2: Receiver delay time 30ms
TR: Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant (ms)
TS: Servo system time constant (ms)
L1=VR(t1+t2+
NOTE
Servo system time constant TS is 33 msec when the servo
unit is adjusted to the standard setting.
(ii)Cutting feed
VC
*+La limit switch
Servo system delay
t1
t2
TR
1
+TS)
[mm or inch]
2
60000
L2:Deceleration distance
Vc: Maximum feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
t1, t2, Ts: Same as (i).
L2=VC(t1+t2+
229
Releasing overtravel
B63003EN1/02
Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety
direction by manual operation.
Signal address
G114
#7
*+L8
#6
*+L7
#5
*+L6
#4
*+L5
#3
*+L4
#2
*+L3
#1
*+L2
#0
*+L1
G116
*L8
*L7
*L6
*L5
*L4
*L3
*L2
*L1
#7
#6
#5
OTH
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter
3004
[Data type] Bit

OTH The overtravel signal is:
0 : Checked
1 : Not checked
WARNING
For safety, usually set 0 to check the overtravel signal.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
Reference item
Description
506
OVER TRAVEL : +n
Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18) +

side hardware OT.
507
OVER TRAVEL : n
Exceeded the nth axis (axis 18)

side hardware OT.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.6.2
Overtravel
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.2
Overtravel
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.6.2
Overtravel
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.2
Overtravel
230
B63003EN1/02
2.3.2
Stored Stroke Check 1
General
When the tool tries to exceed a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed
and the tool is decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came.
Parameters (Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327) set boundary. Outside
the area of the set checks is a forbidden area. The machine tool builder
usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
Signal
Stored stroke check

select signal EXLM
<G007#6>
[Function] Selects stroke check 1I (parameter Nos. 1320 and 1321) or stroke check
1II (parameter Nos. 1326 and 1327).
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
Checks stroke check 1 on the basis of parameter Nos. 1326 and 1327,
instead of parameter Nos, 1320 and 1321.
Stroke check external

setting signals +LM1 to
+LM8 <G110> and LM1
to LM8 <G112> (M
series)
[Function] Change the values of the parameters governing the stroke check (1320 and
1321).
[Operation] When these signals are set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
Change the stored checks, set with parameter Nos. 1320 and 1321,
to the machine coordinates when the signals are input.
Stroke check release

signal RLSOT <G007#7>
(M series)
[Function] Selects whether the stored stroke check 1 are checked.
Does not check the stored stroke check 1.
231
Signal address
G007
G110
G112
B63003EN1/02
#7
RLSOT
#6
EXLM
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
+LM8
+LM7
+LM6
+LM5
+LM4
+LM3
+LM2
+LM1
LM8
LM7
LM6
LM5
LM4
LM3
LM2
LM1
#7
BFA
#6
LZR
#5
#4
#3
#2
LMS
#1
#0
BFA
LZR
Parameter
1300
LMS
[Data type] Bit

LMS The EXLM signal for switching stored stroke check 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
LZR Checking of stored stroke check 1 during the time from poweron to the
manual position reference return
0: The stroke check 1 is checked.
1: The stroke check 1 is not checked
NOTE
When the absoluteposition detector is being used, and the
reference position is already set at poweron, the stored
stroke check is checked immediately after the power is
turned on, regardless of the setting of this bit.
BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check 1, 3 is issued

0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
1320
Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1321
Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
The coordinate values of stored stroke checks 1 in the positive and

negative directions are set for each axis in the machine coordinate system.
The outside area of the two checks set in the parameters is inhibited.
232
B63003EN1/02
WARNING
1 For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must
be set.
2 When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke
becomes infinite:
parameter 1320 < parameter 1321
For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set, only
incremental commands are available. If an absolute command is issued
for this axis, the absolute register may overflow, and normal movement
will not result.
1326
Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1327
Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction each axis

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Set the coordinate values of stored stroke checks 1 in the positive and
negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system.
When stroke check switching signal EXLM is ON, stroke checks are
checked with parameters 1326 and 1327, not with parameters 1320 and
1321. The area outside that set by parameters 1326 and 1327 is inhibited.
NOTE
The EXLM signal is enabled only when LMS, #2 of
parameter 1300, is set to 1.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
Description
500
OVER TRAVEL : +n

side stored stroke check 1.
501
OVER TRAVEL : n

Caution
CAUTION
In setting a forbidden area, if two points to be set are the
same, all area is forbidden in check 1.
233
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each
check becomes effective after the power is turned on and
manual reference position return or automatic reference
position return by G28 has been performed or immediately
after the power is turned on.
2 For the 2path control, set a forbidden area for each path.
3 Parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm
is displayed immediately before the tool enters the
forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.3
Stroke check
234
B63003EN1/02
2.3.3
Stored Stroke
Check 2, 3
General
Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored
stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,and stored stroke check 3.
Stored stroke
check 3
Stored stroke
check 2
Stored stroke check 1
: Forbidden area for the tool
Fig. 2.3.3 (a) Stroke check (T series)
(X, Y, Z)
(I, J, K)
(1) Forbidden area is inside.
(X, Y, Z)
(I, J, K)
(2) Forbidden area is outside.
: Forbidden area for the tool
Fig. 2.3.3 (b) Stroke check (M series)
When the tool exceeds a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed and
the tool is decelerated and stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came.
235
B63003EN1/02
Parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323) or commands set these boundaries. Inside

or outside the area of the check can be set as the forbidden area. Parameter
OUT (No. 1300#0) selects either inside or outside as the forbidden area.
In case of program command a G22 command forbids the tool to enter the
forbidden area, and a G23 command permits the tool to enter the forbidden area. Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded independently of
another commands in a block.
The command below creates or changes the forbidden area:
G 22X_Z_I_K_;
A(X,Z)
B(I,K)
X>I,Z>K
XI>
ZK>
is the distance the tool travels in 8 ms. It is 2000 in least

command increments when the feedrate is 15 m/min.
Fig. 2.3.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program
(T series)
G 22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_;
(X,Y,Z)
(I,J,K)
X>I,Y>J,Z>K
XI> (In least command increment)
YJ> (In least command increment)
ZK> ((In least command increment)

Fig. 2.3.3 (d) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program
(M series)
A(X1,Z1)
B(X2,Z2)
X1>X2,Z1>Z2
X1X2>
Z1Z2>

Fig. 2.3.3 (e) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters
(T series)
236
B63003EN1/02
A(X1, Y1, Z1)
B(X2, Y2, Z2)
X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2

X1X2> (In least command increment)
Y1Y2> (In least command increment)
Z1Z2> (n least command increment)

Fig. 2.3.3 (f) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters
(M series)
When you set the forbidden area X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2 and Z2 through
parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323), the data should be specified by the
distance from the reference position in the least command increment
(output increment).
If set the forbidden area X, Y, Z, I, J, K (X, Z, I, K, on T series) by a G22
command, specify the data by the distance from the reference position in
the least input increment (input increment). The programmed data are
then converted into the numerical values in the least command increment,
and the values are set as the parameters.
Set the boundary with parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325. The area inside
the boundary becomes the forbidden area.
Checkpoint for the

forbidden area
The parameter setting or programmed value (XZIK) depends on which

part of the tool or tool holder is checked for entering the forbidden area.
Confirm the checking position (the top of the tool or the tool chuck) before
programming the forbidden area.
If point C (The top of the tool) is checked in Fig. 2.3.3 (g), the distance
c should be set as the data for the stored stroke check function. If point
D (The tool chuck) is checked, the distance d must be set.
Forbidden area boundary
The position of the

tool after reference
position return
Fig. 2.3.3 (g) Setting the forbidden area (T series)
237
B63003EN1/02
The position of the

tool after reference
position return
A
Forbidden area boundary
Fig. 2.3.3 (h) Setting the forbidden area (M series)
Forbidden area over

lapping
Area can be set in piles.
Fig. 2.3.3 (i) Setting the forbidden area overlapping (T series)
Unnecessary checks should be set beyond the machine stroke.
Setting the forbidden area over lapping
Fig. 2.3.3 (j) Setting the forbidden area overlapping (M series)
Effective time for a

forbidden area
Parameter LZR (bit 6 of No. 1300) selects whether each check becomes
effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return
or automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed or
immediately after the power is turned on.
After the power is turned on, if the reference position is in the forbidden
area of each check, an alarm is generated immediately (Only in G22 mode
for stored stroke check 2).
Releasing the alarms
When the tool enters and forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool
can be moved in the reverse direction from which the tool came. Please
move the tool out of the forbidden area, then please release the alarm by
reset. If succeeded, the tool become movable to both paths.
238
B63003EN1/02
Change from G23 to

G22 in a forbidden area
When G23 is switched to G22 in the forbidden area, the following results.
(1)When the forbidden area is inside, an alarm is informed in the next
move.
(2)When the forbidden area is outside, an alarm is informed immediately.
Creating the forbidden

area for the 2path
control
For the 2path control, set a forbidden area for each tool post.
Signal
Storoke check 3 release

signal RLSOT3
<G007#4>
[Function] Selects whether stored stroke check 3 is checked.
[Use] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
The control unit does not check stored stroke check 3.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
RLSOT3
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
BFA
#6
LZR
#5
RL3
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OUT
G007
Parameter
1300
[Data type] Bit

OUT The area inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an
inhibition area.
0: Inside
1: Outside
RL3 Stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3
0: The signal is disabled.
1: The signal is enabled.
LZR Checking of stored stroke check 1 during the time from poweron to the
0: The stroke check 1 is checked.
1: The stroke check 1 is not checked
NOTE
When the absoluteposition detector is being used, and the
reference position is already set at poweron, the stored
stroke check is checked immediately after the power is
turned on, regardless of the setting of this bit.
239
B63003EN1/02
BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check 1, 3 is issued

0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check 1, 3 is exceeded.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1310
#1
OT3x
#0
OT2x

OT2x Whether stored stroke check 2 is checked for each axis is set.
0: Stored stroke check 2 is not checked.
1: Stored stroke check 2 is checked.
OT3x Whether stored stroke check 3 is checked for each axis is set.
0: Stored stroke check 3 is not checked.
1: Stored stroke check 3 is checked.
1322
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
1323
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system. OUT,
#0 of parameter 1300, sets either the area outside or the area inside
specified by two checks as the inhibition area.
WARNING
For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must
be set.
1324
Coordinate value of stored stored check 3 in the positive direction on each axis
1325
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negatice direction on each axis

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
negative directions for each axis in the machine coordinate system. The
area inside the checks set in the parameters is forbidden.
240
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Warning
Description
502
OVER TRAVEL : +n

(Parameter No.1322 )
503
OVER TRAVEL : n

(Parameter No.1323)
504
OVER TRAVEL : +n

505
OVER TRAVEL : n

WARNING
1 In setting a forbidden area, if the two points to be set are the
same, the area is as follows:
(1)When the forbidden area is check 1, all areas are
forbidden areas.
(2)When the forbidden area is check 2 or check 3, all areas
are movable areas.
2 In setting a forbidden area, if the two points are set in the wrong
order, the area is set as follows:
(1) When the forbidden area is check 1, the stroke check becomes
infinite.
(2) When the forbidden area is check 2 or 3, a quadrangle with the
two points assumed as vertexes is set as the check.
Note
NOTE
Parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm
is displayed immediately before the tool enters the
forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area. (check 1, 3 only)
241
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.3
Stroke check
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.3
Stroke check
242
B63003EN1/02
2.3.4
Chuck/Tailstock Barrier
(T series)
General
The chuck/tailstock barrier function prevents damage to the machine by

checking whether the tool tip interferes either the chuck or tailstock.
Specify an area into which the tool may not enter (entryinhibition area).
This is done using the special setting screen, according to the shapes of
the chuck and tailstock. If the tool tip should enter the set area during a
machining operation, this function stops the tool and outputs an alarm
message.
The tool can be cleared from the area only by retracting it in the direction
opposite to that in which the tool entered the area.
Signal
Tailstock barrier select

signal *TSB <G060#7>
[Function] Enables or disables the tailstock barrier.
Disables the tailstock barrier, even when the G22 command (stored
stroke check on) is specified in the program.
G code
*TSB
Tailstock barrier
Chuck barrier
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
G22
G23
When the G23 command (stored stroke check off) is specified, the
tailstock barrier is disabled regardless of the *TSB signal. When the G22
command (stored stroke check on) is specified, the tailstock can be
disabled by setting the signal to 1.
This signal is used to select whether the tailstock area is forbidden, when
machining a workpiece by attaching and detaching the tailstock to and
from the workpiece according to M commands.
Signal address
G060
#7
*TSB
#6
#5
243
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Profile of a chuck
1330
Profile of a chuck
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 or 1
0 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface
1 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface
1331
Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (L)
1332
Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (W)
1333
Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held (L1)
1334
Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held (W1)
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.0001
0.00001
inch

1335
X coordinate of a chuck (CX)
1336
ZX coordinate of a chuck (CZ)
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Specify the profile of a chuck.
244
B63003EN1/02
Chuck which holds a workpiece on

the outer surface (TY=1)
Chuck which holds a workpiece on

the inner surface (TY=0)
L1
CX
W1
W1
L1
CZ
CX

CZ
Zero point of
the workpiece
coordinate
system
Zero point of
the workpiece
coordinate
system
Symbol
Description
TY
Profile of a chuck (0: Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner

surface, 1: Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface)
CX
X coordinate of a chuck
CZ
Z coordinate of a chuck
Dimensions of the claw of a chuck
Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (radius input)
L1
Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held
W1
Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held

(radius input)
TY: Specifies the profile of a chuck. When TY is set to 0, the chuck holding a
workpiece on the inner surface is specified. When TY is set to 1, the chuck
holding a workpiece on the outer surface is specified. The profile of the
chuck is assumed to be symmetrical with respect to the zaxis.
CX, and CZ:
Specify the position (point A) of a chuck with the coordinates of the

workpiece coordinate system. In this case, do not use the coordinates of
the machine coordinate system.
WARNING
Specifying the coordinates with a diameter or radius
depends on whether the corresponding axis conforms to
diameter or radius specification . When the axis conforms
to diameter specification, the coordinates is specified with
a diameter.
L, L1, W, and W1: Define the profile of a chuck.

WARNING
Always specify W and W1 with radiuses. L and L1 is
specified with radiuses when the Zaxis conforms to radius
specification.
245
B63003EN1/02
1341
Length of a tailstock (L)
1342
Diameter of a tail stock (D)
1343
Length of a tailstock (L1)
1344
Diameter of a tail stock (D1)
1345
Length of a tailstock (L2)
1346
Diameter of a tail stock (D2)
1347
Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (D3)
[Data type] Twoword
Increment system
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.0001
0.00001
inch

1348
Z coordinate of a tailstock (TZ)
[Data type] Twoword
Increment system
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Specify the profile of a tailstock.
Zero point of
the workpiece
coordinate
system
TZ
L1
L2
Workpiece
D3
246
D2
D1
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
TZ
Description
Zaxis coordinate of a tailstock
Length of a tailstock
Diameter of a tailstock (diameter input)
L1
Length of a tailstock (1)
D1
Diameter of a tailstock (1) (diameter input)
L2
Length of a tailstock (2)
D2
Diameter of a tailstock (2) (diameter input)
D3
Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (diameter input)
TZ: Specifies the position (point B) of a tailstock with the Zaxis coordinate
of the workpiece coordinate system. In this case, do not use the coordinate
of the machine coordinate system. The profile of a tailstock is assumed to
be symmetrical with respect to the Zaxis.
WARNING
Specifying the position of a tailstock with a radius or
diameter depends on whether the Zaxis conforms to
radius or diameter specification.
L, L1, L2, D, D1, D2, and D3:

Define the profile of a tailstock.
WARNING
D, D1, D2, and D3 is always specified with diameters. L, L1,
and L2 is specified with radiuses if the Zaxis conforms to
radius specification.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
502
503
Description
OVER TRAVEL : +X
The tool has entered the forbidden

area when moving in the positive
direction along the Xaxis.
OVER TRAVEL : +Z

area when moving in the positive
direction along the Zaxis.
OVER TRAVEL : X

area when moving in the negative
direction along the Xaxis.
OVER TRAVEL : Z

area when moving in the negative
direction along the Zaxis.
247
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
1 If the setting for the forbidding area is invalid as follows, the
area may not be forbidden:
1) In the setting of the chuck shape, the jaw length
(parameter No. 1331) is less than the grasp length
(parameter No. 1333) or the jaw width (parameter No.
1332) is less than the grasp width (parameter No. 1334).
2) In the setting of the tailstock shape, the tailstock diameter
(parameter No. 1346) is less than the hole diameter
3) The position of a chuck and the position of a tailstock is
overlapped.
2 When the options for stored stroke check 2 and
chuck/tailstock barrier are used at the same time, the
chuck/tailstock barrier is valid but stored stroke check 2 is
ignored.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.4
Chuck and Tailstock Barriers
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.4
Chuck and Tailstock Barriers
248
B63003EN1/02
2.3.5
Tool Post Interference
Check (T series,
Twopath Control)
General
When two tool posts machine the same workpiece simultaneously, the
tool posts can approach each other very closely. If the two tool posts
interfere with each other due to a program error or any other setting error,
a serious damage such as a tool or machine destruction can occur.
The function tool post interference check is available to decelerate and
stop the two tool posts before they interfere with each other due to an
incorrect command.
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
The contours of the two tool posts are checked to determine whether an
interference occurs or not.
Signal
Tool post interference
check signal
TICHK <F064#6>
[Function] Indicating whether the tool post interference check function is being
performed.
[Output condition] This signal goes 1 when:
(i) All requisites for the tool post interference check function are satisfied.
This signal goes 0 when:
(i) The requisites for the tool post interference check function are not
completely satisfied.
NOTE
The detailed requisites for the tool post interference check
function, please refer to the operators manual for Lathe.
249
B63003EN1/02
Tool post interference

alarm signal
TIALM <F064#7>
[Function] Indicates that the tool post interference alarm is activated.
[Output condition] This signal goes 1 when:
(i) The control unit judges that the two tool posts will interfere with each
other during the execution of the tool post interference check function.
This signal goes 0 when:
(i) The control unit judges that the two tool posts will not interfere with
each other during the execution of the tool post interference function.
(ii)When the tool post interference check function is not being performed
(i.e., the TICHK signal is 0).
NOTE
1 During the execution of the interference check function, if
the control unit judges that the two tool posts will interfere
with each other, it stops both tool posts by slowing them
down, and then enters the alarm state. The CNC then sets
the TIALM signal 1 to indicate that an interference alarm
has occurred.
2 If the interference alarm is occured, switch the operation
mode to the manual mode, manually withdraw the tool posts
to where they do not interfere each other, then release the
alarm status by resetting the control unit.
As the result of manually withdrawing the tool posts, the
TIALM signal goes 0 when the control unit judges that the
tool posts are separated enough not to interfere with each
other any more. When manually withdrawing the interfering
tool posts, the TIALM signal is effective in identifying how far
the tool posts must be separated from each other. This is
because it is easy for the operator to check at the point
which the signal goes 0.
3 If an interference alarm occurs, the axis being moved and
its moving direction are stored, and the axis cannot be
moved in the stored direction until the alarm is released by
resetting the control unit. This prevents the axis from
interfering any further by prohibiting movement in the
direction that caused the interference.
250
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
F064
#7
TIALM
#6
TICHK
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
ZCL
#4
IFE
#3
IFM
#2
ITO
#1
TY1
#0
TY0
Parameter
8140
[Data type] Bit

TY0, TY1 This parameter specifies the relationship between the coordinate systems
of the two tool posts.
(1) When TY1=0 and TY0=0
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
Tool post 1
Tool post 1
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
Tool post 2
Tool post 2
ITO When offset number 0 is specified by the T code,

0: Checking interference between tool posts is stopped until an offset
number other than 0 is specified by the next T code.
1: Checking interference between tool posts is continued according to
the previously specified offset number.
IFM Specifies whether interference between tool posts is checked in the
manual operation mode.
0: Not checked
1: Checked
251
B63003EN1/02
IFE Specifies whether interference between tool posts is checked.

0: Checked
1: Not checked
ZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checking
interference between tool posts.
0: Checked
1: Not checked (Only interference along the X axis is checked.)
8151
Distance along the X axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
8152
Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Indicating the distance between two tool posts.

Tool post 2
+X
Specify the X and Z values (e, z) of the

reference position of tool post 2 in
parameters 8151 and 8152,
respectively, in the ZX plane
coordinate system. However, note that
the reference position of tool post 1 is
plotted at the zero point.
+Z
Tool post 1
WARNING
After the parameter values are changed, perform manual
reference position return for individual tool posts.
Otherwise, data on the positional relationship between the
tool posts stored in memory will not be updated to the new
parameter values.
252
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Warning
Description
169
ILLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA
Incorrect tool figure data in interference check.
508
INTERFERENCE : +X
INTERFERENCE : +Z
An interference alarm has generated

when X or Z axis is moving in the positive direction.
509
INTERFERENCE :
INTERFERENCE :
An interference alarm has generated

when X or Z axis is moving in the negative direction.
*X
*Z
WARNING
1 When an alarm is raised, the CNC system and machine
system stop with some time delay. So an actual stop
position can be closer to the other tool post beyond an
interference forbidden position specified using tool shape
data. So, for safety, tool shape data should be set a little
larger than the actual shape. The extra distance, L,
required for this purpose is calculated from a rapid traverse
feedrate as follows
1
7500
For example, when a rapid traverse feedrate of 15 m/min is
used, L=2mm.
2 When parameters or tool shape data (contact forbidden
area) are set for the interference check, check that the
interference forbidden area is correctly set by moving the
tool posts to interfare with each other in several directions
in manual mode (interference check enabled with a
parameter).
L = (Rapid traverse rate)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
253
II.20.3
Tool post interference check
B63003EN1/02
2.3.6
Stroke Limit Check
Before Move
General
In the automatic operation before the move command by a given block,

the position of the end point is determined by the current position of the
machine and by a specified amount of travel. And it is determined
whether or not the tool enters the inhibit area defined by stored stroke
check 1, 2 or 3. If the tool is found to enter the inhibited area defined by
a stored stroke check, the tool is stopped immediately after the start for
that block, and an alarm is displayed.
WARNING
Whether the coordinates of the end point, reached as a
result of traversing the distance specified in each block, are
in a inhibited area is checked. In this case, the path followed
by a move command is not checked. However, if the tool
enters the inhibited area defined by stored stroke check 1,
2, or 3, an alarm is issued. (See the examples below.)
Example 1)
Inhibited area defined by

stored stroke check 1 or 2
End point
Start point
The tool is stopped at the point which is

defined by stored stroke check 1 or 2.

End point
Immediately upon movement commencing

from the start point, the tool is stopped to
enable a stroke check check to be performed before movement.
254
B63003EN1/02
Example 2)
End point

Start point
The tool is stopped at point a according

to stored stroke check 2 or 3.

End point
Immediately upon movement commencing

from the start point, the tool is stopped to
enable a stroke limit check to be performed
before movement.
Explanations
When a stroke limit check before move is performed, whether to check

the move performed by a G31 (skip) block and G37 (automatic tool length
measurement) block can be determined using NPC (bit 2 of parameter No.
1301).
Limitations
Machine lock
If machine lock is applied at the start of movement, no stroke limit check

made before movement is performed.
G23
When stored stroke check 2 is disabled (G23 mode), no check is made to

determine whether the tool enters the inhibited area defined by stored
stroke check 2.
Program restart
When a program is restarted, an alarm is issued if the restart position is

within a inhibited area.
Manual intervention
following a feed hold
stop
When the execution of a block is restarted after manual intervention

following a feed hold stop, no alarm is issued even if the end point
following a manual intervention is within a inhibited area.
A block consisting of
multiple operations
If a block consisting of multiple operations (such as a canned cycle and

exponential interpolation (M series only) is executed, an alarm is issued
at the start point of any operation whose end point falls within a inhibited
area.
255
B63003EN1/02
Cyrindrical interpolation
mode
In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made.
Polar coordinate
interpolation mode
In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made.
Angular axis control
When the angulalr axis control option is selected, no check is made.
Simple synchronous
control
In simple synchronous control, only the master axis is checked; no slave

axes are checked.
Threedimensional
coordinate conversion
In threedimensional coordinate conversion mode, no check is made. (M

series only)
Drawing
While drawing in dynamic graphic display mode (only drawing is

performed), no check is made. (M series)
PMC axis control
No check is made for a movement based on PMC axis control.
Highspeed
highprecision contour
control (HPCC)
No check is made for a movement based on highspeed, highprecision

contour control (HPCC). (M series only)
Chuck/tailstock barrier
The chuck/tailstock barrier area is not checked. (T series)
Synchronous control
and composite control
Axes subject to synchronous control and composite control are not

checked. (T series)
Parameter
1301
#7
PLC
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
NPC
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before movement, the
movement specified in G31 (skip) and G37 (automatic tool length
measurement (for M series) or automatic tool compensation (for T series))
blocks is:
0: Checked
1: Not checked
PLC Stroke limit check before movement is:
0: Not performed
1: Performed
256
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
510
511
Reference item
Message
Contents
OVER TRAVEL : +n
The stroke limit check made prior to performing movement reveals that the end point of a
block is located within the stroke limit inhibited area in the positive direction of the n
axis. Correct the program.
OVER TRAVEL : n
The stroke limit check made prior to performing movement reveals that the end point of a
block is located within the stroke limit inhibited area in the negative direction of the n
axis. Correct the program.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.6.4
Stroke Limit Check Prior to

Performing Movement
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.6.5
Stroke Limit Check Prior to

Performing Movement
257
B63003EN1/02
2.4
ALARM SIGNAL
General
When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is indicated on the

screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1.
If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified
level while the CNC is turned off, the battery alarm signal is set to 1.
Signal
Alarm signal
AL<F001#0>
[Function] The alarm signal reports that the CNC is in an alarm state.
There are the following alarms. The following alarms are issued:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
TH alarm
TV alarm
P/S alarm
Overtravel alarm
Overheat alarm
Servo alarm
[Output condition] The alarm signal is set to 1 when:

The CNC is placed in the alarm state.
The alarm signal is set to 0 when:
The alarm has been released by resetting the CNC.
Battery alarm signal

BAL<F001#2>
[Function] The battery alarm signal indicates that the voltage of the battery for the
memory has fallen to below a specified level while the CNC is off. In
general, this signal is used to turn on an LED to notify the operator.
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when:
The battery voltage has fallen to below the specified level.
The signal is set to 0 when:
The battery voltage has risen to the specified level or higher.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
F001
258
#4
#3
#2
BAL
#1
#0
AL
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3111
#7
NPA
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is
entered
0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.
1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.
259
B63003EN1/02
2.5
START LOCK/
INTERLOCK
General
This signal disables machine movement along axes. When this signal is
input during movement along axes, the tool movement is decelerated,
then stopped.
Signal
Start lock signal

STLK<G007#1>(T series)
[Function] This signal disables machine movement along axes in automatic
operation (memory or MDI operation).
[Operation] When the STLK signal turns to 1, the axis movement is decelerated and
stopped.
In automatic operation, blocks containing M, S, T, or B commands 2nd
auxiliary function are executed consecutively until a block containing an
axis move command is encountered; the movement then stops and is
placed into the automatic operation mode (STL is 1, SPL is 0). When
the STLK signal turns to 0, operation restarts. (Figs. 2.5 (a), (b)).
Command read
Axis move
STLK
Fig. 2.5 (a) Block containing only axis move command
Command read
MF/SF/TF
FIN
STLK
Fig. 2.5 (b) Block containing only auxiliary functions only
260
B63003EN1/02
All axes Interlock signal

*IT<G008#0>
[Function] This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective
regardless of the selected mode.
[Operation] When the *IT signal is 0, the axis movement is decelerated and stopped.
In automatic operation, blocks containing M, S, T or B 2nd auxiliary
mode commands are executed consecutively until a block containing an
axis move command is encountered; the system then stops and is placed
into the automatic operation mode (cycle start lamp signal STL is 1,
feed hold lamp signal SPL is 0). When the *IT signal turns to 1,
operation resumes (Figs. 2.5(c), (d)).
Command read
Axis move
*IT
Fig. 2.5 (c) Block containing only axis move command

(manual and automatic operation)
Command read
MF/SF/TF
FIN
*IT
Fig. 2.5 (d) Block containing auxiliary functions only

(automatic operation)
NOTE
The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *IT to 0
is represented by the following formula.
Qmax =Fm @
Where
Qmax
Fm
Tc
Ts
A
:
:
:
:
:
1
(
60
Tc
Ts
A
+
+
)
1000
1000
1000
Overtravel quantity (mm or inch)

Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Cutting time constant (ms)
Servo time constant (Ts = 33ms normally)
Processing time of CNC
A = 50ms
261
B63003EN1/02
Interlock signal for each

axis
*IT1 *IT8<G130>
[Function] These signals disable feed along axes on an axisbyaxis basis.
A separate interlock signal is provided for each controlled axis. The
number at the end of each signal name denotes the number of the
corresponding controlled axis.
*IT 1
1 ..... Interlock for the first axis
2 ..... Interlock for the second axis
3 ..... Interlock for the third axis
:
[Operation] a) In manual operation

The movement of an interlocked axis is inhibited, but the other axes
are movable. If an axis is interlocked during movement, it stops after
being decelerated, and it starts moving again when it is released from
interlock.
b) In automatic operation (MEM RMT or MDI mode)
If an axis is interlocked while its movement is being commanded (the
move amount is not 0, inclusive of the tool offset), all axes movements
are prevented.
If a moving axis is interlocked, all axes stop moving after being
decelerated, and they start moving again when it is released from being
interlocked.
This function is effective during dry run.
Interlock signal for each

axis and direction
+MIT1, MIT1, +MIT2, MIT2,
+MIT3, MIT3, +MIT4, MIT4
<G132#0 to #3, G134#0 to
#3> (M series)
+MIT1, MIT1, +MIT2, MIT2
<X004#2X004#5>(T series)
[Function] This function allows a directional interlock for each axis.
[Operation] When the axis/directional interlock signal becomes 1, CNC applies
interlock only in the corresponding axial direction. However, during
automatic operation, all axes will stop.
262
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
G007
#1
STLK
G008
G130
#0
*IT
*IT8
*IT7
G132
G134
#7
#6
#7
#6
X004
*IT6
#5
MIT2
*IT5
#4
+MIT2
*IT4
*IT3
*IT2
*IT1
+MIT4
+MIT3
+MIT2
+MIT1
MIT4
MIT3
MIT2
MIT1
#3
MIT1
#2
+MIT1
#1
#0
#3
DIT
#2
ITX
#1
#0
ITL
Parameter
#5
#4
3003
[Data type] Bit

ITL Interlock signal for all axes
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
ITX Interlock signals for each axis
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
DIT Interlock for each axis direction
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
Note
NOTE
The interlock signal for each axis and direction (T system)
is supported regardless of whether the direct input of tool
offset value measurement B is provided.
263
B63003EN1/02
2.6
MODE SELECTION
General
The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1,
MD2, and MD4. The seven modes -- memory edit (EDIT), memory
operation (MEM), manual data input (MDI), manual handle/incremental
feed (HANDLE/INC), manual continuous feed (JOG), TEACH IN JOG,
TEACH IN HANDLE -- can be selected. And in addition, DNC operation
mode can be selected by combining the (MEM) mode setting and the
DNCI signal. Manual reference position return mode can be selected by
combining the manual continuous feed (JOG) mode setting and the ZRN
signal.
The currently selected operation mode can be posted by outputting the
operation mode check signal.
Signal
Mode selection signal

MDI, MD2, MD4
<G043#0#2>
DNCI <G043#5>
ZRN <G043#7>
[Operation] As shown in the following table, the mode select signal is a grey code (a
code in which only one bit is different from that of the adjacent mode).
To prevent faulty mode switching, use an overcrossing contact rotary
switch so that only one bit changes from that of the adjacent mode.
Faulty mode switching means for example:
When the mode is switched to the EDIT mode during memory operation,
the CNC enters the single block state and the operation stops at the end
of the executing block.
264
B63003EN1/02
For this mode switching, only MD2 should change from 0 to 1. If a

transient signal status change occurs in a signal other than MD2 during
mode switching, however, another mode (manual continuous feed mode,
for example) is set between automatic operation mode and memory edit
mode. When manual continuous feed mode is set while the CNC is in
automatic status, the CNC immediately stops memory operation. As a
result, although the operator intends to switch the mode to the memory
edit mode, the CNC is, instead, placed in the feed hold state.
Signal status
Mode
MD4
MD2
MD1
DNCI
ZRN
Memory edit (EDIT)
Memory operation (MEN)
Manual data input (MDI)
Manual handle/incremental feed

(HANDLE/INC)
Manual continuous feed (JOG)
TEACH IN HANDLE (THND)
TEACH IN JOG (TJOG)
DNC operation (RMT)
Manual reference position return

(REF)
265
B63003EN1/02
Operation mode check

signal
MMDI, MMEM , MRMT,
MEDT, MH, MINC, MJ,
MREF, MTCHIN
<F003, F004#6>
[Function] The currently selected operation mode is output.
[Operation] The following lists the relationship between the mode selection signals
and check signals:
Input signal
Mode
MD1 DNCI
MD2
MMDI<F003#3>
MMEM<F003#5>
MRMT<F003#4>
MEDT<F003#6>
MH<F003#1>
MINC<F003#0>
MJ<F003#2>
MREF<F004#5>
TEACH IN JOG (TJOG)
MTCHIN<F003#7>,
MJ<F003#2>
TEACH IN HANDLE
MTCHIN<F003#7>,
MH<F003#1>
Manual data input
ZRN
O tp t signal
Output
MD4
(MDI) (MDI operation)
Automatic operation
Memory operation
(MEM)
DNC operation(RMT)
Memory edition (EDIT)
Manual handle feed /

Incremental feed
(HANDLE/INC)
Manual continuous
feed(JOG)
Manual operation
Manual reference position return (REF)
(THND)
Signal address
#7
ZRN
#6
#5
DNCI
#4
#3
G043
#2
MD4
#1
MD2
#0
MD1
F003
#7
MTCHIN
#6
MEDT
#5
MMEM
#4
MRMT
#3
MMDI
#2
MJ
#1
MH
#0
MINC
F004
MREF
266
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
Precautions on modes and mode switching
1 In the MDI mode, the STL signal turns to 0 and the CNC
stops at the end of execution of the commands input from
the CRT/MDI panel, but the SPL signal does not turn to 1.
Therefore, another command can be input from the manual
data input unit under this state.
2 Manual operation in jog feed mode
a) When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 0
Only jog feed is possible.
b) When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1
Both jog feed and manual handle feed are possible,
provided the manual handle feed option is installed. Jog
feed and manual handle feed cannot, however, be
performed simultaneously. Manual handle feed can be
performed when the tool is not being moved by means
of jog feed.
3 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN
HANDLE mode.
a) When parameter JHD no.7100#0 is set to 0 so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
separate modes:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, jog operation can be done.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed can be done
when optional manual handle feed function is provided,
and incremental feed can be done when handle feed
function is not provided.
b) When parameter JHD no.7100#0 is set to 1 so that jog
operation and handle feed operation are performed with
the same mode:
In TEACH IN JOG mode, handle feed and jog feed can be done
when optional manual handle feed function is provided, but jog
feed only when it is not included.
In TEACH IN HANDLE mode, handle feed and jog feed

can be done when optional manual handle feed function
is provided, but incremental feed only when it is not
included.
The program can be edited in both TEACH IN JOG and
TEACH IN HANDLE modes.
267
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
4 Manual operation in TEACH IN JOG mode
a) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 0
Only jog feed is possible.
b) When bit 1 (THD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1
Both jog feed and manual handle feed are possible,
provided the manual handle feed option is installed. Jog
feed and manual handle feed cannot, however, be
performed simultaneously. Manual handle feed can be
performed when the tool is not being moved by means
of jog feed.
5 During operation in automatic operation mode (MEM, RMT,
or MDI), specifying switching to another automatic
operation mode (MEM, RMT, or MDI) or memory editing
mode (EDIT) first places the CNC in the automatic operation
stop state after executing the command of the current block,
after which the mode is switched. At this time, signal STL
is set to 0. Signal SPL is not, however, set to 1. (Fig. 2.6
(a), (b))
MEM mode
Mode select signal state
MDI mode
Operation
Executing command
STL
Fig. 2.6 (a)
Operation
MDI mode
MEM mode
Executing command
in MDI mode
STL
Fig. 2.6 (b)
268
Manual data input possible in

this range
Memory operation possible in

this range
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
6 When the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode is
selected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDI
mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal
turns to 0, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to 1, and
the CNC enters the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE
mode. Manual handle feed or incremental feed by axis
direction select signal is possible under this state. Since the
MEM mode or MDI mode commands are held, operation
can be restarted by the cycle start signal by selecting the
MDI or MEM mode. However, if operation was stopped by
switching to the HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode
during manual data input or automatic operation, it can be
restarted only by the mode in use before the operation was
stopped (Fig. 2.6 (c)).
MEM/MDI mode
HANDLE/INC or
TEACH IN HANDLE mode
Operation in the MEM
mode or MDI mode
Manual handle
/incremental
feed enabled
STL
SPL
ST
Cycle start signal
Fig. 2.6 (c)
269
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
7 When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected during
RMT, MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the
STL signal turns to 0, the SPL signal simultaneously turns
to 1, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOG
mode. Manual feed by feed axis direction select signal is
possible under this state. Operation can be restarted by
returning to the original state, as described for
HANDLE/STEP or TEACH IN HANDLE mode (Fig. 2.6 (d)).
When the mode is switched to the JOG or TEACH IN JOG
mode during manual handle feed or step feed operation, the
CNC ignores the manual handle feed or step feed command
and manual jog feed becomes effective. If a feed axis
direction select signal turns to 1 before the JOG or TEACH
IN JOG mode is selected, that signal is ignored. The feed
axis select signal is selected by turning the necessary feed
axis direction signal to 1 after turning all the feed axis
direction select signals to 0 (Fig. 2.6 (e)).
It is possible to perform handle feed in TEACH IN JOG mode
by parameter THD no.7100#1. For details, refer to item (2),
(4).
MEM/MDI mode
HANDLE/INC or
TEACH IN JOG
mode
Operation in the
MEM mode or MDI
mode
Jog feed
enabled
STL
SPL
Cycle start signal
ST
Fig. 2.6 (d)
100ms or more
MEM/MDI/HADLE/
INC mode/TEACH
IN HANDLE mode
Jog or TEACH
IN JOG
Feed axis
direction select
signal
Jog feed
disable
Fig. 2.6 (e)
270
Jog feed enable
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
8 The mode switching operation is summarized in the time
chart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)).
Disable because of
feed hold state of
automatic operation
Disable because of
feed hold state of
MDI operation
MDI operation
possible hereafter
H / S or
End of operation
Memory read
MDI command
operation
Memory read
ST
*SP
STL
End of operation
Memory
operation
Memory
operation
ST
ST
MDI command
operation
ST
ST
STL
STL
SPL
SPL
MEM mode selection
MDI mode selection
ST
ST
STL
STL
HANDLE/INC or TEACH IN HANDLE mode selection
H/S
J
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode selection
Fig. 2.6 (f) Mode signal time chart
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
4.1
271
Manual Reference Position Return
B63003EN1/02
2.7
PATH SELECTION/
DISPLAY OF
OPTIONAL PATH
NAMES (TWOPATH
CONTROL)
General
Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the MDI

panel are for path 1 or path 2.
The operations, as used here, include displaying and setting data items
(such as tool compensation values), inputting command programs in the
MDI mode, and editing machining programs in program memory.
Additionally, names of each path can be changed by parameter.
Signal
Path selection signal

(Tool post selection
signal) HEAD<G063#0>
[Function] Selects whether the MDI panel is used for path 1 or path 2.
[Operation] When this signal turned to 1, operations performed using the MDI panel
are for path 2.
When this signal turned to 0, operations performed using the MDI panel
are for path 1.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
G063
272
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
HEAD
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
8100
#2
#1
IAL
#0
RST
[Data type] Bit

RST Reset key on the MDI panel
0 : Effective for both paths
1 : Effective for the path selected by the path select signal
IAL When an alarm is raised in one tool post in the automatic operation mode,
0 : The other path enters the feed hold state and stops.
1 : The other path continues operation without stopping.
Parameters for display of
optional path names
3141
Path name (1st character)
3142
Path name (2nd character)
3143
Path name (3rd character)
3144
Path name (4th character)
3145
3146
3147
[Data type] Byte type

Specify a path name with codes (twopath control).
Any character strings consisting of alphanumeric characters and symbols
(up to seven characters) can be displayed as path names on the screen,
instead of HEAD1 and HEAD2 for T series, and instead of PATH1 and
PATH2 for M series.
NOTE
1 This parameter is dedicated to the twopath control.
2 Specify these parameters for each series.
3 For characters and codes, see the correspondence table in
2.1.15 software operators panel.
4 When codes are 0, HEAD1 and HEAD2 for T series and
PATH1 or PATH2 for M series are displayed.
273
B63003EN1/02
2.8
STATUS OUTPUT
SIGNAL
General
The table below lists the status output signals for notifying the state of the
CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal.
Signal name
Alarm signal
Symbol
Reference section
AL
2.4
BAL
2.4
Reset signal
RST
5.2
Rewinding signal
RWD
5.2
Tapping signal
TAP
11.7
Moving signal
MV1 MV8
1.2.5
MVD1 MVD8
1.2.5
Moving direction signals

Inposition signals
Rapid traversing signal

Cutting feed signal
Thread cutting signal
INP1 INP8
7.2.6.1
RPDO
2.8 (the section you are

reading)
CUT
2.8 (the section you are

reading)
THRD
6.4.1
Constant surface speed

signal
CSS
9.5
Inch input signal
INCH
11.4
Signal

RPDO <F002#1>
[Function] This signal indicates that a move command is executed at rapid traverse.
[Output condition] 1 indicates an axis starts moving after rapid traverse has been selected;
0 indicates that an axis starts moving after a feedrate other than rapid
traverse has been selected. This holds true for both automatic and manual
operation modes.
274
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid
traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference
point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The
rapid traverse in manual operation also includes the rapid
traverse in reference position return.
2 Once rapid traverse has been selected, this signal remains
1, including during a stop, until another feedrate has been
selected and movement is started.
Cutting feed signal CUT

<F002#6>
[Function] Notifies that cutting feed is being performed by automatic operation.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
When cutting feed is being performed by automatic operation (cutting
feed for linear interpolation, circular interpolation, helical
interpolation, thread cutting, skip cutting, or cutting in canned cycle)
CAUTION
This signal is not output in the feed hold state.
NOTE
This signal is output even when the feedrate override is 0%,
or during interlock.
Signal address
#7
F002
#6
CUT
#5
275
#4
#3
#2
#1
RPDO
#0
B63003EN1/02
2.9
VRDY OFF ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL
General
The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated
when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF alarm ignore
signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if the
safety guard has been opened.
Signal
AllAxis VRDY OFF

Alarm Ignore Signal
IGNVRY<G066#0>
[Function] Disables the detection of servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, for all axes.
[Operation] When this signal is set to logical 1, the control unit operates as follows:
@The control unit does not issue servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, even
when the servo amplifier ready signal goes off. The control unit,
however, sets servo ready signal SA to 0. The SA signal can remain set
to 1, depending on the setting of SAK, bit 6 of parameter No. 1804.
EachAxis VRDY OFF

Alarm Ignore Signal
IGVRY1 IGVRY8
<G192>
[Function] Disables the detection of servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, for the
corresponding axis. These signals correspond to the controlled axes. The
suffixed number of each signal corresponds to the number of the
controlled axis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to logical 1, the control unit operates as follows:
@The control unit does not issue servo alarm No. 401, VRDY OFF, even
when the servo amplifier ready signal for the corresponding axis goes
off. The servo ready signal SA, however, is set to 0. The SA signal,
however, can remain set to 1 depending on the setting of SAK, bit 6 of
parameter No. 1804.
276
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
G066
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
IGNVRY
G192
IGVRY8 IGVRY7 IGVRY6 IGVRY5 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
Parameter
#7
#6
SAK
1804
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when the
VRDY OFF alarm ignore signals IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 are 1:
0 : Servo ready signal SA is set to 0.
1 : Servo ready signal SA remains set to 1.
Alarm and Message
Number
Message
401
SERVO ALARM: nTH

AXIS VRDY OFF
Description
The nth axis (axis 18) servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the control enters NOT READY status due to
emergency stop or a servo alarm and then the control is
reset, reset processing is not terminated until the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0.
2 When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the
servo amplifier ready signal is set to off, the motor is freed
from the drive, but follow up is not performed. To perform
follow up, set the servo off signal to 1.
Note
NOTE
While the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1, and a
servo alarm other than alarm No. 401 occurs, the control
unit detects the alarm.
277
B63003EN1/02
2.10
ABNORMAL LOAD
DETECTION
General
Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load

torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid
traverse or cutting feed. This function detects a load torque on the motors
and sends it as an estimated load torque to the PMC via the CNC. If the
detected load is abnormally great compared with the value specified in the
parameter, the function stops the servo motor as early as possible or
reverses the motor by an appropriate value specified in a parameter, in
order to minimize a possible damage to the machine. (The function to
reverse motors is effective only for servo motors.)
The abnormal load detection function is further divided as follows:
(1) Estimated load torque output function
The CNC is always calculating the estimated load torque for the motor
(excluding acceleration/deceleration torque). The estimated load
torque output function enables the PMC to read the calculated torque
using the window function.
(2) Abnormal load detection alarm function
This function stops motors or reverses them by an amount specified
in a parameter, causing the CNC to output an alarm, if the load torque
obtained by the estimated load torque output function is greater than
the value specified in a parameter. (The function to reverse motors is
effective only for servo motors.)
278
B63003EN1/02
Parameter setting
The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for the

abnormal load detection function.
(1) Servo axis
Abnormal load detection
function is available.

function to be used?
No. 2016#0 = 0
No
Yes
No. 2016#0 = 1, No. 2104 = 0

alarm function to be used?
No
Yes
Only the estimated load

torque output function is
enabled.
Set parameter bit 5 of No. 2015 to 1 to observe the load torque.
<Adjustment>
Set parameter Nos. 1880, 2050, 2051, 2103, and 2104.
Reset parameter bit 5 of parameter No. 2015 to 0.
The estimated load torque

output and abnormal load
detection functions are enabled.
(2) Spindle
function is available.
Specify parameter Nos. 4247, 4248, 4249, and 4250, and reset parameter No.
4341 to 0.

alarm function to be used?
Yes
Specify parameter No. 4341.
The estimated load torque

output and abnormal load
detection functions are enabled.
279
No
Only the estimated load

torque output function is
enabled.
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Servo axis abnormal

load detected signal
ABTQSV <F090#0>
[Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on a servo axis.
[Output condition] This signal becomes 1 if:
S An abnormal load is detected for a servo axis, Cs axis, spindle
positioning axis, or spindle axis during rigid tapping.
Firstspindle abnormal
load detected signal
ABTSP1 <F090#1>
[Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on the first axis.
S An abnormal load is detected for the first spindle under speed control.
Secondspindle
abnormal load detected
signal ABTSP2 <F090#2>
[Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on the second axis.
S An abnormal load is detected for the second spindle under speed
control.
The following list summarizes the alarms and signals output by each
function.
Signal output
ABTQSV ABTSP1/
ABTSP2
Alarm
409
754/764
Servo axis
Cs contour control
Spindle positioning axis
Rigid tapping
Spindle axis for speed control
280
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
F0090
Parameter
#2
#1
#0
ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV
(1) Parameter common to servo axes and spindles

1880
Timer for abnormal load detection alarm
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] msec
(If 0 is set, 200 ms is assumed.)
This parameter specifies the interval between the detection of an
abnormal load and the issue of a servo alarm. When the set value is not a
multiple of eight, it is rounded up to the nearest multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, the system assumes 32 ms.
(2) Servo axis parameters
#7
#6
2015
#5
TDOUT
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0

TDOUT Output to the check board for each axis
0 : Output the torque command to the check board.
1 : Output the estimated load torque to the check board.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ABNTDT
2016

ABNTDT Output of the estimated load torque for each axis
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
This parameter must be specified when using the estimated load torque
output function or abnormal load detection alarm function.
2050
Velocity control observer

[Setting value] 3559
When using the velocity loop observer (by setting bit 2 of parameter No.
2003 to 1), set 956 in this parameter.
281
B63003EN1/02
2051
Velocity control observer

[Setting value] 3329
When using the velocity loop observer (by setting bit 2 of parameter No.
2003 to 1), set 510 in this parameter.
2103
Retraction distance upon the detection of an abnormal load

This parameter specifies the amount by which the tool is retracted, by
reversing the motor, if an abnormal load is detected. When the motor is
rotating at low speed, however, the tool may be retracted too far. To
prevent this, the motor is stopped, instead of being reversed, upon the
detection of an abnormal load while the specified feedrate is less than the
value listed in the table below.
When this parameter is set to value A, the detection of an abnormal load
causes the tool to be retracted in the reverse direction by an amount A,
then stop , if the specified feedrate is equal to or greater than the value
listed below, for each detection unit.
Detection unit
Feedrate
1m
0.1m
A / 8 mm/ min
A / 80 mm/ min
When this parameter is set to 0, the motor stops immediately upon the
detection of abnormal load.
2104
Threshold for abnormal load detection alarm

[Unit of data] Torque command unit (Refer to the digital servo operators manual for
details.)
(The maximum motor torque is 7282, regardless of the motor type.)
This parameter specifies the threshold load torque at which an abnormal
load detection alarm is issued.
Monitor the load torque by setting bit 5 of parameter No. 2015 to 1 then,
for this parameter (No. 2104), set a value larger than the maximum
monitored torque. An output of 4.4 V is equivalent to 7282 in the units of
this parameter.
282
B63003EN1/02
(3) Spindle parameters

#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SPLDMT
4015

SPLDMT Spindle load torque monitor function
0 : The spindle load torque monitor function is disabled.
1 : The spindle load torque monitor function is enabled.
4247
Magnetic flux compensation time constant for spindle load torque monitor

[Unit of data] 1 msec
[Standard setting] Depends of the motor model.
This parameter is used to compensate the delay in the generation of
magnetic flux in the spindle motor relative to the specified value. When 0
is set, it is assumed that the generation of magnetic flux is not delayed.
4248
Spindle load torque monitor constant

[Standard setting] Depends of the motor model.
This constant is determined by the maximum output torque and inertia of
the motor. It is used for observer processing.
4249
Observer gain 1 for spindle load torque monitor

[Standard setting] 500
4250
Observer gain 2 for spindle load torque monitor

[Standard setting] 500
4341
Threshold for abnormal load detection alarm

[Unit of data] 0.01 %
This parameter specifies the threshold load torque at which an abnormal
load detection alarm is issued for the spindle. Set a percentage (in units of
0.01 %) for the maximum output torque of the motor. When 0 is set, no
abnormal load detection alarm is issued for the spindle.
283
B63003EN1/02
Number
Number
Alarm and message
(1) Servo axis
Message
409
Servo alarm: Abnormal load

detected on axis n
Description
An abnormal load was detected on a servo

motor, or on a spindle motor during Cs
mode. To release the alarm, use RESET.
(2) Spindle
Message
Description
754
Abnormal load detected on

the first spindle
An abnormal load was detected on the first

spindle motor. To release the alarm, use
RESET.
764
Abnormal load detected on

the second spindle
An abnormal load was detected on the second spindle motor. To release the alarm,
use RESET.
PMC window function
Reading the load torque

data
The load torque data can be read at the PMC using its window function.
(1) Servo axis
[Input data structure]
Top address +0
(Function code)
211
(Completion code)
(Not to be set)
(Data length)
(Not to be set)
(Data number)
0
(Data attribute)
M
(M = 1 to n or 1)
10
(Data area)
(Not to be set)
42
284
(M = 1 to n: Specifies separately
for each axis whether
data for it is to be
read; n is an axis
number.
M = 1: Specifies that data for
all axes are to be
read.
B63003EN1/02
[Completion code]
0: The load torque data was read normally.
4: Incorrect data was specified as a data attribute, that is a value other
than 1 or 1 to n (number of axes) was specified. Alternatively, a
value greater than the number of controllable axes was specified.
[Output data structure]
Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
(Completion code)
?
(Refer to the above description
about the completion code.)
(Data length)
L
(L = 2*n, where n is the number of specified axes)
(Data number)
0
10
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Data at input)
Load torque for the specified
axis (2 bytes)
Description of value
Signed binary format (negative value in twos complement)
Or if there are four controllable axes
10
Load torque for the first axis

(2 bytes)
12
Load torque for the second

axis (2 bytes)
14
Load torque for the third axis

(2 bytes)
16
Load torque for the fourth axis

(2 bytes)
285
B63003EN1/02
(2) Spindle
Top address +0
(Function code)
211
(Completion code)
(Not to be set)
(Data length)
(Not to be set)
(Data number)
1
(Data attribute)
M
(M = 1 to n or 1)
10
(Data area)
(M = 1 to n: Specifies separately
for each axis whether
data for it is to be
read; n is an axis
number.
M = 1: Specifies that data for
all axes are to be
read.
(Not to be set)
42
[Completion code]
0: The load torque data was read normally.
4: Incorrect data was specified as a data attribute, that is a value other
than 1 or 1 to n (number of axes) was specified. Alternatively, a
value greater than controllable axes was specified.
286
B63003EN1/02

Top address + 0
(Function code)
211
(Completion code)
?
(Refer to the above description
about the completion code.)
(Data length)
L
(L = 2*n, where n is the number of specified axes)
(Data number)
1
10
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Data at input)
Load torque for the specified
axis (2 bytes)
Or if there are two controllable axes
10
Load torque for the first axis

(2 bytes)
12
Load torque for the second

axis (2 bytes)
287
B63003EN1/02
2.11
SERVO/SPINDLE
MOTOR SPEED
DETECTION
General
The servo axis and spindle motor speeds are monitored. If the speed of
an axis exceeds a preset maximum (specified by parameter setting), the
corresponding signal is output to a Y address (specified by parameter
setting) of the PMC.
(1) Setting a Y address for signal output
In parameter No. 1891, set a Y byte address to which signals are to be
output.
(2) Setting a maximum speed
Set the maximum speed for each servomotorcontrolled axis in
parameter No. 1890.
Set the maximum speed for the axis controlled by the first serial
spindle motor in S1 of parameter No. 4345.
Set the maximum speed for the axis controlled by the second serial
spindle motor in S2 of parameter No. 4345.
When 0 is specified as the maximum speed for an axis, the speed of
that axis is not monitored.
(3) Signal input
Set the motor speed detection function enable signal MSDFON to 1.
When the power is turned on, the CNC checks the status of this signal.
If the signal is 1, the CNC enables the motor speed detection function.
When MSDFON is 1, and a motor speed exceeds the preset maximum,
the corresponding bit of the set Y address is set to 1.
The following diagram illustrates the signal output timing.
Speed
Command for axis
Max 2msec (servo motor)

Max 10msec (spindle motor)
Actual motor speed

? rpm
(Preset maximum)
Time
Max 16msec
CNC output signal

<Y????#?>
NOTE
The status of each signal is updated every 8 msec.
(Fluctuations in real speed of less than 8 msec duration
cannot be detected.)
288
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Motor speed detection
function enable signal
MSDFON <G016#0>
[Function] Enables the motor speed detection function.
[Operation] When this signal is 1, the motor speed detection function is enabled.
The servo/spindle motor speed detection function allows the CNC to
output a detected result to the Y addresses directly. Normally, only the
PMC can write to the Y addresses. When this function is used, however,
the CNC can also write to the Y addresses. Therefore, care must be taken
not to write to the Y addresses from both the CNC and PMC.
When this signal is 1, the CNC enables this function, assuming that the
PMC ladder does not use the address set in parameter No. 1891 and
address (the setting + 1).
When the signal is 0, the CNC disables this function, assuming that the
PMC ladder is using these Y addresses.
Therefore, to use the servo/spindle motor speed detection function, add
the processing for setting the motor speed detection function enable signal
to 1 to the PMC ladder. When doing so, care must be taken to ensure that
the PMC ladder does not use the address set in parameter No. 1891 and
address (the setting + 1), as the Y address.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after the PMC ladder starts operating, set the
signal to 1.
2 When this signal is set to 0 after the CNC starts, the
servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not
disabled.
Servo motor speed

detection signals DSV1
to DSV8 <Y(n + 0)>
(n is the value set in parameter No. 1891.)

[Function] Report the motor speed status of each of the axes controlled by servo
motors.
[Operation] Each signal is set to 1 when:
The servo motor speed exceeds the maximum speed set in parameter
No. 1890.
Each signal is set to 0 when:
The servo motor speed does not exceed the maximum speed set in
parameter No. 1890.
289
Spindle motor speed

detection signals DSP1,
DSP2, DSP3 <Y(n + 1)#0
to #2>
B63003EN1/02
(n is the value set in parameter No. 1891.)

[Function] Report the motor speed status of each of the axes controlled by spindle
motors.
The spindle motor speed exceeds the maximum speed set in parameter
No. 4345.
The spindle motor speed does not exceed the maximum speed set in
parameter No. 4345.
CAUTION
1 When twopath control is applied, the detection results for
the axes in path 2 are output to the addresses set with
parameter No. 1891 for path 2, in the same way as
described above. Set the parameter for each path so that
the difference between the setting made for path 1 and that
made for path 2 is at least +2. This prevents the outputs
from the paths from overlapping.
2 Some of the servo motor speed detection signals DSV1 to
DSV8 and spindle motor speed detection signals DSP1,
DSP2, and DSP3 may not function depending on the axis
configuration. Even when some signals do not function, the
addresses Y(n + 0) #7 to #0 and Y(n + 1) #1 and #0 must
not be used by the PMC ladder.
3 When this function is used, Y(n + 1) #7 to #3 are reserved.
These bits must not be used by the PMC ladder.
4 A spindle motor may be used for controlling apositioning
axis, or a servo motor may be used for a spindle. This
function performs motorrelated detection.
Example: When Cs contour axis control is performed (the
spindle and Caxis are controlled by the first
serial spindle motor), the fourth axis is used as
the Caxis.
In this case, if the preset maximum speed is
exceeded, the following occurs regardless of
whether spindle control or Caxis control is being
performed:
DSP1 <Y(n + 1) #0, where n = setting in
parameter No. 1891> is turned on.
DSV4 <Y(n + 0) #3, where n = setting in
parameter No. 1891> is not affected.
290
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
G016
Y (n+00
#0
MSDFON
#7
DSV8
#6
DSV7
#5
DSV6
Y (n+1)
#4
DSV5
#3
DSV4
#2
DSV3
#1
DSV2
#0
DSV1
DSP3
DSV2
DSV1
Reserved
Parameter
1890
Servo motor speed for detection
NOTE
[Unit of data] rpm
The servo motor speed of each axis is monitored and a motor speed
detection signal is output indicating whether the speed of each axis
exceeds the value set in this parameter (set in the Y address specified in
parameter No. 1891)
NOTE
No motor speed detection signals are output when the
servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used or
0 is set in this parameter.
1891
Initial value of the Y address where motor speed detection signals are output
NOTE
[Valid data range] 0 to 126, 1000 to 1013, 1020 to 1033
This parameter specifies the Y address where motor speed detection
signals are output.
The spindle motor speeds and servo motor speed of each axis are
monitored and motor speed detection signals are output to the Y address
291
B63003EN1/02
specified in this parameter and (Y address +1) to indicate whether speeds

exceed the values set in the parameters.
WARNING
1 Be sure to specify a Y address that is not used with a PMC
sequence program (ladder).
2 When controlling two path lathe, ensure that the same value
is not set for path 1 and path 2. (Set a separate address
for path 1 and path 2.)
NOTE
No motor speed detection signals are output when the
servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used,
the value 0 or a value beyond the allowable data range is
specified in this parameter, or an input/output address
specified within the allowable data range represents an
address where no I/O device is mounted.
4345
Serial spinsle motor detection speed
[Data type] Word type

[Unit of data] rpm
S1 : for First spindle / S2 : for Second spindle / S3 : for Third spindle
This parameter sets the serial spindle motor speed at which the motor
speed detection signal is output. The speeds of the serial spindle motors
for the first, second, and third spindles are monitored, and the motor speed
detection signal, indicating whether the speed of each spindle exceeds the
value set in this parameter, is output to the Y address specified with
parameter No. 1891.
WARNING
For this parameter, set a motor speed rather than a spindle
speed.
NOTE
The motor speed detection signals are not output when the
servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used, or
0 is set for this parameter.
292
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 Spindle motor speed detection is enabled only for serial
spindles.
2 The relationship between servo motor speed detection
signals DSV1 to DSV8 and the servo motors depends on
the servo axis number (servo connector number) set in
parameter No. 1023.
3 When twopath control is applied, commands can be
switched between the paths by using composite control (T
series) or S command selection.
Even when such command switching is performed, the
relationship between detection signals DSV1 to DSV8,
DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 and the motors remains as is. (The
relationship is determined as described in Note 2 above.)
293
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
MANUAL OPERATION
294
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
3.1
JOG FEED/
INCREMENTAL FEED
General
Jog feed
In the jog mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection signal to 1
on the machine operators panel continuously moves the tool along the
selected axis in the selected direction.
Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. 3 axes can be
selected at a time by parameter JAX (No.1002#0).
Incremental feed
In the incremental feed mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection
signal to 1 on the machine operators panel moves the tool one step
along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance
the tool is moved is the least input increment. Each step can be 10, 100,
or 1000 times the least input increment.
The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter (No.1423)
The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override dial.
With the rapid traverse selection switch the tool can be moved at the rapid
traverse rate regardless of the jog feedrate override signal.
295
3. MANUAL OPERATION
Signal
B63003EN1/02
The following signals determine the way in which jog feed or incremental
feed is executed.
Selection
Jog feed
Mode selection
MD1, MD2, MD4, MJ
Incremental feed
MD1, MD2, MD4, MINC
Selection of the axis to

move
+J1 J1,
+J1,
J1 +J2,
+J2 J2,
J2 +J3,
+J3 J3,
J3 ...
Selection of the direction to move the axis

Selection of the move
amount
MP1, MP2
Selection of feedrate
*JV0 *JV15, RT, ROV1, ROV2
The only difference between jog feed and incremental feed is the method
of selecting the feed distance. In jog feed, the tool continues to be fed
while the following signals selecting the feed axis and direction are 1:
+J1, J1, +J2, J2, +J3, J3, etc. In incremental feed, the tool is fed by
one step.
The distance of the step is selected by the manual handle feed move
distance select signal MP1 an d MP2.
For the signals selecting the mode, see Section 2.6, Mode Selection
Signals. For the manual handle feed selection signals, MP1 and MP2 of
selection of the move amount, see 3.2 Manual handle feed. For rapid
traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2, see Section 7.1.7.1, Feedrate
Override Signals.
Other signals are described below.
Feed Axis and Direction

Selection Signal
+J1 +J8<G100>
J1 J8<G102>
[Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed.
The sign (+ or ) in the signal name indicates the feed direction. The
number following J indicates the number of the control
axis.
+ J 1
1
First axis is fed
Second axis is fed
Third axis is fed
:
8
:
Eighth axis is fed
Feed in positive direction
Feed in negative direction
296
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
[Operation] When the signal is high, the control unit operates as described below.
D
D
When jog feed or incremental feed is allowed, the control unit moves
the specified axis in the specified direction.
In jog feed, the control unit continues to feed the axis while the signal
is 1.
Jog mode
(or Teach in jog mode)
+J1
1st axis move
In incremental feed, the control unit feeds the specified axis by the step
distance which is specified by the manual handle feed move distance
selection signal MP1, MP2. Then the control unit stops it. Even if the
signal is set to 0 while the axis is being fed, the control unit does not
stop feeding it.
To feed the axis again, set the signal to 0, then set it to 1 again.
Incremental feed mode

(TEACH IN HANDLE
mode)
+J1
1st axis move
NOTE
1 If both the positive direction and negative direction signals
of the same axis are simultaneously set to 1, neither the
positive direction nor the negative direction is selected. The
control unit assumes that both these signals are set to 0.
2 If the feed axis and direction selection signals are set to 1
before the jog feed mode or incremental feed mode is
selected, these signals are invalidated. After the jog feed
mode or incremental feed mode is selected, set these signal
to 0, then set them to 1 again.
Jog mode
or incremental feed mode
+J1
1st axis move
+J1 is ineffective during this

period.
Axis is fed again after signals

have turned to 0 once.
3 If the control unit is reset while the feed axis and direction
selection signals are set to 1 or if a feed axis and direction
signal turns to 1 while the control unit is in the reset state,
the signal cannot be validated by releasing the reset state.
After the reset state is released, set these signals to 0,
then set them to 1 again.
297
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Incremental feed mode

(TEACH IN HANDLE mode)
Reset
+J1
1st axis move
+J1 is ineffective during this

period.
Move is stopped by
resetting
Axis is fed again

after signals have
turned to 0 once.
Manual Feedrate
Override Signal
*JV0 *JV15<G011>
[Function] Selects a feedrate in jog feed or incremental feed. These signals are
sixteen binary code signals, which correspond to the override values as
follows:
15
Override value (%) = 0.01%
| 21
Vi |
i+ 0
where
Vi = 0 when the *JVi signal is 1
Vi = 1 when the *JVi signal is 0
The override value is assumed to be zero when all of the signals, (*JV0
to *JV15) are set to 1 or 0. When this occurs, the feed is stopped.
The override value can be specified in the range of 0% to 655.34% in units
of 0.01%. Some examples are listed below.
*JV0 *JV15
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Override value
(%)
0
0.01
0.10
1.00
10.00
100.00
400.00
655.34
0
[Operation] If rapid traverse selection signal RT is 0 during jog feed or incremental

feed, the manual feedrate specified by the parameter (no. 1423) is
overridden by the value specified by the JVi signal.
NOTE
The JVi signals also serve as the override signals during dry
run in automatic operation mode.
298
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Manual rapid traverse

selection signal
RT<G019#7>
[Function] Selects a rapid traverse rate for jog feed or incremental feed.
[Operation] When the signal turns to 1, the control unit operates as described below:
D The control unit executes the jog feed or incremental feed at a rapid
traverse rate. The rapid traverse override is validated.
D When the signal is switched from 1 to 0 or vice versa during jog
feed or incremental feed, the feedrate is decelerated until it reaches
zero, then increased to the specified value. During acceleration and
deceleration, the feed axis and direction selection signal can be kept
1.
Jog feed mode
or incremental feed mode
+J1
RT
1st axis move
Rapid traverse
rate
Feedrate selected by manual

feedrate override signal
WARNING
After the power is turned on, the stroke limit function does
not work until the reference position return is completed.
During this period, the control unit ignores the RT signal, if
it is set to 1, and keeps moving the tool at a feedrate
selected by the manual feedrate override signal. A
parameter RPD (No. 1401#0) can be specified so that the
rapid traverse is validated before the reference position
return is completed.
Signal address
G010
#7
*JV7
#6
*JV6
#5
*JV5
#4
*JV4
#3
*JV3
#2
*JV2
#1
*JV1
#0
*JV0
G011
*JV15
*JV14
*JV13
*JV12
*JV11
*JV10
*JV9
*JV8
G019
RT
G100
+J8
+J7
+J6
+J5
+J4
+J3
+J2
+J1
G102
J8
J7
J6
J5
J4
J3
J2
J1
299
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
JAX
1002
[Data type] Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid
traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RPD
1401
[Data type] Bit

RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from poweron time to the
completion of the reference position return.
0 : Disabled (Jog feed is performed.)
1 : Enabled
#7
#6
#5
1402
#4
JRV
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

JRV Manual continuous feed (jog feed)
0 : Jog feed is performed at feed per minute.
1 : Jog feed is performed at feed per rotation.
NOTE
Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
1423
Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis

(1) In M series, or in T series when JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is
set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog feedrate at feed per minute with
an override of 100%.
[Unit of data]
Increment system
[Valid data range] Millimeter machine
Unit of data
Valid data range
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 32767
(2) When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution)
in T series, specify a jog feedrate (feed per revolution) under an
override of 100%.
[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit of data
0.01 mm/rev
Inch machine
0.001 inch/rev
Rotation axis
0.01 deg/rev
300
Valid data range
0 32767
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
1424
Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
30 240000
30 96000
30 240000
30 100000
30 48000
30 100000
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is
100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
#7
#6
#5
1610
#4
JGLx
#3
#2
#1
#0

JGLx
Acceleration/deceleration in manual continuous feed (jog feed)

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bellshaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied (depending on
which is used in cutting feed).
1624
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or bellshaped

acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.

[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (for exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512 (for linear acceleration/deceleration after interporation)
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration,
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation in jog feed for each axis.
1625
FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 6000
6 15000
IS-C
6 12000
6 4800
6 12000
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in

jog feed for each axis.
301
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
For incremental feeding along an axis under diameter
programming, the tool moves in units of the diameter.
Note
NOTE
1 Time constant and method of automatic acceleration/
deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00
in programmed command.
2 If a manual pulse generator is provided, the manual handle
feed mode is enabled instead of incremental feed mode.
However, using parameter JHD (bit 0 of parameter No.
7100) enables both manual handle and incremental feed in
the manual handle feed mode.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.2
JOG FEED
III.3.3
INCREMENTAL FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.2
JOG FEED
III.3.3
INCREMENTAL FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.3.2
JOG FEED
III.3.3
INCREMENTAL FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.2
JOG FEED
III.3.3
INCREMENTAL FEED
III.3.2
JOG FEED
III.3.3
INCREMENTAL FEED
III.3.2
JOG FEED
III.3.3
INCREMENTAL FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
302
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
3.2
MANUAL HANDLE
FEED
General
In the manual handle feed mode, the tool can be minutely moved by
rotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the tool
is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal.
The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse
generator is rotated by one graduation is equal to the least input increment.
Or the distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is
rotated by one graduation can be magnified by 10 times or by one of the
two magnifications specified by parameters (No. 7113 and 7114).
The handle magnifications can be selected by the manual handle feed
move distance selection signal.
The number of manual pulse generators available depends on the type of
an option used as listed below.
(M series)
Control with one manual handle: Up to one generator
Control with two or three manual handles: Up to three generators
(T series)
Control with one manual handle: Up to one generator
Control with two manual handles: Up to two generators
Twopath control
Which manual pulse generator moves which axis of which path depends
on the setting of manual handle feed axis select signals for each path. For
each path, eight bits are reserved as manual handle feed axis select signals.
Availability of manual
handle feed in Jog mode
Parameter JHD (bit 0 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle
feed in the JOG mode.
When the parameter JHD( bit 0 of No. 7100) is set 1,both manual handle
feed and incremental feed are enabled.
Availability of manual
handle feed in TEACH IN
JOG mode
Parameter THD (bit 1 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle
feed generator in the TEACH IN JOG mode.
A command to the MPG

exceeding rapid traverse
rate
Parameter (No. 7117) specifies as follows:

SET VALUE 0: The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate
and generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are
ignored.(The distance the tool is moved may
not match the graduations on the manual pulse generator.)
Other than 0:
The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate and
generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are not
ignored but accumulated in the CNC.
(No longer rotating the handle does not immediately stop
the tool. The tool is moved by the pulses accumulated in the
CNC before it stops.)
Movement direction of
an axis to the rotation of
MPG
Parameter HNGx (No. 7102#0) switches the direction in which the tool
moves along an axis, corresponding to the direction in which the handle
of the manual pulse generator is rotated.
303
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Manual Handle Feed

Axis Selection Signals
(M series)
HS1A HS1D
<G018#0 #3>
HS2A HS2D
<G018#4 #7>
HS3A HS3D
<G019#0 #3>

[Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B,
C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to three
generators can be used.) (For twopath, these signals are provided for
each manual pulse generator and each path.) The number in the signal
name indicates the number of the manual pulse generator to be
used.
HS 1 A
(T series)
HS1A HS1D
<G018#0 #3>
HS2A HS2D
<G018#4 #7>
(Twopath control)
HS1A#1 HS1D#1
<G018#0 #3>
HS2A#1 HS2D#1
<G018#4 #7>
HS3A#1HA3D#1 (M
series)
<G019#0#3>
HS1A#2 HS1D#2
<G1018#0 #3>
HS2A#2 HS2D#2
<G1018#4 #7>
HS3A#3HS3D#2 (M
series)
<G1019#0#3>
First manual pulse generator
Second manual pulse generator
Third manual pulse generator (M series)
Code signals A, B, C, and D correspond to the feed axes as listed in the

following table:
Manual handle feed axis selection
Feed axis
HSnD
HSnC
HSnB
HSnA
1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
6th axis
7th axis
8th axis
304
No selection (None of axis is fed)
4th axis
5th axis
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
<Twopath control>
Feed axis
HSnD#1 HSnC#1 HSnB#1 HSnA#1

0
1st axis of path 1
2nd axis of path 1
3rd axis of path 1
4th axis of path 1
5th axis of path 1
6th axis of path 1
7th axis of path 1
No selection (no axis is used for path 1)
Feed axis
HSnD#2 HSnC#2 HSnB#2 HSnA#2

0
1st axis of path 2
2nd axis of path 2
3rd axis of path 2
4th axis of path 2
5th axis of path 2
6th axis of path 2
7th axis of path 2
No selection (no axis is used for path 2)
Manual Handle Feed

Amount Selection Signal
MP1, MP2<G019#4, 5>
(Incremental Feed
Signal)
[Function] This signal selects the distance traveled per pulse from the manual pulse
generator during the manual handle feed or manual handle interrupt. It
also selects the distance traveled per incremental feed step.
The table below lists the signaltodistance correspondence.
Travel distance
select signal for
manual handle
feed
MP2
MP1
Distance traveled
Manual handle
feed
Least input
increment
Least input
increment
Least input
increment
Least input
increment
10
m*1
n*1
Manual handle
interrupt
Least command
increment 1
Least command
increment 10
Least command
increment m*1
Least command
increment n*1
Incremental feed
Least input
increment
Least input
increment
Least input
increment
Least input
increment
10
100
1000
*1 Scale factors m and n are specified using parameter Nos. 7113 and
7114.
305
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
WARNING
1 Because the least input increment is used as the units for
manual handle and incremental feed, the same value
represents a different distance depending on whether the
metric or inch input system is used.
2 For an axis under diameter programming, the tool moves by
the diameter value.
NOTE
See Section 3.3, Manual Handle Interrupt for manual
handle interrupts, and Section 3.1, Jog Feed/Incremental
Feed for incremental feed.
Series 20i manual handle

feed
In the Series 20i, up to three (T series) or four (F series) manual handle

pulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle feed axis
select signals are also valid for the Series 20i.
HS3A to HS3D <G019#0 to #3> (T series)
HS4A to HS4D <G020#0 to #3> (F series)
HS 1 A
1
Selects an axis for which feed is controlled

using the first manual pulse generator.

using the second manual pulse generator.

using the third manual pulse generator.

using the fourth manual pulse generator (F
series).
Setting bit 5 of parameter No. 7100 (MPX) enables each manual handle
feed travel distance select signal to be used for an individual manual pulse
generator.
Manual handle feed travel distance select signals
MP21, MP22 <G087#0, #1>
MP31, MP32 <G087#3, #4>
MP41, MP42 <G087#6, #7>
The following table lists the relationships between the manual handle feed
travel distance select signal that is effective for an individual manual pulse
generator and the parameter number for setting a magnification.
Parameter for setting a magnification

Effective manual
handle feed travel
distance select signals
Mn
Nn
State of bit 5 of
parameter
No. 71000 (MPX)
Man al pulse
Manual
p lse generator
MPX=0
First to fourth pulse generators
MP1, MP2
No.7113
No.7114
MPX=1
First pulse generator
MP1, MP2
No.7113
No.7114
Second pulse generator
MP21, MP22
No.7131
No.7132
Third pulse generator
MP31, MP32
No.7133
No.7134
Fourth pulse generator
MP41, MP42
No.7135
No.7136
306
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
The following table lists the relationships between each manual handle
feed travel distance select signal and the travel distance specified by the
signal.
Manual handle feed travel

distance select signal
Travel distance
MP2
MP22
MP32
MP42
MP1
MP21
MP31
MP41
10
10
10
Mn
Mn
Mn
Nn
Nn
Nn
Manual handle feed
Manual handle interrupt
Incremental feed
Signal address
<For 1path control>
G018
#7
HS2D
#6
HS2C
#5
HS2B
#4
HS2A
MP2
MP1
G019
<For 2path control>

G018
#7
#6
#5
HS2D #1 HS2C #1 HS2B
MP2#1
G019
G1018
#1
HS2D #2 HS2C #2 HS2B
G1019
#2
#4
HS2A
#1
MP1#1
HS2A
#2
MP2#2
MP1#2
#5
HS2B
#4
HS2A
MP2
MP1
<Series 20i>
G018
#7
HS2D
#6
HS2C
G019
G020
G087
MP42
MP41
#7
#6
MP32
#3
HS1D
#2
HS1C
#1
HS1B
#0
HS1A
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
#3
HS1D
#1
#2
#1
HS1C #1 HS1B
#1
#0
HS1A
#1
HS3D#1
HS1D
#2
HS3C#1
HS3B#1
HS1C #2 HS1B
#2
HS3A#1
HS1A
#2
HS3D#2
HS3C#2
HS3B#2
HS3A#2
#3
HS1D
#2
HS1C
#1
HS1B
#0
HS1A
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
HS4D
HS4C
HS4B
HS4A
MP22
MP21
#1
THD
#0
JHD
MP31
Parameter
7100
#5
MPX
#4
HPF
#3
#2
[Data type] Bit

JHD Manual handle feed in JOG mode or incremental feed in the manual
handle feed
0: Invalid
1: Valid
307
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode

0: Invalid
1: Valid
HPF
When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued,
0: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The graduations of the
manual pulse generator may not agree with the distance the machine
has traveled.)
1: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are not ignored, but stored in the CNC. (If
the rotation of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the machine
moves by the distance corresponding to the pulses preserved in the
CNC, then stops.)
MPX Specify how to use manual handle feed distance selection signals in
manual handle feed.
0: The signals for the first manual pulse generator (MP1, MP2 (G019#4,
G019#5)) are used as the signals common to the first to the fourth (or
the third for the T series) manual pulse generators.
1: The signals for the individual manual pulse generators are used
independently of those for the other generators.
First manual pulse generator: MP1, MP2 (G019#4, G019#5)
Second manual pulse generator: MP21, MP22 (G087#0, G087#1)
Third manual pulse generator: MP31, MP32 (G087#3, G087#4)
Fourth manual pulse generator: MP41, MP42 (G087#6, G087#7)
NOTE
MPX (bit 5 of parameter No. 7100) is effective to the Series
20i only.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
7102
#1
#0
HNGx

HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator
0: Same in direction
1: Reverse in direction
7110
Number of manual pulse generators used
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, or 3
This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators.
308
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
7113
Manual handle feed magnification m
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] One time
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed
movement selection signal MP2 is on.
7114
Manual handle feed magnification n
[Data type] Word

movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are 1.
7117
Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data] Pulses
If manual handle feed is specified such that the rapid traverse rate will be
exceeded momentarily, those pulses received from the manual pulse
generator that exceed the rapid traverse rate are accumulated rather than
canceled. This parameter sets the maximum number of pulses which can
be accumulated in such a case.
7131
Manual handle feed magnification M2/second manual pulse generator
7132
Manual handle feed magnification N2/second manual pulse generator
7133
Manual handle feed magnification M3/third manual pulse generator
7134
Manual handle feed magnification N3/third manual pulse generator
7135
Manual handle feed magnification M4/fourth manual pulse generator
7136
Manual handle feed magnification N4/fourth manual pulse generator
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1
Specify a manual handle feed magnification.
For Mn, specify a magnification when manual handle feed travel distance
select signal MPn2 is 1. For Nn, specify a magnification when manual
handle feed travel distance select signals MPn1 and MPn2 are both 1.
309
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Parameter Nos. 7131 to 7136 are valid only in the Series
20i.
Warning
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such
as x100 moves the tool too fast or the tool may not stop
immediately after the handle is no longer rotated or the
distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on
the manual pulse generator. The feedrate is clamped at the
rapid traverse rate.
Caution
CAUTION
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations
per second or lower.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.4
MANUAL HANDLE FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.4
MANUAL HANDLE FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.3.4
MANUAL HANDLE FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.4
MANUAL HANDLE FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.4
MANUAL HANDLE FEED
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.4
MANUAL HANDLE FEED
310
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
3.3
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
General
Rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation can

increase the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to the handle
feed. The axis to which the handle interrupt is applied is selected using
the manual handle interrupt axis select signal.
The minimum travel distance per graduation is the least command
increment. The minimum travel distance can be increased by tenfold or
by two scale factors (parameter Nos. 7113 and 7114). Each scale factor
can be selected using the manual handle travel distance select signal
(Section 3.2, Manual Handle Feed).
Signal
Manual Handle Interrupt

Axis Selection Signal
(M series)
HS1IA HS1ID
<G041#0 #3>
HS2IA HS2ID
<G041#4 #7>
HS3IA HS3ID
<G042#0 #3>
(T series)
HS1IA HS1ID
<G041#0 #3>
HS2IA HS2ID
<G041#4 #7>

[Function] These signals select an axis to which the manual handle interrupt is
applied. There are three sets of signals, each corresponding to a manual
pulse generator (up to three). Each set consists of four code signals A, B,
C, and D. (For the T series (twopath control), each manual pulse
generator has one set of signals for each tool post.) The number in each
signal name corresponds to the number (position) of the manual pulse
generator.
(Twopath control)
HS1IA#1 HS1ID#1
<G041#0 #3>
HS2IA#1 HS2ID#1
<G041#4 #7>
HS3IA#1HS3ID #1 (M
series)
<G042#0#3>
HS1IA#2 HS1ID#2
<G1041#0 #3>
HS2IA#2 HS2ID#2
<G1041#4 #7>
HS3IA#2HS3ID #2 (M
series)
<G1042#0#3>
HS 1 IA
1
Selects the axis for which manual pulse generator

No. 1 is used

No. 2 is used

No. 3 is used (M series)
The correspondence between the code signals and the selected feed axis
is similar to the correspondence with the manual handle feed axis select
signals. See Section 3.2, Manual Handle Feed.
311
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02

interrupt

pulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle interrupt
HS3IA to HS3ID <G042#0 to #3> (T series)
HS4IA to HS4ID <G087#4 to #7> (F series)
HS 1 I A
1
Selects an axis for which an interrupt is

caused using the first manual pulse generator.

caused using the second manual pulse generator.

caused using the third manual pulse generator.

caused using the fourth manual pulse generator (F series).
Signal address
<For 1path control >
G041
#7
HS2ID
#6
HS2IC
#5
HS2IB
#4
HS2IA
G042
<For 2path control>

G041
G088
#0
HS1IA
HS3ID
HS3IC
HS3IB
HS3IA
HS3ID
HS3IC
HS3IB
HS3IA
HS2ID #2 HS2IC #2 HS2IB #2 HS2IA #2 HS1ID #2 HS1IC #2 HS1IB #2 HS1IA #2
<Series 20i>
G042
#1
HS1IB
G1042
G041
#2
HS1IC
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
HS2ID #1 HS2IC #1 HS2IB #1 HS2IA #1 HS1ID #1 HS1IC #1 HS1IB #1 HS1IA #1
G042
G1041
#3
HS1ID
#7
HS2ID
#6
HS2IC
#5
HS2IB
HS4ID
HS4IC
HS4IB
312
#4
HS2IA
HS4IA
HS3ID
HS3IC
HS3IB
HS3IA
#3
HS1ID
#2
HS1IC
#1
HS1IB
#0
HS1IA
HS3ID
HS3IC
HS3IB
HS3IA
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
The travel distance by handle interruption is determined
according to the amount by which the manual pulse
generator is turned and the handle feed magnification (x1,
x10, xM, xN).
Since this movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it is
very dangerous to use a large magnification value for
handle interruption.
Note
NOTE
1 No handle interrupt can be used in manual operation mode
(for example, job feed mode, manual handle feed mode
and TEACH IN HANDLE mode).
2 Handle interruption is disabled when the machine is locked
or interlocked.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.4.8
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.6
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.4.7
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.6
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.7
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.5
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
313
3. MANUAL OPERATION
3.4
TOOL AXIS
DIRECTION HANDLE
FEED FUNCTION/
TOOL AXIS
DIRECTION HANDLE
FEED FUNCTION B
B63003EN1/02
The tool axis direction handle feed function allows the tool to be moved
through a specified distance by handle feed in the axis direction of the
tool, tilted by rotating the rotation axes.
Tool axis direction handle feed function B provides two functions: tool
axis direction handle feed and tool axis perpendicular direction handle
feed, which performs handle feed in the direction perpendicular to the tool
axis.
3.4.1
Tool Axis Direction
Handle Feed Function
General
By using the tool axis direction handle feed function, the tool can be
moved in the axis direction of the tool by an amount equal to the manual
pulse generator rotation.
Tool axis direction handle feed is enabled when the following four
conditions are satisfied:
(1) Handle mode is selected.
(2) The tool axis direction handle feed mode signal is 1.
NOTE
When both the tool axis direction handle feed mode signal
and tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode
signal are 1, neither mode is enabled. In this case, normal
handle mode is set.
(3) In parameter No. 7121, the axis number for the first manual pulse
generator is set as the tool axis direction handle feed mode axis.
(4) A manual handle feed axis is selected for the axis set in parameter No.
7121.
Assume that the rotation axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C,
respectively. Assume also that the Zaxis represents the tool axis in the
machine coordinate system. Then, depending on the axis configuration
of the machine, four tool axis directions are available. Specify the desired
type with parameter No. 7120.
314
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
(1) AC axis type
(2) BC axis type
(Tool axis)
(Tool axis)
(3) AB axis (Aaxis master) type (4) AB axis (Baxis master) type
(Tool axis)
(Tool axis)
Output pulse (Hp) distribution by the manual pulse generator to the

Xaxis, Yaxis, and Zaxis for the four types is expressed below.
(1) AC axis type
Xp = Hp
sin (a)
sin (c)
Yp =
*Hp
sin (a)
cos (c)
Zp = Hp
cos (a)
(2) BC axis type
Xp = Hp
sin (b)
Yp = Hp
sin (b)
Zp = Hp
cos (b)
cos (c)
sin (c)
(3) AB axis type (Aaxis master)

Xp = Hp
sin (b)
Yp =
*Hp
cos (b)
sin (a)
Zp = Hp
cos (b)
cos (a)
(4) AB axis type (Baxis master)
Xp = Hp
cos (a)
sin (b)
Yp =
*Hp
sin (a)
Zp = Hp
cos (a)
cos (b)
In the above expressions, a, b, and c represent the positions (angles) of the
Aaxis, Baxis, and Caxis relative to the machine zero point; those
values that are present when tool axis direction handle feed mode is set,
or when a reset occurs, are used. To change the feed direction, reenter tool
axis direction handle feed mode, or press the reset key.
315
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
For tool axis direction handle feed B, the coordinates (angular

displacements) of the rotation axes that determine the direction of the tool
axis can be set. These coordinates are set using bits 3 and 4 (3D1X and
3D2X) of parameter No. 7104, and parameter Nos. 7144 and 7145.
Signal
Tool axis direction

handle feed mode signal
ALNGH <G023#7>
[Function] This signal selects tool axis direction handle feed mode. When the
following conditions are all satisfied, tool axis direction handle feed
mode is set:
1.This signal is 1.
2.The value of the manual handle feed axis selection signal for the first
manual pulse generator matches the value set in parameter No. 7121.
3.Handle mode is set.
NOTE
When both tool axis direction handle feed mode signal
ALNGH and tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed
mode signal RGHTH are set to 1, neither mode is set.
Signal address
G023
#7
ALNGH
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
3D2
#3
3D1
#2
CXC
#1
#0
TLX
Parameter
Settings for tool axis

direction handle feed
7104
[Data type] Bit

TLX When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, this parameter selects the tool axis
direction when the rotation axes for the three basic axes in the basic
coordinate system are positioned to the machine zero point:
0 : Zaxis direction
1 : Xaxis direction
316
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
CXC Tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle
feed is performed with:
0 : 5axis machine.
1 : 4axis machine.
3D1 When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the first rotation
axis are:
0: The machine coordinates when the tool axis direction handle feed
mode or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode is
entered, or upon a reset.
1: The value set in parameter No. 7144.
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the second
rotation axis are:
Axis configuration for

using the tool axis
function
7120
Axis configuration for using the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis
perpendicular direction handle feed function
[Data type] Byte

When using the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function, suppose that the rotation axes for the three
basic axes X, Y, and Z in the basic coordinate system are axes A, B, and C,
respectively. Suppose also that the Zaxis represents the tool axis
direction when the rotation axes are positioned to the machine zero point.
Then, depending on the axis configuration of the machine, all four of the
following types are available. When a 4axis machine is used, and when
the tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function is used,
however, only types (1) and (2) are available.
(1) AC axis type
(2) BC axis type
(3) AB axis (Aaxis master) type
(4) AB axis (Baxis master) type
This parameter selects a type. Values of 1 to 4 are assigned to these types,
in order, from top to bottom. When the Xaxis represents the tool axis
direction, the above types are changed to BA axis type, CA axis type,
BC axis (Baxis master) type, and BC axis (Caxis master) type.
317
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Axis selection in the tool

axis direction handle
feed mode
7121
Axis selection in tool axis direction handle feed mode
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets an axis number for the manual handle feed axis
selection signal for the first manual pulse generator to enable tool axis
direction handle feed mode. When the value set in this parameter matches
the value of the manual handle feed axis selection signal, tool axis
direction handle feed mode is enabled.
Rotation axis for using

the tool axis direction
handle feed function
7144
Coordinates of the first rotation axis for using the tool axis direction
handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function
7145
Coordinates of the second rotation axis for using the tool axis direction
handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function
[Data type] Twoword

When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, and 3D1 and 3D2 (bits 3 and 4 of
parameter No. 7104) are set to 1, parameter Nos. 7144 and 7145 are set
the coordinates (angular displacements) of the first and second rotation
axes, respectively. If CXC (bit 2 of parameter No. 7104) is set to 1,
however, the coordinates of the second rotation axis is assumed to be 0
regardless of the settings of 3D2 and parameter No. 7145.
Alarm and message
No.
5015
Message
A specified rotation axis

does not exits.
Meaning
In tool axis direction handle feed or

tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode, a specified rotation
axis does not exist.
Note
NOTE
1 The basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No.
1022 (plane selection). The rotation axes A, B, and C are
determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name).
2 If one of the two axes specified by a type set depending on
the axis configuration does not exist, alarm P/S 5015 is
issued.
318
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.6
Tool axis direction handle feed /

Tool axis direction handle feed B
3.4.2
Tool Axis
Perpendicular
Direction Handle
Feed Function
General
This function moves the tool by an amount corresponding to the rotation

of the manual pulse generator handle, in the direction specified relative
to the tool axis, tilted due to movement of the rotation axis.
Tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed is enabled when the
following four conditions are satisfied:
(1) Handle mode is selected.
(2) The tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode signal is 1.
NOTE
When both the tool axis direction handle feed mode signal
signal are 1, neither mode is enabled. In this case, normal
handle mode is set.
(3) In parameter Nos. 7141 and 7142, the axis number for the first manual
pulse generator is set as the tool axis perpendicular direction handle
feed mode axis.
(4) A manual handle feed axis is selected for the axis set in parameter Nos.
7141 and 7142.
Assume that the rotation axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C,
respectively. When the direction of the tool axis corresponds to the
direction of the Zaxis in the machine coordinate system, either rotation
axis A or B is used with the tool axis, depending on the machine axis
configuration type. For each type, feed in the Xaxis direction and that
in the Taxis direction are defined as described below. Specify the desired
type with parameter No. 7120.
319
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
(1) AC axis type
(2) BC axis type
(Tool axis)
(Tool axis)
Output pulse (Hp) distribution by the manual pulse generator to the

Xaxis, Yaxis, and Zaxis for the four types is expressed below.
(1) AC axis type (X axis direction)

Xp = Hp
cos (c)
Yp = * Hp
Zp =
sin (c)
(2) AC axis type (Y axis direction)

Xp = * Hp
cos (a)
sin (c)
Yp = Hp
cos (a)
cos (c)
Zp = Hp
sin (a)
(3) BC axis type (X axis direction)

Xp = Hp
Yp = Hp
cos (b)
cos (b)
Zp = * Hp
cos (c)
sin (c)
sin (b)
(4) BC axis type (Y axis direction)

Xp =* Hp
Yp = Hp
Zp =
sin (c)
cos (c)
In the above expressions, a, b, and c represent the positions (angles) of the

Aaxis, Baxis, and Caxis relative to the machine zero point; those
values that are present when tool axis direction handle feed mode is set,
or when a reset occurs, are used. To change the feed direction, reenter tool
axis direction handle feed mode, or press the reset key.
The coordinates (angular displacement) of the rotation axis, required to
determine the direction of the tool axis, can be specified by setting bits
3D1 and 3D2 (bits 3 and 4 of parameter No. 7104) and parameters No.
7144 and 7145.
320
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Tool axis perpendicular
direction
handle feed mode signal
RGHTH <G023#6>
[Function] This signal selects tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode.
When the following conditions are all satisfied, tool axis direction handle
feed mode is set:
1.This signal is 1.
2.The value of the manual handle feed axis selection signal for the first
manual pulse generator matches the value set in parameter Nos. 7141
and 7142.
3.Handle mode is set.
4.The value of the axis configuration type specified in parameter No.
7120 is 1 or 2.
NOTE
When tool axis direction handle feed mode signal ALNGH
signal RGHTH are both set to 1, neither mode is set.
Signal address
#7
#6
RGHTH
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
3D2
#3
3D1
#2
CXC
#1
#0
TLX
G023
Parameter
Settings for tool axis

perpendicular direction
handle feed
7104
[Data type] Bit

TLX When the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function is used, this parameter selects the tool axis
direction when the rotation axes for the three basic axes in the basic
coordinate system are positioned to the machine zero point:
0 : Zaxis direction
1 : Xaxis direction
CXC Tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular direction handle
feed is performed with:
0 : 5axis machine.
1 : 4axis machine.
321
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the first rotation
axis are:
direction handle feed function is used, the coordinates of the second
rotation axis are:
Axis configuration for

using the tool axis
perpendicular direction
handle feed function
7120
Axis configuration for using the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis
perpendicular direction handle feed function
[Data type] Byte

When using the tool axis direction handle feed or tool axis perpendicular
direction handle feed function, suppose that the rotation axes for the three
basic axes X, Y, and Z in the basic coordinate system are axes A, B, and C,
respectively. Suppose also that the Zaxis represents the tool axis
direction when the rotation axes are positioned to the machine zero point.
Then, depending on the axis configuration of the machine, all four of the
following types are available. When a 4axis machine is used, and when
the tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function is used,
however, only types (1) and (2) are available.
(1) AC axis type
(2) BC axis type
(3) AB axis (Aaxis master) type
(4) AB axis (Baxis master) type
This parameter selects a type. Values of 1 to 4 are assigned to these types,
in order, from top to bottom. When the Xaxis represents the tool axis
direction, the above types are changed to BA axis type, CA axis type,
BC axis (Baxis master) type, and BC axis (Caxis master) type.
322
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Axis selection setting in

handle feed mode, in a
direction perpendicular
to the tool axis
7141
Direction of the Xaxis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis
7142
Direction of the Yaxis in handle feed mode, in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis
[Data type] Byte

Specify the status of the axis selection signal of the first manual pulse
generator to enable handle feed mode in a direction perpendicular to the
tool axis. When these parameter settings correspond to the manual handle
feed axis selection signal, handle feed mode in a direction perpendicular
to the tool axis is enabled.
Rotation axis setting for

handle feed function in a
direction perpendicular
to the tool axis
7144
Coordinates of the first rotation axis for handle feed in the tool axis direction or
handle feed in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis
7145
Coordinates of the second rotation axis for handle feed in the tool axis direction or
handle feed in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis
[Data type] Twoword

Specify the coordinates (angular displacement) of the first and second
rotation axes used when bits 3D1 and 3D2 (bits 3 and 4 of parameter No.
7104) are both set to 1 in handle feed mode in the direction of the tool axis,
or in a direction perpendicular to the tool axis. When the CXC bit (bit 2 of
parameter No. 7104) is set to 1, the coordinates of the second rotation axis
are assumed to be 0, irrespective of the values of bit 3D2X or these
parameters.
Alarm and message
No.
5015
Message
A specified rotation axis

does not exits.
323
Meaning
In tool axis direction handle feed or

tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode, a specified rotation
axis does not exist.
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 The basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No.
1022 (plane selection). The rotation axes A, B, and C are
determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name).
2 If one of the two axes specified by a type set depending on
the axis configuration does not exist, alarm P/S 5015 is
issued. In handle feed mode in a direction perpendicular to
the tool axis, either the AC axis type or BC axis type must
be selected as the axis configuration type.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
324
III.3.6
Tool axis direction handle feed /

Tool axis direction handle feed B
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
3.5
MANUAL
LINEAR/CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION
General
In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations
are enabled in addition to the conventional feed operation along a
specified single axis (Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis, and so forth) based on
simultaneous 1axis control:
D
D
Feed along a tilted straight line in the XY plane (M series) or ZX plane

(T series) based on simultaneous 2axis control (linear feed)
Feed along a circle in the XY plane (M series) or ZX plane (T series)
based on simultaneous 2axis control (circular feed)
Workpiece
Tool
<<Linear feed>>
Workpiece
Tool
X
<<Circular feed>>
NOTE
The Xaxis and Yaxis (M series) or Zaxis and Xaxis (T
series) must be the first controlled axis and second
controlled axis, respectively. The following description
applies to the XY plane for the M Series. For the T Series,
read the XY plane as the ZX plane.
Explanations
Line/circle definition
A line or circle definition is not required for axial feed. For linear or
circular feed, however, a line and circle must be defined, using the
interface described later. (For circular feed, for example, the center and
radius of the circle must also be specified.)
Interface area
The R area of the PMCSB/SC is used partly for line and circle
definitions. Set the necessary data in this area, using the PMC or macro
executor. See the following descriptions for what data is to be set at each
address.
325
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Data setting
(a) Input data (PMCSB/SC > CNC)

Lines and circles are defined by setting the data listed below.
Data name
(1)
Number of
bytes
Setting
Linear feed
Circular feed
R960
(Reserve) Do not use.
R961
Linear or circular feed selection

Set value
Description
0
1
2
3
Neither linear nor circular feed is carried out.

Linear feed is carried out.
Clockwise circular feed is carried out. CW
Counterclockwise circular feed is carried
out. CCW
(2)
R962 to R965
Approach direction (Xaxis direction)
Center of the circle (Xo)
(3)
R966 to R969
Approach direction (Yaxis direction)
Center of the circle (Yo)
(4)
R970 to R973
Distance (P) between the origin and a

given line
Radius (R) of the circle
(5)
R974
Direction of cutting (amount of travel

corresponding to the forward rotation
of the guidance handle)
Which is to be machined,
the inside or outside of the
circle?
Set value
(6)
R975
R976 to R978
(7)
R979
3
1
Description
Set value Description
Direction diverted
+90 from the approach direction
Inside
Direction diverted
90 from the approach direction
Outside
Control flags
bit 0 to bit 6
Must be 0.
bit 7
Whether the limit function is enabled

0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Notice of changes in the setting
(b) Output data (CNC > PMCSB/SC)

The data listed below will be output. Do not change this data.
Data name
(8)
Number of
bytes
Description
Linear feed
Circular feed
A distance from the current
position to a given circle is output.
R980 to R983
A distance from the current position

to a given line is output.
R984 to R989
326
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
(1) Setting for linear feed

Let us assume that P is the length of a line segment starting at the origin
and perpendicular to a given line, and is an angle formed by the
perpendicular line and the positive Xaxis. The given line is defined
as:
X@cos + Y@sin = P
NOTE
The origin mentioned above is that of the absolute
coordinate system. X and Y used in this description refer to
coordinates in the absolute coordinate system. These
coordinates represent the center of the tool.
Iy
o
Ix
Specify the following data:
Data
1) R961
: Linear feed
2) R962
: Approach directionIx 230
3) R966 to R 969
4) R970 to R973
: Approach direction Iy 230

: Distance P between the origin and a given line
5) R974
6) R975
: Direction in which the guidance handle moves

: Whether the limit function is enabled
7) R979
: Notice of changes in the setting
327
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
1) Select linear feed. (R961)

Set R961 to 1.
2), 3) Specify the approach direction. (R962 to R969)
Specify the X and Y components (Ix, Iy) of a unit vector (+cos
, +sin ) or (cos , sin ), which is parallel to perpendicular op,
with four bytes, using the values multiplied by 230.
R962 to R965 = Ix 230
R966 to R969 = Iy 230
The tool moves in the direction indicated with this vector, when
the approach handle is rotated in the forward direction.
4) Specify the length (P) of perpendicular op (line segment
beginning at origin o and perpendicular to the given line) with 4
bytes. (R970 to R973)
Length P must satisfy the following equation:
P= + op , where + op for (+cos , +sin) or op for (cos,

sin)
The unit of P is the least input increment. (Example: For ISB
with metric input, the unit of P is 0.001 mm.)
R970 to R973 = P
5) Specify the cutting direction. (R974)
Specify the direction of travel, corresponding to the forward
rotation of the guidance handle, with R974. The meaning of
setting is as follows:
0: Direction diverted +90 from the approach direction
1: Direction diverted 90 from the approach direction
6) Specify whether to enable the limit function. (Bit 7 of R975)

To disable the limit function, reset bit 7 of R975 to 0.
To enable the limit function, set bit 7 of R975 to 1.
When the limit function is enabled, it sets up an area which the
tool is not allowed to enter. The area is delimited with a specified
line. When you attempt to bring the tool into the prohibited area,
using manual handle or jog feed, the tool decelerates and stops.
The prohibited area is set up as shown below, according to the
setting of the approach direction (R962 to R965, R966 to R969).
Prohibited area
Approach direction
Specified line
Approach direction
Prohibited
area
Specified line
328
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
7) Notify of changes in the setting (R979).

Reset R979 to 0.
CAUTION
1 Line and circle definitions (data items 1 to 6) can be set or
changed during manual operation mode (manual handle or
jog feed mode). This data notifies the CNC when the
definitions are changed.
After setting data items 1 to 6, reset R979 (notice of changes
in the setting) to 0. When the R979 value becomes 0, the
CNC assumes that data items 1 to 6 (R961 to R975) are
changed, and reads them, then sets R979 back to 1. Until
R979 becomes 0 again, the CNC continues to carry out
linear or circular feed according to the read data.
2 Do not set R979 (notice of changes in the setting) when any
axis is running.
This is the end of line definition.
8) During linear feed, a distance to a given line is calculated, using
the following equation, and output to R980 to R983 (4 bytes).
The unit of the data is the least input increment.
f(X, Y) = P (Ix X + Iy Y)
where X, Y: Current X and Yaxis positions
(2) Setting for circular feed
Specify the data according to the procedure below.
CW
CCW
(Xo, Yo)
Data
1) R961
: Circular feed and direction of rotation (CW/CCW)
2) R962
: Center of the circle Xo
3) R966 to R 969
: Center of the circle Yo
4) R970 to R973
5) R974
6) R975
: Radius R
: Which is to be machined, inside or outside?
: Whether the limit function is enabled
7) R979
329
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
1) Specify circular feed and the direction of circle rotation. (R961)

Set R961 to 2 or 3.
If R961 is 2, the tool moves along the circle clockwise, when the
guidance handle is rotated in the forward direction. If R961 is 3,
the tool moves along the circle counterclockwise, when the
guidance handle is rotated in the forward direction.
2), 3) Specify the coordinates (Xo, Yo) of the center of the circle. (R962
to R965, R966 to R969)
NOTE
X and Y used in this description refer to coordinates in the
absolute coordinate system.
R962 to R965 = Xo
R966 to R969 = Yo
Each coordinate is four bytes. The unit of the data is the least input
increment.
4) Specify radius R. (R970 to R973)
R970 to R973 = R
The radius R is four bytes. The unit of the data is the least input
increment.
5) Specify which is to be machined, the inside or outside of the
circle. (R974)
Set R974 to 0 or 1.
If R974 is 0, the inside of the circle is machined. If R974 is 1, the
outside of the circle is machined.
When the approach handle is rotated, the tool moves along a
straight line normal to the specified circle. The direction of the
tool movement is determined according to the setting of R974.
When the approach handle is rotated in the forward direction, the
direction of the tool movement (approach direction) is as follows:
When the inside of the circle is to be machined (R974 = 0), the

tool moves from the center of the circle to the circumference.
When the outside of the circle is to be machined (R974 = 1),

the tool moves toward the center of the circle.
6) Specify whether to enable the limit function. (bit 7 of R975)

To disable the limit function, set bit 7 of R975 to 0. To enable the
limit function, set bit 7 of R975 to 1.
When the limit function is enabled, it sets up an area which the
tool is not allowed to enter. The area is either inside or outside of
the specified circle. When you attempt to bring the tool into the
prohibited area, using manual handle or jog feed, the tool
decelerates and stops.
330
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Where (inside or outside of the circle) the prohibited area is set is

determined according to the setting of R974 (which is to be
machined, the inside or outside of the circle). If the inside of the
circle is to be machined, the prohibited area is outside the circle.
If the outside of the circle is to be machined, the prohibited area
is inside the circle.
<Inside to be machined>
<Outside to be machined>
Prohibited area
Approach direction
Prohibited area
Approach
direction

Reset R979 to 0.
This is the end of circle definition.
8) During circular feed, a distance to a given circle is calculated,
using the following equation, and output to R980 to R983 (4
bytes). The unit of the data is the least input increment.
When the inside is to be machined:
f(X, Y) =
R*
(X *
X 0)2 ) (Y * Y0) 2
When the outside is to be machined:

f(X, Y) =
(X *
X 0) 2 ) (Y * Y 0)2 * R
(3) Setting for linear and circular feed

Specify the following data:
Data
1) R961
: 0 (Neither linear nor circular feed is carried out.)
2) R962
: (Need not be specified.)
3) R966 to R 969
4) R970 to R973
5) R974
6) R975

7) R979
1) Linear or circular feed selection

Reset R961 to 0.
If R961 is 0, both the guidance and approach handles become
ineffective. The tool will not move, even if these handles are
rotated.
2) to 6) It is unnecessary to set R962 to R975.
331
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02

Reset R979 to 0.
8) The values of R980 to R983 (distance to a given line or circle) are
output as 0.
Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis
(Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis, ..., or the 8th axis), or can be moved along a
tilted straight line (linear feed) or a circle (circular feed).
(1) Feed along a specified axis (simultaneous 1axis control)
By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved along the desired
axis (such as Xaxis, Yaxis, and Zaxis) on a simultaneous 1axis
control basis. (This mode of feed is the conventional type of manual
handle feed.)
Path of travel using the Yaxis handle
Path of travel using the Xaxis handle
Feed along a specified axis
(2) Linear feed (simultaneous 2axis control)

By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved along the straight
line parallel to a specified straight line on a simultaneous 2axis
control basis. This manual handle is referred to as the guidance handle.
Moreover, by turning another manual handle, the tool can be moved
at right angles to a specified straight line on a simultaneous 2axis
control basis. This manual handle is referred to as the approach
handle. When the guidance handle or approach handle is turned
clockwise or counterclockwise, the tool travels forward or backward
along the respective path.
Tool
Path of travel using

the approach handle
Specified straight line
Path of travel using the

guidance handle
Linear feed
332
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
(3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2axis control)

By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved from the current
position along the concentric circle that has the same center as a
specified circle on a simultaneous 2axis control basis. This manual
handle is referred to as the guidance handle. Moreover, by turning
another manual handle, the tool can be moved along the normal to a
specified circle on a simultaneous 2axis control basis. This manual
handle is referred to as the approach handle. When the guidance
handle or approach handle is turned clockwise or counterclockwise,
the tool travels forward or backward along the respective path.

approach handle
Specified circle

guidance handle
Circular feed
Feedrate for manual

handle feed
The feedrate depends on the speed at which a manual handle is turned.

A distance to be traveled by the tool (along a tangent in the case of linear
or circular feed) when a manual handle is turned by one pulse can be
selected using the manual handle feed travel distance magnification
switch, MP1 or MP2.
Manual handle selection
The Series 16/18M has three (The Series 16/18T has two) manual pulse
generator interfaces to allow up to three (in Tseries two) manual handles
to be connected. The use of the manual handles connected to the
interfaces (whether to use each manual handle as a handle for feed along
an axis, as a guidance handle, or as an approach handle), can be selected
by Manual handle feed axis selection signal in each interface. And by
switching them, one manual handle can be used in plural purposes.
Direction of movement
using manual handles
The user can specify the direction of the tool moved along a straight line
or circle (for example, whether to make a clockwise or counterclockwise
movement along a circle) when the guidance handle or approach handle
is turned clockwise or counterclockwise. For details, refer to the relevant
manual provided by the machine tool builder.
Jog feed (JOG)
In jog feed, the tool can be moved along a specified axis (Xaxis, Yaxis,
Zaxis, ..., or the 8th axis), or can be moved along a tilted straight line
(linear feed) or a circle (circular feed).
(1) Feed along a specified axis (simultaneous 1axis control)
While a feed axis and its direction are specified with the feed axis
direction select switch, the tool moves in the specified axis direction
at the feedrate specified in parameter No. 1423. The feedrate can be
overridden using the manual feedrate override dial.
333
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
(2) Linear feed (simultaneous 2axis control)

By defining a straight line beforehand, the tool can be moved as
follows:
D While a feed axis and its direction are selected using the feed axis
direction select switch, the tool moves along a straight line parallel
to the specified straight line on a simultaneous 2axis control basis.
direction select switch, the tool moves at right angles to the
specified straight line on a simultaneous 2axis control basis.
The feedrate in the tangential direction is specified in parameter No.
1410. The feedrate can be overridden (0.01% 655.34%) using the
manual feedrate override dial. (*JV0 *JV15)
(3) Circular feed (simultaneous 2axis control)
By defining a circle beforehand, the tool can be moved as follows:
g direction select switch (+Jg, * Jg), the tool moves from the
current position along the concentric circle that has the same center
as the specified circle.
g direction select switch (+Jg, * Jg), the tool moves along the
normal to the specified circle.
The feedrate in the tangential direction is specified in parameter No.
1410. The feedrate can be overridden (0.01% 655.34%) using the
manual feedrate override dial. (*JV0 *JV15)
Manual handle feed in

JOG mode
Even in JOG mode, manual handle feed can be enabled using bit 0 (JHD)
of parameter No. 7100. In this case, however, manual handle feed is
enabled only when the tool is not moved along any axis by jog feed.
Basic procedure
(1) Select manual operation mode.

To perform manual handle feed, select manual handle feed mode. To
perform jog feed, select jog feed mode.
(2) Define a line or arc.
See the relevant descriptions in Explanation.
(3) Move the tool by means of manual handle feed or jog feed.
To perform manual handle feed, select the axis along which the tool
will move when the manual handle is turned (singleaxis feed along
the X, Y, or Zaxis, or simultaneous twoaxis feed along a specified
line or arc, involving both the X and Yaxes), using manual handle
feed axis selection signals HSnA, HSsB, HSsC, and HSsD.
Subsequently, turning the manual handle will move the tool along the
selected axis. The feedrate varies with the speed at which the manual
handle is turned.
The amount by which the tool will be moved when the manual handle
is turned through the angle corresponding to one pulse can be specified
using manual handle feed amount selection signals MP1 and MP2.
To perform jog feed, select the feed axis and the direction in which the
tool is to be moved, using the feed axis and direction selection signals
(+J1, J1, +J2, J2, ... +J8, J8). While the feed axis and direction are
specified, the tool is moved along the specified axis, or specified line
or arc, at the parameterset feedrate (jog feedrate).
334
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Manual feedrate override signals (*JV0 to *JV15) can be used to apply

an override (0.01% to 655.34%) to the feedrate.
Limitations
Mirror image
Never use the mirror image function when performing manual operation.
(Perform manual operation when the mirror image switch (MI1 MI3)
is off, and mirror image setting is off.)
Twopath control
Manual linear/circular interpolation can not used with twopath control.
Signal
The following signals determine the way in which jog feed or manual
handle feed is executed.
Selection
Mode selection
Jog feed
Manual handle feed
MD1, MD2, MD4
Selection of the axis to

move
Selection of the direction to move the axis
Selection of the move
amount
Selection of feedrate
MD1, MD2, MD4
+J1,, J1,, +J2,, J2,, +J3,,

J3, ...
+J8, J8, +Jg, Jg, +Ja,
Ja,
Ja, ...
HS1A, HS1B, HS1C,

HS1D, HS2A, HS2B,
HS2C, HS2D, HS3A,
HS3B, HS3C, HS3D
MP1, MP2
*JV0 *JV15
For the signals selecting the mode, see Section 2.6, Mode Selection
Signals. For the manual handle feed selection signals, MP1 and MP2 of
selection of the move amount, see 3.2 Manual handle feed. For manual
feedrate override signals *JV0 *JV15, see Section 3.1, Jog
feed/incremental feed.
Other signals are described below.
335
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02

Selection Signal
+J1 +J8<G100>
J1 J8<G102>
+Jg, Jg, +Ja,
Ja<G086>
[Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed.
The sign (+ or ) in the signal name indicates the feed direction. The
number following J indicates the number of the control
axis.
+ J 1
1
First axis is fed
Second axis is fed
Third axis is fed
8
g
Eighth axis is fed

:Both X and Yaxes (M Series) or Z and
Xaxes (T Series) are fed simultaneously.
(Guidance jog: Linear or circular feed)
:Both X and Yaxes (M Series) or Z and
Xaxes (T Series) are fed simultaneously.
(Approach jog: Feed along a normal)
Feed in positive direction
Feed in negative direction
[Operation] See Section 3.1 for the operation.
336
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Manual Handle Feed

Axis Selection Signals
(M series)
HS1A HS1D
<G018#0 #3>
HS2A HS2D
<G018#4 #7>
HS3A HS3D
<G019#0 #3>

[Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B,
C, and D is provided for each manual pulse generator. (Up to three
generators can be used.) (For twopath, these signals are provided for
each manual pulse generator and each path.) The number in the signal
name indicates the number of the manual pulse generator to be
used.
HS 1 A
(T series)
HS1A HS1D
<G018#0 #3>
HS2A HS2D
<G018#4 #7>
feed
Third manual pulse generator (M series)

pulse generators can be used. So, the following manual handle feed axis
HS3A to HS3D <G019#0 to #3> (T series)
HS4A to HS4D <G020#0 to #3> (F series)
HS 1 A
337

using the first manual pulse generator.

using the second manual pulse generator.

using the third manual pulse generator.

using the fourth manual pulse generator (F
series).
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Code signals A, B, C, and D correspond to the feed axes as listed in the

following table:
Feed axis
HSnD
HSnC
HSnB
HSnA
1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
6th axis
7th axis
8th axis
No selection (None of axis is fed)
4th axis
5th axis
XY simultaneous 2 axes (M serios)

ZX simultaneous 2 axes (T series)
(Guidance handle)
XY simultaneous 2 axes (M series)

ZX simultaneous 2 axes (T series)
(Approach handle)
Signal address
G100
#7
+J8
#6
+J7
#5
+J6
#4
+J5
#3
+J4
#2
+J3
#1
+J2
#0
+J1
G102
J8
J7
J6
J5
J4
J3
J2
J1
Ja
+Ja
Jg
+Jg
#3
HS1D
#2
HS1C
#1
HS1B
#0
HS1A
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
#3
HS1D
#2
HS1C
#1
HS1B
#0
HS1A
G086
<For 1path control>

G018
#7
HS2D
#6
HS2C
#5
HS2B
#4
HS2A
G019
<Series 20i>
G018
#7
HS2D
#6
HS2C
#5
HS2B
#4
HS2A
G019
G20
338
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
HS4D
HS4C
HS4B
HS4A
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
1410
Dry run rate/Jog feedrate (linear feed, circular feed)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Set the dry run with auto operation rate or jog feedrate with linear feed,
circular feed when the manual feedrate is overridden by 100%.
1423
Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis

(1) In M series, or in T series when JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is
set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog feedrate at feed per minute with
an override of 100%.
[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit of data
Valid data range
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 32767
(2) When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution)
in T series, specify a jog feedrate (feed per revolution) under an
override of 100%.
[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit of data
0.01 mm/rev
Inch machine
0.001 inch/rev
Rotation axis
0.01 deg/rev
#7
7100
#6
#5
MPX
Valid data range
#4
#3
0 32767
#2
#1
THD
#0
JHD
[Data type] Bit

JHD Manual handle feed in JOG mode or incremental feed in the manual
handle feed
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
339
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
MPX Specifies how the manual handle feed travel distance select signals are to
be used as follows:
0 : The signals (MP1 and MP2; bits 4 and 5 of G019) for the first manual
pulse generator are used for the first to fourth (F series) or third (T
series) pulse generators in common.
1 : Each manual handle feed travel distance select signal is used for an
individual manual pulse generator.
NOTE
Parameter MPX (bit 5 of No. 7100) is valid only in the Series
20i.
7110
Number of manual pulse generators used
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, or 3
This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators.
7113
Manual handle feed magnification m
[Data type] Word

movement selection signal MP2 is on.
7114
Manual handle feed magnification n
[Data type] Word

movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are 1.
340
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1
For Mn, specify a magnification when manual handle feed travel distance
select signal MPn2 is 1. For Nn, specify a magnification when manual
handle feed travel distance select signals MPn1 and MPn2 are both 1.
NOTE
Parameter Nos. 7131 to 7136 are valid only in the Series
20i.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.7
Manual linear/circular
interpolation
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.6
interpolation
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.6
interpolation
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.6
interpolation
341
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
3.6
MANUAL RIGID
TAPPING (M SERIES)
General
For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode
and move the tapping axis with a manual handle.
Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No.
5203 to 1.
1 Stop the spindle and servo axes, then set MDI mode by pressing the
MDI switch among the mode selection switches.
Basic Procedure
2 Enter and execute the following program:

M29 S1000 ;
G91 G84 Z0 F1000 ;
The program above is required to determine a screw lead and set rigid
tapping mode. In this program, a tapping axis must always be
specified. Specify a value that does not operate the tapping axis.
WARNING
In this MDI programming, never specify commands to
position the tool at a drilling position and at point R.
Otherwise, the tool moves along an axis.
3 When the entered program is executed, rigid tapping mode is set.

4 After rigid mode is set upon completion of MDI program execution,
switch to the handle mode by pressing the handle switch among the
mode selection switches.
CAUTION
At this time, never press the reset key. Otherwise, rigid
mode is canceled.
5 To perform rigid tapping, select a tapping axis with the handle feed
axis select switch, and move the tapping axis with the manual handle.
Cancellation of rigid
mode
To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping.
When the reset key is pressed, rigid mode is canceled, but the canned cycle
is not canceled.
When the rigid mode switch is to be set to off for rigid mode cancellation
(when bit 2 (CRG) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0), the G80 command
ends after the rigid mode switch is set to off.
Spindle rotation
direction
The rotation direction of the spindle is determined by a specified tapping

cycle G code and the setting of bit 1 (HRM) of parameter No. 5203. For
example, when the HRM parameter is set to 0 in G84 mode, the spindle
makes forward rotations as the tapping axis moves in the minus direction.
(When the tapping axis moves in the plus direction, the spindle makes
reverse rotations.)
342
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Arbitrary tapping axis
By setting bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 to 1, an arbitrary tapping

axis can be selected. In this case, specify a G code for plane selection and
tapping axis address when rigid mode is set in MDI mode.
Specification of M29 and

G84 in the same block
In an MDI program for setting rigid mode, G84 can be used as a rigid
tapping G code, or M29 and G84 can be specified in the same block.
Acceleration/
deceleration type
When manual rigid tapping is executed, the acceleration/deceleration

type and acceleration/deceleration time constant specified in the rigid
tapping parameters become valid.
Specification of manual
handle feed faster than
the rapid traverse rate
Set bit 0 (HPF) of parameter No. 7100 to 0 so that when manual handle
feed is specified which is faster than the rapid traverse rate, the handle
pulses beyond the rapid traverse rate are ignored.
Limitations
Check for excessive

error
In manual rigid tapping mode, only excessive error during movement is

checked.
Toolaxis direction
handle feed
Toolaxis direction handle feed cannot be performed.
Extraction override
In manual rigid tapping mode, an extraction override or extraction

acceleration/deceleration time constant cannot be used.
Repetition count
Do not specify K0 or L0 (which sets the repetition count to 0, such that

a G84 block is not executed) in the MDI program. Otherwise, rigid
tapping mode cannot be set.
Positioning to the drilling

position
Positioning to the drilling position must be performed in handle mode, by

selecting the X or Yaxis using the axis selection signal. Do not perform
positioning to the drilling position in MDI or MEM mode because any
such attempt may cause the tapping axis to move.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
5203
#1
HRM
#0
HRG
HRG Rigid tapping by the manual handle is:

0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
HRM When the tapping axis moves in the negative direction during rigid
tapping controlled by the manual handle, the direction in which the
spindle rotates is determined as follows:
0 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal direction. In G74 mode,
the spindle rotates in reverse.
1 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse. In G74 mode, the spindle
rotates in a normal direction.
343
3. MANUAL OPERATION
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.8
MANUAL RIGID TAPPING
OPERATORS MANUAL
(This manual)
9.11
RIGID TAPPING
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.7
MANUAL HANDLE RIGID

TAPPING
344
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
3.7
MANUAL NUMERIC
COMMAND
General
The manual numeric command function allows data programmed

through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is
ready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. The
following eight functions are supported:
(1) Positioning (G00)
(2) Liner interpolation (G01)
(3) Automatic reference position return (G28)
(4) 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30)
(5) M codes (miscellaneous functions)
(6) S codes (spindle functions)
(7) T codes (tool functions) (M series)
(8) B codes (second auxiliary functions)
By setting the following parameters, the commands for axial motion and
the M, S, T, and B functions can be disabled:
(1) Positioning (G00)
(2) Linear interpolation (G01)
Bit 0 (JAXx) of
(3) Automatic reference position return (G28)
parameter No. 7010
(4) 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30)
(5) M codes (miscellaneous functions):
Bit 0 (JMF) of parameter No. 7002
(6) S codes (spindle functions):
Bit 1 (JSF) of parameter No. 7002
(7) T codes (tool functions) (M series):
Bit 2 (JTF) of parameter No. 7002
(8) B codes (second auxiliary functions):
Bit 3 (JBF) of parameter No. 7002
Explanations
Positioning
An amount of travel is given as a numeric value, preceded by an address

such as X, Y, or Z. This is always regarded as being an incremental
command, regardless of whether G90 or G91 is specified.
The tool moves along each axis independently at the rapid traverse rate.
Linear interpolation type positioning (where the tool path is linear) can
also be performed by setting bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401.
Manual rapid traverse selection switch

Off
On
Feedrate
(parameter)
Jog feed rate for each axis

(No. 1423)
Rapid traverse rate for

each axis (No. 1420)
Automatic acceleration/deceleration (parameter)
Exponential acceleration/
deceleration in jog feed for
Linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for

Override
Manual feed override
Rapid traverse override
345
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
When the manual rapid traverse selection signal RT is 0, the
jog feedrate for each axis is clamped such that a
parameterset feedrate determined by bit 1 (LRP) of
parameter No. 1401 as shown below, is not exceeded.
LRP = 0 : Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
(parameter No. 1424)
LRP = 1 : Rapid traverse rate for each axis
Linear interpolation
(G01)
An amount of travel is given as a numeric value, preceded by an address

such as X, Y, or Z. This is always regarded as being an incremental
command, regardless of whether G90 or G91 is specified. Axial
movement is always performed in incremental mode even during scaling
or polar coordinate interpolation. In addition, movement is always
performed in feed per minute mode regardless of the specification of G94
or G95.
Feedrate (parameter)
Dry run feedrate (No. 1410)
Automatic acceleration/deceleration
(parameter)
Exponential acceleration/deceleration
in cutting feed for each axis
(No. 1622)
Override
Manual feed override
NOTE
Since the feedrate is always set to the dry run feedrate,
regardless of the setting of dry run signal DRN, the feedrate
cannot be specified using F. The feedrate is clamped such
that the maximum cutting feedrate, set in parameter No.
1422, is not exceeded.
Automatic reference
position return (G28)
The tool returns directly to the reference position without passing through
any intermediate points, regardless of the specified amount of travel. For
those axes for which no move command is specified, however, a return
operation is not performed.
Rapid traverse rate for each axis

(No. 1420)
(parameter)
Linear acceleration/deceleration in
rapid traverse for each axis
(No. 1620)
Override
346
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference

The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position without
passing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified
amount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2, P3, or P4 in
address P. If address P is omitted, a return to the second reference position
is performed.

(No. 1420)
(parameter)
Linear acceleration/deceleration in
rapid traverse for each axis
(No. 1620)
Override
NOTE
The function for 3rd/4th reference position return is optional.
S When the option is not selected
Return to the 2nd reference position is performed,
regardless of the specification of address P.
S When the option is selected
If none of P2, P3, or P4 is specified in address P, a START
IMPOSSIBLE warning is generated, and the entered data
cannot be processed.
M codes
(miscellaneous
functions)
After address M, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of

digits specified by parameter No. 3030. When M98 or M99 is specified,
it is executed but not output to the PMC.
NOTE
Neither subprogram calls nor custom macro calls can be
performed using M codes.
S codes
(spindle functions)
After address S, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of

digits specified by parameter No. 3031.
NOTE
Subprogram calls cannot be performed using S codes.
T codes (M series)
(tool functions)
After address T, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of

NOTE
Subprogram calls cannot be performed using T codes.
347
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B codes
(second auxiliary
functions)
B63003EN1/02
After address B, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of

NOTE
1 B codes can be named U, V, W, A, or C by setting parameter
No. 3460. If the new name is the same as an axis name
address, B is used. When B is used, and axis name B exists,
B is used as the axis address. In this case, no second
auxiliary function can be specified.
2 Subprogram calls cannot be performed using B codes.

control
S codes cannot be specified in constant surface speed control mode.
M, S, T, and B functions
While automatic operation is halted, manual numeric commands can be

executed. In the following cases, however, a ***F.3145*** warning is
output, and command execution is disabled.
(1) While an M, S, T, or B function is being executed, a manual numeric
command containing an M, S, T, or B function cannot be executed.
(2) While an M, S, T, or B function is being executed, and that function
is specified alone, or a block specifying that function also contains any
other function (such as a move command or dwell function) that has
already been completed, a manual numeric command cannot be
executed.
Jog feed
When a manual numeric command is specified while the tool is being

moved along an axis using the feed axis direction selection signal " Jx,
the axial movement is interrupted, and the manual numeric command is
executed. Therefore, the tool cannot be moved along an axis using the
tool direction selection signal " Jx during the execution of a manual
numeric command.
348
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
7001
#2
JSL
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

JSL Specifies whether to output automatic operation signal STL during
automatic operation based on a manual numeric command.
0 : Not output.
1 : Output.
#7
#6
#5
#4
7002
#3
JBF
#2
JTF
#1
JSF
#0
JMF
[Data type] Bit

JMF Specifies whether to support the M function for the manual numeric
command.
0 : Supported.
1 : Not supported.
JSF Specifies whether to support the S function for the manual numeric
command.
0 : Supported.
1 : Not supported.
JTF Specifies whether to support the T function for the manual numeric
command.
0 : Supported.
1 : Not supported.
JBF Specifies whether to support the B function for the manual numeric
command.
0 : Supported.
1 : Not supported.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
7010
#2
#1
#0
JAXx

JAXx Specifies whether to support axis movement commands for the manual
numeric command.
0 : Supported.
1 : Not supported.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.9
Manual numeric command
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.9
Manual numeric command
349
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
3.8
HANDLE
SYNCHRONOUS
FEED (Series 20i)
General
Generally, tools are fed at a programspecified feedrate or at a feedrate

that matches a dry run feedrate in cutting feed blocks (such as linear
interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 and G03)) during
automatic operation. However, this function enables the tool to be fed in
synchronization with the rotation of a manual handle (manual pulse
generator).
The manual handle feed axis select signals determine what manual handle
the tool is to be synchronized with.
The feedrate for handlesynchronous feed is controlled in such a way that
its tangential component is proportional to the rotation speed of the
manual handle.
The travel distance of the tool per manual handle pulse (tangential
component of the travel distance) is determined by the manual handle feed
travel distance select signal.
How each signal is combined determines which feedrate
(programspecified feedrate (F command), a dry run feedrate, or a
feedrate synchronized with the rotation of the manual handle) is to be used
in a cutting feed block, as listed below. These signals can be switched in
the middle of a block.
Dry run signal

DRN
Handlesynchronous
feed signal HDLF
Programspecified feedrate
Feedrate synchronized with the

rotation of the manual handle
Dry run feedrate
(Do not use)
Cutting feedrate
NOTE
1 The direction of manual handle rotation does not influence
the direction of tool movement. To put another way, rotating
the manual handle backward does not cause the tool to
reverse.
(Handlesynchronous feed ignores the sign of pulses from
the manual pulse generator; the absolute values of pulses
are used.
Therefore, the tool moves along a programmed path
through a distance that matches the number of turns the
manual handle is rotated regardless of the direction of
rotation.)
2 Handlesynchronous feed cannot be used during manual
operation.
Even
during
automatic
operation,
handlesynchronous feed cannot be used in a rapid
traverse block.
350
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Handlesynchronous
feed signal
HDLF
[Function] This signal selects handlesynchronous feed. To put another way, it
<G23#4>
causes the cutting feedrate used during automatic operation to be

synchronized with the rotation of the manual handle (manual pulse
generator).
[Operation] When the signal is 1, the machine tool behaves as follows:

The cutting feedrate used during automatic operation is caused to
synchronize with the rotation of the manual pulse generator; so it will not
be a programspecified feedrate.
D The manual handle feed axis select signal specifies the manual pulse
generator interface to which the target manual pulse generator is
connected.
D The feedrate varies with the rotation speed of the manual pulse
generator. The manual handle feed travel distance select signal
specifies the tools travel distance (tangential component) per pulse
from the manual pulse generator.
Manual handle feed axis

select signals
HS1A to HS1D
<G018#0 to #3>
HS2A to HS2D
<G018#4 to #7>
HS3A to HS3D
<G019#0 to #3>
HS4A to HS4D
<G020#0 to #3>
[Function] Each of these signals selects the interface to which the manual pulse
generator to be used for handlesynchronous feed is connected. The
signal also selects the axis to be fed by the manual pulse generator during
manual handle feed.
One set of these signals correspond to one manual pulse generator. Each
set consists of four signals (A, B, C, and D). A number in each signal
name corresponds to the number of an individual manual pulse generator.
HS n A
351
Third manual pulse generator
Fourth manual pulse generator
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
1 Selecting a feed axis for manual handle feed

The following table lists the relationships of code signals (A, B, C, and
D) with feed axes.
Manual handle feed axis select signal
Feed axis
HSnD
HSnC
HSnB
HSnA
Not selected (no feed axis)
First axis
Second axis
Third axis
Fourth axis
X and Yaxes simultaneously

(guidance handle)
X and Yaxes simultaneously

(approach handle)
NOTE
It is impossible to select the same axis using more than one
pulse generator at a time.
2 Selecting a manual pulse generator to be used for handlesynchronous
feed
Selecting a manual pulse

generator to be used
sed for
handlesynchronous feed
HSnD
HSnC
HSnB
HSnA
Used for handlesynchronous

feed
Not used for handlesynchronous

feed
Not used for handlesynchronous

feed
NOTE
Only one of the four manual pulse generators can be
selected for handlesynchronous feed.
352
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Manual handle feed

travel distance select
signals
MP1, MP2
<G019#4, #5>
MP21, MP22
<G087#0, #1>
MP31, MP32
<G087#3, #4>
MP41, MP42
<G087#6, #7>
[Function] Each of these signals selects the tools travel distance per pulse from a
manual pulse generator for handlesynchronous feed or manual handle
feed. The tool is advanced through the travel distance selected using a
manual handle feed travel distance select signal each time the manual
pulse generator generates one pulse.
Pulse generators are used in two different modes according to the state of
bit 5 of parameter No. 7100 (MPX).
State of bit 5 of
parameter
No. 7100 (MPX)
Man al pulse
Manual
p lse generator
Valid manual handle

travel distance
select signals
Parameter No. for setting a magnification

Mn
Nn
If MPX = 0
MP1, MP2
No.7113
No.7114
If MPX = 1
MP1, MP2
No.7113
No.7114
MP21, MP22
No.7131
No.7132
MP31, MP32
No.7133
No.7134
MP41, MP42
No.7135
No.7136
The following table lists the distance through which the tool travels at one
pulse from a manual pulse generator.
Manual handle feed travel distance

select signal
Travel distance at
MP2
MP22
MP32
MP42
MP1
MP21
MP31
MP41
10
Mn
Nn
353
Tools travel distance per pulse

from a manual pulse generator
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Feed zero signal

FEED 0
<F066#2>
[Function] This signal indicates that the feedrate command (F command) is 0.
[Output condition] Outputting the feed zero signal (FEED0) requires that parameter FC0 (bit
7 of parameter No. 1404) be set to 1. If FC0 = 0, FEED0 is not output (is
kept at 0) no matter whether the following conditions are satisfied.
The feed zero signal is set to 1 under the following conditions:
D The feedrate command (F command) is reset to 0 when the power
switched on or a reset occurs.
D A block containing a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is
executed during automatic operation.
The feed zero signal is reset to 0 under the following conditions:
D A block not containing a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is
executed during automatic operation.
D For the F series, the cutting feedrate (except 0) specified in parameter
No. 1411 is made valid when the power is switched on or a reset
occurs.
D Parameter FC0 (bit 7 of parameter No. 1404) is 0.
[Use] This signal is used when a cutting feedrate is to be determined using a dial
on the operators panel.
CAUTION
On receiving a feed zero signal that is 1, the PMC returns
a dry run signal or handlesynchronous feed signal. Before
these signals become 1, the movement specified in a
cutting feedrate block does not occur.
Signal address
G018
#7
HS2D
#6
HS2C
#5
HS2B
#4
HS2A
MP2
MP1
G019
G020
G023
G046
G087
F066
HDLF
#3
HS1D
#2
HS1C
#1
HS1B
#0
HS1A
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
HS4D
HS4C
HS4B
HS4A
MP22
MP21
DRN
MP42
MP41
MP32
MP31
FEED0
354
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
7100
#5
MPX
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

MPX Specifies how the manual handle feed travel distance select signals are to
be used, as follows:
0 : The signals (MP1 and MP2; bits 4 and 5 of G019) for the first manual
pulse generator are used for the first to fourth (F series) or third (T
series) pulse generators in common.
1 : Each manual handle feed travel distance select signal is used for an
individual manual pulse generator.
7110
Number of manual pulse generators to be used
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, and 3 (T series)
1, 2, 3, and 4 (F series)
Specify the number of manual pulse generators to be used.
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1
355
3. MANUAL OPERATION
B63003EN1/02
The following table lists the relationships between each manual handle
feed travel distance select signal valid for an individual manual pulse
generator and the parameter No. for specifying its magnification.
State of bit 5 of
parameter
No. 7100 (MPX)
Man al pulse
Manual
p lse generator
If MPX = 0
If MPX = 1
Parameter for setting a magnification
Valid manual handle

travel distance
select signals
Mn
Nn
MP1, MP2
No.7113
No.7114
MP1, MP2
No.7113
No.7114
MP21, MP22
No.7131
No.7132
MP31, MP32
No.7133
No.7134
MP41, MP42
No.7135
No.7136
The following table lists the distance through which the tool travels at one
pulse from a manual pulse generator.
Manual handle feed travel distance
select signal
1404
#7
FC0
Travel distance at
MP2
MP22
MP32
MP42
MP1
MP21
MP31
MP41
10
Mn
Nn
#6
#5
#4
#3
Tools travel distance per pulse

from a manual pulse generator
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

FC0 Specifies the behavior of the machine tool when a block (G01, G02, G03,
etc.) containing a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is issued
during automatic operation, as follows:
0 : A P/S alarm (No. 011) is displayed, and the block is not executed.
1 : No alarm is displayed, and the block is executed.
356
B63003EN1/02
REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT
357
B63003EN1/02
4.1
MANUAL
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General
The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No.
1006) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction select signal to
1 in the manual reference position return mode, and is returned to the
reference position.
Manual reference position return is performed by using a grid method.
The reference position is based on an electrical grid, using on onerotation signals received from the position detector.
Automatic setting of
coordinate system
When the option for a workpiece coordinate system is not used, Bit 0 of
parameter 1201 (ZPR) can be set to automatically determine the
coordinate system at manual reference position return. Parameter 1250
can be set to determine the workpiece coordinate system by assigning,
upon the completion of reference position return, the value set in a
parameter to a reference point on the tool holder or the tip position of the
reference tool.
NOTE
Automatic coordinate system setting is not performed if the
option for a workpiece coordinate system is used. In that
case, manual reference position return always establishes
a workpiece coordinate system based on the workpiece
origin offsets, specified with parameters No. 1220 to 1226.
The following signals relate with the manual reference position return:
Manual Reference Position Return
Mode selection
MD1, MD2, MD4
Selection of reference position return
ZRN, MREF
Selection of axis to be moved
+J1 J1,
+J1,
J1 +J2,
+J2 J2,
J2 +J3,
+J3 J3,
J3 ...
Selection of direction to be moved

Selection of speed to be moved
ROV1, ROV2
Deceleration signal for reference

position return
*DEC1, *DEC2, *DEC3, ...
Completion signal for reference

position return
ZP1, ZP2, ZP3, ...
Reference position establishment

signal
358
ZRF1, ZRF2, ZRF3, ...
B63003EN1/02
Basic Procedure for

Manual Reference
Position Return
(1) Select the JOG mode or TEACH IN JOG mode, and set the manual
reference position return selection signal ZRN to 1.
(2) Feed a target axis toward the reference position by making an
appropriate feed axis and direction selection signal (+J1, J1, +J2,
J2,) 1.
(3) While the feed axis and direction selection signal is 1, rapid traverse
takes place along that axis. Although the rapid traverse override
signals (ROV1, ROV2) are valid, the override is generally set to
100%.
(4) When the reference position is approached, a limit switch installed on
the machine is turned on, making the deceleration signal (*DEC1,
*DEC2, *DEC3,) for reference position deceleration 0.
Consequently, the feedrate is decelerated to 0, then the tool is fed at
a constant low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified
by parameter (No. 1425) setting).
(5) When the deceleration signal turns to 1 again after the limit switch
for deceleration is passed, the tool is fed with the feedrate unchanged,
then the tool stops at the first grid point (electric grid point).
(6) Upon confirmation that the current position is in the inposition area,
the reference position return end signal (ZP1, ZP2, ZP3,) and the
reference position establishment signal (ZRF1, ZRF2, ZRF3,) turn
to 1.
Step (2) and subsequent steps are performed independently for each axis.
The number of simultaneously controlled axes is usually one, but it
becomes three by parameter JAX (No. 1002#0).
If the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, J1, +J2, J2,) turns to
0 between step (2) and (5) , the tool is stopped at once, and reference
position return is assumed to be canceled. If the signal turn to 1 again,
operation resumes from step (3) (rapid traverse).
The timing charts for the basic procedures are given below.
JOG or TEACH IN
JOG mode
ZRN
+J1
*DEC1
Grid
................ . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
359
Rapid traverse rate
FL rate
Installation conditions
for deceleration limit
switch
B63003EN1/02
When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual reference

position return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied:
Deceleration limit Deceleration limit

operation position release position Reference position
LDW
LDA
*DEC1
Grid
. . . . . . . .
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate (VR)
Servo position error and

onerotation signal
FL rate (VL)
LDW: Deceleration dog width (mm or inch)

L DW u
V R(
TR
2
) 30 ) T S) ) 4V L
60 1000
TS
VR:
TR:
TS:
VL:
LDA:
Rapid traverse (mm/min or inch/min)

Rapid traverse time constant (ms)
Servo time constant (ms)
FL speed for reference position return (mm/min or inch /min)
Distance between deceleration limit switch released position
and reference position
LDA: Move amount of 1/2 revolution of motor
Since the above conditions do not include the limit switch operation
variations, this point must also be considered at installation.
To perform manual reference position return when the reference position

has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual reference
position return mode, in the reference position return direction at a speed
so that the servo position error exceeds the value set in parameter No.
1836. At this time, the tool must cross the grid line corresponding to a
onerotation signal from the position detector.
The servo position error is calculated from the following formula:
Servo position error amount= F
1000
60
1
G
1
U
F: Feedrate
G: Servo loop gain [s1]
U: Detection unit [mm]
(Example)
When the tool is fed at a feedrate F of 6000 mm/min with a servo loop gain
G of 30 s1 and a detection unit U of 1 mm, the servo position error is
calculated as follows:
Servo position error + 6000
= 3,333
360
1000
60
1
30
1
1
B63003EN1/02
By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrate
F needed to set the servo position error to 128 when the servo loop gain
G is 30 s1 and the detection unit U is 1 mm:
F=
128 60
1000
30
=230 [mm/min]
Therefore, when the servo loop gain is 30 s1, the detection unit is 1 mm,
and parameter No. 1836 is set to 128, the tool must be fed in the reference
position return direction at a speed of at least 230 mm/min before manual
Grid shift
The grid can be shifted by the distance set in parameter 1850, thus shifting
the reference position. The grid shift to be set in the parameter must not
exceed the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821) (grid
interval).
Signal
Manual reference
position return selection
signal (ZRN) <G043#7>
[Function] This signal selects manual reference position return. Manual reference
position return is a kind of jog feed. Therefor, to select manual reference
position return, it is required that the jog mode be selected and that the
manual reference position return selection signal be set to 1.
[Operation] When the manual reference position return selection signal is set to 1,
the control unit becomes as described below.
D If jog feed mode is not selected, the control unit ignores the manual
reference position return selection signal.
D If jog mode is selected, manual reference position return is enabled.
In this case, manual reference position return selection check signal
MREF turns to 1.
NOTE
If the ZRN status changes from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 during
jog feed, the feedrate is decelerated to 0. Then, to make
reference position return or jog feed, turn feed axis and
direction selection signal to 0 then set it to 1.
361
B63003EN1/02
Manual reference
position return selection
check signal MREF
<F004#5>
[Function] This signal reports that manual reference position return has been selected
once.
[Output condition] This signal turns to 1 when:
Manual reference position return has been selected.
The signal turns to 0 when:
The selection of manual reference position return has terminated.

Selection Signal
For details about this signal, see 3.1.2, Feed Axis and Direction
Selection Signal. Here, only notes on use of reference position return are
given.
NOTE
The direction of reference position return is predetermined
for each axis by parameter ZMI (No. 1006#5). If the tool is
fed in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction
in manual reference position return, the deceleration signal
for reference position return turns to 0, and the tool is
returned to the point at which the deceleration signal turns
to 1 again (that is, the point where the deceleration limit
switch would be encountered if the tool were fed in the
predetermined direction). Then reference position return is
performed automatically in the predetermined direction.
JOG mode or TEACH IN

JOG mode
ZRN
J1
*DEC1
Grid
................ . . . . .
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate
Rapid traverse rate
362
Rapid
traverse
rate
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
When reference position return is selected, an axis whose
reference position return end signal is already 1 or an axis
whose reference position return end signal was set 1 upon
completion of reference position return is locked, and
movement along that axis is disabled while the reference
position return selection signal (ZRN) is 1. To perform
movement along such an axis, ZRN must be set 0, and the
feed axis and direction selection signal must be set 0 then
set 1 again.
Reference position
return deceleration
signals *DEC1 to *DEC8
<X009>
[Function] These signals decelerate the feedrate for manual reference position return
so that the reference position is approached at a low feedrate.
The deceleration signals are provided for axes in a onetoone correspondence. A number appended to a deceleration signal represents a controlled axis number.
*DEC 1
1 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the first axis
2 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the second axis
3 : Reference position return deceleration signal for the third axis
:
:
[Operation] For the operation of the control unit in response to the deceleration signal,
see the description of the basic procedure for manual reference position
return.
Reference position
return end signals ZP1 to
ZP8 <F094>
[Function] These signals report that the tool is at the refernce position on a controlled
axis.
These siganls are provided for axes in a onetoone corespondence.
A number appended to a signal represents a controlled axis number.
ZP 1
1 : Reference position return end signal for the first axis
2 : Reference position return end signal for the second axis
3 : Reference position return end signal for the third axis
:
:
363
B63003EN1/02

D Manual reference position returns is completed, and the current
position is in the inposition area.
D Automatic reference position return (G28) is completed, and the
current position is in the inposition area.
D Reference position return check (G27) is completed, and the current
position is in the inposition area.
These signals turn to 0when:
D The tool has moved from the reference position.
D An emergency stop is applied.
D A servo alarm is raised.
Reference position
establishment signal
ZRF1 to ZRF8<F120>
[Function] Notify the system that the reference position has been established.
A reference position establishment signal is provided for each axis. The
number appended to each signal name indicates the number of the
controlled axis.
ZRF 1
1 : 1staxis reference position establishment signal
2 : 2ndaxis reference position establishment signal
3 : 3rdaxis reference position establishment signal
:
:
[Output condition] The signals are set to 1 in the following case:

When the reference position is established after manual reference
position return
When the reference position is established using the absoluteposition
detector at initial poweron
The signals are set to 0 in the following case:
When the reference position is lost
Signal address
X009
#7
*DEC8
#6
*DEC7
#5
*DEC6
#4
*DEC5
#3
*DEC4
#2
*DEC3
#1
*DEC2
#0
*DEC1
#7
ZRN
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G043
#7
#6
#5
MREF
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F094
ZP8
ZP7
ZP6
ZP5
ZP4
ZP3
ZP2
ZP1
F120
ZRF8
ZRF7
ZRF6
ZRF5
ZRF4
ZRF3
ZRF2
ZRF1
F004
364
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1002
#0
JAX
[Data type] Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in JOG feed, manual rapid
traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1005
#0
ZRNx

ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in
automatic operation (MEM, RMT, or MDI) when a return to the reference
position has not been performed since the power was turned on
0 : An alarm is generated. (P/S alarm 224).
1 : An alarm is not generated.
#7
#6
1006
#5
ZMIx
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NOTE
ZMIx The direction of reference position return
0 : Positive direction
1 : Negative direction
#7
#6
#5
1201
#4
#3
#2
ZCL
#1
ZPI
#0
ZPR
[Data type] Bit

automatically
ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0 : The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1 : The local coordinate system is canceled.
365
1240
B63003EN1/02

coordinate system
NOTE
[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg

coordinate system.
1250
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
coordinate system automatically
[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Linear axis
(input in mm)
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis
(input in inches)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
1251
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches
[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Linear axis
(input in inches)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
inches.
366
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201#1 is set
to 1.
#7
#6
LZR
1300
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

LZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from poweron to the
manual reference position return
0 : The stroke limit 1 is checked.
1 : The stroke limit 1 is not checked
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
1401
#2
JZR
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

JZR The manual reference position return at JOG feedrate
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
1425
FL rate of the reference position return for each axis

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
6 15000
6 12000
6 6000
6 4800
6 15000
6 12000
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return
is performed for each axis.
#7
#6
#5
1800
#4
#3
#2
OZR
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state
during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the
conditions listed below:
0 : Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm No.
091.
1 : Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm
occurring.
367
B63003EN1/02
< Conditions >
D
D
D
When there is a remaining distance to travel.

When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindlespeed
function, tool function) is being executed.
When a dwell or cycle such as a canned cycle is being executed.
1821

As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the
reference position return in the grid method.
Size of the reference counter =
grid interval
detection unit
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
NOTE
1836
Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return
in manual reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the
default.)
WARNING
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten
times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to
make the check.
Example:When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit
0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, reference
position return operation is enabled when a servo
error of 100 or more occurs.
368
B63003EN1/02
1850

NOTE
#7
#6
3003
#5
DEC
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC8) for manual reference position
return
0 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0.
1 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
Description
090
REFERENCE RETURN
INCOMPLETE
The reference position return cannot

be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too
close to the reference position or the
speed is too slow. Separate the start
point far enough from the reference
position, or specify a sufficiently fast
speed for reference position return.
Check the program contents.
091
REFERENCE RETURN
INCOMPLETE
Manual reference position return cannot be performed in the feed hold state.
Perform a manual reference position
return in the automatic operation stop
state or reset state.
224
RETURN TO
REFERENCE POINT
Not returned to reference point before

cycle start. (Only when parameter
ZRNx (No. 1005#0).
Do reference position return.
369
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.1
MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.1
MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.3.1
MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.1
MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.1
MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.1
MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
370
B63003EN1/02
4.2
SETTING THE
REFERENCE
POSITION WITHOUT
DOGS
General
This function moves the tool near around the reference position set for
each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference
position in the reference position return mode without the deceleration
signal for reference position return by turning the feed axis and direction
select signal to 1. With this function, the machine reference position can
be set at a given position without installing the limit switch for
deceleration for reference position return.
Also, if the absolute-position detector is provided, the set reference
position is retained after the power is turned off. In this case, when the
power is turned on again, there is no need for setting the reference position
again.
Basic Procedure for Setting

the Reference Position
Without Dogs
(1) Feed the tool, along the axis for which the reference position is to be
set, by manual continuous feed in the reference position return
direction. Stop the tool near the reference position, but do not exceed
the reference position.
(2) Enter manual reference position return mode, then set 1 for the feed
axis direction selection signal (for the positive or negative direction)
for the axis.
(3) The CNC positions the tool to the nearest grid line (based on
onerotation signals from the position detector) in the reference
position return direction specified with bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No.
1006. The point to which the tool is thus positioned becomes the
reference position.
(4) The CNC checks that the tool is positioned to within the inposition
area, then sets the completion signal for reference position return and
the reference position establishment signal to 1.
The timing chart for the basic elements constituting steps (2) to (4) is
shown below.
371
B63003EN1/02
Manual reference
position return
mode
+J1 or J1
Grid
ZP1
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate
The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference
position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual
continuous feed.
direction
Servo position error and

onerotation signal
B
Position
after jog feed
Reference position for reference position return in the negative direction
Reference position for reference position return in the positive direction
A
Grid
A
+ direction
To set the reference position without dogs, when the reference position
has not yet been established, the tool must be fed, in manual continuous
feed mode, in the reference position return direction at such a speed that
the servo position error exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1836. The
tool must cross the grid line corresponding to a onerotation signal from
the position detector.
Section 4.1 explains how to calculate the servo position error.
Grid shift
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the distance set
in parameter No. 1850. The grid shift to be set in the parameter must not
exceed the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821).
Reference position
return
When the feed axis and direction selection signal is set to 1 in manual
reference position return mode after the reference position has been
established, the tool is positioned to the reference position regardless of
the direction specified with the feed axis and direction selection signal.
The completion signal for reference position return is then set to 1.
372
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1002
#1
DLZ
#0
JAX
[Data type] Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed,
manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return
0 : 1 axis
1 : 3 axes
DLZ Function setting the reference position without dog
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
This function can be specified for each axis by DLZx, bit 1
of parameter No. 1005.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1005
#1
DLZx
#0
ZRNx

ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in
automatic operation (MEM, RMT, or MDI) and when a return to the
reference position has not been performed since the power was turned on
0 : An alarm is generated (P/S alarm 224).
1 : An alarm is not generated.
DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
When DLZ of parameter No. 1002#1 is 0, DLZx is enabled.
When DLZ of parameter No. 1002#1 is 1, DLZx is disabled,
and the function for setting the reference position without
dogs is enabled for all axes.
#7
#6
1006
#5
ZMIx
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NOTE

373
B63003EN1/02
ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial
backlash at poweron
#7
#6
#5
#4
1201
#3
#2
ZCL
#1
ZPI
#0
ZPR
[Data type] Bit

automatically
ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0 : The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1 : The local coordinate system is canceled.
1240
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis

in the machine coordinate system
NOTE

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg

coordinate system.
1250
Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic

coordinate system setting is performed

374
B63003EN1/02
[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Linear axis
(input in mm)
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis
(input in inches)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
1251
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting
a coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
Linear axis
(input in inches)
0.001
0.0001
ISC
Unit
inch
0.00001
inches.
NOTE
to 1.
#7
#6
LZR
1300
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

LZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from poweron to the
0: The stroke limit 1 is checked.
1: The stroke limit 1 is not checked
1425

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
375
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
OZR
1800
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state
during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the
conditions listed below:
0: Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm No.
091.
1: Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm
occurring.
< Conditions >
D
D
D
When there is a remaining distance to travel.

When a auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindlespeed
function, tool function, B function) is being executed.
When a dwell or cycle such as a canned cycle is being executed.
1821

As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the
reference position return in the grid method.
Size of the reference counter =
grid interval
detection unit
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
NOTE
1836
Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return
in manual reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the
default.)
376
B63003EN1/02
WARNING
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value ten
times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to
make the check.
Example:When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit
0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, reference
position return operation is enabled when a servo
error of 100 or more occurs.
1850

NOTE
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Note
Description
090
REFERENCE RETURN
INCOMPLETE
The reference position return cannot

be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too
close to the reference position or the
speed is too slow. Separate the start
point far enough from the reference
position, or specify a sufficiently fast
speed for reference position return.
Check the program contents.
091
REFERENCE RETURN
INCOMPLETE
Manual reference position return cannot be performed in the feed hold state.
Perform a manual reference position
return in the automatic operation stop
state or reset state.
224
RETURN TO
REFERENCE POINT
Not returned to reference position before

cycle start. (Only when parameter ZRNx
(No. 1005#0) =0).
Do reference position return.
NOTE
P/S alarm No. 090 is issued when G28 is specified if the
reference position has not yet be established.
377
B63003EN1/02
4.3
REFERENCE
POSITION SHIFT
General
When reference position return is performed using a grid method, the

reference position can be shifted by a parameterset distance without
having to move the deceleration dog.
This function is enabled by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 1002 (SFD) to
1. When distance LSFT, shown below, is set in parameter No. 1850, the
reference position can be shifted.
Distance LDEC, shown below, for the axis along which reference position
return was last made is indicated on the diagnostic screen (No. 0302).
Direction of reference
position return
Deceleration dog
LDEC
LSFT
Reference
position
Grid point
LSFT: Reference position shift amount

LDEC: Distance from the position where the deceleration dog is turned
off to the first grid point (grid point when the shift amount is 0)
How to adjust the

reference position
(1) Set the SFD bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 1002) to 1, and set the reference
position shift amount to 0. Then, perform reference position return.
LDEC
Deceleration dog
Grid point
LSFT
Reference position
Stop position
After the deceleration dog is turned off, the tool stops when the first
grid point is reached. Distance LDEC is indicated on the diagnostic
screen (No. 0302).
(2) Determine the distance LSFT (reference position shift amount) from
the stop position to the reference position, and set it in parameter No.
1850.
This completes the adjustment of the reference position.
378
B63003EN1/02
(3) Perform reference position return again. Then, the tool stops when it
reaches the reference position.

Deceleration dog
LSFT
Grid point
Reference position
(stop position)
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
1002
#3
#2
SFD
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

SFD The function for shifting the reference position is
0 : Not used
1 : Used
1850
Reference position shift for each axis

A reference position shift is set for each axis.
CAUTION
When bit 2 of parameter No. 1002, SFD, is set to 0, this
parameter is used for reference position shift.
NOTE
379
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Diagnostic display
0302
Distance from the position where the deceleration dog

is turned off to the first grid point

[Unit of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output)
Note
NOTE
1 The reference position can be shifted only in the direction
of reference position return.
2 When the SFD bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 1002) is 0, only the
distance from the position where the deceleration dog is
turned off to the first grid point (the grid point after grid shift)
is indicated.
380
B63003EN1/02
4.4
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General
The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the
specified intermediate point, along the specified axis, then sets the
completion signal for reference position return (see Section 4.1) to 1.
The reference position must be set in parameter No. 1240 with the
coordinates specified in the machine coordinate system, before issuing
the G28 command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or reference position at the rapid
traverse rate.
Parameter
#7
#6
1006
#5
ZMIx
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NOTE

backlash at poweron
1240

coordinate system
NOTE

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg

coordinate system.
381
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
405
SERVO ALARM:
(WRONG ZRN)
Description
Position control system fault. Due to

an CNC or servo system fault in the
reference position return, there is the
possibility that reference position return could not be executed correctly.
Try again from the manual reference
position return.
Caution
CAUTION
1 The tool is moved from the intermediate point in a sequence
similar to manual reference position return, if the G28
command is issued in the following cases:
When the reference position has not yet been
established
When the input increment (millimeter/inch) is changed at
a position other than the reference position
In these cases, the tool leaves the intermediate point in the
reference position return direction specified with bit 5 (ZMIx)
of parameter No. 1006. The intermediate point must
therefore be specified at a position from which reference
position return is possible.
2 If the G28 command is issued in the machine lock status,
the completion signal for reference position return is not set
to 1.
3 If millimeter input is selected for an inchsystem machine,
the completion signal for reference position return may be
set to 1, even when the programmed tool position deviates
from the reference position by the least input increment.
This is because the least input increment is smaller than the
least command increment for the machine.
382
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
383
B63003EN1/02
4.5
2ND REFERENCE
POSITION
RETURN/3RD, 4TH
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General
The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position, via the specified intermediate point, along the specified axis.
Then, it sets the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return to 1.
The 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position must be set in parameter No. 1241,
1242, or 1243 with coordinates in the machine coordinate system, before
issuing the G30 command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position at the rapid traverse rate.
Return to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position can be performed only
after the reference position has been established.
Signal
Second reference
position return end
signals ZP21 to ZP 28
<F096>
Third reference position
return end signals ZP31
to ZP38 <F098>
Fourth reference
position return end
signals ZP41 to ZP48
<F100>
[Function] The second, third, and fourth reference position end signals report the tool
is at the second, third, and fourth reference positions on a controlled axis,
respectively. These signals are provided for axes in a oneto one
correspondence. A numeric character appended to the end of a signal
represents a controlled axis number, and a numeric character immediately
following ZP represents a reference position number.
384
B63003EN1/02
ZP 2 1
1 : Return end signal for the first axis
2 : Return end signal for the second axis
3 : Return end signal for the third axis
:
:
2 : Second reference position return

3 : Third reference position return
4 : Fourth reference position return
The second, third, or fourth reference position return (G30) is

completed, and the current position is in the inposition area.
These signals turn to 0 when:
D The tool moved from the reference position.
D An emergency stop is applied.
D A servo alarm is raised.
Signal address
F096
#7
ZP28
#6
ZP27
#5
ZP26
#4
ZP25
#3
ZP24
#2
ZP23
#1
ZP22
#0
ZP21
F098
ZP38
ZP37
ZP36
ZP35
ZP34
ZP33
ZP32
ZP31
F100
ZP48
ZP47
ZP46
ZP45
ZP44
ZP43
ZP42
ZP41
Parameter
1241
Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis

1242
Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis

1243
Coordinate value of the fourth reference position on each axis


[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg

coordinate system.
385
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
046
Caution
Description
ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND
Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded

for 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return command.
Correct program.
CAUTION
1 If the G30 command is issued in machine lock status, the
completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return is not set to 1.
2 If millimeter input is selected for an inchsystem machine,
the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
return may be set to 1, even when the programmed tool
position deviates from the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
by the least input increment. This is because the least input
increment is smaller than the least command increment for
the machine.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6
REFERENCE POSITION
386
B63003EN1/02
4.6
FLOATING
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
General
It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by

commanding the G30.1.
The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a
reference position of some sort of machine operation. It is not always a
fixed position but may vary in some cases. The floating reference position
can be set using the soft keys of MDI and can be memorized even if the
power is turned off.
Generally, the position where the tools can be replace on machining center
or milling machine is a set position on the machinery. The tools cannot
be replaced at any position. Normally the tool change position is at any
of the No. 1 to No. 4 reference position. The tool can be restored to these
positions easily by G28 or G30 command. However, depending on the
machine, the tools can be replaced at any position as long as it does not
contact the workpiece.
In lathes, the tool can generally be changed at any position unless it
touches the workpiece or tailstock.
For machinery such as these, in order to reduce the cycle time, it is
advantageous to replace tools at a position as close as possible to the
workpiece. For this purpose, change position should be changed for each
workpiece and this feature can be easily realized by this function.
Namely, the tool change position which is suitable for workpieces can be
memorized as the floating reference position and it is possible to return
the tool to the tool change position easily by commanding the G30.1.
When the G30.1 is commanded, the axis commanded goes to the specified
intermediate position with rapid traverse at first and then goes to the
floating reference position from the intermediate point with rapid
traverse. The positioning to the intermediate position or to the floating
reference position is performed at rapid traverse for each axis (nonlinear
positioning). The floating reference position return completion signal
turns to 1 after completing the floating reference position return.
387
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Floating reference
position return end
signal FRP1 to FRP8
<F116>
[Function] Notify the system that the tool is at the floating reference position on a
controlled axis.
A floating reference position return end signal is provided for each axis.
The number appended to each signal name indicates the number of the
controlled axis.
FRP 1
1 : Floating reference position return end signal of 1st axis
2 : Floating reference position return end signal of 2nd axis
3 : Floating reference position return end signal of 3rd axis
:
:
[Output condition] The signals are set to 1 in the following case:

When the tool is positioned to within the inposition area after floating
reference position return (G30.1)
These signals are set to 0 when:
The tool is moved from the floating reference position
An emergency stop is applied.
A servo alarm is raised.
Signal address
F116
#7
FRP8
#6
FRP7
#5
FRP6
388
#4
FRP5
#3
FRP4
#2
FRP3
#1
FRP2
#0
FRP1
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
1201
#3
FPC
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

FPC When the floating reference position is specified using soft keys on the
current position display screen
0 : The value of the displayed relative position is not preset. (In other
words, the value does not change.)
1 : The value of the displayed relative position is preset to 0.
1244
Coodinates of the floating reference positon for each axis

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
This parameter specifies the coordinates of the floating reference position

for each axis. The parameter is automatically set when the floating
reference position is specified using soft keys on the current position
display screen.
Reference Item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.6.2
FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1)
III.11.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference

Position
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.6.2
FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1)
III.11.1.7 Setting the Floating Reference

Position
389
B63003EN1/02
4.7
BUTTTYPE
REFERENCE
POSITION SETTING
General
This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a

mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose of
this function is to eliminate the variations in reference position setting that
arise depending on the operator, and to minimize work required to make
fine adjustments after reference position setting.
Select the axis for which the reference position is to be set, then perform
cycle start. Then, the following operations are performed automatically:
1. The torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced to make the butting
feedrate constant, and the tool is butted against the mechanical stopper.
Then, the tool is withdrawn a parameterset distance from the
mechanical stopper.
2. Again, the torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced, and the tool
is butted against the mechanical stopper. Then, the tool is withdrawn
a parameterset distance from the mechanical stopper.
3. The withdrawal point on the axis is set as the reference position.
Basic procedure for

butttype reference
position setting
(1) First, set the parameters required for butttype reference position
setting.
ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter (No. 1006):
Direction of reference
position setting
Parameter No. 7181:
Withdrawal distance
Parameter No. 7182:
Reference position setting
distance
Parameter No. 7183:
Butting feedrate 1
Parameter No. 7184:
Butting feedrate 2
Parameter No. 7185:
Withdrawal feedrate in
reference position setting
Parameter No. 7186:
Torque limit
(2) Select manual reference position return mode.
(3) By using a manual handle feed axis select signal, select the axis on
which the reference position is to be set.
(4) Perform cycle start.
This starts the cycle operation for reference position setting.
(5) During the cycle operation, the automatic operation start signal OP is
1.
390
B63003EN1/02
Cycle operation
When no reference position has been set (APZx, bit 4 of parameter No.
1815, is 0), operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically to
set a reference position.
Mechanical
stopper
Current position
(A)The tool is moved along a specified axis with a limited torque until
it butts against the mechanical stopper.
The tool is moved in the direction specified with ZMIx (bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with parameter No.
7183, at the torque specified with parameter No. 7186 (until the
tool strikes the mechanical stopper).
Mechanical
stopper
The direction, feedrate, and torque

are specified with parameters.
(B)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper, the tool is withdrawn
in the direction opposite to the butting direction, along the axis for
a parameterset distance.
The tool is moved in the direction opposite to that specified with
ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with
parameter No. 7185, for the distance specified with parameter No.
7181.
Mechanical
stopper
The direction, feedrate, distance,

and torque are all specified with parameters.
(C)Operations (D) and (E) are performed from the withdrawal point,
such that the tool is butted against the mechanical stopper at a
constant feedrate in reference position setting.
(D)The tool moves along the specified axis at a specified torque until
it butts against the mechanical stopper.
The tool moves in the direction specified with ZMIx (bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with parameter No.
7184, at the torque specified with parameter No. 7186 (until the
tool strikes the mechanical stopper).
391
B63003EN1/02
Mechanical
stopper
The direction, feedrate, and torque

are all specified with parameters.
(E)After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper end on the axis, the
tool is withdrawn in the direction opposite to the butting direction,
along the axis for a parameterset distance.
The tool is moved in the direction opposite to that specified with
ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with
parameter No. 7185, for the distance specified with parameter No.
7182.
Mechanical
stopper
Reference position
The direction, feedrate, distance,

and torque are all specified with parameters.
For parameter Nos. 7183 and 7184, set the feedrates at which the
tool is moved toward the mechanical stopper with a limited torque,
considering the machine accuracy.
After the tool strikes the mechanical stopper, and the tool is
withdrawn the distance specified with parameter No. 7182, the
withdrawal point is set as the reference position on the specified
axis. Then, the reference position return end signal and reference
position establishment signal are set to 1.
After reference position return has been completed, alarm PS000
is issued. Turn the power off then back on before continuing
operation.
392
B63003EN1/02
After the reference

position is set
When the reference position has already been set (when APZx, bit 4 of
parameter No. 1815, is 1), performing butttype reference position setting
causes the tool to be positioned to the reference position at the rapid
traverse rate without the cycle operation. Upon the completion of
positioning, the reference position return end signal is set to 1.
The timing chart for the cycle operation is shown below.
Manual reference position

return mode
Manual handle feed axis select
signals HS1A to HS1D
Automatic operation start

signal ST
Cycle operation
Automatic operation signal

OP
Reference position return end
signals ZP1 to ZP8
Torque limit
Axis feedrate
100%
N%
100%
Butting direction
Withdrawal
direction
Torque limit reach signals for

butttype reference position setting CLRCH1 to CLRCH8
N%: Torque limit (%) specified with parameter No. 7186 (%)
393
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Torque limit reach

signals for butttype
reference position
setting CLRCH1 to
CLRCH8 <F180>
[Function] These signals are used to post notification of the torque limit having been
reached for each corresponding axis during cycle operation for butttype
reference position setting.
The torque limit is reached for the corresponding axis during cycle
operation for butttype reference position setting.
The torque limit is not reached for the corresponding axis during cycle
operation for butttype reference position setting.
Signal address
#7
F180
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
Parameter
#7
#6
1006
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ZMIx
NOTE
backlash at poweron.
7181
First withdrawal distance in butttype reference position setting

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
394
B63003EN1/02

When the butttype reference position setting function is used, this
parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed
after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopper
to the withdrawal point).
NOTE
Set the same direction as the direction set for ZMIx, bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006. If the opposite direction is set, the
cycle operation will not start.
7182
Second withdrawal distance in butttype reference position setting

[Unit of data]
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
Increment system
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch machine
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
NOTE
Set the same direction as the direction set for ZMIx, bit 5 of
parameter No. 1006. If the opposite direction is set, the
cycle operation will not start.
parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed
after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopper
to the withdrawal point).
7183
First butting feedrate in butttype reference position setting

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Millimeter machine
Inch machine
Unit of data
ISA, ISB
ISC
1 mm/min
3015000
3012000
0.1 inch/min
306000
304800

parameter sets the feedrate first used to hit the stopper on an axis.
7184
Second butting feedrate in butttype reference position setting

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Millimeter machine
Inch machine
395
Unit of data
ISA, ISB
ISC
1 mm/min
3015000
3012000
0.1 inch/min
306000
304800
B63003EN1/02

parameter sets the feedrate used to hit the stopper on an axis for a second
time.
7185
Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations)

in butttype reference position setting)
Valid data range
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Increment system
Millimeter machine
Inch machine
Unit of data
ISA, ISB
ISC
1 mm/min
3015000
3012000
0.1 inch/min
306000
304800

parameter sets the feedrate used for withdrawal along an axis after the
mechanical stopper has been hit.
7186
Torque limit value in butttype reference position setting
[Data type] Byte axes

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets a torque limit value in butttype reference position
setting.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, 100% is assumed.
Alarm and message
Number
000
Message
PLEASE TURN OFF POWER
Contents
A parameter which requires the

power off was input, turn off
power.
Note
NOTE
This function is supported only when an absoluteposition
detector is installed.
396
B63003EN1/02
4.8
LINEAR SCALE WITH
ABSOLUTE
ADDRESSING
REFERENCE MARKS
General
The linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks has reference
marks (onerotation signals) at intervals that change at a constant rate.
By determining the reference mark interval, the corresponding absolute
position can be deduced. The CNC makes a small movement along an
axis to measure the onerotation signal interval, then calculates the
absolute position. The reference position can be established without
performing positioning to the reference position.
8.0
Reference marks
Reference mark 1
Reference mark 2
42.0
8.2
41.8
8.4
41.6
8.6
41.4
50.0
50.2
Fig. 4.8 (a) Sample linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks
Basic procedure for

establishing the
reference position
(1) Select JOG mode, then set manual reference position return selection
signal ZRN to 1.
(2) Set the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, J1, +J2, J2, etc.),
corresponding to the axis for which the reference position is to be
established, to 1, then feed the tool along that axis.
(3) The tool is fed along the selected axis at the reference position return
FL feedrate (parameter No. 1425).
(4) Upon the detection of a reference mark sent from the linear scale, the
tool is stopped briefly, then fed again at the reference position return
FL feedrate.
(5) Step (4) is repeated until three or four reference marks are detected.
Then, the absolute position is calculated and the reference position
established signal (ZRF1, ZRF2, ZRF3, etc.) is set to 1.
If the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, J1, +J2, J2, etc.) is set
to 0 at any point in steps 2 to 5, feed does not stop and establishment of
the reference position is continued.
A time chart for the above basic procedure is shown below.
397
B63003EN1/02
JOG
ZRN
+J1
Reference mark
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL feedrate
FL feedrate
FL feedrate
Fig. 4.8 (b) Time chart for reference position establishment
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
1815
#2
DCLx
#1
OPTx
#0

OPTx As a position detector:
0 : A separate pulse coder is not used.
1 : A separate pulse coder is used.
(To use a linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks, set this bit
to 1.)
DCLx As a separate position detector:
0 : A linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks is not used.
1 : A linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks is used.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1802
#1
DC4
#0
[Data type] Bit

DC4 When establishing the reference position using the linear scale with
absolute addressing reference marks:
0 : Three reference marks are detected to determine the absolute position.
1 : Four reference marks are detected to determine the absolute position.
1821
Reference counter capacity for each axis

[Unit of data] Detection units
Sets the intervals of mark 1 of the linear scale with absolute addressing
reference marks.
398
B63003EN1/02
1882
Intervals of mark 2 of the linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks.

Sets the intervals of mark 2 of the linear scale with absolute addressing
reference marks.
1883
Distance between the reference position and the origin of the linear scale with
absolute addressing reference marks

Sets the distance between the reference position and the origin of the
linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks. The origin of the
scale is that point where marks 1 and 2 coincide.
Usually, the origin is an imaginary point which does not physically exist
(see the figure below).
If the reference position exists in the positive direction as viewed from the
scale origin, specify a positive value for this parameter.
If the reference position exists in the negative direction as viewed from
the scale origin, specify a negative value for this parameter.
Scale origin
Mark 1=Mark 2
Scale end
Reference position
Scale body
Mark 1
Mark 1
Mark 2
8.0
42.0
PRM.1821
PRM.1882
PRM.1883
399
Mark 2
8.2
41.8
B63003EN1/02
[Example parameter setting]

When the following scale is used with an ISB, millimeter machine
Scale origin
Positive
direction
Mark1=Mark2
Mark1
20.000
Mark2
0.020
Negative
direction
Reference position
Mark1
Mark1
19.980
Mark2
9.940
Mark1
10.060
Mark2
9.960
Mark1
10.040
Mark2
9.980
Parameter No. 1821 (mark 1 interval)
= 20000
No. 1882 (mark 2 interval)
= 20020
10.020
20.000mm
5.000
[9960/(2002020000)*20000+5000] = 9965000
Mark1
20.020mm
No. 1883 (reference position) = Position of point A +5.000

=
Distance between A and B

Mark 2 interval Mark 1 interval
9960
2002020000
* Mark 1 interval+5.000
* 20000+5000
= 9965000
9965000(reference position in the negative direction)
[Method of setting parameter No. 1883]

If it is difficult to measure the distance between the scale origin and
reference position (parameter No. 1883), the parameter can be set as
follows:
(1) Set parameter No. 1815 to enable this function.
Set parameters No. 1821 and 1882 appropriately.
Set parameter No. 1240 to 0.
Set parameter No. 1883 to 0.
(2) At an appropriate position, establish the reference position as
described in Basic procedure for establishing the reference position
(as a result, the machine coordinate becomes the distance between the
scale origin and current position).
(3) Position the machine to the reference position, by jog feed or handle
feed.
(4)Convert the current machine coordinate (displayed with No. 301 on the
diagnosis screen) to a value in detection units (by multiplying the
value of No. 301 by CMR), then set the result for parameter No. 1883.
(5) If necessary, set parameter No. 1240.
400
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 In the following cases, the machine moves to the reference position without establishing the
reference position as described above:
S Axial movement is performed in REF mode when the reference position has already been
established.
S Automatic reference position return (G28) is specified when the reference position has
already been established.
2 Axial movement is continued until three or four reference marks are detected. If the
establishment of the reference position is started at a point near the end of the scale, therefore,
axial movement does not stop until overtravel occurs. Start establishing the reference position
at a point sufficiently distant from the end of the scale.
Scale end
Reference marks
Start point (not recommended)
Start point (recommended)
401
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 If automatic reference position return (G28) is specified
when the reference position has not been established, the
reference position is first established as described above,
after which the machine is positioned to the reference
position.
2 A P/S alarm (No. 090) occurs in the following case:
S The actual reference mark interval differs from that
specified with the parameter.
3 This function cannot be used for axes that are subjected to
any of the following functions:
S Simple synchronous control
S Angular axis control
S Straightness deviation compensation
4 This function is invalid if any of the following conditions are
satisfied:
S Either parameter No. 1821 (mark 1 interval) or No. 1882
(mark 2 interval) is set to 0.
S Parameters No. 1821 and No. 1882 are set to the same
value.
S The value of parameter No. 1821 is more than twice as
large as that of parameter No. 1882, or vice versa.
402
B63003EN1/02
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
403
B63003EN1/02
5.1
CYCLE START/
FEED HOLD
General
Start of automatic
operation (cycle start)
When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in which

memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual data
input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the automatic operation start state then
starts operating.
Signal ST, however, is ignored in the following cases:
1. When the mode is other than MEM, RMT, or MDI
2. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
3. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0
4. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1
5. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
6. When MDI RESET key is pressed
7. When the CNC is in the alarm state
8. When the CNC is in the NOT READY state
9. When automatic operation is starting
10.When the program restart signal (SRN) is 1
11.When the CNC is searching for a sequence number.
The CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation in the following
cases during automatic operation:
1. When the feed hold signal (*SP) is set to 0
2. When the mode is changed to manual operation mode (JOG, INC,
HND, REF, TJOG, or THND).
The CNC enters the automatic operation stop state and stops operating in
the following cases during automatic operation:
1. When a single command block is completed during a single block
operation
2. When operation in manual data input (MDI) mode has been completed
3. When an alarm occurs in the CNC
4. When a single command block is completed after the mode is changed
to other automatic operation mode or memory edit (EDIT)
The CNC enters the reset state and stops operating in the following cases
during automatic operation:
The state of the CNC (automatic operation start, feed hold , automatic
operation stop, or reset) is posted to the PMC with status output signals
OP, SPL, and STL. See the table in the Signal section for details.
404
B63003EN1/02
Halt of automatic
operation (feed hold)
When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the
CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time,
cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL is
set to 1. Resetting signal *SP to 1 in itself will not restart automatic
operation. To restart automatic operation, first set signal *SP to 1, then
set signal ST to 1 and then to 0.
ST
ST
*SP
STL
ST
SPL
*SP
This signal is ignored when the

feed hold signal is set to 0.
STL
Fig. 5.1 Time chart for automatic operation
When signal *SP is set to 0 during the execution of a block containing

only the M, S, T, or B function, signal STL is immediately set to 0, signal
SPL is set to 1, and the CNC enters the feed hold state. If the FIN signal
is subsequently sent from the PMC, the CNC executes processing up until
the end of the block that has been halted. Upon the completion of that
block, signal SPL is set to 0 (signal STL remains set to 0) and the CNC
enters the automatic operation stop state.
(a) During threading
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading, the CNC enters the feed
hold state after executing a nonthreading block after the threading
blocks.
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading with the G92 command
(threading cycle), signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation
continues up until the end of the retraction block following threading.
When signal *SP is set to 0 during threading with the G32 (M series:
G33) command, signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation
continues until the end of a nonthreading block following the
threading blocks. (Stopping feeding during threading is dangerous
because the amount of cutting will increase.)
(b) During tapping in a cannec cycle (G84)
When signal *SP is set to 0 during tapping in a canned cycle (G84),
signal SPL is immediately set to 1 but operation continues until the
tool returns to the initial level or R point level after the completion
of tapping.
(c) When a macro instruction is being executed
Operation stops after the currently executing macro instruction has
been completed.
405
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Cycle start signal
ST <G007#2> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Starts automatic operation.
[Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (MEM) mode, DNC
operation mode (RMT) or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters
the cycle start state and starts operation.
MEM, RMT, or MDI mode
Signal ST 1
0
Start
Automatic operation
Feed hold signal

*SP <G008#5> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Halts automatic operation.
[Operation] When signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the CNC enters
the feed hold state and stops operation. Automatic operation cannot be
started when signal *SP is set to 0.
MEM, RMT, or MDI mode
Signal ST 1
0
Signal *SP 1
0
Automatic operation
Ignored
Start
Start
Feed hold
Automatic operation
signal
OP <F000#7>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in
Table 5.1.
Cycle start lamp signal

STL <F000#5> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation start is entered.
Table 5.1.
406
B63003EN1/02
Feed hold lamp signal

SPL <F000#4> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that feed hold state is entered.
Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
Signal name
Status of operation
Cycle start
lamp
STL
Feed hold
lamp
SPL
Automatic
operation
lamp
OP
Cycle start state
Feed hold state
Automatic operation stop

state
Reset state
State of
the operation
Cycle start state

The CNC is executing memory operation or manual data input
operation commands.
@Feed hold state

The CNC is not executing memory operation nor manual data input operation commands while the commands to be executed remain.
@Automatic operation stop state
Memory operation or manual data input operation has been completed
and stopped.
@Reset state
The automatic operation has been forcibly terminated.
NOTE
If the sequence number search is performed through MDI
panel during Memory mode (MEM), the signal OP turns to
1.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
G007
#1
#0
#1
#0
ST
G008
*SP
#7
F000
#2
OP
#6
#5
STL
407
#4
SPL
#3
#2
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Selfdiagnosis
information
During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show no

movement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the CNC may be
performing processing or waiting for the occurrence of an event. The state
of the CNC can be obtained using the CNC selfdiagnosis function
(diagnosis numbers 000 to 015).
Detailed information on the automatic operation stop or feed hold state
can also be displayed (diagnosis numbers 020 to 025).
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
((B63014EN))
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B 63004EN)
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
((B63094EN))
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B 63084EN)
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B 63384EN)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B 63374EN)
408
III.4.1
MEMORY OPERATION
III.4.2
MDI OPERATION
III.4.3
DNC OPERATION
III.7.3
CHECKING BY SELFDIAGNOSTIC SCREEN
III.4.1
MEMORY OPERATION
III.4.2
MDI OPERATION
III.4.9
DNC OPERATION
III.7.3
III.4.1
MEMORY OPERATION
III.4.2
MDI OPERATION
III.4.3
DNC OPERATION
III.7.3
III.4.1
MEMORY OPERATION
III.4.2
MDI OPERATION
III.4.9
DNC OPERATION
III.7.3
III.4.1
MEMORY OPERATION
III.4.2
MDI OPERATION
III.4.3
DNC OPERATION
III.7.3
III.4.1
MEMORY OPERATION
III.4.2
MDI OPERATION
III.4.8
DNC OPERATION
III.7.3
B63003EN1/02
5.2
RESET AND REWIND
General
The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases:
When the CNC is reset, the resetting signal (RST) is output to the PMC.
The resetting signal (RST) is set to 0 when the resetting signal output
time, set with parameter No. 3017, has elapsed after the above conditions
have been released.
RST signal output time = Treset (Reset processing time) + (parameter
setting value)
16 msec.
Reset ON
Reset Processing
RST signal
Treset
(Parameter
setting value)
16 msec
CAUTION
Treset requires at least 16 msec. This time will be longer on
optional configurations.
When the CNC is reset during automatic operation, automatic operation

is stopped and tool movement along the controlled axis is decelerated and
stopped(*1). When the CNC is reset during the execution of the M, S, T,
or B function, signal MF, SF, TF, or BF is set to 0 within 100 ms.
Tool movement along the controlled axis is also decelerated and
stopped(*1) in manual operation (jog feed, manual handle feed,
incremental feed, or etc).
CAUTION
*1 When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0, the tool
is stopped by an emergency stop.
Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is used to select whether the CNC
internal data (such as modal G codes) is cleared or reset when the
CNC is reset. Refer to the Appendix E, Status when turning on
power, when cleared, and when reset in the Operators manual for
the state of the internal data when cleared or reset.
409
B63003EN1/02
The following parameters are also used to select how to handle

processing for CNC data when the CNC is reset.
S
Bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203

Whether programs created in MDI mode are erased or stored
S Bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001
Whether custom macro variables #100 to #149 are cleared or stored
S Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001
Whether custom macro local variables #1 to #33 are cleared or
stored
D Reset & Rewind
When the reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1, reset is performed and
the following rewinding operation is also performed.
1. When the DNC operation mode, and a portable tape reader is
connected as the current input/output device, the tape reader is
rewound.
While the tape reader is being rewound, the rewindinginprogress
signal (RWD) is output. This signal goes 0 when the tape reader has
been rewound.
2. In cases other than case 1, the head of the selected main program is
searched for. Setting RWM, bit 2 of parameter no. 3001, determines
whether the rewindinginprogress signal is output.
When RWM is set to 1:
The rewindinginprogress signal is output. It is set to 1, then set to
0 after about 100 ms. Since searching for the main program in memory
takes little time, when the rewindinginprogress signal (RWD) is set
to 0, the main program has already been searched for.
Signal
External reset signal

ERS<G008#7>

[Function] Reset the CNC.
[Operation] Turning the signal ERS to 1 resets the CNC and enters the reset state.
While the CNC is reset, the resetting signal RST turns to 1.
Reset & rewind signal

RRW<G008#6>

[Function] CNC is reset and a program under an automatic operation is rewound.
[Operation] As described in the item, Reset & Rewind.
410
B63003EN1/02
Resetting signal RST

<F001#1>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being reset. This signal is used for reset
processing on the PMC.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
3. When the reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1
When the resetting signal output time, set with parameter No. 3017, has
elapsed after the above conditions have been released and the CNC is reset
Rewinding signal RWD

<F000#0>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being rewound.
[Output condition] As described in the item, Reset and Rewind.
Signal address
G008
#7
#6
ERS
RRW
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RWD
F000
F001
RST
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3001
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RWM
[Data type] Bit

RWM RWD signal indicating that rewinding is in progress
0 : Output only when the tape reader is being rewound by the reset and
rewind signal RRW
1 : Output when the tape reader is being rewound or a program in
memory is being rewound by the reset and rewind signal RRW
411
B63003EN1/02
3017
Output time of reset signal RST
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 16 ms
To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is
specified in this parameter.
RST signal output time = time required for reset + parameter value
16 ms
3203
#7
MCL
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset
0: Not deleted
1: deleted
#7
3402
#6
CLR
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

CLR Reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal,
and emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
6001
#7
CLV
#6
CCV
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

CCV Custom macros common variables Nos. 100 through 149
0: Cleared to vacant by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
CLV Custom macros local variables Nos. 1 through 33
0: Cleared to vacant by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
412
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
APPENDIX E
STATUS WHEN TURNING

POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
AND WHEN RESET
OPERATORS MANUAL
APPENDIX E
STATUS WHEN TURNING

AND WHEN RESET
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
APPENDIX E
STATUS WHEN TURNING

AND WHEN RESET
OPERATORS MANUAL
APPENDIX E
STATUS WHEN TURNING

AND WHEN RESET
OPERATORS MANUAL
APPENDIX E
STATUS WHEN TURNING

AND WHEN RESET
OPERATORS MANUAL
APPENDIX E
STATUS WHEN TURNING

AND WHEN RESET
413
5.3
B63003EN1/02
Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be

executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine
as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine
actually or viewing the position display change without running the
machine.
TESTING A
PROGRAM
5.3.1
Machine Lock
General
The change of the position display can be monitored without moving the
machine.
When allaxis machine lock signal MLK, or eachaxis machine lock
signals MLK1 to MLK8 are set to 1, output pulses (move commands) to
the servo motors are stopped in manual or automatic operation. The
commands are distributed, however, updating the absolute and relative
coordinates. The operator can therefore check if the commands are
correct by monitoring the position display.
Signal
Allaxis machine lock

signal
MLK <G044#1>
[Function] Places all controlled axes in the machine lock state.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, pulses (move commands) are not output to
the servo motors for all axes in manual or automatic operation.
Eachaxis machine lock

signals
MLK1 to MLK8
<G108>
[Function] Place the corresponding controlled axes in the machine lock state.
These signals are provided for each controlled axis. The signal number
corresponds to the number of the controlled axis.
MLK 1
1. Machine lock for the 1st axis
2. Machine lock for the 2nd axis
3. Machine lock for the 3rd axis
L
[Operation] When these signals are set to 1, pulses (move commands) are not output
to the servo motors for the corresponding axes (1st to 8th) in manual or
automatic operation.
414
B63003EN1/02
Allaxis machine lock

check signal
MMLK <F004#1>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the allaxis machine lock signal.
When allaxis machine lock signal MLK is set to 1
When allaxis machine lock signal MLK is set to 0
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
G044
G108
#1
#0
MLK
MLK8
MLK7
MLK6
F004
MLK5
MLK4
MLK3
MLK2
MMLK
415
MLK1
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T,
and B commands)
Machine lock applies only to move commands along
controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting a
coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B
(2nd auxilialy function) commands are also performed
normally.
2 Reference position return in the machine lock state
(G27, G28, and G30)
When the reference position return command (G28), or 2nd
to 4th reference position return command (G30), is
executed for an axis in the machine lock state, distribution
and position updating are performed. The tool, however, is
not returned to the reference position. The reference
position return completion signals (ZP1 to ZP4) are not
output.
The reference position return check command (G27) is
ignored in the machine lock state.
3 Turning on/off the machine lock signal during
movement along an axis
When the machine lock signal for an axis is set to 1 during
movement along the axis that is not in the machine lock
state, the axis is immediately placed in the machine lock
state and output pulses (move commands) to the servo
motor are stopped. The tool is decelerated and stopped
with the automatic acceleration/deceleration function.
On the other hand, when the machine lock signal for an axis
is set to 0 during distribution of the move command along
the axis in the machine lock state, pulse (move command)
output for the axis is immediately restarted. The tool is
accelerated with the automatic acceleration/deceleration
function.
416
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.5.1
MACHINE LOCK AND

AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
MACHINE LOCK AND

OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.5.1
MACHINE LOCK AND

OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
MACHINE LOCK AND

OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
MACHINE LOCK AND

OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
MACHINE LOCK AND

5.3.2
Dry Run
General
Dry run is valid only for automatic operation.

The tool is moved at a constant feedrate(*1) regardless of the feedrate
specified in the program. This function is used, for example, to check the
movement of the tool without a workpiece.
CAUTION
This feedrate depends on the specified parameters, the
manual rapid traverse switching signal (RT), manual
feedrate override signals (*JV0 to *JV15), and whether the
command block specifies rapid traverse or cutting feed, as
listed in the table below.
Manual rapid
traverse
switching
signal (RT)
Program command
Rapid traverse
Feed
Rapid traverse rate
Dry run feedrate
JVmax *2
Dry run speed JV,or rapid

traverse rate *1
Dry run feedrate JV *2
Max. cutting feedrate Setting by parameter No.1422

Rapid traverse rate Setting by parameter No.1420
Dry run feedrate Setting by parameter No.1410
JV Manual feedrate override
JVmax Maximum value of manual feedrate override
*1:Dry run feedrate JV when parameter RDR (bit 6 of No. 1401) is 1.
Rapid traverse rate when parameter RDR is 0.
*2 Clamped by max. cutting feedrate.
417
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Dry run signal

DRN <G046#7>
[Function] Enables dry run.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the tool is moved at the feedrate specified for
dry run.
When this signal is set to 0, the tool is moved normally.
CAUTION
When the dry run signal is changed from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0
during the movement of the tool, the feedrate of the tool is
first decelerated to 0 before being accelerated to the
specified feedrate.
Dry run check signal

MDRN <F002#7>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the dry run signal.
When dry run signal DRN is set to 1
When dry run signal DRN is set to 0
Signal address
#7
G046
DRN
F002
MDRN
#6
#5
418
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
RDR
1401
#5
TDR
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84; rigid
tapping)
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
1410
Dry run rate
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Set the dry run rate when the manual feedrate is overridden by 100%.
1420

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
30 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
30 96000
6 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
30 240000
30 100000
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for
each axis.
1422
Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate.
A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that it

does not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter.
419
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No. 1430 instead.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.5.4
Dry run
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.4
Dry run
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.5.4
Dry run
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.4
Dry run
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.4
Dry run
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.4
Dry run
5.3.3
Single Block
General
Single block operation is valid only for automatic operation.

When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 1 during automatic operation,
the CNC enters the automatic operation stop state after executing the
current block. In subsequent automatic operation, the CNC enters the
automatic operation stop state after executing each block in the program.
When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 0, normal automatic
operation is restored.
Single block operation during the execution of custom macro statements
depends on the setting of bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000, as follows:
SBM = 0: Operation does not stop in the custom macro statements but
stops once the next NC command has been executed.
SBM = 1: Operation stops after each block in the custom macro
statements.
When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state during single block
operation, the mode can be changed to manual data input (MDI), manual
handle feed (HND), incremental feed (INC), or jog feed (JOG), by using
the mode select signals (MD1, MD2, and MD4).
420
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Single block signal

SBK <G046#1>
[Function] Enables single block operation.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, single block operation is performed. When
this signal is set to 0, normal operation is performed.
Single block check signal

MSBK <F004#3>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the single block signal.
When single block signal SBK is set to 1
When single block signal SBK is set to 0
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
G046
#1
#0
SBK
F004
MSBK
Parameter
#7
#6
6000
#5
SBM
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

SBM Custom macro statement
0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
NOTE
SBM is valid when NOP (bit 0 of parameter No. 3404) is set
to 0.
421
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 Operation in thread cutting
When the SBK signal turns to 1 during thread cutting,
operation stops after execution of the first non-thread
cutting block after the thread cutting command.
2 Operation in canned cycle
When the SBK signal turns to 1 during canned cycle
operation, the operation stops at each positioning,
approach, drilling and retreat instead of the end of the block.
The SPL signal turns to 1 while the STL signal turns to 0,
showing that the end of the block has not been reached.
When the execution of one block is completed, the STL and
SPL signals turn to 0 and the operation is stopped.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.5.5
Single block
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.5
Single block
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.5.5
Single block
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.5
Single block
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.5
Single block
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.5
Single block
422
B63003EN1/02
5.4
MANUAL ABSOLUTE
ON/OFF
General
This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manual
operation (such as jog feed and manual handle feed) is counted for
calculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. A
check signal is also output to indicate whether the manual absolute
function in the CNC is turned on or off.
When manual absolute

turns on (manual
absolute signal *ABSM
=0)
When manual operation interrupts during automatic operation:

i) At the end of the block where manual operation interrupts, the tool
position moves in parallel by the manual move amount, regardless of
the absolute or incremental command.
ii) In subsequent blocks, the parallel-moved tool position remains
unchanged until an absolute command block appears. Therefore, if all
blocks are programmed by incremental commands, the tool keeps the
parallel-moved position until machining ends.
In case of incremental commands
Manual
intervention
Programmed tool path
End
point
The tool returns to the programmed

tool path when an absolute command
block is encountered.
Fig. 5.4 (a) Manual absolute ON
CAUTION
If the machining end position has shifted by the manual
move amount because all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands only, the present position is
displayed shifted by the manual move amount.
423
When manual absolute

turns off (manual
absolute signal
*ABSM=1)
B63003EN1/02
The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on the
workpiece coordinate system. The present position display on the CRT
includes the manual move amount. The display is reset to the initial value
(before manual operation) when the control is reset, or when operation in
the automatic operation mode MEM, RMT, or MDI is started after the
manual operation.
During automatic operation, if manual intervention of a block interrupts,
the tool position moves in parallel by the manual move amount,
regardless of the absolute or incremental command at the end point of that
block, as well as at the end point of subsequent blocks.
Actual tool path

(The tool moves along this path, regardless of
absolute command or incremental command)
Manual intervention
The actual end point

always moves in parallel
End
point
Fig. 5.4 (b) Manual absolute OFF
The present position display at the finish of the operation shows an end
point value on the program as if manual intervention had not been
executed. However, the tool position moves in parallel.
Signal
Manual absolute signal

*ABSM <G006#2>
[Function] Turns the manual absolute function on or off.
Turns off the manual absolute function.
When this signal is set to 0, the control unit operates as follows:
Turns on the manual absolute function.
424
B63003EN1/02
Manual absolute check

signal
MABSM
<F004#2>
[Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the manual absolute signal.

When the manual absolute signal *ABSM is set to 0
When manual absolute signal *ABSM is set to 1
Signal address
#7
Reference item
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
G006
*ABSM
F004
MABSM
#0
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.3.5
Manual absolute ON/OFF
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.5
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.3.5
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.5
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.5
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.3.5
425
B63003EN1/02
5.5
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP/ADDITION OF
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP
General
When a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified at

the head of a block, and optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are
set to 1 during automatic operation, the information contained in the block
for which /n, corresponding to signal BDTn, is specified is ignored (from
/n to the end of the block).
(Example)
/2 N123 X100. Y200. ;
Input signal
Code specified at the head of a block
BDT1
/ or /1 (Note 1)
BDT2
/2
BDT3
/3
BDT4
/4
BDT5
/5
BDT6
/6
BDT7
/7
BDT8
/8
BDT9
/9
NOTE
1 Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more
optional block skip switches are used in one block, number
1 for /1 cannot be omitted.
(Example)
//3 N123 X100. Y200. ; Invalid
/1 /3 N123 X100. Y200. ; Valid
The following figures show the relationship between the timing, when
optional block skip signals (BDT1 to BDT9) are set to 1, and the ignored
information:
1. When BDTn is set to 1 before the CNC starts reading a block
containing /n, the block is ignored.
BDTn 1
0
Reading by CNC
....
426
...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234

Ignored
B63003EN1/02
2. When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing

/n, the block is not ignored.
BDTn 1
0
Reading by CNC
...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....

Not ignored
3. When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC is reading

a block containing /n, the block is ignored.
BDTn 1
0
Reading by CNC
...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 ....

Ignored
4. When two or more optional block skip switches are specified in a block
and BDTn, corresponding to one of them, is set to 1, the block is
ignored.
BDT3 1
0
Reading by CNC
....
...;/1 /3 /5 N123 X100. Y200. ; N234

Ignored
Signal
Optional block skip

signals
BDT1 <G044#0>
BDT2 to BDT9 <G045>
[Function] Select whether a block containing /n is to be executed or ignored.
[Operation] During automatic operation, a block containing /n in the program is
ignored when the corresponding optional block skip signal is set to 1. It
is executed normally when the signal is set to 0.
427
B63003EN1/02
Optional block skip

check signals
MBDT1 <F004#0>
MBDT2 to MBDT9
<F005>
[Function] Notify the PMC of the states of the optional block skip signals BDT1 to
BDT9. Nine signals are provided, corresponding to the nine optional
block skip signals. Signal MBDTn corresponds to signal BDTn.
[Output condition] Signal MBDTn is set to 1 in the following case:
When the corresponding optional block skip signal (BDTn) is set to 1
Signal MBDTn is set to 0 in the following case:
When the corresponding optional block skip signal (BDTn) is set to 0
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
G044
G045
BDT9
BDT8
BDT7
BDT6
BDT5
BDT4
BDT3
F004
F005
#0
BDT1
BDT2
MBDT1
MBDT9 MBDT8
MBDT7
MBDT6 MBDT5
MBDT4
MBDT3
MBDT2
Note
NOTE
1 This function is ignored when programs are loaded into
memory. Blocks containing /n are also stored in memory,
regardless of how the optional block skip signal is set.
Programs stored in memory can be output, regardless of
how the optional block skip signals are set.
Optional block skip is effective even during sequence
number search operation.
2 Position of a slash
A slash (/) must be specified at the head of a block. If a slash
is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to
immediately before the EOB code is ignored.
3 TV and TH check
When an optional block skip signal is 1. TH and TV checks
are made for the skipped portions in the same way as when
the optional block skip switch is 0.
428
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.12.2
Program section configuration
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.12.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12.2
429
B63003EN1/02
5.6
SEQUENCE NUMBER
COMPARISON AND
STOP
General
During program execution, this function causes a single block stop right
after a block with a specified sequence number is executed.
To use this function, first specify the program number (1 to 9999) of a
program that contains a sequence number where operation is to be stopped
and the sequence number on the setting data screen:
With this setting, a single block stop occurs after the execution of the
block with the specified sequence number during automatic operation.
Parameter
Setting data
SEQUENCE STOP (PROGRAM NO.)
Specify the program number (1 to 9999) of a program to which a
sequence to be stopped belongs.
SEQUENCE STOP (SEQUENCE NO.)
Specify the sequence number (1 to 99999) of a sequence to be stopped.
Note
NOTE
After the specified sequence number is found during the
execution of the program, the sequence number set for
sequence number compensation and stop is decremented
by one. When the power is turned on, the setting of the
sequence number is 0.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.4.4 Sequence Number Comparison

and Stop
OPERATORS MANUAL

and Stop
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)

and Stop
OPERATORS MANUAL

and Stop
430
B63003EN1/02
5.7
PROGRAM RESTART
General
A program may be restarted at a block by specifying the sequence number

of the block, after automatic operation is stopped because of a broken tool
or for holidays. This function can also be used as a highspeed program
check function.
There are two types of restart methods.
P type: Restart after a tool is broken down
Q type: Restart after holidays
Signal
Program restart signal

SRN<G006#0>
[Function] Selects program restart.
[Operation] When the program restart signal is set to 1 to search for the sequence
number of the block to be restarted, the CRT screen changes to the
program restart screen. When the program restart signal is set to 0, and
automatic operation is activated, the tool is moved back to the machining
restart point at dry run speed along the axes one by one in the sequence
specified in parameter No. 7310. When the tool is set to the restart point,
machining restarts.
Program restart under

way signal
SRNMV<F002#4>
[Function] Indicates the program is being restarted.
[Output condition] The program restart under way signal becomes 1 when:
The program restart signal is set to 0 after the CRT screen changes
to the program restart screen.
The program restart sequence ends (the tool has been moved to the
restart point on all controlled axes).
431
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
G006
#1
#0
SRN
F002
SRNMV
Parameter
7310
Movement sequence to program restart position
Setting entry is accepted.

[Valid data range] 1 to no. of controlled axes
This parameter sets the axis sequence when the machine moves to the
restart point by dry run after a program is restarted.
[Example]
The machine moves to the restart point in the order of the fourth, first,
second, and third axes one at a time when the first axis = 2, the second
axis = 3, the third axis = 4, and the fourth axis = 1 are set.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
094
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the pro(COORD CHG)
gram is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate
system setting operation was performed.) Perform the correct operation
according to the operators manual.
095
P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the

(EXT OFS CHG)
program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the
external workpiece offset amount
changed.)
096

(WRK OFS CHG)
program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the
workpiece offset amount changed.)
097

(AUTO EXEC)
program is restarted. (After power ON,
after emergency stop or P / S alarm 94
to 97 were reset, no automatic operation was performed.) Perform automatic operation.
098
G28 FOUND IN
QUENCE RETURN
099
MDI EXEC NOT AL- After completion of search in program

LOWED AFT. SEARCH
restart, a move command is given with
MDI.
432
SE- A command of the program restart was

specified without the reference position
return operation after power ON or
emergency stop, and G28 was found
during search.
Perform the reference position return.
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position
under the following conditions.
Special care must be taken in the following cases since
none of them cause an alarm:
Manual operation is performed when the manual
absolute mode is OFF.
Manual operation is performed when the machine is
locked.
When the mirror image is used.
When manual operation is performed in the course of
axis movement for returning operation.
When the program restart is commanded for a block
between the block for skip cutting and subsequent
absolute command block.
When program restart specified for an intermediate block
for a multiple repetitive canned cycle
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.4.5
PROGRAM RESTART
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.3
PROGRAM RESTART
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.4.4
PROGRAM RESTART
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.3
PROGRAM RESTART
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.4
PROGRAM RESTART
433
B63003EN1/02
5.8
TOOL RETRACTION
AND RETURN
General
The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged
during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can
be returned to restart machining efficiently.
:Position in which the tool escape signal is turned to 1.

:Programmed escape position
:Position to which the tool is retracted by manual operation.

:Retraction
:Manual operation
:Return operation
:Re-positioning
FIg. 5.8 Path of tool retraction and return for M series
Basic procedure for tool

retraction and return
When tool retraction signal TRESC input from the PMC turned to 1
while automatic operation is started, stopped, or held , the tool is
retracted by the distance specified in the program. The position to
which the tool retracts is called the retraction position. When TRESC
turned to 1 while automatic operation is started, if a block is being
executed, the tool is retracted after the block is suspended. When
retraction ends, the machine enters the automatic operation hold state.
The clearance and direction can be specified by the program. If these
values are not specified by the program, the tool is not retracted.
When TRESC turned to 1, the machine enters the tool retraction
mode, and tool retraction mode signal TRACT turned to 1 to notify
the PMC that the machine has entered the tool retraction mode.
434
B63003EN1/02
In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measure

workpieces, the tool can be moved manually, such as by manual
continuous feed, or manual handle feed. This operation is called
manual retraction. The path along which the tool retracts is
automatically stored in the control unit. The number of paths which
can be stored, however, is limited.
Set automatic operation mode again. Set the tool return signal TRRTN
to 1, then to 0. Then, the control unit traces back the path of the
manually moved tool to automatically return the tool to the retract
position. This operation is called return. When the tool has been
returned to the retraction position, tool retraction completion signal
TRSPS is turned to 1.
When the automatic operation is started at the retraction position, the
tool is first returned to the position where TRESC was turned to 1.
This operation is called repositioning. When repositioning completes,
TRACT is turned to 0 to notify the PMC of the end of the tool
retraction mode. Then the operation differs according to the status of
automatic operation when the machine entered the tool retraction
mode.
When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic
operation is started, the automatic operation that has been held is
resumed after the tool is repositioned.
When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic
operation is stopped or held, the machine returns to the same mode
after the tool is repositioned. If the cycle is restarted, automatic
operation is resumed.
Tool retraction signal
TRESC <G059#0>
Tool retraction mode signal
Retract
position
Manual
retraction
Retraction
Return
Retract
position
TRACT <F092#3>
Tool return completion signal
TRSPS <F092#5>
Tool return signal
TRRTN <G059 #1>

Cycle start signal
ST <G007#2>
435
Repositioning
B63003EN1/02
Signal

TRESC<G059#0>
[Function] Tool retraction mode is selected.
[Operation] When this signal is turned to 1, the control unit retracts the tool by a
preprogrammed distance.
Tool retraction mode

signal TRACT<F092#3>
[Function] This signal reports that tool retraction mode is set. When the control unit
is reset while the signal is 1, the signal is turned to 0, and tool retraction
mode is canceled.
[Output condition] The signal is turned to 1 when:
S Tool retraction mode is selected.
The signal is turned to 0 when:
S Tool retraction mode is not selected.
Tool return signal

TRRTN<G059#1>
[Function] In tool retraction mode, a tool that has been retracted manually along an
axis is returned to the retract position along the same axis.
[Operation] When this signal is turned to 1, the control unit traces back the path of
the manually moved tool to automatically return the tool to the retract
position.
Tool return completion

signal TRSPS<F092#5>
[Function] This signal reports that the tool is in the retract position in tool retraction
mode. When this signal is 0, repositioning cannot be performed by
pressing the cycle start button.
S Retraction has been completed.
S The tool has been returned to the retract position.
S The tool is not in the retract position in tool retraction mode.
436
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
TRRTN
#0
TRESC
#7
#6
#5
TRSPS
#4
#3
TRACT
#2
#1
#0
G059
F092
Warning
WARNING
The retraction axes and retraction distances specified with
G10.6 need to be changed in appropriate blocks depending
on the figure to be machined. An incorrectly specified
retraction distance may damage a workpiece, the machine,
or the tool. So, be very careful when specifying a retraction
distance.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III. 4.10
Tool Retraction and Return
OPERATORS MANUAL
III. 4.10
Tool Retraction and Return
437
B63003EN1/02
5.9
EXACT STOP/
EXACT STOP MODE/
TAPPING MODE/
CUTTING MODE
(M SERIES)
General
NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feed

blocks as described below.
Exact stop (G09)
The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an inposition

check (*1) is performed. When the feed motor falls inposition, the tool
is moved by the next block. This function may be used to produce a sharp
edge at the corner of a workpiece.
Exact Stop Mode (G61)
When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the

end point and inposition check is performed per block thereafter. This
G61 is valid till G62 (automatic corner override), G63 (tapping mode),
or G64 (cutting mode), is commanded.
D Tapping Mode (G63)
When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded

as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not
decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block. This G63 is
valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64
(cutting mode) is commanded.
D Cutting Mode (G64)
When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block

thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.
However, in G64 mode, feed rate is decelerated to zero and inposition
check is performed in the following case;
1) Positioning mode (G00, G60)
2) Block with exact stop check (G09)
3) Next block is a block without movement command
*1 The term inposition indicates that the servo motor reaches in a range
of positions specified by a parameter. See Section 7.2.6.1 and 7.2.6.2
for details.
(Example) Tool paths from block (1) to block (2)
Inposition check
(2)
(1)
438
Tool path in the exact stop mode
Tool path in the cutting mode or

tapping mode
X
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.4.1
Exact Stop (G09, G61)

Cutting Mode (G64)
Tapping Mode (G63)
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.4.1

Cutting Mode (G64)
Tapping Mode (G63)
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.4.1

Cutting Mode (G64)
Tapping Mode (G63)
439
B63003EN1/02
5.10
BALANCE CUT
(2PATH CONTROL
FOR T SERIES)
General
When a thin workpiece is to be machined as shown in fig. 5.10, a precision

machining can be achieved by machining each side of the workpiece with
a tool simultaneously;this function can prevent the workpiece from
distortion that results when only one side is machined at a time. When
both sides are machined at the same time, the movement of one tool must
synchronize with that of the other tool. Otherwise, the workpiece may
vibrate, resulting in poor machining. With this function, the movement
of one tool post can easily synchronize with that of the other tool post.
Fig. 5.10
Alarm and message
Balance cut
Message
No.
163
COMMAND G68/G69
INDEPENDENTLY
(T series 2path control)
440
Contents
G68 and G69 are not independently

commanded in balance cut.
Correct program.
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 If feed hold operation is performed during balance cutting
using both tool posts, balance cut processing is not
performed at restart time, it is performed when the next
move command is specified for both tool posts.
2 Balance cutting is not performed in dry run or machine lock
state.
3 When rapid traverse operation is specified, balance cut
processing is not performed.
4 A workpiece for which thread cutting has been performed in
the balance cut mode cannot be subjected to thread cutting
in the cancel mode. Thread cutting starts at a different
position.
5 Balance cut only starts cutting feed on both tool posts at the
same time; it does not maintain synchronization thereafter.
To synchronize all the movements of both tool posts, the
data for both tool posts, such as the travel distance and
feedrate, must be the same.
Note
NOTE
1 Time delay before the pulse distribution of both tool posts
is started is 2 ms or shorter.
2 In the balance cut mode, synchronization is established at
the start of a move block, so movement may momentarily
stop.
3 The cancel mode (G69) is set by a reset.
4 When the option mirror image for double turrets is
selected, the balance cut function cannot be used.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
441
II. 20.4
Balance Cut (G68, G69)
B63003EN1/02
5.11
DNC OPERATION
General
By starting automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT),

it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program is
being read in via the reader/puncher interface, or remote buffer.
If the floppy cassette directory display option is available, it is possible
to select files (programs) saved in an external input/output unit of a floppy
format (Handy File, Floppy Cassettes, or FA card) and specify (schedule)
the sequence and frequency of execution for automatic operation.
To use the DNC operation function, it is necessary to set the parameters
related to the reader/puncher interface, and remote buffer in advance.
Signal
DNC operation select

signal
DNCI<G043#5>
[Function] Selects the DNC operation mode (RMT).
To select the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is necessary to select the
memory operation mode (MEM) and set the DNC operation select signal
to 1.
[Operation] When the DNC operation select signal becomes 1, the control unit
operates as follows:
If the memory mode (MEM) has not been selected, the signal is
ignored, and nothing happens.
If the memory operation mode (MEM) has been selected, the DNC
operation mode (RMT) is selected, and DNC operation becomes
possible. In this case, the DNC operation selection confirm signal
MRMT becomes 1.
DNC operation selection

confirm signal
MRMT<F003#4>
[Function] Indicates that the DNC operation mode (RMT) has been selected.
[Output condition] The DNC operation selection confirm signal becomes 1 when:
The DNC operation mode (RMT) is selected.
The DNC operation selection confirm signal becomes 0 when:
The DNC operation mode (RMT) is not selected.
442
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#7
#6
G043
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#3
#2
#1
#0
DNCI
#5
MRMT
F003
Parameter
#7
#6
0100
#5
#4
ND3
Setting entry is accepted.

[Data type] Bit
ND3 In DNC operation, a program is:
0 : Read block by block. (A DC3 code is output for each block.)
1 : Read continuously until the buffer becomes full. (A DC3 code is
output when the buffer becomes full.)
NOTE
In general, reading is performed more efficiently when
ND3=1. This specification reduces the number of buffering
interruptions caused by reading of a series of blocks
specifying short movements. This reduces the cycle time.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
Description
086
DR SIGNAL OFF
123
CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used during

COMMAND IN DNC
DNC operation.
Modify the program.
210
CAN
NOT
M198/M99
443
When entering data in the memory by

using Reader / Puncher interface, the
ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher
was off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable
is not connected or a P.C.B. is defective.
COMAND M198 and M99 are executed in the

schedule operation. Or M198 is
executed in the DNC operation.
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.6
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.4
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.5
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.4
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.5
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.3
SCHEDULING FUNCTION
CONNECTION MANUAL
(this manual)
13.1
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
13.2
REMOTE BUFFER
444
B63003EN1/02
5.12
MANUAL
INTERVENTION AND
RETURN
General
If the tool movement along the axes is stopped by a feed hold during
automatic operation, then restarted after manual intervention such as tool
exchange, the tool moves back to the point of intervention before
automatic operation is resumed.
This function is easy to operate because unlike the program restart
function or the tool retract and restore function, it is unnecessary to
operate switches on the operators panel or MDI keys.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
7001
#0
MIN
[Data type] Bit

MIN The manual intervention and return function is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
Warning
WARNING
If you do not make manual intervention correctly according
to the direction of machining and the shape of the
workpiece, the machine and tool may be broken down. Use
sufficient care.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.4.12
MANUAL INTERVENTION AND

RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.8

RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III. 4.9

RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.8

RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.9

RETURN
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.4.7

RETURN
445
B63003EN1/02
5.13
RETRACTION FOR
RIGID TAPPING
(M SERIES)
General
When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop or

a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be
drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically stores
information relating to the tapping executed most recently. When a tap
retraction signal is input, only drawn out of the rigid tapping cycle is
executed, based on the stored information. The tap is pulled toward the
R point. When a retract value is set in parameter No. 5382, the pulling
distance can be increased by .
Initial point
R point
2nd return
completion
point
Retract
completion
point
L
Center of
tapping
1st return
completion
point
Z point (=0)
Basic procedure
(when is set)
(1) Start
Reset the CNC, then select MDI mode. Setting rigid tapping retraction
start signal RTNT to 1 starts rigid tapping retraction.
(2) Completion
Upon the completion of rigid tapping retraction, rigid tapping
retraction completion signal RTPT is set to 1, with which the CNC
automatically enters the reset state. Setting rigid tapping retract start
signal RTNT to 0 sets rigid tapping retraction completion signal
RTPT to 0.
(3) Stop
During rigid tapping retraction, setting rigid tapping retraction start
signal RTNT to 0 stops rigid tapping retraction, placing the CNC in
the reset state. To resume rigid tapping retraction, set rigid tapping
retraction start signal RTNT to 1. Rigid tapping retraction can also
be stopped by means of a reset or feed hold.
446
B63003EN1/02
(4) Resume
Once rigid tapping retraction has been stopped, it can be resumed by
performing the same operation as that used for starting rigid tapping
retraction. If rigid tapping retraction has been completed, however,
the start operation does not restart rigid tapping retraction. If retract
value is set in parameter No. 5382, however, the start operation
performs rigid tapping retraction using only.
Start and completion

time chart
Rigid tapping retraction
start signal RTNT
M29 command
Spindle enable signal ENB
Rigid tapping signal RGTAP
M29 completion signal FIN
Spindle excitation
Retract movement
completion signal RTPT
Fig. 5.13 Start and completion time chart
In the reset state, setting rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT to 1
in MDI mode causes the rigid tapping M command to be output. For rigid
tapping retraction, specify neither gear switching nor orientation. Spindle
function strobe signal SF is also output if no S command has been
specified after poweron.
Upon the completion of rigid tapping retraction, spindle enable signal
ENB is set to 0, in the same way as at the end of ordinary rigid tapping.
Therefore, perform the sequence for canceling rigid tapping. Once rigid
tapping retraction has been completed, rigid tapping retraction
completion signal RTPT is set to 1 and the CNC enters the reset state.
447
B63003EN1/02
Time chart for stopping

rigid tapping retraction
Tapping retraction start signal
RTNT
Spindle enable signal ENB
Rigid tapping signal RGTAP
Spindle excitation
Retract movement
When tapping retract is stopped, spindle enable signal ENB is set to 0,

in the same way as for ordinary rigid tapping. Therefore, perform the
sequence for canceling rigid tapping. The CNC also automatically enters
the reset state when tapping retract is stopped.
Signal
start signal RTNT
<G062#6>
[Function] Starts rigid tapping retraction.
S Starts rigid tapping retraction.

completion signal RTPT
<F066#1>
[Function] Notifies the completion of rigid tapping retraction.
S Rigid tapping retraction has been completed.
S Rigid tapping retraction start signal has been set to 0.
448
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
G062
#5
#4
#3
#2
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#1
#0
RTNT
#7
#6
F066
RTPT
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
5200
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DOV
[Data type] Bit

DOV For tool extraction during rigid tapping, override is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
5381
Override for rigid tapping retraction
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
Sets an override value to be applied to rigid tapping retraction. No
override is applied if 0 is set.
NOTE
This parameter is enabled only when the parameter used to
enable tool extraction (DOV: bit 4 of No. 5200) is set to 1.
Retract value for rigid tapping return
5382
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data] Input increments
Sets an extra retract value for rigid tapping retraction. The tool will be
pulled beyond the R point by . If rigid tapping retraction has already
been completed, the tool is pulled by only.
449
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 If rigid tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop,
the position on the tapping axis (Zaxis) is maintained but
the spindle position is lost. In such a case, therefore, the
positional relationship between the spindle and tapping axis
is not guaranteed when operation is resumed.
2 Rigid tapping retraction is performed based on the tapping
axis (Zaxis) commands accumulated for tapping. If rigid
tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop,
therefore, rigid tapping retraction may fail to draw the
tapping tool completely out of the workpiece. In such a
case, set retract value (parameter No. 5382).
3 During rigid tapping retraction, switching the mode to
manual mode stops rigid tapping retraction.
4 For rigid tapping retraction, the CNC internally activates a
return program. Rigid tapping retraction may, therefore,
cause some G codes or M/F/S codes to be overwritten
(G80/G84/G74, G94/G95, G30).
Note
NOTE
1 Setting rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT to 1 starts
rigid tapping retraction only when the CNC is placed in both
the reset state and MDI mode.
2 The machining data for rigid tapping retraction is maintained
until a rigid tapping command is subsequently specified,
even while the power is turned off. Rigid tapping retraction
can, therefore, be specified even if the power has been
turned off after rigid tapping.
3 Rigid tapping retraction is not performed if the input
increments (inches or mm) selected when tapping return is
specified differ from those selected when the machining
data for tapping retraction was stored.
4 An override can be applied to rigid tapping retraction, if it is
enabled with the corresponding parameter.
450
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.13.2
Rigid tapping
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.8
Rigid tapping
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.13.2
Rigid tapping
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.7
Rigid tapping
Connection manual
(this manual)
9.11
Rigid tapping
451
B63003EN1/02
INTERPOLATION FUNCTION
452
B63003EN1/02
6.1
POSITIONING
General
The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system
specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse
rate.
In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is
programmed.
In the incremental command the distance the tool moves is programmed.
The tool path is determined by selecting one of the following with
parameter LRP (No. 1401#1):
D Linear interpolation type positioning
The tool is positioned using a straight path and a speed that is not
higher than the rapid traverse of each axis but that assures the shortest
positioning time. This tool path is not the same as for linear
interpolation (G01).
D Nonlinear interpolation type positioning
Positioning is performed with each axis independently at the rapid
traverse rate. Generally, the tool path is not a straight line.
The rapid traverse rate in the G00 command is set to the parameter
No.1420 for each axis independently by the machine tool builder. In the
positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end
of a block. Execution proceeds to the next block after confirming the
inposition.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1401
#1
LRP
#0
[Data type] Bit

LRP Positioning (G00)
0 : Positioning is performed with nonlinear type positioning so that the
tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1 : Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool
moves in a straight line.
1420

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
30 240000
30 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
30 96000
30 48000
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
30 240000
30 100000
each axis.
453
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address
F.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.1
POSITIONING (G00)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.1
POSITIONING (G00)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.1
POSITIONING (G00)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.1
POSITIONING (G00)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.1
POSITIONING (G00)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.1
POSITIONING (G00)
454
B63003EN1/02
6.2
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
General
Tools can move along a line

A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate
specified in F.
The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It
need not be specified for each block.
The feedrate commanded by the F code is measured along the tool path.
If the F code is not commanded, the feedrate is regarded as zero.
The feedrate of each axis direction is as follows.
G01
Ff ;
Feed rate of axis direction :
Fa + a
L
Fb +
b
L
Fg +
g
L
Fz +
z
L
L+
a2 )
b 2 ) g2 ) z 2
The feedrate of the rotary axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (if the
feedrate is 12 deg/min, F12.0 is commanded).
When the straight line axis (such as X, Y, or Z) and the rotating axis
(such as A, B, or C) are linearly interpolated, the feed rate is that in which
the tangential feed rate in the and cartesian coordinate system is
commanded by F(mm/min).
axis feedrate is obtained ; at first, the time required for distribution is
calculated by using the above fromula, then the axis feedrate unit is
changed to deg/min.
A calculation example is as follows.
(Example)
G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ;
This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric
input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows:
20 2 ) 40 2
300
0.14907 (min)
The feed rate for the C axis is
40
0.14907
268.3 degDmin
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the feed rate is calculated the same way
as in 2 axes control.
455
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
1411
Cutting feedrate when the power is turned on

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 32767
6 32767
Inch machine
0.01 inch/min
6 32767
6 32767
When the machine requires little change in cutting feedrate during

cutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. This
eliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate in the NC command data.
The feedrate set in this parameter is effective between the CNC being
cleared, upon a poweron or a reset, and a feedrate being specified with a
program command (F command). Once a feedrate has been specified with
an F command, that feedrate becomes effective.
1422
Maximium cutting feedrate for all axes

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000

NOTE
parameter No. 1430 instead. (M series)
1430
Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
6 240000
6 100000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.

A feedrate for each axis is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not
exceed the maximum feedrate specified for each axis.
456
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular
interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute
interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in
parameter No. 1422 is effective.
2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
specified in parameter No. 1422 is applied to all axes and
the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
3402
#2
#1
#0
G01
[Data type] Bit

G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
Alarm and message
No.
011
Reference item
Message
Description
NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED
Cutting feedrate was not commanded or

the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the
program.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.3
LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.2
457
B63003EN1/02
6.3
CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION
General
The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined
plane.
Clockwise(G02) and counterclockwise(G03) on the XpYp plane
(ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed
in the positivetonegative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis or Xp axis,
respectively) in the Cartesian coordinate system. See the figure below.
Xp
Yp
G03
G02
Zp
G02
Xp
G03
G02
Zp
G18
G17
G03
Yp
G19
The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is

expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91.
For the incremental value, the distance of the end point which is viewed
from the start point of the arc is specified with a sign.
The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for the Xp, Yp, and Zp
axes, respectively. The numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is
a vector component in which the arc center is seen from the start point,
and is always specified as an incremental value, as shown below.
I, J, and K must be signed according to the direction.
End point (x,y)
End point (z,x)
End point (y,z)
Start
point
Center
Center
Start
point
Start
point
k
Center
I0,J0, and K0 can be omitted. When Xp, Yp , and Zp are omitted (the end
point is the same as the start point) and the center is specified with I, J,
and K, a 360_ arc (circle) is specified.
G02 Ii; Command for a circle
If the difference between the radius at the start point and that at the
end point exceeds the value in a parameter (No.3410), an alarm (No.020)
occurs.
458
B63003EN1/02
The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc
can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.
In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ are
considered.
For T series, an arc with a sector angle of 180_ or wider cannot be
specified (P/S alarm No. 023).
For M series, specify an arc more than 180_ with a negative radius value
commanded.
If Xp, Yp, and Zp are all omitted, if the end point is located at the same
position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of 0is programmed.
G02Rr ; (The tool does not move.)
(Example) (T series)
For arc (1) (less than 180_)
G02 W60.0 U10.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc (2) (greater than 180_)
An arc with a sector angle of 180
or wider cannot be specified
within a single block.
(2)
r=50mm
(1)
Start point
r=50mm
459
End point
B63003EN1/02
(Example) (M series)
For arc (1) (less than 180_)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc (2) (greater than 180_)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y20.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
(2)
r=50mm
End point
(1)
Start point
r=50mm
When the option for specifying arc radius R with nine digits is selected
for the T series, the valid radius range for circular interpolation is
expanded as follows:
Input increments
Metric input
Increment ISB 0.001 to 999999.999 mm

system
ISC 0.0001 to 99999.9999 mm
460
Inch input
0.0001 to 99999.9999 inch
0.00001 to 9999.99999 inch
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 Specifying an arc center with addresses I, K, and J
When the distance from the arc start point to the arc center
is specified with addresses I, K, and J, a P/S alarm (No.
5059) is issued if:
Maximum value which can be specified < I 2 ) K 2
Example:
When ISB and metric input are selected, issuing the
following command (radius specification) will result in the
issue of a P/S alarm (No. 5059):
G50 X0 Z0;
G18 G02 X11.250 Z10. I800000.000 K900000.000 F5.0;
I 2 ) K 2 + (800000.000) 2 ) 900000.000 2
N
= 1204159.458
> 999999.999
2 Tool nose radius compensation
In tool nose radius compensation mode, a P/S alarm (No.
5059) is issued if the distance from the tool nose radius
center to the arc center exceeds the maximum value which
can be specified.
The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feedrate specified by

the F code, and the feedrate along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the
arc) is controlled to be the specified feedrate.
The error between the specified feedrate and the actual tool feedrate is
2% or less. However, this feedrate is measured along the arc after the
cutter compensation (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T
series) is applied.
461
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
1022
Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system
NOTE
When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter
compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the
T series), etc., each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y,
and Z, or an axis parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.
G17: Plane XpYp
G18: Plane ZpXp
G19: Plane YpZp
Only one axis can be set for each of the three basic axes X, Y, and Z, but
two or more parallel axes can be set.
Set value
#7
Meaning
Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis
X axis of the basic three axes
Y axis of the basic three axes
Z axis of the basic three axes
Axis parallel to the X axis
Axis parallel to the Y axis
Axis parallel to the Z axis
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
G19
G18
#0
3402
[Data type] Bit

G18 and G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
G19
G18
G17, G18 or G19 mode
G17 mode (plane XY)
G18 mode (plane ZX)
G19 mode (plane YZ)
462
B63003EN1/02
3410
Tolerance of arc radius
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is executed, the

tolerance for the radius between the start point and the end point is set. If
the difference of radii between the start point and the end point exceeds the
tolerance set here, a P/S alarm No. 20 is informed.
NOTE
When the set value is 0, the difference of radii is not
checked.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
011
NO FEEDRATE
COMMANDED
Cutting feedrate was not commanded

or the feedrate was inadequate.
Modify the program.
020
OVER TOLERANCE OF
RADIUS
In circular interpolation (G02 or G03),

difference of the distance between the
start point and the center of an arc
and that between the end point and
the center of the arc exceeded the
value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021
ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS

COMMANDED
An axis not included in the selected

plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
commanded in circular interpolation.
Modify the program.
023
ILLEGAL RADIUS
COMMAND
(T series)
In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative value was commanded for address R. Modify the
program.
025
CANNOT COMMAND F0
IN G02/G03
(M series)
F0 (rapid traverse) was instructed by

F1 digit command in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
028
ILLEGAL PLANE
SELECT
In the plane selection command, two

or more axes in the same direction
are commanded.
Modify the program.
P/S
5059
RADIUS IS OUT OF
RANGE
For circular interpolation, the radius

specified with addresses I and K exceeds the allowable range.
463
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 For T series, the U, V and W axes (parallel with the basic
axis) can be used with Gcode system B and C.
2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the
arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other
are ignored.
3 If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded,
an alarm is displayed.
For example, when G code system B or C is used, if U axis
with X axis is specified as a parallel axis to X axis when
plane XY is specified, an P/S alarm (No.028)is displayed.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.4
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
(G02,G03)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.3
(G02,G03)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.4
(G02,G03)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.3
(G02,G03)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.4
(G02,G03)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.3
(G02,G03)
464
B63003EN1/02
6.4
THREAD CUTTING
6.4.1
Thread Cutting
General
Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cutting

threads.
The spindle speed is continuously read through the position coder
attached to the spindle. Then, it is converted to a cutting feedrate (feed
per minute) to feed the tool.
L : Lead
Straight Thread
Tapered Screw
Scroll Thread
In general, thread cutting is repeated along the same tool path in rough
cutting through finish cutting for a screw. Since thread cutting starts when
the position coder mounted on the spindle outputs a 1turn signal,
threading is started at a fixed point and the tool path on the workpiece is
unchanged for repeated thread cutting. Note that the spindle speed must
remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting. If not,
incorrect thread lead will occur.
465
B63003EN1/02
Signal

THRD<F002#3>
[Function] This signal indicates that thread cutting is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal turns to 1 in the following cases:
S Thread cutting mode in progress
S Thread cutting cycle for turning
This signal turns to 0 in the following case.
S Neither thread cutting mode nor thread cutting are in progress.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
THRD
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
TDR
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F002
Parameter
Enabling/disabling dry
run operation during
threading
1401
[Data type] Bit

TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid
tapping)
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
Setting the thread
cutting
#7
#6
#5
3405
#4
#3
G36
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

G36 For a G code used with the automatic tool compensation function:
0 : G36/G37 is used
1 : G37.1/G37.2 is used
466
B63003EN1/02
Checking the spindle

speed arrival signal
before starting threading
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
3708
#2
#1
SAT
#0
SAR
SAR
[Data type] Bit

SAR: The spindle speed arrival signal is:
0 : Not checked
1 : Checked
SAT: Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of executing the
thread cutting block
0 : The signal is checked only when SAR, #0 of parameter 3708, is set.
1 : The signal is always checked irrespective of whether SAR is set.
CAUTION
When thread cutting blocks are consecutive, the spindle
speed arrival signal is not checked for the second and
subsequent thread cutting blocks.
Setting the time constant

for the threading cycle
1626
Time constant of exponetial acceleration/deceleration in the thread

cutting cycle for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in the
thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each axis.
467
B63003EN1/02
Setting the FL feedrate

for the thread cutting
cycle
1627
FL rate of exponential acceleration /deceleration in the thread cutting

cycle for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000

the thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each
axis.
Setting the chamfering

distance for the thread
cutting cycle
5130
Chamfering distance in the thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 0.1 pitch
This parameter sets the chamfering in the thread cutting cycles G76 and
G92.
Setting the minimum
depth of cut for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5140
Minimium depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
[Data type] Twoword
[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
468
B63003EN1/02
Setting the finishing

allowance for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5141
Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive

canned cycle G76.
Setting the repetition
count of finishing for the
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5142
Repetition count of final finishing in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] Cycle
This parameter sets the repetition count in the multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
Setting the tool angle for
the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5143
Tool nose angle in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 0 to 120 (When FS15 TAPE FORMAT is used)
0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80 (When FS15 TAPE FORMAT is not used)
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in the multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
469
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
During threading, stopping feed without stopping the
spindle is dangerous because the cutting depth will abruptly
increase.
Feed hold is, therefore, disabled during
threading. If attempted during threading, feed stops in the
same way as single block stop upon the completion of the
first nonthreading block after the termination of threading
mode. The feed hold lamp (SPL lamp), however, lights
immediately after the feed fold button (on the machine
operators panel) is pressed. The lamp goes off when feed
stops (the CNC enters the single block stop state).
Caution
CAUTION
1 Feedrate override is ignored during thread cutting, 100%
being assumed.
2 During threading, spindle override is ignored, 100% being
assumed.
3 When the first nonthreading block is executed after
threading mode has been finished, and the feed hold button
is pressed again (or the feed hold button has been held
down), the execution of the nonthreading block is stopped
immediately.
4 When thread cutting is executed in the single block status,
the tool stops after execution of the first block not specifying
thread cutting.
5 When the previous block was a thread cutting block, cutting
will start immediately without waiting for detection of the
1turn signal even if the present block is a thread cutting
block.
6 When a dry run operation is performed the dry run rate
becomes the longitudinal axis feedrate.
7 For T series, the thread cutting retract function is supported
only for the threading cycle.
470
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.15
CONSTANT LEAD THREAD

CUTTING
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.8

CUTTING
II.4.9
VARIABLE LEAD THREAD

CUTTING
II.4.10
CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTING
II.4.11
MULTIPLE THREAD CUTTING
II.4.12
CIRCULAR THREAD CUTTING
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.7

CUTTING
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.6

CUTTING
II.4.7

CUTTING
II.4.8
II.4.9
II.4.4

CUTTING
II.4.5

CUTTING
II.4.6
II.4.7
OPERATORS MANUAL
471
B63003EN1/02
6.4.2
Thread Cutting Cycle
Retract (T series)
General
When the automatic operation stop signal *SP <G008#5> is set to 0

during threading in a threading cycle, the tool immediately retracts while
performing chamfering, then returns to the start point of the current cycle,
first along the Xaxis, then along the Zaxis.
Stop point
Ordinary cycle
Motion when the signal *SP is
set to 0.
Rapid traverse
The signal *SP is set to 0 here.
Parameter
Setting to enable the

override function during
thread cutting cycle
retraction
1403
#7
RTV
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

RTV Override while the tool is retracting in threading
0 : Override is effective.
1 : Override is not effective.
Setting a chamfering
distance in thread
cutting cycle retraction
5130
Chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 0.1 pitch
This parameter sets the chamfering in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92.
472
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
While the tool is retracting, automatic operation stop signal
*SP <G008#5> is ignored.
Note
NOTE
The chamfering distance for retraction is determined by the
setting of parameter No. 5130.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
473
II.13.1.2
II.13.2.7
Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
II.13.1.2
II.13.2.7
II.13.1.2
II.13.2.7
B63003EN1/02
6.5
SINGLE DIRECTION
POSITIONING
(M SERIES)
General
For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final

positioning from one direction is available.
Start position
Overrun
distance
End position
Start position
Temporary stop
An overrun and a positioning direction are set by the parameter (No.

5440). Even when a commanded positioning direction coincides with
that set by the parameter, the tool stops once before the end point.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
5431
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MDL
[Data type] Bit

MDL Specifies whether the G code for single direction positioning (G60) is
included in oneshot G codes (00 group) or modal G codes (01 group)
0: Oneshot G codes (00 group)
1: Modal G codes (01 group)
474
B63003EN1/02
5440
Positioning direction and overrun distance in unidirectional positioning

for each axis

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
This parameter sets the positioning direction and overrun distance in

unidirectional positioning (G60) for each axis. The positioning
direction is specified using a setting data sign, and the overrun distance
using a value set here.
Approach > 0: The positioning direction is positive (+).
Approach < 0: The positioning direction is negative (* ).
Approach = 0: Unidirectional positioning is not performed.

Overrun distance
+
Positioning direction (plus)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.2
Single direction positioning
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.2
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.2
475
B63003EN1/02
6.6
HELICAL
INTERPOLATION
General
Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up

to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular
interpolation by circular commands.
The command method is to simply add one or two move command axes
which is not circular interpolation axes. An F command specifies a
feedrate along a circular arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the linear axis is
as follows:
F
Length of linear axis

Length of circular arc
Determine the feedrate so that the linear axis feedrate does not exceed any
of the various limit values.
Tool path
The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the specified feedrate.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1404
#1
#0
HFC
HFC The feedrate for helical interpolation is:

0 : Clamped so that the feedrates along an arc and linear axis do not
exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified by parameter.
1 : Clamped so that the composite feedrate along an arc and linear axis
does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified by
parameter.
When HFC is 1, and two linear axes exist, the combined feedrate for
the four axes (two axes (arc) + two axes (straight line)) is clamped so
that it does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate.
476
B63003EN1/02
<Parameters used for clamping>

When HFC is 0
No. 1430:

Since the cutting feedrate for the arc is clamped to the above
parameter value, the feedrate along the linear axis is clamped
to the smaller parameter value.
Example: No. 1430
X 1000
Y 1200
Z 1400
G17 G03 X0. Y100. R100. Z1000. F5000;
The feedrate along the linear axis is clamped to 1000.
No. 1422:
Maximum cutting feedrate (common to all axes)

If parameter No. 1430 is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to
the value set in this parameter.
When HFC is 1
No. 1422:
Maximum cutting feedrate (common to all axes)

The cutting feedrate is clamped to the value set in this
parameter. The value set with parameter No. 1430 is
ignored.
Alarm and message
If more than two axes are specified together with the two axes for circular
interpolation in a block specifying a helical interpolation operation, P/S
alarm No. 232 is issued.
No.
0232
Reference item
Message
Description
TOO MANY HELICAL

AXIS COMMANDS
Three or more axes are specified as

helical axes.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.5
Helical Interpolation
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.4
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.5
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.5
477
B63003EN1/02
6.7
INVOLUTE
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
General
With the involute interpolation function, an involute curve can be

machined. Cutter compensation C is also possible. The use of involute
interpolation eliminates the need to use short lines or arcs to approximate
an involute curve. Pulse distribution is no longer interrupted by the
highspeed operation of small blocks. As a result, smooth, highspeed
operation is possible. In addition, part programs can be created more
easily, and the required paper tape can be shortened.
Parameter
5610
Limit of initial permissible error during involute interpolation
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the allowable limit of deviation between an involute

curve passing through a start point and an involute curve passing through
an end point for an involute interpolation command.
Alarm and message
Message
No.
Description
241
END POINT, I, J, K, AND

R ARE MISSING
The end point of an involute curve, I,

J, or K is not specified.
242
SPECIFICATION ERROR
(INVOLUTE)
An illegal value is specified for involute interpolation.
(1)The specified start point or end point

is located inside the base circle.
(2)Zero is specified for I, J, K, or R.
(3)The start point or end point is located

more than 100 turns from the beginning
of the involute curve.
243
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
END POINT NOT ON INVOLUTE CURVE
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
478
The end point is not on the involute

curve that passes through the start
point, and is beyond the range specified with in parameter No. 5610.
II.4.10
Involute Interpolation
B63003EN1/02
6.8
POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION
General
Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control

in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system
to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement
of a rotary axis (rotation of a workpiece). This function is useful for
grinding a cam shaft.
G12.1 starts the polar coordinate interpolation mode and selects a polar
coordinate interpolation plane (Fig. 6.8). Polar coordinate
interpolation is performed on this plane.
Polar coordinate
interpolation plane
Rotary axis (virtual axis)
(unit:mm or inch)
Linear axis
(unit:mm or inch)
Origin of the local coordinate system (G52 command)

(Or origin of the workpiece coordinate system when a G52
command is not specified)
Fig. 6.8 Polar coordinate interpolation plane
When the power is turned on or the system is reset, polar coordinate

interpolation is canceled (G13.1).
The linear and rotation axes for polar coordinate interpolation must be set
in parameters (No. 5460 and 5461) beforehand.
479
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
1422
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000

NOTE
5460
Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation
5461
Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolarion
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... control axes count
These parameters set control axis numbers of linear and rotary axes to
execute polar interpolation.
5462
Maximum cutting feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
0, 6 240000
0, 6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0, 6 96000
0, 6 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
0, 6 240000
0, 6 100000
This parameter sets the upper limit of the cutting feedrate that is effective
during polar coordinate interpolation. If a feedrate greater than the
maximum feedrate is specified during polar coordinate interpolation, it
is clamped to the feedrate specified by the parameter. When the setting is
0, the feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation is clamped to the
maximum cutting feedrate usually specified with parameter 1422.
480
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
No.
Message
Description
145
ILLEGAL CONDITIONS
IN POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION
The conditions are incorrect when the polar

coordinate interpolation starts or it is canceled.
1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1
was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane selection.

Parameters No. 5460 and No. 5461 are
incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.8
Polar Coordinate Interpolation
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.5
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.4
481
B63003EN1/02
6.9
CYLINDRICAL
INTERPOLATION
General
The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once

internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface
so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with
another axis. After interpolation, such a distance is converted back to the
amount of travel of the rotary axis.
The cylindrical interpolation function allows the side of a cylinder to be
developed for programming. So programs such as a program for
cylindrical cam grooving can be created very easily.
Use parameter No. 1022 to specify whether the rotation axis is the X, Y,
or Zaxis, or an axis parallel to one of these axes.
Only one rotation axis can be set for cylindrical interpolation.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1006
#1
ROSx
#0
ROTx
NOTE
ROSx
ROTx
Description
Linear axis
@ Inch/metric conversion is done.

@ All coordinate values are linear axis type.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
@ Inch/metric conversion is not done.

@ Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_ Absolute
coordinatevalues and relative coordinate values are rounded or
not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0 and #2.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type (Refer to
parameter No. 3624)
@ Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the
reference position return direction and the move amount does
not exceed one rotation.

@ Machine coordinate values is linear axis type (Is not rounded in
0 to 360_). Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0
and #2.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624).
@ Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the
index table indexing function (M series).
482
B63003EN1/02
1022

To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter
compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the
T series), etc., each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y,
and Z, or an axis parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.
G17: Plane XpYp
G18: Plane ZpXp
G19: Plane YpZp
Set value
Alarm and message
Meaning
Number

Message
Description
175
ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND
Conditions when performing cylindrical interpolation start or cancel not correct. To

change the mode to the cylindrical interpolation mode, specify the command in a
format of G07.1 rotationaxis name radius
of cylinder.
176
IMPROPER GCODE IN
G107
Any of the following G codes which cannot

be specified in the cylindrical interpolation
mode was specified.
1) G codes for positioning, such as G28,
G76, G81 G89, including the codes
specifying the rapid traverse cycle
2) G codes for setting a coordinate system:

G50, G52
3) G code for selecting coordinate system:
G53 G54G59
Modify the program.
483
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.7
Cylindrical Interpolation
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.6
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.6
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.5
484
B63003EN1/02
6.10
POLYGONAL
TURNING
(T SERIES)
Polygonal turning means machining a polygonal figure by rotating the

workpiece and tool at a certain ratio.
Workpiece
Workpiece
Tool
Fig. 6.10 (a) Polygonal turning
By changing conditions which are rotation ratio of workpiece and tool and
number of cutters,the machining figure can be changed to a square or
hexagon. The machining time can be reduced as compared with polygonal
figure machining using C and X axes of the polar coordinate. The
machined figure however, is not exactly polygonal. Generally, polygonal
turning is used for the heads of square and/or hexagon bolts or hexagon
nuts.
Fig. 6.10 (b) Hexagon bolt
This function controls the workpiece (spindle) and tool (rotation tool
axis) so that the relationship between the spindle speed and tool speed is
maintained at a constant ratio specified in a command given to the CNC.
(For the principle of polygonal turning, refer to Section 20.1, Part II of the
Operators Manual (For Lathe).)
Either of the following can be selected as the tool rotation axis:
CNC controlled axis (servo axis)
Second spindle (with two serial spindles connected)
In the following descriptions, the term polygonal turning refers to a
turning operation in which a servo axis is used as the tool rotation axis
(See Section 6.10.1.).
The term polygonal turning with two spindle refers to a turning operation
in which the second spindle is used as the tool rotation axis (See Section
6.10.2.).
485
B63003EN1/02
6.10.1
Polygonal Turning
General
One of the axes (servo axes) controlled by the CNC is assigned as a tool
rotation axis. Either serial spindle or analog spindle can be used as a
workpiece axis (spindle).
Polygonal turning using a servo axis is detailed in the operators manual
(for lathe).
This section focuses on supplementary information and examples for the
connection.
Spindle connection
A position coder must be mounted on the spindle. However, polygonal

turning requires no additional changes to the spindle connection (See
Section 9.3.).
Polygonal turning uses the position coder feedback signal to control the
positional relationship (cutting position) between the spindle and tool
rotation axis, and the ratio of speed.
Tool rotation axis

(servo axis) connection
Parameter No. 7610 specifies the controlled axis (servo axis) to be used
as the tool rotation axis.
The same parameter setting as for ordinary servo axes applies to the servo
axis connection for polygonal turning except for some parameters.
When the machine is not in the polygonal turning mode, the servo axis
specified as the rotation tool axis functions as a feed axis. So, the servo
axis can be:
Used as a subspindle under PMC axis control
Positioned by a move command from a machining program.
However, be careful about the angle to rotate through and feedrate. Read
the operators manual (for lathe) and the following examples.
Examples of parameter
setting
The following descriptions exemplify typical parameter setting for

polygonal turning using a serial pulse coder (with a million pulse
capability).
The parameter setting described here is not a must for polygonal
turning.
Specify typical values for parameters unless otherwise stated.
D Tool rotation axis setting
This example uses the CNCs fourth axis (connected as the Yaxis) as
a rotation tool axis for polygonal turning.
Parameter No. 7610 = 4
(controlled axis number for the tool rotation axis)
The following description assumes that the axis type parameter is set
to the fourth axis.
D Servo parameter setting
Set the servo parameters as listed below:
CMR = 1
DMR = 36/1000
486
B63003EN1/02
(With the above setting, the reference counter capacity is 36000.)

Parameter No. 1820 = 2 (CMR)
Parameter No. 1821 = 36000 (reference counter capacity)
Parameter No. 2084 = 36 (DMR numerator)
Parameter No. 2085 = 1000 (DMR denominator)
For the other servo parameters, specify typical values.
Parameter setting for polygonal turning
The least command increment, detection unit, the angle to rotate
through per rotation for the polygon axis are as follows:
L CMR
Least command increment =
Q DMR
L
Detection unit =
=
Q
DMR
DMR
Angle to rotate through per tool axis rotation
360
=
where
L: Tool axis rotation angle per motor rotation (degrees),
(360
speed increment ratio)
When the servo motor is connected directly to the rotation tool, for
example, L = 360. When the tool speed is doubled, L = 720.
Q: Number of pulses per pulse coder rotation
(For a serial pulse coder, Q = 1000000.)
The least command increment specified here is specific to the polygon
axis. It is determined regardless of what is specified in parameter No.
1004 (ISA/ISC). However, both ISA and ISC must be set to 0 for ISB
setting.
If the servo motor is connected directly to the rotation tool:
360
1
Least command increment =
36 = 0.01 (degrees)
1000000
1000
Detection unit = 0.01 (degrees)
360
= 36000
Angle to rotate through per tool axis rotation =
0.01
(degrees)
The upper limit to the tool rotation axis speed is:
Maximum servo motor speed
speed increment ratio
Therefore, if the maximum servo motor speed is 2000 rpm, and the
servo motor is directly connected to the servo motor:
Upper limit to the tool rotation axis speed = 2000
1 = 2000 (rpm)
This means the parameters must be set as follows:
No. 7620 = 36000 (angle to rotate through per tool axis rotation)
No. 7621 = 2000 (upper limit to tool rotation axis speed)
Feedrate parameter setting
Because the least command increment is 0.01 degrees, the input unit
for the feedrate is 10 degrees/min.
To obtain a rapid traverse speed of 2000 rpm, for example, specify as
follows:
487
B63003EN1/02
360
)
10
Also specify other feedrates in 10 degrees/min units.
Commands from the NC program
When the machine is not performing polygonal turning, the machining
program can issue move commands to the polygon axis.
Such commands can be issued in the same way as for ordinary axes.
However, be careful about the angle to rotate through and feedrate.
Assuming the polygon axis is the Yaxis, the polygon axis rotates
through 0.03 degrees by the following command:
V3;
Likewise, the polygon axis rotates through 10.00 degrees by the
following command:
V1.0;
The feedrate unit is also increased by tenfold.
The current position of the polygon in the machine coordinate system
is normalized according to the value specified by parameter No. 7620.
Typical values range from 0.000 to 35.999.
No. 1420 = 72000 (= 2000
Signal
Polygon synchronization
under way signal
PSYN
<F063#7>
[Function] Informs the PMC that the machine is in the polygon turning mode.
[Output condition] The polygon synchronization signal is set to logical 1 by the polygon
turning mode command (G51.2) and stays at 1 during the polygonal
turning mode.
The signal is reset to logical 0 by the polygon turning mode reset
command (G50.2) or a reset. It stays at logical 0 when the machine is
not in the polygonal turning mode.
CAUTION
This signal uses the same address for both polygonal
turning (using the servo axis) and polygonal turning with two
spindles.
Other signals (related to the tool rotation axis)
Some signals related to the CNC controlled axis used as the tool
rotation axis may be made ineffective depending on whether the
machine is in the polygonal turning mode.
For these signals, read the note in operators manual (for lathe).
Signal address
F063
#7
PSYN
#6
#5
488
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
7600
#7
PLZ
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

PLZ Synchronous axis using G28 command
0: Returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the manual
1: Returns to the reference position by positioning at a rapid traverse.
The synchronous axis returns to the reference position in the same
sequence as the manual reference position return when no
returntoreference position is performed after the power is turned
on.
7610
Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon turning
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, . . . number of control axes
This parameter sets the control axis number of a rotation tool axis used for
polygon turning.
7620
Movement of tool rotation axis per revolution
[Data type] Twoword
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
This parameter sets the movement of a tool rotation axis per revolution.
7621
Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
[Valid data range] For polygonal turning using servo motors:
0 to 1.2
108
set value of the parameter No. 7620
This parameter sets the upperlimit rotation speed of a tool rotation axis.
The rotation speed of the tool rotation axis is clamped by the set
upperlimit rotation speed during polygon turning. The spindle and tool
rotation axis go out of synchronization when the rotation speed is clamped
(P/S alarm No. 5018).
489
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
Description
217
DUPLICATE G251 (COMMANDS)
G51.2 (or G251) is further commanded in the polygonal turning mode.

Modify the program.
218
NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND IN G251
P or Q is not commanded in the

G51.2 (or the G251) block, or the
command value is out of the range.
Modify the program.
219
COMMAND G250/G251
INDEPENDENTLY
G51.2 (or G251) and G50.2 (or G250)

are not independent blocks.
220
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN
SYNCHRMODE
In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC program or PMC axis control interface for
the synchronous axis.
221
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN
SYNCHRMODE
Polygon machining synchronous operation and Cs contouring control or

balance cutting are executed at a
time. Modify the program.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Before issuing a G51.2, rotate the spindle. If it is not rotating
when the G51.2 is issued, the program stops to wait for a
onerotation signal from the position coder on the spindle.
This does not apply to a dry run.
2 A reset releases the polygonal turning mode.
3 Machine a workpiece at the same spindle speed until finish
machining for the workpiece.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.1
POLYGONAL TURNING
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.1
POLYGONAL TURNING
490
B63003EN1/02
6.10.2
Polygonal Turning with
Two Spindles
General
In the polygonal turning with two spindles, the first spindle is used as a
workpiece rotation axis (master axis). The second spindle is used as a tool
rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis). Spindle rotation control is
applied to both spindles with a constant ratio.
The polygonal turning with two spindles can use different spindle speeds
for the same workpiece, because it performs automatic phase compensation when a polygon synchronization mode command is issued or the S
command is changed during polygon synchronization mode. With this
function, it is also possible to specify the phase difference between the
master and polygon synchronization axes.
Moreover, polygonal turning works with the first and second spindles on
each tool post in a twopath lathe application. However, polygonal
turning does not work with spindles on different tool posts.
Command format
The CNC command format for polygonal turning with two spindles is
described below. For the CNC command format for polygonal turning
(see Section 6.10.1), refer to the operators manual (for lathe). The two
formats are almost identical. The differences are in that the polygonal
turning with two spindles can specify a phase command (R) and reissue
commands.
Mode command and

command value change
G51.2 P_Q_R_;
This command starts the polygon synchronization mode or changes the

values specified for the polygon synchronization mode.
P: Master axis (first spindle) rotation ratio
Range of command value: Integer 1 to 999
(The direction in which the master axis rotates depends on the
commands (such as M03 and M04) issued under ordinary spindle
control.)
Q: Polygon synchronization axis (second spindle) rotation ratio
Range of command value: Integers 1 to 999 and 1 to 999
(The direction in which the polygon synchronization axis rotates
depends on the algebraic sign of the Q value, except when bit 1
(GDRC) of parameter No. 7603 = 1, in which case the polygon
synchronization axis rotates in the same direction as the first spindle.
In this case, Q cannot take a negative value.)
R: Relative phase difference between the master and polygon
synchronization axes
The range of command value and the increment system are the same
as for the rotation axis. However, the angle to rotate through is in
360/4096 degrees units.
(R is omissible. If it is not specified at all, the phase difference is
assumed to be 0. If bit 5 (PCOF) of parameter No. 7602 = 1 to disable
phase control, the R command is ignored, but no alarm condition is
assumed.)
491
B63003EN1/02
The G51.2 command is modal. Once specified, the P, Q, and R values stay
unchanged until another G51.2 is issued to change them or polygon
synchronized mode is released.
The S command issued to the first spindle during polygon synchronization mode specifies that the second spindle be used as a polygon synchronization axis and rotates at a speed of S
Q/P with a phase difference
of R.
Release command
G50.2
This command releases the polygon synchronization mode. This mode

is released also when:
(1) Reset
(That mode is not released by bit 0 (RPLM) of parameter No. 7603.)
(2) Power is turning off.
(3) An alarm condition occurs in the spindle control unit, and the serial
spindle control unit stops in an emergency on the PMC signals
*ESPA<G0071#1> and *ESPB<G0075#1>.
(4) P/S alarm 218, 219, or 221 occurs
Cautions for using

commands
G51.2 and G50.2 must be issued separately from other commands.

In a G51.2 issued to enter the polygon synchronization mode, R is
omissible, but P and Q are required.
After a G51.2 is issued to enter the polygon synchronization mode,
changing modal values of P, Q, and R requires another G51.2. In this case,
R can be specified separately from P and Q. However, P and Q must be
specified together even if only one of them is changed.
Spindle operation during

the spindlespindle
polygon synchronization
mode
When a G51.2 is issued to start the spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode, the speed of the spindle (polygon synchronization axis) is
changed to Q/P times the speed of the first spindle (master axis) to achieve
a speed ratio of P:Q, and phase adjustment is performed.
(If no S command is issued to the first spindle after a G51.2, the previous
S command remains effective.)
If the spindle is in an acceleration, deceleration, or phase adjustment state,
synchronization at a rotation ratio of P:Q is not guaranteed. So, it is
necessary to control SAR<G0029#4> by checking the speed arrival
signal PSAR<F0063#2> for polygonal turning with two spindles or to
allow sufficient time in the program.
The method to specify the spindle speed during the polygon synchronization mode is the same as for ordinary modes. However, each time an S
command is issued to the first spindle during polygon synchronization
mode, or a rotation ratio P:Q or phase value R command is respecified
during the polygon synchronization mode, phase adjustment is performed
after speed control. In addition, speed commands (such as under multispindle control or spindle output control for the second spindle by the
PMC) for the second spindle become ineffective.
If the specified polygon synchronization axis speed (S
Q/P for the
first spindle at S rpm) exceeds the clamp speed specified in parameter No.
7621, the polygon synchronization axis speed is clamped, and P/S alarm
No. 5018 is issued.
492
B63003EN1/02
Each time the spindle speed command for the first spindle changes or P
and Q are respecified in a G51.2, the clamp speed is checked to
determine whether to issue P/S alarm No. 5018.
Note that a reset can clear the alarm with the speed clamped.
(A rotation speed ratio of P:Q cannot be maintained with the speed
clamped. Bit 2 (QCL) of DGN No. 471 indicates whether the speed is
clamped.)
PMC sequence
Although this function is based on the Gcode system, it is necessary to

add or change PMC ladder sequences because control on the part of the
spindle is also required (See signals in Section 6.10.2).
Example of polygonal
turning with two spindles
This example of polygonal turning with two spindles produces a square

using singleedged cutting tools (for roughing and finishing).
M j;
Tff ;
G00
X100. Z20. M03 S1000
;
.
.
Step 1.
Step 2.
Mount a roughing tool on the polygon synchronization axis (second spindle as tool
rotation axis).
Rotate the workpiece (with the first spindle
as the master axis at 1000 rpm)
G51. 2 P1 Q2 ;
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Step 3.
Start rotating the tool.

Energize the second spindle in response to
the polygon synchronization under way signal using the PMC ladder.
After accelerating the second spindle as the
polygon synchronization axis to 2000 rpm,
perform phase adjustment (Execute R0 to
omit an R value.).
By checking PSYC<F0063#7>, the PMC
ladder can detect when the polygon synchronization mode is entered. During the
polygon synchronization mode, the PMC
ladder controls SAR<G0029#4> based on
the speed arrival signal PSAR<F0063#2>
during the polygon synchronization mode.
G01 X80. F10. ;

.
.
Step 4.
Starts cutting along the Xaxis after

SAR<G0029#4> becomes logical 1 in signal control at step 3.
G04 P4000 ;
.
Step 5.
Polygonal turning (roughing 1)
G00 X100. ;
.
Step 6.
Retract the tool along the Xaxis.
G51. 2 R180 ;
.
Step 7.
Change the phase by 180 degrees.
[Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6.]

.
Step 8.
Polygonal turning (roughing 2)
G50. 2 ;
Mj ;
T jj ;
.
Step 9.
Release the polygon synchronization mode.

Change to a finishing tool.
493
B63003EN1/02
Step 10. Change the spindle speed for finishing

(master axis at 2000 rpm and polygon synchronization axis at 4000 rpm with a phase
difference of 0).
G51. 2 P1 Q2 ;
S2000;
.
.
Step 11. Polygonal turning (finishing 1)
Step 12. Change the phase by 180 degrees.
[Repeat step 7.]

.
Step 13. Polygonal turning (finishing 2)

.
.
Step 14. Release the polygon synchronization mode.

The polygon synchronization axis (second
spindle as tool rotation axis) stops. The
first spindle rotates at a speed specified by
an S command.
Step 15. The first spindle stops (end).
G50. 2 ;
.
.
.
M05;
.
.
Diagnosis display (DGN)
For polygonal turning with two spindles, the following information is

displayed on the diagnosis display screen.
Polygonal turning with two spindles Indication of information about the
polygon synchronization mode
DGN
470
#7
SC0
#6
LGE
#5
#4
SCF
#3
#2
#1
PST
#0
SPL
SPL Spindlespindle polygon synchronization under way

PST Spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode being activated
#2 Spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode released
#3 Spindle speed being changed during spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode
SCF Spindle speed changed during spindlespindle polygon synchronization
mode
#5 Not used
LGE The loop gain is different between the spindles during spindlespindle
polygon synchronization mode.
SC0 Actual speed command is 0 during spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode.
494
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
1 DGN indicates the loop gain because this function requires
that both spindles be controlled with the same loop gain.
However, no alarm is issued even if the loop gain is different
between the spindles.
(For the serial spindle control unit, the parameters used are
changed according to the state of the CTH1 and CTH2
signals.)
2 SC0 is not a value specified by the program. It is set to 1
under any of the following conditions:
1. When the S command value is adjusted according to the
signals related to spindle control, SSTP<G0029#6> and
SOV0 SOV7<G0030> and the signal related to
multispindle control <G0027>, the result is 0.
2. The S command value is smaller than the spindle control
resolution (the result of multiplying the S command value
by a value of 4095/(maximum spindle speed) is less than
1).
The S command value is specified by SIND control
<G0032, G0033>, and it is 0.
If SC0 = 1, the spindle speed becomes 0 and bit 0 of DGN
No. 471 becomes 1.
In this case, the polygon
synchronization rotation ratio is impractical, but P/S alarm
No. 5018 does not occurs, because it is regarded as the
result of the command.
NOTE
1 The normal state during spindlespindle polygonal turning
is: SPL = 1, SCF = 1, #1 = 0, #2 = 0, and #3 = 0
2 If only PST becomes 1, but no change occurs, and the
program stops in a block containing a G51.2 command, the
speed of an spindle does not reach the targeted polygon
synchronization speed, for example, because bit 7 (PST) of
parameter No. 7603 = 0 keeps the spindle from being
energized.
3 When the speed is changed during polygon
synchronization mode, LGE is set to 1 if the spindle
synchronization control loop gain used by the serial spindle
control unit is different between the first and second
spindles.
Polygonal turning with two spindles Indication of causes for P/S alarms
5018 and 218
DGN
471
#7
NPQ
#6
PQE
#5
#4
NSP
#3
SUO
#2
QCL
#1
PCL
#0
#0 to #3 Causes for P/S alarm No. 5018

P/S alarm No. 5018 is cleared by a reset, but the indication of its causes
remains until the causes are cleared or the polygon synchronization mode
is released.
495
B63003EN1/02
#4 to #7 Causes for P/S alarm No. 218

When P/S alarm No. 218 occurs, the polygon synchronization mode is
released, but the indication of its causes remains until the alarm is cleared
by a reset.
#0 The specified speed is too low during spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode. (The unit of speed calculated internally becomes 0.)
PCL The first spindle (polygon synchronization master axis) is clamped.
QCL The second spindle (polygon synchronization axis) is clamped.
SUO The specified speed is too high during the spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode. (It is clamped to the upper limit calculated internally.)
NSP A spindle necessary for control is not connected. (For example, there is
not a serial spindle or the second spindle.)
#5 When bit 1 (QDRC) of parameter No. 7603 = 1, a negative value is specified at Q.
PQE In a G51.2, either P or Q has a value out of the specifiable range.
Or, P and Q are not specified as a pair.
NPQ In a G51.2, R is specified when P and Q have not been specified at all, or
none of P, Q, and R has been specified.
CAUTION
#0 becomes 1 also when the specified spindle speed is 0
(DGN 470#7 = 1). In this case, however, P/S alarm No. 5018
is not issued (because the command is 0). When DGN
470#7 = 0 and DGN 471#0 = 1, P/S alarm No. 5018 occurs.
Normally this does not occur with speed at which the spindle
can rotate.
NOTE
1 PCL indicates that the master axis has received a command
with a speed that is higher than the value specified by the
maximum first spindle speed parameters (No. 3741 to 3744)
and is clamped to that speed. PCL will not become 1 as long
as the first spindle is connected correctly.
2 QCL becomes 1, when the second spindle (polygon
synchronization axis) receives a command with a polygon
synchronization speed that is higher than the value
specified in parameter No. 7621 and is clamped at that
speed.
3 SUO occurs, if a result of (speed specified for the first
spindle)/(value specified at P) is higher than 59998. In other
words, the first spindle must rotate at a speed lower than
59998 rpm assuming P = 1.
496
B63003EN1/02
Indication of values specified during the spindlespindle polygon

synchronization mode
DGN
474
Rotation ratio for the master axis during the spindlespindle polygon
synchronization mode (P command value)
This indication is the current rotation ratio (P command value) of the master axis (first spindle) during the spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode.
DGN
475
Rotation ratio for the polygon synchronization axis during the spindlespindle
polygon synchronization mode (Q command value)
This indication is the current rotation ratio (Q command value) of the

polygon synchronization axis (second spindle) during the spindle
spindle polygon synchronization mode.
DGN
476
Phase difference between the two spindles under spindlespindle

polygon synchronization control (R command value)
This indication is the current phase value (R command value) specified

during the spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode. (The unit of
measurement is the least increment system for the rotation axis of the
machine.)
However, if bit 5 (RDGN) of parameter No. 7603 = 1, the indication is
the amount of shifting specified for the serial spindle (number of pulses
after conversion is performed assuming 360 degrees = 4096 pulses).
Indication of the actual speed of each spindle during the spindlespindle
DGN
477
Actual master axis speed (rpm) during the spindlespindle

This indication is the actual speed of the master axis (first spindle) during
the spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode.
DGN
478
Actual polygon synchronization axis speed (rpm) during

the spindlespindle polygon synchronization mode
This indication is the actual speed of the polygon synchronization axis

(second spindle) during the spindlespindle polygon synchronization
mode.
NOTE
The indications of DGN No. 477 and 478 vary because of
no sampling being performed. Consider these DGN values
only guidelines.
497
B63003EN1/02
Signal
under way signal
PSYN<F063#7>
[Function] Informs the PMC that the system is in the polygon synchronization mode.
[Output condition] The polygon synchronization mode command (G51.2) sets this signal to
logical 1. It stays at 1 as long as the system is in the polygon synchronization mode. It is turned to 0 when the polygon synchronization
mode is cleared (G50.2 command or a reset). It stays at 0 when the system is not in the polygon synchronization mode.
NOTE
The same address is used for this signal in both polygonal
turning (using the servo axis) and the polygonal turning with
two spindles.
Polygon spindle stop

signal *PLSST<G038#0>
[Function] This function is enabled when bit 7 (PST) of parameter No. 7603 = 1. This
signal is used to stop the spindle during the polygonal turning mode with
two spindles.
0 = polygon spindle stop
1 = polygon spindle operable
During the polygonal turning mode with two spindles, the spindles are
controlled with a positional loop set up. When issuing a spindle stop
command (like M05) to deenergize the spindle, it is necessary to specify S
= 0 using *SSTP<G00296#6>. Otherwise the stop command remains
effective even after the spindle is deenergized. This error accumulates and
causes a dangerous behavior of the spindle when it is energized again.
This signal is intended to inhibit distribution of the S command to the
spindle if it cannot be set to 0 while the spindle is deenergized. In such a
case, the signal should be used in step with the energizing state of the
polygon spindle.
498
B63003EN1/02
Spindle polygonal speed

arrival signal
PSAR<F063#2>
[Function] Informs the PMC that the spindle has reached its constantspeed for
polygon synchronization during polygonal turning with two spindles.
[Output condition] During polygonal turning mode with two spindles, whether the constant
speed is reached for polygon synchronization is output as shown below:
0 = not reached (during phase change or acceleration/deceleration
under way)
1 = reached
During the polygon control mode, this signal becomes logical 1 when
the speed of each spindle reaches the acceptable level specified in
parameter No. 7631 and remains there for a period specified in parameter
No. 7632.
If the speed of either spindle goes off the acceptable level, or a change is
made to the S command, the signal returns to logical 0 and begins
monitoring the above condition.
When this signal is 0, the specified speed ratio and phase are not
guaranteed for polygonal turning. If the signal is confirmed before actual
turning is started, however, the operation is more efficient than when a
dwell command (like G04) is used to allow wait time.
Master axis not arrival

signal
PSE1<F063#0>
axis not arrival signal
PSE2<F063#1>
[Function] Informs the PMC whether the actual speed of each spindle has reached the
specified speed during polygonal turning mode with two spindles.
[Output condition] During polygonal turning mode with two spindles, whether each spindle
has reached the polygon synchronization speed is output as shown below:
0 = reached
1 = not reached (during phase change or acceleration/deceleration
under way)
During the polygon control mode, this signal becomes logical 1 when
the speed of master axis (first spindle) and polygon synchronization axis
(second spindle) does not reach the acceptable level specified in
parameter No. 7631.
499
PMC sequence
B63003EN1/02
When a G51.2 is issued to put the system in the polygon synchronization

mode, the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN<F063#7>
becomes on.
Set up a PMC sequence for the polygon synchronization mode by
monitoring this signal with a PMC ladder.
There are two control methods, (A) and (B), to control energizing of the
spindle. First select (A) or (B) and creates a PMC sequence according to
the selected method.
Method A
(A)Energize the first and second spindles automatically during the G51.2
mode.
Basically, do not discontinue energizing during this mode.
In this case, keep bit 7 (PST) of parameter No. 7603 = 0.
In the PMC sequence, detect when the polygon synchronization
under way signal PSYN<F063#7> changes from 0 to 1, then
energize the first and second spindles.
The NC stops at the G51.2 command block which puts the system
in the polygon synchronization mode, and remains there until the
spindle reaches the polygon synchronization speed.
Also, keep the spindle energized, for example, by preventing it
from receiving a spindle stop command (like M05) for ordinary
spindle control while PSYN<F063#7> = 1. Basically, deenergize
the spindle when the polygon synchronization under way signal
PSYN<F063#7> changes from 1 to 0.
Method B
(B)Control the energizing of the spindle using M codes even during the
G51.2 mode. Alternatively, deenergize the spindle even during the
G51.2
In this case, keep bit 7 (PST) of parameter No. 7603 = 1.
This parameter setting enables use of the spindle stop signal
*PLSST<G038#0> during the polygon synchronization mode. It
also makes the G51.2 command block stop waiting for the spindle
to reach the polygon synchronization speed.
In the PMC sequence, while the polygon synchronization under
way signal PSYN<F063#7> = 1, set *PLSST<G038#0> to 1 after
confirming both first spindle and second spindles are energized.
If either spindle has been deenergized, reset *PLSST<G038#0> to
0.
When the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN
<F063#7> changes from 1 to 0, basically keep *PLSST <G038#0>
at 0. (This is intended to keep *PLSST <G038#0> from becoming
1 in a deenergized state when the polygon synchronization mode
is entered again.)
When *PLSST <G038#0> changes from 0 to 1 during the polygon
synchronization mode, the spindle is accelerated from a stop state
to the specified speed and placed under phase control, even if the
S command has not been changed.
500
B63003EN1/02
Sequence common to methods (A) and (B)

Regardless of whether the method you use is (A) or (B), set up the PMC
sequence as follows:
Do not use the SFR/SRV signal to switch the rotation direction of the
first spindle. Instead, fix the energizing method of the spindle at SFR
and change the polarity of the command. (To change the polarity of
the command, issue M03/M04 with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.
3706 = 1, or control SGN<G033#5> with SSIN<G033#6> = 1.)
Also fix the energizing method of the second spindle at SFR.
To check whether the spindle has reached its constantspeed, control
SAR<G029#4> using PSAR<F063#2>.
PSAR<F063#2> can be used to check whether both spindles have
reached the conditions specified in parameter Nos. 7631 and 7632
after completion of phase control. Checking the speed arrival signal
for each spindle (SARA<F045#3> and SARB<F049#3>) cannot
guarantee proper cutting start conditions, because phase control may
occur afterward.
The specification (parameter No. 3740) of time allowed before the
spindle constantspeed reached signal is checked remains valid until
after execution of the G51.2 command.
If you are not using SAR<G029#4> as the cutting feed start condition,
start cutting after allowing time using the program (like G04) for both
spindles to reach their constant speeds, when the polygon
synchronization mode is entered and each time the S command is
changed during the polygon synchronization mode.
It is impossible to rotate the second spindle separately from the first
spindle and to use the spindle orientation function
(ORCMA<G070#6>,
ORCMB<G074#6>)
during
polygon
synchronization mode with two spindles. Basically, do not perform
gear change, tool change, or workpiece change during the polygon
synchronization mode. Have the PMC reject such commands and
output a message prompting to release the twospindle polygon
synchronization mode, as required.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#5
#4
#3
#2
PSAR
#1
PSE2
G038
F063
#7
PSYN
#6
501
#0
*PLSST
#0
PSE1
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
7602
#5
COF
#4
HST
#3
HSL
#2
HDR
#1
SNG
#0
MNG
[Data type] Bit

MNG The rotational direction of the master axis (first spindle) in the
spindlespindle polygon turning mode is:
0: Not reversed.
1: Reversed.
SNG The rotational direction of the polygon synchronization axis (second
spindle) in the spindlespindle polygon turning mode is:
0: Not reversed.
1: Reversed.
HDR When phase control is exercised in spindlespindle polygon turning
mode (COF = 0), the phase shift direction is:
0: Not reversed for phase synchronization.
1: Reversed for phase synchronization.
NOTE
Use MNG, SNG, and HDR when the specified rotational
direction of the master axis or polygon synchronization axis,
or the specified phase shift direction is to be reversed in
spindlespindle polygon turning mode.
HSL When phase control is exercised in spindlespindle polygon turning

mode (COF = 0), this parameter selects the spindle that is subject to a
phase shift operation for phase synchronization:
0: The polygon synchronization axis (second spindle) is selected.
1: The master axis (first spindle) is selected.
HST When phase control is applied in spindlespindle polygon turning mode
(COF = 0), and spindlespindle polygon turning mode is specified:
0: Spindlespindle polygon turning mode is entered with the current
spindle speed maintained.
1: Spindlespindle polygon turning mode is entered after the spindle is
stopped.
NOTE
This parameter can be used, for example, when
singlerotation signal detection cannot be guaranteed at an
arbitrary feedrate because a separate detector is installed
to detect the spindle singlerotation signal, as when a
builtin spindle is used. (When bit 7 of parameter No. 4016
for the serial spindle is set to 1, together with this parameter,
a
singlerotation
signal
detection
position
in
spindlespindle polygon turning mode is guaranteed.)
502
B63003EN1/02
COF In spindlespindle polygon turning mode, phase control is:

0: Used.
1: Not used.
CAUTION
When the use of phase control is not selected, the steady
state is reached in a shorter time because phase
synchronization control is not applied. Once steady rotation
is achieved, however, polygonal turning must be completed
without changing the steady state. (If the rotation is
stopped, or the rotational speed altered, polygonal turning
is disabled because of the inevitable phase shift.)
Setting this parameter to 1 does not issue an alarm on the
R command (phase command) in the same block as the
G51.2. It is only ignored.
7603
#7
PST
#6
#5
RDG
#4
#3
#2
#1
QDR
#0
RPL
[Data type] Bit

RPL Upon reset, spindlespindle polygon turning mode is:
0 : Released.
1 : Not released.
QDR The rotational direction of the polygon synchronization axis:
0 : Depends on the sign (+/* ) of a specified value for Q.
1 : Depends on the rotational direction of the first spindle. (If
cified for Q, P/S alarm No. 218 is issued.)
* is spe-
RDG On the diagnosis screen No. 476, for spindlespindle polygon phase
command value (R), displays:
0 : The specified value (in the increment system for the rotation axis).
1 : The actual number of shift pulses.
NOTE
A phase command is specified in address R, in units of
degrees. For control, the actual shift amount is converted
to a number of pulses according to the conversion formula:
360 degrees = 4096 pulses. This parameter switches the
display of a specified value to that of a converted value.
PST The polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST (bit 0 of G038) is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
503
7621
B63003EN1/02
Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
[Valid data range] For polygon turning with two spindles:
Set a value between 0 and 32767, but which does not exceed the
maximum allowable speed, as determined by the performance of the
second spindle and other mechanical factors.
This parameter sets the maximum allowable speed of the tool rotation axis
(polygon synchronization axis).
If the speed of the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
exceeds the specified maximum allowable speed during polygon turning,
the speed is clamped at the maximum allowable speed. When the speed
is clamped at a maximum allowable speed, however, synchronization
between the spindle and tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis)
is lost. And, when the speed is clamped, P/S alarm No. 5018 is issued.
7631
Allowable spindle speed deviation level in spindlespindle polygon turning
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] rpm
[Standard setting value] 1 to 10
This parameter sets the allowable level of deviation between the actual
speed and specified speed of each spindle in spindlespindle polygon
turning. The value set with this parameter is used for both the master axis
and polygon synchronization axis.
7632
Steady state confirmation time duration in spindle polygon turning
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter sets the duration required to confirm that both spindles
have reached their specified speeds in spindlespindle polygon turning.
If the state where the speed of each spindle is within the range set with
parameter No. 7631, and has lasted at least for the duration specified with
parameter No. 7632, the spindle polygon speed arrival signal PSAR (bit 2
of F0063) is set to 1.
504
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
218
NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND IN G251
Description
The G51.2 block does not contain P or Q,

or a specified value is invalid.
The causes of this alarm are detailed in
DGN No. 471. (See below.)
DGN No. 471#7 NPQ

When P and Q are not specified at all, R
is specified. Alternatively, none of P, Q,
and R has been specified.
DGN No. 471#6 PQE

P or Q is out of the valid data range. Alternatively, P and Q are not specified as a
pair.
DGN No. 471#5
A negative value is specified at Q when
bit 1 (QDRC) of parameter No. 7603 = 1.
DGN No. 471#4 NSP

There is no spindle necessary for control.
(The spindle is not a serial spindle, or there
is not the second spindle, etc.)
219
COMMAND G250/G251 INDEPENDENTLY
G51.2/G251 and G50.1/G250 are specified

together with other commands in the same
block. Correct the program.
221
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN
SYNCHRO
An attempt was made to perform polygon

synchronization operation together with Cs
contouring control or balance cutting. Alternatively the program issued a command for
spindlespindle polygon synchronization
mode, when the spindle is under spindle
synchronization control, Cs contouring control, spindle positioning control, or rigid tapping control, etc.
Correct the program.
POLYGON SPINDLE SPEED

ERROR
The specified rotation ratio cannot be maintained during the G51.2 mode, because the
speed of the spindle or polygon synchronization axis exceeds the clamping value or
is too low.
The causes of this alarm are detailed in
DGN No. 471. (See below.)
5018
DGN No. 471#3 SUO

The specified speed is too high.
DGN No. 471#2 QCL

The polygon synchronization axis (second spindle) is clamped.
DGN No. 471#1 PCL
The master axis (first spindle) is
clamped.
DGN No. 471#0
The specified speed is too low.
(Remark)
In a properly connected machine, P/S alarm No. 5018 does not basically
occur for other than a reason that the polygon synchronization axis is
clamped. (See descriptions of DGN for details.)
505
B63003EN1/02
To the contrary to P/S alarm No. 221, P/S alarm No. 194 occurs if
another NC control spindle function is specified during the twospindle
polygon synchronization mode.
Caution
CAUTION
1 The maximum spindle speed for each gear stage (No. 3741
to 3744) must be specified correctly according to the model
of the machine. In addition, ordinary spindle connections
must have been terminated.
2 This function uses the onerotation signal for the spindle as
a reference point for phase adjustment.
When a builtin sensor is used, and there are gears
between the spindle and spindle motor, it is necessary to
install a detector on the spindle separately to take a
onerotation signal from the spindle. If the detector does
not guarantee detection of a correct position from arbitrary
speed, set bit 4 (PHST) of parameter No. 7602 and bit 7 of
serial spindle parameter No. 4016 to 1. This setting reduces
the spindle speed automatically down to 0 for spindle
position detection each time the spindlespindle polygonal
turning mode is entered, thus guaranteeing a correct phase
relationship during spindlespindle polygon synchronization
mode.
3 This function uses the spindle synchronization function for
serial spindles. (However, it does not require the spindle
synchronization option for the CNC.) You may need to
specify the relevant serial spindle parameters (such as Nos.
4032 to 4035).
Specify the same serial spindle loop gain for both spindles.
If the same serial spindle loop gain is not used for both
spindles, polygonal turning may not be accurate.
If an attempt is made to perform spindlespindle polygonal
turning, DGN 470#6 LGE becomes 1. (No alarm is issued.)
4 Before using the polygon synchronization mode, place both
first and second spindles in the spindle control mode. The
polygon synchronization mode cannot be used if they are
already in other modes (Cs contouring control mode or
spindle orientation mode, etc.).
5 During the polygon synchronization mode, the speed of the
second spindle cannot be controlled independently of the
speed of the first spindle.
During the polygon synchronization mode, the spindle
orientation function (ORCMA<G070#6>, ORCMB<G074#6>)
cannot be used for either the first spindle or second spindle.
Therefore, gear, tool or workpiece change is basically
unusable during the polygon synchronization mode.
506
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
6 During polygon synchronization mode, speed change and
phase adjustment are performed each time the spindle
speed is changed. Therefore, this mode cannot be used
together with a function that causes continuous spindle
speed change (such as G96 constant surface speed
control)
7 During the polygon synchronization mode, the rotation ratio
between the master axis and polygon synchronization axis
is controlled with priority. Therefore, the difference between
the master axis speed and S command value may become
larger than during ordinary spindle control. (The master axis
speed may be up to 2 rpm lower than specified.)
Note
NOTE
1 During the polygon synchronization mode, phase control is
performed in the least command increment of 36/4096 =
0.08789...(degrees) in reference to the onerotation signal
for each spindle. Actually, a command value out of a range
from 0 to 359.999... is meaningless because the relative
phase is controlled within one rotation of each spindle.
However, this function does not limit the R command value
and the CNC converts the R command value to a value
below 360 degrees.
2 The G51.2 command during conversational function is
equivalent to the G50.2 command. (The system does not
enter the polygon synchronization mode. If it is already in
the polygon synchronization mode, release it using a G51.2
command.)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.1
POLYGONAL TURNING
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.19.1
POLYGONAL TURNING
507
B63003EN1/02
6.11
NORMAL DIRECTION
CONTROL
(M SERIES)
General
When a tool with a rotation axis (Caxis) is moved in the XY plane during
cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that
the Caxis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 6.11).
Caxis
Caxis
Tool
Tool
Normal direction (in

which the tool moves)
Fig. 6.11 Sample Movement of the tool
Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executed

at the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at that time,
the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along the Xand
Yaxes in rapid traverse (G00) mode, the rapid traverse rate is applied.
If the federate of the C axis exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate of the
C axis specified to parameter No. 1422, the federate of each of the other
axes is clamped to keep the federate of the C axis below the maximum
cutting feedrate of the C axis.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1006
#4
#3
#2
#1
ROSx
#0
ROTx
NOTE
508
B63003EN1/02
[Valid data range] ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis

ROSx
ROTx
Description
Linear axis
@ Inch/metric conversion is done.
@ All coordinate values are linear axis type.

@ Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
@ Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_

Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are
rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0 and #2.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to
parameter No. 3624)
@ Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the

reference position return direction and the move amount does
not exceed one rotation.
@ Machine coordinate values is linear axis type (is not rounded in

0 to 360_).
@ Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are

rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008#0 and #2.
@ Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624).
@ Cannot be used with the rotation axes roll over function and the
index table indexing function (M series).
NOTE
The rotation axis must be set to the normal direction control
axis.
5480
Number of the axis for controlling the normal direction
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 to the maximum control axis number
This parameter sets the control axis number of the axis for controlling the
normal direction.
5481
Rotation feedrate of normal direction control axis
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 deg/min
This parameter sets the feedrate of a normal direction control axis that is
inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control.
509
5482
B63003EN1/02
Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis
[Data type] Twoword

Rotation axis
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
The rotation block of a normal direction control axis is not inserted when
the rotation insertion angle calculated during normal direction control
does not exceed this setting value. The ignored rotation angle is added to
the next rotation insertion angle. The block insertion is then judged.
NOTE
1 No rotation block is inserted when 360 or more degrees are
set.
2 If 180 or more degrees are set, a rotation block is inserted
only when the circular interpolation is 180 or more degrees.
5483
Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of

a preceding block
[Data type] Twoword
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the limit value of movement at the normal direction
angle of a preceding block.
N2
Tool center path
N1
For straight line

Block N2 is machined with the tool being normal
to block N1 when the movement of N2 in the
figure on the left does not exceed the set value.
N3
Movement
Programmed path

N2
Tool center path
Programmed path
N3
N1
Diameter
510
For arc
Arc N2 is machined with the tool being normal
to block N1 when the arc diameter of N2 in the
figure on the left does not exceed the setting
value. A normal direction axis is not controlled
to move in the normal direction according to
the arc movement.
B63003EN1/02
1422
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
[Valid data range]
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 240000
6 96000
IS-C
6 100000
6 48000

NOTE
Note
NOTE
The helical interpolation option is required to use this
function. Helical interpolation cannot be specified in the
normal direction control mode.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.14.11
Normal Direction Control
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.14.9
Normal Direction Control
511
B63003EN1/02
6.12
EXPONENTIAL
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
General
Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a

workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore,
exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect to
another axis. This enables tapered groove machining with a constant
helix angle (constant helix taper machining). This function is best suited
for grooving and grinding tools such as end mills.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5630
#0
SPN
[Data type] Bit type

SPN The amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential
interpolation is:
0 : Specified with parameter No. 5643.
1 : Specified using address K in a block containing G02.3/G03.3. When
address K is not specified, the value set with parameter No. 5643 is
used.
5641
Linear axis number subject to exponential interpolation

This parameter sets the ordinal number, among the controlled axes, for the
linear axis to which exponential interpolation is applied.
5642
Rotation axis number subject exponential interpolation

This parameter sets the ordinal number, among the controlled axes, for the
rotation axis to which exponential interpolation is applied.
512
B63003EN1/02
5643
Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation
[Data type] 2word type

[Valid data range]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the amount of linear axis division in exponential

interpolation when bit 0 (SPN) of parameter No. 5630 is set to 0.
Alarm and message

No.
Message
Contents
5060
ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN
G02.3/G03.3
Parameter setting is illegal.

No. 5641 (setting of the linear axis) is not specified.
No. 5641 specifies an axis other than a linear axis.
No. 5642 (setting of the rotation axis) is not specified.
No. 5642 specifies an axis other than a rotation axis.
The CNC cannot control the linear or rotation axis (the value of No.
1010 is exceeded).
5061
ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.3/G03.3
The command for exponential interpolation (G02.3/G03.3) contains a

format error.
Address I, J, or K is not specified.
Addresses I, J, and K are 0.
5062
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN
G02.3/G03.3
The command for exponential interpolation (G02.3/G03.3) contains

an illegal value.
The specified value is not suitable for exponential interpolation (for
example, a negative value is subject to ln).
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
513
II.4.11
Exponential interpolation
B63003EN1/02
6.13
SMOOTH
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
General
Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the

program command.
D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as
at corners, machining is performed exactly as specified by the program
command.
D For those portions having a large radius of curvature where a smooth
figure must becreated, points along the machining path are
interpolated with a smooth curve, calculated from the polygonal lines
specified with the program command (smooth interpolation).
Smooth interpolation can be specified when CDSP (bit 5 of parameter No.
8485) is set to 1 in highspeed contour control mode (between G05
P10000 and G05 P0). Smooth interpolation performed in highspeed
contour control mode is described below. For details of highspeed
contour control, see subsec 7.1.14.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
CDS
8485
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

CDS 0 : Disables smooth interpolation in HPCC mode.
1 : Enables smooth interpolation in HPCC mode.
To apply smooth interpolation, be sure to set this parameter to 1.
8486
Maximum travel distance of a block where smooth interpolation is applied
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] Least input increment (depending on the set reference axis)
This parameter specifies a block length used as a reference to decide
whether to apply smooth interpolation. If the line specified in a block is
longer than the value set in the parameter, smooth interpolation will not
be applied to that block. This parameter can be used, for example, to
specify the maximum line length of a folded line to which a metal die
workpiece is approximated with some tolerance.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
5085
SMOOTH IPL ERROR 1
514
Description
A block for specifying smooth interpolation contains a syntax error.
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
515
II.4.12
Smooth interpolation
B63003EN1/02
6.14
HYPONENTIAL AXIS
INTERPOLATION
General
In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the

circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is
enable.
When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a hypothetical axis,
pulse distribution causes the speed of movement along the remaining axis
to change sinusoidally. If the major axis for threading (the axis along
which the machine travels the longest distance) is set to a hypothetical
axis, threading with a fractional lead is enabled. The axis to be set as the
hypothetical axis is specified with G07.
p
0
2p
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.14
Hyponential axis interpolation
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.7
Hyponential axis interpolation
516
B63003EN1/02
6.15
HELICAL
INTERPOLATION B
(M SERIES)
General
Helical interpolation B moves the tool helically. This interpolation can

be executed by specifying the circular interpolation command together
with up to four additional axes in simple highprecision contour control
mode.
Basically, the command can be specified by adding two movement axes
to a standard helical interpolation command. Address F should be
followed by a tangential velocity, determined by also taking movement
along the linear axes into consideration.
Tool path
The feedrate equals the tangential velocity determined by also

taking movement along the linear axes into consideration.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
517
II.4.6
Helical interpolation B
B63003EN1/02
6.16
SPIRAL
INTERPOLATION,
CONICAL
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
General
Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation

command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired
increment (decrement) for the radius per revolution.
Conical interpolation is enabled by specifying the spiral interpolation
command together with one or two additional axes of movement, as well
as a desired increment (decrement) for the position along the additional
axes per spiral revolution.
Spiral interpolation and conical interpolation do not support bellshaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed.
Spiral interpolation
+Y
+X
Conical interpolation
+Z
+X
518
+Y
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3471
Allowable difference between the specified end point and that calculated from
the increment (or decrement) and number of revolutions,
for spiral or conical interpolation
[Data type] Twoword
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Sets the maximum allowable value for the difference (absolute value)
between the specified end point and that calculated from the increment (or
decrement) and number of revolutions, for spiral or conical interpolation.
3472
Minimum radius with which the actual feedrate is

maintained for spiral or conical interpolation
[Data type] Twoword
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
[Valid data range] 1000 to 99999999 (metric input)

10000 to 99999999 (inch input)
If this parameter is set to 0 or a value that falls outside the valid data range,
the minimum value in the valid data range is assumed.
Spiral and conical interpolation usually maintain a constant feedrate.
Near the center of the spiral, however, the radius is very small, such that
applying a constant feedrate would cause the angular velocity to become
very high. To prevent this, the angular velocity is regulated to a constant
value once the radius of the spiral has decreased to the value specified with
the parameter. As a result, the actual feedrate decreases.
519
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
5122
Description
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN
SPIRAL
An invalid command has been specified for spiral or conical interpolation.

The most likely causes are as follows:
1) L = 0 specified
2) Q = 0 specified
3) R/, R/, C specified
4) Height increment of 0 specified
5) More than three height axes specified

6) Height increment specified together with two height axes
7) Conical interpolation specified
when the helical interpolation option is not being used
8) Q < 0 specified when the radius
difference > 0
9) Q > 0 specified when the radius
difference < 0
10) Height increment specified without

specifying a height axis
5123
OVER TOLERANCE OF
END POINT
The difference between the specified

end point and calculated end point exceeds the allowable range (parameter
No. 3471).
5124
CAN NOT COMMAND

SPIRAL
Spiral or conical interpolation has

been specified in any of the following
modes:
1) Scaling
2) Programmable mirror image
3) Polar coordinate interpolation
Alternatively, in cutter compensation

mode C, the center coincides with the
start or end point.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
520
II.4.7
Spiral interpolation, conical

interpolation
B63003EN1/02
6.17
NURBS
INTERPOLATION
(M SERIES)
General
Many computeraided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies

for automobiles and airplanes utilize nonuniform rational Bspline
(NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies.
This function enables NURBS curve expression to be directly specified
to the CNC. This eliminates the need for approximating the NURBS
curve with minute line segments. This offers the following advantages:
1. No error due to approximation of a NURBS curve by small line
segments
2. Short part program
3. No break between blocks when small blocks are executed at high
speed
4. No need for highspeed transfer from the host computer to the CNC
When this function is used, a computeraided machining (CAM) system
creates a NURBS curve according to the NURBS expression output from
the CAD system, after compensating for the length of the tool holder, tool
diameter, and other tool elements. The NURBS curve is programmed in
the NC format by using these three defining parameters: control point,
weight, and knot.
CAD (Designing a metal die)
Generating a metal die surface
(NURBS surface or curve)
CAM
(Creating an NC part program)

Studying the machining method and others
Tool compensation file
NC part program after tool compensation

(NURBS curve)
NURBS curve (control point, weight, knot)
CNC
equipment
Machine tool
Fig. 6.17 NC part program for machining a metal die

according to a NURBS curve
521
B63003EN1/02
NURBS interpolation must be specified in highprecision contour

control mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The CNC executes
NURBS interpolation while smoothly accelerating or decelerating the
movement so that the acceleration on each axis will not exceed the
allowable maximum acceleration of the machine. In this way, the CNC
automatically controls the speed in order to prevent excessive strain being
imposed on the machine.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
5115
SPL: ERROR
Description
An illegal rank is specified.

No knot is specified.
An illegal knot is specified.
Too many axes are specified.

Other program error
5116
SPL: ERROR
A lookahead block contains a program error.

The knot does not increase at a
constant rate.
An inhibited mode is specified in
NURBS interpolation mode.
Reference item
5117
SPL: ERROR
The first NURBS control point is illegal.
5188
SPL: ERROR
An attempt was made to resume

NURBS interpolation after manual intervention in manual absolute mode.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
522
II.4.13
NURBS interpolation
7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
AND DECELERATION CONTROL
B63003EN1/02
FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND

DECELERATION CONTROL
523
7.1
B63003EN1/02
The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed
functions are available:
FEEDRATE
CONTROL
1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at
a rapid traverse rate set in the CNC (parameter No. 1420).
2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using
the override signal.
7.1.1
Rapid Traverse Rate
General
The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse.
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)
IP_ ; Dimension word for the end point
In rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified rate
becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a certain range set by the
parameter (No.1826) (inposition check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter No. 1420, so no rapid
traverse rate need be programmed.
The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate with the
rapid traverse override signal:F0, 25, 50, 100%
F0: Allows a fixed feedrate to be set for each axis by parameter No. 1421.
In addition, the use of the 1% rapid traverse override selection signal
enables a rapid traverse override of between 0% and 100% to be applied
in 1% steps.
Signal

RPDO <F002#1>
[Function] This signal indicates that a move command is executed at rapid traverse.
[Output condition] 1 indicates that an axis starts moving after rapid traverse has been
selected.
0 indicates that an axis starts moving after a feedrate other than rapid
traverse has been selected. This holds true for both automatic and manual
operation modes.
524
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid
traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference
point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The
manual rapid traverse also includes the rapid traverse in
2 Once rapid traverse has been selected, this signal remains
1, including during a stop, until another feedrate has been
selected and movement is started.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
RPDO
#0
#7
#6
RDR
#5
#4
RFO
#3
#2
#1
LRP
#0
F002
Parameter
1401
[Data type] Bit

LRP Positioning (G00)
0 : Positioning is performed with nonlinear type positioning so that the
tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1 : Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool
moves in a straight line.
RFO When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0 : The machine tool does not stop moving.
1 : The machine tool stops moving.
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
1420

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
30 240000
30 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
30 96000
30 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
30 240000
30 100000
each axis.
525
1424
B63003EN1/02
Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
[Valid data range]
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
30 240000
30 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
30 96000
30 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
30 240000
30 100000
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse for each axis when the rapid traverse
override is 100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.2
Rapid traverse
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.2
Rapid traverse
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.2
Rapid traverse
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.2
Rapid traverse
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.2
Rapid traverse
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.2
Rapid traverse
526
B63003EN1/02
7.1.2
Cutting Feedrate
Clamp
General
A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis
with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override
applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it is clamped to the upper limit.
For M series, the upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate for each
axis with parameter No. 1430.
Parameter
1422
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000

NOTE
parameter No. 1430 instead. (M series)
527
B63003EN1/02
1430

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
[Valid data range]
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 240000
6 100000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
A feedrate for each axis is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not
exceed the maximum feedrate specified for each axis.
NOTE
2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
Alarm and message
Message
Number
Description
5009
PARAMETER ZERO (DRY

RUN)
The maximum feedrate (parameter No.

1422) or the feedrate in dry run (parameter
No. 1410) is set to 0 in the HPCC model.
5011
PARAMETER ZERO(CUT
MAX)
The maximum cutting feedrate (parameter

No. 1422)is set to 0 in the HPCC mode.
NOTE
For HPCC mode, refer to 7.1.14 HIGH PRECISION
CONTOUR CONTROL.
Warning
WARNING
CNC calculation may involve a feedrate error of +2% with
respect to a specified value. However, this is not true for
acceleration/deceleration. To be more specific, this error is
calculated with respect to a measurement on the time the
tool takes to move 500 mm or more during the steady state:
528
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.3
Cutting Feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting Feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.3
Cutting Feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting Feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting Feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting Feed
7.1.3
Feed Per Minute
General
Feed per minute (G94)
After specifying G94 (G98 for T series) (in the feed per minute mode), the
amount of feed of the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting
a number after F. G94 (G98 for T series) is a modal code. Once a G94
(G98 for T series) is specified, it is valid until G95 (G99 for T series) (feed
per revolution) is specified. At poweron, the feed per minute mode (feed
per revolution mode for T series) is set.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per
minute with the feedrate override signal.
Feed amount per minute
(mm/min or inch/min)
Tool
Workpiece
Table
Fig. 7.1.3 Feed per minute
CAUTION
No override can be used for any commands such as for
threading.
529
B63003EN1/02
Format
For M series
G94;
F_;
G code for feed per minute (Group 05)

Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
For T series
G98;
F_;
G code for feed per minute (Group 05)

Feed rate (mm/min or inch/min)
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1403
#0
MIF
[Data type] Bit

MIF Cutting feedrates at feed per minute is specified by F commands
0 : In units of 1 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.01 inches/min for
inch machines.
1 : In unit of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001
inches/min for inch machines.
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
inch machines.
#7
#6
#5
3401
#4
#3
#2
#1
FCD
#0
[Data type] Bit

FCD When an F command and a G command (G98, G99) for feed per minute or
feed per rotation are specified in the same block, and the G command
(G98, G99) is specified after the F command, the F command is:
0 : Assumed to be specified in the mode (G98 or G99) when the F
command is specified
1 : Assumed to be specified in the mode of the G command (G98 or G99)
of the same block
530
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 When FCD = 1:
If the block containing a G command (G98, G99) does not
include an F command, the last F command specified is
assumed to be specified in the G command mode of the
block.
Example 1: N1 G99 ;
N2 Faaaa G98 ;
- Faaaa is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode.
N3 Fbbbb ;
- Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode.
N4 G99 ;
- Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G99 mode.
2 In G code system B or C, G98 and G99 function are
specified in G94 and G95.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
011
Reference item
Description
Feedrate was not commanded to a

cutting feed or the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the program.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
531
B63003EN1/02
7.1.4
Feed Per Revolution/
Manual Feed Per
Revolution
General
Feed per revolution
After specifying G95 (G99 for T series) (in the feed per revolution mode),
the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be directly
specified by setting a number after F. G95 (G99 for T series) is a modal
code. Once a G95 is specified, it is valid until G94 (G98 for T series) (feed
per minute) is specified.
An override of between 0 and 254% (in steps of 1%) can be applied to feed
per rotation, using the feedrate override signals (*FV0 to *FV7). (See
Subsection 7.1.7.2.)
[T series]
Feed amount per spindle revolution

(mm/rev or inch/rev)
Fig. 7.1.4 Feed per revolution
Manual feed per

revolution
Jog feedrate can be specified by feed per revolution.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1402
#4
JRV
#3
#2
#1
#0
NPC
NPC
[Data type] Bit

JRV Jog feed
0 : Jog feed is performed at feed per minute.
1 : Jog feed is performed at feed per rotation.
NOTE
Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
NPC Feed per revolution command

0 : The feed per revolution command is ignored when the position coder
is not installed.
1 : The feed per revolution command is accepted even when the position
coder is not installed. (The CNC automatically converts the feed per
revolution command to a feedperminute operation.)
532
B63003EN1/02
1423
Feedrate in jog feed for each axis

When JRV, bit 4 of parameter No. 1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution) in
T series, specify a feedrate in jog feed (feed per revolution) with an
override of 100% applied to the jog feedrate.
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Increment system
Unit of data
Millimeter machine
0.01 mm/rev
Inch machine
0.001 inch/rev
Rotation axis
0.01 deg/rev
Valid data range
0 to 32767
Caution
CAUTION
When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation
may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the more
frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
533
B63003EN1/02
7.1.5
F1-digit Feed
(M series)
General
When a onedigit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set

for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 is
specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied.
The feedrate corresponding to the number currently selected can be
increased or decreased by turning on the switch for changing F1digit
feedrate on the machine operators panel, then by rotating the manual
pulse generator.
The increment/decrement, F, in feedrate per scale of the manual pulse
generator is as follows:
F + Fmax
100X
Fmax :
feedrate upper limit for F1F4 set by parameter 1460, or
feedrate upper limit for F5F9 set by parameter 1461
X :
any value of 1127 set by parameter 1450
The feedrate set or altered is kept even while the power is off. The current
feedrate is displayed on the screen.
Signal
F1-digit feed select signal

F1D <G016#7>
[Function] Increases or decreases F1-digit speed set by the parameters No. 1451 to
1459 using the manual pulse generator.
Since the manual pulse generator may also be used for axis feeding, signal
F1D (G016#7) designates which function may be used.
[Operation] When the signal is 1, the F1digit speed can be increased/decreased
using the manual pulse generator.
Signal address
G016
#7
F1D
#6
#5
534
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
1450
Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse

generator during F1 digit feed
[Data type] Byte

Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse
generator is rotated one graduation during F1-digit feed.
F + Fmaxi (where, i=1 or 2)
100n
In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions of the
manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained.
Fmaxi refers to the upper limit of the feedrate for an F1-digit feed
command, and set it in parameter 1460 or 1461.
Fmax1: Upper limit of the feedrate for F1 to F4 (parameter 1460)
Fmax2: Upper limit of the feedrate for F5 to F9 (parameter 1461)
1451
Feedrate for F1 digit command F1
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
Input for setting is enabled.
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
0.1 mm/min
6 150000
6 120000
Inch machine
0.01 inch/min
6 60000
6 48000
Rotation axis
0.1 deg/min
6 150000
6 120000
Set Feedrates for F1-digit feed commands F1 to F9.
When an F1-digit feed command is executed, as the feedrate is changed by

turning the manual pulse generator, these parameter values also change
accordingly.
535
B63003EN1/02
1460
Upper limit of feedrate for the F1digit feed command (F1 to F4)
1461
Upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command (F5 to F9)
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
Set the upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command.
As the feedrate increases by turning the manual pulse generator, the

feedrate is clamped when it reaches the upper limit set. If an F1-digit feed
command F1 to F4 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter
1460. If an F1-digit command F5 to F9 is executed, the upper limit is that
set in parameter 1461.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
536
B63003EN1/02
7.1.6
Feedrate Inverse Time
Specification (M series)
General
Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block and
inverse time (FRN).
(G01)
FRN=
1
Speed
=
Time (min)
Distance
Circular interpolation
(G02, G03)
FRN=
1
Speed
=
Time (min)
Circle radius
Speed: mm/min (metric input)

inch/min (inch input)
Distance:mm (metric input)
inch (inch input)
Speed: mm/min (metric input)
inch/min (inch input)
Circle radius:
mm (metric input)
inch (inch input)
CAUTION
In circular interpolation, the distance is not an actual
distance of the block but the speed is calculated from the
circle radius.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
011
Reference item
Description
Feedrate was not commanded to a

cutting feed, F0 was specified or the
feedrate calculated (less than 0.001
mm/min, for metric input or less than
0.00001 inch for inch input) becomes
less than an allowable range.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
537
B63003EN1/02
7.1.7
Override
7.1.7.1
General
An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the
rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421).
Also, 1% rapid traverse override select signal allows rapid traverse
override every 1% in the range of 0 to 100%.
Rapid traverse
rate10m/min
Override
50%
5m/min
Fig.7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override
Feedrate
Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse rate preset

by parameter no.1420 by the override value determined by this signal,
whether in automatic or manual operation (including manual reference
position return).
F0 rate
For F0 value, an absolute value is set by parameter no.1421 within a range

of 0 to rapid traverse rate (for each axis).
1% step rapid traverse

override selection signal
1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV determines

whether rapid traverse override specified with rapid traverse override
signals ROV1 and ROV2 is used or 1% step rapid traverse override is
used.
When signal HROV is 0, override is applied to the rapid traverse rate
using signals ROV1 and ROV2.
When signal HROV is 1, ROV1 and ROV2 are ignored, 1% step rapid
traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 being used to override the
rapid traverse rate.
PMC axis control
These 1% step rapid traverse override signals are also effective to the rapid
traverse rate for the PMC axis. When rapid traverse override is applied
to the PMC axis (using signals ROV1E and ROV2E) with the setting of
the OVE bit (bit 2 of parameter No. 8001) independently of the CNC, the
1% step rapid traverse override signals are ineffective.
538
B63003EN1/02
Signal

signal
ROV1,ROV2
<G014#0, #1>
[Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate
[Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows:
Override value
val e
ROV2
ROV1
100 %
50 %
25 %
F0 %
Fo: Set in parameter No. 1421

override selection signal
HROV <G096 #7>
[Function] Selects whether the rapid traverse override signals or the 1% step rapid
traverse override signals are enabled.
[Operation] When HROV is 1, signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are effective and rapid
traverse override with signals ROV1 and ROV2 is ignored.
When HROV is 0, signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are ineffective, and rapid
traverse override with signals ROV1 and ROV2 is effective.

override signals
*HROV0 to *HROV6
<G096 #0 to #6>
[Function] Applies override to the rapid traverse rate in the range of 0% to 100% in
steps of 1%.
[Operation] These seven signals give a binary code indicating an override applied to
the rapid traverse rate.
When a binary code corresponding to an override value of 101% to
127% is specified, the override applied is clamped at 100%.
539
B63003EN1/02
Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals.

To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to
1111110, which corresponds to a binary code of 0000001.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
ROV2
G014
G096
HROV
#0
ROV1
*HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
Parameter
1421
F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
30 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
30 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
30 15000
6 12000
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
#7
#6
#5
8001
#4
#3
#2
OVE
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

OVE Dry run and override signals during axis control by the PMC
0 : Use the same signals as CNC
(1) Feedrate override signal *FV0 to *FV7
(2) Override cancel signal OVC
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2
(4) Dry run signal DRN
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT
1 : Use dedicated axis control signals by the PMC.
(1) Feedrate override signal *FV0E to *FV7E
(2) Override cancel signal OVCE
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E
(4) Dry run signal DRNE
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE
540
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.5.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.5.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.3
7.1.7.2
Feedrate override
General
A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%)

selected by the override dial.This feature is used to check a program.
For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program,
setting the override dial to 50% moves the tool at 50 mm/min.
Feedrate 100 mm/min

(Specified by programmed)
Feedrate 50 mm/min after
feedrate override
Tool
Check the machining

by altering the feedrate
from the value specified in the program.
Workpiece
Fig. 7.1.7.2 Feedrate override
541
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Feedrate Override signal

*FV0 to *FV7
<G012>
[Function] These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code signals
correspond to override values as follows:
7
Override value = ( 2iVi ) %

i=0
Vi=0 when *FVi is 1 and

Vi=1 when *FVi is 0
These signals have the following weight.
*FV0 : 1%
*FV2 : 4%
*FV4 : 16%
*FV6 : 64%
*FV1 : 2%
*FV3 : 8%
*FV5 : 32%
*FV7 : 128 %
When all signals are 0, they are regarded as overriding 0% in the same
way as when all signals are 1 .
Thus, the override is selectable in steps over a range of 0 to 254%.
[Operation] Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speed specified in cutting
feed in automatic operation mode by the override value selected by this
signal.
The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal, in the
following cases:
Override cancel signal OVC is 1.
During cutting in tap cycle of canned cycle;
Tapping mode (63); or
Thread cutting is in progress.
Signal address
G012
#7
*FV7
#6
*FV6
#5
*FV5
#4
*FV4
#3
*FV3
#2
*FV2
#1
*FV1
#0
*FV0
#7
#6
#5
#4
RFO
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter
1401
[Data type] Bit

RFO When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0 : The machine tool does not stop moving.
1 : The machine tool stops moving.
542
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.5.3
Cutting feed
7.1.7.3
Second feedrate override
General
These signals override the cutting feedrate after the cutting feedrate has
been overridden by first override *FV0 to *FV7.
Signal

signal *AFV0 to *AFV7
<G013>
These eight binary code signals correspond to the override values as

follows.
7
Override value = ( 2iVi ) %

i=0
Vi=0 when *AFVi is 1 and

Vi=1 when *AFVi is 0
These signals have the following weight.
*AFV0 : 1%
*AFV2 : 4%
*AFV4 : 16%
*AFV6 : 64%
*AFV1 : 2%
*AFV3 : 8%
*AFV5 : 32%
*AFV7 : 128 %
If all signals are 0 or 1, the override is regarded as 0%. The override is

selectable in steps over a range of 0 to 254%.
543
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
G013
#7
*AFV7
#6
*AFV6
#5
*AFV5
#4
*AFV4
#3
*AFV3
#2
*AFV2
#1
*AFV1
#0
*AFV0
7.1.7.4
Override cancel
General
The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%.
Signal
Override cancel signal

OVC <G006#4>
[Function] Feedrate override is fixed to 100%.
[Operation] When the signal is 1, the CNC operates as follows:
Feedrate override is fixed to 100% irrespective of feedrate override
signal.
Rapid traverse override and spindle speed override are not affected.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
G006
544
#4
OVC
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
7.1.8
Automatic Corner
Override (M series)
General
Inner corner automatic

override
When G62 is specified, and the tool path with cutter compensation
applied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically overridden
at both ends of the corner.
There are four types of inner corners (Fig. 7.1.8).
2,x x px 178, in Fig. 7.1.8
p is a value set with parameter No. 1711. When is approximately
equal to p, the inner corner is determined with an error of 0.001,or
less.
1. Straight linestraight line
:Tool
:Programmed path
:Cutter center path
2. Straight linearc
3. Arcstraight line
4. Arcarc
Fig. 7.1.8 Inner corner
WARNING
When the block before a corner is a startup block, or the
block after a corner includes G41 or G42, the feedrate is not
overridden. The feedrate override function is disabled when
the offset value is 0.
545
Override value
B63003EN1/02
An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value

is valid even for dry run and F1digit feed specification.
In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:
F (inner corner automatic override) (feedrate override)
Internal circular cutting

feedrate change
For internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmed path

is set to a specified feedrate (F) by specifying the circular cutting feedrate
with respect to F, as indicated below. This function is valid in the cutter
compensation mode, regardless of the G62 code.
F
Rc
Rp
Rc : Cutter center path radius

Rp : Programmed radius
It is also valid for the dry run and the F1digit feed command.
RC
RP
Programmed path
Cutter center
path
Internal circular cutting feedrate change
If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc/Rp8 0; the tool stops. A minimum

deceleration ratio (MDR) is to be specified with parameter No. 1710.
When Rc/Rpx MDR, the feedrate of the tool is (FMDR).
CAUTION
When internal circular cutting must be performed together
with automatic override for inner corners, the feedrate of the
tool is as follows:
(inner corner override)
F Rc
Rp
(feedrate override)
Parameter
1710
Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) of the inner circular cutting

rate in automatic corner override
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
Set the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) in changing the inner circular
cutting feedrate by automatic corner override.
546
B63003EN1/02
In circular cutting with an inward offset, the actual feedrate for a specified
feedrate (F) becomes as follows:
Rc
Rp
Rc: Radius of the path of the cutters center

Rp: Programmed radius
As the actual feedrate becomes the value obtained from the above
equation, the specified rate F can be achieved on the program path.
Rp
Programmed
path
Rc
Cutter center
path
If Rc is too samall in comparison with Rp so that Rc 8 0, the cutter will

Rp
stop. To prevent this, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is set.
When Rc 8 0,
Rp
the actural rate becomes as follows:
F (MDR)
1711
Angle (qp) to recognize the inner corner in automatic override
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 to 179 (standard value = 91)
Set the angle to recognize the inner corner when automatic corner override
is performed for the inner corner
1712
Amount of automatic override for an inner corner
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 100 (standard value = 50)
Set inner corner automatic override value when automatic corner override
is performed.
547
1713
B63003EN1/02
Distance Le from the starting point in inner corner automatic override
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Input in mm
0.1
0.01
mm
Input in inches
0.1
0.01
0.001
inch
Set distance Le from the starting point in an inner comer for automatic
corner override.
1714
Distance Ls up to the ending point in inner corner automatic override
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Input in mm
0.1
0.01
mm
Input in inches
0.1
0.01
0.001
inch
Set distance Ls up to the end point in an inner corner for automatic corner
override.
If qx qp, the inside of a comer is recognized. (q is set in parameter 1711.)
When an inner corner is recognized, the feedrate is overridden in the range
of Le in the block immediately before the intersection of the corner and Ls
in the next block following the intersection.
Ls and Le are each a straight line connecting the intersection of the corner
and a given point on the path of the cutters center.
Ls and Le are set in parameters 1713 and 1714.
Le
Ls
An override is applied from point a to b.
Reference item
Programmed
path
Cutter center
path
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.4.2
Automatic Override for Inner

Corners
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.5.4.2
Automatic Override for Inner

Corners
548
B63003EN1/02
7.1.9
External Deceleration
General
These signals decelerate the feedrate of the control axes down to the speed
which has been set by parameter No. 1426 and 1427.
Signal
signal
*+ED1 to *+ED8<G118>
*ED1 to *ED8<G120>
[Function] These signals are used to apply deceleration; provided for each direction
of each control axis; +/* indicates the direction, while the signal number
corresponds to the number of the controlled axis.
*
+ ED
1 The 1st axis is decelerated.
2 The 2nd axis is decelerated.
3 The 3rd axis is decelerated.
+ The feed is decelerated in the plus (+) direction.
The feed is decelerated in the minus () direction.
[Operation] When a signal becomes 0, the corresponding axis decelerate to stop in

the specified direction.
Signal address
G118
#7
*+ED8
#6
*+ED7
#5
*+ED6
#4
*+ED5
#3
*+ED4
#2
*+ED3
#1
*+ED2
#0
*+ED1
G120
*ED8
*ED7
*ED6
*ED5
*ED4
*ED3
*ED2
*ED1
549
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
1005
#5
EDMx
#4
EDPx
#3
#2
#1
#0

EDPx External deceleration signal in the positive direction for each axis
0 : Valid only for rapid traverse
1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed
EDMx External deceleration signal in the negative direction for each axis
0 : Valid only for rapid traverse
1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed
1426
External deceleration rate of cutting feed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Set the external deceleration rate of cutting feed.
1427
External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis.
550
B63003EN1/02
7.1.10
Feed Stop Function
General
During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviation
amount at all times. When the amount exceeds the feed stop position
deviation amount set by the parameter (No. 1832), the function suspends
pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control during such a
period of time, and terminates the move command for the positioning
control circuit. Thus the function can minimize an overshoot that may
occur with a large servo motor in rapid traverse acceleration operation.
Speed
Specified speed
Actual speed
Time
Feed stop
Parameter
1832
Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis

Set the feed stop positioning deviation for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the feed stop positioning deviation
during movement, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration
control are stopped temporarily. When the positioning deviation drops to
the feed stop positioning deviation or below, pulse distribution and
acceleration/deceleration control are resumed.
The feed stop function is used to reduce overshoot in acceleration/deceleration mainly by large servo motor.
Generally, set the middle value between the positioning deviation limit
during movement and the positioning deviation at rapid traverse as the
feed stop positioning deviation.
551
B63003EN1/02
7.1.11
Feedrate Clamping by
Arc Radius (M series)
General
When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial error

exists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. An
approximation of this error can be obtained from the following
expression:
Dr:Error
Programmed path
Actual path
0
1
2
Dr=
(T12+T22)
v2
r
. . . . (Expression 1)
Maximum radial error (mm)

Feedrate (mm/s)
Arc radius (mm)
Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration of
cutting feed (s)
T2: Time constant of the servo motor (s)
Dr:
v:
r:
T1 :
When actual machining is performed, radius r of the arc to be machined

and permissible error Dr are given. Then, maximum allowable feedrate
v (mm/min) is determined from the above expression.
The function for clamping the feedrate by the arc radius automatically
clamps the feedrate of arc cutting to the value set in a parameter. This
function is effective when the specified feedrate may cause the radial error
for an arc with a programmed radius to exceed the permissible degree of
error.
When the permissible error Dr is determined, the maximum permissible
speed V for the arc radius R is obtained from expression 2.
Dr=
1
2
(T12+T22)
V2
. . . . . (Expression 2)
For the arc radius r, the maximum permissible speed v to set the
permissible error to Dr is obtained from expression 1. From expressions
1 and 2, the following expression is obtained:
1
2
(T12+T22)
N v+
r V
R
v2
r
1
2
(T12+T22)
. . . (Expression 3)
552
V2
R
B63003EN1/02
When a given arc radius R and the maximum permissible speed V for that
arc radius are set as parameters, the maximum permissible speed v for an
arc with a programmed radius r can be obtained from expression 3. Then,
if a specified feedrate exceeds the speed v, the feedrate is automatically
clamped to the speed v.
The maximum permissible speed v obtained from expression 3 decreases
with the specified arc radius. To prevent the maximum permissible speed
from decreasing excessively, the lower limit imposed on the maximum
permissible speed v can be set in parameter 1732.
Provided the specified feedrate does not exceed the maximum
permissible speed v obtained from expression 3, arc cutting is performed
at the specified feedrate.
Cutting feed linear

acceleration/deceleration
When the cutting feed linear acceleration/deceleration function is used,

an approximate error in arc cutting can be obtained from expression 4.
Dr : Error
r
0
Dr +
Programmed
Dr
path
2
1
(
T1
24
1
2
Actual path
T2 )
V2
r
v
r
T1
:
:
:
:
Maximum radius error (mm)

Feedrate (mm/s)
Arc radius (mm)
Time constant for cutting
feed linear acceleration/
deceleration (s)
T2
Servo motor time constant

(s)
. . . . . . . . (Expression 4)
As can be seen from expression 4, expression 3 also holds for linear

acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
Therefore, feedrate
clamping by the arc radius is enabled.
Actual error
Expressions 1, 2, and 4 logically denote an approximate error in the CNC.

They do not denote an actual error in machining.
Let the actual error in machining be Dr all. Then, it is expressed as
follows:
Dr all + Dr NC ) Dr machine
. . . . . . . . (Expression 5)
Error caused by the machine

Error caused by the acceleration/
deceleration time constant (T1) and
servo motor time constant (T2)
This function controls only the first term on the right side of expression
5. In other words, this function suppresses only the error caused by the
acceleration/deceleration time constant (T1) and servo motor time
constant (T2) to a certain level. This function does not control the error
caused by the machine.
553
B63003EN1/02
Expressions 1, 2, and 4 are approximate expressions. This means that, as

the arc radius becomes smaller, the approximate precision lowers.
Therefore, even when the feedrate is clamped to the maximum
permissible speed v obtained from expression 3, the permissible error
may be exceeded.
Parameter
1730
Maximum feedrate for arc radius R
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
[Valid data range]
.Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
8 15000
0 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
8 6000
0 4800
Set a maximum feedrate for the arc radius set in parameter No. 1731.
1731
Arc radius value corresponding to a maximum feedrate
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Unit
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Linear axis
(millimeter machine)
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis
(inch machine)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch

Set the arc radius corresponding to the maximum feedrate set in parameter
No. 1730.
1732
Minimum value (RV min) for arc radiusbased feedrate clamp
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
0 15000
0 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0 6000
0 4800
The arc radiusbased feedrate clamping function reduces the maximum

feedrate as the arc radius decreases. When the specified maximum
feedrate is not greater than RV min (minimum value for arc radiusbased
feedrate clamping), RV min is used as the maximum feedrate.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.19.2
Feedrate clamp by circle radius
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.19.1
Feedrate clamp by circle radius
554
B63003EN1/02
7.1.12
Automatic Corner
Deceleration (M series)
General
This function automatically controls the feedrate during corner

machining according to the angle of a corner made by machining blocks
or according to the feedrate difference for each axis.
This function is enabled when G64 (machining) mode is selected and
deceleration of the first of two consecutive cutting feed blocks is
executed.
Feedrate control can be performed according to the angle of a corner made
by machining blocks or according to the feedrate difference for each axis.
The desired method is selected by specifying the corresponding value in
the CSD bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1602).
Feedrate control
according to corner
angle
Overview
If the angle made by blocks A and B is smaller than that specified in parameter
No. 1740 (for the selected plane), and if the feedrates along the first and second
axes on that plane are lower than that specified in parameter No. 1741, the
system executes block B, assuming that no pulses are accumulated.
The figure shows the relationship between feedrate and time when a
corner angle is smaller than the angle specified in the parameter.
At time t, some accumulated pulses remain, as indicated by the shaded
part. The system, however, starts the next block because the feedrate of
the automatic acceleration/deceleration circuit is lower than that specified
in the parameter.
Feedrate
Block A
Feedrate specified in
parameter No. 1741
Block B
Time
555
B63003EN1/02
@ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for

cutting feed is enabled
If the angle made by blocks A and B is smaller than that specified in
parameter No. 1740 (for the selected plane), and if the feedrates
programmed for blocks A and B are higher than the value set in parameter
No. 1778, the feedrate is reduced to the value specified in the parameter
in block A. In block B, the feedrate is increased to the programmed
feedrate. The rate of acceleration depends on the parameter for linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed.
Speed
Block A
Block B
Speed set by
parameter
(No. 1778)
Time
Parameter
#7
#6
ACD
1601
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

ACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automatic
corner deceleration function)
0 : The function is not used.
1 : The function is used.
#7
#6
#5
1602
#4
CSD
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

CSD In the function for automatically reducing a feedrate at corners,
0 : Angles are used for controlling the feedrate.
1 : Differences in feedrates are used for controlling the feedrate.
1740
Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] 0.001 deg
Set a critical angle to be subtended by two blocks for corner deceleration
when the anglebased automatic corner deceleration function is used.
The angle subtended by two blocks is defined as q in the examples shown
below.
556
B63003EN1/02
Block A (G01)
Block B (G01)
Block A (G02)
Block B(G01)
Angle made by two lines

If a circular path is included, the angle
between the tangent of the arc and
another line is considered.
1741
Feedrate for assuming the termination of automatic corner deceleration

(for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
Set the feedrate for assuming the termination of deceleration in automatic

corner deceleration.
1778
Minimum speed for the automatic corner deceleration function

(for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
Set a speed at which the number of buffered pulses in deceleration is

assumed to be 0 when linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is used.
557
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 The angle of the machining tool path is compared with that
specified in parameter No. 1740 only for the selected plane.
The actual feedrate and that specified in parameter No.
1741 are compared only for the first and second axes of the
selected plane.
Even if simultaneous movement is
performed along three or more axes, the feedrates of only
the first and second axes are compared for the selected
plane.
2 The roundness of a corner is determined by the angle and
feedrate specified in parameter Nos. 1740 and 1741,
respectively. If a sharp corner is always required, set a
feedrate of zero and an angle of 180000 (180 degrees).
3 If a G09 (exact stop) command is executed, an exact stop
is performed, irrespective of the angle and feedrate
specified in parameter Nos.1740 and 1741.
4 This function is disabled in single block and dry run mode.
Feedrate control
according to the feedrate
difference for each axis
Overview
If the difference between the programmed feedrates at the end of block A

and at the beginning of block B for each axis exceeds the value specified
in parameter No. 1781, and if the feedrates for all axes are lower than that
specified in parameter No. 1741, the system executes block B, assuming
that no pulses are accumulated.
The figure shows the relationship between the feedrate and time when the
feedrate difference for each axis exceeds the value specified in parameter
No. 1781.
At time t, some accumulated pulses remain, as indicated by the shaded
section. The system, however, starts the next block because the feedrate
of the automatic acceleration/deceleration circuit is lower than that
Speed
Block A
Speed set by parameter

(No. 1741)
Block B
Time
558
B63003EN1/02
@ When linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for

cutting feed is enabled
If the difference between the feedrates of blocks A and B for each axis
exceeds the value specified in parameter No. 1780, the feedrate at the
corner is calculated from the difference for each axis, as shown below.
The feedrate is reduced to the calculated value in block A.
The feedrate change for each axis (Vc[X], Vc[Y], ...), caused by the
movement at programmed feedrate F, is compared with Vmax specified
in parameter No. 1780. If an feedrate change exceeding Vmax is
detected, the target feedrate after deceleration Fc is calculated, using
maximum comparison value Rmax.
R=
Vc
Vmax
Fc =
F
Rmax
If, for example, the direction of movement is changed from the Xaxis to
the Yaxis, that is through 90 degrees, and if the programmed feedrate is
1000 mm/min and the permissible feedrate difference specified in
parameter No. 1780 is 500 mm/min, the deceleration shown below is
performed:
559
B63003EN1/02
N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ;

N2
N2 Y100. ;
N1
Tool path if corner
deceleration is not
applied
Tool path when corner deceleration was applied
Speed
F1000
Without corner deceleration

With corner deceleration
Feedrate
along
X axis
F500
Speed
F1000
Feedrate
along
Y axis
Time
N1
F500
N2
Speed
F1000
Feedrate
along
tangential
direction
Time
F500
N1
N2
Time
Different permissible feedrate differences can be specified for different

axes. If a value is specified in parameter No. 1783, the permissible
feedrate difference for each axis becomes valid. Deceleration at a corner
is calculated for the axis for which the permissible feedrate difference is
exceeded with the highest ratio of actual feedrate difference to permissible
feedrate difference.
560
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
ACD
1601
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

ACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automatic
corner deceleration function)
0 : The function is not used.
1 : The function is used.
#7
#6
#5
1602
#4
CSD
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

1741
Feedrate for assuming the termination of automatic corner deceleration

(for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
Set the feedrate for assuming the termination of deceleration in automatic

corner deceleration.
1780
Allowable speed difference for the speed differencebased automatic corner

deceleration function (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Set the speed difference for the speed differencebased automatic corner
deceleration function when linear acceleration/deceleration before
561
1781
B63003EN1/02
Allowable speed difference for the speed differencebased automatic corner

deceleration function (for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
[Valid data range]
Set a speed difference for the speed differencebased automatic corner

deceleration function when acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
is used.
1783
Allowable feedrate difference in automatic corner deceleration based on the

feedrate difference (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
This parameter sets the feedrate difference for each axis in automatic
corner deceleration based on the feedrate difference when
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used. When this
parameter is set, the value set in parameter 1780 becomes invalid.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Even during dry run or external deceleration, the feedrate
difference is checked according to the F command in the
program.
2 If the G09 (exact stop) command is executed, an exact stop
is performed, irrespective of the values specified for the
parameters.
3 This function is invalid for the feed per rotation command,
F1digit feed command, and rigid tapping command, as
well as in single block mode.
4 If the override is changed during operation, the feedrate
difference cannot be checked correctly.
562
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.5.4.3
Automatic corner deceleration
7.1.13
Advanced Preview
Control (M series)
General
This function is designed for highspeed precise machining. With this

function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the
servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be
suppressed.
The tool can then follow specified values accurately and errors in the
machining profile can be reduced.
This function becomes effective when advanced preview control mode is
entered by G08P1 command.
Available functions
In advanced preview control mode, the following functions are available:

(1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed
(2) Automatic corner deceleration function
For details on the above functions, see the descriptions of the functions.
Signal
advanced preview
control
mode signal
G08MD <F066#0>
[Function] Informs that is in the advanced preview control mode.
[Output condition] The signal is 1 in the following case:
In the advanced preview control mode
The signal is 0 in the following case:
It is not the advanced preview control mode
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
F066
563
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G08MD
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
1431
Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced preview control mode
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
0 240000
0 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0 96000
0 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
0 240000
0 100000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced
preview control mode.

WARNING
In a mode other than the advanced preview mode, the
maximum cutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422
or No. 1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the
maximum feedrate.
NOTE
1432
Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced preview control mode

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
0 240000
0 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0 96000
0 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
0 240000
0 100000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced
A feedrate for each axis is clamped during cutting feed so that it does not
exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified for each axis.
WARNING
In a mode other than the advanced preview mode, the
maximum cutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422
or No. 1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the
maximum feedrate.
564
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
2 If a setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate
#7
#6
LS2
1602
#5
#4
CSD
#3
#2
#1
#0
FWB
[Data type] Bit

FWB Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
0 : Type A of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
1 : Type B of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
Type A: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, acceleration/
deceleration starts after the program enters the block in which
the command is specified.
Type B: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, deceleration
starts and terminates at the block before the block in which the
command is specified.
<Example of a deceleration process>
Feedrate
F3
F2
<Example of an acceleration process>
Specified feedrate
Specified feedrate
Feedrate after acceleration/decelerationbefore
interpolation is applied
F3
Type A
Type B
F2
F1
N1
Feedrate
Feedrate after acceleration/decelerationbefore

interpolation is applied
N2
Time
F1
N1
N2
Time

LS2 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in the
advanced preview control mode
0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration. (The function for linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is
required.)
565
1762
B63003EN1/02
Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed

in the advanced preview control mode

[Unit of data] 1 ms
Set an exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting
feed in the advanced preview control mode.
1763
Minimum speed in exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed

in the advanced preview control mode

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
Set a minimum speed (FL) in exponential acceleration/deceleration for

cutting feed in the advanced preview control mode.
1768
Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed

in the advanced preview control mode.
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter sets a time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration for
cutting feed in the advanced preview control mote.
NOTE
The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation for cutting feed is required.
566
B63003EN1/02
1770
Parameter 1 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode (maximum machining
speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/

deceleration before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode.
In this parameter, set the maximum machining speed during linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Set the time used to reach
the maximum machining speed in parameter No. 1771.
Speed
Parameter1
(No. 1770)
Time
Parameter 2 (No. 1771)
CAUTION
When 0 is set in parameter No. 1770 or parameter No. 1771,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled.
1771
Parameter 2 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation in the advanced preview control mode (time used to reach the maximum machining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the advanced preview control mode. In this
parameter, set the time (time constant) used to reach the speed set in parameter No. 1770.
567
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
1 When 0 is set in parameter No. 1770 or parameter No. 1771,
disabled.
2 In parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771, set values that satisfy the
following:
Parameter No. 1770/Parameter No. 1771
w5
1777
Minimum speed for the automatic corner deceleration function

(for the advanced preview control)

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
Set a speed at which the number of buffered pulses in deceleration is assumed to be 0 when linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
is used.
1779
Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration

(for the advanced preview control)
[Data type] Twoword

Set a critical angle to be subtended by two blocks for corner deceleration
when the anglebased automatic corner deceleration function is used.
The angle subtended by two blocks is defined as q in the examples shown
below.
Block A (G01)
Block B (G01)
Block A (G02)
Block B (G01)
Angle subtended an arc tangent
and straight line
Angle subtended by two

straight lines
568
B63003EN1/02
1780
Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration
function (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Set the speed difference for the speed difference based automatic corner
deceleration function when linear acceleration/deceleration before
1783
Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration
function (for linear acceleration /deceleration before interpolation)

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000
A separate allowable feedrate difference can be set for each axis. Among
the axes that exceed the specified allowable feedrate difference, the axis
with the greatest ratio of the actual feedrate difference to the allowable
feedrate difference is used as the reference to calculate the reduced
feedrate at the corner.
1784
Speed when overtravel alarm has generated during acceleration/deceleration

beforeinterpolation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
[Valid data range]
Deceleration is started beforehand to reach the feedrate set in the

parameter when an overtravel alarm is issued (when a limit is reached)
during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. By using
this parameter, the overrun distance that occurs when an overtravel alarm
is output can be reduced.
WARNING
The control described above is applicable only to stored
stroke check1.
569
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the control described above
is not exercised.
2 Use typeB linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No. 1602
to 1).
Parameters for advanced @ Parameters for the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
preview control mode
and normal mode
Parameter No.
Normal mode
Advanced
preview
control mode
FWB (1602#0)
Acceleration (Parameter 1)
1630
1770
Acceleration (Parameter 2)
1631
1771
Speed when overtravel alarm has generated
1784
Acceleration/decelerationtype
(A type/B type)
@ Parameters for automatic corner deceleration
Parameter No.
Normal mode
Advanced
preview
control mode
CSD (1602#4)
Minimum speed
(according to the corner angle)
1778
1777
Critical angle
(according to the corner angle)
1740
1779
Allowable speed difference for all axes

(according to speed difference)
1780
Allowable speed difference for each axis

(according to speed difference)
1783
Automatic corner deceleration according to

the corner angle or the speed difference
Alarm and message
Number
Message
109
FORMAT ERROR IN G08
570
Description
A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the G08 code, or no value was specified.
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
In the advanced preview control mode, the functions listed
below cannot be specified. To specify these functions,
cancel the advanced preview control mode, specify the
desired function, then set advanced preview control mode
again.
Rigid tapping function
Cs contouring control function
Feed per revolution
Onedigit F code feed
Polar coordinate interpolation function
Cylindrical interpolation function
Involute interpolation function
Threedimensional coordinate conversion
Retrace function
Normal direction control
Polar coordinate command
Index table indexing
Tool retract and recover
Threading and synchronous cutting
Highspeed cycle cutting
Handle interruption
Program restart
Feed stop
Highspeed skip function
Constant surface speed control
Interrupt type custom macro
Smallhole peck drilling cycle
Highspeed remote buffer A/B
Automatic tool length measurement
Skip cutting
G28 (lowspeed reference position return)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.19.3
advanced preview CONTROL

(G08)
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.19.2

(G08)
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.17.1

(G08)
571
B63003EN1/02
7.1.14
Highprecision
Contour Control by
RISC (M series)
General
Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors include
machining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
To eliminate these errors, the following functions are performed at high
speed by an RISC processor. These functions are called highprecision
contour control functions.
D
D
Function for multipleblock lookahead acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation. This function eliminates machining errors due
to acceleration/deceleration.
Automatic feedrate control function which enables smooth
acceleration/ deceleration by considering changes in the figure and
speed and allowable acceleration for the machine. This is performed
by reading multiple blocks in advance.
Furthermore, smoother acceleration/deceleration is achieved, enabling

the feedforward factor to be increased. This feature also reduces
followup error in the servo system.
Specification table
Name
Function
No. of controlled axes
1 axis to 8 axes
No. of simultaneously controlled axes
Up to max. controlled axes
Axis names
Any of A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, Z
Increment system
0.01, 0.001, 0.0001 mm

0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001 inch
Max. programming dimensions
" 8 digits
Positioning
Yes (Available with parameter MSU (No.

8403#1)=1)
Yes
Multiquadrant circular interpolation
Yes
Helical interpolation
Provided (when bit 2 (G02) of parameter No.

8485 is set to 1)
Involute interpolation
Provided (when bit 4 (INV) of parameter No.

8485 is set to 1)
Feed per minute
Yes
Feedrate clamp
Yes
Feedrate override
0 254%, Every 1%
2nd feedrate override
0 254%, Every 1%
Workpiece coordinate system
Yes (Unchangeable in G05P10000 mode)
572
B63003EN1/02
Name
Data that can be

specified
Function
Absolute/incremental command
Combined use possible in the block
Sequence number
5 digits
Tape code
EIA, ISO
Tape format
Word address format
Control in/out
Yes
Optional block skip
Yes
Circle radius R specification
Yes
Automatic operation
Memory operation, Tape operation
Method of tape operation
RS232C, RS422, DNC1, and remote

buffer
Manual absolute on/off
Yes (FS15 type)
Cycle start, Feed hold
Yes
Dry run
Yes
Feedrate override under dry

run
0 655.34%, Every 0.01%
Single block
Yes
Inch/metric conversion
Yes (Unchangeable in G05P10000 mode)
Multibuffer
Yes
Cutter compensation C
Yes
Interlock (all axes)
Yes
Machine lock
Yes
Subprogram call (M98, M198)
Yes (Usable with parameter MSU (No.

8403#1)=1)
Auxiliary function
Yes (Usable with parameter MSU (No.

8403#1)=1)
Scaling

8485 is set to 1)
Coordinate rotation

8485 is set to 1)
Canned drilling cycle

8485 is set to 1)
Rigid tapping

8485 is set to 1)
G00
G01
G02
G03
G02.2
G03.2
G17
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Positioning (Note)
Circular interpolation, Helical interpolation (CW) (Note)
Circular interpolation, Helical interpolation (CCW) (Note)
Involute interpolation (CW) (Note)
Involute interpolation (CCW) (Note)
Plane selection (XpYp plane)
where, Xp is the Xaxis or its parallel axis;
573
B63003EN1/02
G18
: Plane selection (ZpXp plane)

where, Yp is the Yaxis or its parallel axis;
G19
: Plane selection (YpZp plane)
where, Zp is the Zaxis or its parallel axis.
G38
: Cutter compensation C with vector held
G39
: Cutter compensation C corner arc
G40
: Cutter compensation C cancel
G41
: Cutter compensation C, left
G42
: Cutter compensation C, right
G50
: Scaling cancel (Note)
G51
: Scaling command (Note)
G68
: Coordinate rotation command (Note)
G69
: Coordinate rotation cancel (Note)
G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89:
Canned drilling cycle, rigid tapping (Note)
G90
: Absolute command
G91
: Incremental command
Dxxx
: D code
Fxxxxx
: F code
Nxxxxx
: Sequence number
G05P10000 : Setting the HPCC mode
G05P0
: Canceling the HPCC mode
I, J, K, R
: I, J, K, and R specified for circular interpolation
Axial movement data:
Axial movement data specified with an axis name set in
parameter No. 1020
(any of X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C)
( )
: Control in / out
/n
: Optional block skip
Mxxxx
: Miscellaneous function (Note)
Sxxxx
: Spindle speed function (Note)
Txxxx
: Tool function (Note)
Bxxxx
: Second miscellaneous function (Note)
NOTE
To specify positioning, helical interpolation, involute
interpolation, scaling, coordinate rotation, a canned drilling
cycle, rigid tapping, a miscellaneous function, a spindle
function, a tool function, or a second auxiliary function in
highprecision contour control (HPCC) mode, set the
corresponding parameter, described in the specification list,
to 1. Specifying any of the above functions without setting
the corresponding parameter to 1 causes a P/S alarm (No.
5000).
574
B63003EN1/02
7.1.14.1
Lookahead
before interpolation
When feed per minute is specified, this function reads several tens of
blocks ahead to perform acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
that is, to apply acceleration/deceleration to the specified feedrate.
When acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used, acceleration/
deceleration is applied to the interpolated data. Consequently, the interpolated data is changed by acceleration/deceleration. When acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation is used, however, acceleration/
deceleration is applied to the feedrate data before interpolation. Consequently, the interpolated data is not changed by acceleration/deceleration.
Accordingly, interpolation data ensures that machining follows a
specified line or curve at all times, thus eliminating the machining profile
errors that result from delays in acceleration/deceleration.
Feedrate
command
Feedrate
calculation
Pulse
distribution
Interpolation calculation
Linearinterpolation,
circular interpolation, etc.
Acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation
Servo
control
Linear, exponential
Acceleration/
deceleration
Linear,
bellshaped
If a feedrate change along any axis is greater than the value set in a
parameter for the joint (corner) between two successive blocks, a feedrate
is calculated so that the difference in the feedrates does not exceed the
specified value. The feedrate is automatically reduced to this calculated
value at the corner.
Before this function can be used, specify parameter Nos. 8400 and 8401
for determining an acceleration for acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation.
575
Example of deceleration
B63003EN1/02
To ensure that the feedrate specified for a block is reached when the block
is executed, deceleration is started in the previous block.
Feedrate
F3
Specified feedrate
Feedrate after acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation is
applied
P1
F2
P2
F1
N1
N2
Time
To reduce feedrate F3 to feedrate F2, deceleration must be started at P1.

To reduce feedrate F2 to feedrate F1, deceleration must be started at P2.
The tool can be decelerated over several blocks, because several tens of
blocks are read in advance.
Example of acceleration
Acceleration is started to reach the specified feedrate for a block when the
block is executed.
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
applied
F3
F2
F1
Time
N1
576
N2
B63003EN1/02
Lookahead bellshaped
To use this function, set bit 7 (BDO) and bit 1 (NBL) of parameter No.
8402 to 1, and also set the following parameters:
Parameter No. 8400: Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration used for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Parameter No. 8401: Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration used for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Parameter No. 8402, bit 5 (DST) = 1, bit 4 (BLK) = 0
Parameter No. 8416: Time needed to reach maximum acceleration
For details, see the description of the parameters.
Description
Lookahead bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

controls acceleration as described below.
Maximum acceleration ACC_MAX=
Setting of parameter No. 8400 [mm/min, inch/min]

Setting of parameter No. 8401 [ms]
Time needed to reach maximum acceleration: ACC_TIME = Setting in

parameter No. 8416 [ms]
When maximum acceleration is reached
Acceleration
+
ACC_TIME
ACC_MAX
ACC_TIME
Time
ACC_MAX
Feedrate
ACC_TIME
ACC_TIME
Time
577
B63003EN1/02
When maximum acceleration is not reached
Acceleration
+
Time
Feedrate
Time
Acceleration
The tool is accelerated to a specified feedrate, starting at the beginning of

a block.
The tool can be accelerated over multiple blocks.
Feedrate
Feedrate control by
lookahead bell
shaped acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Specified feedrate
N1
N2
578
N3
N4
N5
Time
B63003EN1/02
Feedrate clamping based

on the total travel of the
tool in lookahead
blocks
When the distance required to decelerate the tool from a specified feedrate
is less than the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance, the
feedrate is automatically clamped to a feedrate from which the tool can
be decelerated to a feedrate of zero.
Feedrate
Clamp
feedrate
Feedrate control
by lookahead
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation
Specified
feedrate
Total travel of the

tool in the blocks
read in advance
Time
When several blocks, each specifying a short travel, are specified in

succession, the following situation can occur:
The total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance at the start of
acceleration is less than the distance required to decelerate the tool from
a specified feedrate, but the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in
advance at the end of acceleration is greater than the distance required to
decelerate the tool from a specified feedrate.
In such a case, the tool is accelerated once and clamped to the feedrate
obtained based on the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance.
Then, the tool is accelerated to a specified target feedrate.
At the start of acceleration
Feedrate control by
lookahead bell
deceleration before
interpolation
Feedrate
Clamp
feedrate
Specified feedrate
Total travel of the

tool in the blocks
read in advance
579
Time
B63003EN1/02
At the end of acceleration
Feedrate control by
lookahead bell
deceleration before
interpolation
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
Clamp
feedrate
Total travel of the

tool in the blocks
read in advance at
the end of acceleration
Time
Feedrate command and

feedrate
If an F command is changed by, for example, another F command, the

corner deceleration function, or the automatic feedrate determination
function, lookahead bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation treats the changed feedrate as a new target feedrate, and
restarts acceleration/deceleration.
Whenever an F command is changed, bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is performed.
Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is performed each time a different
feedrate command is specified, for example, in a program containing
successive blocks, each specifying a short travel.
Feedrate control by
lookahead bell
deceleration before
interpolation
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
Time
580
B63003EN1/02
When the feed hold

function is used during
acceleration
When the feed hold function is used during acceleration, control is

performed as described below.
Deceleration
While applying constant or increasing acceleration

Starting at the point where the feed hold function is specified, the
acceleration is gradually reduced to 0. Then, the feedrate for the tool
is gradually reduced to 0. Thus, the feed hold function does not always
immediately reduce the feedrate of the tool; it instead may sometimes
increase the feedrate for a brief instant before reducing the feedrate.
While applying decreasing acceleration
First, the acceleration is gradually reduced to 0. Then, the feedrate is
gradually reduced to 0.
The tool is decelerated to the feedrate specified for a block, starting at the
previous block.
The tool can be decelerated over multiple blocks.
Feedrate
Feedrate control by
lookahead bell
deceleration before
interpolation
Deceleration start point
Specified feedrate
Deceleration start point
Time
581
Feedrate command and

deceleration
B63003EN1/02
If an F command is changed by, for example, another F command, the

corner deceleration function, or the automatic feedrate determination
function, lookahead bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation treats the changed feedrate as a new target feedrate, and
restarts acceleration/deceleration.
Whenever an F command is changed, bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is performed.
When the distance required to decelerate the tool from a specified feedrate
is longer than the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance, the
feedrate is automatically clamped, as in the case of acceleration.
Feedrate control by
lookahead bell
deceleration before
interpolation
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
Clamp feedrate
Clamp feedrate
Deceleration based on
tool travel
Time
The deceleration of the tool is started when the total travel of the tool in
the blocks read in advance is less than the distance required to decelerate
the tool from the current feedrate.
When the total travel of the tool in the blocks read in advance increases
at the end of deceleration, the tool is accelerated.
When blocks specifying a short travel are specified in succession, the tool
may be decelerated, then accelerated, then decelerated, and so on,
resulting in an unstable feedrate. In such a situation, specify a smaller
feedrate.
Feed hold during

deceleration
When the feed hold function is used during deceleration, control is

performed as described below.
D While applying constant or increasing deceleration
The point where the deceleration starts being reduced to 0 is shifted
from the usually used point (i.e., that used when feed hold is not
applied) to ensure that the feedrate for the tool is gradually reduced to
0.
D While applying decreasing deceleration
The deceleration is gradually reduced to 0, after which the feedrate is
reduced to 0.
582
B63003EN1/02
Single block function

while lookahead
bellshaped
used
When the single block function is specified while lookahead

bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used,
control is performed as described below.
While the tool is being

accelerated or
decelerated when the
single block function is
specified
(1) A + B x Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed
when the single block function is specified
The tool is gradually decelerated so that the feedrate is 0 upon
completion of the execution of the block that was being executed when
the single block function was specified.
Feedrate
Single block function specified
Time
A: Distance traveled before the tool reaches the specified feedrate from
the current acceleration/deceleration
B: Distance traveled before the feedrate falls to 0 from a feedrate to which
no acceleration/deceleration is applied
(2) A + B > Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed when
the single block function is specified
The tool may be decelerated over multiple blocks until it stops.
How the tool is stopped is described later.
Feedrate
Time
A: Distance traveled before the tool reaches the specified feedrate with
the current acceleration/deceleration
B: Distance traveled until the feedrate falls to 0 from a feedrate to which
no acceleration/deceleration is applied
583
While the tool is not

being accelerated or
single block function is
specified
B63003EN1/02
(1) A x Remaining travel for the tool in the block being executed when
the single block function is specified
The tool is gradually decelerated so that the feedrate is 0 upon
completion of the execution of the block that was being executed when
the single block function was specified.
Feedrate
Time
A: Distance traveled until the feedrate falls from the current feedrate
value to 0
(2) A > Remaining travel of the tool in the block being executed when the
single block function is specified
The tool may be decelerated over multiple blocks until it stops.
How the tool is stopped is described later.
Feedrate
Time
A: Distance traveled until the feedrate falls from the current feedrate
value to 0
584
B63003EN1/02
How the tool is stopped

when decelerated over
multiple blocks
The tool is decelerated (or accelerated) over multiple blocks until the
feedrate becomes 0.
Feedrate
Time
CAUTION
1 Depending on the stop point and remaining blocks, two or
more acceleration/deceleration operations may be
performed.
2 When the single block function is specified, an
acceleration/deceleration curve recalculation is required
while the tool is moving along an axis. So, the tool is not
always decelerated over the minimum number of blocks
before stopping.
Dry run/feedrate override
When a change in the specification of the dry run function or feedrate

override function results in a change in the specified feedrate (feedrate
change due to an external cause) while lookahead bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is being used, control is performed
as described below.
While the tool is being

accelerated or
specification of the dry
run function or feedrate
override function is
changed
After the current acceleration/deceleration operation brings the tool to a

specified feedrate and is terminated, the tool is accelerated or decelerated
to the new target feedrate.
While the tool is not

being accelerated or
specification of the dry
run function or feedrate
override function is
changed
The tool is accelerated or decelerated from the current feedrate to the

specified feedrate.
585
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the specification of the dry run function or feedrate
override function is changed, the acceleration/deceleration
curve must be recalculated while the tool is actually moving
along an axis. For this reason, there will be a slight delay
before a feedrate change is actually started after the
specification of the dry run function or feedrate override
function is changed.
2 When the specification of the dry run function or feedrate
override function is changed, the tool may be decelerated
to below a specified feedrate and then accelerated,
depending on the remaining amount of travel, current
feedrate, and target feedrate.
586
B63003EN1/02
7.1.14.2
Automatic feedrate
control function
This function reads several tens of blocks ahead to exercise automatic

feedrate control.
A feedrate is determined on the basis of the conditions listed below. If a
specified feedrate exceeds a calculated feedrate, acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation is used so that the calculated feedrate can be
established.
(1) Feedrate change and specified allowable feedrate difference along
each axis at a corner
(2) Anticipated acceleration and specified allowable acceleration along
each axis
(3) Cutting load change anticipated from the direction of motion along the
Zaxis
In automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate is automatically reduced
with acceleration/deceleration before interpolation to minimize the stress
and strain applied to the machine.
Machining error reduced

due to deceleration based
on an allowable feedrate
difference
Specified tool path
Tool path when feedrate control is not

used
Tool path when feedrate control is used
Machining error reduced due to deceleration

based on an allowable acceleration
To use this function, set bit 0 (USE) of parameter No. 8451 to 1, and set
the following parameters:
Parameter No. 8410: Allowable feedrate difference used for feedrate determination, based on a corner feedrate difference
Parameter No. 8475, bit 2 (BIP) = 1: Enables deceleration at a corner.
Parameter No. 8470: Parameter specifying an allowable acceleration for
feedrate determination, based on acceleration
Parameter No. 8459, bit 1 (CTY) = 1, bit 0 (CDC) = 0
Parameter No. 8464: Initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control
Parameter No. 8465: Maximum allowable feedrate for automatic feedrate control
For details, see the description of each parameter.
587
Feedrate control
conditions
B63003EN1/02
In automatic feedrate control mode, the feedrate for the tool is controlled
as described below.
- The feedrate required at a corner is calculated from the specified

feedrate difference at the corner along each axis, the tool being
decelerated to the calculated feedrate at the corner.
Example:
N1
Specified
feedrate
N2
N1
N2
N3
N3
- The feedrate required in a block is calculated from the specified

acceleration along each axis at the start point and end point of the
corner, the tool being decelerated so that the feedrate in the block
does not exceed the calculated feedrate.
Example:
N2
N3
N4
Specified
feedrate
N5
N6
N7
N1
N8
N1
N2 N3
N6 N7
N8
- The feedrate required in a block is calculated from the angle of

downward movement along the Zaxis, the tool being decelerated
so that the feedrate in the block does not exceed the calculated
feedrate.
Example:
N1
N2
Example of feedrate
determination based on
a feedrate difference
along each axis
Specified
feedrate
N3
N1
N2
N3
The feedrate required at a corner is calculated from the feedrate difference

along each axis, as described below.
When the tool is to move at the specified feedrate F, a comparison is made
between the feedrate change along each axis (Vc[X], Vc[Y], ...) and the
value (Vmax) set in parameter No. 8410. If Vmax is exceeded by a
feedrate change along any axis, the tool is decelerated at the corner to the
required feedrate Fc:
Fc=F
1
Rmax
where Rmax is the largest value of R =
588
Vc
Vmax
B63003EN1/02
Suppose that the specified feedrate for the tool is 1,000 mm/min, and that
the direction of tool movement changes by 90 degrees (from along the
Xaxis to along the Yaxis). Suppose also that an allowable feedrate
difference of 500 mm/min is set. Then, the tool will decelerate as shown
below.
Tool path when the tool

does not decelerate at
the corner
N1
Feedrate
F1000
N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ;

N2 Y100. ;
N2
Tool path when the tool decelerates at

the corner
When the tool does not decelerate at the corner

When the tool decelerates
at the corner
Feedrate
along the
Xaxis
F500
Feedrate
F1000
Feedrate
along the
Yaxis
N1
Time
F500
Feedrate
F1000
Feedrate
along the
tangent to
the path
F500
N2
N1
589
N2
Time
Time
Example of feedrate
acceleration along each
axis
B63003EN1/02
As shown below, when a curve is formed by very short successive line

segments, there is no significant feedrate difference along each axis at
each corner. Consequently, the tool need not be decelerated to compensate for feedrate differences. When taken as a whole, however, successive
feedrate differences generate a large acceleration along each axis.
In this case, the tool must be decelerated to minimize the stress and strain
imposed on the machine, as well as the machining error that may result
from such excessive acceleration. The tool is decelerated to the feedrate
at which the acceleration along each axis, found from the formula below,
is equal to or less than a specified allowable acceleration.
The allowable acceleration is determined from a maximum cutting
feedrate (set in parameter No. 1432, No. 1430, or No. 1422) and the time
needed to reach the maximum cutting feedrate (set in parameter No.
8470).
Acceleration along each axis =
Feedrate difference along each axis at a corner
Travel in the previous block
Travel in the next block
max (
The reduced feedrate required for each corner is calculated. The tool is
decelerated to the decreased feedrate found at either the start point or the
end point of each block, whichever is smaller.
Example: In the example shown below, the tool is accelerated too
quickly from N2 to N4 and from N6 to N8 (as indicated by the
dashedline inclinations in the feedrate graphs) when automatic
feedrate control is not used. So, the tool is decelerated.
590
B63003EN1/02
N8
N7
N6
N9
N5
N1
N4
N3
N2
Feedrate along
the Xaxis
Feedrate along
the Yaxis
Feedrate along
the tangent to
the path
N1
N5
N9
591
N1
N5
N9
Feedrate determination
based on an allowable
acceleration during
circular interpolation
B63003EN1/02
When a block specifies circular feed per minute and bit 3 (CIR) of
parameter No. 8475 is set to 1, the feedrate of the tool is automatically
determined so that the acceleration along each axis does not exceed an
allowable acceleration.
The allowable acceleration is determined from the maximum cutting
feedrate (set in parameter No. 1432, No. 1430, or No. 1422) and the time
needed to reach the maximum cutting feedrate (set in parameter No.
8470).
During circular interpolation, the tool is controlled so that it always
moves along the path at the specified feedrate. At this time, the total
acceleration of the tool, consisting of the acceleration along each axis, is
calculated as follows:
Acceleration=
F2
R
F: Feedrate
R: Arc radius
A feedrate is calculated, as shown below, so that the total acceleration

does not exceed the smaller of the allowable accelerations along the two
axes of circular interpolation. If a specified feedrate is greater than the
calculated feedrate, the tool is decelerated to the calculated feedrate.
F2
R
F=
= min(x, y)
Rmin( , )
x y
592
x, y :
Allowable accelerations
along Xaxis and
Yaxis
B63003EN1/02
Example of feedrate
cutting load
This function can be used when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set
to 1.
Cutting the workpiece with the end of the cutter (Fig. 7.1.14.2 (b)) incurs
a greater resistance than when cutting the workpiece with the side of the
cutter (Fig. 7.1.14.2 (a)). Therefore, for (Fig. 7.1.14.2 (b)), the tool must
be decelerated. To calculate the required degree of feedrate deceleration,
the automatic feedrate control function uses the angle of downward
movement of the tool along the Zaxis.
When the tool is moving down along the Zaxis, the angle (q) of
downward movement formed by the XY plane and cutter path is as shown
in the Fig. 7.1.14.2 (b). The angle of downward movement is divided into
four areas, with an override value for each area specified in a parameter,
as follows:
Area 2: Parameter No. 8456
Fig. 7.1.14.2 (a) When the tool is moving up along the Zaxis
Fig. 7.1.14.2 (b) When the tool is moving down along the Zaxis
No override parameter is provided for area 1; the override value for area
1 is always 100%. A feedrate determined with a separate feedrate control
function is multiplied by the override value specified for the area to which
the angle q of downward movement belongs.
Area 1: 0 _v
Area 2: 30 _ v
Area 3: 45 _ v
Area 4: 60 _ v
q <30_
q <45_
q <60_
q v 90_
593
B63003EN1/02
XY plane
30 deg
90
deg
60
Area 4 deg
Area 1
45
deg
Area 3
Area 2
CAUTION
The feedrate determination function that is based on cutting
load uses an NC command to determine the direction of
movement along the Zaxis. This means that the direction
of movement along the Zaxis cannot be found if the
movement along the Zaxis is subject to manual
intervention with manual absolute on/off function set to on,
or if the mirror image function is used with the Zaxis. So,
never use these functions when using feedrate
determination based on cutting load.
Ignoring F code
commands
In a block for which the automatic feedrate control function is enabled,

the ignoring of all feed commands (F commands) can be specified by
setting bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451. The feed commands are:
(1) Modal F command specified before a block for which the automatic
feedrate control function is enabled
(2) Modal F command and F command specified in a block for which the
automatic feedrate control function is enabled
Note, however, that specified F commands and modal F commands are
stored in the CNC.
This means that in a block for which the automatic feedrate control
function is disabled, a modal F command of (1) or (2) is used instead of
a modal F command calculated by the automatic feedrate control
function.
Other examples of
feedrate determination
conditions
If a calculated feedrate exceeds the maximum allowable feedrate for

automatic feedrate control, specified in parameter No. 8465 or with an F
command, the feedrate is clamped to the maximum allowable feedrate or
F command, whichever is smaller.
594
B63003EN1/02
Automatic speed control

in involute interpolation
Involute interpolation automatic speed control overrides a specified

feedrate automatically, in the following two ways, during involute
interpolation to obtain a highquality surface with improved machining
precision.
D
D
Override with cutter compensation inside offset

Override near the basic circle
(1) Override with cutter compensation inside offset

In standard involute interpolation mode, when cutter compensation is
applied to involute interpolation, control is provided so that the speed
in the direction tangential to the path of the tool center (tool center
path) is always set to a specified feedrate.
In this case, the actual cutting speed, which is the speed of the tool
periphery point (cutting point) on the programmed path, varies
because the curvature of the involute curve is constantly changing.
In particular, when the tool offset is inside the involute curve, as the
tool approaches the basic circle, the actual cutting speed increases
relative to a specified feedrate.
For smooth machining, the actual cutting speed should be controlled
to match a specified feedrate. This function calculates an override
according to the curvature of the involute curve which changes from
moment to moment during involute interpolation, especially when an
inside offset is used. Then, the function controls the actual cutting
speed which is the speed in the direction tangential to the curve at the
cutting point, so that the actual cutting speed always matches a
specified feedrate.
Tool center path
Programmed path
Rofs
Rcp
Cutting point
Basic circuit
The override value is calculated as follows:

OVRa =
Rcp
100
Rcp + Rofs
Rcp : Radius of curvature at the tool center on the involute curve that
passes through the tool center
Rofs : Tool radius
595
B63003EN1/02
(2) Override near the basic circle

Near the basic circuit, the change in curvature of an involute curve is
relatively large. If such areas are cut at a programmed feedrate, a heavy
load may be placed on the cutter, preventing a smooth surface from
being produced.
When areas near the basic circuit where the change in curvature of an
involute curve is relatively large are cut, this function can reduce the
load on the cutter, thus enabling a smooth surface to be obtained by
automatically decelerating the tool movement according to the
parameter setting.
When the radius of curvature at the cutting point is in the range specified
by parameters (Rlmt1) to (Rlmt5), an override is applied as follows:
When Rlmt1 > Rcp " Rofs y Rlmt2
100 OVR2
OVRb =
(Rcp " Rofs Rlmt2) + OVR2
Rlmt1 Rlmt2
OVR2 OVR3
OVRb =
Rlmt2 Rlmt3
OVR3 OVR4
OVRb =
Rlmt3 Rlmt4
OVR4 OVR5
OVRb =
Rlmt4 Rlmt5
Rlmt1 to Rlmt5 are set in parameters 5611 to 5615, and OVR2 to
OVR5 are set in parameters 5616 to 5619. OVRlo in the graph shown
below denotes the lower limit imposed on the override during involute
interpolation. It is set in parameter 5620.
Rcp " Rofs indicates Rcp + Rofs for an inside offset and Rcp Rofs
for an outside offset.
Override value
[%]
100
OVR2
OVR3
OVR4
OVR5
OVRlo
Change in
curvature
0
Rlmt5
Rlmt4
Rlmt3
Rlmt2
Rlmt1
If the override calculation result is below the parameterset lower

limit, the override is clamped to the lower limit.
596
B63003EN1/02
7.1.14.3
Signal
HPCC mode signal
MHPCC (F066#6)
[Function] Indicates that the system is set to highprecision contour control mode
(HPCC mode).
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 if G05 P10000 (HPCC mode ON) is specified in a
program. The signal is set to 0 if G05 P0 is specified in a program or if
HPCC mode is canceled by a reset.
HPCC operation signal

EXHPCC (F066#7)
[Function] Indicates that the system is operating in highprecision contour control
mode (HPCC operation is in progress).
[Output condition] The signal is set to 1 if G05 P10000 (HPCC mode ON) is specified in a
program and if specifiable data of except G00, M, S, T, B is executed.
(1) Automatic operation is halted.
(2) Automatic operation is stopped.
(3) Specifiable data of G00, M, S, T or B is executed.
(4) HPCC mode is canceled.
For the specifiable date, refer to 7.1.14.
Signal addresses
#7
F066
#6
#5
EXHPCC MHPCC
597
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
7.1.14.4
Parameter
Parameters of linear accel
eration and deceleration
8400
Parameter 1 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Incrementsystem
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
10 60000
1 6000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
10 60000
1 6000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
10 60000
1 6000
This parameter determines a linear acceleration and deceleration before

interpolation. Usually, set the maximum cutting speed (parameter No.
1422).
8401
Parameter 2 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter specifies the time required until the speed specified in
parameter 1 is achieved.
NOTE
The function for linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is canceled when either parameter no. 8400 or
8401 is set to 0.
Speed
Parameter 1
Acceleration
Time
Parameter 2
598
B63003EN1/02
#7
8402
#6
BDO
#5
#4
DST
BLK
#3
#2
#1
#0
NBL
[Data type] Bit
Meaning

BDO, NBL Set the type of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.

BDO
NBL
Acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation is of linear type
Acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation is of bell

shape type
BLK Be sure to set to 0.
DST Be sure to set to 1.
Parameters of advanced
preview bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation
8400
Parameter 1 for determining a acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Valid data range
Incrementsystem Unit of data

IS-B
IS-C
Millimetermachine
1
mm/min
10
60000
1
6000
Inchmachine
0.1inch/min
10
60000
1
6000
Rotation
axis
1
deg/min
10
60000
1
6000
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
8401
Parameter 2 for determining a acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter specifies the time required until the speed specified in
parameter 1 is achieved.
Speed
Parameter 1
Maximum acceleration
Time
Parameter 2
599
8416
B63003EN1/02
The time required to the maximum acceleration in advanced preview bell

shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] mec
This parameter sets the time required to reach the maximum acceleration
in advanced preview bellshaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
Also, this parameter is used for deceleration time taken from the
maximum acceleration to zero.
Acceleration
+
Max. acceleration
Time
Max. acceleration
Set the same time
Speed
V
t2
t1: Time constant assumed in linear acceleration/deceleration (Parameter No. 8401)

t2: Time for corner rounding
V: Speed to set acceleration time t1
(Parameter No. 8400)
Usually set the max. cutting speed.
Time
Total time
Time of linear part
=T
=T2 * t2
Time of curved part
=t2
t2
When target speed is different, total time also

changes (constant acceleration).
t1
600
B63003EN1/02
Parameters of automatic
feedrate control
8410
Allowable velocity difference in velocity determination considering

the velocity difference at corners
Unit of data
Valid data range

Incrementsystem
IS-B
IS-C

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
10 60000
1 6000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
10 60000
1 6000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
10 60000
1 6000
If zero is specified for all axes, the machine does not decelerate at corners.
When the function for determining the velocity considering the velocity
difference at corners is used, the system calculates the feedrate whereby a
change in the velocity element of each axis does not exceed this parameter
value at the interface between blocks. Then the machine decelerates using
acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation.
8451
#7
NOF
#6
#5
#4
ZAG
#3
#2
#1
#0
USE
[Data type] Bit

USE Automatic velocity control is:
0 : Not applied.
1 : Applied.
ZAG The velocity is:
0: Not determined according to the angle at which the machine descends
along the Zaxis.
1: Determined according to the angle at which the machine descends
along the Zaxis.
NOF In a block where automatic velocity control is validated, the F command
is:
0 : Validated.
1 : Ignored.
(Maximum speed of automatic feedrate control set by parameter No. 8465
is used for command speed in spite of F command)
8452
Range of velocity fluctuation to be ignored
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100 (Standard setting: 10)
601
8456
B63003EN1/02
Area2 override
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] %
This parameter specifies an override in area 2 of velocity calculation
considering the cutting load.
8457
Area3 override
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] %
8458
Area4 override
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] %
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
8459
#1
#0
CTY
CDC
[Data type] Bit

CDC Be sure to set this value to 0.
CTY Be sure to set this value to 1.
8464
Initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control
Valid data range

IS-B
IS-C

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
0 600000
0 6000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0 600000
0 6000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
0 600000
0 6000
This parameter sets the initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control.
In automatic feedrate control, the initial feedrate set with this parameter is
used at the beginning if no F command is specified in the program.
Usually, set the maximum cutting feedrate (specified in parameter No.
1422).
602
B63003EN1/02
8465
maximum allowable feedrate for automatic feedrate control
Unit of data
IS-BValid data rangeIS-C
Incrementsystem

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
10 240000
1 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
10 96000
1 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
10 240000
1 100000
This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate for automatic

feedrate control. Usually, set the maximum allowable cutting feedrate
(set in parameter No. 1422).
8470
Parameter for determining allowable acceleration in feedrate

calculation considering acceleration

[Unit of data] ms
When the function for calculating the feedrate considering the
acceleration is used under automatic feedrate control, this parameter is
used to determine the allowable acceleration. The time required until the
maximum cutting feedrate is reached must be specified here.
Allowable acceleration is determined from the maximum cutting feedrate
and the value set in this parameter. Where, the maximum cutting feedrate
is any of value set in parameter No. 1432, 1430 or 1422. Which parameter
No. is used depends on the following conditions:
When a value other than 0 is set to No. 1432, the value set to No. 1432
is used.
When 0 is set to No. 1432 and a value other than 0 is set to No. 1430,
the value set to No. 1430 is used.
When 0 is set to No. 1432 and 1430, the value set to No. 1422 is used.
Speed
Max. cutting speed
(Parameter No. 1432,
1430 or 1422)
Allowable acceleration
Time
Parameter No. 8470
603
#7
#6
#5
B63003EN1/02
#4
8475
#3
CIR
#2
BIP
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

CIR The function of automatic feedrate control considering acceleration and
deceleration during circular interpolation is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
When 1 is set, parameter NO. 8470 for determining the allowable
acceleration must be specified.
BIP The function of deceleration at corners is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used. (Always set 1.)
Parameters of axis
control
7510
Maximum number of axes in High Precision Contour Control
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, to the maximum number of control axes
This parameter specifies the maximum number of axes to controlled by
High Precision Contour Control.
Example) Axis configuration is X, Y, Z, A, B, and C from the 1st axis in
this order and to make HPCC valid to the 4th axis (A), set this
parameter to 4. In this case, HPCC is also effective for the X, Y, Z axes.
X, Y, Z, A axes Axes on which HPCC is valid
B, C axes Axes on which HPCC is not valid.
#7
#6
RI2
8480
#5
RI1
#4
RI0
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

Set the interpolation frequency during the high precision contour control
mode (HPCC mode).
Be sure to set the following values:
Parameters of acceleration/deceleration after

interpolation
#7
1602
RI2
RI1
RI0
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
LS2
[Data type] Bit

LS2 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in the high
precision contour control mode (HPCC mode) is:
0 : Not used. (Exponential acceleration/deceleration)
1 : Used. (The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is required.)
604
B63003EN1/02
1768
Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed

in HPCC mode

[Unit of data] ms
NOTE
The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is required.
Parameters of cutter
compensation C
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5000
#0
SBK
[Data type] Bit

SBK An internally created block for cutter compensation C:
0 : Does not cause a single block stop.
1 : Cause a single block stop.
#7
#6
#5
5003
#4
BCK
#3
#2
#1
#0
ICK
[Data type] Bit

ICK In HPCC mode, when cutter compensation C interference check is:
0 : Done
1 : Not done
BCK In HPCC mode, when cutter compensation C interference check
determines that the programmed move direction differs from the offset
move direction by between 90 and 270 degrees:
0 : An alarm is issued.
1 : No alarm is issued.
Parameters related to
involute interpolation
5611
Radius of curvature at the cutting point for the start point of override 1 near the basic circle
5612
5613
5614
5615
[Data type] 2word
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.0001
0.00001
inch
605
B63003EN1/02
5616
Override value at the start of override 2 near the basic circle
5617
5618
5619
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
5620
Lower limit imposed on the override during involute interpolation
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
5621
Allowable acceleration in constant acceleration control during involute interpolation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
5622
Minimum speed in constant acceleration control during involute interpolation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
The other parameters

#7
8403
#6
#5
SG0
#4
#3
#2
#1
LM2
LM1
MSU
#0
[Data type] Bit

MSU When G00, or an M, S, T, or B code is specified in HPCC mode:
0 : An alarm is issued.
1 : The CNC executes the command.
LM1 In HPCC mode, a stroke check before movement for stored stroke limit 1
is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
NOTE
The stored stroke check switching signal is invalid.
A check is made for a forbidden area specified in parameter
Nos. 1320 and 1321.
606
B63003EN1/02
LM2 In HPCC mode, a stroke check before movement for the second stored
stroke limit is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
SG0 When G00 is specified in HPCC mode:
0 : The setting of bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403 is followed.
1 : The tool is moved along the axis at the feedrate set with parameter No.
8481, replacing the G00 command with the G01 command,
regardless of the setting made for bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No. 8403.
Refer to note 1 in description of parameter No. 8481.
8481
Rapidtraverse rate in HPCC mode
Valid data range

IS-B
IS-C

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
0 600000
0 60000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0 600000
0 60000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
0 600000
0 60000
When bit 7 (SG0) of parameter No. 8403 is set to 1, this parameter sets
the rapid traverse rate in the HPCC mode.
CAUTION
The G00 command is replaced with the G01 command
before execution. So, even if a feedrate is specified for two
axes, the rapid traverse rate set with this parameter is
always used.
Example:
If the following command is specified when a rapid
traverse rate of 1000 mm/min is set F1000, rather than
F1414, is used:
G00 X100.Y100.;
For details, refer to Notes on positioning (G00).
607
#7
#6
8485
#5
CDS
B63003EN1/02
#4
INV
#3
PRW
#2
G02
#1
G81
#0
G51
[Data type] Bit

G51 In highprecision contour control (HPCC) mode, the scaling/coordinate
system rotation functions are:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
G81 In highprecision contour control (HPCC) mode, the hole machining
canned cycle is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
G02 In highprecision contour control (HPCC) mode, helical interpolation is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
PRW In highprecision contour control (HPCC) mode, parameter rewriting by
PMC WINDOW is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
INV In highprecision contour control (HPCC) mode, involute interpolation
is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
CDS In highprecision contour control (HPCC) mode, smooth interpolation is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
7.1.14.5
Alarm and message
Number

Message
Description
5000
ILLEGAL COMMAND
CODE(HPCC)
An invalid command (G code etc.)

was specified in HPCC mode.
5003
ILLEGAL PARAMETER
(RISC)
Parameter setting is erroneous.
5004
RISC NOT READY
RISC processor board is not ready

state.
5006
TOO MANY WORD IN

ONE BLOCK
The number of words in a block exceeds allowable range (HPCC mode).
5012
G05 P10000 ILLEGAL

START UP
G05P10000 was specified in a mode

from which HPCC mode cannot be
entered.
5013
HPCC : CRC OFS REMAIN AT CANCEL
G05P0 was specified in G41/G42

mode or a state in which an offset value remains.
608
B63003EN1/02
7.1.14.6
Note
Acceleration/deceleratio
n before interpolation in
lookahead blocks
NOTE
If there is a series of very short blocks, for each of which the
rate of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is low,
the actual feedrate may not reach the programmed
feedrate.
Automatic feedrate
control
NOTE
1 If the upper limit for automatic feedrate control is set to 0 in
parameter No. 8465, no feedrate exceeding 0 is permitted,
such that the issue of an F command causes PS alarm 011
(FEED ZERO). To prevent this, specify a value other than
zero in the parameter.
2 If the override is changed while the automatic feedrate
control function is enabled, the calculated clamp feedrate is
overridden.
Notes on operation
WARNING
1 In HPCC mode, axial interlocking (each axis, each direction)
is inhibited (signals G130, G132, G134).
2 In HPCC mode, the external mirror image (DI) signal, a
mirror image determined by setting data, or axial machine
lock must not be changed. Pocket calculator type decimal
point input is disabled in HPCC mode (when bit 0 of
parameter No. 3401 is set to 1).
NOTE
1 A singleblock stop cannot be made at the end of the
G05P10000 block.
2 External deceleration, the F1digit command, and
automatic corner override are disabled.
3 In HPCC mode, the operation mode cannot be switched to
MDI mode. Also, MDI operation is not permitted.
4 A program including G50 P10000; cannot be resumed.
609
Notes on positioning
(G00)
B63003EN1/02
When executing a G00 command when bit 7 of parameter No. 8403 (SG0)
is set to 1, note the following:
WARNING
Linear interpolation positioning is performed.
CAUTION
1 The G00 command is replaced with the G01 command
upon being executed. Even if two axes are specified,
movement is performed at the feedrate specified in
parameter No. 8481.
Example)
If the following command is specified when parameter No.
8481 is set to 1000 mm/min, F1000 is executed instead of
F1414:
G00 X100. Y100.;
2 Because the G00 command is replaced with the G01
command upon being executed, rapid traverse override is
disabled, the cutting feedrate override being enabled
instead.
NOTE
command upon being executed, acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation is done using the time constant of
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting
feed.
command upon being executed, acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation in RISC HPCC mode is enabled. (Both
linear
and
bellshaped
acceleration/deceleration are supported.)
3 Inposition check is not executed.
7.1.14.7
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
610
II.19.5
Highprecision contour control
B63003EN1/02
7.1.15
Positioning by Optimul
Acceleration
General
When a rapid traverse command is specified during automatic operation,

the function for positioning by optimul acceleration can be used to adjust
the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain, according to the
amount of travel for the block. This reduces the time required for
positioning and position check, therefore reducing the cycle time.
When rapid traverse is specified in automatic operation, the function
adjusts the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain to one of seven
levels, according to the amount of travel for the block. The relationship
between the amount of travel and the corresponding rapid traverse rate,
time constant, and loop gain are specified in parameters. This function
is not effective for cutting feed. (For cutting feed, the loop gain set in
parameter 1825 is used.)
Valid commands
This function is effective for all commands that cause rapid traverse in
automatic operation, including commands for canned cycles, automatic
reference position return, and machine coordinate system selection, as
well as the G00 command. This function, however, becomes ineffective
in the following cases, and the feedrate, time constant, and loop gain set
in parameters 1420, 1620 and 1825 are used:
(1) When an automatic reference position return (G28) is specified before
the reference position is established
(2) When the G00 command is executed on the RISC side in
highprecision contour control (when bit 7 (SG0) of parameter 8403
is set to 1)
(3) In AI contour control mode
(4) In Cs axis contour control mode
Cutting feed
This function is not effective for cutting feed.
Manual operation
This function is not effective in manual operation. The function is not

effective for movement caused by manual numeric commands.
Manual intervention
When rapid traverse is stopped by feed hold or mode change during

automatic operation, and manual operation is performed, the loop gain is
changed to the value set in parameter 1825. When the program is
restarted, the interrupted block is resumed without changing the loop gain
used in manual operation. Then, when the next and subsequent blocks are
executed, one of the values set in parameters 6181 to 6187 is used again
as the loop gain.
PMC axis control
This function is not effective during PMC axis control.
Rapid traverse overlap
When this function is enabled, rapid traverse overlap (enabled when bit
4 (RTO) of parameter 1601 is set to 1) is not performed.
611
Rapid traverse
bellshaped
B63003EN1/02
When rapid traverse bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is used, T1 in

the figure below and the rapid traverse rate are adjusted. T2 is not
adjusted.
Rapid traverse rate
T2/2
T1
T2/2
Time
Angular axis control
When angular axis control is used, adjustment is performed according to

the amount of travel in the Cartesian coordinate system.
Coordinate system
rotation, scaling
In coordinate system rotation mode, adjustment is performed according

to the amount of travel after coordinate system rotation. In scaling mode,
adjustment is performed in a similar manner.
Cutter compensation C,
tooltip radius
compensation
In cutter compensation C or tooltip radius compensation mode,

adjustment is performed according to the amount of travel after
compensation.
Threedimensional
In threedimensional coordinate conversion mode, adjustment is

performed according to the amount of travel before coordinate
conversion.
Polar coordinate
interpolation
In polar coordinate interpolation mode, adjustment is performed

according to the amount of travel in the Cartesian coordinate system.
Simple synchronous
control
When using this function with simple synchronous control, enable this
function for both the master and slave axes (by setting bit 0 (OAD) of
parameter 6131 to 1), and set the same rapid traverse rate, time constant,
and loop gain values for both the master and slave axes.
Rapid traverse of linear

interpolation type
Even when rapid traverse of linear interpolation type is being used (when
bit 1 (LRP) of parameter 1401 is set to 1), adjustment is performed. In
this case, however, the feedrate for each axis is determined so that the tool
path becomes linear. Therefore, the tool does not always move at a
parameterset rapid traverse rate (parameters 6161 to 6167).
612
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
6131
#0
OAD

OAD The function for positioning by optimul acceleration is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
6141
Distance D1 for level 1 (metric input, or rotation axis)
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6151
Distance D1 for level 1 (inch input)
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
[Data type] 2word
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input,
rotation axis
0.001
0.0001
mm, deg
Inch input
0.0001
0.00001
inch
These parameters set the positioning distances used when the function for
adjusting the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain to one of
seven levels according to the positioning distance is used. (The settings
are common to all axes.)
613
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The settings must satisfy the relationship D1 < D2 < D3 < D4
< D5 < D6.
2 Up to seven levels can be used for adjustment. When using
four levels, for example, set D4 to 99999999.
3 For diameter programming axes, set a diameter. For
example, assume that 10.000 mm is set in a parameter for
diameter programming axes. Then, when the amount of
travel has reached 10.000 mm, adjustment is performed.
6161
Level 1 rapid traverse rate
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit of data
Valid data range
[Valid data range]
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
30 to 240000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0 to 96000
The rapid traverse rate for each axis is set.
6171
Level 1 rapid traverse time constant
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177

[Unit of data] ms
The rapid traverse time constant for each axis is set.
614
B63003EN1/02
6181
Level 1 servo loop gain
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187

[Unit of data] 0.01 s1
The servo loop gain for each axis is set.
Positioning distances and corresponding parameter Nos.

Level
Positioning
distance d
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse

rate
time constant
Servo loop
gain
0<dx D1
6161
6171
6181
D1<dx D2
6162
6172
6182
D2<dx D3
6163
6173
6183
D3<dx D4
6164
6174
6184
D4<dx D5
6165
6175
6185
D5<dx D6
6166
6176
6186
D6<d
6167
6177
6187
7.1.16
AI Contour Control
(M series)
General
By taking full advantages of highprecision contour control using a RISC

processor, this function enables highspeed highprecision machining
without the need for special hardware.
This function is designed for highspeed highprecision machining. The
use of this function enables the suppression of the delay in the servo
system and the delay in acceleration/deceleration which increases as the
feedrate increases, therefore reducing the machining profile error.
This function enables lookahead linear acceleration/deceleration before
the interpolation of up to 15 blocks. This results in smooth
acceleration/deceleration over many blocks, as well as highspeed
machining.
615
B63003EN1/02
In AI contour control mode, the following functions are effective:

(1) Lookahead linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
(lookahead control of up to 40 blocks)
(2) Automatic corner deceleration
(3) Feedrate clamping by acceleration
(4) Feedrate clamping by arc radius
(5) Block overlap (up to 5 blocks)
(6) Lookahead feedforward
For details of the above functions, see the relevant explanations.
Specifications
Axis control
Description
Name
Controlled axes
3 to 8
Simultaneously controlled
axes
Up to 6
Axis name
Basic three axes: Always X, Y, and Z

Other axes: U, V, W, A, B, or C
0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, 0.0001 inch
Input increment 1/10
0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg, 0.00001 inch
Interpolation function
Name
Positioning (G00)
Can be programmed
Cannot be programmed
Description
(Positioning of linear interpolation type)

(G60)
Exact stop (G09)
Exact stop mode (G61)

Tapping mode (G63)
Automatic corner override

(G62)
Linear interpolation (G01)
(G02, G03)
(Multiple quadrants allowed)
Helical interpolation
(G02, G03)
(Circular interpolation + Up to four axes for

linear interpolation)
When the helical interpolation function is selected, up to two axes for linear interpolation
can be specified. When the helical interpolation B function is selected, up to four axes for
linear interpolation can be specified. A desired feedrate must be specified by also taking movement along the helical axis into
consideration.
Spiral interpolation/Conical
interpolation (G02, G03)
Involute interpolation
(G02.2, G03.2)
616
B63003EN1/02
Name
Description
(G02.3, G03.3)
Dwell (G04)
(For a specified number of seconds or revolutions)

To specify a number of revolutions for the
dwell, the thread cutting/synchronous feed
function must be selected.
Polar coordinate interpolation

(G12.1, G13.1)
Cylindrical interpolation
(G07.1)
Thread cutting/synchronous
feed (G33)
Skip function (G31)
Highspeed skip function

(G31)
Multistage skip function

(G31 Px)

(G28)
When the reference position is not established, P/S alarm No. 090 is issued.
*

check (G27)
2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference

Floating reference position

return (G30.1)
Canned cycle (G73 to G89)
Rigid tapping
Return to initial point in

canned cycle (G98)/Return to
R point in canned cycle (G99)
Normal direction control
(G41.1, G42.1)
Continuous dressing
Infeed control (G161)

Highspeed cycle machining

(G05)
Absolute command (G90)/
Incremental command (G91)
617
B63003EN1/02
Feed functions
Can be programmed
::
::
Name
Rapid traverse rate
Description
Up to 240 m/min (0.01 mm)
Up to 100 m/min (0.0001 mm)
Rapid traverse rate override
F0, 25, 50, 100 %
Rapid traverse rate override

in units of 1%
0% to 100 %
Feed per minute (G94)
Feed per rotation (G95)
Rapid traverse bellshaped

Cutting feed linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Feedrate override
(lookahead control of up to 15 blocks)
0% to 254%
Feed by F command with

one digit
Inverse time feed (G93)
Tool compensation functions
Can be programmed
::
f
::
Name
Description
(G40, G41, G42)
Tool length compensation

(G43, G44, G49)
Program input
Can be programmed
::
::
Name
Description
Plane selection
(G17, G18, G19)
Local coordinate system

(G52)

(G54 to G59) (G54.1Pxx)

(G92)

preset (G92.1)
Interrupttype custom macro
618
B63003EN1/02
Others
Can be programmed
::
::
Name
Description
Cycle start/Feed hold

Dry run
Single block
Interlock
Machine lock
When an axis machine lock signal (MLK1 to

MLK8) is turned on or off, acceleration/deceleration is not performed on the axis held
under machine lock.
Controlin/controlout command ( )
Optional block skip command

(/n: n is a number)
Miscellaneous function
(Mxxxx)
Only the function code signal and function

strobe signal are output.
Spindle function (Sxxxx)

Tool function (Txxxx)

Second auxiliary function

(Bxxxx)

Synchronous control cannot be enabled or

disabled.
Program restart
Retrace function
Tool life management

Macro executor
(execution macro)
MDI operation
When G05.1 Q1 is specified in MDI mode,

P/S alarm No. 5113 is issued. The operation
mode cannot be switched to MDI mode in
simple highprecision contour control
mode.
Manual intervention
Those functions marked with an asterisk (*) do not perform lookahead

control of multiple blocks.
619
Conditions for entering

AI contour control mode
B63003EN1/02
Before G05.1 Q1, the following modal codes must be specified. If this
condition is not satisfied, P/S alarm No. 5111 will be issued.
G code
Description
G00
G01
G02
G03
Positioning
Circular interpolation (CW)
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G15
Polar coordinate command cancel
G25
Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
G40
Cutter compensation cancel
G40.1
Normal direction control cancel mode
G49
Tool length compensation cancel
G50
Scaling cancel
G50.1
Programmable mirror image cancel
G64
Cutting mode
G67
Macro modal call cancel
G69
Coordinate rotation cancel
G80
Canned cycle cancel
G94
Feed per minute
G97
Constant surface speed control cancel
G160
Infeed control function cancel
620
B63003EN1/02
Advanced preview linear

For a cutting feed command in feed per minute mode, advanced preview
control of up to 15 blocks can be performed, and linear
acceleration/deceleration can be performed for a programmed feedrate
(before interpolation). When acceleration/deceleration is performed after
interpolation, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the data
resulting from interpolation, which changes the interpolation data. For
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, on the other hand,
acceleration/deceleration is performed for the feedrate data before
interpolation, so that the interpolation data is not changed by
acceleration/deceleration. Therefore, interpolation data can always be
aligned with a specified line or curve to eliminate any machining profile
errors caused by a delay in acceleration/deceleration.
Linear acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
Calculation
of feedrate
Specified
feedrate
Calculation of
interpolation
Pulse
distribution
Linear interpolation,
circular interpolation, etc.
Acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation
Servo
control
(Example of deceleration)
To execute a block at a specified feedrate, the feedrate is reduced from that
of the previous block.
Feedrate
Point 1
Specified feedrate
F3
Point 2
Feedrate resulting
from acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
F2
F1
N1
N2
Time
To reduce the feedrate from F3 to F2, deceleration must be started at Point

1.
To decrease the feedrate from F2 to F1, deceleration must be started at
Point 2.
Since advanced preview control for up to 40 blocks is performed,
deceleration over multiple blocks can be performed.
621
B63003EN1/02
(Example of acceleration)
To execute a block at a specified feedrate, the feedrate is increased.
Feedrate
Specified feedrate
Feedrate resulting
from acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
F3
F2
F1
Time
N1
Automatic corner
deceleration
N2
When there are axes for which the difference in feedrate between blocks
exceeds the allowable feedrate difference set in parameter 1783, the
automatic corner deceleration function calculates the feedrate at a corner
and performs deceleration so that the calculated feedrate is attained at the
junction of the blocks. The feedrate at the corner is calculated as
explained below, where the ratio of the difference in the actual feedrate
to the allowable feedrate difference is obtained for each axis, after which
the largest of these ratios is used as a reference.
The change in feedrate on each axis (Vx, Vy, ...) when the tool moves at
a specified feedrate F is compared with the value set in parameter 1783
(Vprmx, Vprmy, ...). If the change in the feedrate for any axis exceeds
the parameterset value, the following is obtained first:
Vx
Rmax = max
Vy
Vprmx , Vprmy
,...
Then, the feedrate (Fc) is obtained from the following expression, after
which corner deceleration is performed:
Fc = F
1
Rmax
For example, suppose that the direction of the tool movement changes
through 90 degrees from Xaxis movement to Yaxis movement, and
also suppose that the specified feedrate is 1000 mm/min, and that the
allowable feedrate difference (parameter 1783) is set to 500 mm/min.
Then, deceleration is performed as shown in the figure below.
622
B63003EN1/02
N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ;

N2 Y100. ;
N2
Tool path when tool movement
is not decelerated at the corner
Tool path when tool movement
is decelerated at the corner
Feedrate on the Xaxis
Feedrate
N1
When deceleration is not

performed at the corner
When deceleration is performed at the corner
F1000
F500
N1
Time
Feedrate on the Yaxis

Feedrate
F1000
F500
N2
Time
N2
Time
Tangent direction feedrate

Feedrate
F1000
F500
N1
623
Feedrate clamping by
acceleration
B63003EN1/02
When a curve is made up of a series of short straight lines as shown in the

figure below, the difference in feedrate on each axis at each corner is not
large. Therefore, deceleration by feedrate difference is not effective.
Small feedrate differences occur successively, however, so a large
acceleration will be generated on each axis as a whole.
In such cases, deceleration is performed to reduce the machining error and
the stress imposed on the machine, both of which are caused by excessive
acceleration. The target feedrate to be reached by deceleration is set so
that the acceleration on each axis, as obtained from the expression below,
does not exceed the allowable acceleration set for all axes.
The allowable acceleration is set using the maximum cutting feedrate
(parameter 1432) and the time required to reach the maximum cutting
feedrate (parameter 1785).
Acceleration on an axis =
Difference in feedrate on the axis at a corner
Amount of travel
Amount of travel in
in the next block
the
previous
block
max
,
F
F
A target feedrate to be reached by deceleration is obtained for each corner.
The actual feedrate is the feedrate to be reached by deceleration, as
obtained at the start point of a block, or the feedrate to be reached by
deceleration as obtained at the end point of the block, whichever is the
lower.
Example:
In the following example, too great an acceleration/deceleration (the
inclination of the dotted lines in the feedrate graphs) is observed
between N2 and N4 and between N6 and N8, so deceleration is
performed in these areas.
N8
N7
N9
N6
N5
N4
N1
N2
624
N3
B63003EN1/02
N1
N2
N3
Feedrate clamping by
arc radius
N1
N2
N3
This function can suppress acceleration in an arc machining block to an

allowable level by clamping the feedrate. Based on the arc radius R and
the maximum allowable feedrate V for that arc radius (which are set in
parameters), this function calculates the maximum allowable feedrate v
for an arc with a programmed radius r, as shown below. If the specified
feedrate exceeds feedrate V, the feedrate can be clamped to feedrate v
automatically.
V2
Maximum allowable acceleration =
R
R : Arc radius, V : Feedrate for arc radius R
Then, the maximum allowable feedrate v for an arc with radius r is
obtained from the following expression:
v + rDR
As the specified arc radius becomes smaller, the maximum allowable

feedrate v falls. To prevent the maximum allowable feedrate from
becoming too small, the lower limit for feedrate clamping based on the
arc radius can be set in parameter 1732. If the maximum allowable
feedrate is less than the value set in parameter 1732, the parameterset
value can be used as the maximum allowable feedrate v.
625
Rapid traverse
B63003EN1/02
In rapid traverse, acceleration/deceleration is performed using linear

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, and tool movement is
performed by positioning based on linear interpolation. The tool
movement feedrate is obtained from the rapid traverse rate for each axis
which is set in parameter 1420.
The acceleration in
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is obtained from the rapid
traverse rate for each axis which is set in parameter 1420 and the linear
acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis in rapid traverse
which is set in parameter 1620. They are obtained as follows:
(1) Tool movement feedrate
For each axis along which the tool moves, calculation is performed
using the following expression. Then, from among the calculated
values, the smallest value is used as the tool movement feedrate.
Rapid traverse rate on an axis (parameter 1420)
Amount of travel for a block
Amount of travel along an axis
(2) Acceleration in linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
For each axis along which the tool moves, calculation is performed
using the following expression. Then, from among the calculated
values, the smallest value is used as the acceleration in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation during movement.
Rapid traverse rate on an axis (parameter 1420)
Time constant for an axis (parameter 1620)
Amount of travel for a block
Amount of travel along an axis
NOTE
Any overlap of rapid traverse blocks is invalid.
Signal
AI contour control mode

signal SHPC <F062#0>
[Function] This signal indicates that the system is in AI contour control mode.
D The system is in AI contour control mode.
D The system is in other than AI contour control mode.
626
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
F062
#0
AICC
Parameter
linear acceleration/
deceleration before
interpolation
1770
Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration

beforeinterpolation
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISA, ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 to 240000
6 to 100000
Inch machine
0.01 inch/min
6 to 9600
6 to 4800
This parameter sets the maximum machining feedrate for linear

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. (Parameter 1 for setting
the acceleration in linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
1771
Time required to reach the maximum machining feedrate during linear

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (time constant)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter sets the time (time constant) required to reach the feedrate
set in parameter 1. (Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
NOTE
1 When parameter 1770 or 1771 is set to 0, linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not
performed.
2 Set these parameters so that parameter 1770/parameter
1771 = 5 or more.
627
B63003EN1/02
Feedrate
(mm/min)
Parameter
1770
Parameter 1771
1784
Time (ms)
Speed when an overtravel alarm is issued during linear acceleration/deceleration

beforeinterpolation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISA, ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
Inch machine
0.01 inch/min
6 to 6000
6 to 4800
This parameter sets the speed to be reached when an overtravel alarm is

issued during linear acceleration/deceleration during interpolation. If an
overtravel alarm is issued during linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the movement is decelerated and halted after the issue of the
alarm. Therefore, the tool overruns by an amount equal to the distance
traveled during deceleration. The overrun varies depending on the
feedrate observed when the overtravel alarm is issued. The overrun can
be reduced by performing deceleration to the speed set in parameter 1784
in advance when an overtravel alarm is issued. In this case, deceleration
is performed so that the feedrate at the instant when the overtravel alarm
is issued does not exceed the parameterset speed. So, deceleration may
be completed earlier. Upon the completion of deceleration, the feedrate
is set to the parameterset speed.
NOTE
This parameter is invalid for rapid traverse blocks.
If the following condition is satisfied, deceleration is performed:

Distance to the
stored stroke limit
on an axis
<
Distance required for decelerating the current speed

(tangent direction feedrate)
to the speed set in parameter 1784
The overrun is expressed as follows:

FIX
Overrun distance x
628
FOT
F
1875
T
8
+ 1.5
F
T
B63003EN1/02
F : Maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation (parameter 1770)
T : Time required to reach the maximum machining feedrate during linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter 1771)
FOT : Speed when an overtravel alarm is issued during linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter 1784)
FIX : Any fractional part is truncated.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set, the above control is not performed.
2 When stroke check is invalid, the above control is also
invalid.
3 The above control is valid only for stored stroke check 1.
Parameter related to
automatic corner
deceleration
1783
Allowable feedrate difference for each axis in the corner deceleration function by
feedrate difference (for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISA, ISB
ISC
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 to 6000
6 to 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
This parameter sets the allowable difference in feedrate on each axis in the
automatic corner deceleration function by the difference in feedrate when
liner acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
Parameter related to
feedrate clamping by
acceleration
1785
Parameter for determining the allowable acceleration in feedrate clamping

by acceleration

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter is used to set the time required to reach the maximum
cutting feedrate and determine the allowable acceleration when feedrate
clamping by acceleration is performed.
The allowable acceleration is determined from the maximum cutting
feedrate and the data set in this parameter. Parameter 1432 (maximum
cutting feedrate in simple highprecision contour control mode) is used
as the maximum cutting feedrate.
629
B63003EN1/02
Feedrate
(mm/min)
Allowable acceleration
Parameter
1432
Parameter 1785
Time (ms)
feedrate clamping by arc
radius
1731
Arc radius for the upper limit imposed on feedrate
[Data type] 2word
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the arc radius for the upper limit imposed on the
feedrate set in parameter 1730.
1730
Upper limit imposed on feedrate for arc radius R
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISA, ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
8 to 15000
0 to 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
8 to 6000
0 to 4800
This parameter sets the upper limit imposed on the feed rate for the arc
radius set in parameter 1731.
(Example)
N1
Specified
feedrate
a
N2
b
a
N3
N1
630
N2
N3
Time
B63003EN1/02
1732
Lower limit RVmin for feedrate clamping by arc radius
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
ISA, ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
8 to 15000
0 to 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
8 to 6000
0 to 4800
[Valid data range]
When the function for clamping the feedrate by arc radius is used, the
upper limit imposed on the feedrate falls with the arc radius. If the upper
limit imposed on the feedrate is less than the lower limit imposed on the
feedrate clamping RVmin, the upper limit imposed on the feedrate is set as
RVmin.
Other parameters
1422
Upper limit imposed on cutting feedrate in AI contour control
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISA, ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 to 240000
6 to 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 to 96000
6 to 4800
This parameter is used to set the upper limit on the cutting feedrate in AI
contour control mode.
1432
Maximum cutting feedrate in AI contour control mode (for each axis)
[Data type] 2word

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISA, ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
0 to 240000
0 to 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
0 to 96000
0 to 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
0 to 240000
0 to 100000
This parameter sets the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in AI
contour control mode.
#7
7050
#6
MI1
#5
MI0
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit
MI1, MI0 Set the following values
Setting
631
MI1
MI0
#7
#6
#5
B63003EN1/02
#4
#3
#2
#1
7052
#0
NMI

For the PMCcontrolled axes and Cs axis, set 1.
Parameter numbers in
standard mode,
advanced preview
control mode, and
simple highprecision
contour control mode
(Parameters related to linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)

Parameter
Parameter No.
Standard
mode
type (type A/B)
Advanced
preview
control
AI contour
control
FWB/1602#0
None
Parameter 1 for setting acceleration
1630
1770
Parameter 2 for setting acceleration
1631
1771
Speed when overtravel alarm

is issued
1784
(Parameters related to automatic corner deceleration)

Parameter
Parameter No.
Standard
mode
Method for determining automatic corner deceleration

(angle/feedrate difference)
Advanced
preview
control
CSD/1602#4
AI contour
control
None
Lower limit imposed on feedrate

(control based on angle)
1778
1777
None
Angle to be determined
(control based on angle)
1740
1779
None
Allowable feedrate difference

for all axes (control based on
feedrate difference)
1780
Allowable feedrate difference

for each axis (control based
on feedrate difference)
None
1783
(Parameters related to feedrate clamping by arc radius)

Parameter
Parameter No.
Standard
mode
Advanced
preview
control
Arc radius for the upper limit

of feedrate
1731
Upper limit imposed on feedrate for arc radius R
1730
Lower limit imposed on clamp

feedrate
1732
632
AI contour
control
B63003EN1/02
(Other parameters)
Parameter
Parameter No.
Standard
mode
Precision of radius error in circular interpolation
Alarm and message
Advanced
preview
control
AI contour
control
PCIR1/3403#0
Maximum cutting feedrate

(for all axes)
1422
Maximum cutting feedrate

(for each axis)
1430
None
1431
1422
1432
Number

Message
Description
5110
IMPROPER GCODE
(G05.1 G1 MODE)
(M series)
An invalid G code is specified in simple highprecision contour control

mode.
A command is specified for the index
table indexing axis in simple high
precision contour control mode.
5111
IMPROPER MODAL G
CODE (G05.1 G1)
(M series)
When simple highprecision contour

control mode is specified, a G code
that cannot be used is placed in the
model state.
5112
G08 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED (G05.1 G1)

(M series)
An advanced preview control command (G08) is specified in simple

highprecision contour control mode.
5113
CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI Simple highprecision contour control

MODE (G05.1) (M series) (G05.1) is specified in MDI mode.
5114
NOT STOP POSITION

(G05.1 Q1)
(M series)
Upon a restart after manual intervention, the coordinates at which manual

intervention was performed are not
restored.
5156
SPL: ERROR
(M series)
The controlled axis selection signal

(PMC axis control) changes in simple
highprecision contour control mode.
The simple synchronous axis selection signal changes in simple high
precision contour control mode.
5157
Feedrate 0 (AICC)
The parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422 or
1432) is set to 0.
The parameter for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1770 or 1771) is set to 0.
633
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 When the total distance for the blocks under advanced
preview control is equal to or less than the deceleration
distance from the current feedrate, deceleration starts.
When advanced preview control has proceeded upon the
completion of deceleration, and the total distance for the
blocks increases,acceleration starts. Especially, when a
series of blocks containing very small amounts of travel are
specified, deceleration and acceleration may be alternated,
which prevents the feedrate from becoming constant. In
such a case, specify a lower feedrate.
2 When the dry run signal is inverted from 0 to 1 or from 1 to
0 during movement along an axis, the speed of movement
is increased or reduced to a specified speed without first
being reduced to zero.
3 When a nomovement block or a oneshot G code such as
G04 is encountered in simple highprecision contour
control mode, the movement is decelerated and halted in
the preceding block.
Note
NOTE
1 As acceleration after interpolation, use linear or bellshaped
acceleration. Exponential acceleration/deceleration cannot
be used.
2 Upon switching to simple highprecision contour control
mode, all manual handle interrupts are ignored.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
634
II.19.6
Simple highprecision contour

control
B63003EN1/02
7.1.17
Highspeed Linear
Interpolation (M series)
General
Highspeed linear
interpolation mode
The highspeed linear interpolation function processes a move command

related to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but by
highspeed linear interpolation. This function enables the highspeed
execution of an NC program including a series of very small amounts of
travel.
The highspeed linear interpolation start command G05 P2 places the
system in highspeed linear interpolation mode, in which highspeed
linear interpolation is executed. The highspeed linear interpolation end
command G05P0 places the system in standard NC program operation
mode.
At powerup or in the NC reset state, the system enters standard NC
program operation mode.
After the end of highspeed linear interpolation mode, the system enters
standard NC program operation mode.
Cutting feedrate
Specify a cutting feedrate in highspeed linear interpolation mode. If no

cutting feedrate is specified, the modal F value is assumed.
Maximum feedrate
Interpolation period:
8 ms
4 ms
(ISB mm input)
122848
245696
mm/min
mm/min
(ISB inch input)
12284.8 inch/min
24569.6 inch/mim
(ISC mm input)
12284
24569
(ISC inch input)
mm/min
1228.48 inch/min
mm/min
2456.96 inch/min
(Maximum feedrate) =
122,848 8/(interpolation period) (ISB, metric input)
Minimum feedrate
8 ms
(ISB mm input)
(ISB inch input)
0.38 inch/min
0.76 inch/mim
(ISC mm input)
(ISC inch input)
0.38 inch/min
(Minimum feedrate) = 4
635
mm/min
4 ms
mm/min
mm/min
mm/min
0.76 inch/min
8/(interpolation period) (ISB, metric input)
Interpolation period
B63003EN1/02
In highspeed linear interpolation mode, the NC interpolation period can

be changed. As the interpolation period decreases, the machining speed
and precision increase.
IT2, IT1, and IT0 bits (bits 6, 5, and 4 of parameter 7501)
Acceleration/
deceleration processing
in highspeed linear
interpolation mode
IT2
IT1
IT0
8 ms in highspeed linear interpolation

mode

mode

mode

mode
0.5 ms in highspeed linear interpolation

mode
Interpolation period
In highspeed linear interpolation mode, acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation is not effective.
Acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is enabled or disabled by setting SUP (bit 0 of parameter
No.7502). When the interpolation period is set to 4 ms or less, the time
constant for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation and
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is restricted as
follows:
Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation and
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation (parameter
No.1628)
Interpolation period 8 ms: Maximum setting = 512 ms
Interpolation period 0.5 ms: Maximum setting = 032 ms
636
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
IT2
7501
#5
IT1
#4
IT0
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

IT2 IT1 IT0
0
0
0 : The interpolation period in
interpolation mode is 8 ms.
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
interpolation mode is 0.5 ms.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
highspeed linear
highspeed linear
highspeed linear
highspeed linear
highspeed linear
#1
7502
#0
SUP
[Data type] Bit

SUP 0 : Acceleration/deceleration processing is disabled in highspeed linear
interpolation mode.
1 : Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is enabled in
highspeed linear interpolation mode.
7510
Number of controlled axes in highspeed linear interpolation mode
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] Number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the number of axes controlled in highspeed linear
interpolation mode.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
637
II.19.8
Highspeed linear interpolation
B63003EN1/02
7.2
ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION
CONTROL
7.2.1
Automatic
Acceleration/
Deceleration
General
Automatic acceleration/
deceleration
To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically

applied when the tool starts and ends its movement (Fig. 7.2.1).
Rapid traverse rate
FR
FR : Rapid traverse rate
T R : Acceleration/
TR
TR
deceleration time
constant for rapid
traverse rate
Time
Cutting feedrate
FC : Cutting feedrate
FC
T C : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a cutting
feedrate
TC
Time
TC
Fig. 7.2.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration (example)
Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending

movement, resulting in smooth start and stop.
Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feedrate
changes, so change in speed is also smoothly done.
It is not necessary to take acceleration/deceleration into consideration
when programming.
Rapid traverse:Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is
set by parameter 1620)
638
B63003EN1/02
Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per

axis is set by parameter 1622)
Jog feed :
Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per
axis is set by parameter 1624)
Rate after interpolation
CNC
command
Pulse
distribution
(interpolation)
Rate after acceleration/deceleration

Servo motor
Acceleration/
deceleraton
control
Acceleraton/
deceleration
control
Servo control
Servo control
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1610
#4
JGLx
#3
#2
#1
CTBx
#0
CTLx

CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run
0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
NOTE
If the optional function of linear acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation in cutting feed is not provided,
exponential acceleration/deceleration is used irrespective
of this setting.
To use bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0 and select the
acceleration/deceleration using CTBx, bit 1 of parameter
No. 1610.
Parameter
CTBx
CTLx
Linear acceleration/deceleration after

interpolation
Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run

0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied (depending on the setting in
CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1610).
1 : Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
639
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
This parameter is effective only when the function of
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
cutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, the
setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, determines the
type of acceleration/deceleration irrespective of the setting
in this parameter.
JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in manual continuous feed (jog feed)
1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bellshaped
which is used for cutting feed).
1620
Time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bellshaped

acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse. When the optional function of bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse is provided, bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is
applied in rapid traverse. If the function is not provided, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied.
(1) When the function is provided, set this parameter to time constant T1
used in bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set
parameter No. 1621 to time constant T2.
(2) When the function is not provided, specify a time constant used in
linear acceleration/deceleration.
NOTE
When parameter No. 1621 (time constant T2 used for
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse) is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid
traverse even if the function is provided. In this case, this
parameter stands for a time constant used in linear
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
1622
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/

deceleration after interpolation or bellshaped acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation, in cutting feed for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (For exponential acceleration / deceleration)
0 to 512 (For linear acceleration / deceleration after interpolation or
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)
640
B63003EN1/02
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration or

linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bellshaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis.
Except for special applications, the same time constant must be set for all
axes in this parameter. If the time constants set for the axes differ from
each other, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained.
1623
FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000

cutting feed for each axis. Except for special applications, this parameter
must be set to 0 for all axes. If a value other than 0 is specified, proper
straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained.
1624
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bellshaped acceleration/

deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (For exponential acceleration / deceleration)
0 to 512 (For linear acceleration / deceleration after interpolation or
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in jog feed for each axis.
The type of acceleration/deceleration is determined depending on the
setting in parameter No. 1610.
1625
FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000

jog feed for each axis.
641
1626
B63003EN1/02
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration

in the thread cutting cycle for each axis
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in the
thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each axis.
1627
FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting

cycle for each axis

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
6 15000
6 12000
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
6 15000
6 12000

the thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each
axis.
1722
Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks

[Unit of data] %
This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arranged
successively, or when a rapid traverse block is followed by a block that
does not cause movement. When the feedrate for each axis of a block is
reduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution of the next block is
started.
NOTE
The parameter No. 1722 is effective when parameter No.
1601 #4 (RTO) is set to 1.
642
B63003EN1/02
Example
Fh: Rapid traverse feedrate
: Setting of parameter No. 1722 (feedrate reduction ratio)
Xaxis feedrate
Fd: Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: = Fh/ 100

N1 G00 X- - ;
Fh
N2 G00 X- - ;
Fd
When the function of overlapping rapid traverse

blocks is enabled
When the function of overlapping rapid traverse
blocks is disabled
7.2.2
Rapid Traverse
Bellshaped
Acceleration/
Deceleration
General
Rapid traverse bellshaped acceleration/deceleration smoothly increases

or decreases the rapid traverse rate, reducing the stress and strain imposed
on the machine due to the variation in the acceleration with changes in the
feedrate. As the time constant for bellshaped acceleration/deceleration
can be smaller than that for linear acceleration/deceleration, the time
needed for acceleration/deceleration can be reduced.
<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration>
<Rapid traverse bellshaped acceleration/deceleration>
Feedrate
Feedrate
Time
Acceleration
Time
Acceleration
Time
643
Time
B63003EN1/02
This function is enabled when the time constants for rapid traverse
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration T1 and T2 are specified in
parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621, respectively.
<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
Time
T: Time constant for linear

<Rapid traverse bell shaped acceleration/deceleration>
Speed
Rapid
traverse rate
T1: Set a time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration

T2: Set a time for rounding.

T2/2
T2
Total time=T1 + T2
Time for linear=T1 T2
Time for rounding part=T2
TIme
T1
T2/2
Set a time when rapid traverse override is 100% . When it is less than
100%, the total time is reduced (constant acceleration method).
Value of T1 is determined from motor torque. Set a value of T2 to 24 ms
or 32 ms.
Parameter
1620
Time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration or bellshaped

acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse. When the optional function of bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse is provided, bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is
applied in rapid traverse. If the function is not provided, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied.
644
B63003EN1/02
D
D
When the function is provided, set this parameter to time constant T1

used in bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set
parameter No. 1621 to time constant T2.
When the function is not provided, specify a time constant used for
linear acceleration/deceleration.
NOTE
When parameter No. 1621 (time constant T2 used for
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse) is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid
traverse even if the function is provided. In this case, this
parameter stands for a time constant used for linear
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
1621
Time constant t T2 used for bellshaped acceleration/deceleration

in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Specify time constant T2 used for bellshaped acceleration/deceleration
in rapid traverse for each axis.
NOTE
1 This parameter is effective when the function of
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse is
provided. Set parameter No. 1620 to time constant T1 used
for bellshaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse,
and set this parameter to time constant T2.
For details of time constants T1 and T2, see the description
of General of this section.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, linear acceleration/
deceleration is applied in rapid traverse. The setting in
parameter No. 1620 is used as a time constant in linear
acceleration/deceleration.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
7.2.1
645
AutomaticAcceleration/Deceleration
B63003EN1/02
7.2.3
Linear Acceleration/
Deceleration after
Cutting Feed
Interpolation
General
If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is

enabled (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, CTL), acceleration/deceleration is
performed as follows:
Cutting feed: Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration
time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for
each axis in parameter No. 1622.
Jog feed:
Exponential or linear acceleration/deceleration (constant
acceleration time)
If an identical time constant is specified, linear acceleration/deceleration
can halve the delay relative to the programmed time, in comparison with
exponential acceleration/deceleration, thus reducing the time needed for
acceleration and deceleration. If circular interpolation is performed,
especially when highspeed cutting is being performed, the actual tool
path created after acceleration/deceleration will deviate from the
programmed arc in the radial direction. This deviation can also be
reduced, in comparison with exponential acceleration/deceleration, by
applying linear acceleration/deceleration.
Feedrate
Feedrate
Acceleration/
deceleration
circuit
Time
Feedrate
Feedrate
Acceleration/
deceleration
circuit
Time
Time
646
Time
t : Time
constant
B63003EN1/02
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is an

optional function. This function is enabled when the CTL bit (bit 0 of
parameter
No.
1610)
is
specified.
If
bellshaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is also
enabled, bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is executed. The time
constants for cutting feed and jog feed for each axis are specified in
parameter Nos. 1622 and 1624 respectively, in the same way as for
exponential acceleration/deceleration. The values specified for the FL
feedrate for cutting feed (parameter No. 1623) and the FL feedrate for jog
feed (parameter No. 1625) are ignored (always assumed to be 0).
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1610
#4
JGLx
#3
#2
#1
#0
CTLx

Parameter
CTBx
CTLx
Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

1622
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/


[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (For exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512 (For linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or
647
1624
B63003EN1/02
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bellshaped

acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration, bell
shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear
The type of acceleration/deceleration is determined depending on the
648
B63003EN1/02
Note
If the optional function for linear acceleration/deceleration after

interpolation for cutting feed is not provided, exponential
acceleration/deceleration is always selected, irrespective of the setting.
NOTE
1 If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for
cutting feed is enabled, linear acceleration/deceleration is
executed during cutting feed and during a dry run. Linear
acceleration/deceleration can also be executed during jog
feed if the JGL bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1610) is specified
accordingly.
2 In circular interpolation especially when circular cutting is
executed at high speed, the actual path of the accelerated
or decelerated tool deviates from the specified arc in the
direction of the radius.
Specified path
Dr
Actual path
Dr
v
r
T1
T2
:Maximum radius error (mm)

:Feedrate (mm/s)
:Radius of arc (mm)
:Acceleration/deceleration time constant (s)
:Time constant of servo loop (s)
(Reciprocal of position loop gain)
The maximum error in the radial direction (Dr) can be

approximated by the following expressions:
v2
1 T 2+
1 T 2)
Dr=(
1
2
2
v2
1
1
Dr=(
T12+
T22 ) Linear acceleration/deceleration or bell
2
24
shaped acceleration /deceleration

after interpolation
If the error caused by the time constant of the servo loop is

excluded, the error cause by linear acceleration/
deceleration or bell shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is 1/12 of that caused by exponential
3 Linear acceleration/deceleration can be executed both for
cutting feed and for jog feed along a PMC axis.
Acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed is executed even
if acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is selected. In jog
feed along the PMC axis, the time constant for cutting feed
is used instead of that for jog feed.
649
B63003EN1/02
7.2.4
BellShaped
Acceleration/
Deceleration after
Cutting Feed
Interpolation
General
The bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation

provides smooth acceleration and deceleration to reduce stress and strain
on the machine. If this function is enabled (bit 1 of parameter No. 1610,
CTB), acceleration/deceleration is performed as follows:
Cutting feed: Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration time)
Jog feed:
Exponential or bellshaped acceleration/deceleration
(constant acceleration time)
Speed
Speed
Bellshaped Acceleration/
Deceleration
Acceleration/
deceleration
function
Time
Time
T:Time Constant
Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is

an optional function. This function is enabled when the CTB bit (bit 1 of
parameter No. 1610) is specified. The time constants for cutting feed and
for jog feed for each axis are specified in parameter Nos. 1622 and 1624
respectively,
in
the
same
way
as
for
exponential
acceleration/deceleration. The values specified for the FL feedrate for
cutting feed (parameter No. 1623) and the FL feedrate for jog feed
(parameter No. 1625) are ignored (always assumed to be 0).
650
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1610
#4
JGLx
#3
#2
#1
CTBx
#0
CTLx

NOTE
If the optional function of linear acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation in cutting feed is not provided,
exponential acceleration/deceleration is used irrespective
of this setting.
To use bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0 and select the
acceleration/deceleration using CTBx, bit 1 of parameter
No. 1610.
Parameter
CTBx
CTLx
Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run

0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied (depending on the setting in
CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1610).
1 : Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
NOTE
This parameter is effective only when the function of
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
cutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, the
setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, determines the
type of acceleration/deceleration irrespective of the setting
in this parameter.

651
1622
B63003EN1/02
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/


[Unit of data] ms
<Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation>
Speed
Cutting
feedrate
T : Total time. It is constant irrespective of

feedrate. (Time constant is constant).
The curve corresponds to that T1 = T/2 and T2
= T/2 set in parameter No. 1620 and 1621.
No linear part exists.
1624
Time
Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bellshaped

acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] ms
bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear
The type of acceleration/deceleration is determinded depending on the
652
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 If bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
during cutting feed is enabled, bellshaped acceleration/
deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during a
dry run. Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration can also be
executed during jog feed if the JGL bit (bit 4 of parameter
No. 1610) is specified accordingly.
2 In circular interpolation, the actual tool path after
acceleration/deceleration deviates from the programmed
arc in the radial direction. To overcome this radial deviation,
see the note on linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation for cutting feed in Subsection 7.2.3.
3 Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration can be executed
both for cutting feed and for jog feed along a PMC axis. The
time constant for acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is
the same as that for cutting feed. In jog feed along the PMC
axis, the time constant for cutting feed is used instead of that
for jog feed.
7.2.5
Linear Acceleration/
Deceleration before
Cutting Feed
Interpolation
General
A specified cutting feedrate can be linearly increased or decreased before

interpolation. This function eliminates machining profile errors caused
by the delay occurring in acceleration or deceleration. The time required
for acceleration or deceleration by this function is significantly shorter
than that by the function of exponential acceleration/deceleration.
CNC command
Servo motor
Move data
Feedrate
Feedrate
command
Pulse
distribution
(interpolation)
Servo control
Servo control
Linear acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation
F: Value of feedrate command
Speed
Time
653
B63003EN1/02
The function of linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation increases or decreases the feedrate specified in the tangential direction.
If the feedrate command is changed
Type A
Acceleration/deceleration is started in the block in which a new feedrate

command is specified.
Type B (Set the FWB bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1602) to 1.)
Deceleration: Deceleration is started in a prior block such that deceleration is completed before the beginning of the block in
which a new feedrate command is specified.
Acceleration: Acceleration is started in the block in which a new feedrate command is specified.
<DecelerationExample>
Feedrate
F3
Point
P
<AccelerationExapmle>
Command feedrate
Command feedrate
Feedrate

F3
A type
F2
B type
F1
N1
N2
F2
Time F1
N1
N2
Time
With B type, to decelerate from F3 to F2,

deceleration must start with point P.
If an overtravel alarm occurs during linear acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation, the movement is decelerated and stopped. As
deceleration and stop are performed after the alarm occurs, the tool will
overrun by an amount equal to the distance required for the deceleration.
The actual overrun depends on the feedrate when the overtravel alarm
occurs.
The distance can be minimized by starting deceleration in advance, such
that the feedrate has fallen to the value specified in parameter No. 1784
when an overtravel alarm occurs. Because deceleration is executed such
that the feedrate at the time an overtravel alarm occurs does not exceed
the feedrate specified in the corresponding parameter, deceleration may
be completed earlier. After deceleration is completed, the feedrate
specified in the parameter is maintained.
654
B63003EN1/02
Deceleration is
satisfied:
performed
Distance to stored stroke limit 1

for each axis
<
when
the
following
condition
is
Distance needed to reduce the current feedrate (tangential feedrate)

to that specified in parameter No.
1784
The overrun is calculated as follows:
Overrun x
[FIX (FOT
F
T) ) 1.5] 2
8
1875
F
T
F : Maximum cutting feedrate in linear acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation (parameter No. 1630)
T : Time needed to attain the maximum cutting feedrate in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1631)
FOT: Feedrate at the time an overtravel alarm occurs during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1784)
FIX: Any fractional part is truncated.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1602
#0
FWB
[Data type] Bit

FWB Linear acceleration/deceleration of cutting feed before interpolation
0 : Type A of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
1 : Type B of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
1630

before interpolation (maximum machining feedrate during linear
acceleration/decelerationbeforeinterpolation)
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 240000
6 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 96000
6 48000
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In this parameter, set a maximum machining
feedrate during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In
parameter No. 1631, set a time used to reach the maximum machining feedrate.
655
B63003EN1/02
Feedrate
Parameter 1: Parameter No. 1630
Parameter 2: Parameter No. 1631
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Time
NOTE
disabled.
2 In the advanced preview control mode, parameter No. 1770
and parameter No. 1771 are valid.
1631

before interpolation (time used to reach the maximum machining feedrate
during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In this parameter, set the time (time constant)
used to reach the feedrate set in parameter No. 1630.
NOTE
disabled.
2 In parameter Nos. 1630 and 1631, set values that satisfy the
following:
Parameter No. 1630
y5
Parameter No. 1631
3 In the advanced preview control mode, parameter No. 1770
and parameter No. 1771 are valid.
656
B63003EN1/02
1784
Feedrate when overtravel alarm has generated during

acceleration/decelerationbeforeinterpolation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 15000
6 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 6000
6 4800
Deceleration is started beforehand to reach the feedrate set in the

parameter when an overtravel alarm is issued (when a limit is reached)
during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. By using
this parameter, the overrun distance that occurs when an overtravel alarm
is output can be reduced.
WARNING
The control described above is applicable only to stored
stroke limit 1.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the control described above
is not exercised.
2 Use typeB linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No. 1602
to 1).
657
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 If a block without a move command is found during
before
interpolation,
the
movement is decelerated and temporarily stopped in the
previous block.
2 If a oneshot G code is specified during acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation, the movement is
decelerated and temporarily stopped in the previous block.
3 If an M, S, or T code is specified in a block containing a move
command during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the movement is decelerated and temporarily
stopped in that block.
4 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
the block of G31 (skip function) is not subjected to
5 If the machine lock signal (MLK1 to MLK8) for an axis is set
on or off during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, the axis for which machine lock is performed
is not subjected to acceleration/deceleration.
6 During acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
automatic corner override is enabled only when the internal
circular cutting feedrate is changed.
7 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation can be
executed. So that acceleration/deceleration is executed
only before interpolation, set the time constant for
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation to zero.
8 In acceleration/deceleration before interpolation of type B,
deceleration is started if preprocessing for the next block
has not been completed before the remaining distance of
the current block becomes less than that needed to
decelerate and stop the movement.
9 If an F1digit command is executed in the inch input system,
avoid specifying a command for simultaneous movement
on two axes, including a rotation axis during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (M series).
10 The error detect signal (SMZ) is invalid during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (T series).
658
B63003EN1/02
7.2.6
Corner Control
7.2.6.1
Inposition check
General
Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is

checked.
If the inposition check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position
during deceleration. If the position is found to exceed the specified range,
the CNC does not execute the next block.
NOTE
The purpose of inposition check is to check that the servo
motor has reached within a specified range (specified with
parameter No. 1826).
Signal
Inposition signals
INP1 to INP8 <F104>
[Function] These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the in-position
condition.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name
corresponds to the control axis number.
I N P 1
1 . . . . The 1st axis is set to the in-position condition.
2 . . . . The 2nd axis is set to the in-position condition.
3 . . . . The 3rd axis is set to the in-position condition.
:
[Output condition] These signals turn to 1 in the following case :

The servo error of the corresponding control axis is within the
specified allowance.
These signals turn to 0 in the following cases :
The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the specified
allowance
659
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
.
F104
#7
INP8
#6
INP7
#5
INP6
#4
INP5
#3
INP4
#2
INP3
#1
INP2
#0
INP1
#7
#6
#5
NCI
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter
1601
[Data type] Bit

NCI Inposition check at deceleration
0 : Performed
1 : Not performed
1826
Inposition width for each axis

The inposition width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position
(the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the
inposition width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified
position.
Note
NOTE
1 The inposition signals may turn to 1 even during the
movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.
2 The inposition check function is enabled, at the interface
between two cutting blocks, in the following cases:
M series When the exact stop command (G09) or exact stop mode command (G61) is specified
T series
When the error detect signal is on
660
B63003EN1/02
7.2.6.2
Inposition check
independently of
feed/rapid traverse
General
If separate inposition check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is

executed, a small inposition check range can be specified between those
cutting feed blocks that require a high degree of precision. A large
inposition check range can be specified between those rapid traverse
blocks that require quick positioning.
Signal
See Subsection 7.2.6.1.
Parameter
#7
#6
1601
#5
NCI
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

NCI Inposition check at deceleration
0 : Performed
1 : Not performed
#7
#6
1801
#5
CIN
#4
CCI
#3
[Data type] Bit

CCI The inposition area for cutting feed is:
0 : Set in parameter No. 1826 (same as for rapid traverse).
1 : Set in bit 5 (CIN) of parameter No. 1801.
CIN When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801 = 1, the inposition area for
cutting feed is:
0 : Use value in parameter No. 1827 if the next block is also for cutting
feed, or use value in parameter No. 1826 if the next block is for rapid
traverse.
1 : Use value in parameter No. 1827, regardless of the next block. (The
setting of parameter No. 1826 is used for rapid traverse, and the
setting of parameter No. 1827 is used for cutting feed.)
Parameter CIN (No. 1801#5)
RapidRapid
RapidFeed
FeedFeed
FeedRapid
No. 1826
No. 1826
No. 1826
No. 1826
RapidRapid
RapidFeed
FeedFeed
FeedRapid
No. 1826
No. 1826
No. 1826
No. 1826
RapidRapid
RapidFeed
FeedFeed
FeedRapid
No. 1826
No.1826
No.1827
No. 1826
RapidRapid
RapidFeed
FeedFeed
FeedRapid
No. 1826
No. 1826
No. 1827
No. 1827
Parameter
CCI
(No.
1801#4)
661
1826
B63003EN1/02

The inposition width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position
(the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the
inposition width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified
position.
1827
Inposition width in cutting feed for each axis
[Data type] Word

Set an inposition width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is
valid when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801=1.
Note
NOTE
If the NCI bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 1601) is set to 1, so that
position check is not performed during deceleration, this
function is invalid. The system starts execution of the next
block as soon as deceleration has been completed, without
checking whether the servo position error is within the
specified range.
662
B63003EN1/02
7.2.6.3
Error detect (T series)
General
Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two
blocks during cutting feed.
Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded.
This part causes the corner of
the tool path to be rounded.
Feedrate
Time

Actual toolcenter path
If the error detect signal is used, it is possible to specify that a block not
be started until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous block has
been completed.
Feedrate
Time
Signal
Error detect signal SMZ

<G053, #6>
[Function] Enables error detection.
[Operation] If the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
S At the interface of two blocks during cutting feed, the control unit waits
until the acceleration/deceleration of the first block has been completed.
Only then does the control unit execute the next block.
The setting of the SMZ signal determines whether, at the interface of
two cutting blocks, the control unit waits until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous block has been completed.
Siganl address
#7
G053
#6
SMZ
#5
663
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed
until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting
block has been completed.
This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to
delay caused by the servo motor, however.
To prevent corner rounding due to delay caused by the
servo motor, use the inposition check function together
with this function.
After acceleration/
deceleration
Feedrate
After servo
motor delay
Time
Range of inposition check
7.2.7
Feed Forward in Rapid
Traverse
General
Feedforward control can be performed even during rapid traverse. In

this case, the servo position error is reduced, thus reducing the time
required for positioning to within the specified range.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1800
#4
#3
FFR
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

FFR Feedforward control is enabled for
0 : Cutting feed only
1 : Cutting feed and rapid traverse
Reference item
For details of this function, refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR a

series Maintenance Manual (B65165E).
664
B63003EN1/02
AUXILIARY FUNCTION
665
B63003EN1/02
8.1
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION/2ND
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION
General
Miscellaneous Function
(M code)
When a numeral of up to 8 digits is specified following address M, code

signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these
signals to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In some cases,
however, up to three M codes can be specified for some types of machine
tools (see 8.3 Multiple M code per Block)
Also, parameter No. 3030 can specify the maximum digits and if a
specified value exceeds the maximum digits, an alarm may be issued.
2nd Auxiliary Function

(B code)
When eight digits are specified after address B, a code signal and strobe
signal are sent. These signals are used to index the rotation axis of the
machine. The code signal is retained until another B code is specified.
In each block, a single B code can be specified. The maximum number
of digits that can be specified after address B is specified in parameter No.
3033. If more digits than the specified value are specified, an alarm
occurs.
For the M series, the address for specifying the 2nd auxiliary function can
be changed from B to another address (A, C, U, V, or W) by parameter
setting (parameter No. 3460).
Command Format of 2nd

Auxiliary Function
@
Command range
99999999 to +99999999
Command method
1. For the M series, a decimal point and a negative valve can be used for
input by setting AUP (bit 0 of parameter No. 3450).
With the T series, a decimal point and a negative value are always
enabled regardless of the parameter setting.
Command
Output value
B10.
10000
B10
10
2. It is possible to change over the scale factor of B output, 1000 or 1
when the decimal point input is omitted, using the parameter DPI
(No.3401#0).
Command
Output value
When DPI is 1: B1
1000
When DPI is 0: B1
1
666
B63003EN1/02
3. It is possible to change over the scale factor of B output 1000 or 10000

when the decimal point input is omitted in the inch input system, using
the parameter AUX (No.3405#0). When DPI=1.
Command
Output value
When AUX is 1: B1
10000
When AUX is 0: B1
1000
Basic procedure
The following signals are used with these functions. (For details of the
spindlespeed function and tool function, see Chapters 9 and 10.)
Output signal
Function
Program
address
Code signal
Strobe signal
Miscellaneous
function
M00 to M31
MF
Spindlespeed function
S00 to S31
SF
Tool function
T00 to T31
TF
Secondary auxiliary
function
B00 to B31
BF
Input signal
Distribution end
signal
Completion
signal
DEN
FIN
Each function uses different program addresses and different signals, but
they all input and output signals in the same way, as described below. (A
sample procedure for the miscellaneous function is described below. The
procedures for the spindlespeed function, tool function, and secondary
auxiliary function, are obtained simply by substituting S, T, or B in place
of M.)
(1) Suppose that Mxxx is specified in a program.
For xxx, the number of specifiable digits is specified in parameter Nos.
3030 to 3033 for each function. If more digits than the specified value
are specified, an alarm occurs.
(2) Code signal M00 to M31 is sent. After period TMF, specified in
parameter No. 3010 (standard value: 16 msec), strobe signal MF is set
to 1. The code signal is the binary representation of the programmed
value xxx.(*1) If the move, dwell, spindlespeed, or another function
is specified at the same time as the miscellaneous function, the
execution of the other function is started when the code signal of the
miscellaneous function is sent.
(3) When the strobe signal is set to 1, the PMC reads the code signal and
performs the corresponding operation.
(4) To execute an operation after the completion of the move, dwell or
other function specified in the block, wait until distribution end signal
DEN is set to 1.
(5) Upon completion of the operation, the PMC sets completion signal
FIN to 1. The completion signal is used by the miscellaneous function,
spindlespeed function, tool function, secondary auxiliary function,
external operation function described later, and other functions. If any
of these functions are executed simultaneously, the completion signal
must be set to 1 upon completion of all the functions.
667
B63003EN1/02
(6) If the completion signal remains set to 1 for longer than period TFIN,
specified in parameter No. 3011 (standard value: 16 msec), the CNC
sets the strobe signal to 0 and reports that the completion signal has
been received.
(7) When the strobe signal is set to 0, set the completion signal to 0 in the
PMC.
(8) When the completion signal is set to 0, the CNC sets all code signals
to 0 and completes all sequences of the miscellaneous function.(*2)
(9) Once all other commands in the same block have been completed, the
CNC executes the next block.
*1 When the tool function is executed, the programmed tool number is
sent as the code signal (T series).
*2 When the spindlespeed function, tool function, or secondary
auxiliary function is executed, the code signal is maintained until a
new code for the corresponding function is specified.
The timing diagram is shown below:
Example 1 Single miscellaneous function specified in a block

(1)(2)
M command
(independent)
code signals
Mxxx
M00M31
Strobe signals
MF
(3)
PMC side action

End signal
FIN
Distribution
end signals
DEN
(5)
(6)
(*2)
TMF
(7)(8) (9)
TFIN
Example 2 Move command and miscellaneous function in the same block

2a. Execution of a miscellaneous function without waiting for move command completion
(1)(2)
M command
Mxxx
Move command
Code signals
M00M31
Strobe signal
MF
(3)
PMC side action

End signal
Distribution
end signals
FIN
DEN
(5)
TMF
TFIN
668
(6)
(7) (8)
(9)
(*2)
B63003EN1/02
2b. Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion

(1)(2)
M command
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)(7)(8)
(9)
Mxx
Move command
Code signals
M00M31
Strobe signal
MF
PMC side action

End signal
FIN
Distribution
end signals
DEN
TMF
(*2)
TFIN
Signal
code signals
M00 to M31 <F010 to
F013>
strobe signal
MF <F007#0> [Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals report the specification of miscellaneous functions.
[Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see the description of Basic
procedure above.
NOTE
1 The following miscellaneous functions are only processed
internally by the control unit; they are not subject to output
even when specified:
M98, M99, M198
M code that calls a sub program (parameter No. 6071 to
6079)
M code that calls a custom macro (parameter No. 6080
to 6089)
2 Decode signals as well as the code signals and strobe
signal are output for the miscellaneous functions listed
below.
M00, M01, M02, M30
669
B63003EN1/02
Decode M signals
DM00 <F009#7>,
DM01 <F009#6>,
DM02 <F009#5>,
DM30 <F009#4>
[Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. The
miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output
signals as indicated below.
Command program
Output signal
M00
M01
M02
M30
DM00
DM01
DM02
DM30
[Output condition] A decode M signal goes 1 when:
The corresponding miscellaneous function is specified, and any move

commands and dwell commands specified in the same block are
completed. These signals are not output when the end signal of the
miscellaneous function is returned before completion of such move
commands and dwell commands.
A decode M signal goes 0 when:
The FIN signal goes 1
Reset occurs
Spindlespeed code
signals S00 to S31
<F022F025>
Spindlespeed strobe
signal SF <F007#2>
[Function] These signals report that spindle speed functions have been specified.
procedure above.
For S code output when the spindle serial output/spindle analog output
is used refer to section 9.3.
670
B63003EN1/02
Tool function code

signals T00 to T31
<F026F029>
Tool function strobe
signal TF <F007#3>
[Function] These signals report that tool functions have been specified.
procedure above.
Second auxiliary
function code signals
B00 to B31
<F030F033>
Second auxiliary
function strobe signal
BF <F007#4> (For lathes)
<F007#7>
(For machining center)
[Function] These signals report that second auxiliary functions have been specified.
procedure above.
End signal FIN <G004#3>

[Function] This signal reports the completion of a miscellaneous function,
spindlespeed function, tool function, second auxiliary function, or
external operation function.
[Operation] For the control unit operation and procedure when this signal goes 1,
see the description of Basic procedure above.
The FIN signal must remain 1 for a certain time (TFIN, which is set by
a parameter No. 3011) or longer. The FIN signal driven 1 is ignored if
the FIN signal goes 0 before TFIN elapses.
WARNING
Only one end signal is used for all functions above. The end
signal must go 1 after all functions are completed.
671
B63003EN1/02
Distribution end signal

DEN <F001#3>
[Function] These signals report that all commands (such as move commands and
dwell) are completed except those miscellaneous functions,
spindlespeed functions, 2nd auxilialy functions tool functions, and so
forth that are contained in the same block and have been sent to the PMC.
They also report that the end signal from the PMC is being awaited.
[Output condition] The DEN signal turns to 1 when:
The completion of miscellaneous functions, spindlespeed functions,
tool functions, 2nd auxilialy functions and so forth is being awaited, all
other commands in the same block are completed, and the current
position is in the inposition.
The DEN signal turns to 0 when:
The execution of one block is completed
NOTE
A parameter NCI (No.1601#5) can specify, whether to only
check if an acceleration/deceleration delay is eliminated, or
to also check if a servo delay (error) has been reduced to
within a certain range.
672
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
FIN
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
DEN
#2
#1
#0
TF
SF
G004
F001
F007
F009
DM00
DM01
DM02
DM30
F010
M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M01
M00
F011
M15
M14
M13
M12
M11
M10
M09
M08
F012
M23
M22
M21
M20
M19
M18
M17
M16
F013
M31
M30
M29
M28
M27
M26
M25
M24
F022
S07
S06
S05
S04
S03
S02
S01
S00
F023
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S09
S08
F024
S23
S22
S21
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
F025
S31
S30
S29
S28
S27
S26
S25
S24
F026
T07
T06
T05
T04
T03
T02
T01
T00
F027
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
T10
T09
T08
F028
T23
T22
T21
T20
T19
T18
T17
T16
F029
T31
T30
T29
T28
T27
T26
T25
T24
F030
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
B00
F031
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
F032
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
F033
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
BF
BF
MF
Parameter
3010
Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S,
T, and B codes are sent, respectively.
673
B63003EN1/02
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF,

signal
Delay time
Fig. 8.1 (a) Delay time of the strobe signal
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example : When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 100 is set, 104 ms is assumed.
3011
Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 ms
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function
completion signal (FIN).
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF
signal
FIN sigal
Ignored because shorter

than min.
signal width
Valid because
longer than min.
signal width
Fig. 8.1 (b) Valid Width of the FIN (M,S, T, and B Function Completion)
Signal
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example: When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
674
B63003EN1/02
3030
Allowable number of digits for the M code
3031
Allowable number of digits for the S code
3032
Allowable number of digits for the T code
3033
Allowable number of digits for the B code
[Data type] Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, T, and B codes.
NOTE
Up to 5 digits can be specified in the S code
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
3401
#0
DPI
[Data type] Bit

DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal
point
0 : The least input increment is assumed.
1 : The unit of mm, inches, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
#7
3404
#6
#5
M02
#4
M30
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

M30 When M30 is specified in a memory operation:
0 : M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset
or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program is
executed, starting from the beginning.
1 : M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched
for. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind
signal.)
M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation
0 : M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset
or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program is
executed, starting from the beginning.
1 : M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched
for. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind
signal.)
675
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
3405
#1
#0
AUX
[Data type] Bit

AUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous function
specified with a decimal point
0 : Assumed to be 0.001
1 : Depending on the input increment. (For input in mm, 0.001 is
assumed, or for input in inches, 0.0001 is assumed.)
3411
M code preventing buffering 1
3412
3413
3420
[Data type] Byte

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing
directed by an M code must be performed by the machine without
buffering the following block, specify the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are
not specified in these parameters.
3421
Minimum value 1 of M code preventing buffering
3422
Maximum value 1 of M code preventing buffering
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
676
B63003EN1/02
[Data type] Word

When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameter
Nos. 3421 and 3422, 3433 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429
and 3430, or 3431 and 3432, buffering for the next block is not performed
until the execution of the block is completed.
CAUTION
1 The specification of a minimum value that exceeds the
specified maximum value is invalid.
2 When there is only one data item, set the following:
minimum value =maximum value.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
3450
AUP
AUP A second auxiliary function command, specified with a decimal point and
a negative value is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
NOTE
With the T series, second auxiliary function commands
specified with a decimal point and a negative value are
always enabled regardless of the parameter setting.
3460
Name of a second auxiliary function
[Data type] Byte

Set the name of a second auxiliary function according to the table given
below. Note that the same address as an axis name cannot be set.
Name
Setting
65
66
67
85
86
87
If a value other than those given above is set, address B is assumed.
677
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
miscellaneous function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the
sequence of PMC.
2 When the 2nd auxiliary function is provided, the address
used for specifying the 2nd auxiliary function (B or the
address specified with parameter No. 3460) cannot be used
as an axis address.
3 The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read
into the input buffer register, if present. Similarly, ten M
codes which do not buffer can be set by parameters (No.
3411 to 3420).
4 For M00 and M01 only, miscellaneous function code signal,
auxiliary function strobe signal, and M decode signals are
sent; the control of program stop and optional stop shall be
designed on the PMC side.
5 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30,
it is necessary to send the external reset signal from the
machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN signal, When
the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30,
the control returns to the top of the program recently
executed and enters the reset state. When the FIN signal
is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed and executes it from the top.
678
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.11.1
Miscellaneous function (M code)
II.11.4
2nd Auxiliary function (B code)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.1
II.11.4
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.11.1
II.11.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.1
II.11.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.1
Auxiliary function (M code)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.1
Auxiliary function (M code)
679
B63003EN1/02
8.2
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK
General
Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function.

That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued.
This function is used to check a program.
Signal
Auxiliary function lock

signal AFL <G005#6>
[Function] This signal selects auxiliary function lock. That is, this signal disables
the execution of specified M, S, T, and B functions.
[Operation] When this signal turns to 1, the control unit functions as described
below.
(1) The control unit does not execute M, S, T, and B functions specified
for memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation. That is, the
control unit stops the output of code signals and strobe signals (MF,
SF, TF, BF).
(2) If this signal turns to 1 after code signal output, the output operation
is executed in the ordinary manner until its completion (that is, until
the FIN signal is received, and the strobe signal turns to 0).
(3) Among the miscellaneous functions, M00, M01, M02, and M30 are
executed even when this signal is 1. All code signals, strobe signals,
decode signals are output in the ordinary manner.
(4) Among the miscellaneous functions, even when this signal is 1,
those functions (M98 and M99) that are executed in the control unit
without outputting their execution results are executed in the ordinary
manner.
WARNING
Even when this signal is 1, spindle analog output or
spindle serial output is executed.
680
B63003EN1/02
Auxiliary function lock

check signal MAFL
<F004#4>
[Function] This signal reports the state of the auxiliary function lock signal AFL.
[Output condition] This signal turns to 1 when:
The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is 1
This signal turns to 0 when:
The auxiliary function lock signal AFL is 0
Signal address
#7
#6
AFL
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
MAFL
#3
#2
#1
#0
G005
F004
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.5.1
Machine lock and auxiliary function lock
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.5.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.5.1
681
B63003EN1/02
8.3
MULTIPLE M
COMMANDS IN A
SINGLE BLOCK
General
So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this
function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block.
Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to the
machine. This means that compared with the conventional method of a
single M command in a single block, a shorter cycle time can be realized
in machining.
(Example)
Basic procedure
One M command
in a single block
Multiple M commands
in a single block
M40 ;
M50 ;
M60 ;
G28G91X0Y0Z0 ;
:
:
:
M40M50M60 ;
G28G91X0Y0Z0 ;
:
:
:
:
:
(1) Assume that MaaMbbMcc; was commanded by the program.
(2) The 1st M command (Maa) sends the code signals M00 to M31 in a
manner similar to the conventional one-block single command. The
strobe signal MF is set to 1 after a time TMF set by parameter No.
3010 (Standard setting: 16 msec).
The second M command (Mbb) sends the code signal M200-M215,
the third M command (Mcc) sends the code signal M300-M315, and
their respective strobe signals MF2 and MF3 are set to 1.
Furthermore, the three code signals are sent simultaneously.
The strobe signals MF, MF2, and MF3 become 1 at the same time.
The code signal is a binary notation of the program command aa, bb
and cc.
(3) On the PMC side, the code signals corresponding to the respective
strobe signals are read when the strobe signals become 1, and the
appropriate operations are performed.
(4) When the operation of all M commands ends on the PMC side, the end
signal (FIN) is set to 1.
(5) When the completion signal stays 1 for a time (TFIN) set by
parameter No. 3011 (Standard: 16 msec), all strobe signals (MF, MF2
and MF3) are set to 0 at the same time and the reception of
completion signal is reported.
(6) On the PMC side, when MF, MF2 and MF3 are set to 0, the
completion signal is set to 0.
A time chart for this procedure is shown below:
682
B63003EN1/02
M command (MaaMbbMcc;)
Code signal
Strobe signal
M00-M31
MF
Code signal
Strobe signal
M200-M215
MF2
Code signal
M300-M315
Strobe signal
MF3
PMC side operation
End signal
FIN
TMF
TFIN
Signal
2nd, 3rd M function code

signal M200 to M215
<F014, F015>
M300 to M315 <F016,
F017>
2nd, 3rd M Function
strobe signal MF2
<F008#4>
MF3 <F008#5>
[Function] Indicates that second and third auxiliary functions have been issued.
[Output condition] The output conditions and procedures are the same as that described in
Basic procedure.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
MF3
#4
MF2
#3
#2
#1
#0
F014
M207
M206
M205
M204
M203
M202
M201
M200
F015
M215
M214
M213
M212
M211
M210
M209
M208
F016
M307
M306
M305
M304
M303
M302
M301
M300
F017
M315
M314
M313
M312
M311
M310
M309
M308
F008
683
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3404
#7
M3B
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block
0 : One
1 : Up to three
Caution
CAUTION
1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be
specified together with another M code.
2 Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99,
and M198 cannot be specified together with other M codes;
each of those M codes must be specified in a single block.
Such M codes include these which direct the CNC to
perform internal operations in addition to sending the M
codes themselves to the PMC. To be specified, such M
codes are M codes for calling program numbers 9001 to
9009 and M codes for disabling advance reading (buffering)
of subsequent blocks.
The M codes which can be specified in a single block must
be those which the CNC send only the M code signals to the
PMC side.
Note
NOTE
1 CNC allows up to three M codes to be specified in one block.
However, some M codes cannot be specified at the same
time due to mechanical operation restrictions. For example,
M42 can be specified only after the mechanical operation of
M41 is completed.
2 The 1st M code can be up to 8 digits and 2nd, 3rd M codes
can be the values up to 65535.
684
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.11.2
Multiple M commands in a single

block
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.2

block
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.11.2

block
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.2

block
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.2

block
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.2

block
685
B63003EN1/02
8.4
HIGHSPEED M/S/T/B
INTERFACE
General
To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the highspeed M/S/T/B

interface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signals
of the M/S/T/B functions.
Whether to use the usual system or highspeed system for strobe signal
and completion signal handling can be specified by parameter MHI (No.
3001#7).
The description below uses the miscellaneous functions (M code
commands) as an example. The same description applies to the
spindlespeed function (S code), tool function (T code) and 2nd auxiliary
function (B code).
Basic procedure
(1) Assume that the following program is given:

Mxx;
Myy;
(2) In response to an M command, the NC system sends out the code
signals M00 to M31.
The NC system inverts the logical level of the strobe signal MF, that
is, from 0to 1, or from 1 to 0.
(3) The CNC system inverts the strobe signal, then when the logical level
of the auxiliary function completion signal MFIN becomes the same
as the strobe signal, the CNC assumes the completion of PMC
sequence.
With the usual method, the operation is assumed to be completed when
a falling edge (1 to 0) of the M/S/T/B completion signal FIN is
received after a rising edge (0 to 1) of the FIN signal is detected. This
new system, on the other hand, assumes the operation has been completed
upon detection of only one transition of the completion signal.
In addition , the usual system uses only one completion signal (FIN)
common to the M/S/T/B functions. This new system uses a different
completion signal for each of the M, S, T, and B functions; the completion
signals for the M, S, T, and B functions are MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, and
BFIN, respectively.
The Fig. 8.4 (a) below shows the timing chart of these signals with the
new system. For comparison, Fig. 8.4 (b) shows the timing chart of the
conventional system.
686
B63003EN1/02
Next block
Code signal
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
Mxx
completion signal MFIN
Myy
Fig. 8.4 (a) Timing chart of the highspeed system
Code signal
Strobe signal MF
PMC side operation
Completion signal FIN
Mxx
Next block
Myy
Fig. 8.4 (b) Timing chart of the usual system
A highspeed interface can also be used for multiple M commands issued

for one block. This interface provides separate completion signals for
each M code. They are called MFIN (the same name as for the single M
command per block function), MFIN2, and MFIN3, respectively. The
signal transfer sequence for multiple M codes per block is the same as that
for a single M code per block.
The highspeed interface can also be used for the external operation
function. In this case, special external operation signal EFD and
completion signal EFIN are used. The procedure for sending and
receiving these signals is identical to that for sending and receiving the
strobe and completion signals of the miscellaneous function (M series).
687
B63003EN1/02
Signal
completion signal
MFIN <G005#0>
[Function] Reports that the execution of a miscellaneous function using the high
speed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and aprocedure of the contol unit when this signal turns
to 1 and 0, see the description of Basic procedure above.
Spindle function
completion signal
SFIN <G005#2>
[Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the
highspeed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit when this signal turns
Tool function completion

signal TFIN <G005#3>
[Function] Reports that the execution of a tool function using the highspeed
M/S/T/B interface is completed.
2nd auxiliary function

completion signal BFIN
<G005#4> (T series)
<G005#7> (M series)
[Function] Reports that the execution of a second auxiliary function using the
highspeed M/S/T/B interface is completed.
688
B63003EN1/02
2nd, 3rd M function

completion signals
MFIN2, MFIN3
<G004#4, #5> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Indicate that when the highspeed interface is used for multiple M commands per block, the second to 3rd M functions have been completed.
[Operation] See Basic procedure for how the control unit operates and what it performs when the signal turns to 1 and 0.
External operation signal

for highspeed interface
(M series) EFD <F007#1>
[Function] Indicates that positioning for the external operation function has been
completed for the highspeed M, S, T, or B interface, and that another
external operation is required.
[Operation] Refer to the description of the output conditions and procedure described
in basic procedure.
External operation
function completion
signal (M series) EFIN
<G005#1>
[Function] Indicates that the external operation function has been completed for the
highspeed M, S, T, or B interface.
[Operation] The basic procedure describes the procedure and operation of the
control unit when the signal is set to 1 or 0.
Signal address
#7
G004
G005
#6
#5
MFIN3
BFIN
#7
#6
#5
#4
MFIN2
#3
#2
BFIN
TFIN
#4
#3
F007
689
#1
#0
SFIN
EFIN
MFIN
#2
#1
EFD
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3001
#7
MHI
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B codes
0 : Normal
1 : Highspeed
Note
NOTE
1 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF are 0 when the
power is turned on.
2 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, TF, and BF are set
to 0.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
690
8.1
Miscellaneous function/2nd auxiliary function
8.3
Multiple M commands in a block
11.8
External operation function
B63003EN1/02
8.5
WAITING M CODE
(TWOPATH
CONTROL)
General
Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other
during machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program for
each path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified block. When
an M code for waiting is specified in a block for one path during automatic
operation, the other path waits for the same M code to be specified before
staring the execution of the next block.
A range of M codes used as M codes for waiting is to be set in the
parameters (Nos. 8110 and 8111) beforehand.
Signal
Nowait signal NOWT

<G063#1>
[Function] Specifies whether to synchronize the paths by the waiting M code.
[Operation] When this signal turns to 1 the paths are not synchronized by the M
code. The M code for waiting specified in a machining program is
ignored.
When this signal turns to 0, the paths are synchronized by the M code.
When the M code for waiting is specified for one path, the CNC waits for
the corresponding M code of another path to be issued, then starts
executing the next block.
Waiting signal WATO

<F063#6>
[Function] Indicates that the CNC is waiting for the M code of either path 1 or 2.
[Output condition] This signal is 1 as long as:
D One path is waiting for another path. That is, the signal stays 1 for
the period from when the M code for waiting is issued to one path to
when the corresponding M code is issued to another path.
This signal is 0 as long as:
D Neither of the paths are waiting for the other.
691
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
NOWT
#0
#7
#6
WATO #1
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G063
F063
Parameter
8110
Waiting M code range (minimum value)
[Data type] Twoword

[Valid data range] 0 and 100 to 99999999
This parameter specifies the minimum value of the waiting M code.
The waiting M code range is specified using parameter No. 8110
(minimum value) and parameter No. 8111 (maximum value).
(parameter No. 8110) (waiting M code) (parameter No. 8111)
NOTE
A value of 0 indicates that the waiting M code is not used.
8111
Waiting M code range (maximum value)
[Data type] Twoword

[Valid data range] 0 and 100 to 99999999
This parameter specifies the maximum value of the waiting M code.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
160
(T series)
5096
(M series)
Caution
Description
MISMATCH WAITING
MCODE
Different M code is commanded in

heads 1 and 2 as waiting M code.
Modify the program.
CAUTION
As for waiting M code, neither code signals nor strobe signal
are output.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.21.2
WAITING FOR PATHS
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.20.2
WAITING FOR TOOL POSTS
692
B63003EN1/02
8.6
M CODE GROUP
CHECK FUNCTION
General
This function checks whether combinations of M codes (up to three)

specified in one block are correct.
The function has two purposes. One of the purposes is to alarm if an M
code which must not be combined with any other M codes is combined
with another. The other purpose is to alarm if an M code in a group is
combined with another M code in the same group. These errors are
reflected in P/S alarm No. 5016.
Setting the group data
Pressing the
SYSTEM
key, then the continuous menu key several times causes
the [M CODE] soft key to appear. Pressing this soft key displays the
screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (a).
M CODE GROUP SETTING
NO.
MCG
NO.
MCG
0000
0
0010
0
0001
0
0011
0
0002
0
0012
0
0003
0
0013
0
0004
0
0014
0
0005
0
0015
0
0006
0
0016
0
0007
0
0017
0
0008
0
0018
0
0009
0
0019
0
>
MDI
****
***
O0000
NO.
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
N0000
MCG
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00 : 00 : 00
***
M CODE
(OPRT)
Fig. 8.6 (a)
Basically, item numbers correspond to M codes. However, there may be

exceptions depending on parameter setting. (See descriptions of the
relevant parameters.) The data specified on this screen remains until all
parameters are cleared simultaneously. To go to the next page of the
screen, use the [PAGE] key.
Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key or the corresponding numeric key displays
the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6 (b). Searches for the desired item number
and enter the data.
Semicolon ; may be used for continuous data entry.
Data entry is enabled when PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE is set to 1
on the parameter setting screen.
>
MDI
****
***
***
00 : 00 : 00
No. SRH
INPUT
Fig. 8.6 (b)
693
B63003EN1/02
For M codes which must be used separately from other M codes, always
set their group number to 1. Such M codes include M00, M01, M02,
M30, M98, and M99. For M codes for which the CNC performs internal
processing in addition to sending them to the machine, also set their group
number to 1. See Section 8.3 for details.
For M codes you do not need to check, leave them at an initial value of
0.
The M codes can be set with a number from 0 to 127. Neither negative
values nor decimal point can be specified.
Parameter setting
Basically, item numbers 0 to 99 correspond to M00 to M99. For item

numbers 100 and higher, parameter No. 3441 to 3444 can specify the
corresponding M codes.
The initial values for these parameters are 0.
3441
First of the M codes assigned to item numbers 100 to 199
3442
3443
3444
[Data type] Twoword

If a parameter is specified as 0, it is set to a value specified to the
previous parameter plus 100. For example, if parameter No. 3441 is
specified as 0, it is internally set to 100. If parameter No. 3442 is
specified as 0 under this condition, it is internally set to 200.
Negative values are assumed to be 0.
Basically, these parameters can be specified as any value. However, the
following conditions should be observed to save memory space.
X + 99 < Y, Y + 99 < Z, and Z + 99 < W
where X = value specified for parameter No. 3441, Y = value specified for
parameter No. 3442, Z = value specified for parameter No. 3443, and W =
value specified for parameter No. 3444.
(Example of setting)
(i) No. 3441 = 0, No. 3442 = 0, No. 3443 = 0, No. 3444 = 0
In this case, these parameters are set to 100, 200, 300, and 400
respectively. The item numbers correspond directly to the M codes.
The group numbers for M500 and larger M codes are assumed to be
0 automatically.
(ii)No. 3441 = 200, No. 3442 = 0, No. 3443 = 500, No. 3444 = 800
In this case, parameter No. 3442 is set to 300. Item numbers 100 to
299 correspond to M200 to M399, 300 to 399 correspond to M500 to
M599, and 400 to 499 correspond to M800 to M899. The group
numbers for M100 to M199, M400 to M499, M600 to M799, M900,
and all M codes with higher numbers are automatically set to 0.
694
B63003EN1/02
(iii) No. 3441 = 234, No. 3442 = 345, No. 3443 = 456, No. 3444 = 567
In this case, item numbers 100 to 199 correspond to M234 to M333,
200 to 299 correspond to M345 to M444, 300 to 399 correspond to
M456 to M555, and 400 to 499 correspond to M567 to M666. The
group numbers for M100 to M233, M334 to M344, M446 to M455,
M556 to M566, M667, and all M codes with higher numbers are
automatically set to 0.
The examples above meet the setting conditions. With these settings,
up to 500 M codes can be set.
Examples that do not meet the setting conditions follow.
(iv) No. 3441 = 200, No. 3442 = 50, No. 3443 = 100, No. 3444 = 600
In this case, item numbers 0 to 99 correspond to M00 to M99, 100 to
199 correspond to M200 to M299, and 400 to 499 correspond to M600
to M699. Item numbers 200 to 399 are meaningless. With these
settings, only up to 300 M codes can be set.
(v) No. 3441 = 50, No. 3442 = 100, No. 3443 = 150, No. 3444 = 200
In this case, the correspondence between the item numbers and M
codes is set up as listed below. With these settings, up to 300 M codes
can be set. The group number for M300 and all M codes with higher
numbers are automatically set to 0.
Item number
D
D
Input/output with floppy

cassettes
Input
M code
0 49
0 49
50 99
Meaningless
100 199
50 149
200 249
Meaningless
250 299
150 199
300 349
Meaningless
350 399
200 249
400 449
Meaningless
450 499
250 299
The file you want to read out should be set on the read station. First locate
the file in the program screen in the EDIT mode. In this mode, display
the M code group setting screen. See Section 8.2, Part III of the operators
manual for how to locate the file.
On the soft key screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (b), pressing the continuous
menu key several times displays the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6 (c).
>
MDI
****
***
READ
***
00 : 00 : 00
PUNCH
Fig. 8.6 (c)
695
B63003EN1/02
Now pressing the [READ] key displays the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6
(d).
>
MDI
****
***
00 : 00 : 00
***
CANCEL
EXEC
Fig. 8.6 (d)
To execute the read operation, just press the [EXEC] key.
Output
Pressing the [PUNCH] key on the screen shown in Fig. 8.6 (c) displays
the soft keys shown in Fig. 8.6 (d). To execute the punch operation, just
press the [EXEC] key.
After this operation, you can confirm that the file M CODE GROUP is
output, by searching through floppy cassette files. The output data has
a format with 60000 added to the item number:
N60xxxPyyy (where xxx = 0 to 499, yyy = 0 to 127)
Parameter
3441
3442
3443
3444
[Data type] Twoword

Alarm and message
Number

5016
Reference item
Message
Description
ILLEGAL COMBINATION
OF M CODE
M codes which belonged to the same

group were specified in a block. Alternatively, an M code which must be
specified without other M codes in the
block was specified in a block with
other M codes.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.11.3
M CODE GROUP CHECK

FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.11.3
M CODE GROUP CHECK

FUNCTION
696
B63003EN1/02
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION
697
B63003EN1/02
9.1
SPINDLE SPEED
FUNCTION
(S CODE OUTPUT)
General
When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe
signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code
signals are retained until another S code is issued.
One S code is used for each block. Parameter No. 3031 can be used to
specify the maximum number of digits. If a number greater than the
maximum number is specified, an alarm can be raised.
Signal
Refer to section 8.1.
Parameter
3031
Allowable number of digits for the S code
[Data type] Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the S codes.
Note
NOTE
1 When a move command and miscellaneous function are
specified in the same block, the commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and
miscellaneous function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon
completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the PMC
processing sequence.
2 For S code output when the spindle serial output/spindle
analog output is used, refer to section 9.3.
698
B63003EN1/02
9.2
SPINDLE SERIAL
OUTPUT/SPINDLE
ANALOG OUTPUT
General
There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serial
output and spindle analog output.
The spindle serial output interface can control two serial spindles. The
spindle analog output interface can control one analog spindle.
The table below lists the relationships between the spindle control
interfaces and the configuration of the spindle.
f
f
Spindle serial
output
Spindle analog
output
First spindle
Second spindle
Third spindle
First serial spindle
Second serial spindle
Analog spindle
The PC can be used.
The PC can be used. (*)
The PC cannot be used.
The PC can be used.
The PC can be used. (*)
Analog spindle
The PC can be used.
See Section 9.1.
Controlled by the PMC using an external interface.
PC = position coder
(*) The multispindle function is necessary to use the position coder of

the second spindle.
See section 15.4 or 9.10 for how to control the speed of the second and
third spindles.
699
B63003EN1/02
The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.
f=Available =Unavailable
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f f
f
f
f
f
f f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Serial spindle
Analog spindle
Spindle
Function
First serial
spindle
Second serial
spindle
When used as the When used as the

first spindle (with
third spindle
no serial SP)
(with a serial SP)
Thread cutting/feed per revolution

(synchronous feed)
(*1)
(*1)
Spindle speed fluctuation detection
(*1)
Actual spindle speed output

(T series only)
(*1)
Spindle positioning (T series only)
Cs contour control
Multispindle (*2)
(First spindle)
(Second spindle)
Rigid tapping
Spindle synchronous control
Slave (*3)
(Third spindle)
(*1)
Master (*3)
Spindle control unit functions (*4),

such as spindle orientation, spindle
output switching, spindle switching,
and etc.
Polygon turning (T series only)
(using the servo motor axis and
spindle)
Polygon turning between spindles

(T series only) (using two spindles)
(*1)
Master (*5)
Slave (*5)
Spindle output control by the PMC
700
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The multispindle function is necessary. The function cannot
be used for the first and second spindles simultaneously.
2 The multispindle function can control the speed of three
spindles and switch the feedback signal between two
position coders. It also can work without the second or third
spindle.
3 For a twopath lathe application, the first spindle on tool
post 1 is the master, and the first spindle on tool post 2 is the
slave. The second spindle of either tool post cannot be
used in spindle synchronization.
4 These functions belong to the spindle control unit. They
cannot be used unless the spindle control unit supports
those functions.
5 No spindle polygon turning is available for a combination of
the spindle of tool post 1 and the spindle of tool post 2 for
the twopath lathe application.
The signals and parameters for spindle speed control are common to both
spindle serial output and spindle analog output. (See Section 9.3.)
The table below lists the differences related to direct control of the spindle
control unit.
Spindle control unit for

spindle serial output
interface
Parameters for
the spindle control unit
Spindle control unit for

spindle analog output
interface
Specified as CNC parame- Directly specified for the

ters
spindle control unit
(4000 to 4351/S1, S2)
Used after being transferred
to the spindle control unit
Control signal for Connected to the PMC via

Connected to the PMC via
the spindle con- the CNC
an external contact
trol unit
G0070 to G0073 and F0045
to F0048:
Addresses for the first
spindle
G0074 to G0077 and F0049
to F0052:
Addresses for the second
spindle
Spindle speed
command interface
Digital data in a range from Analog voltage from 0 to

0 to" maximum spindle mo- " 10 V (excluding portion
tor speed
for offset voltage adjustment)
Position coder
interface
Connected to the CNC via

the spindle control unit
701
Connected directly to the

CNC
Signal
B63003EN1/02
Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle

<G0070 to G0073> (input), <F0045 to F0048> (output)
for the first serial spindle
<G0074 to G0077> (input), <F0049 to F0052> (output)
for the second serial spindle
These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output
signals for the spindle control unit for the serial spindle.
For details of the signals belonging to these addresses, refer to the
manuals for the serial spindle:
FANUC SERVO MOTOR AMPLIFIER a series Descriptions
(B65162E)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series Descriptions (B65152E)
FANUC SERVO MOTOR a series Maintenance Manual (B65165E)
Signal address
For 1st SERIAL SPINDLE

G070
G071
G072
#7
#6
MRDYA ORCMA
RCHA
#5
SFRA
RSLA
RCHHGA MFNHGA
INCMDA
#4
SRVA
#3
CTH1A
#2
CTH2A
#1
TLMHA
#0
TLMLA
SOCNA
MCFNA
SPSLA
*ESPA
ARSTA
OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA
ROTAA
INDXA
MPOFA
SLVA
MORCMA
G073
F045
#7
ORARA
#6
TLMA
#5
LDT2A
#4
LDT1A
#3
SARA
#2
SDTA
#1
SSTA
#0
ALMA
F046
MORA2A
MORA1A
PORA2A
SLVSA
RCFNA
RCHPA
CFINA
CHPA
INCSTA
PC1DEA
F047
F048
For 2ND SERIAL

SPINDLE
G074
G075
G076
#7
#6
MRDYB ORCMB
RCHB
#5
SFRB
RSLB
RCHHGB MFNHGB
INCMDB
#4
SRVB
#3
CTH1A
#2
CTH2B
#1
TLMHB
#0
TLMLB
SOCNB
MCFNB
SPSLB
*ESPB
ARSTB
OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB
ROTAB
INDXB
MPOFB
SLVB
MORCMB
G077
F049
#7
ORARB
#6
TLMB
#5
LDT2B
#4
LDT1B
#3
SARB
#2
SDTB
#1
SSTB
#0
ALMB
F050
MORA2B
MORA1B
PORA2B
SLVSB
RCFNB
RCHPB
CFINB
CHPB
INCSTB
PC1DEB
F051
F052
702
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Connection of serial
#7
#6
#5
3701
#4
SS2
#3
#2
#1
ISI
#0
[Data type] Bit

ISI Specifieds whether the serial spindle interface is used.
0 : Used
1 : Not used
NOTE
1 This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindle
interface option is provided. The parameter is used when
the CNC is started after serial spindle interface control is
temporarily disabled during startup adjustment of the CNC.
This bit should normally set to be 0.
2 When Serial spindle is used with Analog spindle and this
parameter is set to 1, Analog spindle becomes 1st spindle.
SS2 The number of connections in serial spindle control

0: 1
1: 2
NOTE
To connect two serial spindles, set jumper S1 on the 1st
serial spindle control unit to B.
(For S series SERIAL SPINDLE AMPLIFIER)
Parameters of serial
No. 4000 to 4351: S1 For 1st serieal spindle

S2 For 2nd serial spindle
The above parameters are on the CNC, but actually they are used for the
spindle control unit of serial spindle.
For details of these parameters, refer to the following manual:
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B65160E)
FANUC SERVO MOTOR series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(B65165E)
703
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
Description
749
SSPINDLE LSI ERROR
Acommunication error occurred for the serial

spindle. The cause may be noises, disconnection of an optical cable or the interruption
of the power to the spindle amplifier.
(Note) Unlike alarm No. 750, this alarm occurs when a serial communication alarm is
detected after the spindle amplifier is normally activated.
750
SPINDLE SERIAL LINK

ERROR
This alarm is generated when the spindle

control unit is not ready for starting correctly
when the power is turned on in the system
with the serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or
the spindle control units power is OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on under

alarm conditions other than SU01 or
AL24 which are shown on the LED display of the spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier
power off once and perform startup
again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination of

hardware)
4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of

parameter No. 3701, is 1) is in one of the
above conditions 1) to 3).
Note) This alarm does not occur after the
system including the spindle control
unit is activated.
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
751
SPINDLE1 ALARM DETECT This alarm indicates the NC that an alarm is

(ALXX)
generatedin the spindle control unit of the serial spindle. The alarm is displayed in form
ALXX (XX is a number). Refer to the manuals for serial spindle. The alarm number XX
is the number indicated on the spindle amplifier. The CNC holds this number and displays
on the screen.
752
SPINDLE1 MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does

ERROR
not properly terminate a mode change. The
modes include the Cs contouring, spindle
positioning,rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle
control unit does not respond correctly to the
mode change command issued by the CNC.
761
SPINDLE2 ALARM DETEC- Refer to alarm No. 751. (For 2nd spindle)
TION (ALXX)
762
SPINDLE2 MODE CHANGE Refer to alarm No. 752.(For 2nd spindle)

ERROR
704
B63003EN1/02
DIAGNOSIS SCREEN
Information on spindle
control
#7
#6
#5
400
#4
SAI
#3
SS2
#2
SSR
#1
POS
#0
SIC
SIC 0: No module is available for spindle serial output.

1: A module for spindle serial output is available.
POS 0: No module is available for spindle analog output.
1: A module for spindle analog output is available.
SSR 0: Spindle serial output is not used.
1: Spindle serial output is used.
SS2 0: The second spindle is not used with spindle serial output.
1: The second spindle is used with spindle serial output.
SAI 0: Spindle analog output is not used.
1: Spindle analog output is used.
401
Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the first spindle (AL??)
402
Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the second spindle (AL??)
Communication error on
spindle serial output
interface
#7
SSA
408
#6
#5
SCA
#4
CME
#3
CER
#2
SNE
#1
FRE
#0
CRE
CRE 1 : CRC error (warning)

FRE 1 : Framing error (warning)
SNE 1 : Mismatch between sending and receiving sections
CER 1 : Abnormal reception
CME 1 : No answer during auto scanning
SCA 1 : Communication error in the spindle amplifier
SSA 1 : System error in the spindle amplifier
(These errors are reflected in spindle alarm 749. They are caused by noise,
disconnection, or instantaneous power interruption.)
Information related to the

activation of the spindle
serial output interface
#7
#6
#5
409
#4
#3
SPE
#2
S2E
#1
S1E
#0
SHE
SHE 1 : Abnormal operation in the serial spindle communication module of

the CNC
S1E 1 : Abnormal operation on the first spindle during activation
S2E 1 : Abnormal operation on the second spindle during activation
SPE 1 : Serial spindle parameter not meeting activation conditions
(These errors are reflected in spindle alarm 750.)
705
Load and speed meter

readings for the serial
spindle
410
B63003EN1/02
First serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)
411
First serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm)
412
Second serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)
413
Second serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm)
To display the load and speed meter readings, the following parameters
must be specified correctly.
Maximum motor speed: Parameter No. 4020 (main) and 4196 (sub)
Load meter reading at maximum output:
Parameter No. 4127 (main) and 4276 (sub)
NOTE
The spindle switch function is used for main/sub switching.
Select main if the spindle switch function is not used.
Position error display

during spindle
synchronization
414
Master spindle motion error during spindle synchronization
415
Slave spindle motion error during spindle synchronization
416
Absolute value of synchronization error during spindle synchronization
The display for diagnosis No. 414 to 416 are in pulse units (one pulse =
360/4096 degrees)
Position error display

during spindle
synchronization
417
First serial spindle: Position coder feedback information
418
First serial spindle: Position error
419
Second serial spindle: Position coder feedback information
420
Second serial spindle: Position error
The above display data is the information obtained directly from the serial
spindle control unit.
706
B63003EN1/02
9.3
SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL
General
This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the position
coder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR).
707
B63003EN1/02
Command flow of
spindle speed control
The following chart summarizes spindle speed control.
CNC
Machining program, etc.
PMC and machine
Gear select signal output

(M series)
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O)
S command
Output to the PMC

(to change the machine gear).
S code/SF signal output .
Output to the PMC

(to be used for ladders).
Spindle stop signal/spindle orientation signal
Switching in the machine
Spindle override signal (*SSTP/SOR, SOV0 to SOV7)
Processing for gear change

(S command spindle motor speed conversion)
Clamp the speed according to parameters.
Input the gear select

signal (GR1, GR2).
CNC output specification

(result of speed conversion)
S12 bit code output (R12O to R01O)
Determine the output.

(Selected by the SIND signal)
From the PMC
Output to the PMC

(used for ladders)
Output specification by the PMC

(set to R12I to R01I)
From the PMC
Specify output polarity in the CNC.

(M03/M04 and parameter No. 3706 =
TCW, CWM)
Determination of output polarity

(Selected by the SSIN signal)
Thread cutting,
feed per revolution, etc.
Command output to the

spindle, spindle enable signal output, gain, and offset
Spindle
amplifier
Polarity specification by the PMC From the PMC

(set to SGN)
Control over the Input the spindle

start of cutting
speed arrival
signal (SAR).
feed.
Position coder
feedback
signal
Spindle
motor
Input the spindle amplifier

control signal from the
PMC, etc.
Position
coder
Gear change
mechanism
Spindle
Mechanical section of the machine
708
Monitor the arrival

spindle speed
Sensors
B63003EN1/02
S command
The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining

programs, etc. for the CNC.
For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts
the specified surface speed to the spindle speed.
In the M series with bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 0 without the
constant surface speed control option, the CNC specifies the gear stage
for the desired spindle speed to the PMC according to parameter No.
3741, 3742, and 3743, and the S command.
(GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F034#2, #1, #0>)
S code/SF signal output
With the spindle serial output or spindle analog output option, the spindle
control function in the CNC converts the S command value to the output
value for the spindle motor. For correspondence to gear change and
constant surface speed control, the S code/SF signals output is different
as follows in case of the spindle serial output and spindle analog output
are not used.
M series Outputs the S code.
The SF signal is output only when the CNC directs the PMC
to change the gear.
T series Outputs neither S code nor SF signal.
(This is because the S code is not always the spindle speed
when the constant surface speed control option is used.)
If you use the S code for processing in the PMC ladder, you must specify
parameters related to parameter No. 3705.
Spindle stop signal

(*SSTP)
This signal sets the S command value in the CNC to 0. If the CNC has
the spindle output specified (see descriptions on the SIND signal), this
signal sets the speed command for the spindle to 0.
Even if the function of the spindle stop signal is not used, the signal must
be set to logical 1 for the CNC to perform spindle speed control.
Spindle orientation
signal (SOR)
If the spindle orientation signal is logical 1 and the spindle stop signal is
logical 0, the spindle rotates in the direction specified by bit 5 (ORM) of
parameter No. 3706 at a constant speed specified by parameter No. 3732.
Because the spindle rotates at a constant speed regardless of the gear
stage, this signal can be used to rotate the spindle to drive the stopper or
pin during mechanical spindle positioning.
For the M series, setting parameter GST (bit 1 of parameter No. 3705)
enables the spindle motor to rotate at a constant speed at an M type gear
shift. This function can be used for gear shifting because it maintains a
constant speed of the gear change mechanism.
Spindle speed override

signal (SOV00 to SOV07)
This signal specifies an override of 0% to 254% for the specified S value

for spindle control.
However, the spindle speed override function is disabled when the CNC
is in the following state:
Tapping cycle (M series : G84, G74 T series : G84, G88)
Thread cutting (M series : G33 T series : G32, G92, and G76)
When the spindle speed control is performed but the spindle speed
override is not used, set the override value to 100%.
709
Processing for gear

changing
B63003EN1/02
Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is
actually controlled is the spindle motor. Therefore, the CNC must have
some provision to detect the gear stage between the speed and spindle
motor.
There are two types of gear selection methods:
M type
The CNC selects a gear stage according to the range of speed for each gear
stage previously specified in a parameter, as directed by the S command,
and informs the PMC of the selected gear stage (one of the three gear
stages ) using the gear select signal output (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O).
Also, the CNC outputs the spindle speed based on the selected gear stage
(output as the gear select signal).
T type
The gear stage (one of the four gear stages ) being currently used by the
machine is input in response to the gear select signal inputs (GR1, GR2).
The machine determines which gear to use.
The CNC outputs the spindle speed that corresponds to the gear stage
input.
Selection of gear change

system
The M series system can use either M or T type.

M type Without constant surface speed control option, and bit 4
(GTT) of parameter No. 3706 = 0
T type With constant surface speed control, or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 = 1
The T series system can use only T type.
Details of M type
(Output of GR1O, GR2O,
GR3O)
By specifying from S0 to S99999 in memory or MDI operation, the CNC

outputs a command corresponding to the spindle speed. There is a
two-speed (GR1O and GR2O) or three-speed range (GR1O, GR2O,
GR3O), set by parameter nos. 3741-3743, and the gear selection signal
is output simultaneously. When the gear selection signal is changed, the
SF signal is output at the same time (parameter SFA no. 3705#6).
The meaning of the gear signals is shown below:
Gear 2stage
Gear 3state
GR1O
Low
Low
GR2O
High
Middle
GR3O
High
710
Remarks
Low: Low Gear
Middle: Middle Gear

High: High Gear
B63003EN1/02
The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows:

For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to
16383 between the CNC and spindle control unit.
For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the analog
voltage signal SVC as analog voltages 0 to 10 V.
The following descriptions exemplify the analog spindle. However, they
can be applied to the serial spindle on the assumption that spindle motor
speed with analog voltage 10 V corresponds to the maximum spindle
motor speed.
M type gear change method A (Fig. 9.3 (a))
Spindle motor speed command

(Analog voltage command)
For gear 2-stage
10V
Upper limit of
spindle speed
(Vc)
Vmin
4095
(GR30)
GR20
(GR20)
GR10
(GR10)
Vmax
Vmax
4095
Fig. 9.3 (a)
4095
Spindle speed
command
(S code input)
Vmax
( ) for gear 3-stage
4095
S code input and output voltage
Set the following values as parameters:

Constant Vmax: for upper limit of spindle speed (parameter No. 3736)
Vmax=4095
Upper limit of spindle speed

Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
Constant Vmin; for lower limit of spindle speed (parameter No. 3735)
Vmin=4095
Lower limit of spindle speed

Spindle speed at command voltage 10V
Spindle speed A (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and low gear

(parameter no. 3741)
Spindle speed B (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear (or
middle-high gear) (parameter no. 3742)
Spindle speed C (rpm) ; at command voltage 10V and high gear
(parameter no. 3743)
711
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the
acceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system,
calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V using
a proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now,
in response to the specified S code, the speed command
and gear select commands (G3O, G2O, G1O) are output to
the spindle motor as shown in Fig. 9.3. (a).

(analog voltage output)
Gear change point during tapping cycle mode (G84, G74)

In case of G84 (tapping cycle) or G74 (counter tapping cycle) the gear
shift speed is changed by parameter SGT(No. 3705#3). In this case,
gear shift is performed at the speed set by parameter nos. 3761 and
3762 (Fig. 9.3 (b)).
Vc: Voltage for upper limit of spindle motor speed
10V
Upper limit
voltage of
spindle
motor speed
(Vc)
GR10
GR20
Spindle speed
command
(S code input)
A
B
D
E
C
D : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3761) for low/high speed change (or low/medium speed change) (set by
parameter as rpm value) during tapping.
E : Gear shift point (parameter No. 3762) (3-stage gear) for medium/high speed change (set by parameter as
rpm value) during tapping.
Fig. 9.3 (b)
S code input and output voltage (in tapping)
M type gear change method B (M series) (Fig. 9.3 (c))
The speed (rpm) at which the low-speed and the high-speed gears are
changed over can be set as a parameter (No.3751, 3752) by setting
parameter SGB (No. 3705# 2). When a 3-stage gear is used, it is possible
to set the speeds (rpm) for switching low-speed and medium-speed gears,
and medium-speed and high-speed gears, using parameters No. 3751,
3752.
712
B63003EN1/02

(analog voltage output)
10V
VC
VH
VL
GR10
Vmin
4095
GR30
GR20
Vmaxl
4095
A
B
Vmaxh
4095
Spindle speed
command
(S code input)
Vmax
4095
VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.
VH: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor with high-speed gears (medium
speed gear for 3-stage gear)
VL:
Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor at low-speed gear
Fig. 9.3 (c)
M type gear change B
When using this function, set the following parameters:

Constant Vmax (Parameter No.3736) related to the upper limit of
spindle motor speed (rpm)
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)
Vmax = 4095
Spindle motor speed (rpm) when the command voltage is 10V
Constant Vmin (Parameter No. 3735) related to the lower limit of

spindle motor speed (rpm)
Lower limit of spindle motor speed (rpm)
Vmin = 4095
Constant Vmaxl (Parameter No. 3751) related to the upper limit of

spindle motor speed (rpm) with low-speed gears
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with low-speed gears
Vmaxl = 4095
Constant Vmaxh (Parameter No. 3752) related to the upper limit of

spindle motor speed (rpm) with high-speed gears (medium-speed gear
for 3-stage gear)
Vmaxh = 4095
Upper limit of spindle motor speed (rpm) with high-speed gears

(medium-speed gear for 3-stage gear)
713
B63003EN1/02
Spindle speed A (Parameter No.3741) (rpm) with low-speed gears

when the command voltage is 10V
Spindle speed B (Parameter No.3742) (rpm) with high-speed gears
when the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed gear for 3-stage)
Spindle speed C (Parameter No.3743) (rpm) with high-speed gears
when the command voltage is 10V (3-stage gear)
Spindle motor speed commands (0 to 10V) and gear selecting signals
(GR1O, GR2O, GR3O) are issued on each S code command as shown in
the figure:
CAUTION
1 In a tapping cycle when parameter SGT (No. 3705 #3 ) is
set, the gears are changed over at the gear changing point
for tapping.
2 For this function (parameter SGB=1 (No. 3705#2)), when
only one-stage gear is used, the voltage corresponding to
the upper limit value to the spindle motor is calculated using
Vmaxl, and when 2-stage gear is used, it is calculated
according to Vmaxh. Therefore, when SGB is 1, set Vmaxl
when only one-stage gear is used, Vmaxl and Vmaxh when
2-stage gear is used.
Time chart
When S code is commanded, the I/O signal time chart is :
When Gear select signal does not change

S code read
To next block
Spindle speed
command output
0
V
Fig. 9.3 (d)
V
H
Time chart when gear select signal does not change
In this case, the SF signal is not output and the CNC advances to the next
block automatically after the next spindle speed command is output.
714
B63003EN1/02
When Gear select signal change

S code read
Gear select signal

GR3O
/GR2O
/GR1O
FIN
To next block

TM
F
SF

TMF
TFIN
Spindle speed command
VL
0V
Fig. 9.3 (e)
VH
Time chart when gear select signal changes
In this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of the time
constant set by parameter (TMF), the SF signal is output. After another
TMF elapse, the spindle speed command is output. On the PMC side,
change the gears by this signal, and return the FIN signal after the end of
gear change. The time chart for SF and FIN signals is the same as in S
code output.TMF, set by parameter No. 3010, is common to M, S and T
functions.
Moreover, specifying bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705 can specify that
the SF signal be output even if no gear change is used.
Details of T type
(Input of GR1, GR2)
To perform the T type gear changing, the maximum spindle speed for each
gear select signal issued from the PMC side must be set by parameter No.
3741-3744.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship
between the signal and gear number is :
GR1
GR2
Gear No.
Parameter No. for max.

spindle speed
No. 3741
No. 3742
No. 3743
No. 3744
The following descriptions exemplify the analog spindle. Like the

descriptions of the M type, they also apply to the serial spindle on the
assumption that spindle motor speed with analog voltage 10 V
corresponds to the maximum spindle motor speed.
715
B63003EN1/02
In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog
voltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data
0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if you
consider them code signals from 0 to 4095 for convenience sake without
distinguishing between serial and analog spindles.
Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
with the output voltage 10 V is 1000 rpm for the low speed gear (G1) and
2000 rpm for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds by the parameter
No. 3741, 3742. In this case, the analog voltage has the linear relationship
shown below.
2000rpm
When gear
2 selected
When gear
1 selected
1000rpm
600rpm
V2
V1
10
Volt
When spindle speed S=600 is given, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for G2) is

calculated inside the CNC and output to the machine side.
V1: 6(V)
V2: 3(V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the
following equations:
V=
10N
R
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage

N: Spindle speed given by S5-digits
This is equivalent to the G97 mode for constant surface speed control.
See Section 9.5 for operations during the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
In addition, parameter No. 3772 (upper limit to the spindle speed) can
specify speed clamping for all gear positions.
716
B63003EN1/02
Reference Block Diagram for Analog Voltage Output
With the constant surface speed control option equipped.

CNC
[Surface speed]
M code
S(m/min)
Xaxis present value

r
rpm/10V
Parameter
Constant
surface
speed control
G96
Power magnetics cabinet

Gear change command
Spindle speed
command
S (rpm)
Gear change
G97
GR1, GR2
gear select signal
Motor speed conversion

Full scale conversion
D-A
converter
(contact)
Spindle motor
SVC
Speed
control
SF signal is not sent.
Determination of output
R12OR01O (Output)
R12IR01I (Input)
SIND (Input)
Using the above processing for gear change, the CNC calculates the speed
command output to the spindle motor that is necessary to obtain the
specified spindle speed with the gear.
For either serial spindle or analog spindle control, the calculation results
are output as the S12 bit code signal from 0 to 4095 to the PMC.
(R12O to R01O<F037#3 to F036#0>)
After the calculation results are received, the SIND signal <G033#7>
determines which is to be used, the speed command output calculated by
the CNC or the data specified in the PMC. Thus speed command output
control for the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 15.4.)
Determination of output
polarity SSIN/SGN (Input)
The speed command output to the spindle motor is determined as

described above, but the actually used output polarity is determined by the
CNC as follows:
If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 0
Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No. 3706
If bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1
Determined according to bit 6 (CWM) of parameter No. 3706 and
M03/M04 given to the CNC
After that, the SSIN signal <G033#6> determines which is to be used, the
output polarity calculated by the CNC or the polarity specified in the
PMC. In this way, the output polarity of the speed command output to
the spindle motor is determined. (See also Section 15.4.)
717
B63003EN1/02
Keep in mind the following: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No.
3706 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not issued
M03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the speed
command output has been specified.
Command output to
spindle
According to the speed command output and the polarity determined so

far, the command is sent to the spindle control unit as follows:
For serial spindle Digital data 0 to" 16383
For analog spindle Analog voltage 0 to" 10 V
Requirement of output
After power is switched on, a nonzero command is output to the spindle

only when the following conditions are met: A nonzero spindle speed
command is specified, and the output polarity is determined.
With bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1, no command output is sent
to the spindle, because the output polarity is not determined until an
M03/M04 is issued.
Requirement to stop
output
The command output to the spindle is reset to 0 when a command to

specify so (such as *SSTP = 0 or S0 command) is issued.
M05, emergency stop, or reset does not cause the CNC to reset the
command output to the spindle to 0.
Spindle enable signal

ENB <F001#4>
Another output related to spindle control is the spindle enable signal

ENB.
The ENB signal is logical 1 when a nonzero command output is sent to
the spindle. If the command is logical 0, the ENB signal becomes logical
0.
When the analog spindle is being used, an offset voltage in the spindle
motor speed amplifier may cause the spindle motor to rotate at low speed
even if the command output (in this case, analog voltage) to the spindle
is zero. The ENB signal can be used to stop the motor in such a case.
Gain and offset
The analog spindle may require gain and offset voltage adjustment
depending on the spindle motor speed amplifier being used.
The following parameters are available for such adjustment.
Analog spindle as the first spindle
Gain adjustment data: Parameter No. 3730
Offset voltage compensation: Parameter No. 3731
Analog spindle as the third spindle
Gain adjustment data: Parameter No. 3820
(valid for multispindle control)
Offset voltage compensation: Parameter No. 3821
Electrical specification
of analog spindle
interface
The signals related to analog spindle interface are described below.

The ENB1 and ENB2 signals are turned on and off under the same
condition as for the ENB signal <F001#4>. They can be used also for the
serial spindle.
718
B63003EN1/02
Control unit
max+10V
2mA
Output
impedance
100
SVC
ES
SVC
ES
ENB1
Spindle speed
analog voltage
output
ENB Enable signal
ENB2
Name Connector/Pin
SVC
JA40/7
ES
JA40/5
ENB1
JA40/8
ENB2
JA40/9
WARNING
Since the output voltage is a weak signal, do not relay it
through contacts.
Position coder feedback

signal
The position coder is necessary for thread cutting or feed per revolution.
(For the M series, a software option must also be purchased.)
The position coder detects the actual spindle speed and the onerotation
signal (used to detect a fixed point on the spindle for thread cutting).
Ideally, the position coder should be connected directly to the spindle
(with a gear ratio of 1:1). If it is necessary to use a gear, select a gear ratio
from 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8 that reduces the position coder speed.
When using a gear between the spindle and position coder, specify the
gear ratio in bits 1 and 0 (PG2, PG1) of parameter No. 3706.
See Section 9.11 for position coder connection for rigid tapping.
Speed arrival signal

(SAR)
The spindle speed arrival signal SAR is an input signal used as a condition
to cause the CNC to start cutting feed. This signal is used generally when
cutting feed should be started after the spindle reaches the specified speed.
In this case, a sensor is used to check the spindle speed. The detected
speed is sent to the CNC via the PMC.
When the above operation is performed using the PC ladder regularly,
however, cutting feed may be started based on the SAR signal indicating
the previous spindle state (spindle speed before change), if the spindle
speed change command and the cutting feed command are issued at the
same time.
To avoid the above problem, monitoring the SAR signal can be deferred
for a time specified by parameter No. 3740 after the S command or cutting
feed command was issued.
When using the SAR signal, set bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 to 1.
Item No. 06 (SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK) on the diagnosis
screen is kept at 1 while this function is keeping the cutting feed block at
a halt.
719
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Spindle stop signal

*SSTP<G029#6>
[Function] The command output to the spindle is held.
[Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to 0 , the output voltage becomes 0V
and the enable signal ENB turns to 0 (M05 is not output). When this
signal turns to 1, the analog voltage returns to its original value and the
ENB signal turns to 1.
S
M05
M03
Input command
processing
Spindle stop signal

*SSTP
Analog voltage 0V
Enable signal ENB
M04
S0
The above time chart is an example. Actually, the time chart should meet
the specification of the spindle control unit.
When this signal is not used, always set the signal to 1.
M03, M04, M05 are not processed inside the CNC.
Spindle orientation
signal SOR <G029#5>
[Function] The spindle or the spindle motor is rotated at a constant speed.
[Operation] When the spindle orientation signal turns to 1 and the spindle stop
signal *SSTP turns to 0, a spindle speed command which lets the
spindle rotate at the constant speed set by parameter No. 3732 is output.
The enable signal ENB also turns to 1. This signal is disabled when the
spindle stop signal is 1.
When the spindle speed for orientation is set by parameter GST No.
3705#1 and the SOR signal is input, the CNC outputs the spindle speed
command corresponding to the speed set to parameter 3732 with an
output polarity set by parameter ORM (No. 3706#5), but the gear select
signal does not change. For example, if the SOR signal is turned to 1
with high gear selected, and the speed set to parameter No. 3732 is in the
720
B63003EN1/02
low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the command
output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear.
When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1,
the command output is output regardless of gear select signal. When the
spindle motor speed is set, it is used for gear shift.
Example of usage is shown below:
Input command
M19
processing
Spindle stop signal

*SSTP
Spindle orientation signal

SOR
Stop command
Max. 70ms
Command output to 0
the spindle
Enable signal
ENB
Spindle speed
0 rpm
Orientation
detection
Max. 70ms
M03
RL: Constant speed set by parameter No. 3732
Spindle speed override

signal SOV0 to SOV7
<G030>
[Function] The spindle speed override signal specifies an override from 0% to 254%
in 1% units for the S command sent to the CNC.
[Operation] An override value in binary must be set in 8 bits from SOV7 to SOV0.
The spindle speed override function is disabled (an override of 100% is
applied) under the following conditions:
Tapping cycle (M series : G84, G74 T series : G84, G88)
Thread cutting (M series : G33 T series : G32, G92, G76)
When this function is not in use, specify an override of 100%;
otherwise, an override of 0% becomes effective, thus disabling the
spindle from rotating.
721
B63003EN1/02
Spindle speed arrival

signal SAR <G029#4>
[Function] The SAR signal initiates cutting feed. In other words, if the signal is
logical 0, cutting feed will not start.
[Operation] Generally, this signal is used to inform the CNC that the spindle has
reached the specified speed.
For this purpose, the signal must be set to 1 only after the actual speed of
the spindle has reached the specified speed.
Setting parameter No. 3740 with a wait time before the start of checking
the SAR signal inhibits cutting feed from starting under a condition of
SAR = 1 specified before the change of the spindle command.
To use the SAR signal, it is necessary to set bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No.
3708 to 1.
The CNC checks the SAR signal under the following conditions:
a. Bit 0 (SAR) of parameter No. 3708 is set to 1.
b. Before starting distribution of the first feed (move command) block
after shifting from the rapid traverse mode to the cutting feed mode.
This checking is performed after the time set by parameter No. 3740
has elapsed after the feed block is read.
c. Before starting distribution of the first feed command block after an
S code is commanded. The wait time for checking is the same as in
item b.
d. When an S code and feed are programmed in the same block, the S
code (or command output to the spindle) is output, and the SAR signal
is checked after a fixed time elapses. If the SAR signal is set to 1,
feed begins.
CAUTION
According to the conditions of item d above, note that if the
circuit is so designed that SAR is turned to 0
simultaneously with the output of an S code and the change
of spindle speed is gated with DEN signal, the operation will
stop. That is, the spindle speed does not reach the
commanded speed because the CNC is waiting for the DEN
signal and distribution is not started because the CNC is
waiting for the SAR signal.
722
B63003EN1/02

ENB <F001#4>
[Function] Informs absence or presence of spindle output command.
[Output condition] The ENB signal becomes logical 0 when the command output to the
spindle becomes logical 0. Otherwise, the signal is logical 1.
During analog spindle control, S0 may not be able to stop the spindle from
rotating at low speed because of an offset voltage in the spindle motor
speed control amplifier. In such a case, the ENB signal can be used to
provide a condition to determine whether to stop the motor.
The analog spindle interface (JA40) has electric signals (ENB1 and
ENB2) similar to the ENB. These signals work under the same conditions
as with the ENB signal.
The ENB signal can be used also for serial spindle control.
Gear selection signal

GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
<F034#0 to #2>
[Function] The gear select signal specifies a gear stage to the PMC.
[Output condition] For details of this signal, see descriptions on the M type gear selection
method in General.

GR1, GR2 <G028#1, #2>
[Function] This signal informs the CNC of the gear stage currently selected.
[Output condition] For details of this signal, see descriptions on the T type gear selection
method in General.
723
B63003EN1/02
S12bit code signal

R01O to R12O
<F036#0 to F037#3>
[Function] This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the
CNC to code signals 0 to 4095.
[Output condition] The relationship between the spindle speed command value (calculated
by the CNC) and the value output by this signal is as shown below.
S12 bit code

signal
4095
0
0
16383 (Digital data) Serial spindle

10V (Analog voltage) Analog spindle
This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the
spindle control function of the CNC to data from 0 to 4095 (for both serial
and analog spindle control) and outputs the result. Note that the
conversion result is not the actual output value. (See Section 15.4.)
Other signals
Spindle speed function

code signal S00 to S31
<F025 to F022> (Output)
Spindle speed function
strobe signal
SF<F007#2> (Output)
See Sections 9.1 and 15.4 for these signals.
Spindle speed output

control signal by PMC
SIND<G033#7> (Input)
R01l to R12l
<G032#0 to G033#3>
(Input)
SSIN <G033#6> (Input)
SGN <G033#5> (Input)
See Section 15.4 for these signals.
724
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
G027
#7
CON
#6
#5
*SSTP3
#4
*SSTP2
#3
*SSTP1
G028
G029
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
#2
SWS3
#1
SWS2
GR2
GR1
#0
SWS1
G030
SOV7
SOV6
SOV5
SOV4
SOV3
SOV2
SOV1
SOV0
G032
R08I
R07I
R06I
R05I
R04I
R03I
R02I
R01I
G033
SIND
SSIN
SGN
R12I
R11I
R10I
R09I
#7
#6
#5
#3
#2
#1
#0
F001
#4
ENB
F007
SF
F022
S07
S06
S05
S04
S03
S02
S01
S00
F023
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S09
S08
F024
S23
S22
S21
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
F025
S31
S30
S29
S28
S27
S26
S25
S24
F036
R08O
R07O
R06O
R05O
R04O
R03O
R02O
R01O
R12O
R11O
R10O
R09O
#3
#2
#1
#0
ESF
SGT
SGB
GST
ESF
F037
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
SFA
NSF
3705
#4
EVS
[Data type] Bit

ESF When the spindle control function (S analog outpu or S serial output) is
used, and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 4
(GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is set to 1:
0 : S codes and SF are output for all S commands.
1 : S codes and SF are not output for an S command in constant surface
speed control mode (G96 mode) or for an S command used to specify
maximum spindle speed clamping (G50S;).
NOTE
For the T series, this parametar is enabled when bit 4 (EVS)
of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1.
For the M series, SF is not output:
(1)For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
speed clamping (G92S;) in constant surface speed
control mode
(2)When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
725
B63003EN1/02
GST: The SOR signal is used for:

0 : Spindle orientation
1 : Gear shift
SGB: Gear switching method
0 : Method A (Parameters No. 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle
speed at each gear are used for gear selection.)
1 : Method B (Parameters No. 3751 and 3752 for the spindle speed at the
gear switching point are used for gear selection.)
SGT: Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74)
0 : Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)
1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
spindle speed set in parameters No. 3761 and 3762).
EVS When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, S codes and SF are:
0 : Not output for an S command.
1 : Output for an S command.
NOTE
The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command used
to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G50S;)
depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No. 3705.
NSF: When an S code command is issued in constant surface speed control,

0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output.
SFA: The SF signal is output:
0 : When gears are switched
1 : Irrespective of whether gears are switched
3706
#7
TCW
#6
CWM
#5
ORM
#4
TCW
CWM
ORM
GTT
#3
#2
#1
PG2
#0
PG1
PG2
PG1
[Data type] Bit

PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder
Magnification
PG2
PG1
Spindle speed
Magnification=
Number of position coder revolutions
GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method

0 : Type M
1 : Type T
726
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 Type M:
The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an
S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed
range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters.
Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting
the gear selection signal. The spindle speed corresponding
to the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle speed
corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is output.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
type T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is
specified.
3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the
following parameters have no effect:
No. 3705#2 SGB, No. 3751, No. 3752, No. 3705#3 SGT,
No. 3761, No. 3762, No. 3705#6 SFA, No. 3735, No. 3736
However, parameter No. 3744 is valid.
ORM Voltage polarity during spindle orientation
0 : Positive
1 : Negative
TCW, CWM Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output
#7
TCW
CWM
Both M03 and M04 positive
Both M03 and M04 negative
M03 positive, M04 negative
M03 negative, M04 positive
#6
#5
Voltage polarity
#4
#3
#2
#1
3709
#0
SAM
[Data type] Bit

SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed
0 : 4 (Normally, set to 0.)
1: 1
3730
Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.1 %
Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed.
727
B63003EN1/02
[Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.

(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed
is the maximum voltage (10 V).
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.
3730.
10 (V)
Set value=
Measured data (V)
1000
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog
output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the
output voltage is 10V.
NOTE
This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.
3731
Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Velo
Set compesation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the
spindle speed.
Set value =8191 Offset voltage (V)/12.5
[Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 0 to the parameter.
(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed
is 0.
(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.
3731.
Set value=
8191 Offset voltage (V)

12.5
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog
output of the spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the output voltage is 0V.
NOTE
This parameter need not to be set for serial spindles.
3732
The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during
spindle gear shift
[Data type] Twoword

728
B63003EN1/02

Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor
speed during gear shift.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 0, set the spindle speed during
spindle orientation in rpm.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 1, set the spindle motor speed
during spindle gear shift calculated from the following formula.
Set value =
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift

Maximum spindle motor speed
16383 (For a serial spindle)
Set value =
Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift

4095 (For an analog spindle)
3735
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
[Data type] Word

Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Set value =
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor

4095
3736
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor
[Data type] Word

Set the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Set value =
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor

4095
Spindle motor speed
Max. speed (4095, 10V)

Spindle motor max.
clamp speed
Spindle motor minimum

clamp speed
729
Spindle speed (S command)
3740
B63003EN1/02
Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the
checking of the spindle speed arrival signal.
3741
Maximum spindle speed for gear 1
3742
3743
3744
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear.
Spindle motor speed

Spindle motor max.
clamp speed
Spindle motor minimum clamp speed

Gear 1
Max. speed
730
Gear 2
Max. speed
Gear 3
Max. speed
Spindle speed
command
(S command)
B63003EN1/02
3751
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2
3752
Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 3
[Data type] Word

For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears
are switched.
Set value =
Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched

4095
Spindle motor speed
Spindle motor max. clamp speed
Parameter No. 3736
Speed at gear 23 change point
Parameter No. 3752
Speed at gear 12 change point
Parameter No. 3751
Spindle motor minimum clamp

speed
Parameter No. 3735
Gear 1
max.
speed
parameter
No. 3741
Gear 12
change point
Gear 2
max.
speed
parameter
No. 3742
Gear 23
change point
731
Gear 3
max
speed
parameter
No. 3743
Spindle speed
command
(S command)
B63003EN1/02
3761
Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping
3762
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705, is set to 1) for the
tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the gears
are switched.
Spindle motor speed

Spindle motor max.
clamp speed
Spindle motor minimum

clamp speed
Gear 1
Max.
speed
Parameter
No. 3741
Gear 12
change point
parameter
No. 3761
Gear 2
Max.
speed
Parameter
No. 3742
Gear 23
change point
parameter
No. 3762
732
Gear 3
Max.
speed
Parameter
No. 3743
Spindle speed
command
(S command)
B63003EN1/02
3772
Maximum spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of
the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum
speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is
not clamped.
2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped.
NOTE
1 In the M series, this parameter is valid when the constant
surface speed control option is selected.
the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,
regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is
specified.
3 When the multispindle control option is selected, set the
maximum speed for each spindle in the following
parameters:
Parameter No. 3772: Sets the maximum speed for the first
spindle.
Parameter No. 3802: Sets the maximum speed for the
second spindle.
Parameter No. 3822: Sets the maximum speed for the third
spindle.
3821
Offsetvoltage compensation value of the analog output of the thirdspindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Velo
Set the offsetvoltage compensation value of the analog output of the
thirdspindle speed.
733
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
This section mentioned a spindle speed control that should
be prepared on the CNC side. But it is also necessary to
design the signals to the spindle control unit.
Consult the manual of the spindle control unit used and take
necessary actions on the spindle control unit.
734
B63003EN1/02
9.4
SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL FOR
TWOPATH LATHE
General
In a twopath lathe application, the additional path section (path No. 2)

can have the same spindle interface as a onepath lathe (see Section 9.2.).
Each spindle is controlled by a command issued by tool post 1 or 2.
Which spindle is controlled by which tool post can be switched by signals.
This section describes the configuration of a twopath lathe application
and how it is controlled.
In the following description, the term tool post 1 refers to path No. 1, and
the term tool post 2 refers to path No. 2.
Onespindle control and

twospindle control
In a twopath lathe application, there are two selectable configurations,

a configuration in which the entire system uses one spindle (onespindle
control) and a configuration in which each spindle is controlled separately
(twospindle control). Parameter No. 3703#0 (2SP) is used to select a
configuration.
Onespindle control
The spindle interface for tool post 2 is not used.
Selection of the spindle

command
The spindle command select signal SLSPA<G063#2> (input) specifies

the tool post whose spindle command is to be followed by the spindle.

signal (serial spindle)
When a serial spindle is used, the position coder feedback signal is

supplied to both paths in the NC. Either tool post can be used for thread
cutting and feed per rotation.
SUB CPU BOARD
MOTHER BOARD
PC#1 Feedback signal
Feedback
PC#1
Feedback
SIC
SPDL2
JA41
Tool post 2
spindle
control
Tool post 1
spindle
control
S#2
S#1
Command Command
SPDL1
JA41
Spindle#1
Serial spindle
SLSPA
Fig. 9.4 (a)
One spindle control (serial spindle)
735

signal (Analog)
B63003EN1/02
When an analog spindle is used, supplying the position coder feedback

signal to the position coder interface of tool post 2 via an external
distribution circuit makes it possible to use either tool post for thread
cutting and feed per rotation.
MOTHER BOARD
SUB CPU BOARD
POSLSI
SPDL2
JA41
AOUT2
JA40
Feedback
Tool post 2
spindle
control
PC#1Feedback signal
Feedback
Tool post 1
spindle
control
S#2
S#1
Command Command
External
circuit
(distribution)
POSLSI
SPDL1
JA41
AOUT1
JA40
Spindle#1
Analog spindle
SLSPA
Fig. 9.4 (b)
One spindle control (analog spindle)
736
PC#1
B63003EN1/02
Twospindle control
The spindle interface for either tool post is used.
Selection of spindle
command
The spindle command select signals SLSPA <G063#2> and SLSPB

<G063#3> (input) specify the tool post whose spindle command is to be
followed by each spindle.

signal (When both are
serial spindle)
When the serial spindles are used on both tool posts, the position coder
feedback signals SLPCA<G064#2> and SLPCB<G064#3> (input) direct
each tool post to select which spindles position coder feedback signal is
used. Therefore, it is possible to use the spindle of the other system; for
example, tool post 1 can perform thread cutting or feed per rotation using
the spindle connected to tool post 2.
SUB CPU BOARD
MOTHER BOARD
PC#2Feedback signal
PC#1Feedback signal
0 1
0 1
SLPCB
SIC
Spindle#2
Serial spindle
SPDL2
JA41
Feedback
Tool post 2
spindle
contol
S#2
Command
Tool post1
spindle
control
S#1
Command
0 1
PC#1
SIC
SPDL1
JA41
1 0
SLSPB
Fig. 9.4 (c)
SLPCA
Feedback
PC#2
SLSPA
Twospindle control (serial spindle)
737
Spindle#1
Serial spindle

signal (when an analog
spindle is used)
B63003EN1/02
If either tool post uses an analog spindle as the first spindle, the spindle
feedback signals SLPCA<G064#2> and SLPCB<G064#3> (input)
cannot cause the NC to select a position coder feedback signal.
If both tool posts use an analog spindle, switching the position coder
feedback signal inputs to the NC using an external circuit makes it
possible to use the spindle of the other system.
PC#1Feedback signal
External circuit
(distribution/selection)
PC#1/ #2 Feedback
PC#1/ #2 Feedback
SUB CPU BOARD
MOTHER BOARD
PC#1/#2 Feedback
PC#2
Spindle#2
Analog spindle
POSLSI
SPDL2
JA41
Feedback
Tool post1
spindle
control
S#2
Command
S#1
Command
0 1
SLSPB
Fig. 9.4 (d)
Feedback
Tool post 2
spindle
control
AOUT2
JA40
PC#1/#2 Feedback
1 0
POSLSI
SPDL1
JA41
AOUT1
JA40
SLSPA
Twospindle control (analog spindle)
738
PC#1
Spindle#1
Analog spindle
B63003EN1/02
2nd and 3rd spindles
If the first spindle is a serial spindle, the second and third spindles can also
be used in a twopath lathe application. (See Section 9.2.)
In the following chart, all spindles are connected under twospindle
control.
Under onespindle control, any spindle (SP1#2, SP2#2, SP3#2) of tool
post 2 cannot be used.
MOTHER BOARD
SUB CPU BOARD
PC Feedback signal
PC Feedback signal

PC2#2
PC1#2
Spindle 1#2
1st serial spindle
PC1#2
SPDL
2
JA41
SPDL1
JA41
PC2SLC#2
SLPCB
PC2SLC#1
SLPCA
Feedback
spindle
control
command
S#2
PC2#2
0
SLSPB
A
OUT2
JA40
1st serial spindle
Spindle 2#1
Spindle 1#1
2nd serial spindle
Feedback
spindle
control
command
S#1
PC2#1
0
SLSPA
SWS1#2
SIND1#2
SWS1#1
SIND1#1
SWS2#2
SIND2#2
SWS2#1
SIND2#1
SWS3#2
SIND3#2
SWS3#1
SIND3#1
AOUT1
JA40
Spindle 3#1
Analog spindle
POSLSI
POSLSI
Fig. 9.4 (e)
PC1#1
SIC
Spindle 2#2
Analog spindle
PC2#1
SIC
2nd serial spindle
Spindle 3#2
PC1#1
Spindle configuration and flow of commands and feedback signals in an twopath lathe application
(with all spindles under twospindle control)
The second and third spindles should be controlled using the PMC or be
under multispindle control. (See Section 15.4 or 9.10.)
If multispindle control is applied to both tool posts, the position coder
feedback signal for the second spindle of each tool post also becomes
usable.
See descriptions of bit 3 (PCS) of parameter No. 3706.
739
Options related to
spindles
B63003EN1/02
Optional functions for spindles are valid for both tool posts. However,
you may want to use the optional functions for only one of the tool posts
because of relationships with the interface and PMC ladder.
Parameters are available to disable the following functions for individual
tool posts.
Spindle serial output
Spindle analog output
Cs contour control
Spindle positioning
Multispindle control
Refer to parameter No. 3702.
Signal
Spindle command select

signals
SLSPA <G063#2>,
SLSPB <G063#3>
[Function] Selects each tool posts spindle receives spindle command of which tool
posts.
SLSPA: Selects the spindle command for spindle connected to tool post
1.
SLSPB: Selects the spindle command for spindle connected to tool post
2.
The spindle command select signals are associated with the spindle commands as follows:
(1) In the 1-spindle control mode
Signal input
SLSPA
Command to spindle
Spindle command of tool post 1
Spindle command of tool post 2
NOTE
SLSPB is ineffective.
740
B63003EN1/02
(2) In the 2-spindle control mode

Signal input
Command to the
spindle connected to
tool post 1
Command to the
spindle connected to
tool post 2
SLPCA
SLPCB
Spindle command of
tool post 1
Spindle command of
tool post 2
Spindle command of
tool post 1
Spindle command of
tool post 1
Spindle command of
tool post 2
Spindle command of
tool post 2
Spindle command of
tool post 2
Spindle command of
tool post 1
Spindle feedback select

signals
SLPCA <G064#2>
SLPCB <G064#3>
[Function] Selects which spindle sends the feedback signal of the position coder to
which tool post.
NOTE
This function is effective only in the 2-spindle control system
in which both tool posts use serial spindle.
SLPCA: Selects the feedback signal for tool post 1.

SLPCB: Selects the feedback signal for tool post 2.
The spindle feedback select signals are associated with the feedback
signals of the position coder as follows:
(1) In 1-spindle control mode
The feedback signal of the spindle connected to tool post 1 is always
sent to both tool posts; the SLPCA and SLPCB signals have no
meaning.
(2) In 2-spindle control mode
Signal input
SLPCA SLPCB
Tool post 1
Tool post 2
PC#1
PC#2
PC#1
PC#1
PC#2
PC#2
PC#2
PC#1
PC#1=Position coder feedback signal with the spindle connected to tool

post 1.
PC#2=Position coder feedback signal with the spindle connected to tool
post 2.
741
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
The SLPCA and SLPCB signals are effective only in the
2-spindle control mode using two serial spindles. In the
2-spindle control mode using analog spindles, the feedback
signal of spindle 1 is input to tool post 1, and the feedback
signal of spindle 2 is input to tool post 2, regardless of the
setting of the SLPCA and SLPCB signals.
Spindle command signal

COSP <F064#5>
[Function] Indicates which tool post issued the latest spindle command.
[Output condition] The COSP signal turns to 1 when:
Tool post 2 issues the spindle command.
The COSP signal turns to 0 when:
Tool post 1 issues the spindle command, or neither of the tool posts
issues the spindle command.
[Use] In 1-spindle control mode, if this signal is input to the SLSPA signal
(spindle command select signal), the spindle speed specified by the latest
spindle command can always be output to the spindle, regardless of
whether it is from tool post 1 or 2.
Signal address
G063
#7
#3
SLSPB
#2
SLSPA
G064
SLPCB
SLPCA
#3
#2
#7
F064
#6
#6
#5
#5
COSP
742
#4
#4
#1
#0
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3702
#7
ECS
#6
ESS
#5
EAS
#4
ESI
#3
#2
#1
EMS
#0
[Data type] Bit

EMS Multispindle control function
0 : Used
1 : Not used
NOTE
If the multispindle control function is not required for one
tool post in twopath control, specify this parameter for the
tool post to which the multispindle control function need
not be applied.
ESI The spindle positioning function is

0 : Used
1 : Not used
NOTE
This parameter is used when the spindle positioning option
specified with twopath control, and the spindle positioning
function is not required for either path. Set ESI to 1 for a
system that does not require the spindle positioning
function.
EAS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the S analog output function is:
0 : Used.
1 : Not used.
ESS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the S serial output function is:
0 : Used.
1 : Not used.
ECS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the Cs contour control function is:
0 : Used.
1 : Not used.
NOTE
Parameter EAS, ESS, and ECS are used for T series
2path control.
These parameters are used to determine whether the
optional function, S analog output function, S serial output
function, and Cs contour control function, are used for each
tool post.
743
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
3703
#0
2SP
[Data type] Bit

2SP Specifies whether one or two spindles are controlled (T series 2path
control).
0 : One spindle (two tool posts)
1 : Two spindle (two tool posts)
#7
#6
#5
3706
#4
#3
PCS
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

PCS When multispindle control is applied to two tool posts in twopath
control, this parameter specifies whether a position coder feedback signal
from the other tool post is selectable, regardless of the state of the
PC2SLC signal (bit 7 of G028/bit 7 of G1028) of the other tool post:
0 : Not selectable.
1 : Selectable. (To select a position coder for the other tool post, the
SLPCA signal (bit 2 of G064) and the SLPCB signal (bit 3 of G064)
are used.)
NOTE
Multispindle control based on the same serial spindle must
be applied to both tool posts.
Selecting position coder feedback signals for both tool posts in a

twopath lathe application under multispindle control.
PC1#2
PC1#1
Spindle 1#2
Spindle 1#1
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
1st serial spindle
1 st serial spindle
2nd serial spindle
2nd serial spindle
Spindle 2#2
Spindle 2#1
PC2#2
PC2#1
744
B63003EN1/02
Table 9.4 lists the position coder feedback signals used for each tool post
in the above configuration. These position coder feedback signals are
selected according to the following:
Bit 3 (PCS) of parameter No. 3706
Spindle feedback select signals SLPCA <G064#2> and SLPCB
<G064#3>
Second position coder select signals PC2SLC#1 <G028#7> and
PC2SLC#2 <G1028#7>
Table 9.4 Selection of position coder feedback signal in twopath lathe
( means position coder selection is indifferent on the tool post side)
When parameter No. 3706#3=1
Tool
post
1
Tool
post
2
PC2SLC#1 PC2SLC#2
Position coder
select
SLPCA
SLPCB
PC1#1
PC2#1
PC1#2
PC2#2
PC1#1
PC2#1
PC1#2
PC2#2
When parameter No. 3706#3=0
Tool
post
1
Tool
post
2
PC2SLC#1 PC2SLC#2
Position coder
select
SLPCA
SLPCB
PC1#1
PC2#1
PC1#2
PC2#2
PC1#1
PC2#1
PC1#2
PC2#2
745
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 The spindle commands include S code commands,
maximum speed command (G50S__), M03, M04, M05, and
constant surface speed control commands (G96 and G97)
2 Signals to operate the spindle control unit are not affected
by the spindle command select signals SLSPA<G063#2> or
SLSPB<G063#3>. They may be processed in the PMC
ladder, as required.
(Example: SFRA <G070#5>is always a forward rotation
command for the first spindle control amplifier of
tool post 1.)
3 The machine tool builder should prepare an external circuit
to distribute and select position coder feedback signals for
the analog spindle.
746
B63003EN1/02
9.5
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL
General
With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying the
surface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes it
possible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain a
constant surface speed at a programmed point. (For the rapid traverse
command, however, the surface speed for the end point is output at the
beginning of rapid traverse.)
Spindle speed N
Surface speed S=2rN
Whether or not constant surface speed control is performed is selected by

G code.
G96: Constant surface speed control performed. S in the G96 mode is
m/min or feet/min.
G97: Constant surface speed control not performed. S in the G97 mode
is rev/min.
To perform constant surface speed control, the maximum spindle speed
for each gear select signal issued from the PMC side must be set by
parameter No. 3741-3744.
The gear select signal is a 2 bit code signal (GR1, GR2). The relationship
between the signal and gear number is :
GR1
GR2
Gear number
747
Example of Spindle
Analog Output
B63003EN1/02
Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed
with the output 10 V is 1000 rpm for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000
rpm for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parameter No.
3741, 3742, respectively. In this case, the spindle output has the linear
relationship shown below:
2000rpm
G2
When gear
2 selected
G1
When gear
1 selected
1000rpm
600rpm
V2
V1
10
Spindle output
(Volt)
Here, S = 60 m/min is given as the surface speed; if the position of the

present X-axis cutter is 16 mm from the center, the spindle speed N
becomes 600 rpm (S = 2r N). Therefore, V1 (for G1) or V2 (for G2) is
calculated inside the CNC and output to the machine side.
V1: 6(V)
V2: 3(V)
The value of output voltage V is calculated automatically from the
following equations:
(i) G96
V=
10S
2rR
R: Spindle speed (rpm) at 10V output voltage (that is , spindle speed set
by parameter No. 3741 to No. 3744)
S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S command
r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
(ii)G97
V=
10N
R
R: Spindle speed at 10V output voltage (rpm)

N: Spindle speed given by S command (rpm)
748
B63003EN1/02
Spindle Serial Output
The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data.

Therefore assume the following relation for calculation:
Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output
(digital data) 4095.
The above calculation becomes as follows:
The value of Spindle output D:
(i) G96
D=
4095S
2rR
R: Spindle speed (rpm) at maximum spindle motor speed (that is , spindle

speed set by parameter No. 3741 to No. 3744)
S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S
r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m)
(ii)G97
D=
4095N
R
R: Spindle speed at maximum spindle motor speed (rpm)

N: Spindle speed given by S command (rpm)

control with no position
coder (T series)
In a machine with no position coder (or without using a position coder),

it is usually impossible to use feed per rotation during constant surface
speed control. Setting parameter FPR (bit 2 of parameter No. 1405) to 1,
however, makes it possible to use feed per revolution in a machine with
no position coder (or without using a position coder) even when it is under
constant surface speed control. In this type of feed per revolution, it is
assumed that the spindle speed is specified by the 12bit S code signal
R01O to R12O <F036#0 to F037#3>.
NOTE
This function is valid only for the spindle connected to the
system of interest.
For example, the following program is executed with G code system B

and diameters specified.
N1 G00 X50. Z10. ;
N2 G96 G95 S12 ;
N3 G01 X20. Z30. F10. ;

N4 Z50. ;
N5 G97 S200 ;
N6 G00 Z200. ;
N7 M30 ;
749
Constant surface speed control and

feed per revolution begin.
Constant surface speed control ends.
B63003EN1/02
N3
N4
In this program, block N2 issues a constant surface speed control

command (G96), a surface speed command (S12 m/min), and a
feedperrevolution command (G95). Block N3 causes the CNC to
change the spindle speed specification from 76.4 rpm to 191 rpm so as to
maintain a constant surface speed during movement to X = 20.
Meanwhile, the feedperrevolution speed is changed according to the
changed spindle speed specification, and used for movement along the
feed axis. However, the specified spindle speed is clamped to the upper
limit to the spindle speed specification (for the first spindle, using
parameter No. 3772). In the above program, the feedperrevolution
speed command F10 in block N3 corresponds to an actual speed of 764
(mm/min) to 1910 (mm/min).
Signal

(Input)
GR2, GR1 <G028#2, #1>
Refer to section 9.3 Spindle Speed Control.

signal CSS <F002#2>
[Function] This signal indicates that constant surface speed control is in progress.
[Output condition] 1 indicates that constant surface speed control mode (G96) is in
progress, while 0 indicates it is not.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
F002
750
#4
#3
#2
CSS
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
1405
#4
#3
#2
FPR
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

FPR Specifies whether to use a function that converts the specified spindle
rotation speed to the actual spindle rotation speed in feedperrevolution
mode, that is, the feedperrevolution function with no position coder.
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
NOTE
If you set this parameter to 1, reset parameter NPC (bit 0 of
parameter No. 1402) to 0.
3741
3742
3743
3744
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
3770
Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed contorol
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., number of control axes
set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed contorol.
NOTE
When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always
applied to the Xaxis. In this case, specifying P in a G96
block has no effect on the constant surface speed control.
751
3771
B63003EN1/02
Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
The spindle speed in constant surface speed control is clamped to the
speed given by parameter 3771.
3772
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle
speed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed
because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
NOTE
1 In the M series, this parameter is valid when the constant
surface speed control option is selected.
specified.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
190
ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT
752
Description
In the constant surface speed control,

the axis specification is wrong. (See parameter No. 3770.) The specified axis
command (P) contains an illegal value.
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the spindle speed corresponding to the calculated surface
speed exceeds the speed specified in the spindle speed
clamp command (G50S_ for T series and G92S_ for M
series) during the G96 mode, the actual spindle speed is
clamped at the value specified in the spindle speed clamp
command.
If the specified spindle speed is lower than the value
specified in parameter No. 3771, the actual spindle speed
is clamped at the specified speed.
2 If the constant surface speed control function is provided for
a machining center system, it affects gear change under
normal spindle control. (See Section 9.3.)
Note
NOTE
Simultaneous use of multispindle control enables constant
surface speed control for spindles other than the first
spindle. (See Section 9.10.)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.9.3
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

CONTROL (G96, G97)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.9.3

CONTROL (G96, G97)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.9.3

CONTROL (G96, G97)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.9.3

CONTROL (G96, G97)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.9.3

CONTROL (G96, G97)
753
B63003EN1/02
9.6
SPINDLE SPEED
FLUCTUATION
DETECTION
General
With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised and the spindle
speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle
speed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions.
This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of the
guide bushing.
G26 enables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
G25 disables spindle speed fluctuation detection.
Detection of Spindle
Speed Fluctuation
The function for detecting spindle speed fluctuation checks whether the
actual speed varies for the specified speed or not. Sd or Sr, whichever is
greater, is taken as the allowable fluctuation speed (Sm). An alarm is
activated when the actual spindle speed varies for the commanded speed
(Sc) under the condition that the variation width exceeds the allowable
variation width (Sm).
Sd: The allowable constant variation width which is independent of the
specified spindle speed (Sd is set with parameter No. 4913.)
Sr: The allowable variation width which is obtained by multiplying Sc
(commanded spindle speed) by r (constant ratio). (r is set with
parameter No. 4912.)
Sm: Sd or Sr, whichever is greater
Conditions to start
spindle speed
fluctuation detection
If the specified spindle speed Sc changes, spindle speed fluctuation

detection starts when one of the conditions below is met:
The actual spindle speed falls in a range of (Sc Sq) to (Sc + Sq)
where Sq = Sc
q/100
q: Percent tolerance of the target spindle speed, specified in parameter
No. 4911. If the actual spindle speed is in a range of the specified speed
" q, it is assumed that the actual speed has reached the specified speed.
When time p specified in parameter No. 4914 elapses after the specified
speed Sc changes.
Parameter No. 4914, 4911, and 4912 can be rewritten also by program
(G26 PpQqRr).
754
B63003EN1/02
1. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached
Spindle speed
Sr
Sd
Sq
Sq
Sd
Specified
speed
Sr
Actual speed
Check
No check
Check
Specification of Start of check

another speed
Time
Alarm
2. When an alarm is issued before a specified spindle speed is reached
Spindle speed
Sd
Sq
Sq
Check
Sd
No check
Specification of
another speed
Check
Start of check
Alarm
Sr
Specified
speed
Sr
Actual speed
Time
Specified speed :
(Speed specified by address S and fivedigit value)(spindle override)
Actual speed : Speed detected with a position coder
755
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Spindle fluctuation
detection alarm signal
SPAL <F035#0>
[Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a tolerance
to the specified speed.
[Output condition] The signal becomes logical 1 when:
The actual spindle speed goes out of tolerance to the specified speed.
The signal becomes logical 0 when:
No alarm condition has been detected for spindle speed fluctuation.
An alarm condition is cleared by resetting the NC when the signal is
logical 1.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SPAL
#7
#6
#5
#4
SVD
#3
#2
#1
#0
F035
Parameter
3708
[Data type] Bit

SVD
When the SIND signal is on, the detection of spindle speed fluctuation is:
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
#7
#6
#5
4900
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
FLR
[Data type] Bit

FLR When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, the rates of
allowance (q) and fluctuation (r) those are set in parameter No. 4911 and
No. 4912, respectively are set in steps of:
0 : 1%
1 : 0.1%
756
B63003EN1/02
4911
Ratio (q) of the fluctuation of spindle speed which is assumed to be the specified
spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Unit of data
1%
0. 1% (T series)
Data range
1 100
1 1000
NOTE
Unit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR (T
series only)
Set the ratio (q) of the spindle speed which is assumed to be the specified
spindle speed in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
4912
Spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle
speed fluctuation detection function
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Unit of data
1%
0. 1% (T series)
Data range
1 100
1 1000
NOTE
Unit of data depends on parameter No. 4900#0 FLR (T
series only).
Set the spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in
the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
4913
Spindle speed fluctuation value (d) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle
speed fluctuation detection function
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set the allowable fluctuation speed (d) for which no alarm is activated in
the spindle speed fluctuation detection function.
4914
Time (p) elapsed from when the commanded spindle speed is changed to the start
of spindle speed fluctuation detection
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time (p) elapsed from when the specified spindle speed is changed
to the start of spindle speed fluctuation detection in the spindle speed
fluctuation detection function. That is, the fluctuation in the spindle speed
is not detected until the specified time elapses from when the specified
spindle speed is changed.
757
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
704
Description
OVER HEAT : SPINDLE
Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuation detection

(1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the
cutting condition.
(2) Check whether the cutting tool is share.

(3) Another possible cause is a faulty
spindle amp.
Note
NOTE
1 When an alarm is issued in automatic operation, a single
block stop occurs.
2 No check is made during spindle stop state (*SSTP = 0).
3 An alarm is issued one second later if the actual spindle
speed is found to be 0 rpm.
4 Issuing the alarm does not cause the spindle to stop
automatically.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.9.4
SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION FUNCTION

(G25, G26)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.9.4

(G25, G26)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.9.4

(G25, G26)
758
B63003EN1/02
9.7
ACTUAL SPINDLE
SPEED OUTPUT
(T SERIES)
General
The PMC can read actual spindle speed.
Signal
Actual spindle speed

signal AR0 to AR15
<F040, F041>
[Function] These 16-bit binary code signals output from the CNC to the PMC the
actual spindle speed obtained by feedback pulses from the position coder
mounted on the spindle.
15
[Operation] Spindle speed ={2iVi}rpm

i=0
where Vi = 0 when ARi is 0 and Vi = 1 when ARi is 1
Signal address
F040
F041
#7
AR7
#6
AR6
#5
AR5
#4
AR4
#3
AR3
#2
AR2
#1
AR1
#0
AR0
AR15
AR14
AR13
AR12
AR11
AR10
AR09
AR08
Note
NOTE
1 The AR0 - AR15 signals are always output. Their values
change every 64 msec.
2 An absolute error of about 0.5 rpm exists as a measuring
error.
759
B63003EN1/02
9.8
SPINDLE
POSITIONING
(T SERIES)
General
This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and position
coder.
The function has a coarser least command increment compared with the
Cs contour control function and has no interpolation capability with other
axes. However, it can be installed with ease because the position detector
is a position coder.
Generally, the spindle positioning axes are clamped mechanically except
when positioning is under way.
In the turning process, the workpiece is rotated by the spindle to which
it is attached (spindle rotation mode), at the speed specified for the spindle
motor. The value for the spindle speed is input from the spindle controller
to the spindle amplifier.
When the optional spindle positioning function is activated, the spindle
is moved to a defined angle, and the workpiece is repositioned at that
angle. The specified move distance is input to the error counter, and the
velocity command is issued for the spindle motor through the spindle
amplifier. The position of the spindle is detected by the installed position
coder (Spindle positioning mode).
The spindle positioning function can perform the following operations:
D Release the spindle rotation mode and enter the spindle positioning
mode
Specifying a particular M code sets a reference position in the
spindle positioning mode. (This is called spindle orientation.)
D Position the spindle in the spindle positioning mode
Position an optional angle using address C (H), and position a
semi-fixed angle using a specific M code parameter.
D Release the spindle positioning mode and enter the spindle rotation
mode
Specifying a particular M code parameter changes the spindle to
the spindle rotation mode.
Also, relationship between M codes and these operations are set by
parameters (refer to No. 4950#2 (ISZ), #7 (IMB)).
360 .
=. 0.088 deg
4096
Minimum input increment
0.001 deg
Maximum command value
9999.999 deg
760
B63003EN1/02
Selecting a spindle
positioning axis
Any axis in the control axis group can be used as the C axis (parameter
no. 1020). Specify *1 as its servo axis number (parameter no. 1023).
Only one set of this setting can be used for each control path. The spindle
subjected to spindle positioning is the first spindle.
Switching to spindle
positioning mode
(Spindle orientation)
Orientation is required in advance if spindle positioning is first performed

after the spindle motor is used as a normal spindle, or when spindle
positioning is interrupted. The orientation stops the spindle in a constant
position. The orientation position can be sifted in the range of "180deg
for analog spindle and in the range from 0 to 360_ for serial spindle.
To specify orientation, use the M code whose parameter No. 4960.
The orientation direction is specified by using parameters ZMIx No. 1006
#5 for analog or RETURN No. 4000#5 for serial spindles.
Orientation speed
The spindle moves at rapid traverse set by parameter No. 1420 until it
reaches the orientation enable speed (shown below). After the spindle
crosses that speed point, it performs orientation at the speed set by
parameter No. 1425. When a serial spindle is used, orientation speed
depends on the spindle.
Orientation enable speed
RPD>9 (loop gain) KPPM
Loop gain: Parameter No. 4970 (unit: 1/sec)
Set rapid traverse speed at above value.
(Example)
When the loop gain parameter No. 4970 is set to 20 [1/sec], the orientation
speed is:
RPD>9
20
1000
(360/4096)=15820 [deg /min]
The serial spindle stops at the orientation position as soon as the command
is issued. The lower limit to the rapid traverse speed value does not need
to be specified for the serial spindle to reach the orientation enable speed.
The analog spindle stops after the spindle speed is changed from rapid
traverse to the FL speed. The rapid traverse speed lower limit must be
specified for the analog spindle, or obtaining the orientation enable speed
need not be specified for the serial spindle. However, it must be specified
for the analog spindle.
Program origin
The orientation position is regarded as a program origin. It is possible to

modify the program origin using the coordinates system or automatic
coordinates system settings (parameter ZPR No. 1201#0)
761
B63003EN1/02
Command system
The command system comes in two types: The first positions a semi-fixed
angle; the second positions an optional angle.
A 2-digit numerical value following the M address is used for the

command. There are six positioning angle values (M to M(a + 5)),
where a is set by parameter No. 4962. Indexing angle also requires prior
parameter setting data No. 4963. Rotation can be done in any direction,
using parameter IDM data No. 4950#1.
Also, when extended specification is used (parameter No. 4950#6
ESI=1), max. 256 kinds of values (Ma to M(a +255)) can be specified.
Semi-fixed angle
positioning by M code
Optional angle
positioning by C or H
address
Mcode
Indexing angle
eg) when b=30_
30
M (+1)
60
M (+2)
90
M (+3)
120
M (+4)
150
M (+5)
180
Numerical value following either the C or H address is used to command

the position. C and H addresses are commanded in G00 mode.
(Example) C-1000
H4500
(i)
Minimum setting unit :

0.001deg
(ii) Maximum command value:

" 9999.999 deg
(iii) Decimal point input: A numerical value with decimal point can be
entered. The decimal point location is in degrees, for instance:
C35.0=C35 degrees
Absolute and
incremental commands
The semifixed angle is always incremental. The optional angle

positioning using address C or H differs as follows:
Program origin
90
180
762
B63003EN1/02
G code system A
G code system B, C
Address used
Command of
A! B on the
above Fig.
Address used
and Gcode
Command of
A! B on the
above Fig.
Absolute
command
Direct the end

point position by
the distance from
the program
origin.
C180.0 ;
G90,C
G90C180.0 ;
Incremental
command
Command by the
distance between
the start and end
points.
H90.0 ;
G91,C
G91C90.0 ;
Command method
Spindle positioning
feedrate
Spindle positioning is done at the rapid traverse rate specified by

parameter No. 1420, to which linear acceleration deceleration are applied.
Overrides of 100%, 50%, 25% and F0 (parameter No. 1421) are also
applied.
Spindle positioning reset
A specific M code (parameter no. 4961) must be set when the mode is
changed from spindle positioning to normal spindle rotation.
Signal
Spindle stop complete

signal SPSTP
<G028#6>
[Function] When this signal is 1, the CNC orients and positions the spindle.
Spindle unclamp signal

SUCLP <F038#1>
[Function] This signal specifies that spindle mechanical clamping be released in a
spindle positioning sequence.
When this signal is output, unclamp the spindle on the machine (release
the brakes or extract the pin).
[Output condition] Refer to the sequence (time chart) in this section.
Spindle unclamp
completion signal
*SUCPF <G028#4>
[Function] This signal indicates that unclamping the spindle is complete in response
to the spindle unclamp signal SUCLP.
763
B63003EN1/02
Spindle clamp signal

SCLP <F038#0>
[Function] This signal specifies that the spindle be clamped mechanically in a spindle
positioning sequence.
When this signal turns to 1, clamp the spindle on the machine (apply the
brakes or insert the pin).
[Output condition] Refer to the sequence (time chart) in this section.
Spindle clamp
completion signal *SCPF
<G028#5>
[Function] This signal indicates that clamping the spindle is complete in response to
the spindle clamp signal SCLP.
Other signals

GR1, GR2, <G028#1, #2>
Refer to 9.3 Spindle Speed Control.
CTH1A, CTH2A
<G070#3, #2>
Refer to the manual of serial spindle.

The spindle loop gain multiplier corresponding to the gear currently
selected by this signal is used. When the serial spindle is used, input gear
selection signals CTH1A and CTH2A, as well.
Relationship between the selected gear and spindle gear selection signal
Analog spindle
GR2
GR1
1st gear
HIGH
2nd gear
MEDIUM HIGH
3rd gear
MEDIUM LOW
4th gear
LOW
764
Selected gear
Serial spindle
CTH1A CTH2A Selected gear
B63003EN1/02
Spindle orientation
completion signal
ZPx<F094>
[Function] This signal indicates that the spindle orientation for the spindle
positioning has been completed.
[Output condition] When spindle orientation is complete, this signal turns to 1. When spindle
positioning is performed or cleared, it turns to 0.
Signal address
#7
G028
#6
SPSTP
#5
*SCPF
#4
*SUCPF
G070
#3
#2
GR2
CTH1A
CTH2A
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
SUCLP
#0
SCLP
ZP8
ZP7
ZP6
ZP5
ZP4
ZP3
ZP2
ZP1
F038
F094
#1
GR1
765
B63003EN1/02
Sequence (Time chart)
- Spindle Orientation
M code
MF
SPSTP
SUCLP
*SUCPF
Spindle
movement
POSITION LOOP
INITIALIZE
Spindle enable on
ZPx
SCLP
Spindle enable off
*SCPF
FIN
POSITION LOOP INITIALIZE is performed within the CNC.

Spindle ENABLE ON/OFF specifies that the PMC ladder direct the
spindle control unit to run or stop the spindle motor.
(Example) For serial spindles, the ladder should contain the following
command or something like that:
ENABLE ON, and SFRA<G070#5> 1
ENABLE OFF, and SFRA<G070#5> 0
For details, refer to the manual for the spindle control unit you actually
use.
766
B63003EN1/02
- Spindle Positioning by M code

M code
MF
SPSTP
SUCLP
*SUCPF
Spindle
movement
Spindle enable on
SCLP

Spindle enable off
*SCPF
FIN
767
B63003EN1/02
- Spindle Positioning by Address C,H

SPSTP
Spindle enable ON
SUCLP
*SUPCF
Spindle
movement
SCLP
*SCPF
Spindle enable
OFF
- Spindle Positioning Reset
M code
MF
SPSTP
SUCLP
*SUPCF
FIN
POSITION CODER INITIALIZE

POSITION CODER INITIALIZE is performed only in the CNC.
768
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
1006
#5
ZMIx
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0

backlash at poweron
NOTE
When the serial spindle is being used, this parameter is
invalid for the spindle positioning axis.
1020

Axis name
Set value
Axis name
Set value
Axis name
Set value
88
85
65
89
86
66
90
87
67
NOTE
names.
axis.
The axis name of spindle positioning is C axis.
1023
Number of the servo axis for each axis

Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and the
corresponding servo axis.
Set 1 to the C axis when spindle positioning function is used.
#7
#6
#5
1201
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ZPR
[Data type] Bit

769
B63003EN1/02

1250
Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system
setting is performed

For spindle positioning.

1420

each axis.

1421
F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
[Unit of data] deg/min

1425

[Unit of data] deg/min

NOTE
When serial spindle is used, this parameter becomes
invalid.
770
B63003EN1/02
1620
Time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Set time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration for
each axis.
#7
#6
DM3x
1816
#5
DM2x
#4
DM1x
#3
#2
#1
#0

DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiply
Set this parameter to 111 (=4) for spindle positioning.
1820
Command multiply for each axis (CMR)

D When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
1
Set value=
+100 [Valid data range: 102 to 127]
(Command multiply)
When command multiply is 0.5 to 48

Set value = 2
command multiply [Valid data range: 1 to 96]
Set this parameter to 2 for spindle positioning.
1821

[Unit of data]
Set this parameter to 10000 for spindle positioning.
1826

Set the inposition width for each axis.
1828
[Data type] Twoword

771
B63003EN1/02
1829

1850

Set a grid shift for each axis.
NOTE
Set this parameter when the analog spindle is used. When
the serial spindle is used, set the value to No. 4073.
1851
Backlash compensating value for each axis

Set the backlash compensation value for each axis.
#7
#6
#5
3405
#4
CCR
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

CCR Addresses used for chamfering and corner rounding
0 : Address used for chamfering and corner rounding is I or K, not C. In
direct drawing dimension programming, addresses C, R, and A
(with comma) are used in stead of C, R, and A.
1 : Addresses used for chamfering, corner rounding, and direct drawing
dimension programming are C and R without comma. Thus,
addresses C cannot be used as the names of axes.
Always set this parameter to 0 for spindle positioning.
#7
#6
#5
4000
#4
#3
RETRN
#2
[Data type] Bit

RETRN Reference position return direction of spindle.
0 : CCW (Counter clockwise)
1 : CW (Clockwise)
772
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
The direction for spindle orientation (or reference position
return) in spindle positioning using a serial spindle is
determined by this parameter.
4044
Velocity loop proportion gain in servo mode (High gear)
4045
Velocity loop proportion gain in servo mode ( Low gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets a velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode
(spindle positioning, rigid tapping, etc.)
NOTE
Set this parameter when serial spindle is used.
4052
Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode (High gear)
4053
Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode (Low gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets a velocity loop integral gain in servo mode (spindle
positioning, rigid tapping, etc.)
NOTE
Set this parameter when serial spindle is used.
4056
Gear ratio (HIGH)
4057
Gear ration (MEDIUM HIGH)
4058
Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW)
4059
Gear ratio (LOW)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Motor speed per spindle rotation
100

These parameters set the gear ration between the spindle and AC spindle
motor.
773
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Set the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motor
when the spindle positioning is performed with serial
spindle. For which gear is used, it depends on the
clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B.
4065
Position gain in servo mode (HIGH)
4066
Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH)
4067
Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM LOW)
4068
Position gain in servo mode (LOW)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 sec1
This parameter sets a servo loop gain in servo mode.
(spindle positioning, rigid tapping, etc.)
NOTE
When the spindle positioning by a serial spindle is
performed, set the position control loop gain in place of
parameter No. 4970. For which gear is used, it depends on
the clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B.
4950
#7
IMB
#6
ESI
#5
TRV
#4
#3
#2
ISZ
#1
IDM
#0
IOR
[Data type] Bit

IOR Resetting the system in the spindle positioning mode
0 : Does not releases the mode.
1 : Releases the mode
IDM The positioning direction for the spindle using a M code is
0 : The positive direction
1 : The negative direction
ISZ When an M code for spindle orientation is specified in spindle
positioning:
0 : The spindle rotation mode is cleared and the mode is switched to the
spindle positioning mode, and spindle orientation operation is
performed.
1 : The spindle rotation mode is cleared and the mode is switched to the
spindle positioning mode but spindle orientation operation is not
performed.
TRV Direction of rotation of spindle positioning
0 : Normal
1 : Reverse
774
B63003EN1/02
ESI Selection of a spindle positioning specification

0 : The conventional specificaion is used.
1 : The extended specificaion is used.
NOTE
The extended specification includes the following two
extensions:
D With the conventional specification, the number of M
codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle is always
6. With the extended specification, an arbitrary number
of such M codes from 1 to 256 can be selected by
parameter setting (See parameter No. 4964.)
D The maximum feedrate for spindle positioning (setting of
parameter No. 1420) can be extended from 240000 to
269000 (unit: 10 deg/min).
IMB When the spindle positioning function is used, halffixed angle
positioning based on M codes uses:
0 : Specification A
1 : Specification B
NOTE
In the case of halffixed angle positioning based on M
codes, three types of spindle positioning operations can
occur:
(1)The spindle rotation mode is cleared, then the mode is
switched to the spindle positioning mode.
(2)Spindle positioning is performed in the spindle
positioning mode.
(3)The spindle positioning mode is cleared, then the mode
is switched to the spindle rotation mode.
In the case of specifiection A:
Operations (1) to (3) are specified using separate M
codes.
(1)Specified using M codes for performing spindle
orientation.
(See parameter No. 4960)
(2)Specified using M codes for specifying a spindle
positioning angle. (See parameter No. 4962)
(3)Specified using M codes for clearing spindle positioning
operation. (See parameter No. 4961.)
In the case of specification B:
When M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle are
specified, operations (1) to (3) are performed successively.
(See parameter No. 4962.)
775
B63003EN1/02
4960
M code specifying the spindle orientation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Integer
Set an M code to change the spindle rotating mode to the spindle
positioning mode. Setting the M code performs the spindle orientation.
Spindle positioning can be specified from the next block.
4961
M code releasing the spindle positioning mode
[Data type] Word

Set the M code to release the spindle positioning mode and to change the
mode to the spindle rotating mode.
4962
M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle
[Data type] Word

Two methods are availablel for specifying spindle positioning. One
method uses address C for arbitraryangle positioning. The other use an
M code for halffixed angle positioning. This parameter sets an M code
for the latter method.
D When bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950=0
Six M code from M a to M(a +5) are used for halffixed angle
positioning, when a is the value of this parameter.
D When bit 6(ESI) of parameter No. 4950=1
Set the start M code in this parameter, and set the number of M codes
in parameter No. 4964. Then b M codes from Ma to M(a +b1) are
used for half fixed angle positioning.
The table below indicates the relationship between the M codes and
positioning angles.
M code
Positioning angle
Example: Positioning
angle when q = 30_
30
(+1)
60
(+2)
90
(+3)
120
(+4)
150
(+5)
180
(+n)
776
(n+1)
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
represents the basic angular diplacement set in
pamrameter No. 4963.
4963
M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] deg
This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for halffixed
angle positioning using M codes.
4964
Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1 to 255
This parameter sets the number of M codes used for Halffixed angle
positioning using M codes.
As many M codes as the number specified in this parameter, starting with
the M code specified in parameter No. 4962, are used to specify halffixed
angle positioning.
Let a be the value of parameter No. 4962, and let b be the value of
parameter No. 4964. That is, M codes from Ma to M (a +b1) are used
for halffixed angle positioning.
WARNING
Make sure that M codes from Ma to M (a +b1) do not
duplicate other M codes.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No.
4950=1.
2 Setting this parameter to 0 has the same effect as setting 6.
That is, M code from Ma to M (a +5) are used for halffixed
angle positioning.
4970
Servo loop gain of the spindle
[Data type] Word

Set the servo loop gain of the spindle in the spindle positioning mode.
777
B63003EN1/02
4971
Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 1
4972
4973
4974
[Data type] Word

Set the servo loop gain multipliers of the spindle for gears 1 to 4.
The multipliers are used to convert the amount of the position deviation
to the voltage used in the velocity command. Assign the data obtained
from the following equation to the parameters.
Loop gain multiplier = 2048000
E
A/L
where;
E: Voltage required to rotate the spindle motor at 1000 rpm in the velocity
command
L: Rotation angle of the spindle per one motor rotation (normally 360)
A: Unit used for the detection (degree)
Example)
Let E be 2.2 V, L be 360 degrees, and A be 0.088

degrees/pulse.
1101
2.2
0.088/360 =
NOTE
1 When the voltage specified for the spindle motor is 10 V at
a spindle speed of 4500 rpm, E is regarded as 2.2 V.
2 The above parameters No. 4970 to No. 4974 are for analog
spindle.
778
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
053
TOO MANY ADDRESS In the chamfering and corner R comCOMMANDS

mands, two or more of I, K and R are
specified. Otherwise, the character after a comma(,) is not C or R in direct
drawing dimensions programming. Or
comma (,) was specified with parameter No. 3405#4=1. Modify the program.
056
NO END POINT & ANGLE Neither the end point nor angle is speciIN CHF/CNR
fied in the command for the block next
to that for which only the angle is specified (A). In the chamfering or corner R
command, I(K) is commanded for the
X(Z) axis.
Modify the program.
135
SPINDLE ORIENTATION Without any spindle orientation , an atPLEASE

tept was made for spindle indexing.
Perform spindle orientation.
136
C/HCODE & MOVE CMD A move command of other axes was

IN SAME BLK.
specified to the same block as spindle
indexing addresses C, H. Modify the
program.
137
MCODE & MOVE CMD IN A move command of other axes was

SAME BLK.
specified to the same block as Mcode
related to spindle indexing. Modify the
program.
194
SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle posiSYNCHROMODE

tioning (Csaxis control) mode, or rigid
tapping mode was specified during the
serial spindle synchronous control
mode. Correct the program so that the
serial spindle synchronous control
mode is released in advance.
751
SPINDLE1 ALARM
DETECT (ALXX)
This alarm indicates in the NC that an

alarm is generated in the spindle unit of
the system with the serial spindle. The
alarm is displayed in form ALXX (XX is
a number). The alarm number XX is the
number indicated on the spindle amplifier. The CNC holds this number and
displays on the screen.
752
SPINDLE1 MODE
CHANGE ERROR
This alarm is generated if the system

does not properly terminate a mode
change. The modes include the Cs
contouring, spindle positioning, rigid
tapping, and spindle control modes.
The alarm is activated if the spindle
control unit does not respond correctly
to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
779
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 Feed hold is invalid during spindle positioning.
2 Spindle positioning stops when emergency stop is applied;
restart with orientation operation.
3 Dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function lock are not
available during spindle positioning.
4 The spindle positioning function and the serial spindle Cs
contour control function cannot be used together. If both
functions are specified, positioning has priority.
5 Specify parameter No. 4962 even if semi-fixed angle
positioning is not used; otherwise M codes (M00 to M05) do
not work.
Note
NOTE
1 Command spindle positioning with an independent block.
X- and Y-axis positioning cannot be commanded to the
same block.
2 Spindle positioning cannot be done by manual operation.
3 Automatic drift compensation is not effective for spindle
positioning. To adjust the amount of drift compensation for
each axis, set values manually and adjust the spindle
amplifier to minimize the spindle motor rotation at a voltage
of 0V. (parameter No. 3731). Insufficient adjustment
causes poor positioning accuracy. Drift compensation is not
needed with a serial spindle.
4 The machine coordinates for the spindle positioning axis
are displayed in pulses units.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.9.5
SPINDLE POSITIONING FUNCTION
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.9.5
SPINDLE POSITIONING FUNCTION
780
B63003EN1/02
9.9
Cs CONTOUR
CONTROL
General
The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using the
spindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on the
spindle.
This function can perform more accurate positioning than the spindle
positioning function, and has an interpolation capability with other servo
axes.
Increment system
Least input increment: 0.001 [deg]

Least command increment: 0.001 [deg]
Maximum command
value
" 9999.999 [deg]
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate: 30 to 2400 [deg/min] (parameter no.1420)

Cutting feedrate (feed per minute):
1 to 15000 [deg/min] (for machines that use millimeters)
0.01 to 600 [deg/min] (for machines that use inches)
Explanations
The speed of the serial spindle is controlled by the spindle speed control
function, while the spindle positioning is controlled by the Cs contouring
control function (spindle contour control). Spindle speed control
rotates the spindle using the velocity command, while the spindle contour
control rotates the spindle using the move command.
Switching between spindle speed control and spindle contour control is
performed by the DI signal from the PMC.
In the Cs contour control mode, the Cs contour control axis can be
operated either manually or automatically, in the same way as normal
servo axes.
(For a reference position return, see the relevant description in this
section.)
Setting the Cs contour

control axis
The axis used for Cs contour control must be set as an axis of the axes
controlled by the CNC. Using parameter no. 1023, assign * 1 in the
field corresponding to the chosen servo axis. Also set the spindle contour
control axis as a rotation axis by setting ROTx of parameter No. 1006#0
and No. 1022.
Only one set of this setting can be used for each control path. The spindle
that operates under Cs contour control is a serial spindle as the first
spindle.
781
Command Address
B63003EN1/02
The address for the move command in Cs contour control is the axis name
specified in parameter no.1020. This address is arbitrary.
When the second auxiliary function option is provided, address B cannot
be used for the name of the contour axis. For the T series machines, when
either address A or C is used for the name of the contour axis, clear CCR
(parameter no. 3405#4) to 0.
Setting Axes that

interpolate with Cs
contour axis
Up to five servo axes can be specified for linear interpolation against the
Cs contour control axis, by setting defined parameters :
When no servo axis is used for interpolation, specify 0 in parameter

nos. 3900, 3910, 3920, 3930, 3940.
D When one or more servo axes are used for interpolation, set the
parameter for each as follows :
(1) Assign the axis number (1 to 8) to each of the servo axes used for
interpolation in parameter nos. 39n0 (n=0, 1, 2, 3, or 4).
(2) Set the loop gain for each of the servo axes specified in (1) in parameter
nos. 39n1, 39n2, 39n3, 39n4. The loop gain must be the position loop
gain for the Cs contour control axis or a desired value. Four parameters
are provided to correspond to the four gears of the spindle. Use those
parameters according to the inputs of the serial spindle clutch /gear
signal CTH1A, CTH2A <G70#3, #2>.
NOTE
The fine acceleration/deceleration function cannot be used
between the servo axis and Cs contour control axis.
(3) When the number of servo axes to be used for interpolation is smaller
than five, set 0 in remaining parameter nos. 39n0.
Switching spindle
speed control/Cs
contour control
- Switching from spindle speed control to Cs contour control

-
The serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode by setting

the DI signal CON (G027#7) to 1. When the mode is switched
while the spindle is rotating, the spindle stops immediately to perform the change.
Switching from Cs contour control to spindle speed control
Turning the DI signal CON (G027#7) to 0 puts the serial spindle
in spindle speed control mode. Confirm that the move command
for the spindle has been completed, then specify the switch. If it
is switched while the spindle is moving, the machine enters
interlock, or excessive position deviation alarm occurs.
782
B63003EN1/02
Reference Position
Return of Cs Contour
Control Axis
After the serial spindle is switched from spindle speed control to Cs

contour control mode, the current position is undefined. Return the
spindle to the reference position.
The reference position return of the Cs contour control axis is as follows:
- In manual mode
After the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, move
the spindle in the direction of the reference position by turning on
the feed axis and direction select signal (+Jn (G100) or
*Jn
(G102)). The spindle starts the movement to the reference
position; when it reaches that position, the reference position return
completion signal (ZPn (F094)) turns to 1.
Turning any feed axis and direction select signal to 1 moves the
tool in the reference position direction.
- In the automatic mode
After the serial spindle enters the Cs contour control mode, the
spindle returns to the reference position when G28 is specified.
Under certain conditions, the G00 command returns the spindle to
the reference position, depending upon the setting of parameter
NRF no. 3700#1:
(i) G00 command
Returning to the reference position using the G00 command
differs from using the G28 command or the manual method.
The serial spindle can be positioned at any point using the
G00 command, while the latter two methods always return the
serial spindle to the reference position.
When parameter NRF no. 3700#1 is 0 and the serial spindle
is put in the Cs contour control mode, if the G00 command is
given before returning the spindle to the reference position,
the serial spindle returns to the reference position and indexes
it before moving to the commanded position. After
positioning at the reference position, the reference position
return completion signal (ZPn(F094)) turns to 1. When the
G00 command is issued after the serial spindle has returned
to the reference position at least once, normal positioning
operation is executed.
(ii) G28 command
After the serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode,
issuing the G28 command stops the spindle motor, then
moves the spindle to the midpoint. The spindle then returns
to the reference position. At this point, the reference position
return completion signal (ZPn F094) turns to 1. When the
serial spindle has returned to the reference position once while
in the Cs contour control mode, the G28 command positions
the spindle at the reference position without moving to the
midpoint and ZPn comes on.
783
B63003EN1/02
- Interruption of reference position return

(i)
Manual operation
Return to the reference position can be interrupted by resetting, emergency stop, or turning off the feed axis and direction
select signal. When the interrupted return operation is resumed, start from the beginning.
(ii) Automatic operation
Return to the reference position can be interrupted by resetting, emergency stop, or feed hold. When the interrupted return operation is resumed, start from the beginning.
Operation of Cs contour
control axis
(Manual/Automatic)
If a reference position return is performed on the Cs contour control axis,

the axis can be operated in the same way as a normal NC axis.
In the spindle speed control mode, on the other hand, it does not operate
as the Cs contour control axis, and P/S alarm 197 occurs during automatic
operation.
In the spindle speed mode, inhibit manual operation of the Cs contour
control axis using the PMC ladder.
Display of Position Error

of Cs Contour Control
Axis
DGN No.
418
Position deviation amount of 1st spindle
Position deviation amount of the position loop for the 1st spindle.
This diagnostic display shows information obtained from the serial
spindle control unit. This diagnosis displays position error of the spindle
contour axis during spindle contour control.
The position error can also be checked using a servo error display (DGN
of No. 300x) for an axis under Cs contour control.
Signal
Spindle contour control
change signal
CON <G027#7>
[Function] This signal specifies that with the Cs contour control function, the first
serial spindle be switched between the spindle speed control and Cs
contour control modes.
When this signal turns to 1, the spindle mode changes from speed
control to Cs contour control.
If the spindle is moving at the time of the change, it stops immediately.
Turning the signal to 0 changes the spindle mode from Cs contour
control back to speed control.
784
B63003EN1/02
Spindle contour control

change completion
signal FSCSL <F004#1>
[Function] This signal indicates the axis is under Cs contour control.
[Output condition] Spindle speed control mode 0
Cs contour control mode 1
Time Chart
Spindle speed control
Cs contour control
Spindle speed control
CON
Gear change and
operation of spindle
motor must be
completed
FSCSL
Switching internal control
Switching internal control
NOTE
Any mechanical gear change needed and inputs for GR1,
GR2, CTH1A, and CTH2A must be completed before the
CON signal selects Cs contour control mode.
A servo excessive error may be generated if the spindle
motor is not ready for operation. (Signal SRVA, SFRA
<G070#4, #5> or other required signals must be
appropriately processed on the machine side).
Other signals
Gear select signal (Input)

GR1, GR2, <G028#1, #2>
Gear select signal
(Output)
GR3O, GR2O, GR1O
<F034#2, #1, #0>
(M series)
Refer to 9.3 Spindle speed Control.
785
B63003EN1/02
Clutch/Gear signal
(Serial spindle)
CTH1A, CTH2A
<G070#3, #2>
Refer to the manual of serial spindle.

These signals determine what parameter (loop gain, etc.) to be used for
each gear position.
CTH1A and CTH2A are the gear select signals for the serial spindle, but
GR1 and GR2 must also be set. Do not change these signals while in the
Cs contour control mode.
Relationship between gears selected and spindle gear select signals

CNC side
T/M series with CSSC
Serial spindle
M series without CSSC
GR2
GR1
Gear selection
GR3O
GR2O
GR1O
Gear selection
CTH1A
CTH2A
Gear selection
1st stage
1st stage
1st stage
2nd stage
2nd stage
2nd stage
3rd stage
3rd stage
3rd stage
4th stage
4th stage
CSSC: Constant surface speed control
NOTE
1 When the M series does not include the constant surface
speed control option, and parameter No. 3706#4 GTT=0,
GR1 and GR2 do not need to be input. Input CTH1A and
CTH2A when gears are changed using GR1O, GR2O and
GR3O.
2 The above combination of clutch/gear signals CTH1A and
CTH2A is an example.
The serial spindle gear is selected by CHT1A and CHT2A
independently of gear selection on the CNC side. So, enter
necessary signals, and set the corresponding serial spindle
parameters.
Cs contour control axis

completion signal
ZPx <F094>
[Function] This signal indicates that a reference position return has been made for the
Cs contour control axis.
[Output condition] If a manual reference position return or automatic reference position
return by G28 is performed during the Cs contour control mode, this
signal becomes logical 1 when the Cs contour control axis reaches the
reference position.
786
B63003EN1/02
Signals on manual
operation
Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn, *Jn <G100, G102> (Input)
Manual handle feed axis select signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD
<G018, G019> (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual)
The Cs contour control axis can be manually operated in the same way as
normal servo axes, except for a manual reference position return. In the
spindle speed control mode, however, manual operations for the Cs
contour control axis must be inhibited using the PMC ladder, etc.
Signal address
G027
#7
CON
#6
#5
#4
#3
G028
G070
MRDYA
#7
#6
#2
#1
GR2
GR1
SFRA
SRVA
CTH1A
CTH2A
#5
#4
#3
#2
GR3O
F034
F044
F094
#0
#1
GR2O
#0
GR1O
FSCSL
ZP8
Parameter
ZP7
ZP6
ZP5
ZP4
ZP3
ZP2
ZP1
The following describes major parameters.

In addition, parameters such as axis feedrate, acceleration/deceleration,
and display can be used. Also, digital servo parameters (No. 2000 ) for
the Cs contour axis are not required to be set.
#7
#6
#5
#4
1006
#3
#2
#1
#0
ROTx

Type of controlled axis
0 : Linear axis
1 : Rotation axis
NOTE
Inch/metric conversion cannot be made to the rotation axis.
The machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 + O 360
deg. Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is
made in the manual reference position return direction and
the move amount does not exceed one rotation.
Set 1 as the rotation axis to the Cs contour control axis.
787
B63003EN1/02
1020

Axis
name
Set
value
Axis
name
Set
value
Axis
name
Set
value
Axis
name
Set
value
88
85
65
69
89
86
66
90
87
67
NOTE
names.
axis.
3 When the second auxiliary function is provided, address B
cannot be used as an axis name. In the T series, when
address A or C is used, set parameter CCR (No. 3405#4)
to 0.
4 If you use letter E as an axis name in format F15, be sue to
use address F in the majoraxis direction lead command for
equallead threading (G32).
Any axis name can be used for Cs contour control axis except for above
limitation.
1022

Set value
Meaning
Set 0 to the Cs contour control axis.

788
B63003EN1/02
1023
Number of the servo axis for each axis

Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and the
corresponding servo axis.
Set 1 as the number of servo axis to the Cs contour control axis.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1201
#1
#0
ZPR
[Data type] Bit

1250

1420

[Valid data range] 30 to 240000 (ISA, ISB)
30 to 120000 (ISC)
each axis.
1620
Time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration or bellshaped acceleration/

deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Unit of data] ms
Set the time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse for each axis.
789
B63003EN1/02
1820
Command multiply for each axis (CMR)

D When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
1
Set value=
+100 [Valid data range: 102 to 127]
(Command multiply)
When command multiply is 0.5 to 48

Set value = 2
command multiply [Valid data range: 1 to 96]
1826

Set the inposition width for each axis.
1828

1829

1851
Backlash compensation value used for rapid traverse for each axis

[Valid data range] * 9999 to +9999
Set the backlash compensation value for each axis.
#7
#6
#5
3700
#4
#3
#2
#1
NRF
#0
[Data type] Bit

NRF The first positioning command by G00 after the serial spindle is switched
to Cs axis contouring control performs:
0 : Positioning after returning to the reference position.
1 : Normal positioning
790
B63003EN1/02
3900
The number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
[Data type] Byte

Set the number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis
(1st group)
NOTE
Set 0 when there is no servo axis that interpolates with Cs
contour control axis.
3901
Loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control axis during
interpolation (High gear)
3902
interpolation (Medium high gear)
3903
interpolation (Medium low gear)
3904
interpolation (Low gear)

Set the servo loop gain of the servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour
control axis on each spindle gear (1st group)
3910
Number of servo axis that interpolates with Cs contour control

(2nd group)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or only one servo axis that
interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this parameter
to 0.
791
B63003EN1/02
3911
3912
3913
3914

control axis on each spindle gear (2nd group)
3920

(3rd group)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or less than three servo axes
that interpolates with Cs contour control axis, set this
parameter to 0.
3921
3922
3923
3924

control axis on each spindle gear (3rd group)
792
B63003EN1/02
3930
[Data type] Byte

(4th group)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or less than four servo axes that
to 0.
3931
3932
3933
3934

control axis on each spindle gear (4th group)
3940

(5th group)
NOTE
When there is no servo axis or less than five servo axes that
to 0.
793
B63003EN1/02
3941
3942
3943
3944

control axis on each spindle gear (5th group)
4056
Gear ratio (HIGH)
4057
Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH)
4058
Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW)
4059
Gear ratio (LOW)

[Unit of data] (Number of motor rotations to one spindle rotation)
100

Set the gear ratio between spindle and AC spindle motor.
NOTE
For which gear ratio is used in actual spindle operation, it
depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,
CTH2A.
4069
Position gain at Cs contour control (High gear)
4070
Position gain at Cs contour control (Medium High gear)
4071
Position gain at Cs contour control (Medium Low gear)
4072
Position gain at Cs contour control (Low gear)

Set the position gain at Cs contour control.
794
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
For which position gain is used in actual spindle operation,
it depends on clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A,
CTH2A.
4135
Grid shift value at Cs contour control
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] 1 pulse unit (360000 p/rev)
Set the number of pulses from an issue of onerotation signal to the
machine zero point in Cs contour control.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
194
SPINDLE COMMAND
SYNCHROMODE
IN A contour control mode, spindle positioning

(Csaxis control) mode, or rigid tapping
mode was specified during the serial spindle
synchronous control mode. Correct the program so that the serial spindle synchronous
control mode is released in advance.
197
CAXIS COMMANDED
SPINDLE MODE
IN The program specified a movement along the

Cs contour control axis when the signal
CON(G027#7) was off. Correct the program,
or consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the
reason the signal is not turned on.
751
First spindle alarm detec- In a system with serial spindles attion (ALXX)
tached, this is a warning alarm message that indicates an alarm on the
spindle amplifier side to be displayed
on the CRT of the NC. An alarm on the
spindle amplifier side is displayed on
the spindle amplifier, as ALXX (where
XX represents a number).
This alarm number (XX) is displayed by
latching the spindle alarm number detected by the CNC as the cause of this
alarm.
752
FIRST
SPINDLE
CHANGE FAULT
795
MODE This alarm is generated if the system does

not properly terminate a mode change. The
modes include the Cs contouring, spindle
positioning,rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle
control unit does not respond correctly to the
mode change command issued by the NC.
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
In the spindle contour control mode, do not switch the
spindle gears. When the gears need to be changed put the
system in the spindle speed control mode first.
Note
NOTE
In the T series machines, the spindle contour control
function and the spindle positioning function cannot be
used at the same time. If both functions are specified
simultaneously, the spindle positioning function takes
precedence.
Reference item
FANUC SERVO MOTOR

AMPLIFIER a series
DESCRIPTIONS (B65162E)
11.6
Cs Contour Control Function
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR

a series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B65160E)
2.4
Cs Contour Control Function Startup

Procedure
796
B63003EN1/02
9.10
MULTISPINDLE
CONTROL
General
In addition to the conventional (first) spindle, two other (second and third)
spindles can be controlled. These additional spindles allow two-stage
gear changes. An S code is used for a command to any of these spindles;
which spindle is selected is determined by a signal from the PMC. The
second and third spindle can change gears in 2 stages.
Also, the maximum spindle speed can be set to each spindle to clamp the
spindle speed of each spindle (set by parameters No. 3772, 3802 and
3822).
When the second spindle is used, one position coder interface channel is
added. Which position coder is selected is determined by a PMC signal.
(The conventional and additional position coders are referred to as the
first position coder and second position coder, respectively, throughout
the remainder of this discussion.)
Selection between 1st position coder and 2nd position coder is made by
a signal from PMC.
The spindle serial output option is required to use multi-spindle control.
Difference in
multispindle control
between the M and T
series
Control
For the M series, multispindle control is possible only when spindle

gear selection type T is selected (when the constant surface speed
control option is provided, or when GTT (bit 4 of parameter No. 3706)
is set to 1).
For the M series, rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1,
RGTSP2, and RGTSP3 (G061#4, #5, and #6, when bit 7 of parameter
No. 5200 is set to 1) cannot be used. For details of rigid tapping, see
Section 9.11.
When twopath control is performed with the M series, spindle
commands and position coder feedback signals cannot be changed
between the paths (spindle command select signals SLSPA and
SLSPB <G063 #2 and #3>, and spindle feedback select signals
SLPCA and SLPCB <G064 #2 and #3> are not available).
Two multi-spindle control methods are available. Type A allows the

SIND function (controlling the spindle motor speed based on the PMC)
to be used only for the first spindle. Type B allows the SIND function to
be used for each of the three spindles independently.
797
Basic control (Common

to TYPE-A and TYPE-B)
B63003EN1/02
An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected, using

a spindle selection signal (SWS1 to SWS3 <G027#0-#2>). Each spindle
rotates at the specified speed. If a spindle is not sent a spindle selection
signal, it continues to rotate at its previous speed. This allows the spindles
to rotate at different speeds at the same time.
Each spindle also has a spindle stop signal (*SSTP1 to *SSTP3
<G027#3-#5>) to stop its rotation; an unused spindle can still be stopped.
There is a spindle enable signal to control each spindle; ENB <F001#4>
controls the first spindle, while ENB2 and ENB3 <F038#2, #3> control
the second and third spindles, respectively.
The PMC signal PC2SLC <G028#7> is used to select between the first
and second position coders.
Multi-spindle control
(TYPE-A)
When parameter MSI (No. 3709#2)=0, TYPE-A is used.

When the first spindle is selected with the SWS1 signal, the SIND signal
<G033#7> is used to determine whether the spindle analog voltage is
controlled by the PMC or CNC; then signals R01I to R12I <G0033#3 to
G0032#0> are used to set that spindles analog voltage. These signals do
not affect the second and third spindles.
The PMC-based polarity (rotation direction) control signals SGN and
SSIN <G033#5,#6> will function for any spindle selected by SWS1 to
SWS3.
The concept of Type A multi-spindle control is outlined below.

SIND
SWS 1
S command
(TYPE-B)
SWS 2
SWS 3
* SSTP 1
Hold 1
* SSTP 2
Hold 2
* SSTP 3
Hold 3
First spindle
Second spindle
Third spindle
Select Type B control by setting parameter MSI No. 3709#2 to 1.

Each spindle has its own SIND, SSIN and SGN signals.
Each signal functions regardless of selection state of the spindle selection
signals (SWS1 to SWS3).
When either the spindle selection signal or the SIND signal for the first,
second or third spindle is set to 1, the polarity control signals SSIN,
SGN will function. The first spindle is controlled by the SGN and SSIN
signals; the second and third spindles are controlled by SGN2, SGN3
<G035#5, G037#5>, and SSIN2, SSIN3 <G035#6, G037#6>,
respectively.
798
B63003EN1/02
The concept of Type B multi-spindle control outlined below.

SIND
SWS 1
* SSTP 1
First spindle
Hold 1
SIND2
SWS 2
* SSTP 2
Second spindle
Hold 2
S command
SIND3
SWS 3
Spindles to be controlled
* SSTP 3
Third spindle
Hold 3
In multi-spindle control, the first spindle is the first serial spindle, the
second spindle is the second serial spindle, and the third spindle is an
analog spindle.
A configuration is possible which does not connect the second or third
spindles.
Connection of spindle
Spindle configuration when multi-spindle control is used:

Necessary
option and
parameter
Spindle serial output
Parameter SS2 (No. 3701#4) = 1

(to use second spindle)
Spindle analog output (to use third spindle)
Connection of First spindle

each spindle
Second spindle
Third spindle
Connect on CNC mother board.
Connect on first spindle control unit.

Connect on CNC mother board.
Connection of First position coder: Feedback information obtained by posieach position tion coder or equivalent sensor connected to first spindle concoder
trol unit is fed to CNC via serial interface.
Second position coder: Feedback information obtained by
position coder or equivalent sensor connected to second
spindle control unit is fed to CNC via serial interface through
1st spindle control unit
Note) When second spindle is not connected, second position coder cannot be used.
For detailed information about serial spindle connection, refer to the

manuals on the serial spindles.
799
B63003EN1/02
Relationship with other

optional functions

control
The control function for keeping the surface speed constant can be used
with any of the three spindles if the spindle speed is within the range
allowable for this function. (When the position coder is required, it can
be installed on the 1st or 2nd spindle). The spindle selection signal (SWS
13) for the spindle must stay set at 1 during machining using this
function.
Spindle speed
When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is combined with

multi-spindle control, two position coders can be used. Monitor the states
of the second position coder selection signal (PL2SLC) and spindle
selection signals (SWS 13).

output
The actual spindle speed output function conveys speed information

obtained from the selected position coder specified by the 2nd position
coder selection signal (PC2SLC) to the PMC.
When the parameter HSO (No. 3709#5)=1, the difference of the feedback
pulses between the 1st and 2nd position coder can be output irrespective
of the state of 2nd position coder selection signal (PC2SLC).
Spindle positioning or
Cs contour control
When the spindle motor is used for positioning, as in the case of spindle
positioning or Cs contour control, the first spindle functions as the
positioning spindle. Switching to the positioning mode and positioning
command are possible irrespective of the state of the selection signal of
the first spindle (SWS1). This means that the first spindle cannot be
controlled as a spindle in positioning mode, but the second and third
spindles can be controlled as usual.
Polygon turning
(T series)
Polygon turning rotates a tool axis in phase with the spindle. To perform
polygon turning when multi-spindle control issued, select the spindle and
the position coder associated with the spindle.
Spindle synchronization,
polygon turning between
spindles, simplified
synchronization control
During spindle synchronization, polygon turning between spindles or

simplified synchronization control, the second spindle operates in phase
with the first spindle. Multi-spindle control for the first and third spindles
can be used during synchronization control, but multi-spindle control for
the second spindle is disabled.
Rigid tapping
Using the spindle selection signal (SWS 13), rigid tapping can use either
the first or second spindle as the rigid tap spindle. There are certain
restrictions:
D Set the SWS 1 to 3 signals before directing rigid tapping;
D Do not switch the SWS 1 to 3 signals during rigid tapping; and
D Use the appropriate ENB signal (either ENB or ENB2) for the selected
spindle as the ENB signal for the rigid tapping PMC sequence.
The spindles not used for rigid tapping can be rotated at a speed specified
before rigid tapping starts, or can be stopped.
Two-path control option
Refer to 9.4 Spindle Control for Two-path Lathe.

800
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Spindle Selection Signal

SWS1, SWS2, SWS3
<G027#0, #1, #2>
[Function] Controls whether S command specified to the NC is output to the spindle
or not in multi-spindle.
SWS1 1 : Outputs a speed command to the first spindle.
0 : Outputs no speed command to the first spindle.
SWS2 1 : Outputs a speed command to the second spindle.
0 : Outputs no speed command to the second spindle.
SWS3 1 : Outputs a speed command to the third spindle.
0 : Outputs no speed command to the third spindle.
Individual spindle stop

signal *SSTP1, *SSTP2,
*SSTP3 <G027#3, #4, #5>
[Function] Effective only to multi-spindle, each spindle can be stopped by this signal.
*SSTP1 1 : Does not set 0 rpm for output to the first spindle.
0 : Sets 0 rpm for output to the first spindle.
*SSTP2 1 : Does not set 0 rpm for output to the second spindle.
0 : Sets 0 rpm for output to the second spindle.
*SSTP3 1 : Does not set 0 rpm for output to the third spindle.
0 : Sets 0 rpm for output to the third spindle.
Gear select signal

GR21 <G029#0>
GR31 <G029#2>
[Function] Gear selection signals for 2nd and 3rd spindle when multispindle is
equipped (2stage). Use GR1 and GR2 <G028#1, #2> for the 1st spindle
and up to 4stage gears can be used.
GR21 1 : Selects the second-stage gear for the second spindle.
0 : Selects the first-stage gear for the second spindle.
GR31 1 : Selects the second-stage gear for the third spindle.
0 : Selects the first-stage gear for the third spindle.
801
B63003EN1/02
2nd position coder

selection signal
PC2SLC <G028#7>
[Function] Position coder selection signal used for control.
PC2SLC 1 : Uses feedback pulses obtained by the second position coder for
control.
0 : Uses feedback pulses obtained by the first position coder for control.
When the second position coder is not installed, do not switch this signal
and always select the first position coder.

ENB2<F038#2>
ENB3<F038#3>
[Function] These signals inform PMC of whether or not to perform output to the
second and third spindles in multispindle control.
The signals are used as a condition to stop the analog spindle, and are also
used for a PMC ladder sequence that is associated with rigid tapping. (See
Section 9.11.)
[Output condition] ENB2 1 : Outputs a value other than 0 to the second spindle control unit.
0 : Outputs 0 to the second spindle control unit.
ENB3 1 : Outputs a value other than 0 to the third spindle control unit.
0 : Outputs 0 to the third spindle control unit.
Spindle control signal by

PMC
1st spindle
SIND, SSIN, SGN, <G033#7, #6, #5> (Input)

R12IR01I<G033#3G032#0> (Input)
2nd spindle SIND2, SSIN2, SGN2, <G035#7, #6, #5> (Input)

R12I2R01I2<G035#3G034#0> (Input)
3rd spindle SIND3, SSIN3, SGN3, <G037#7, #6, #5> (Input)
R12I3R01I3<G037#3G036#0> (Input)
[Function] The spindle motor of each spindle can be controlled by issuing commands
from the PMC. The speed command and polarity (rotation direction) of
a spindle motor can be controlled. Usually, CNC commands are used to
specify a speed and polarity. By using these signals, whether commands
issued from the CNC or PMC are to be used for this control can be
selected. Even when multispindle control is not being used, the signals
can be used to control the second and third spindles.
When multispindle control is being used, and TYPEA is selected (bit
2 (MSI) of parameter No. 3709 is set to 0), the signals for the second and
third spindles cannot be used.
For details of each signal, see Section 15.4.
802
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
G027
G028
#5
*SSTP3
#4
*SSTP2
#3
*SSTP1
PC2SLC
G029
*SSTP
#1
SWS2
GR2
GR1
GR31
G032
R08I
R07I
R06I
G033
SIND
SSIN
SGN
G034
R08I2
R07I2
R06I2
G035
SIND2
SSIN2
SGN2
G036
R08I3
R07I3
R06I3
G037
SIND3
SSIN3
SGN3
#7
#6
#5
R05I
R05I2
R05I3
#4
F038
Parameter
#2
SWS3
#0
SWS1
GR21
R04I
R03I
R02I
R01I
R12I
R11I
R10I
R09I
R04I2
R03I2
R02I2
R01I2
R12I2
R11I2
R10I2
R09I2
R04I3
R03I3
R02I3
R01I3
R12I3
R11I3
R10I3
R09I3
#3
ENB3
#2
ENB2
#1
#0
The parameters for the 1st spindle and the 1st position coder are the same
as usual. This section describes the parameters which are added by this
function.
#7
#6
#5
3701
#4
SS2
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

0: 1
1: 2
#7
#6
#5
#4
3702
#3
#2
#1
EMS
#0
[Data type] Bit

EMS Multispindle control is
0 : Used
1 : Not used
NOTE
If the multispindle control function is not required for one
path in twopath control, specify this parameter for the path
to which the multispindle control function need not be
applied.
803
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
3706
#3
PCS
#2
#1
#0
GTT
[Data type] Bit

PCS When multispindle control is applied to two tool posts in twopath
control, this parameter specifies whether a position coder feedback signal
from the other tool post is selectable, regardless of the state of the
PC2SLC signal (bit 7 of G028/bit 7 of G1028) of the other tool post:
0 : Not selectable.
1 : Selectable. (To select a position coder for the other tool post, the
SLPCA signal (bit 2 of G064) and the SLPCB signal (bit 3 of G064)
are used.)
NOTE
Multispindle control based on the same serial spindle must
be applied to both tool posts. Refer to 9.4 for details.

0 : Type M.
1 : Type T.
NOTE
1 Type M:
range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered.
The spindle
speed corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is
output.
specified.
3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the
following parameters have no effect:
No. 3705#2 SGB, No. 3751, No. 3752, No. 3705#3 SGT,
No. 3761, No. 3762, No. 3705#6 SFA, No. 3735, No. 3736
However, parameter No. 3744 is valid.
804
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
3707
#1
P22
#0
P21
P22, P21 Gear ratio of spindle to second position coder

Magnification
P22
P21
#7
#6
Magnification=
Number of spindle revolutions

#5
#4
#3
3709
#2
MSI
#1
#0
MSI In multispindle control, the SIND signal is valid

0 : Only when the first spindle is valid (SIND signal for the 2nd, 3rd
spindle becomes ineffective)
1 : For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected (Each
spindle has its own SIND signal).
3772

[Unit of data] rpm
the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum
speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed
is clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is
not clamped.
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of the
spindle is not clamped.
805
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
specified.
2 When the multispindle control option is selected, set the
maximum speed for each spindle in the following
parameters:
Parameter No. 3772: Sets the maximum speed for the first
spindle.
Parameter No. 3802: Sets the maximum speed for the
second spindle.
Parameter No. 3822: Sets the maximum speed for the third
spindle.
3802
Maximum speed of the second spindle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Parameter sets the maximum speed for the second spindle.
the spindle is specified, or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum
speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No.
3772 for the first spindle is used.
When 0 is set in parameter No. 3772, the spindle speed is
not clamped.
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed
is not clamped.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the multispindle control
option is selected.
the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum
speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode
is specified.
806
B63003EN1/02
3811
Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the second spindle
3812
Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the second spindle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set the maximum spindle speed for each gear of the second spindle.
NOTE
These parameters are used for the multispindle control.
3820
Data for adjusting the gain of the analog output of the thirdspindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.1%
Set the data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of the third
spindle speed.
NOTE
This parameter is used for controlling the multispindles.
3821
Offset voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third spindle speed
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Velo
Set the offset voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third
spindle speed.
1) Set 0 (standard setting) to this parameter.
2) Command a spindle speed that makes the spindle speed analog output
0.
3) Measure output voltage.
4) Set the following value to parameter No. 3821.
8191
offset voltage (V)
Setting value =
12.5
5) After the parameter has been set, command a spindle speed whose
analog output becomes 0 and confirm the voltage becomes 0V.
807
B63003EN1/02
3822
Maximum speed of the third spindle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
This parameter sets the maximum speed for the third spindle.
When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle
speed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed
because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is
WARNING
1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No.
3772 for the first spindle is used. When 0 is set in parameter
No. 3772, the spindle speed is not clamped.
PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of the
spindle is not clamped.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the multispindle control
option is selected.
the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum
speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode
is set.
3831
Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the third spindle
3832
Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the third spindle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
Set the maximum spindle speed for each gear of the third spindle.
NOTE
These parameters are used for mulitispindle control.
808
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
Do not switch between the first and second position coders
while a function that uses position coder feedback
information is being executed. That is, PMC signal PC2SLC
<G028#7> cannot be used while, for instance, a command
for feed per rotation or thread cutting is taking place.
Caution
CAUTION
1 If the primary spindle stop signal *SSTP for stopping all
selected (SWS1 to SWS3) spindles rotation is cleared, the
speed command is restored. A spindle not selected by
SWS1 to SWS3 and rotating at its previous speed, which is
stopped using its respective command *SSTP1 to *SSTP3,
cannot be restored to that speed when the signal is cleared.
2 Type A multi-spindle control differs from Type B in the
relationship between the SWS1 and SIND signals for the
first spindle. In Type B, SIND functions only when SWS1 is
set to 1. In Type A, SIND functions whether SWS1 is 1
or 0; each spindle is selected by either of its respective
SWS1 or SIND signals being set to 1.
Note
NOTE
1 The spindle orientation signal, spindle speed override
signals, and spindle stop signal *SSTP only function for
selected signals.
2 The S 12-bit code signals R01O to R12O outputs the state
of a selected spindle. If two or more spindles are selected
at the same time, the states of the first, second, and third
spindles are output in this order.
3 The multi-spindle function allows two position coder
interfaces to be used. But the number of actual speed
indications on the CNC screen does not change. The speed
based on the feedback information of the selected position
coder is displayed.
4 An SOR command has priority over S commands and
SIND-based rotation control from the PMC, and will cause
all selected spindle to perform orientation rotation.
809
B63003EN1/02
9.11
RIGID TAPPING
9.11.1
General
In a tapping cycle (M series: G84/G74, T series: G84/G88), synchronous

control is applied to the tapping operation of a tapping axis and the
operation of the spindle.
This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such as a float tapper, thus
enabling higherspeed, higherprecision tapping.
Whether a tapping cycle is an ordinary tapping cycle or rigid tapping cycle
is determined by the miscellaneous function code for rigid tapping M29.
(A different M code can be used by setting the parameters accordingly, but
M29 is used in the description given here.)
By setting the parameters, G codes for tapping cycles can be changed to
G codes for rigid tapping only. In this case, the CNC specifies M29
internally.
To perform rigid tapping, the following must be added to the ordinary
connections:
Connection of a position coder to the spindles (described in 9.11.2)
Addition of a sequence to the PMC (described in 9.11.6 and 9.11.7)
Setting of related parameters (described in 9.11.8)
This section provides an example of M series connection.
To avoid duplicate descriptions, assume the following unless noted
otherwise:
G code for a tapping cycle
M series: G84 (G74) T series: G84 (G88)
Gear selection method
M series: Mtype or Ttype gear selection method
T series: Ttype gear selection method only
Parameters used according to the number of gear stages (No. 5221
to No. 5224, No. 5231 to No. 5234, No. 5241 to No. 5244, No.
5261 to No. 5264, No. 5271 to No. 5274, No. 5281 to No. 5284,
No. 5291 to 5294, No. 5321 to No. 5324, etc.)
M series: Up to three stages T series: Up to four stages
(Shared by the second spindle. Up to two stages for the second
spindle.)
CAUTION
1 The description given in this section covers up to the fourth
axis.
2 When Mtype gear selection is used for the M series, the
maximum spindle speed for rigid tapping (specified with
parameters No. 5241 to 5243) must also be set for
parameter No. 5243 regardless of the number of gear steps.
(For a system having a single gear step, set the same value
as that of parameter No. 5241 for parameter No. 5243. For
a system having two gear steps, set the same value as that
of parameter No. 5242 for parameter No. 5243.)
810
B63003EN1/02
The descriptions given in this section (such as spindle gear switching and
Mtype/Ttype) are based on the explanation given in Section 9.3. Refer
to Section 9.3 as necessary.
Specification of
M series/T series
Rigid tapping of M series
The differences in the specifications for rigid tapping for the M series and
T series are described below.
The tapping cycle G84 and the reverse tapping cycle G74 can be used to
specify M series rigid tapping.
A tapping axis can be arbitrarily selected from the basic axes X, Y, and
Z, as well as axes parallel to the basic axes, by setting the corresponding
parameters accordingly (bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101).
The spindle operations of G84 and G74 are reversed with respect to each
other.
Rigid tapping of T series
The face tapping cycle G84 and the side tapping cycle G88 can be used
to specify T series rigid tapping.
Depending on the rigid tapping command, rigid tapping can be performed
along the Zaxis (when G84 is used) or the Xaxis (when G88 is used).
A reverse tapping cycle, like that supported by M series, is not available.
For a twopath lathe, rigid tapping can be performed using a combination
of the spindle and tapping axis selected in each path.
Rigid tapping using a mixture of paths is not allowed. For example, rigid
tapping in combination of a tapping axis of tool post 1 and the spindle of
tool post 2, by issuing a tapping command to tool post 1, is not supported.
811
9.11.2
Connection Among
Spindle, Spindle Motor,
and Position Coder
B63003EN1/02
As shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between the spindle
and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder.
Spindle control
Error
counter
Spindle amplifier
Spindle motor
Gear ratio n:m
Position
coder
Gear ratio q:p
Spindle
1024 p/rev
(The 512 pulses/rev position coder is incorporated into some

spindle motors. When the serial spindle is used, the system
carries out conversion from 512 pulses/rev to 1024 pulses/rev.)
(1) Gear between spindle

and spindle motor
Up to three gear stages (1 st spindle of M series) or four gear stages (1st

spindle of T series), two gear stages (2nd spindle) can be provided between the spindle and the spindle motor. The gear ratio is arbitrary. The
spindle move distance per spindle motor rotation is different, based on the
gear ratio. The speed command to the spindle motor must be adjusted.
See (2), below, for additional information regarding a spindle motor incorporating a position coder.
(2) Gear between spindle

and position coder
The position coder is used to detect the position of the spindle.

The gear ratio for the spindle and position coder is specified in the parameter sets No. 5221 to No. 5223 and No. 5231 to No. 5233, or parameter set
PG1 and PG2 No. 3706 #0, #1, parameter P21, P22 (No. 3707 #0, #1) for
2nd spindle. Which parameter set to use is specified by parameter VGR
No. 5200 #1.
S Arbitrary gear ratio
This is used if the gear ratio for the spindle motor and position coder
(built-in or separate) is not 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, or 1:8, set VGR to 1 and set the
gear ratio using parameter No. 5221 to 5224.
When position coder is mounted on a spindle, the gear ratio for the spindle
motor and position coder cannot be changed by shifting the spindle motor
and spindle gears. Parameters No. 5221 to 5224 must all specify the same
value for the teeth of the individual spindle gears. Parameters No. 5231
to 5234 must all specify the same value for the teeth of individual position
coder gears.
(VGR=1)
The 1024 or 512 pulses/rev position coder is built into the spindle motor.
For the 512 pulses/rev version, specify double the number of teeth on each
gear for the position coder. (Double the number of teeth need not be
specified for the serial spindle.)
812
B63003EN1/02
The M series allows up to three stages, regardless of which gear selection

method has been selected. (Parameter Nos. 5224 and 5234 cannot be
used.)
The T series supports up to four stages. (Set parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224
and 5231 to 5234.) When the multispindle function is used to perform
rigid tapping with the second spindle, up to two stages are supported. (Set
parameter Nos. 5221, 5222, 5231, and 5232.)
Example)
Builtin position coder
Spindle
motor
1st gear set 30 : 70

2nd gear set 50 : 50
3rd gear set 70 : 30
Set value
1024p/re
v
Position
coder
Paramet 512p/rev
er No.
Position
coder
Meaning
5221
70
Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the

spindle side
5222
50
Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the

spindle side
5223
30
Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the

spindle side
5231
60 Note)
30
Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the

position coder side
5232
100 Note)
50
Number of teeth of the 2nd gear for the

position coder side
5233
140 Note)
70
Number of teeth of the 3rd gear for the

position coder side
NOTE
Double value setting is not required for serial spindle.
813
S Gear ratio is 1:1, 1:2, 1:4,
1:8 (VGR=0)
B63003EN1/02
If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parameters
PG1 and PG2 (No. 3706 #0, #1). This applies if the position coder is
mounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one stage
gear is provided. .
For 2nd spindle, set it to parameter P21, P22 (No.3707#0, #1).
Parameter
Gear ratio
Detection unit
nit
PG2
PG1
Spindle
Position coder
360/4096=0.08789 deg
360/4096
deg
2=0.17578
360/4096
deg
4=0.35156
360/4096
deg
8=0.70313
The spindle motor building in the 512 pulses/rev position coder uses the
values set forth in the following table. A serial spindle does not require
double-value setting; use the same values as for the spindle motor
building in the 1024 pulses/rev position coder.
Gear ratio
Builtin
position
coder
512p/rev
(3) Rigid tapping and

machines with
multiple gears
Parameter
Gear ratio
of spindle
to position
coder
Detection
unit
(deg)
Spindle
motor
Spindle
PG2
PG1
1:2
0.17578
1:4
0.35156
1:8
0.70313
If the M type gear selection method is selected, the CNC determines

whether gears need changing using the gear change specification
mentioned in section 9.3. If the gears need to be changed, the CNC
generates the S function code read signal SF (F007#2) and gear selection
signals GR10, GR20, and GR30 (F034#0-#2) to notify the PMC. Change
gears using the PMC, based on these signals.
If the T type gear selection method is selected, the CNC does not process
gear changes. When the CNC has the S function code, it outputs signal
SF and S function code signals S00 to S31 (F022#0-F025#7) to the PMC.
(However, parameter No. 3705 and its related parameters need to be set
for S code and SF signal output). Using the PMC, determine whether
gears need changing, and make the change if needed. Input gear selection
signals GR1 and GR2 <G028#1,#2> or GR21 <G029#0> for 2nd spindle
for the selected gear, and notify the CNC of them.
To perform rigid tapping with the serial spindle, enter the clutch/gear
selection signals CTH1 and CTH2 (G070#3,#2 for the first spindle, and
G074#3, #2 for the second spindle) from the PMC. Notify the serial
spindle control unit of these signals via the CNC, irrespective of the gear
selection method.
814
B63003EN1/02
Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that
for gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changing
gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section 9.3
when the M type gear selection method has been selected. With the T type
gear selection method, changing gears conforms to the logic programmed
in the PMC.
Regardless of the options selection, if the range in which the spindle
speed specified by the S function code does not correspond to the
currently selected gear, the gears are changed.
The following tables list the spindle speed ranges for each gear during
normal machining (assuming no machine restrictions) and rigid tapping:
Spindle speed range (normal machining)
Gear
Lower limit
Upper limit
Low
speed
gear
1 revolution
Maximum lowspeed gear speed =
Medium
speed
gear
Maximum lowspeed
gear speed + 1 revolution
Maximum mediumspeed gear speed =
High
speed
gear
Maximum medium
speed gear speed +1
revolution
Maximum highspeed gear speed =

Lowspeed gear ratio

Medium speed gear ratio
Highspeed gear ratio
L%
L%
L%
NOTE
This table shows an example of three gears. L% indicates
a spindle motor protection constant (up to 100). L can be
specified for each gear using method B for changing in M
type gear selection method (bit 2 (SGB) of parameter No.
3705 =1).
Spindle speed range (during rigid tapping)
Gear
Low
speed
gear
Lower limit
1 revolution
Upper limit
Maximum lowspeed gear speed
Basic spindle motor speed +
Lowspeed gear ratio
Medium
speed
gear
Maximum lowspeed
gear speed + 1 revolution
Maximum mediumspeed gear speed

Mediumspeed gear ratio
High
speed
gear
Maximum medium
speed gear speed +1
revolution
Maximum highspeed gear speed
Highspeed gear ratio
815
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
This table show an example of three gears. For the basic
spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor description
manual. + a means that the spindle motor speed may
slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed.
If the M type gear selection method is used, use gear change method B
(bit 3 (SGT) of parameter No. 3705 = 1) in the tapping cycle to specify
the following:
The table above shows the maximum low-speed gear speed during rigid
tapping for low-/medium-speed gear change position D (parameter No.
3761).
The table above shows the maximum medium-speed gear speed during
rigid tapping for medium-/high-speed gear change position E (parameter
No. 3762).
If the T type gear selection method is used, add the rigid tapping logic to
the logic programmed in the PMC.
See Section 9.3, Spindle Control for details of the spindle gear change
specifications.
The loop gain can be specified for each gear. Specify 0 for parameter
No. 5280 and specify loop gains for each gear for parameter Nos. 5281
to 5284. Unless 0 is specified for parameter No. 5280, the loop gains
for each gear are disabled, and the loop gain common to all gears, the
value of parameter No. 5280, is enabled.
Specify the time constant and the maximum spindle speed for each gear.
Use parameters Nos. 5261 to 5264 to specify the time constant.
Use parameters Nos. 5241 to 5244 to specify the maximum spindle speed.
For M type gear selection method, set the maximum spindle speed to
parameter No. 5243, irrespective of the number of gear stages used.
Setting bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 to 1 enables setting of the
extraction time constant for each gear set. Specify the extraction time
constant for each gear in parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274.
If bit 1 (VGR) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, the gear ratio for the
spindle and position coder can be set to anywhere between 1:32767 and
32767:1 in one-increment units for three gear sets with M series, four gear
sets with T series, or two gear sets with 2nd spindle. However 1:8 to 8:1
is the recommended value.
816
B63003EN1/02
9.11.3
Rigid Tapping
Specification
D
Feed rate
In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F; the
spindle speed is S 360(deg/min). Override is invalid for both of them.
An override of up to 200% can be applied to withdrawal operations by
setting bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 to 1, and setting an
appropriate override value in parameter RGOVR of No. 5211. The time
constant for withdrawal operations can be modified by bit 2 (TDR) of
parameter No. 5201; when it is set to 1, the values in parameter Nos.
5271 to 5274 are used as the time constant for withdrawal.
Acceleration and
deceleration
Linear acceleration/deceleration is valid for rigid tapping.
Override
Override is invalid for rigid tapping. Fixed override can be applied to

withdrawal operations by setting bit 4 (DOV) of parameters No. 5200 or
RGOVR of No. 5211.
Dry run
Dry run is valid for G84 (G74). When the dry run is applied to the tapping
axis speed of G84 (G74), tapping is performed. The spindle speed will
match the dry run speed.
Machine lock
Machine lock is valid for G84 (G74).

When G84 (G74) is executed with the machine locked, however the
tapping axis and the spindle do not move.
Reset
When the reset operation is performed during rigid tapping, the mode is
reset. The spindle motor goes to the ordinary mode, but G84 (G74) mode
is not reset.
Feed hold and single

block
The feed hold and single block functions are nullified for G84 (G74).
The feed hold and single block functions in rigid tapping mode can be
effective by setting bit 6 (FHD) of parameter No. 5200 to 1.
As with the machine lock signal, the feed hold and single block functions
are also effective for the spindle indirectly, through tapping axis
operations.
Operation mode
G84 (G74) can be executed only in the MEM and MDI modes.
Manual feed
Rigid tapping cannot be performed in the manual feed mode.
In rigid tapping mode, the backlash is compensated for the lost motion at
forward and reverse spindle rotations. Set it using parameter No. 5321
to No 5324. The backlash compensation is normally made for the tapping
axis.
817
9.11.4
Display Data on the
Diagnosis Screen
Common display data
B63003EN1/02
For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information

related to rigid tapping.
For part of the display data, the user can choose between two sets of data
items relating to the synchronization of the spindle and tapping axis by
setting bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204.
The following information items are displayed, regardless of the setting
of bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204:
Spindle position deviation Diagnosis No. 450
Number of command pulses distributed to the spindle
(momentary value) Diagnosis No. 451
Cumulative number of command pulses distributed to the spindle
Diagnosis No. 454
Display of rigid tapping

synchronization error
(When DGN = 0)
When bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204 is set to 0, the following

information items are displayed.
(Diagnosis Nos. 452 and 453 are not displayed.)
Spindleconverted move command difference Diagnosis No. 455
Spindleconverted position deviation difference Diagnosis No. 456
Synchronization error range Diagnosis No. 457
Spindleconverted move command difference
=
spindle move command
(tapping axis move command)
gear ratio
4096
thread lead
Spindleconverted position deviation difference

=
spindle position deviation

gear ratio
(tapping axis position deviation)
4096
thread lead
Synchronization error range

= (maximum spindleconverted move position deviation difference on
the positive side)
(maximum spindleconverted position deviation difference on the
negative side)
If a maximum allowable synchronization error range is set in parameter
No. 5214, the position deviation alarm during spindle movement (alarm
No. 741) is issued to indicate that the set synchronization error range has
been exceeded. (If 0 is set in parameter No. 5214, no check is performed
to detect whether the synchronization error range has been exceeded.)
Rigid tapping error

display
(error difference display)
(When DGN = 1)
When bit 0 (DGN) of parameter No. 5204 is set to 1, the following

information items are displayed. (Diagnosis Nos. 455, 456, and 457 are
not displayed.)
Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
Diagnosis No. 452
Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis
Diagnosis No. 453
818
B63003EN1/02
Diagnosis No. 0452 is cleared to 0 when rigid tapping mode is set or

canceled, and diagnosis No. 0453 is cleared to 0 in the positioning of
the rigid tapping cycle.
The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis.
Zaxis
error
Zc
Ze
Speed
Zc =
60
Gain
102 (Theoretical value)
Detection unit
Ze = Zaxis error counts (measured value)
Spindle
error
Sc
Se
Sc =
Speed
60
360
1
Gain
102 (Theoretical value)
Detection unit
Se = Spindle error counts (measured value)

Speed :
Gain :
mm/min or inch/min
0.01 s-1
Detection unit :mm, inch, or deg

Speed :
rpm
Ze
100 [%]
DZ=
Zc
The error difference between the spindle and Z axis

can be obtained by DSDZ. This value is sampled
at intervals of 64 ms.
Se
100 [%]
DS=
Sc
819
B63003EN1/02
Diagnosis screen
Spindle position
deviation
0450
SPINDLE MOTION ERROR
Spindle position deviation during rigid tapping

[Unit] Pulse
D Number of pulses
distributed to the spindle
0451
SPINDLE MOTION PULSE
Number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid tapping

[Unit] Pulse
D Error difference between

the spindle and tapping
axis (momentary value)
0452
RIGID ERROR
Momentary error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
rigid tapping (signed)
[Unit] %
NOTE
This data item is displayed only when bit 0 (DGN) of
parameter No. 5204 is set to 1.
D Error difference between

the spindle and tapping
axis (maximum)
0453
RIGID ERROR(MAX)
Maximum error difference between the spindle and tapping axis during
rigid tapping (absolute value)
[Unit] %
NOTE
D Cumulative number of
pulses distributed to the
spindle during rigid
tapping
0454
SPINDLE PULSE(SUM)
Cumulative number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid

tapping
[Unit] Pulse
820
B63003EN1/02
D Spindleconverted move
command difference
during rigid tapping
(momentary value)
0455
SYNC. PULSE(SUM)
Momentary spindleconverted move during command difference

between the spindle and the tapping axis during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
NOTE
Spindleconverted position
deviation difference during
rigid tapping
(momentary value)
0456
SYNC. ERROR
Momentary spindleconverted position deviation difference between the

spindle and the tapping axis during rigid tapping
[Unit] Pulse
NOTE
D Synchronization error
range during rigid tapping
(momentary value)
0457
SYNC. WIDTH
Synchronization error range during rigid tapping (maximum value)

[Unit] Pulse
NOTE
821
B63003EN1/02
9.11.5
Command Format
Command format for the
T series
The rigid tapping command format for the T series is described below.
For an explanation of the command format used with the M series, refer
to Section II.13.2.2 of the Operators Manual for Machining Center
(B63014EN) .
Gjj X(Z)__ C__ Z(X)__ R__ P__ F__ K__ (Mjj) ;

M code for Caxis
clamping
Number of repeats
Cutting feedrate
Dwell time at the bottom face of a
tapped hole and upon R point return
Specifies the position of an R point
Specifies the position of the bottom
face of a tapped hole
Specifies a tapping position.
G84
G88
Front tapping cycle

Side tapping cycle
The rigid tapping mode can be specified by using any of three methods:
D Specification of M29S**** before specifying a tapping cycle
D Specification of M29S****in the same block
D Enabling rigid tapping to be performed without specifying M29S****
When using the third method, specify S**** either before or in a block
containing G84 (G88).
Thus, the spindle stops, after which the tapping cycle specified next is
placed in rigid tapping mode.
Rigid tapping mode can be canceled by G80;. Note, however, that a G
code for another canned cycle, or a group 01 G code can also cancel rigid
tapping mode.
When rigid tapping is terminated by a command issued to cancel rigid
tapping mode, the spindle stops. (Output to the spindle is equivalent to
the specification of S0.)
A reset (by means of the RESET button or an external reset) can also
cancel rigid tapping mode. Note, however, that canned cycle mode is not
canceled by a reset.
D Specifying M29 before a block containing G84 (G88)
M29 S****;
GjjX (Z) __C__Z (X) __R__P__F__K__ (Mjj) ;
X (Z) __C__;
X (Z) __C__;
G80;
822
Rigid
tapping
mode
B63003EN1/02
Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block (Note, however, that
M29 and Mjj for Caxis clamping cannot be specified in the same
block.)
GjjX (Z) __Z (X) __R__P__F__K__M29****;
X (Z) __C__;
X (Z) __C__;
G80;
Rigid
tapping
mode
Converting G84 (G88) to a G code for rigid tapping (by setting bit 0
(G84) of parameter No. 5200 to 1)
GjjX (Z) __C__Z (X) __R_P_F_K_S**** (Mjj);
X (Z) __C__;
X (Z) __C__;
G80;
Notes on the T series
Rigid
tapping
mode
D
NOTE
1 In feed per minute mode, F_/S**** determines a thread
lead. In feed per rotation mode, F_ specifies a thread lead.
2 S**** must specify a value that does not exceed the value
set in the maximum spindle speed parameter (No. 5241 to
5244) for the gear to be used. Otherwise, P/S alarm No. 200
is issued in a block containing G84 (G88).
3 F_ must specify a value that does not exceed the maximum
cutting feedrate. When 0 is specified, P/S alarm No. 201 is
issued.
4 Between M29 and G84 (G88), S and a command for
movement along an axis must not be specified. Further,
M29 must not be specified in a tapping cycle. Otherwise,
P/S alarm Nos. 203 and 204 are issued, respectively.
823
B63003EN1/02
G84G85 ( Tapping cycle)
G84 (G88) (G98 mode)
G84 (G88) (G99 mode)
Spindle
stop
Motion 1
Initial point
Motion 6
Motion 2
Spindle CW
Spindle
stop
Spindle CW
R point
R point
Spindle
stop
Motion 5
Motion 3
Spindle stop
Spindle
stop
Spindle CCW
Z (X) point
P
Spindle stop
Spindle CCW
P
Z(X)point
Motion 4
Rapid traverse
Z (X) axis feed
P
Dwell
CAUTION
During cutting feed along the Zaxis (Xaxis), the feedrate
override is assumed to be 100%. The spindle speed
override is also assumed to be 100%. For a retract motion
(motion 5), a fixed override of up to 200% can be applied by
specifying bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 and
parameter No. 5211 (RGOVR).
NOTE
G code system A does not include G98 (return to initial level)
and G99 (return to R point level). Return to the initial level
is always used.
824
B63003EN1/02
Rigid tapping in feed per

rotation mode
Rigid tapping is classified into two types: rigid tapping in feed per
rotation mode (G99) and rigid tapping in feed per minute mode (G98).
Example)
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per rotation mode for
cutting a thread with a lead of 1 mm at a spindle speed of 1,000 rpm.
O0001 ;
G99 ;
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z100. R20.
G80 ;
F1. ;
The example below specifies rigid tapping in feed per minute mode for
cutting the same thread at the same spindle speed as above. (In feed per
minute mode, F/S determines the thread lead.)
O0002 ;
G98 ;
M29 S1000 ;
G84 Z100. R20.
G80 ;
F1000 ;
Units of F
Metric input
Inch input
Remarks
G98
1 mm/min
0.01 inch/min
A fractional value
can be specified.
G99
0.0001 mm/ rev
0.000001 inch/rev
A fractional value
can be specified.
NOTE
1 G98 and G99 are modal G codes. Upon powerup, G99
(feed per rotation mode) is set.
2 Even in feed per rotation mode, a pulse distribution
command is converted to a feed per minute command.
Thus, feed per rotation mode does not strictly implement
feed per rotation. Accordingly, even if the spindle stops for
some reason, the tapping axis (Zaxis or Xaxis) does not
stop.
825
B63003EN1/02
9.11.6
Signal
9.11.6.1
Signals for the rigid
tapping function
Rigid tapping signal
RGTAP<G061#0>
[Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is
specified, the PMC enters rigid tapping mode, then turns on this signal
to notify the CNC.
1 : The PMC enters in rigid tapping mode.
0 : The PMC does not enter rigid tapping mode.
For an explanation of placing the PMC in rigid tapping mode, see the
description of the interface with the PMC, given later.
This signal posts whether the PMC has entered rigid tapping mode. If this
signal is not set to 1, even when M29 is specified, a P/S alarm is issued
in a G84 (G74) block.
Spindle rotation
direction signals
RGSPM, RGSPP
<F065#1, #0>
(M series only)
[Function] During rigid tapping, these signals notify the PMC of whether the spindle
is rotating in the forward or reverse direction.
During rigid tapping, the spindle is:
RGSPP 1 : Rotating in the forward direction (CW).
0 : Not rotating in the forward direction.
RGSPM 1 : Rotating in the reverse direction (CCW).
0 : Not rotating in the reverse direction.
[Output condition] These signals are output when the spindle is rotating in rigid tapping
mode. This means that, even in rigid tapping mode, these signals are not
output, for example, when the spindle is being positioned to a hole
position, or a dwell operation is in progress at the bottom of a hole or at
an R point.
These signals are not output in the feed hold state or single block stop
state. When the spindle is placed in the interlock stop state, machine lock
state, or Zaxis ignore state, however, the spindle is not regarded as
having stopped; these signals are output.
These signals are valid only in rigid tapping mode. In normal spindle
control, these signals are not output; both RGSPP and RGSPM are set to
0.
826
B63003EN1/02
Rigid tapping
inprogress signal
RTAP<F076#3>
[Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is set.
RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently set.
0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently set.
By latching M29, the PMC knows that rigid tapping mode has been
specified, and thus performs the required processing on the PMC side.
This signal can substitute for the latching of M29. Even in this case,
however, FIN for M29 cannot be omitted.
9.11.6.2
Signals related to S code
output
ENB<F001#4>
Second spindle enable
signal
ENB2<F038#2>
[Function] These signals post whether the spindle output is 0. In rigid tapping mode,
these signals are used to cancel rigid tapping in a PMC sequence
associated with rigid tapping.
For details, see the explanation of the interface with the PMC, given later.
code signals
(binary output)
S00 to S31
<F022 to F025>
strobe signal
SF<F007#2>
[Function] These signals send S codes specified for the CNC, in binary format, to the
PMC.
[Output condition] When an S code is specified, the specified value is output, in binary
format, with the signals. Upon the completion of output, the SF signal
is set to 1.
Before rigid tapping can be performed, however, parameter setting is
required to output these signals, as described below.
827
B63003EN1/02
M series: SF output depends on the gear selection method, as described

below.
[1] Mtype gear selection method
SF output depends on bit 6 (SFA) of parameter No. 3705.
[2] Ttype gear selection method
SF output depends on the setting of bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705.
T series: The following parameter needs to be set to output S codes and
SF: Bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705 = 1
In rigid tapping, when SF is to be used by the PMC to read an S code
output signal for gear switching or output switching, set the above
parameters as required.
NOTE
1 The timing charts, given later, give examples of gear
switching by setting the parameters as follows:
M series: SFA = 0, NSF = 0
T series: EVS = 1
2 When the constant surface speed control function is being
used, an S code (specifying a surface speed) used for
constant surface control (G96) is output. Such an S code
can be distinguished from an S code used for specifying a
rotation speed. One method is to use, for example, the
constant surface speed control inprogress signal (F002#2)
for the processing performed on the PMC side. Another
method is to mask the S code and SF signal, output by
setting bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No. 3705.
9.11.6.3
Signals related to gear
switching
Gear selection signals
(output)
GR3O, GR2O, GR1O
<F034#2, #1, #0>
(M series only)
[Operation] When Mtype gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a
PMC sequence for rigid tapping.
The signals post, to the PMC, information about a spindle gear to be used,
according to the value of S**** specified at the execution of G84 (G74).
As gear switching becomes necessary, the states of the signals change
together with the SF signal.
The PMC should perform gear switching according to the information
posted by the signals.
Reference information: The table below indicates the relationship
between the output signals and gear selection.
828
B63003EN1/02
GR3O
GR2O
1st (low) speed gear
2nd (medium) speed gear
GR1O
3rd (high) speed gear
Gear selection signals

(input)
GR2, GR1<G028#2, #1>
[Operation] When Ttype gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a PMC
sequence for rigid tapping.
The signals post, to the CNC, information about a spindle gear to be used.
Reference information: The table below shows the relationship
between the output signals and spindle gear
selection.
f
f
GR2
GR1
1st (low) speed gear
2nd (medium)
speed gear
3rd (high) speed

gear
4th (high) speed

gear
In M series rigid tapping, the specification of the 4th (high) speed gear
is invalid. If specified, the system
assumes that the 3rd (high) speed
gear has been specified.

(input)
GR21<G029#0>
[Operation] When rigid tapping with the second spindle is being performed, the signal
is used in a PMC sequence.
The signal notifies the CNC of spindle gear information when the second
spindle has been selected.
The input signal is related to gear selection as described below.
GR21 1 : The second stage is currently selected as the second spindle gear.
0 : The first stage is currently selected as the second spindle gear.

GR21
1st speed gear
2nd speed gear
When a serial spindle is used, the serial spindle clutch/gear selection

signals (G070#3, #2 for the first spindle, and G074#3, #2 for the second
spindle) must be set in addition to the setting of the gear selection signal
described above.
829
B63003EN1/02
9.11.6.4
Signals related to
second spindle rigid
tapping

(input)
GR21<G029#0>
See the description of the signals related to gear switching, given above.
Signals related to
multispindle control
Spindle selection signals
SWS1, SWS2
<G027#0, #1>
Rigid tapping spindle
selection signals
RGTSP2, RGTSP1
<G061#5, #4>
(T series only)
[Operation] SWS1 and SWS2 are used to transfer spindle commands when the
multispindle control option is used. In rigid tapping, the signals can be
shared to select a spindle to be used for rigid tapping. (The signals can
be used for this purpose when bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set
to 0.)
RGTSP2 and RGTSP1 are used to select a spindle used for rigid tapping,
independently of the SWS1 and SWS2 signals, when the multispindle
control option is being used. (The RGTSP2 and RGTSP1 signals can be
used when bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1. These signals
are supported only by the T series.)
See the tables below for details of the settings of these signals.
When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 0, to select a spindle to
be used for rigid tapping, set the signals as indicated below.
Signal state
Spindle used
sed for rigid tapping
SWS1
SWS2
First spindle
First spindle
Second spindle
P/S alarm No. 205 is issued.
830
B63003EN1/02
When bit 7 (SRS) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1, to select a spindle to

be used for rigid tapping, set the signals as indicated below.
Signal state
Spindle used
sed for rigid tapping
RGTSP1
RGTSP2
First spindle
First spindle
Second spindle
P/S alarm No. 205 is issued.
WARNING
These signals must be applied before the command for rigid
tapping (M29 S....; G84 X...) is specified. The states of
these signals must not be changed before rigid tapping has
been completed.
Spindlebyspindle stop
signals
*SSTP1, *SSTP2
<G027#3, #4>
[Operation] These signals are used to stop each spindle when the multispindle
control option is used. In a PMC sequence for rigid tapping, the ENB and
ENB2 signals are used. Accordingly, the logic of the signals used for a
spindle selected to perform rigid tapping must match the logic of the
spindle stop signal *SSTP.
*SSTP1 1 : The output to the first spindle does not specify 0 rpm.
0 : The output to the first spindle specifies 0 rpm.
*SSTP2 1 : The output to the second spindle does not specify 0 rpm.
0 : The output to the second spindle specifies 0 rpm.
Second position coder

selection signal
PC2SLC<G028#7>
[Operation] This signal is used to select the second position coder when the
multispindle control option is being used. Note, however, that it cannot
be used with a spindle selected to perform rigid tapping.
1 : Control is exercised using a feedback pulse signal from the second
position coder.
0 : Control is exercised using a feedback pulse signal from the first
position coder.
For rigid tapping, this signal is not used. Instead, a position loop is
constructed by combining the first spindle with the first position coder,
or by combining the second spindle with the second position coder.
831
B63003EN1/02
However, the display of the actual speed is switched by this signal, even
during rigid tapping.
9.11.6.5
Signal addresses
#7
#6
#5
G027
G028
#3
*SSTP1
PC2SLC
G029
G061
#6
#5
#4
ENB
#3
GR1
#2
#1
#0
SF
GR3O
F038
GR2O
GR1O
RGSPM
RGSPP
ENB2
F065
F076
Rigid tapping mode

management and ENB
(or ENB2)
GR2
#0
SWS1
RGTAP
F034
Notes on interface with

the PMC
#1
SWS2
GR21
F007
9.11.6.6
#2
RGTSP2 RGTSP1
#7
F001
#4
*SSTP2
RTAP
The following describes some notes in designing the interface with the
PMC.
The PMC must manage rigid tapping mode as follows: rigid tapping
mode is set using M29, and is canceled upon the issue of a reset or at the
falling edge of the spindle enable signal ENB in rigid tapping mode. ENB
is used during rigid tapping in this way, so the spindle stop signal *SSTP
must not be set to 0.
However, *SSTP and SOR may be used for gear switching. To do so,
ensure that the PMC does not cancel rigid tapping mode on a falling edge
of ENB while *SSTP is 0. Rigid tapping mode may be set on a rising
edge of the RTAP signal instead of by using M29, and canceled on a
falling edge of the RTAP signal instead of the ENB signal.
In rigid tapping using the second spindle, the ENB2 signal must be used
for rigid tapping mode management.
Controlling spindle
output by the PMC
When the SIND signal is set to 1, spindle output is controlled by the

signals (SSIN, SGN, R1I to R12I) output from the PMC.
At this time, the effect of ENB is as described above. In addition, when
rigid tapping mode is canceled in a block containing G80;, the momentary
rotation of the spindle, caused by a delay in the PMC processing, can
result. Accordingly, the PMCs control over spindle output must be
disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND to 0.
For the same reason, the PMCs control over second spindle output must
be disabled in rigid tapping mode by setting SIND2 to 0.
832
B63003EN1/02
Ttype gear selection

method
When Ttype gear selection is used, the PMC must determine whether
gear switching is to be performed, and subsequently perform gear
switching as required. For this purpose, each time a spindlespeed
function code is specified, the spindlespeed function code read signal
(SF) and spindlespeed function code signals (S00 to S31) must be output
to the PMC. The required parameter settings are described below.
M series: Set bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 to 0 to output SF.
T series: Set bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No. 3705 to 1 to output SF.
Gear switching timing
In general, a block containing M29 (miscellaneous function for

preparation for rigid tapping) specifies S****, S**** being output when
a block containing G84 (G74) is executed. This means that gear switching
is performed in the block specifying G84 (G74).
When rigid tapping mode

is specified
M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) and S****
specify rigid tapping mode. When M29 is accepted by the PMC, the
following processing must be performed:
D Stop the spindle when it is rotating.
D Check that the spindle has stopped completely, then set the rigid
tapping signal RGTAP <G061#0> to on.
D Activate the spindle motor. Activate the motor so that a positive speed
command rotates the spindle in the forward direction (CCW when
viewed from the side of the tapping axis).
D Return FIN at least 250 ms after activation.
NOTE
The condition at least 250 ms after activation results from
there being no way of checking the completion of spindle
motor activation. Therefore, this wait period serves as an
alternative. The time required for activation to be completed
varies with the spindle motor and amplifier. Therefore, this
value of 250 ms is given as a guideline only.
In an M29 block, S**** is not executed, merely being read in. S**** is
executed in a G84 block. Spindle output is equivalent to the specification
of S0.
The timing chart is shown in the chart indicating the execution of G84
(G74).
Execution of G84 (G74)
When Mtype gear

selection is used
When M29S****; is specified, S**** is read in, spindle output being

equivalent to the specification of S0;. S**** is output when G84 (G74)
is executed. Thus, the processing described below is performed.
When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with the
spindle motor and spindle, and S**** is outside the previously selected
gear range, the spindlespeed function strobe signal SF <F007#2> and
gear selection signals (output) GR3O, GR2O, GR1O <F034#2, #1, #0>
are output to the PMC.
At this time, perform gear switching at the PMC.
833
When Ttype gear

selection is used
B63003EN1/02
The spindlespeed function strobe signal SF <F007#2> and

spindlespeed function code signals S00 to S31 <F022 to F025> are
output to the PMC. (However, parameter setting is required to enable
output of the S codes and SF signal. See the description of each bit of
parameter No. 3705.)
At this time, the PMC must determine whether gear switching is to be
performed, and perform gear switching as required. The selected gear
must be reflected in the gear selection signals (input) GR2 and GR1
<G028#2, #1> for notification to the CNC.
From GR2 and GR1, the CNC determines which gear is selected.
However, note the difference between the M series and T series, as
described below.
M series: Up to three gear stages are supported for the first spindle, and
up to two gear stages for the second spindle. (The gear
selection for the second spindle is notified to the CNC by the
signal GR21 <G029#0>)
T series: Up to four gear stages are supported for the first spindle, and
up to two gear stages for the second spindle. (The gear
selection for the second spindle is notified to the CNC by the
signal GR21 <G029#0>.)
An S code is output in the first block (positioning to tapping position) of
G84 (G74) execution. However, the spindle motor position loop is closed
in the next block (R point positioning). Accordingly, spindle speed offset
must be adjusted accurately until the position loop has been closed in the
second block of G84 (G74) execution after the PMC activates the spindle
motor with M29. Otherwise, the spindle motor may rotate slightly. (This
applies only to an analog spindle. No offset adjustment is required for a
serial spindle.)
Rigid tapping mode may be specified by specifying M29 before G84,
specifying M29 and G84 in the same block, or by specifying G84 as a G
code for rigid tapping. In each case, PMC processing is the same. (The
M29 code is always output.)
834
B63003EN1/02
9.11.7
Timing Charts for Rigid
Tapping Specification
The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method
used to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (Mtype or
Ttype), and whether to perform gear switching.
From the table, find the appropriate timing chart (Fig. 9.11.7.1 (a) to Fig.
9.11.7.3 (d)) and apply the information it contains as necessary.
Gear
selection
method
Mtype
Ttype
Specification method
Gear
switching
M29 is specified before

G84 (G74).
M29 and G84 (G74) are

specified in the same
block.
By parameter setting,
G84 (G74) is specified as
a G code for rigid
tapping.
Not performed
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (a)
Fig. 9.11.7.2 (a)
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (a)
Performed
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (b)
Fig. 9.11.7.2 (b)
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (b)
Not performed
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (c)
Fig. 9.11.7.2 (c)
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (c)
Performed
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (d)
Fig. 9.11.7.2 (d)
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (d)
M type
Mtype
T type
Ttype
NOTE
For more information about the M/T type gear selection
method, see Section 9.3 SPINDLE CONTROL. Note the
following:
T series: Ttype
only
M series: Mtype when constant surface speed control
is not being used and bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 0
Ttype
when constant surface speed control
is being used, or bit 4 (GTT) of
parameter No. 3706 is set to 1
835
B63003EN1/02
9.11.7.1
When M29 is specified before G84 (G74)
M type gear selection method
M29
RTAP
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
Spindle
output
Second block
To be masked to the second

block
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (a) Gear is not changed
836
B63003EN1/02
M29
RTAP
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
*Gear
change
motion
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
Second block
250ms
or more
Gear change
SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart show an example where the gear has shifted from low to middle gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from 1 to 0, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from 0 to 1. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (b) When gear change is performed (from low to middle gear)
837
B63003EN1/02
T type gear selection method
M29
RTAP
First bllock
G84 (G74)
ENB
Second block
To be masked to the second block
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
250ms
or more
SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (c) Gear change is not performed
838
B63003EN1/02
M29
RTAP
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
*Gear
change
motion
Spindle
output
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
Second block
250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
Gear change
SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from low to middle gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and selects the gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
Fig. 9.11.7.1 (d) When gearchange is performed (low to middle gear)
839
B63003EN1/02
9.11.7.2
M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block
M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
Second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
FIN
Rotation
Excitation

250ms
or more
SFR
Position
loop
Fig. 9.11.7.2 (a) When gearchange is not performed
840
B63003EN1/02
M29
RTAP
Second block
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
Rotation
Excitation
250ms
or more
FIN
Gear change
SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from middle high gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from 1 to 0, and one of the two remaining signals has tuned from 0 to 1. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.11.7.2 (b) When gearchange is performed (middle to high)
841
B63003EN1/02
M29
RTAP
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
Second block
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
250ms
or more
SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.11.7.2 (c) When gear change is not performed
842
B63003EN1/02
M29
RTAP
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
SF
S code output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
250ms
or more
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
outpout
RGTAP
Second block
Gear change
SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from middle to high gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and selects the gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
Fig 9.11. 7.2 (d) When gearchange is performed (middle to high gear)
843
B63003EN1/02
9.11.7.3
Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters
M type gear selection
M29
RTAP
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
Second block
M29 is commanded
internally.
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
FIN
Rotation
Excitaiton

250ms
or more
SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (a) When gearchange is not performed
844
B63003EN1/02
M29
RTAP
Second block
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
M29 is commanded
internally.
To be masked to the
second block
Spindle
output
SF
GR1O
GR2O
GR3O
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
Rotation
Excitation
250ms
or more
FIN
Gear change
SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shifted from high to low gear. One of the gear select signals (GR1O,
GR2O, GR3O) has turned from 1 to 0, and one of the two remaining signals has turned from 0 to 1. This changes
the gear.
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (b) When gear change is performed (high to low gear)
845
B63003EN1/02

M29
RTAP
Second block
First block
G84 (G74)
ENB
M29 is commanded
internally.
Spindle
outoput
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
FIN
Rotation
Excitation
250ms
or more
SFR
Position loop
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (c) When gear change is not performed
846
B63003EN1/02
M29
RTAP
Second block
First blcok
G84 (G74)
ENB
M29 is commanded
internally
To be masked to the
second blcok
Spindle
output
SF
S code
output
GR1
GR2
*SSTP
SOR
RGTAP
Rotation
250ms
Excitation
or more
FIN
Gear change
SFR
Position loop
Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has changed from high to low gear. The PMC selects a required gear
through an S code output and inputs the selected gear using the GR1 and GR2 signals to inform CNC of the selected gear.
Fig. 9.11.7.3 (d) When gearchange is performed (high to low gear)
847
9.11.7.4
Timing to cancel rigid
tapping mode
B63003EN1/02
When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such

as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued.
The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel
the PMC rigid tapping mode at the falling edge of the ENB signal (ENB2
signal for 2nd spindle of T series) by de-energizing the spindle; then turn
off the rigid tapping mode signal. The system goes to the next block after
confirming that the signal is off.
When gear change is performed using *SSTP and SOR, the ENB signal
can be either 1 or 0. Do not cancel the PMCs rigid tapping mode at
the falling edge of the ENB signal under these circumstances. The
position loop is also canceled.
When the CNC is reset, the PMCs rigid tapping mode must be canceled.
When CRG (parameter No. 5200#2) is 1, the system goes directly to the
next block without checking that the rigid tapping signal is 0. Set CRG
to 1 for systems in which the rigid tapping signal is always 1.
G80
(or G code of group 01)
RTAP
ENB (orENB2)
Spindle output
RGTAP
Rotation
Excitation
Position loop
848
B63003EN1/02
WARNING
1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code,
such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is
executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to 0.
Therefore, if a block contains an M code for controlling the
spindle, an error may occur during processing in the PMC.
2 When CRG (Parameter No. 5200#2) is 1, if the next block
contains an M code for controlling the spindle, an error may
occur during processing in the PMC, when:
Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing G80
Rigid tapping mode is canceled by issuing a Group 01 G
code , such as G00 or G01
NOTE
Rigid tapping mode is canceled as described above
regardless of the gear selection method of Mtype or
Ttype.
849
B63003EN1/02
9.11.8
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
SFA
NSF
3705
#4
EVS
#3
#2
SGT
#1
#0
ESF
ESF
[Data type] Bit

ESF When the spindle control function (S analog outpu or S serial output) is
used, and the consatant surface speed control function is used or bit 7
NOTE
For the T system, this parametar is enabled when bit 4
(EVS) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1.
For the M series, SF is not output:
For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
control mode
When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
SGT Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84, G74)

0 : Method A (Same as normal gear switching method)
1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
spindle speed set in parameters 3761 and 3762)
NOTE
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command
used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping
(G50S;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of
parameter No. 3705.
NSF: When an S code command is issued in constant surfacespeed control,

0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output:
850
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
3706
GTT
#1
PG2
#0
PG1
PG2
PG1
[Data type] Bit
PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder

Magnific
ation
PG2
PG1
Number of spindle revolutions
Magnification =

0: Type M
1 : Type T
NOTE
1 Type M:
range of each gear specified beforehand in a parameter.
Type T:
The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle speed
corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is output.
specified.
3761
3762
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] rpm
When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705, is set to 1) for the
tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the gears
are switched.
851
B63003EN1/02
Spindle motor speed
Max. output (4095, 10V)

Spindle motor
max. clamp speed
Spindle motor
min. clamp speed
Max. speed
at gear1
parameter
No. 3741
Speed at gear 12
change point
Parameter
No. 3761
#7
#6
Max. speed
at gear2
parameter
No. 3742
Max. speed
at gear3
parameter
No. 3743
Spindle speed
command
(S command)
Speed at gear 23
change point
Parameter
No. 3762
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
5101
FXY
[Data type] Bit

FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:
0 : Always the Zaxis
1 : The axis selected by the program
NOTE
For the M series, this parameter enables rigid tapping by
using a basic axis (X, Y, or Z) perpendicular to the
programselected plane, or an axis parallel to that basic
axis, as the tapping axis.
852
B63003EN1/02
5200
#7
SRS
#6
FHD
#5
#4
DOV
#3
SIG
#2
CRG
#1
VGR
#0
G84
FHD
PCP
DOV
SIG
CRG
VGR
G84
[Data type] Bit

G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping
0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the
issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No. 5210).
1 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84
cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be used
for the reverse tapping cycle.)
VGR Any gear ratio between spindle and position coder in rigid tapping
0 : Not used (The gear ratio is set in parameter No. 3706.)
1 : Used (The gear ratio is set by parameters Nos. 5221 through 5224 and
5231 through 5234.)
CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, G01
group G code, reset, etc.)
0 : Canceled after rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
1 : Canceled before rigid mode signal RGTAP is set to 0.
SIG When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the use of SIND <G032 and
G033> is
0 : Not permitted.
1 : Permitted.
DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated (The override value is set in parameter No. 5211.)
PCP Rigid tapping
0 : Used as a highspeed peck tapping cycle
1 : Not used as a highspeed peck tapping cycle
FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated
SRS To select a spindle used for rigid tapping in multispindle control:
0 : The spindle selection signals SWS1 and SWS2 (bits 0 and 1 of G027)
are used. (These signals are used also for multispindle control.)
1 : The rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1 and RGTSP2
(bits 4 and 5 of G061) are used. (These signals are provided expressly
for rigid tapping.)
853
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
5201
#2
TDR
#1
TDR
#0
NIZ
[Data type] Bit

NIZ Smoothing in rigid tapping is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping
0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos.
5261 through 5264)
1 : Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction
Parameter Nos. 5261 to 5264: Time constant during cutting
Parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274: Time constant during extraction
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
5202
ORI
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

ORI When rigid tapping is started:
0 : Spindle orientation is not performed.
1 : Spindle orientation is performed.
NOTE
This parameter can be used only for a serial spindle.
The spindle orientation is a zero return in the serial spindle
servo mode The stop position can be changed by serial
spindle parameter No. 4073.
854
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
5204
#1
#0
DGN
NOTE
[Data type] Bit
DGN On the diagnosis screen:
0 : A rigid tapping synchronization error is displayed. (Nos. 455 to 457)
1 : An error difference between the spindle and tapping axis is displayed.
(Nos. 452 and 453)
5210
Rigid tapping mode specification M code
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
To set an M code larger than 255, set it to parameter No. 5212.
NOTE
The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when 0 is set.
5211
Override value during rigid tapping extraction
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 1 %
The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.
NOTE
The override value is valid when DOV in parameter No.
5200#4 is 1.
5212
M code that specifies a rigid tapping mode
[Data type] Twoword

This parameter sets the M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.
The M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode is usually set by
parameter 5210. To use an M code whose number is greater than 255,
specify the code number with parameter 5212.
855
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
If the setting of this parameter is 0, the M code specifying the
rigid tapping mode is determined by the setting of parameter
5210. Otherwise, it is determined by the setting of
parameter 5212. The setting of parameter 5212 must
always be within the above valid range.
5213
Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch

This parameter sets the return or clearance in the peck tapping cycle.
When bit PCP in parameter No. 5200 is 0

(Highspeed peck tapping cycle)
q : Cutting
d : Clearance
q : Cutting
d : Return
R
point
q
q
5214
When bit PCP in parameter No. 5200 is 1

(Peck tapping cycle)
R
point
Z
point
Z
point
Rigid tapping synchronization error range setting
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets an allowable synchronization error range for rigid
tapping.
When the synchronization error exceeds the allowable range set with this
parameter, alarm No. 741 is issued. Note that when 0 is set with this
parameter, no synchronization error check is performed.
856
B63003EN1/02
5221
Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (First gear)
5222
Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5223
Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5224
Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the spindle side for every
gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is 1.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5221 to 5224 when
the spindle has a position coder.
5231
Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (First gear)
5232
Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5233
Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5234
Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side
for every gear when any gear ratio is set in rigid tapping.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when VGR, #1 of parameter No.
5200, is 1.
Set the same value to parameter Nos. 5231 to 5234 when
the spindle has a position coder.
A spindle motor incorporating the position coder uses a
position coder with 2048 pulses per revolution. In this case,
set the value that is two times as many as the actual number
of gear teeth (because of conversion to 4096 pulses per
revolution).
857
B63003EN1/02
5241
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (First gear)
5242
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5243
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5244
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] rpm
[Valid data range] Spindle and position coder gear ratio
1:1
0 to 7400
1:2
0 to 9999
1:4
0 to 9999
1:8
0 to 9999
These parameters set the maximum spindle speed for every gear in rigid
tapping.
NOTE
In a system having onestage gear, set the same value as
parameter No. 5241 to parameter No. 5243. In a system
having twostage gear, set the same value as parameter
No. 5242 to parameter No. 5243. If it is not set as such, P/S
alarm no. 200 will be informed.
These are applicable to M series.
5261
Acceleration/decelerationtime constant for every gear in rigid tapping

(First gear)
5262
Acceleration/deceleration time constant for every gear in rigid tapping

(Second gear)
5263

(Third gear)
5264

(Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
These parameters set the spindle and tapping axiss time constant for
every gear during linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping.
Set the time required until a spindle speed reaches the maximum spindle
speed (parameter Nos. 5241 and greater). The actual time constant is a
proportional value between the maximum spindle speed and the specified
spindle speed.
858
B63003EN1/02
5271
Acceleration/decelerationtime constant during extraction in rigid tapping

(First gear)
5272
Acceleration/deceleration time constant during extraction in rigid tapping

(Second gear)
5273

(Third gear)
5274

(Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
These parameters set the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
a spindle and tapping axis for every gear during extraction in rigid
tapping.
NOTE
The time constant is valid when TDR, #2 of parameter No.
5201, is 1.
5280
Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping
(Common in each gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 s1
This parameter sets the position control loop gain of a spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping.
The loop gain setting significantly influences the screw precision.
Perform a cutting test to adjust the loop gain and its multiplier to the
optimum values.
NOTE
To change the loop gain for every gear, set this parameter
value to 0 and set the loop gain for every gear to parameter
Nos. 5281 through 5284. If this parameter value is not 0,
the loop gain for every gear is invalidated. This parameter
then becomes a loop gain that is used in common for all
gears.
859
B63003EN1/02
5281
Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (First gear)
5282
Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5283
Position control loop gain of spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5284
Position control loop gain of spindle an tapping axis in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 0.01 s 1
These parameters set the position control loop gain of a spindle and
tapping axis for every gear in rigid tapping.
NOTE
To set the loop gain for every gear, set parameter No. 5280
to 0.
5291
Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1)
5292
5293
5294
Spindle loop gain multioplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear4)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Set the spindle loop gain multipliers for gears 1 to 4 in the rigid tapping
mode. The thread precision depends on the multipliers. Find the most
appropriate multipliers and 1OOP gain by conducting the cutting test.
NOTE
These parameters are used for analog spindles.
E
L
1000
where;
E: Voltage in the velocity command at 1000 rpm
L: Rotation angle of the spindle per one rotation of the
spindle motor
a : Unit used for the detection
860
B63003EN1/02
Example)
SPINDLE
MOTOR
Spindle
Position
coder
1: 1: 2
When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are

connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows:
E = 1.667 (V)
(A motor speed of 6000 rpm corresponds to 10
V.)
L = 360
(One rotation of the spindle corresponds to one
rotation of the spindle motor.)
a = La/4096
= 720/4096
= 0.17578
La = 720
(One rotation of the position coder corresponds
to two rotations of the spindle = 360
2.)
4096 = The number of detected pulses per
rotation of the position coder
Gear ratio between the spindle and the position coder
1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.08789 degrees
1:2 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.17578 degrees
1:4 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.35156 degrees
1:8 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.70313 degrees
Thus, Loop gain multiplier
= 2048
1.667/360
0.17578
1000 = 1667
NOTE
When the position coder which is built in a spindle motor
sends 512 pulses per rotation, the unit used for the
detection, a, is La/2048.
5300
Inposition width of tapping axis in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the inposition width of a tapping axis in rigid
tapping.
5301
Inposition width of spindle in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the inposition width of a spindle in rigid tapping.
861
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
The broad inposition width deteriorates the screw
precision.
5310
Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning deviation
during movement in rigid tapping.
To set a value larger than this value, set it to No. 5314.
WARNING
The setting value is represented in a 10times unit when a
highresolution transducer is used.
5311
Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during movement in rigid tapping.
S
360
100
1.5
Limit value =
60
G
a
where
S: Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5241 and greater)
G: Loop gain of rigid tapping axis
(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5280 and greater)
a : Detection unit
862
B63003EN1/02
Example)
SPINDLE
MOTOR
Spindle
Position
coder
When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are

connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows:
S = 3600
G = 3000
L = 360_
(One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotaion)
a = La / 4096
= 720_/4096
= 0.17578_
La= 720_
(One position coder rotation requires two spindle
rotations =360_
2)
4096=Detection pulse per positioncoder rotation
1: 1: 2
Setting value =
3600
360
60
3000
100
1.5
0.17578
= 6144
NOTE
The detection unit is a=La/2048 when the position coder
builtin spindle motor uses a position coder of 512 pulses
per revolution.
5312
Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a tapping axis positioning deviation
during stop in rigid tapping.
5313
Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during stop in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation
during stop in rigid tapping.
5314
Limit value of position deviation during movement along the tapping axis for rigid
tapping
[Data type] Twoword

863
B63003EN1/02

Parameter No. 5310 usually sets the limit of positional deviation during
movement along the tapping axis for rigid tapping. To specify a setting
exceeding the valid range specified in parameter No. 5310 according to
the resolution of the detector to be used, specify the limit value with
parameter No. 5314.
NOTE
If the setting of this parameter is 0, the setting of parameter
No. 5310 is enabled. Otherwise, the setting of parameter
No. 5310 is disabled, and the setting of parameter No. 5314
is enabled.
5321
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (First gear)

Spindle backlash in rigid tapping
5322
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (Second gear)
5323
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (Third gear)
5324
Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (Fourth gear)
[Data type] Byte

These parameters set the spindle backlash in rigid tapping.
864
B63003EN1/02
9.11.9
Alarm and Message
Number
Message
Description
200
ILLEGAL S CODE COM- In the rigid tapping, an S value is out of

MAND
the range or is not specified.
The maximum value for S which can be
specified in rigid tapping is set in parameter (No.5241 to 5243). Change the
setting in the parameter or modify the
program.
201
FEEDRATE NOT FOUND In the rigid tapping, no F value is speciIN RIGID TAP
fied.
202
POSITION
FLOW
203
PROGRAM MISS AT RIG- In the rigid tapping, position for a rigid M

ID TAPPING
code (M29) or an S command is incorrect. Modify the program.
204
ILLEGAL AXIS OPERA- In the rigid tapping, an axis movement

TION
is specified between the rigid M code
(M29) block and G84 or G74 block for
M series (G84 or G88 block for T series). Modify the program.
205
RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL Rigid tapping signal (DGNG061#0) is

OFF
not 1 when G84 or G74 block for M series (G84 or G88 block for T series) is
executed though the rigid M code
(M29) is specified. Consult the PMC
ladder diagram to find the reason the
signal is not turned on. Modify the program.
206
CAN
NOT
CHANGE Plane changeover was instructed in the
PLANE (RIGID TAP)
rigid mode.
207
RIGID DATA MISMATCH
410
SERVO ALARM: nTH The position deviation value when the

AXIS EXCESS ERROR nth axis (axis 18 of rigid tapping axis)
stops is larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.5312 for each axis.
411
SERVO ALARM: nTH The position deviation value when the

AXIS EXCESS ERROR nth axis (axis 18 of rigid tapping axis)
moves is larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No. 5310 or 5314 for each axis.
413
SERVO ALARM: nth The contents of the error register for the
AXIS LSI OVERFLOW
nth axis (axis 18 of rigid tapping axis)
are beyond the range of 231 to 231.
This error usually occurs as the result of
an improperly set parameters.
865
LSI
OVER- In the rigid tapping, spindle distribution

value is too large.
The specified distance was too short or

too long in rigid tapping.
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
Description
740
RIGID TAP ALARM; EXCESS ERROR
Position deviation value of spindle at

move exceeded a set value during
rigid tapping.
741
RIGID TAP ALARM; EXCESS ERROR
Position deviation value of spindle at

move exceeded a set value during
rigid tapping or synchronous error exceeded a set value (parameter No.
5214) during rigid tapping.
742
RIGID TAP ALARM; LSI

OVER FLOW
LSI overflow has occurred on the

spindle side during rigid tapping.
866
B63003EN1/02
9.11.10
Notes
NOTES ON SPINDLES
CAUTION
1 When using an analog spindle, set the spindle speed offset
value parameter (No. 3731) accurately. For the standard
system, a value within 8191 to 8191 must be specified in
this parameter. To perform rigid tapping, a value within
1023 to 1023 must be specified.
If the spindle speed offset is set inaccurately, the spindle is
stopped and placed in inposition wait state when tapping
is started.
In rigid tapping with a serial spindle, no setting is required
for parameter No. 3731. Be sure to set 0.
2 When the threading and synchronous feed functions are
enabled, the actual spindle speed during rigid tapping is
indicated correctly. When an arbitrary gear ratio is used (by
setting bit 1 (VGR) of parameter No. 5200 to 1), however,
the actual spindle speed will not be indicated correctly in
normal spindle mode.
When the T series is used, for example, information about
the actual spindle speed is important for lathe machining.
So, be particularly careful when using an arbitrary gear
between the spindle and position coder.
NOTE
1 A spindle pitch error is not compensated for in rigid tapping
mode. Drift compensation is not made with an analog
spindle.
2 The maximum number of pulses that can be distributed to
the spindle is:
32,767 pulses per 8 msec for a serial spindle
4,096 pulses per 8 msec for an analog spindle
(This information is displayed by selecting No. 451 on the
diagnosis screen.)
These values vary with the position coder gear ratio setting
and rigid tapping specification. If a value greater than the
maximum allowable number is specified, P/S alarm No. 202
is issued.
867
Notes on using
functions such as the
spindle positioning
function at the same
time
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the
same time
The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by
using sensors and the PMC, without being directly
controlled by the CNC.
The CNC has no direct control over this processing, instead
following the specifications of the spindle orientation
function being used.
2 When the spindle positioning function is to be used at the
same time
When the spindle positioning function is to be used together
with rigid tapping, rigid tapping mode must not be specified
in spindle indexing mode, and spindle indexing mode must
not be specified in rigid tapping mode. (Spindle positioning
and rigid tapping cannot be performed simultaneously for a
single spindle.)
This restriction does not apply, however, when
multispindle control is applied; rigid tapping can be
performed using the second spindle.
The spindle positioning function is effective for the first
spindle only. This means that when spindle indexing is
performed with the first spindle, rigid tapping can be
specified with the second spindle.
3 When the Cs contouring control function for the serial
spindle is used together with the rigid tapping function, the
same motor is used for spindle rotation control, Cs
contouring control, and rigid tapping modes. The following
points must be noted:
(1)Whether to enter Cs contouring control mode or spindle
rotation control mode is selected by the CON (Cs
contouring control switch signal) signal; however, the
system can enter rigid tapping mode regardless of the
state of the CON signal. When the rigid tapping mode is
canceled the system enters spindle rotation control
mode or Cs contouring control mode according to the
state of the CON signal.
(2)Since the system can change to rigid tapping mode
directly from the Cs contouring contorl mode, use of the
Cs contouring control function enables the tapping tool
to be positioned before rigid tapping begins. Accurate
positioning is not guaranteed. If the rigid tapping cycle
executes gear change or output range changing,
positioning is valid.
868
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
(3)Although the system can change to rigid tapping mode
directly from Cs contouring contorl mode, positions
designated in Cs contouring control mode are not
preserved if riged tapping mode is canceled by G80.
When the system is changed to rigid tapping mode from
Cs contouring control mode, then returns to the Cs
contouring control mode, G00 or G28 must be issued to
position the tapping tool.
(4)In systems with the serial spindle Cs contouring control
function, the spindle motor is in a state called servo mode
when it is operating in rigid tapping mode. In servo mode,
it can accept jogging and manual handling feed. To
prevent this, nullify jogging and manual handling feed of
the Cs contouring axis in the PMC during rigid tapping.
(5)The servooff signal for the Cs contour control axis is
valid also for the spindle during rigid tapping. It should
be masked on the PMC side as required.
(6)When the multispindle control is also available and the
rigid tapping is performed on the 2nd spindle, the rigid
tapping can be specified to the 2nd spindle during the Cs
contouring control of the 1st spindle.
Position control loop

gain switching and serial
spindle parameters
In rigid tapping, the loop gain of the tapping axis is switched so that the
loop gains for position control of the tapping axis and spindle match each
other.
This switching processing is specified by parameter Nos. 5280, and 5281
to 5284. The contents of the processing vary with whether the spindle is
an analog or serial spindle, as described below.
When the spindle is an analog spindle, the loop gains of the spindle and
tapping axis are switched according to the values set in these
parameters.
When the spindle is a serial spindle, the loop gain of the tapping axis
is switched according to the values set in these parameters. The loop
gain of the spindle depends on the values set in the serial spindle
parameters and applied gear signals (CTH2, CTH1).
Accordingly, to perform rigid tapping with a serial spindle, the loop gain
for position control of the spindle must be set in the serial spindle
parameters used for rigid tapping.
When multispindle control is being used, rigid tapping can also be
performed for the second spindle. For the serial spindle used for rigid
tapping, set the parameters indicated below.
The parameters indicated below are the major serial spindle parameters
required for the setting and adjustment needed to use a serial spindle.
For details of the serial spindle parameters, refer to the FANUC AC
Spindle Motor series DESCRIPTIONS (B65152E) or FANUC AC
SPINDLE MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUAL (B65160E).
869
B63003EN1/02
4044
Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4045
Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
Set a proportional gain for the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
4052
Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode (gear 1, gear 2)
4053
Integral gain of the velocity loop in the servo mode(gear 3, gear 4)
[Unit of data]
Set an integral gain of the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as rigid
tapping mode).
4065
Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH) (CFPGH)
4066
Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH) (CFPGMH)
4067
Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM LOW) (CFPGML)
4068
Position gain in the servo mode (LOW) (CFPGL)
[Unit of data] 0.01 sec 1

Set a servo loop gain in a servo mode (such as rigid tapping mode).
CAUTION
1 Set a loop gain for spindle position control in rigid tapping
using a serial spindle. In these parameters, basically, set
the same values as those set in parameter Nos. 5280 and
5281 to 5284 (loop gains for position control of the tapping
axis).
Which serial spindle parameter (i.e., loop gain) is actually
used to operate the spindle depends on the serial spindle
clutch/gear selection signals CTH1 and CTH2 (G070#3, #2
for the first spindle, and G074#3, #2 for the second spindle).
Accordingly, which parameter is to be used must be
determined by considering the gear switching and PMC
software.
The table below indicates the relationship between the spindle gear
selection signals and selected gear numbers.
870
B63003EN1/02
9.11.11
Reference Item
CTH1
CTH2
Gear selected
Parameter No. to be used
HIGH
4065
MEDIUM HIGH
4066
MEDIUM LOW
4067
LOW
4068
4044
4052
4045
4053
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.13.2
RIGID TAPPING
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.8
RIGID TAPPING
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.13.2
RIGID TAPPING
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.7
RIGID TAPPING
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
9.3
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL
9.10
MULTISPINDLE
FANUC SERVO MOTOR

AMPLIFIER series
11.4
RIGID TAPPING
FANUC AC SPINDLE
MOTOR series
PARAMETER MANUAL
2.3
RIGID TAPPING
871
B63003EN1/02
9.12
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
General
This function enables the synchronous control of two spindles. It also

enables the control of the rotation phase of a spindle, allowing
nonstandard workpieces as well as rods to be held by either of the two
spindles.
Synchronousspindle
configuration
In spindle synchronous control, the spindle to which an S command is

issued is called the master spindle. A spindle which ignores any S
command that is issued for it, instead rotating synchronously with the
master spindle, is called the slave spindle.
The table below shows the synchronous spindle configuration.

Master spindle
Supplementary
description
Slave spindle
T series/M series
T series
(twopath control)
First serial spindle at

tool post 1

tool post 2
M series
(twopath control)

path 1
Second serial spindle at

path 1
For details of synchronousspindle connection, see the description of

serial spindles.
The following description relates to this CNC.

D Synchronous control of spindle phase is executed when the signal for
controlling the spindle phases in synchronization is entered in spindle
synchronization control mode (after output of the signal indicating
that the synchronous control of spindle speed has been completed).
The signal indicating that the synchronous control of spindle phase is
completed is output when the difference between the error pulses of
the two spindles does not exceed the number of pulses specified in
parameter No. 4810 of the NC function.
The positions of spindle phase synchronization can be specified in
spindle parameter No. 4034 on each of tool post 1 and tool post2.
When the two spindles are subject to spindlephase
synchronouscontrol (until the spindlephase synchronouscontrol
completion signal, FSPPH <F044#3>, turns to 1), they are not
synchronized with each other.
Do not specify spindlephase synchronous control while the two
spindles are holding a workpiece. Specifying this item causes phase
synchronous control to start automatically.
D PMC signal, SYCAL <F044#4> is provided to monitor a
synchronization errors between spindles for which spindle
synchronization control or synchronous control of spindle phase is in
effect. The synchronization error between the two spindles is always
monitored. The SYCAL signal is set to 1 when the error (the absolute
value of the error pulse) specified in parameter No. 4811 of tool post
1 is exceeded, and set to 0 when not exceeded.
872
B63003EN1/02
Constant surface speed control can be executed in synchronization

control even while a workpiece is being held with the two spindles.
However, if the speed is to change in excess of the specified time
constant, the speed changes within the extent specified by time
constant.
The maximum speed in synchronization control is determined by the
maximum speed of the spindle motor of master spindle (parameter No.
4020).
(Example) Maximum speed of the spindle motor of tool post 1: 6000 rpm
Maximum speed of the spindle motor of tool post 2: 4500 rpm
In the example above, a maximum spindle speed of 6,000 rpm is specified
for a spindle of tool post 1, although a spindlespeed command can
specify up to 12 bits, 4096. If 6,000 rpm is specified while synchronous
control is specified, an overspeed alarm is issued for a spindle of tool post
2. Therefore, do not specify a value of more than 4,500 rpm in this case.
Like the conventional spindle speed (S) command for which 4 or 5

digits are issued for the first spindle, the signal for specifying spindle
speed can be generated when spindle synchronization control or
synchronous control of spindle phase are in the process of being put
into effect. The SIND, SSIN SSGN, R01l to R12l, *SSTP, and SOR
signals are effective as usual.
However, in the usual mode of spindle rotation control, spindle speed
can be controlled by the PMC function when the following conditions
are satisfied: The SIND signal is set to 1 and the SSIN, SSGN, and
R01l to R12l signals are provided. When spindle synchronization
control is in the process of being put into effect, something other than
the R01l to R12l signals is required to control the spindle speed in
synchronization. The maximum spindle gear speed must be properly
set in parameters No. 3741, 3742, 3743 and 3744. When the value set
in the parameter corresponding to the selected gear is 0, the rotations
of the spindles are not synchronized even if a command is entered in
the R01I to R12I signals.
D
D
D
The S command for the master spindle and the PMC control signal for
spindle control become effective when issued before spindle
synchronization control or synchronous control of spindle phase are
put into effect. The S command issued in synchronization control
becomes effective for the first spindle immediately after
synchronization control is canceled.
The load may change due to cutting (or threading). When the load
changes in spindle synchronization control, the spindle speed may
change and the signal indicating that the synchronous control of
spindle speed is completed may go off temporarily.
Parameters No. 4800 #0 (for the master spindle) and #1 (for the slave
spindle) are used to set the direction of rotation of the first spindle and
second spindle, respectively.
The gear ratio of the spindle to the position coder must be set to
onetoone.
In spindle synchronization control , the compensation value for
spindle speed offset (parameter No. 3731) is disabled.
873
B63003EN1/02
Signal
A spindlephase synchronous control command is effective only in

synchronous spindle control mode. The specified phase can be
repeatedly changed under synchronous control.
See the manual of serial spindles.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
4800
#4
#3
#2
#1
ND2
#0
ND1

ND1 In controlling the spindle synchronization, the direction of the first
spindle (master spindle) motor rotation is:
0 : The direction indicated by the command sign
1 : The opposite direction to that indicated by the command sign
ND2 In controlling the spindle synchronization, the direction of the 2nd
spindle (slave spindle) motor rotation is:
0 : The direction indicated by the command sign
1 : The opposite direction to that indicated by the command sign
4810
Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the serial spindle
synchronization control mode

[Unit of data] Pulse
Set the difference in error pulses between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the serial spindle synchronization control mode.
When the difference in error pulse between two spindles is within the
value set in this parameter, the spindle phase synchronization completion
signal FSPPH <F044#3> becomes 1.
This parameter is used to check the difference in phase in synchronization
control and to confirm the completion of synchronization in the serial
spindle synchronization control mode.
4811
Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindle

Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in
the serial spindle synchronization control mode.
This parameter is used to output the interspindle phase error detection
signal SYCAL in the serial spindle synchronization control mode. The
SYCAL <F044#4> signal becomes 1 when a phase error exceeding the
value set in this parameter is found.
874
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
194
Note
SPINDLE COMMAND IN
SYNCHROMODE
Description
A contour control mode, spindle positioning

(Csaxis control) mode, or rigid tapping
mode was specified during the serial
spindle
synchronous control mode. Correct the program so that the serial spindle synchronous
control mode is released in advance.
NOTE
Signal SYCAL <F044#4> is used for monitoring a phase
shift in synchronous control. The processing performed
when a phase shift is detected depends on the
specifications determined by the machine tool builder.
Reference item
FANUC SERVO MOTOR

AMPLIFIER series
11.7
Spindle synchronization control
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR

series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B65160E)
2.5
Spindle synchronization control
875
B63003EN1/02
9.13
SPINDLE
ORIENTATION
General
This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can
be stopped in either of the following two ways.
The spindle is mechanically stopped by using stoppers.
The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the spindle control
unit.
Mechanical stop
To mechanically stop the spindle by using, for example, a stopper, rotate

the spindle at a constant low speed and drive a stopper or pin into the
spindle. The spindle can be rotated at a constant speed by applying either
of the following methods.
Spindle orientation signal (See 9.3, Spindle Control.)

Spindle output control by the PMC (See 15.4.)
Using the spindle

control unit
Some spindle control units can position the spindle motor by using
sensors and position coders. The CNC itself does not control positioning
by using these units.
Serial spindle orientation

by a position coder
In serial spindle orientation by a position coder, the stop position is

specified either by a parameter or by the PMC (spindle orientation
function with the stop position externally set).
Signal
Spindle orientation
signals with the stop
position externally set
SHA00 to SHA11 for the
first spindle
<G078, G079>
SHB00 to SHB11 for the
second spindle
<G080, G081>
SHC00 to SHC11 for the
third spindle
<G208, G209>
[Function] This command is used for specifying a stop position with an absolute
position within one rotation in the following equation:
876
B63003EN1/02
360
4096
(2i Pi)
i=0
where
Pi = 0 when SHAi = 0
Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1
Signal address
G078
#7
SHA07
#6
SHA06
#5
SHA05
#4
SHA04
G079
G080
SHB07
SHB06
SHB05
SHB04
G081
G208
SHC07
SHC06
SHC05
SHC04
G209
#3
SHA03
#2
SHA02
#1
SHA01
#0
SHA00
SHA11
SHA10
SHA09
SHA08
SHB03
SHB02
SHB01
SHB00
SHB11
SHB10
SHB09
SHB08
SHC03
SHC02
SHC01
SHC00
SHC11
SHC10
SHC09
SHC08
#3
OR2
#2
OR1
#1
#0
OR3
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3702
#4
[Data type] Bit

OR1 Whether the stopposition externalsetting type orientation function is
used by the first spindle motor
0 : Not used
1 : Used
used by the second spindle motor
0 : Not used
1 : Used
used by the third spindle motor
0 : Not used
1 : Used
877
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 To perform spindle orientation by using the spindle control
unit, the signals of the spindle control unit must be used.
To perform serial spindle orientation by using a position
coder (to perform serial spindle orientation with the stop
position set externally), the serial spindle control unit signals
must be used.
2 When the spindle orientation function of stop position
external setting type is used, the stop position parameters
in spindle orientation with a position coder (No. 4031 and
4204) are invalid.
Note
NOTE
Spindle orientation with the spindle positioning function
differs from that described in this section. For details, see
Section 9.8, Spindle Positioning.
Reference item
FANUC SERVO MOTOR a series

11.1
11.2
Position coder method spindle orientation

Magnetic sensor method spindle
orientation
FANUC AC SPINDLE
MOTOR a series
PARAMETER MANUAL (B65160E)
2.1
2.2
Position coder method spindle orientation

Magnetic sensor method spindle
orientation
878
B63003EN1/02
9.14
SPINDLE OUTPUT
SWITCHING
General
Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for low
speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle
motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable output
characteristics over a wide range.
Since spindle output switching is a function of the spindle control unit,
see also the manual for the spindle control unit being used.
This section describes the relationship between spindle output switching
and the spindle control function in the CNC.
Operation of
outputswitchable
spindle motor
To switch the spindle output characteristics, the windings are usually

switched using a relay. Prior to the completion of winding switching, the
spindle rotates free from drive.
Output switching changes the relationship between a speed command,
issued from the CNC to the spindle, and the output characteristics of the
spindle motor. However, the relationship between the speed command
and spindle motor speed is not changed.
Output switching timing
During actual machining, the spindle is usually controlled in the

following way.
(1) Constant spindle speed during cutting, such as milling
(2) Continuously changing spindle speed during cutting, such as in
constant surface speed control
(3) Controlling the position loop including the spindle motor during rigid
tapping, spindle positioning, Cs contour control, etc.
For applications such as those in (1), we recommend switching the output
characteristics for low speed and high speed by using the spindle motor
speed detection signal of the spindle control unit.
For applications such as those described in (2) and (3), the spindle shall
not rotate with no drive applied during cutting or positioning. It is
necessary for the output characteristics to be switched appropriately
before machining or for output switching to be masked by using a PMC
ladder sequence.
Output switching and

gear switching
Spindle output switching ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates

stable characteristics over a wide range, and eliminates the mechanical
spindle gear switching mechanism.
In creating a PMC ladder sequence for output switching, however, using
the gear switching of the CNCs spindle control function (see 9.3) may
facilitate programming.
Note the following points when using gear switching for CNC spindle
control for output switching with a machine tool having no mechanical
gear switching mechanism.
879
B63003EN1/02
When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O <F034 #0, #1>,
are used (for machining centers in which constant surface speed
control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set
to 0)
Set two gears, which are almost the same.
(Example: Value of parameter No. 3741 = value of parameter No.
3742 1, value of No. 3742 = Maximum spindle speed)
When parameter No. 3741 is equal to parameter No. 3742, the CNC
judges that one gear is used, and does not output the GR2O signal.
D The parameters related to gear switching points, SGT, bit 3 of
parameter No. 3705, and SGB, bit 2 of parameter No. 3761, parameter
Nos. 3761 and 3751 can be used.
D In usual spindle control, depending on the speed at switching points,
the speed specified by the spindle speed command may differ slightly
from the actual speed in the area where the maximum spindle speed
is set to the maximum speed "1. (This is because the spindle motor
speed, specified by the speed command, is calculated based on the
settings of parameter Nos. 3741 to 3744.)
This does not apply to rigid tapping. (Because the machine tool is
controlled using the feedback signal from the detector in the position
loop.)
D When gear selection input signals, GR1 and GR2 <G028 #1, #2>, are
used (for lathes or machining centers in which constant surface speed
control is provided or GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 1)
Parameter settings are read according to the input signal information.
Unlike the GR2O and GR1O signals, these signals do not require
special parameter settings.
Example) When parameter Nos. 3741 and 3742 are set to the maximum
spindle speed.
Create a PMC sequence that specifies the following.
For gear 1, set GR1 and GR2 to 0.
For gear 2, set GR2 to 0 and set GR1 to 1.
The PMC must determine the switching timing on the basis of some
information.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
9.3
9.11
Spindle control
Rigid tapping
FANUC SERVO MOTOR

AMPLIFIER a series
11.9
Output switching control
FANUC AC SPINDLE
MOTOR a series
PARAMETER MANUAL (B65160E)
2.7
Output switching control
880
B63003EN1/02
9.15
THREESPINDLE
SERIAL OUTPUT
General
Serial spindle can be connected three in this threespindle serial control.

The third serial spindle operates as an ordinary third analog spindle. For
the third as well as the first and second serial spindles, all the functions
supported by the serial spindle control unit (spindle orientation, spindle
output switching, and spindle switching) can be used.
When the third spindle orientation function is used, stopposition
externalsetting type orientation can also be performed for the third
spindle.
This section provides information related to the third serial spindle added
by the threespindle serial output function. The spindle configuration,
supported functions, and related signal addresses, parameters, alarms,
and diagnosis screens are explained.
For details of the spindle control method and spindlerelated functions,
refer to the description of each function.
The relationships between the spindle control interfaces and spindle
configuration are shown below. (This table relates to a table that appears
in Section 9.2.)
f
f
Spindle serial
Spindle
output
analog output
Threespindle
serial output
First spindle
Second spindle
Third spindle

The PC can be used.
Second serial spindle Analog spindle

The PC can be
The PC cannot be
used(*).
used.

The PC can be used.

The PC can be
used(*).
Analog spindle
The PC can be used.
(*1)

The PC can be used.
Second serial spindle Third serial spindle

The PC can be
The PC cannot be
used(*).
used.
Spindle function (S code output)

! Controlled by the PMC via an external interface.
D
D
PC = Position coder
(*) : The multispindle function is required to enable the use of the
position coder for the second spindle.
For an explanation of how to control the speed of the second and third
spindles, see Sections 15.4 and 9.10.
881
B63003EN1/02
The serial spindles are connected as follows:
JA7B
SPDL1/JA41
Mother board
JA7A
JA7B
Spindle control
unit for the first
serial spindle
First
spindle
Spindle control
unit for the second
serial spindle
Second
spindle
JA7B
882
Spindle control
unit for the third
serial spindle
Third
spindle
B63003EN1/02
The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions.
(This table relates to a table that appears in Section 9.2.)
f f f
f f f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f

f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
= Available
Serial spindle
Spindle
First
spindle
Function
Second
spindle
Thread cutting/feed per rotation

(synchronous feed)
(*3)
(*3)
Spindle speed fluctuation detection
(*3)
Actual spindle speed output (T series)
(*3)
Polygon turning (T series)

(using the servo motor axis and
spindle)
(*3)
Polygon turning between spindles

(T series)
(using two spindles)
= Unavailable
Analog spindle
Third
spindle
: Master
(*4)
: Slave
(*4)
: First
spindle
: Second
spindle
: Third
spindle
(*5)
(*5)
(*5)
First spindle
(with no serial
SP option)
Third spindle
(with serial
SP option)
Spindle positioning (T series)

Cs contour control
Multispindle (*1)
Spindle output control using PMC

Rigid tapping
Spindle synchronous control
: Master
(*6)
: Slave
(*6)
Simple spindle synchronization
: Master
(*7)
: Slave
(*7)
Motor speed detection function
Abnormal load detection function

Functions
provided by
spindle control unit(*3)
Spindle orientation
(*8)
(*8)
Spindle output
switching
Spindle switching
883
(*8)
: Third axis
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The multispindle function can control the speed of the
three spindles and switch the feedback signal between two
position coders. It can operate without the second or third
spindle.
When the multispindle function is used with the M series,
the constant surface speed control option must be set, or
the spindle gear selection method must be set to type T with
GTT (bit 4 of parameter No. 3706).
2 These functions are provided by the spindle control unit.
They cannot be used unless supported by the spindle
control unit.
3 The multispindle function is required. The function cannot
be applied to the first and second spindles simultaneously.
4 When a twopath lathe is used, spindle polygon turning
cannot be performed using the spindle on tool post 1 and
the spindle on tool post 2.
5 The first, second, or third spindle can be selected and used
for rigid tapping. In this case, the multispindle function is
required. If the multispindle function is not available, rigid
tapping can be performed using the first spindle only.
6 For a twopath lathe application, the first spindle on tool
post 1 is the master, while the first spindle on tool post 2 is
the slave. The second spindle of either tool post cannot be
used in spindle synchronization.
7 For a twopath lathe application, simple spindle
synchronous control cannot be applied to the spindle on tool
post 1 and the spindle on tool post 2.
8 The function used to change the spindle orientation stop
position (stopposition externalsetting type spindle
orientation function) can be used by writing G signal
addresses from the PMC.
Signal
Spindle control unit

signals for the third
serial spindle <G0204 to
G0207> (input), <F0168
to F0171> (output) for
the third serial spindle
Spindle orientation stop

position external
command for the third
spindle SHC00 to SHC11
<G0208, G0209>
These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output
signals for the serial spindle control unit.
For details of the signals belonging to these addresses, refer to the
following manuals:
FANUC SERVO MOTOR AMPLIFIER Series Descriptions
(B65162E)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR Series Descriptions (B65152E)
FANUC SERVO MOTOR Series Maintenance Manual (B65165E)
For details, see Section 9.13.
884
B63003EN1/02

for the third spindle
DSP3 <Y(n + 1) #2> (n =
setting in parameter No.
1891)
See Section 2.11 for details.

for the third spindle
ABTSP3 <F0090#3>
See Section 2.10 for details.
Signal address
Spindle control unit

signals for the third
serial spindle
G0204
G0205
G0206
#7
#6
MRDYC ORCMC
RCHC
RSLC
RCHHGC MFNHGC
#5
SFRC
#4
SRVC
#3
CTH1C
#2
CTH2C
#1
TLMHC
#0
TLMLC
INTGC
SOCNC
MCFNC
SPSLC
*ESPC
ARSTC
INCMDC
OVRIDC
DEFMDC
NRROC
ROTAC
INDXC
MPOFC
SLVC
MORCMC
G0207
F0168
#7
ORARC
#6
TLMC
F0169
MORA2C MORA1C
#5
LDT2C
#4
LDT1C
#3
SARC
#2
SDTC
#1
SSTC
#0
ALMC
PORA2C
SLVSC
RCFNC
RCHPC
CFINC
CHPC
F0170
INCSTC PC1DEC
F0171
Spindle orientation stop

position external
command for the third
serial spindle
G0208
#7
SHC07
#6
SHC06
#5
SHC05
#4
SHC04
G0209

for the third serial
spindle
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
SHC03
#2
SHC02
#1
SHC01
#0
SHC00
SHC11
SHC10
SHC09
SHC08
#3
#2
DSP3
#1
#0
Y (n+1)
NOTE
n above is the value set in parameter No. 1891.

for the third serial
spindle
#7
#6
#5
F0090
885
#4
#3
ABTSP3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Connection of serial
#7
#6
3701
#5
SS3
#4
SS2
#3
#2
#1
ISI
#0
NOTE

ISI Specifies whether to use the first and second spindle interfaces.
0 : Use these interfaces.
1 : Do not use these interfaces.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the spindle serial output option
is provided.
This bit is used when the CNC is started with serial interface
control for the first and second serial spindles temporarily
disabled to enable startup adjustment of the CNC.
This bit should normally be set to 0.
Similarly, when the serial interface for the third serial spindle
is disabled to enable CNC startup adjustment, set SS3, bit
5 of parameter No. 3701, to 0. (ISI cannot disable the serial
interface for the third serial spindle.)
SS2 Specifies whether to use the second serial spindle in serial spindle control.
0 : Do not use the second serial spindle.
1 : Use the second serial spindle.
NOTE
This bit is valid when the spindle serial output option is
provided, and ISI, bit 1 of parameter No. 3701 is set to 0.
SS3 Specifies whether to use the third serial spindle in serial spindle control.
0 : Do not use the third serial spindle.
1 : Use the third serial spindle.
NOTE
This bit is valid when the spindle serial output and
threespindle serial output options are provided.
886
B63003EN1/02
f
f
Parameter setting
Serial spindles to be used

sed
SS3
SS2
First serial spindle only
First and second serial spindles
First, second, and third spindles
Parameters of serial
No. 4000 4351: S1 For 1st serieal spindle

S2 For 2nd serial spindle
S3 For 3rd serial spindle
The above parameters are on the CNC, but actually they are used for the
spindle control unit of serial spindle.
For details of these parameters, refer to the following manual:
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR a series PARAMETER MANUAL
(B65160E)
FANUC SERVO MOTOR series Maintenance Manual (B65165E).
Stopposition
externalsetting type
spindle orientation
#7
#6
#5
3702
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OR3
NOTE

OR3 Specifies whether to use the stopposition externalsetting type spindle
orientation function for the third spindle.
0 : Do not use the function.
1 : Use the function.
NOTE
When the stopposition externalsetting type spindle
orientation function is used, the parameters for setting the
spindle orientation stop position using a position coder
(parameter Nos. 4031 and 4204) are ignored.
887
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Contents
749
SSPINDLE LSI ERROR
A communication error occurred for the serial spindle. The cause may
be the disconnection of an optical cable or the interruption of the power
to the spindle amplifier.
(Note) Unlike alarm No. 750, this alarm occurs when a serial communication alarm is detected after the spindle amplifier is normally activated. The spindle for which this error occurred can be determined from
diagnosis No. 408 (the first or second spindle) and diagnosis No. 438
(the third spindle).
750
SPINDLE SERIAL LINK ERROR
This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not ready for
starting correctly when the power is turned on in the system with the serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1) Noise, An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control
units power is OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on under alarm conditions other
than SU01 or AL24 which are shown on the LED display of the
spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform
startup again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination of hardware)
4) The second spindle (when SS2, bit 4 of parameter No. 3701, is 1)
or the third spindle (when SS3, bit 5 of parameter No. 3701, is 1) is
in one of the above conditions 1) to 3).
This alarm does not occur after the system including the spindle control unit is activated.
See diagnostic display No. 409 (the first or second spindle) or No. 439
(the third spindle) for details.
771
SPINDLE3
(ALXX)
ALARM
DETECT This alarm indicates in the NC that an alarm is generated in the third
spindle unit of the system with the third serial spindle. The alarm is displayed in form ALXX (XX is a number). Refer to (11) Alarms displayed on third spindle servo unit .The alarm number XX is the number indicated on the third spindle amplifier. The CNC holds this number
and displays on the screen.
772
SPINDLE3
ERROR
MODE
CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does not properly terminate a
mode change. The modes include rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control unit does not respond correctly to the mode change command issued by the NC.
774
SPINDLE3 ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load on the first spindle motor was detected.
ALM
The alarm can be released by a reset.
888
B63003EN1/02
Diagnosis screen
Information relating to
third serial spindle
control
#7
#6
#5
#4
430
#3
SS3
#2
SSR
#1
#0
SIC
SIC 0 : The module required for the threespindle serial output function is not
installed.
1 : The module required for the threespindle serial output function is
installed.
SSR 0 : The options required for the threespindle serial output function are
not installed.
1 : The options required for the threespindle serial output function are
installed.
SS3 0 : The third serial spindle is not used in the threespindle serial output
function.
1 : The third serial spindle is used in the threespindle serial output
function.
431
Alarm condition for the serial spindle unit for the third spindle (AL??)
Communication error for

the spindle serial output
interface of the third
serial spindle
438
#7
SSA
#6
#5
SCA
#4
CME
#3
CER
#2
SNE
#1
FRE
#0
CRE
CRE 1 : CRC error (warning)

FRE 1 : Framing error (warning)
SNE 1 : Mismatch between sending and receiving sections
CER 1 : Abnormal reception
CME 1 : No answer during auto scanning
SCA 1 : Communication alarm in the spindle amplifier
SSA 1 : System alarm in the spindle amplifier
(The above are errors related to the third serial spindle. They are reflected
in spindle alarm 749. They are usually caused by noise, disconnection,
or instantaneous power interruption.
889
B63003EN1/02
Information related to the

activation of the spindle
serial output interface for
the third serial spindle
#7
#6
#5
439
#4
#3
SPE
#2
#1
S3E
#0
SHE
SHE 1 : Abnormal operation in serial spindle communication module on the

mother board of the CNC
S3E 1 : Abnormal operation of the third spindle during activation
SPE 1 : Serial spindle parameter does not satisfy activation conditions
(The above are errors related to the third serial spindle. They are reflected
in spindle alarm 750.)
Load and speed meter

readings for the third
serial spindle
440
Third serial spindle: Load meter reading (%)
441
Third serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm)
To display the load and speed meter readings, the following parameters
must be specified:
Maximum motor speed: Set for each axis in parameter Nos. 4020 (main)
and 4196 (sub)
Load meter reading at maximum output: Set for each axis in parameter
Nos. 4127 (main) and 4276 (sub)
NOTE
The spindle switch function is used for main/sub switching.
Select main when the spindle switch function is not being
used.
890
B63003EN1/02
9.16
SIMPLE SPINDLE
SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL
General
In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the second spindle can be

controlled as a slave axis of the first spindle.
Thus, control based on the Cs contour axis control function, rigid tapping
function, and spindle positioning function (T series) can be exercised over
the second spindle, under the control of the first spindle.
Note, however, that unlike spindle synchronous control, simple spindle
synchronous control does not guarantee synchronization between the first
and second spindles. (For details of spindle synchronous control, see
Section 9.12.)
To realize simple spindle synchronous control, two serial spindle systems
suitable for twospindle connection are required. Moreover, both
spindles must be fitted with spindlerelated hardware such as detectors
for the functions used with simple spindle synchronous control (Cs
contour axis control function, rigid tapping function, and spindle
positioning function (T series)).
Simple spindle synchronous control mode is set by applying simple
spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC from the PMC.
During simple spindle synchronous control, the same commands as those
that are usually used for the first spindle are used in spindle mode, Cs
contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle positioning
(T series).
When the parking function is used, one spindle can be stopped in each of
the control modes described below. For details, see the description of the
parking function.
891
Operation in each
control mode
B63003EN1/02
1. Spindle mode (ordinary spindle control)

The second spindle rotates upon the issue of the same command as that
used for the first spindle.
The command does not specify the speed of the spindle, instead
specifying the ratio of the spindle motor speed to the maximum speed.
So, if the spindle unit configuration (maximum motor speed,
motorspindle gear ratio, and so forth) of the first spindle is the same
as that of the second spindle, both spindles will rotate at about the same
speed. (The synchronization of rotation cannot be not guaranteed. If
the configurations of the two spindles differ, the speed of one spindle
will differ from that of the other.) For details of spindle control, see
Section 9.3.
2. Cs contour control (contour axis control based on the spindle motor)
When the Cs contour axis control option is selected, contour control
can also be applied to the second spindle. Note, however, that
independent control is not possible, the motion of the second spindle
being controlled by the first spindle. The display of the move
command address and position data is limited to the first spindle.
Reference position return is also performed in the same way as usual.
However, both spindles are checked for the completion of reference
position return, so that the reference position return signal for the Cs
contour control axis is turned on only after reference position return
has been completed by both spindles.
While simple spindle synchronous control is applied, the user can
switch between spindle mode and Cs contour control mode. For
details of Cs contour control, see Section 9.9.
3. Rigid tapping
When the rigid tapping option is selected, the second spindle supports
rigid tapping under the control of a rigid tapping command for the first
spindle. (Rigid tapping for the second spindle cannot be performed
independently of the first spindle.)
During diagnosis, spindle data such as any positional deviation is
displayed for the first spindle.
For details of rigid tapping, see Section 9.11.
4. Spindle positioning (T series)
When the spindle positioning option is selected, the spindle
positioning function for the second spindle is enabled under the
control of a spindle positioning command for the first spindle. (The
spindle positioning function for the second spindle cannot be used
independently of the first spindle.)
In the same way as with Cs contour axis control, the display of
command address and position data is limited to the first spindle.
Operations such as orientation are performed in the same way as usual.
However, both spindles are checked for the completion of orientation,
and the spindle positioning sequence is processed only after the
completion of positioning by both spindles has been confirmed.
For details of spindle positioning, see Section 9.8.
892
B63003EN1/02
Parking function
In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the parking function stops

the motion of the first or second spindle, regardless of the mode (spindle
mode, spindle positioning mode, Cs contour axis control mode, or rigid
tapping mode) of the spindle.
In the parking state, the spindle is placed in the following state, depending
on its mode:
In spindle mode: Same state as when S0 is specified
In other modes: Zero distribution state
Spindle orientation in spindle positioning mode and reference position
return in Cs contour axis control mode are also disabled for a spindle that
has been placed in the parking state.
The parking function stops only spindle motion. So, the parking function
can be used to stop only one spindle to enable machining to continue on
the other spindle when both spindles are being controlled. The parking
function can also be used to place the first spindle in the parking state so
that Cs contour axis control, spindle positioning, or rigid tapping can be
performed only on the second spindle.
WARNING
When using parking signal PK7 or PK8 for spindle
synchronous control (T series) while both simple spindle
synchronous control and spindle synchronous control (T
series) are being used, set the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter
No. 4800) to 1. This sets parking signals PKESS1 and
PKESS2, used for simple spindle synchronous control, to
#6 and #7 of G031.
CAUTION
1 If the parking function is activated in a mode featuring a
position loop, such as Cs contour axis control mode, spindle
positioning mode, and rigid tapping mode, the actual
machine position of the spindle placed in the parking state
will differ from the coordinates recognized by the CNC.
This error is causes by parking, so that an excess error
alarm is not issued.
2 The parking signal becomes active immediately upon
simple spindle synchronous control mode being set.
However, if the parking signal is applied during reference
position return in Cs contour axis control mode or during
spindle orientation in spindle positioning mode, reference
position return or spindle orientation continues until the
completion of the operation; the parking state is set once the
reference position has been established.
3 While both spindles are placed in the parking state, never
specify reference position return in Cs contour axis control
mode, or spindle orientation in spindle positioning mode.
When both spindles are in the parking state, reference
position is not established.
893
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 When the parking function is activated for a spindle in a
mode featuring a position loop, such as Cs contour axis
control mode, spindle positioning mode, and rigid tapping
mode, the spindle is stopped at the point where the parking
function is activated. If the spindle is shifted from the stop
position because of the application of an external force, for
example, an excess error alarm is issued. (In simple spindle
synchronous control mode, both spindles are checked for
any positional error, regardless of whether the parking
function is being used.)
2 If reference position return is specified in Cs contour axis
control mode, or if spindle orientation is specified in spindle
positioning mode when one spindle is placed in the parking
state, the reference position return completion signal is
turned on when the reference position is established for the
other spindle.
PMC signal control
Even for simple spindle synchronous control, those functions (including

the spindle orientation function) and input/output signals that are to be
directly specified for spindle control from the PMC are controlled
independently for the first and second spindles.
Specifically, control over the signals in the following areas is exercised
independently for the first and second spindles, regardless of whether
simple spindle synchronous control mode is enabled.
First spindle: (DGN DI>G0070 to G0073, DO>F0045 to F0048)
Second spindle: (DGN DI>G0074 to G0077, DO>F0049 to F0052)
When using the simple spindle synchronous control function, use the
signals for the second spindle (DGN DI>G0074 to G0077, DO>F0049
to F0052) as required in addition to simple spindle synchronous control
signal ESRSYC.
Basically, no conventional PMC signal addresses and sequences need to
be modified for simple spindle synchronous control, except for the
addition of PMC control over the second spindle.
Simple spindle synchronous control can be turned on and off by turning
simple spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC on and off.
NOTE
In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the states of
the first and second spindles are checked. So, if simple
spindle synchronous control is specified in Cs contour axis
control mode before the second spindle is activated, for
example, the VRADY OFF alarm may be issued. Careful
attention should also be paid to PMC control over the
second spindle.
894
B63003EN1/02
Simple spindle
synchronization and
phase error monitor
signal
Simple spindle synchronous control does not guarantee synchronous

spindle operation. However, in a control mode featuring a position loop,
such as Cs contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle
positioning mode, the synchronization of both spindles can be guaranteed
by matching the position gain of one spindle to that of the other.
For this purpose, phase error monitor signal SYCAL is provided to
monitor both spindles for phase error. The error between the two spindles
is constantly monitored. If an error that exceeds the value set in parameter
No. 4811 is detected, the signal is set to 1. If a detected error does not
exceed the value set in parameter No. 4811, the signal is set to 0.
In spindle mode, however, this signal SYCAL is ignored, being set to 0
at all times.
Note that even if phase error monitor signal SYCAL is output, no CNC
alarm is issued.
This signal is designed to be used by the PMC to monitor the machine
synchronization state. Its usage varies depending on the machine tool
builder. The use of this signal is not mandatory.
NOTE
During
simple
spindle
synchronous
control,
synchronization between the first and second spindles is
not guaranteed in spindle mode. However, in Cs contour
axis control mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle
positioning mode, the synchronization of the spindles can
be guaranteed by matching the position gain of one spindle
with that of the other.
Note that spindle synchronization cannot be guaranteed if
either spindle is undergoing reference position return in Cs
contour axis control mode or orientation in spindle
positioning mode, or if it is using a function (such as spindle
orientation) that is specified directly from the PMC.
895
Relationship between
simple spindle
synchronous control and
spindle synchronous
control
B63003EN1/02
When the spindle synchronous control option is selected, ensure that

simple spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC is applied when
synchronous control is not exercised.
Also, ensure that spindle synchronous control signal SRSYC is not
applied during simple spindle synchronous control.
If the spindle synchronous control signal and simple spindle synchronous
control signal are applied at the same time, the current mode remains set,
and the NC issues alarm PS194 as a warning.
This alarm returns the value of the signal (SRSYC or ESRSYC) applied
later to 0, and remains on until reset.
In a mode other than spindle synchronous control mode, simple spindle
synchronous control signal ESRSYC can be issued at any time. However,
the response of the second spindle varies according to the first spindle
state existing when ESRSYC is applied.
No particular restrictions are imposed on the timing at which the simple
spindle synchronous control signal is set to 0. When simple spindle
synchronous control signal ESRSYC is set to 0, the second spindle is
immediately initialized to spindle mode, regardless of its previous mode.
The mode of the first spindle remains as is.
The table below summarizes the changes in the first spindle and second
spindle states depending on the transition of simple spindle synchronous
control signal ESRSYC and the state of spindle synchronous control
signal SRSYC.
Transition of simple spindle

synchronous control signal
ESRSYC
0 1
ESRSYC
1 0
State change of first spindle
SP SP
(Remains
as is)
CT CT
(Remains as
is)
(Note 1)
SV SV
(Remains as
is) (Note 2)
SP SP
(Remains
as is)
CT CT
(Remains
as is)
SV SV
(Remains
as is)
State change of second

spindle
SP SP
(Note 3)
CT CT
(Note 1)
SV SV
(Note 2)
SP SP
(Note 4)
CT CT
(Note 4)
SV SV
(Note 4)
When the spindle synchronous control option is selected
SRSYC 1 (during spindle synchronous

control)
SRSYC 1 (during spindle synchronous

control)
Alarm PS194 is issued.
Alarm PS194 is released by a reset.
SRSYC 0 (not during spindle synchronous SRSYC 0 (not during spindle synchronous
control)
control)
The same changes as those indicated
above occur.
The same changes as those indicated

above occur.
Legend
SP : Spindle mode CT: Cs contour axis control mode
SV : Rigid tapping mode, or spindle positioning mode (T series only)
896
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The second spindle is initialized to Cs contour axis control
mode. At this time, the position of the second spindle will
be undefined, so that reference position return must be
performed for the first and second spindles. In this case, the
reference position return command that is usually used can
be applied. (See Section 9.9.)
2 While the first spindle is in rigid tapping mode or spindle
positioning mode, the input of simple spindle synchronous
control signal ESRSYC is masked in the NC to prevent the
setting of simple spindle synchronous control mode. When
the first spindle is initialized to spindle mode or Cs contour
axis control mode after the cancellation of rigid tapping
mode or Cs contour axis control mode, the second spindle
enters simple spindle synchronous control mode, and is
initialized together with the first spindle. After simple spindle
synchronous control mode has been set, initialization to
rigid tapping mode or spindle positioning mode, command
specification, and cancellation are performed for both the
first and second spindles.
3 The mode is not changed. The second spindle, however,
is initialized to spindle mode. After being initialized to
spindle mode, the second spindle operates according to
commands issued for the second spindle, such that the
feedrate may change.
4 The second spindle is immediately initialized to spindle
mode, regardless of its previous mode. The state of the first
spindle, however, remains as is.
Spindle rotation
direction
In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the same output and move
commands are issued to both the first and second spindles.
When one spindle is to rotate in the opposite direction to that of the other
spindle, the direction of rotation can be reversed by using a PMC signal
(SFR or SRV signal) or serial spindle parameter according to the currently
set mode.
Error monitoring and

alarm display
When simple spindle synchronous control is exercised in a mode other

than spindle mode, feedback information relating to the first and second
spindles is monitored for positional deviation. That is, an inposition
check is made, and an excess error check is made upon stop and move.
The usually specified parameter is used for both spindles.
Moreover, upon the issue of an alarm to indicate the occurrence of an
error, no distinction is made between the first and second spindles, the
alarm being issued as a first spindle alarm.
897
Positional deviation
display
B63003EN1/02
During simple spindle synchronous control, indications such as the

positional deviation of the first spindle are output in the usual way. For
the second spindle, however, only the positional deviation of the second
spindle is indicated in diagnostic data No. 415.
The positional deviation of the first spindle is indicated in diagnostic data
No. 414.
The absolute phase deviation between the first and second spindles is
indicated as a synchronization error in diagnostic data No. 414.
Signal
Simple spindle
synchronous control
signal
ESRSYC<G064#6>
[Function] This signal specifies switching between simple spindle synchronous
control mode and ordinary spindle synchronous control mode when
simple spindle synchronous control is applied.
Enters simple spindle synchronous control mode.
First spindle parking

signal
PKESS1<G122#6>
<G031#6>
[Function] This signal activates the parking function for the first spindle when simple
spindle synchronous control is applied.
Activates the parking function for the first spindle placed under simple
spindle synchronous control.
When the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 4800) is set to 1, #6 of G031
functions as this signal.
Second spindle parking

signal
PKESS2<G122#7>
<G031#7>
[Function] This signal activates the parking function for the second spindle when
simple spindle synchronous control is applied.
898
B63003EN1/02
Activates the parking function for the second spindle placed under
simple spindle synchronous control.
When the SPK bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 4800) is set to 1, #7 of G031
functions as this signal.
Phase error monitor

signal
SYCAL<F044#4>
[Function] This signal monitors the synchronization error between the two spindles
when simple spindle synchronous control is applied.
When the synchronization error between the two spindles is equal to
or greater than the value set in parameter No. 4811
When the synchronization error between the two spindles is less than
the value set in parameter No. 4811
Phase error monitor signal SYCAL is not a latch signal, instead being
switched between 0 and 1 by constantly monitoring whether the position
error between the two spindles is within the value set in parameter No.
4811.
In addition to the above signals, the following spindle control unit signals
for the serial spindles must be controlled so that the second spindle
functions in the same way as the first:
<G0070 to G0073> (input), <F0045 to F0048> For the first serial
spindle
<G0074 to G0077> (input), <F0049 to F0052> For the second serial
spindle
For details of the signals at these addresses, see Section 9.2. Also, refer
to the following manuals:
FANUC SERVO Motor Amplifier series Descriptions (B65162E)
FANUC AC Spindle Motor series Descriptions (B65152E)
FANUC SERVO MOTOR series Maintenance Manual (B65165E)
Signal address
G031
#7
#6
PKESS2 PKESS1
G064
ESRSYC
G122
PKESS2 PKESS1
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#5
#4
SYCAL
#3
#2
#1
#0
F044
899
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3701
#4
SS2
#3
#2
#1
#0

NOTE
SS2 Under serial spindle control, the second serial spindle is:
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
NOTE
1. This parameter is enabled when the spindle serial output
option is selected, and bit 1 (ISI) of parameter No. 3701 is
set to 0.
2. If the spindle synchronous control option is selected, this
parameter is automatically set at poweron. Once this
parameter is set, the following is possible:
1 Confirmation of connection with, and communication
with the second serial spindle amplifier
2 Control of the second spindle when asynchronous
control is used (SIND2)
Before the simple spindle synchronous control function can
be used, two serial spindles must be connected. This
means that the user must set this parameter beforehand; it
is not set automatically.
When this parameter is set, the serial spindle parameter for
the second spindle must also be set.
4800
#7
SPK
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

NOTE
To put this parameter setting in effect, switch the power off
then back on again.
SPK Specifies what is to be used as the parking signal for spindle simple
synchronization control.
0 : PKESS1 <G122#6> (first spindle) and PKESS2 <G122#7> (second
spindle)
1 : PKESS1 <G031#6> (first spindle) and PKESS2 <G031#7> (second
spindle)
900
B63003EN1/02
4811
Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindle

Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in
the serial spindle synchronization control mode.
NOTE
This parameter is used to output the interspindle phase
error detection signal SYCAL in the serial spindle
synchronization control mode. The SYCAL signal becomes
high when a phase error exceeding the value set in this
parameter is found.
When specifying this parameter to enable error pulse
detection during simple spindle synchronous control, set
this parameter as required, noting the mode of the spindle.
(In spindle mode, this parameter cannot be used. This
parameter can be specified only in Cs contour axis control
mode, rigid tapping mode, and spindle positioning mode,
but note that the detection unit per pulse differs.)
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Contents
194
SPINDLE COMMAND IN
SYNCHROMODE
The Cs contour axis control mode,

spindle positioning mode, rigid tapping
mode, or simple spindle synchronous
control is specified in spindle synchronous control mode. Modify the program to cancel spindle synchronous
control mode beforehand. Alternatively, spindle synchronous control can be
specified in simple spindle synchronous control mode. Modify the program to cancel simple spindle synchronous control mode before specifying spindle synchronous control.
901
B63003EN1/02
Diagnosis screen
Positional deviation
display while spindle
synchronous control is
applied
414
Master spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simple

spindle synchronous control is applied
415
Slave spindle motion error while spindle synchronous control or simple

spindle synchronous control is applied
416
Absolute value of synchronization error while spindle synchronous control or

simple spindle synchronous control is applied
The display units for diagnostic data 414 through 416 are pulses; in
spindle synchronous control mode, one pulse corresponds to an error of
360/4096 (degrees).
In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the detection unit per pulse
depends on whether Cs contour axis control mode, rigid tapping mode,
or spindle positioning mode is set, and also on the type and mounting of
the detector.
902
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
10
TOOL FUNCTIONS
903
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
10.1
TOOL FUNCTION
General
(M series)
Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to
an 8-digit numeral after address T.
(T series)
Selection of tools and offset amounts can be done by commanding tool
numbers and offset numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address
T. The offset number is specified with the last one or two digits of the T
code. The tool number is specified with the remaining digits after
excluding the one or two digits used to specify the offset number.
When the last one digit is used to specify the offset number:
(Parameter LD1 (No. 5002#0)=1)
fffffff f
Offset number
Tool number
When the last two digits are used to specify the offset number:
(Parameter LD1 (No. 5002#0)=0)
ffffff ff
Offset number
Tool number
When a T code is specified, the code signal and strobe signal corresponding to the specified tool number are issued. The machine selects a tool
according to the issued signals. The code signal is held until another T
code is specified.
In a block, no more than one T code can be specified. The maximum
number of digits that can follow T can be specified in parameter 3032.
If this number is exceeded, an alarm occurs.
Signal
See Section 8.1.
Parameter
3032
Allowable number of digits for the T code
[Data type] Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code.
904
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
5002
#1
LGN
#0
LD1
[Data type] Bit

LD1 Offset number of tool offset (Wear offset number when option of tool
geometry/wear compensation is selected)
0 : Specified using the lower two digits of a T code
1 : Specified using the lower one digit of a T code
LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset (When the option of tool
geometry/wear compensation is selected, it is effective.)
0 : Is the same as wear offset number
1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
#7
#6
#5
#4
5006
#3
#2
#1
TGC
#0
[Data type] Bit

TGC When a T code is specified in a block containing G50, G04, or G10:
0 : No alarm occurs.
1 : P/S alarm No. 254 occurs.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
Description
030
ILLEGAL OFFSET NUM- The offset number in T function speciBER

fied for tool offset is too large.
Modify the program.
(T series)
043
ILLEGAL TCODE COM- In a system using the DRILLMATE

MAND
with an ATC, a T code was not specified
together with the M06 code in a block.
(M series) Alternatively, the T code was out of
range.
245
TCODE NOT ALOWED One of the G codes, G50, G10, and

IN THIS BLOCK
G04, which cannot be specified in the
(T series) same block as a T code, was specified
with a T code.
905
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
When a move command and a tool function are specified in
the same block, the commands are executed in one of the
following two ways:
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool
function commands.
(ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of
move command execution.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence
program of PMC.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.10.1
TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.10.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.10.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.10.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.10.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.10.1
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
AUXILIARY FUNCTION
906
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
10.2
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/
TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY
General
(M series)
Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values
and tool wear compensation values (Fig. 10.2 (a)).
The geometry compensation and wear compensation can be unified to the
tool compensation.
Standard position
Standard position
Tool compensation
value
Geometry
compensation
value
Wear
Compensation
value
(a) Geometry and wear compensation are discriminated
(b) Geometry and were compensation are not discriminated
Fig. 10.2(a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the
corresponding code is specified after address H or D in a program.
The value is used for tool length compensation, cutter compensation, or
the tool offset.
Range of tool
compensation value
Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
Increment
system
Tool compensation
number
Tool compensation
memory
Tool compensation
(Geometry compensation)
Tool wear compensation
Metric input
Inch input
Metric input
Inch input
IS-B
" 999.999mm
" 99.9999inch
" 99.999mm
" 9.9999 inch
IS-C
" 999.9999mm " 99.99999inch " 99.9999mm " 9.99999inch
The memory can hold 32, 64, 99, 200, 400, 499 or 999 sets of tool
compensation values.
One of the tool compensation memory A/B/C can be selected according
to the configuration of offset amount.
(1) Tool compensation memory A
There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and
wear compensation memory in tool compensation memory A.
Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset together is set
as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter
compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).
907
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
(2) Tool compensation memory B

Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is
prepared separately in tool compensation memory B. Geometry
compensation and wear compensation can thus be set separately.
There is no difference between cutter compensation (D code) and tool
length compensation (H code).
(3) Tool compensation memory C
Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is prepared separately in tool compensation memory C. Geometry compensation and wear compensation can thus be set separately. Separate
memories are prepared for cutter compensation (for D code) and for
tool length compensation (for H code).
The above description is summarized as follows:

Tool compensation
memory
Compensation amount
Tool compensation amount

(Geometry compensation value + Wear compensation value)
Geometry compensation value
Wear compensation value
Geometry compensation value for H code

Geometry compensation value for D code
Wear compensation value for H code

Wear compensation value for D code
(T series)
Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values

and tool wear compensation values (Fig. 10.2 (b)).
Tool compensation can be specified without differentiating compensation
for tool geometry from that for tool wear (Fig. 10.2 (c)).
Point on the program
Imaginary tool
X axis
geometry
offset
value
X axis
wear
offset
value
Z axis
wear
offset
value
Offset
value on
X axis
Actual
tool
Z axis
geometry
offset
value
Fig. 10.2 (b) Difference the

tool geometry offset from tool
wear offset
908
Point on the program
Offset
value on
Z axis
Fig.10.2 (c) Not difference the tool

geometry offset from tool wear
offset
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the
CRT/MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the
corresponding code is specified after address T in a program.
The value is used for tool offset or tool nose radius compensation.
Range of tool
compensation value
Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
Tool compensation
(geometry compensation, wear compensation)
Increment system
Metric input
Inch input
IS-B
" 999.999 mm
" 99.9999 inch
IS-C
" 999.9999 mm
" 99.99999 inch
Range of tool compensation value can be expanded by option.
Tool compensation value

(geometry compensation, wear compensation)
Increment
system
Metric input
Inch input
ISB
9999.999 mm
999.9999 inch
ISC
9999.9999 mm
(4000.0000 mm)
999.99999 inch
(160.00000 inch)
NOTE
1 When parameter OIM (No. 5006#0)=1, the range in
parenthesis is available.
2 The above table does not apply to the Baxis offset in
Baxis control function.
Tool compensation
number
The memory can hold 16, 32, 64 or 99 sets of tool compensation values.
Tool compensation
memory
There are two types of tool offset amount memory, which can be selected
according to the configuration of offset amount.
D Tool geometry/wear compensation option not specified
There is no difference between geometry offset memory and wear
offset memory. Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset
together is set as the offset memory.
D Tool geometry/wear compensation option specified
Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is
prepared separately. Geometry compensation and wear compensation
can thus be set separately.
The above description is summarized as follows:

Tool compensation
memory
Compensation amount
Without geometry/
wear compensation
Tool compensation amount (Geometry compensation

value + Wear compensation value)
With geometry/wear
compensation
909
Geometry compensation
Wear compensation
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
3109
#1
DWT
#0
[Data type] Bit

DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation
amount
0 : The characters are displayed at the left of each number.
1 : The characters are not displayed.
#7
#6
#5
3290
#4
#3
#2
#1
GOF
#0
WOF
[Data type] Bit

WOF Setting the tool wear compensation value by MDI key input is:
0 : Not disabled
1 : Disabled (With parameter No. 3294 and No. 3295, set the offset
number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
GOF Setting the tool geometry compensation value by MDI key input is:
0 : Not disabled
1 : Disabled (With parameter No. 3294 and No. 3295, set the offset
number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
3294
Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled
3295
Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is
disabled
[Data type] Word

When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be
disabled using bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of
parameter No. 3290, parameter Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to set the
range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No. 3294, set the
offset number of the start of tool offset values whose modification is
disabled. In parameter No. 3295, set the number of such values.
Example:
The following setting disables the modification of both the tool geometry
compensation values and tool wear compensation values corresponding
to offset numbers 100 to 110:
Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (Disables tool geometry
compensation value modification.)
Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (Disables tool wear compensation
value modification.)
If bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0, the modification of the
tool geometry compensation values alone is disabled. The tool wear
compensation values may be modified.
910
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
5002
#7
WNP
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
LGN
#0
[Data type] Bit

LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset (When the option of tool geometry/
wear compensation is selected, it is effective.)
0 : Is the same as wear offset number
1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
WNP Imaginary tool tip direction used for tool nose radius compensation, when
the geometry/wear compensation option is selected, is the direction
specified by:
0 : Geometry offset number
1 : Wear offset number
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
ORC
5004
#0
[Data type] Bit

ORC Tool offset value
0 : Set by the diameter specification (Can be set in only the axis under
diameter programming)
1 : Set by the radius specification
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OIM
5006
[Data type] Bit

OIM When the unit is switched between the inch and metric systems, automatic
tool compensation value conversion is:
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
5013
Maximum value of tool wear compensation
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Metric input
0 to 99999
0 to 999999
0 to 9999999
Inch input
0 to 99999
0 to 999999
0 to 9999999
911
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation. The
following alarm or warning will be informed when the tool wear
compensation (absolute value) exceeding this setting value is set.
5014
Input from MDI
Too many digits
Input by G10
P/S 32 offset value is out of range by G10
Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
[Valid data range]
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Metric input
0 to 99999
0 to 999999
0 to 9999999
Inch input
0 to 99999
0 to 999999
0 to 9999999
This parameter sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation at an

incremental input. If the incremental value exceeds the set value, the
following alarm or warning message is indicated:
Alarm and message
Input from MDI
Data is out of range
Input by G10
P/S 32 offset value is out of range by G10
Number
Message
032
Description
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE In setting an offset amount by G10 or

IN G10
in writing an offset amount by system
variables, the offset amount was excessive.
Warning message
Content
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The value searched exceeds the permitted

range.
TOO MANY DIGITS
The input value exceeds the permitted number of

digits.
Note
NOTE
In the twopath control, the number of specified tool
compensation values equals the number of tool
compensations for each tool post.
912
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.14.8
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE
PROGRAM (G10)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.5
PROGRAM (G10)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.14.6
PROGRAM (G10)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.4
PROGRAM (G10)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.4
TOOL OFFSET VALUES, NUMBER OF TOOL OFFSET AND

ENTERING TOOL OFFSET
VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.4
PROGRAM (G10)
913
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
10.3
TOOL LIFE
MANAGEMENT
General
When tools are classified into several groups, average tool life (No. of
uses or time) is designated for each group. Whenever a tool is used, the
usage time is subtracted from the tool life; when the tool life expires, the
next tool in the group is selected. The tool sequence within a group is
arranged in advance.
Signal
The end of a tools life is reported by tool change signal TLCH or

individual tool change signal TLCHI. Tool change signal TLCH is set to
1 at the end of the life of the last tool of a group. Individual tool change
signal TLCHI is set to 1 at the end of the life of the current tool.
Tool change signal

TLCH <F064#0>
[Function] Reports the end of the life of the last tool of a group.
The life of the last tool of a group ends, after tool change has been
performed each time the end of the life of each tool in a group is
detected.
Toolchange reset is completed for all groups in which no available
tools remain.
NOTE
The TLCH signal turns to 1 when the CNC is reset by M02
or M30, for instance after the tool life, based on the
frequency of times used, is reached. When tool life is
specified by usage time, TLCH turns to 1 when the tool life
limit is reached. The signal will change during machine
operation, but machining will continue until the end of the
program.
Tool change reset signal

TLRST <G048#7>
[Function] Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group, *, and @.
To clear the data, specify a group number by tool group number selection
signal after replacing the wornout tools that are displayed on the CRT.
The data can also be cleared from the MDI.
914
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
Clears all executable data, including the life count of the group.
If the same group is specified after machining is resumed, the first tool in
the group is selected.
NOTE
Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid only when the
automatic operating signal OP is 0.
Individual tool change

signal TLCHI <F064#2>
(M series)
[Function] Reports the end of the life of the current tool. The following processing
can be programmed: A running program is interrupted by a tool-change
program when the signal turns to 1. Execution of the interrupted
program is resumed when the tool is changed.
The end of the life of the current tool is detected.
Individual tool-change reset is executed.
Individual tool change

reset signal TLRSTI
<G048#6> (M series)
[Function] Sets the individual tool change signal TLCHI to 0.
Sets the individual tool change signal to 0.
NOTE
1 These signals are valid only when tool life management is
performed on the basis of the tool life calculated in terms of
time or cutting length.
2 Individual tool change signal TLCHI is not cleared by reset.
Tool skip signal

TLSKP <G048#5>
[Function] A tool which has not reached its lifespan may be changed by one of two
methods:
915
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
(i) Designate the group number for the tool by tool group number
selection signal then turn the tool skip signal TLSKP to 1. The next
T-code command will pass over the current tool in the group for which
the skip was designated, and select the next tool.
(ii)Turn the TLSKP signal to 1 without designating a group number,
and the machine will skip to the next tool in the group currently in use.
Either of these methods is set using parameter SIG (No. 6800#3). Tool
life is counted from zero. When the TLSKP signal is 1 and the last tool
in the group is being used, the TLCH signal turns to 1.
Selects the next tool in the group for which a skip is specified with the
next T code.
Assumes the number of the group to which the current tool belongs.
CAUTION
The cycle start lamp signal (STL) and feed hold lamp signal
(SPL) must both be 0 before inputting the TLSKP signal.
New tool select signal

TLNW <F064#1>
[Function] Reports that a new tool of a certain group is selected.
This signal can be used when, for example, a compensation value is to be
measured automatically when a new tool is selected.
The new tool select signal is issued at the same timing as TF (tool function
strobe signal).
A new tool of a certain group is selected.
The completion signal is set to 1.
T code output
Tool function
strobe signal TF
New tool selecting
signal TLNW
End signal FIN
916
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Tool group number

select signal
TL01 to TL256 (M series)
<G047#0 to G048#0>
TL01 to TL 64
<G47#0 to #6> (T series)
[Function] When the TLRST or TLSKP signals are input, the tool group number
must be given in advance, using the tool group number selection signals
TL01 to TL64 (T series) or TL01 to TL128 (M series).
Command the following value in binary form:
Tool group number to be specified 1
[Operation] A specified tool group is selected.
Tool life count override

signal *TLV0 to *TLV9
<G049#0 to G050#1>
(M series)
[Function] Overrides the life count (time) if parameter LFV (No. 6801#2) is
specified.
Each of the ten binary code signals has a unique override value that
becomes valid when the signal is set to 0. The life count is overridden
by the sum of the valid override values. The override value can be
specified in steps of 0.1, within the range of 0 to 99.9.
9
Override value =
{2 i
Vi}
i+ 0
*TLV0
*TLV1
*TLV2
*TLV3
*TLV4
*TLV5
*TLV6
*TLV7
*TLV8
*TLV9
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.8
1.6
3.2
6.4
12.8
25.6
51.2
(Example) When *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are set to 0, the override
value is calculated as follows:
12.8 + 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0
The life count is multiplied by 20.0.
[Operation] The actual cutting time is counted and multiplied by the override value
obtained by the signals. The calculated time is used as the basis for
tool-life management.
917
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
G047
G048
G049
G050
F064
#7
TL128
#6
TL64
#5
TL32
TLRST
TLRSTI
TLSKP
*TLV7
*TLV6
*TLV5
#4
TL16
#3
TL08
#2
TL04
#1
TL02
#0
TL01
TL256
*TLV4
*TLV3
*TLV2
*TLV1
*TLV0
*TLV9
*TLV8
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
TLCHI
#1
TLNW
#0
TLCH
#7
#6
#5
SNG
#4
GRS
#3
SIG
#2
LTM
#1
GS2
#0
GS1
M6T
IGI
SNG
GRS
SIG
LTM
GS2
GS1
Parameter
6800
[Data type] Bit

GS1, GS2 This parameter sets the combination of the number of tool life groups
which can be entered, and the number of tools which can be entered per
group as shown in the table below.
M series
GS2
GS1
T series
Group count
Tool count
Group count
Tool count
1 16
1 64
1 16
1 32
1 16
1 16
1 16
1 32
1 32
1128
1 8
1 16
1 32
1 32
1 8
1 16
1 64
1256
1
1
4
8
1 64
1 64
1
1
1128
1512
1
1
2
4
1 16
1128
1 16
1 4
4
8
Lower side ranges in M series column are for the tool life management of
512 pairs.
Lower side range in T series column are for tool life management of 128
pairs.
LTM Tool life

0 : Specified by the number of times
1 : Specified by time
SIG Group number is
0 : Not input using the tool group number selection signal during tool
skip (The current group is specified.)
1 : Input using the tool group signal during tool skip
GRS Tool change reset signal
0 : Clears only the execution data of a specified group
1 : Clears the execution data of all entered groups
918
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
SNG Input of the tool skip signal when a tool that is not considered tool life
management is selected.
0 : Skips the tool of the group used last or of the specified group (using
SIG, #3 of parameter No. 6800).
1 : Ignores a tool skip signal
IGI Tool back number
0 : Not ignored
1 : Ignored
M6T T code in the same block as M06
0 : Judged as a back number
1 : Judged as a next tool group command
#7
#6
EXG
M6E
EXT
6801
#5
#4
#3
#2
EMD
LFV
#1
TSM
#0
[Data type] Bit

TSM When a tool takes several tool numbers, life is counted in tool life
management:
0 : For each of the same tool numbers.
1 : For each tool.
LFV Specifies whether life count override is enabled or disabled when the
extended tool life management function is used.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
EMD An asterisk (*) indicating that a tool has been expired is displayed,
0 : When the next tool is selected
1 : When the tool life is expired
EXG Tool life management data registration by G10 (T system) is:
0 : Performed after the data for all tool groups has been cleared.
1 : Performed by adding/changing or deleting the data for a specified
group.
NOTE
When EXG = 1, address P in the block including G10 can
be used to specify whether data is to be added/changed or
deleted (P1: add/change, P2: delete). When P is not
specified, the data for all tool groups is cleared before the
tool life management data is registered.
EXT Specifies whether the extended tool life management function is used.
0 : Not used
1 : Used
919
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06

0 : The T code is processed as a return number or as a group number
selected next. Either is set by parameter M6T No. 6800#7.
1 : The tool group life is counted immediately.
6810
Tool life management ignored number
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the tool life management ignored number.
When the set value is subtracted from a T code, a remainder is used as the
tool group number of tool life management when a value exceeding the set
value is specified in the T code.
6811
Tool life count restart M code
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 255 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When zero is specified, it is ignored.
When the life is specified by the number of times, the tool exchange signal
is output when a tool life count restart M code is specified if tool life of
at least one tool group is expired. A tool in life is selected in the specified
group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after
the tool life count restart M code is specified. A tool life counter is then
incremented by one.
When the life is specified by time, a tool in life is selected in the specified
group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after
the tool life count restart M code is specified.
920
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
149
FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3
150
ILLEGAL
NUMBER
151
TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT The tool group commanded in the machining
FOUND
program is not set.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
152
NO SPACE
ENTRY
153
TCODE NOT FOUND
154
NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE When the group is not commanded, H99 or
GROUP
D99 was commanded.
(M series) Correct the program.
155
ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06
TOOL
GROUP Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value.

Modify the program.
FOR
TOOL The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum value registerable.
Modify the number of tools.
In tool life data registration, a T code was not
specified where one should be. Correct the
program.
(M series)
ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06
(T series)
Reference item
A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type in the extended
tool life management.
In the machining program, M06 and T code in

the same block do not correspond to the
group in use. Correct the program.
In the machining program, M06 and T code in
the same block do not correspond to the
group in use. Correct the program.
156
P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND
P and L commands are missing at the head

of program in which the tool group is set. Correct the program.
157
TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS
The number of tool groups to be set exceeds

the maximum allowable value. (See parameter No. 6800 bit 0 and 1) Modify the program.
158
ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA
The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify

the setting value.
159
TOOL DATA SETTING IN- During executing a life data setting program,
COMPLETE
power was turned off.
Set again.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.10.2
Tool Life Management Function
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.10.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.10.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.10.2
921
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
10.4
CUTTER
COMPENSATION
10.4.1
Cutter Compensation
B, C (M Series)
General
When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the
tool.
To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset
vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool (startup). The offset
vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector is on the
workpiece side and the head points to the center of the tool.
If a linear interpolation, corner offset (cutter compensation B only), or
circular interpolation command is specified after startup, the tool path
can be shifted by the length of the offset vector during machining.
To return the tool to the start point at the end of machining, cancel the
cutter compensation mode.
Corner offset
Circular
interpolation
Corner offset
Circular
interpolation
R1
Linear
interpolation
R2
Offset vector
Start up
Circular
interpolation
Linear
interpolation
Programmed path
Cutter
compensation
cancel
Tool center path
Y axis
Start position
X axis
Fig. 10.4.1 (a) Outline of cutter compensation B
922
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Cutter
compensation
cancel
Startup
Fig. 10.4.1 (b) Outline of cutter compensation C
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
5001
#4
#3
#2
OFH
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

OFH Offset number of tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool
offset
0 : Specifies the tool length compensation using an H code, and cutter
compensation C using a D code
Tool offset conforms to TPH in parameter TPH (No. 5001#5).
1 : Specifies the tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool
offset using H codes
923
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
5003
#3
#2
CCN
#1
SUV
#0
SUP
[Data type] Bit

SUP Start up or cancel in cutter compensation C
0 : Type A
1 : Type B
SUV When G40, G41, and G42 are specified independently,
0 : The start up and cancel operation conforms to the standard
specification.
1 : Moves by a distance corresponding to the offset vector which is
vertical to the next block movement.
CCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cutter
compensation C mode (M series) or in tool nose radius compensation (T
series):
0 : The cutter compensation vector is cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position.
1 : The cutter compensation vector is not cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position, but is cancelled in movement to the reference
position.
5010
Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a corner
during cutter compensation C
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch

This parameter sets the limit value that ignores a slight movement
occurring when a tool moves on the outside of the corner during cutter
compensation C.
924
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Reference item
Description
033
NO SOLUTION AT CRC
A point of intersection cannot be determined for cutter compensation C.

Modify the program.
034
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be

STUP /EXT BLK
performed in the G02 or G03 mode in
cutter compensation C. Modify the program.
035
CAN NOT COMMANDED G39 is commanded in cutter comG39

pensation B cancel mode or on the
plane other than offset plane. Modify
the program.
036
CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutG31

ter compensation mode.
Modify the program.
037
CAN
NOT
CHANGE G40 is commanded on the plane other
PLANE IN CRC
than offset plane in cutter compensation B. The plane selected by using
G17, G18 or G19 is changed in cutter
compensation C mode. Modify the program.
038
INTERFERENCE IN CIR- Overcutting will occur in cutter comCULAR BLOCK

pensation C because the arc start point
or end point coincides with the arc center.
Modify the program.
041
INTERFERENCE IN CRC
042
G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded

IN CRC
in cutter compensation. Modify the program.
Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Two or more blocks are

consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary function and
dwell functions are performed without
movement in the cutter compensation
mode. Modify the program.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.14.4
Cutter compensation B
II.14.5
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.14.4
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.2
925
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
10.4.2
Tool Nose Radius
Compensation
(T Series)
General
It is difficult to produce the compensation necessary to form accurate parts

when using only the tool offset function due to tool nose roundness in
taper cutting or circular cutting. The tool nose radius compensation
function compensates automatically for the above errors.
Tool path without compensation
Workpiece
Tool path with compensation
Insufficient
depth of
cutting
Tool nose
Shape processed without tool

nose radius compensation
Fig. 10.4.2 Tool path of tool nose radius compensation
Parameter
5002
#7
WNP
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

WNP Imaginary tool tip direction used for tool nose radius compensation, when
the geometry/wear compensation option is equipped, is the direction
specified by:
0 : Geometry offset number
1 : Wear offset number
926
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
5003
#3
#2
CCN
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

CCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cutter
compensation C mode (M series) or in tool nose radius compensation (T
series):
0 : The cutter compensation vector is cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position.
1 : The cutter compensation vector is not cancelled in movement to an
intermediate position, but is cancelled in movement to the reference
position.
5010
Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a corner
during tool nose radius compensation
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the limit value that ignores a slight movement
occurring when a tool moves on the outside of a corner during tool nose
radius compensation.
927
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Reference item
Description
033
NO SOLUTION AT CRC
A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program. Modify the
program.
034
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be

STUP /EXT BLK
performed in the G02 or G03 mode in
tool nose radius compensation. Modify
the program.
035
CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool

G31
nose radius compensation mode.
Modify the program.
037
CAN
NOT
CHANGE The offset plane is switched in tool nose
PLANE IN NRC
radius compensation.
Modify the program.
038
INTERFERENCE IN CIR- Overcutting will occur in tool nose raCULAR BLOCK

dius compensation because the arc
start point or end point coincides with
the arc center.
Modify the program.
039
CHF/CNR
NOT
LOWED IN NRC
040
INTERFERENCE
G90/G94 BLOCK
041
INTERFERENCE IN NRC
AL- Chamfering or corner R was specified

with a startup, a cancel, or switching
between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The program may
cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R. Modify the program.
IN Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in canned cycle

G90 or G94. Modify the program.
Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation.
Modify the program.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.2
Tool Nose Radius Compensation
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.2
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.2
928
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11
PROGRAM COMMAND
929
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.1
DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING/
POCKET
CALCULATOR TYPE
DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING
General
Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point

can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can
be specified with the following addresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M series
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T series
There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator-type notation
and standard notation.
When calculator-type decimal point notation is used, a value without
decimal point is considered to be specified in millimeters, inches or
degree. When standard decimal point notation is used, such a value is
considered to be specified in least input increments. Select either
calculator-type or standard decimal point notation by using the DPI bit
(bit 0 of parameter 3401). Values can be specified both with and without
decimal point in a single program.
Program command
X1000
Command value without decimal point
Pocket calculator
type decimal point
programming
1000mm
Unit : mm
Standard type decimal

point programming
1mm
Unit : Least input increment

(0.001 mm)
X1000.0
1000mm
Command value with Unit : mm
decimal point
1000mm
Unit : mm
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3401
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DPI
[Data type] Bit

DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal
point
0 : The least input increment is assumed.
1 : The unit of mm, inches, degree, or s is assumed. (Pocket calculator
type decimal point programming)
930
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
007
Reference item
Description
ILLEGAL USE OF DEC- Decimal point input error (A decimal

IMAL POINT
point was input after an address with
which it can not be used. Or multiple
decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.8.4
Decimal point programming
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.8.4
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.3
931
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.2
G CODE SYSTEM
(T SERIES)
General
There are three G code systems : A,B, and C (Table 11.2). Select a G code
system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No.
3401#6).
Table 11.2 G code list (1/3)
G code
Gro p
Group
F nction
Function
G00
G00
G00
G01
G01
G01
G02
G02
G02
Circular interpolation CW or Helical interpolation CW
G03
G03
G03
Circular interpolation CW or Helical interpolation CCW
G04
G04
G04
Dwell
G05
G05
G05
G07.1
(G107)
G07.1
(G107)
G07.1
(G107)
G10
G10
G10
G12.1
(G112)
G12.1
(G112)
G12.1
(G112)
G13.1
(G113)
G13.1
(G113)
G13.1
(G113)
G17
G17
G17
G18
G18
G18
G19
G19
G19
G20
G20
G70
Positioning (Rapid traverse)
01
Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
High speed cycle cutting
00
Cylindricalinterpolation
Data setting
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode

XpYp plane selection
16
ZpXp plane selection

YpZp plane selection
Input in inch
06
G21
G21
G71
G22
G22
G22
G23
G23
G23
G25
G25
G25
G26
G26
G26
Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27
G27
G27
Reference position return check
G28
G28
G28
G30
G30
G30
G30.1
G30.1
G30.1
G31
G31
G31
G32
G33
G33
09
Input in mm
Stored stroke check function on

Stored stroke check function off
08
00
Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return

Floating reference point return
Skip function
Thread cutting
01
G34
G34
G34
G36
G36
G36
G37
G37
G37
G39
G39
G39
Corner circular interpolation
G40
G41
G40
G41
G40
G41
Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G42
G42
G42
G50
G92
G92
G50.3
G92.1
G92.1
Variablelead thread cutting
Automatic tool compensation X
00
07
Automatic tool compensation Z
Tool nose radius compensation left
Tool nose radius compensation right
Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
00
Workpiece coordinate system preset
932
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
G code
G50.2
(G250)
G50.2
(G250)
G50.2
(G250)
G51.2
(G251)
G51.2
(G251)
G51.2
(G251)
G52
G52
G52
Group
Function
Polygonal turning cancel
20
Polygonal turning
Local coordinate system setting
00
G53
G53
G53
G54
G54
G54
Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G55
G55
G55
G56
G56
G56
G57
G57
G57
G58
G58
G58
G59
G59
G59
G65
G65
G65
G66
G66
G66
14
00
Machine coordinate system setting
Macro calling
Macro modal call
12
G67
G67
G67
Macro modal call cancel
G68
G68
G68
04
Mirror image for double turrets ON or balance cut mode
04
Mirror image for double turrets OFF or balance cut mode cancel
G69
G70
G69
G70
G69
G72
G71
G71
G73
Stock removal in turning
G72
G72
G74
Stock removal in facing
G73
G73
G75
G74
G74
G76
End face peck drilling
G75
G75
G77
Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76
G76
G78
Multiple threading cycle
G71
G71
G72
Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G72
G72
G73
Traverse direct constantdimension grinding cycle

(for grinding machine)
G73
G73
G74
G74
G74
G75
Oscillation direct constantdimension grinding cycle

(for grinding machine)
G80
G80
G80
Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G83
G83
G83
Cycle for face drilling
G84
G84
G84
Cycle for face tapping
G86
G86
G86
G87
G87
G87
Cycle for side drilling
G88
G88
G88
Cycle for side tapping
G89
G89
G89
Cycle for side boring
G90
G77
G20
Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92
G78
G21
G94
G79
G24
G96
G96
G96
G97
G97
G97
G98
G94
G94
G99
G95
G95
Finishing cycle
00
01
10
01
Pattern repeating
Oscillation grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Cycle for face boring
Thread cutting cycle
End face turning cycle
02
Constant surface speed control cancel

Per minute feed
05
Per revolution feed
933
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
G code
Group
G90
G90
G91
G91
G98
G98
G99
G99
Function
Absoluteprogramming
03
Incrementalprogramming
Return to initial level
11
Return to R point level
Parameter
3401
#7
GSC
#6
GSB
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

GSB, GSC The G code system is set.
#7
GSC
GSB
G code
G code system A
G code system B
G code system C
#6
CLR
3402
#5
#4
#3
G91
#2
#1
#0
G01
[Data type] Bit

G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0 : G00 mode (positioning)
1 : G01 mode (linear interpolation)
G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0 : G90 mode (absolute command)
1 : G91 mode (incremental command)
CLR Reset button on the CRT/MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and
rewind signal and emergency stop signal
0 : Cause reset state.
1 : Cause clear state.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
010
IMPROPER GCODE
934
Description
An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not provided is specified.

Modify the program.
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLR) of
parameter 3402) when the power is turned on or the CNC
is reset, the modal G codes change as follows.
(1) G codes marked with
in Table 11.2 are enabled.
(2) When the system is cleared due to power-on or reset,
whichever specified, either G20 or G21, remains
effective.
(3) Bit 7 (G23) of parameter No. 3402 is used to specify
whether G22 or G23 is to be selected upon poweron.
The selection of G22 or G23 is not, however, changed
when the CNC is cleared upon a reset.
When the system is cleared due to reset, whichever
specified, either G22 or G23, remains effective.
(4) Setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter 3402 determines which
code, either G00 or G01, is effective.
(5) Setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter 3402 determines which
code, either G90 or G91, is effective.
2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single-shot
G codes.
3 Alarm 010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G
code list is specified or a G code without a corresponding
option is specified.
4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same
block.
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same
block, the G code specified last is valid.
5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the
canned cycle is canceled in the same way as when a G80
command is specified. G codes of group 01 are not affected
by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.
6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the
initial level is provided at the return point.
7 G codes are displayed for each group number.
935
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.3
PREPARATORY
FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)
APPENDIX E STATUS WHEN TURNING

POWER ON, WHEN
CLEAR AND WHEN
RESET
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.3
PREPARATORY

POWER ON, WHEN
CLEAR AND WHEN
RESET
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.3
PREPARATORY

POWER ON, WHEN
CLEAR AND WHEN
RESET
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.3
PREPARATORY

POWER ON, WHEN
CLEAR AND WHEN
RESET
936
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.3
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATION
General
A program consists of the following components:

Table 11.3
Program components
Components
Descriptions
Tape start
Symbol indicating the start of a program file
Leader section
Used for the title of a program file, etc.
Program start
Symbol indicating the start of a program
Program section
Commands for machining
Comment section
Comments or directions for the operator
Tape end
Symbol indicating the end of a program file
Leader section
Tape start
Program section
% TITLE
O0001 ;
(COMMENT)
M30 ;
%
Program start
Comment section
Tape end
Fig. 11.3 Program configuration
937
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
0100
#1
CTV
#0

[Data type] Bit
CTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
#7
#6
NPE
3201
#5
N99
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program
registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
#7
#6
EOR
3404
#5
#4
#3
#2
SBP
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

SBP Address P of the block including M198 in the subprogram call function
0 : Indicating a file number
1 : Indicating a program number
EOR When the end-of-record mark (%) is read during program execution:
0 : P/.S alarm No. 5010 occurs.
(Automatic operation is stopped, and the system enters the alarm
state.)
(Automatic operation is stopped, and the system is reset.)
6030
M code that calls the program entered in file
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, and 1 to 255
When the subprogram call function is used, this parameter sets the M code
for calling a program in a file stored on the external input/output device.
NOTE
The M code is judged to be M198 when zero is specified as
the setting value.
938
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Reference item
Description
001
TH PARITY ALARM
TH alarm (A character with incorrect

parity was input).
002
TV PARITY ALARM
TV alarm (The number of characters in

a block is odd). This alarm will be generated only when the TV check is effective
(when TVC, bit 0 of setting parameter
0000 is set to 1).
5010
END OF RECORD
The end of record (%) was specified.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.12
Program Configuration
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.12
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.12
939
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.4
INCH/METRIC
CONVERSION
General
Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.
Signal
Inch input signal
INCH<F002#0>
[Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is in progress.
[Output condition] 1indicates that the inch input mode (G20) is in progress, and 0
indicates that metric input mode (G21) is in progress.
This signal changes to the corresponding state when modes are switched
using the setting data display on the MDI panel.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
INCH
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
INI
#1
#0
#3
#2
#1
#0
INM
F002
Parameter
0000

[Data type] Bit
INI Unit of input
0: In mm
1: In inches
#7
#6
#5
#4
1001
NOTE
[Data type] Bit

INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0 : In mm (metric system machine)
1 : In inches (inch system machine)
940
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1006
#1
ROSx
#0
ROTx
NOTE

ROSx
ROTx
Description
Linear axis
D Inch/metric conversion is done.
D All coordinate values are linear axis type.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer toparameter No. 3624)

D Inch/metric conversion is not done.
D Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are rounded or not
rounded by parameter No. 1008 #0 and #2.
D Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. Refer to parameter No. 3624.
D Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position return direction and the move amount does not exceed
one rotation.

D Machine coordinate values absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinatevalues are linear axis type and is not rounded in 0 to 360_.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
D Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index
table indexing function (M series).
#7
#6
#5
1201
#4
#3
#2
#1
ZPI
#0
[Data type] Bit

automatically
941
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
1250
B63003EN1/02
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Linear axis
(Metric input)
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis
(Inch input)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Rotation axis
0.01
0.001
0.0001
deg
Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for
setting a coordinate system automatically.
1251
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches

Inch input
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for
setting a coordinate system automatically when input is performed in
inches.
NOTE
to 1.
#7
#6
#5
1403
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MIF
[Data type] Bit

MIF Cutting feedrates at feed per minute is specified by F commands
0 : In units of 1 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.01 inches/min for
inch machines.
1 : In unit of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001
inches/min for inch machines.
NOTE
M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting
feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001
mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for
inch machines.
942
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
3104
#0
MCN
[Data type] Bit

MCN Machine position is:
0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input.
(Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine
position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for
inch machines.)
1 : Displayed according to the unit of input.
(When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm,
and when input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in
inches accordingly.)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
3405
#0
AUX
[Data type] Bit

AUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous function
specified with a decimal point
0 : Assumed to be 0.001
1 : Depending on the input increment.
(For input in mm, 0.001 is assumed, or for input in inches, 0.0001 is
assumed.)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5006
#0
OIM
[Data type] Bit

OIM When the unit is switched between the inch and metric systems, automatic
tool compensation value conversion is:
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
NOTE
If you change this parameter, reset the tool compensation
data.
#7
#6
#5
8003
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PIM
[Data type] Bit

PIM When only the axes controlled by the PMC are used, the linear axis is:
0 : Influenced by inch/millimeter input.
1 : Not influenced by inch/millimeter input.
943
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and
vice versa, the tool compensation value must be reset
according to the least input increment.
However, when bit 0 (OIM) of parameter 5006 is 1, tool
compensation values are automatically converted and
need not be reset.
Note
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command
increment systems are different, the maximum error is half
of the least command increment. This error is not
accumulated.
2 Reference position return is performed at a low speed for
the first G28 command after the inch input is switched to the
metric input or vice versa.
3 The inch and metric input can also be switched using
settings.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.8.3
(G20, G21)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.2
(G20, G21)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.8.3
(G20, G21)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.2
(G20, G21)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.2
(G20, G21)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.8.2
(G20, G21)
944
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.5
HIGH SPEED CYCLE
CUTTING
General
This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that can
be distributed as pulses at high-speed by the macro compiler and macro
executor. The function can also call and execute the data group as a
machining cycle using the CNC command (G05 command).
NOTE
This function cannot be used for two-path control.
Format
fff Lfff ;
P10fff is number of the cutting cycle to be called first:
P10001 to P10999
Lfff is repetition count of the cutting cycle
G05 P10
(L1 applies when this parameter is omitted.) :

L1 to L999
Call and execute the data for the high speed cutting cycle specified by the
macro compiler and macro executor using the above command.
Cycle data can be prepared for up to 999 cycles. Select the machining
cycle by address P. More than one cycle can be called and executed in
series using the cycle connection data in the header.
Specify the repetition count of the called machining cycle by address L.
The repetition count in the header can be specified for each cycle.
The connection of cycles and their repetition count are explained below
with an example.
Example) Assume the following:
Cycle 1 Cycle connection data 2 Repetition count 1

G05 P10001 L2 ;
The following cycles are executed in sequence:

Cycles 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 1, 2, 2, 2, and3
Number of control axes
Six axes maximum can be controlled. Six axes can be controlled

simultaneously.
Pulse distribution
Set the number of pulses per cycle in parameter 7501#4 to #6 as a macro

variable (#20000 to #85535) for high speed cycle cutting using the macro
compiler and macro executor.
The unit for the number of pulses is the least input increment.
945
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Configuration of high
speed cycle cutting data
B63003EN1/02
Data for the high speed cycle cutting is assigned to variables (#20000 to
#85535) for the highspeed cycle cutting by the macro compiler and
macro executor.
Configuration of the high speed cycle cutting data
#20000 Number of registered cycles
#20001 Header of cycle 1
Data group of cycle 1

Number of Registered
Cycles
Specify the number of cycles (number of headers) of high-speed cycle

cutting data. Values from 1 to 999 can be specified.
Header
The header for high-speed cycle cutting data has the following
configuration:
Header configuration
#20001/20017/20033.. Cycle repetition count
#20002/20018/20034.. Cycle connection data
#20003/20019/20035.. Number of data items
#20004/20020/20036.. Data type
#20005/20021/20037.. Variable assigned to the 1st axis data
#20006/20022/20038.. Variable assigned to the 2nd axis data
#20007/20023/20039.. Variable assigned to the 3rd axis data
#20008/20024/20040.. Variable assigned to the 4th axis data
#20009/20025/20041.. Variable assigned to the 5th axis data
#20010/20026/20042..
Variable assigned to the 6th axis data
#20011/20027/20043..
Total number of fixed data items for the 1st axis
#20012/20028/20044.. Total number of fixed data items for the 2nd axis
#20013/20029/20045.. Total number of fixed data items for the 3rd axis
#20014/20030/20046.. Total number of fixed data items for the 4th axis
946
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Explanations
D
Cycle repetition count
Specify the repetition count for the cycle. Values from 0 to 32767 can be
specified. When 0 or 1 is specified, the cycle is executed once.
Cycle connection data
Specify the number (1 to 999) of the cycle to be executed after the cycle.
When no connection cycle exists because of the last cycle, specify 0.
Number of data items
Specify the number of data items per cycle. Valid values are from 1 to
32767.
When a fixed data item is specified, the fixed data is repeated for the
specified number of times in one cycle.
Data type
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
r6 r5 r4 r3 r2 r1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
t6 t5 t4 t3 t2 t1
The bits from t1 to t6, corresponding to the 1st to 6th axes, have the following meanings:
0: Distribution data is always constant.
1: Distribution data is variable or fixed.
When the distribution data is variable or fixed, the bits from r1 to r6, corresponding to the 1st to 6th axes, have the following meanings:
0: Distribution data is read forward.
1: Distribution data is read backwards.
Because the data consists of bits, it is necessary to use a binary-coded decimal value when setting it using the macro compiler and macro executor.
Example)
When constant data is assigned to the 1st and 2nd axes and variable data
is assigned to the 3rd and 4th axes, #20004 = 12; (t4 and t3: 1, t2 and t1:
0)
Variables assigned to
data for the 1st to 6th
axes
Constant data
When the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 0, specify
distribution data value.
Variable data
When the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 1 and the total number
of fixed data items = 0, specify (Storing start data variable No. of the
distribution data)/10.
Fixed data
When the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 1 and the total number
of fixed data items is other than 0, specify (Storing start data variable
No. of the distribution data)/10.
The applicable value for the variable data and fixed data is 2001 to
8553. It is not possible to start storing data in the executable format
from a variable No. that is not a multiple of 10.
To read the distribution data backwards, set the variable No. of the data
to be distributed last. For example, to read the distribution data in
#25000 to #25999 backwards, set 25000 as the data assignment
variable.
Total number of fixed

data items for the first to
6th axes
Set the length of the fixed data for the cycle.

The first address of the fixed data must be specified by the data
assignment variable. When the total number of fixed data items = 0 and
the corresponding data type bit (t6 to t1) is 1, the data is regarded as a
variable data.
947
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
7501
#7
IPC
#6
IT2
#5
IT1
#4
IT0
IPC
IT2
IT1
IT0
#3
#2
#1
#0
CSP
[Data type] Bit

CSP Cs contouring control function dedicated to a piston lathe is
0 : Not used.
1 : Used.
IT0, IT1, IT2
IT2
IT1
IT0
Interpolates the G05 data in 8ms
IPC 0 : The system does not monitor whether a distribution process is

stopped while high-speed cutting (G05) is performed with high-speed
remote buffer A or B or in a high-speed cycle cutting.
1 : The system monitors whether a distribution process is stopped while
high-speed machining (G05) is performed with high-speed remote
buffer A or B or in a high-speed cycle cutting.
(Alarms 179 and 000 are simultaneously issued if the distribution
process is stopped. In this case, the power must be turned off then on
again.)
NOTE
The distribution process stops, when the host cannot send
data with the high-speed remote buffer by the specified
time.
#7
#6
#5
7505
#4
#3
#2
#1
HUNx
#0
HSCx
HSCx
NOTE
After setting this parameter, the power must be turned off
then on again.

HSCx Specifies whether each axis is used for high-speed distribution in a
high-speed cycle cutting or with a high-speed remote buffer.
0 : Not used for high-speed distribution
1 : Used for high-speed distribution
948
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
HUNx Specifies whether the unit of data to be distributed during cutting in a

high-speed cycle is ten times the least input increment.
0 : The unit of data is the same as the least input increment.
1 : The unit of data is ten times the least input increment.
NOTE
This parameter is used when a data item to be distributed
exceeds a word in terms of the least input increment or the
maximum travel speed.
CNC distributes ten times the value for cutting in a
highspeed cycle for the axes in which HUNx of this
parameter is set to 1. Therefore, set a value one tenth the
value to be distributed for cutting in a high-speed cycle
along the specified axes.
7510
Maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes when G05 is specified during

highspeed cycle cutting or No. of controlled axes in highspeed remote buffer
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] 1 to 6
This parameter sets the maximum number of simultaneous control axes
when G05 is specified during high-speed cycle cutting or sets the number
of control axes in a high-speed remote buffer.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
115
ILLEGAL
NUMBER
949
Description
VARIABLE The header contents are improper in a

highspeed cycle cutting. This alarm is given in the following cases:
1. The header corresponding to the specified cutting cycle number called is not
found.
2. The cycle connection data value is out
of the allowable range (0 999).
3. The number of data in the header is out
of the allowable range (0 32767).
4 The storing start data variable number
4.
of executable format data is out of the
allowable range (#20000 #85535).
5. The storing data variable number of
executable format data is out of the allowable range (#85535).
6. The storing start data variable number
of executable format data is overlapped
with the variable number used in the
header.
Modify the program.
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
Warning
Description
178
G05 COMMANDED IN G05 was commanded in the G41/G42

G41/G42 MODE
mode.
179
PARAM. (NO. 7510) The number of controlled axes set by the

SETTING ERROR
parameter 7510 exceeds the maximum
number. Modify the parameter setting value.
WARNING
Single block stop, dry run, feedrate override, automatic
acceleration/deceleration and handle interruption are
disabled during high-speed cycle cutting.
Note
NOTE
Set the total number of distribution data items for one cycle
to a multiple of the following values, according to the
distribution cycle. This does not apply when the distribution
cycle is 16 ms or 8 ms.
If the total number is not a multiple of one of the following
values, movement in the remaining cycle becomes zero.
Distribution cycle 4 ms: Multiple of 2
For example, when all 41 data items (distribution cycle: 2
ms) are specified, movement is zero in the remaining 3 ms.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.19.1
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.18.1
950
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.6
CUSTOM MACRO
11.6.1
Custom Macro
General
Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the
custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic
operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general
programs such as pocketing and userdefined canned cycles. A
machining program can call a custom macro with a simple command, just
like a subprogram.
Custom macro
Machining program
O9010 ;
#1=#18/2 ;
G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;
G02 X#1 Y#1 R#1 ;
:
:
O0001 ;
:
:
:
G65 P9010 R50.0 L2 ;
:
:
M99 ;
:
M30 ;
This means that a function of general use can be formed when

programming a certain function as a custom macro. That is, programs can
be written using variables for data that might change or be unknown. This
can be further applied to group technology.
Similar workpieces can be collected as a group and a universal custom
macro body can be programmed using variables applicable to each group.
In this way, programming is not required for the workpieces in the group.
The programmer only need to assign actual values to the variables.
Bolt hole circles as shown in the above figure can be made easily.
Once a custom macro body for the bolt hole circle is programmed and
registered, the CNC can operate as if it has the bolt hole circle cutting
function.
Programmers can use the bolt hole circle function by using the following
command only:
(Example of calling bolt hole circle)
G65 Pp Rr A B Kk ;
951
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
P : Macro number of bolt

r : Radius
: Start angle
: Angle between circles
k : Number of circles
hole circle
Signal
Custom Macro Input

Signal
UI000 to UI015
<G054, G055>
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by
a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface
signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Signals
Qty
Variables
UI000
UI001
UI002
UI003
:
UI014
UI015
1
1
1
1
:
1
1
#1000
#1001
#1002
#1003
:
#1014
#1015
UI000 to UI015
16
#1032
15
{#[1000 ) i]
*1 Variable value #1032 +
i+ 0
Custom Macro Output

Signal
UI000 to UI015
<F054, F055>
UO100 to UO131
<F056 to F059>
952
2 i}
Correspondence
of values
0 at 0 and
1 at 1
16bit binary code

*1
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or
written by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for
interface signals between custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Signals
Qty
Variables
UO000
UO001
UO002
UO003
:
UO014
UO015
1
1
1
1
:
1
1
#1100
#1101
#1102
#1103
:
#1114
#1115
UO000AUO015
UO100AUO115
16
32
#1132
#1133
Correspondence of
values
0 at 0 and
1 at 1
16bit binary code *1

32bit binary code *2
15
*1 Variable value
#1132 +
{#[1100 ) i]
2 i}
{2 i
V 31
i+ 0
30
*2 Variable value
#1133 +
Vi}2 31
i+ 0
Where Vi=0 when UO1i is H0Iand Vi=1 when UO1i is H1I
These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment

statement as well as on the right side.
The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used
for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side.
Signal address
G054
#7
UI007
#6
UI006
#5
UI005
#4
UI004
#3
UI003
#2
UI002
#1
UI001
#0
UI000
G055
UI015
UI014
UI013
UI012
UI011
UI010
UI009
UI008
F054
#7
UO007
#6
UO006
#5
UO005
#4
UO004
#3
UO003
#2
UO002
#1
UO001
#0
UO000
F055
UO015
UO014
UO013
UO012
UO011
UO010
UO009
UO008
F056
UO107
UO106
UO105
UO104
UO103
UO102
UO101
UO100
F057
UO115
UO114
UO113
UO112
UO111
UO110
UO109
UO108
F058
UO123
UO122
UO121
UO120
UO119
UO118
UO117
UO116
F059
UO131
UO130
UO129
UO128
UO127
UO126
UO125
UO124
953
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Setting for single block

stop
#7
#6
6000
#5
SBM
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#3
PV5
#2
#1
PRT
#0
[Data type] Bit

SBM Custom macro statement
0 : Not stop the single block
1 : Stops the single block
Other settings
6001
#7
CLV
#6
CCV
#5
TCS
#4
CRO
[Data type] Bit

PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRNT command
0 : Outputs a space
1 : Outputs no data
PV5 Custom macro common variables
0 : Outputs custom macro common variables #500 through #599.
1 : Outputs custom macro common variables #100 through #199 and
#500 through #599.
CRO ISO code output using a BPRNT command or a DPRNT command
0 : Outputs only LF after data is output
1 : Outputs LF and CR after data is output
TCS Custom macro (subprogram)
0 : Not called using a T code
1 : Called using a T code
CCV Custom macros common variables Nos. 100 through 149
0 : Cleared to vacant by reset
1 : Not cleared by reset
CLV Custom macros local variables #1 through #33
0 : Cleared to vacant by reset
1 : Not cleared by reset
954
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Setting when macro

statement is input/output
with EIA code
6010
#7
*7
#6
*6
#5
*5
#4
*4
#3
*3
#2
*2
#1
*1
#0
*0
6011
=7
=6
=5
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
6012
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
6013
[7
[6
[5
[4
[3
[2
[1
[0
6014
]7
]6
]5
]4
]3
]2
]1
]0
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used to input/output macro statements with EIA
code.
The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code.
*0 to *7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating *.
=0 to =7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating =.
#0 to#7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating #.
[0 to [7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating [.
]0 to ]7 Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating ].
0 :Corresponding bit is 0
1 :Corresponding bit is 1.
Setting an M code that

calls a program entered
in a file
6030
M code that calls the program entered in file
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, and 1 to 255
When the subprogram call function is used, this parameter sets the M code
for calling a program in a file stored on the external input/output device.
NOTE
The M code is judged to be M198 when zero is specified as
the setting value.
955
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Setting G codes that call

custom macros of
program Nos.9010 to
9019
6050
G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
[Data type] Word

These parameters set the G codes that call the custom macros of program
numbers 9010 through 9019.
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by G00.
Setting M codes that call

subprograms of program
Nos.9001 to 9009
6071
M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
[Data type] Twoword

These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program
956
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
by M00.
Setting M codes that call

custom macros of
no.9020 to 9029
6080
M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
[Data type] Twoword

These parameters set the M codes that call the custom macros of program
NOTE
by M00.
ASCII codes that call

subprogram of program
No. 9004 and 9005
6090
ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091
ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 65 (A:41H) to 90 (Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.
Addresses that can be used are as follows:
T series : A, B, F, H, I, K, M, P, Q, R, S, T
M series: A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, L, M, P, Q, R, S, T, X, Y, Z
NOTE
Set 0 when no subprogram is called
957
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
Description
076
ADDRESS P NOT
DEFINED
Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which includes an
M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the
program.
077
SUB PROGRAM
NESTING ERROR
The subprogram was called in five folds.

Modify the program.
078
NUMBER NOT FOUND
A program number or a sequence number

which was specified by address P in the
block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or
G66 was not found. The sequence number
specified by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program is being
edited in background processing. Correct
the program, or discontinue the background editing.
110
DATA OVERFLOW
The absolute value of fixed decimal point

display data exceeds the allowable range.
Modify the program.
111
CALCULATED DATA
OVERFLOW
The result of calculation is out of the allowable range (1047 to 1029, 0, and 1029
to 1047).
112
DIVIDED BY ZERO
Division by zero was specified. (including

tan 90_)
113
IMPROPER COMMAND
A function which cannot be used in custom

macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114
FORMAT ERROR IN
MACRO
There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.

Modify the program.
115
ILLEGAL VARIABLE
NUMBER
A value not defined as a variable number is

designated in the custom macro, or the
header contents are improper in a high
speed cycle cutting. This alarm is given in
the following cases:
High speed cycle machining
1. The header corresponding to the specified

machining cycle number called is not found.
2. The cycle connection data value is out of the
allowable range (0 999).
3. The number of data in the header is out of the
allowable range (0 32767).
4. The storing start data variable number of
executable format data is out of the allowable
range (#20000 #85535).
5. The storing data variable number of executable format data is out of the allowable range
(#85535).
6. The storing start data variable number of
executable format data is overlapped with the
variable number used in the header.
Modify the program.
958
B63003EN1/02
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Number
Message
Caution
Description
116
WRITE PROTECTED
VARIABLE
The left side of substitution statement is a

variable whose substitution is inhibited.
Modify the program.
118
PARENTHESIS NESTING The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper

ERROR
limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119
ILLEGAL ARGUMENT
The SQRT argument is negative, BCD argument is negative, or other values than 0
to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122
DUPLICATE MACRO
MODALCALL
The macro modal call is specified in double.

Modify the program.
123

COMMAND IN DNC
DNC operation.
Modify the program.
124
MISSING END
STATEMENT
DO END does not correspond to 1 : 1.

Modify the program.
125
FORMAT ERROR IN
MACRO
<Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the

program.
126
ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n

x 3 is not established.
Modify the program.
127
NC, MACRO STATEMENT NC and custom macro commands coexist.

IN SAME BLOCK
Modify the program.
128
ILLEGAL MACRO
SEQUENCE NUMBER
The sequence number specified in the

branch command was not 0 to 9999. Or, it
cannot be searched. Modify the program.
129
ILLEGAL ARGUMENT
ADDRESS
An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used.

Modify the program.
199
MACRO WORD UNDE

FINED
Undefined macro word was used. Modify

the custom macro.
CAUTION
Machine tool builders: You are requested to attach your
custom macro program tape or program list to the CNC unit
without fail.
If it is necessary to replace part program storage memory
due to a failure, FANUC servicemen or end user in charge
of maintenance should know the contents of your custom
macro for the purpose of repairing the trouble immediately.
959
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.15
Custom macro
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.15
Custom macro
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.15
Custom macro
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.15
Custom macro
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.15
Custom macro
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.15
Custom macro
960
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.6.2
Interruption Type
Custom Macro
General
When a program is being executed, another program can be called by

inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is
referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an
interrupt command in the following format:
ffff ;
M96 P
Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ;
Disables custom macro interrupt
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call
a program during execution of an arbitrary block of another program.
This allows programs to be operated to match situations which vary from
time to time.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the
abnormality is started by an external signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another machining operation without the cancellation of the current operation.
(3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read.
Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the
interruption type custom macro function.
M96
Pxxxx;
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)*
M97
;
O xxxx;
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)*
ffff;
ffff);
M99 (P
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)*
Fig 11.6.2 Interruption type custom macro function
961
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program

operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to
execute the program specified by Pxxxx.
Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 11.6.2) issued after M97
is ignored.
Do not enter an interrupt signal during execution of an interrupt macro.
Signal
Interrupt Signal for

Custom Macro
UNIT<G053#3>
[Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory. During execution,
a program in automatic operation is suspended.
To enable this signal to be accepted, a particular miscellaneous function
must be specified in a command program for automatic operation. In
addition, automatic operation must already be started to accept this signal.
The particular miscellaneous function code is set by parameter 6003,
6033 and 6034.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
UNIT
#2
#1
#0
#7
MUS
#6
MCY
#5
MSB
#4
MPR
#3
TSE
#2
MIN
#1
MSK
#0
G053
Parameter
Various Setting for

Custom Macro
6003
[Data type] Bit

MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt
0 : Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
1 : Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5601 and later)
MIN Custom macro interrupt
0 : Performed by interrupting an inexecution block (Custom macro
interrupt type I)
1 : Performed after an inexecution block is completed (Custom macro
interrupt type II)
TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT
0 : Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1 : Status trigger method
962
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code

0 : M96/M97
1 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)
MSB Interrupt program
0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macrotype interrupt)
1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram
type interrupt)
MCY Custom macro interrupt
0 : Not performed during cycle operation
1 : Performed during cycle operation
MUS Interrupttype custom macro
0 : Not used
1 : Used
Setting M code that

makes interruption
effective and ineffective
6033
M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034
M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

These parameters set the custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M codes.
NOTE
These parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameter
No. 6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 is
used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of the
state of this parameter.
Note
NOTE
1 No interrupttype custom macro can be used during DNC
operation.
2 No interrupttype custom macro can be used during
multiple repetitive canned cycle execution.
963
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.15.11
Interruption type custom macro
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.15.11
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.15.11
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.15.11
11.6.3
Custom Macro
Variables Common to
Twopath Control
(Twopath Control)
General
With twopath control, common variables are provided separately for

each path; variable #n used with a path 1 is different from variable #n used
with path 2. By parameter setting (No. 6036 and No. 6037), however,
some or all of common variables #100 to # 149 and #500 to #531 can be
made usable commonly by path 1 and path 2 so that such variables can
be written or read for either path. Such variables are referred to as custom
macro variables common between two paths.
Parameter
Setting the no. of custom

macro variables
common between two
paths
6036
Number of custom macro variables common between two paths (#100s)
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] Number of custom macro variables
The parameter specifies the number of variables commonly used for both
paths 1 and 2 (custom macro variables common between two paths) that
are included in custom macro variables 100 to 149.
The custom macro variables common between two paths can be written or
read for either of the paths.
964
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Example) When this parameter is set to 10, the custom macro variables are specified
as follows:
Custom macro variables 100 to 109: Used commonly between two paths
Custom macro variables 110 to 149: Used independently for each path
NOTE
1 This parameter is dedicated to the 2path control.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, custom macro variables
100 to 149 are not used commonly between two paths.
Setting the No. of

custom macro variables
common between two
paths
6037
Number of custom macro variables common between two paths (#500s)
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] Number of custom macro variables
This parameter specifies the number of variables commonly used for both
paths 1 and 2 (custom macro variables common between two paths) that
are part of custom macro variables 500 to 531.
The custom macro variables common to tool posts can be written or read
for either of the tool posts.
Example) When this parameter is set to 10, the custom macro variables are specified
as follows:
Custom macro variables 500 to 509: Used commonly between two paths
Custom macro variables 510 to 531: Used independently for each path
NOTE
1 This parameter is dedicated to the 2path control.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, custom macro variables
500 to 531 are not used commonly between two paths.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.21.3
Custom macro variables common to tool posts
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.20.5
Custom macro variables common to tool posts
965
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.7
CANNED CYCLE
(M SERIES)/CANNED
CYCLE FOR HOLE
MACHINING
(T SERIES)
General
Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs.

With a canned cycle, a frequentlyused machining operation can be
specified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles,
normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned
cycles can shorten the program to save memory.
Explanations
A canned cycle consists of a sequence of six operations.

Operation 1
Operation 2
Operation 3
Operation 4
Operation 5
Operation 6
Positioning a hole position

Rapid traverse up to point R level
Hole machining
Operation at the bottom of a hole
Retraction to point R level
Rapid traverse up to the initial point
Operation 1
Initial level
Operation 2
Operation 6
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
Operation 4
Rapid traverse
Feed
Fig. 11.7 (a) Canned cycle operation sequence
966
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
SPINDLE CONTROL
In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse

direction may be output.
The following canned cycles require spindle control:

M series
T series
Reverse tapping cycle G74
Face tapping cycle (G84)
Fine boring cycle G76
Side tapping cycle (G88)
Tapping cycle G84

Boring cycle G86
Back boring cycle G87

Boring cycle G88
For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are

used:
See the description of the miscellaneous functions.
M03: CW spindle rotation
M04: CCW spindle rotation
M05: Spindle stop
M19: Spindle orientation (M series)
When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one
direction to the other (for example, when M04 is output during M03
operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time
switching.
Timing charts are described in the following page:
967
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
D G74 (Counter tapping cycle)

X, Y
Z
Z
Dwell
Note) It is possible to not output

M05 code by using parameter M5T (No. 5101#6).
(Note)
M05
M03
MF
MF
FIN
FIN
Dwell
(Note)
M05
M04
MF
MF
FIN
FIN
D G76 (Fine boring cycle)

X, Y
Z
Z

M05 code by using parameter M5B (No. 5101#7).
Dwell
X or Y
(Note)
M05
M19
MF
MF
FIN
Next block
(G98 mode)
Next block
(G99 mode)
X
or Y
M03
Return to initial level in

G98 mode
M03
MF
FIN
MF
FIN
FIN
Next block
(G98 mode)
D G84 (tapping cycle)
Next block (G99 mode)

X, Y
Dwell
(Note)
M05

M05 code by using parameter M5T (No. 5101#6).
MF
FIN
M04
MF
FIN
Dwell
Fig. 11.7 (b) Canned cycle for M series (1/2)
968
(Note)
M05
MF
FIN
M03
MF
Next block
(G98 mode)
FIN
Next block
(G99 mode)
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
D G86 (Boring cycle)

X, Y
Return to initial level in G98 mode

Z
M05
M03
MF
M03
MF
FIN
MF
FIN
FIN
D G87 (Back boring cycle)
Next block
(G98 mode)
Next block (G99 mode)
X or Y
X or Y
X, Y
(Note 2)
FIN
M05 M19
MF
X or Y
M03
MF
MF
FIN
FIN
D G88 (Boring cycle)
Dwell
(Note 2)
M05
M19
MF
MF
FIN
FIN
M03
MF
FIN
(Note 1) Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in

G98 mode.
(Note 2) It is possible to not output M05 code using parameter M5B (no. 5101#7).
X, Y
Cycle start
Manual feed
Z
Z
Dwell
M05
MF
M03
Return to initial level in G98 mode or

R point level in G99 mode.
FIN
Fig. 11.7 (c) Canned cycle for M series (2/2)
969
MF
FIN
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
G84 (Face tapping cycle)

G88 (Side tapping cycle)
X, C
(Z, C)
Z
(X)
Z
(X)
Dwell
(Note 1) (Note 2)
M05
MF
(Note 1) When parameter M5T

(No. 5101#6)=0, M05 is not output.
FIN
M04
MF
FIN
Z
(X)
Dwell
(Note 2) Another M code may be used by

parameter No. 5112 and 5113.
(Note 1) (Note 2)
M05
MF
FIN
M03
MF
FIN
Next block
(G98 mode)
Next block
(G99 mode)
Fig 11.7 (d) Canned cycle for T series
M code used for Caxis

clamp/unclamp (T series)
When an M code specified in parameter No.5110 for Caxis

clamp/unclamp is coded in a program, the CNC issues the M code for
Caxis clamp after the tool is positioned and before the tool is fed in rapid
traverse to the pointR level. The CNC also issues the M code (M code
Caxis clamp +1) for Caxis unclamp after the tool retracts to the pointR
level. The tool dwells for the time specified in parameter No. 5111.
Tapping signal
During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal
is also output while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid.
Override
During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%.
Feed hold
When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not
stopped immediately but the movement is stopped when the tool is
returned to level R.
Dry run
The TDR bit (bit 5 of parameter No. 1401) specifies whether dry run is
valid during tapping.
970
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Tapping signal
TAP <F001#5>
[Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode.
The system is in tapping cycle mode.
G74, G84: M series
G84, G88: T series
The system is in tapping mode.
G63: M series
The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode.
A reset or emergency stop is specified.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
TAP
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
M5T
#5
#4
#3
ILV
#2
RTR
#1
#0
FXY
M5B
M5T
RD2
RD1
EXC
FXY
F001
Parameter
5101
[Data type] Bit

FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:
0 : Always the Zaxis
1 : The axis selected by the program
NOTE
In the case of the T system, this parameter is valid only for
the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format.
EXC G81
0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1 : Specifies an external operation command
RTR G83 and G87
0 : Specify a highspeed peck drilling cycle
1 : Specify a peck drilling cycle
ILV Initial point position in drilling canned cycle
0 : Not updated by reset
1 : Updated by reset
971
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 or
G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection.
RD2
RD1
G17
G18
G19
+X
+Z
+Y
+Y
+X
+Z
M5T When a spindle rotates from the forward to the reverse direction and vice
versa in tapping cycles G84 and G74 for M series (G84 and G88 for T
series), befor M04 or M03 is output:
For T series
0 : Not output M05
1 : Outputs M05
For M series
0 : Outputs M05
1 : Not output M05
M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:
0 : Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops
1 : Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
5102
#7
RDI
#6
RAB
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

RAB The R command for the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format is:
0 : Regarded as an incremental command
1 : Regarded as:
An absolute command in the case of G code system A
An absolute command in the case of G code system B or C when the
G90 mode is specified.
An incremental command in the case of G code system B or C when
the G91 mode is specified.
RDI The R command for the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format:
0 : Is regarded as the specification of a radius
1 : Follows the specification of a diameter/radius for the drilling axis
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
5103
SIJ
[Data type] Bit

SIJ A tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by:
0 : Address Q
1 : Address I, J, or K
972
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
5110
Caxis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets the Caxis clamp M code in a drilling canned cycle.
5111
Dwell time when Caxis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter sets the dwell time when Caxis unclamping is specified
in a drilling canned cycle.
5112
Spindle forwardrotation M code in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets the spindle forwardrotation M code in a drilling
canned cycle.
NOTE
M03 is output when 0 is set.
5113
Spindle reverserotation M code in drilling canned cycle
[Data type] Byte

This parameter sets the spindle reverserotation M code in a drilling
canned cycle.
NOTE
M04 is output when 0 is set.
973
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
5114
Return or clearance value of drilling canned cycle G83

Return value of highspeed peck drilling cycle G73
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C

[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch
For M series, this parameter sets the return value in highspeed peck
drilling cycle G73 (G83 for T series).
G73 for M series
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
Z point
Fig. 11.7 (e) Highspeed peck drilling cycle (G73) for M series
For T series, this parameter sets the return or clearance value in drilling
canned cycle G83.
G83 for T series
Parameter No. 5101 RTR=0
(High speed peck drilling cycle)
Parameter No. 5101 RTR=1

(Peck drilling cycle)
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
Z point
Fig. 11.7 (f) Drilling canned cycle (G83) for T series
974
R point
Z point
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
5115
Clearance canned cycle G83
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C

[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch
G83 for M series

q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
Z point
Fig. 11.7 (g) Peck drilling cycle (G83) for M series
Alarm and message
Number
Message
044
Description
G27G30 NOT ALOne of G27 to G30 is commanded in

LOWED IN FIXED CYCLE a canned cycle mode.
(M series)
Modify the program.
Note
NOTE
A parameter FXY (No. 5101#0) can be set to the Z axis
always used as the drilling axis. When FXY=0, the Z axis is
always the drilling axis.
975
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.13.1
Canned cycle
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.3
Canned cycle for hole machining
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.13.1
Canned cycle
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.3
Canned cycle for hole machining
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.1
Canned cycle
976
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.8
EXTERNAL MOTION
FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General
Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an external

operation function signal can be output to allow the machine to perform
specific operation.
G81 IP_ ; (The IP_ is axis move command )
Every time positioning for the IP_ move command is completed, the CNC
sends an external operation signal to the machine. An external operation
signal is output for each positioning operation until canceled by G80 or
a group 01 G code.
No external operation signals are output during execution of a block that
contains neither X nor Y.
Basic procedure
1 Once positioning for a move command has been completed, the CNC
sets the external operation signal EF to 1.
2 When the EF signal is set to 1, the PMC executes drilling or another
operation. Once the operation has been completed, the PMC sets
completion signal FIN to 1.
3 The CNC resets the EF signal to 0 upon the elapse of the time (TFIN)
specified in parameter No. 3011 after the FIN signal is set to 1.
4 When the EF signal is set to 0, the PMC resets the FIN signal to 0.
5 The CNC starts executing the next block.
G81 command
Positioning
EF
Machine operation
Next block
FIN
TFIN
Fig. 11.8 (a) Timing diagram of basic procedure
977
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Signal
External Operation
Signal
EF<F008#0>
[Function] Reports that the positioning of G81 has been completed in the external
motion function, and that a special external operation is required.
[Output condition] For details of the output condition and procedure, see the basic
procedure, described previously.
For details of completion signal FIN, see section 8.1.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EF
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
EXC
#0
F008
Parameter
5101
[Data type] Bit

EXC G81:
0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1 : Specifies an external operation command
Caution
CAUTION
1 When this function is used, canned cycles (G73, G74, G76,
and G82 to G89) cannot be used.
2 When the highspeed M, S, T, or B interface is used, the
signals used by this function are transferred in highspeed
mode. See Section 8.4.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.13.8
External operation function (G81)
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.13.8
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.4
978
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.9
CANNED CYCLE
(T SERIES)/MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T SERIES)
General
This option canned cycles to make CNC programming easy. For instance,
the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough
machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available.
The following example shows stock removals in turning type I.
If a finished shape of A to A to B is given by a program as in the figure
below, the specified area is removed by d (depth of cut), with finishing
allowance u/2 and w left.
(R)
(F)
(R)
45
(F)
Program command
u/2
(F) : Cutting feed
(R) : Rapid traverse
G71 U (d) R (e) ;

G71 P (ns) Q (nf) U (u) W (w) F (f ) S (s ) T (t)
N (ns)
The move command of a finished shape of

F____
S____
A to A to B is specified in the blocks from
T____
sequence number ns to nf.
N (nf);
d
Depth of cut (radius designation)
Designate without sign. The cutting direction depends on the direction

AA. This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5132),
and the parameter is changed by the program command.
e
Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 5133),
and the parameter is changed by the program command.
ns
Sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape.
nf
Sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape.
Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter / radius
designation).
f,s,t :
Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.

Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in the cycle is ignored,
and the F, S, or T function in this G71 block is effective.
979
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Chamfering signal
CDZ<G053#7>
[Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering
distance in parameter No. 5130.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading
cycle.
When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.
Approx.
45_
Approx.
45_
Fig. 11.9 (a) Straight thread cutting cycle
Fig. 11.9 (b)Taper thread cutting cycle
Set the chamfering distance g to the parameter No. 5130. When the
optional multiple repetitive canned cycle is provided, the chamfering
distance can be specified in G76. The chamfering angle is made smaller
than 45_ by the remaining pulses in the automatic acceleration/
deceleration circuit and servo system.
Signal address
G053
#7
CDZ
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
QSR
#1
MRC
#0
Parameter
Various setting for

multiple repetitive
canned cycle
5102
[Data type] Bit

MRC When a target figure other than a monotonically increasing or
monotonically decreasing figure is specified in a multiple repetitive
turning canned cycle (G71, G72):
1 : P/S alarm No. 064 is occurs.
NOTE
This parameter is valid for multiple repetitive turning canned
cycle type I.
980
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check
to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number
specified in address Q is:
0 : Not made.
1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot be
found, an alarm occurs and the canned cycle is not executed.)
Chamfering distance in
thread cutting cycles
G76 and G92
5130
Chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76 and G92
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 0.1
This parameter sets the chamfering distance in thread cutting cycles G76
and G92.
Depth of cut in multiple

repetitive canned cycles
G71 and G72
5132
Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C

[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch
This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles
G71 and G72.
Escape in multiple
G71 and G72.
5133
Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch
This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71
and G72.
981
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Escape in multiple
G73
5135
Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Xaxis direction
5136
Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Zaxis direction
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C

[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch
This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 of
an X, then Z axis.
Division count in
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G73
5137
Division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets the division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle
G73.
Return in multiple
canned cycles G74 and
G75
5139
Return in multiple canned cycles G74 and G75
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C

[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch
This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74
and G75.
982
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Minimum depth of cut in

multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5140
Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch
This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive

canned cycle G76.
Finishing allowance in
multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76
5141
Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C

[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.0001
inch

This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
Repetition count of final

finishing in multiple
repetitive canned cycle
G76
5142
Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] Cycle
This parameter sets the repetition count in multiple repetitive canned
cycle G76.
Tool nose angle in

multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
5143
Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76.
[Data type] Twoword

[Valid data range] 0 to 120 when FS15 tape format is used
0, 29, 30, 55, 60 and 80 when FS15 tape format is not used.
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle
G76.
983
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
Description
061
ADDRESS
P/Q
NOT Address P or Q is not specified in G70,
FOUND IN G70G73
G71, G72, or G73 command.
Modify the program.
062
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1
G71G76
2
3
4
The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or

negative value.
The repetitive count in G73 is zero or
negative value.
The negative value is specified to i or k
in G74 or G75.
A value other than zero is specified to address U or W, though i or k is zero in
G74 or G75.
A negative value is specified to d,
though the relief direction in G74 or G75
is determined.
Zero or a negative value is specified to
the height of thread or depth of cut of first
time in G76.
The specified minimum depth of cut in
G76 is greater than the height of
thread.
An unusable angle of tool tip is specified
in G76.
Modify the program.
063
SEQUENCE
NOT FOUND
NUMBER The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73 command cannot be searched. Modify the
program.
064
SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which is not monotone

MONOTONOUSLY
increase or decrease was specified in
a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or G72).
065
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1
G71G73
G00 or G01 is not commanded at the

block with the sequence number which is
specified by address P in G71, G72, or
G73 command.
2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded
in the block with a sequence number
which is specified by address P in G71 or
G72, respectively.
Modify the program.
066
IMPROPER GCODE IN An unallowable G code was commanG71G73

ded beween two blocks specified by
address P in G71, G72, or G73. Modify
the program.
067
CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with
MODE
address P and Q was specified.
Modify the program.
069
FORMAT
G70G73
984
ERROR
IN The final move command in the blocks

specified by P and Q of G70, G71, G72,
or G73 ended with chamfering or corner R.
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Cautions for multiple

repetitive canned cycle
(G70 to G76)
1 Necessary parameters (such as P, Q, X, Z, U, W, and R) must be set

correctly for an individual block that specifies a multiple repetitive
canned cycle.
2 In G71, G72, and G73 blocks having a sequence number specified
using P, always specify G00 or G01 in group 01, or otherwise a P/S
alarm (No. 65) will be issued.
3 None of G70, G71, G72, and G73 can be specified in the MDI mode.
If any of them is specified, a P/S alarm (No. 67) will be issued.
G74, G75, and G76 can be specified, however.
4 M98/M99 cannot be specified in a G70, G71, G72, G73 block, or any
block having a sequence number between those specified using P or
Q in a G70, G71, G72, or G73 block.
5 The following commands cannot be specified in any block having a
sequence number between those specified using P or Q in a G70, G71,
G72, or G73 block.
S Oneshot G code except dwell (G04)
S G code other than G00, G01, G02, or G03 in group 01
S G codes in group 06
S M98/M99
6 It is possible to stop operation during multiple repetitive canned cycle
(G70 to G76) execution to allow manual intervention. Before
restarting the multiple repetitive canned cycle, be sure to return the
tool to the point of manual intervention, because the distance through
which the tool is caused to move by manual intervention is not
included in the absolute value (the actual tool position deviates by that
distance).
7 When G70, G71, G72, or G73 is executed, P and Q cannot specify the
same sequence number in one program.
8 For a multiple repetitive canned cycle, no figure can be specified using
the direct drawing dimension programming or chamfering/corner
rounding format.
9 Also for G74, G75, and G76, it is impossible to use floatingpoint
input for P and Q. The unit of travel distance and cutting depth is the
least input increment.
10 If #1 = 2500 is executed in a custom macro, 2500.000 is assigned to
#1, and P#1 is equivalent to P2500.
11 It is impossible to apply toolnose radius compensation in G71, G72,
G73, G74, G75, G76, and G78.
12 A multiple repetitive canned cycle program cannot be used for DNC
operation.
13 No interrupttype custom macro can be used during multiple
repetitive canned cycle execution.
14 No multiple repetitive canned cycle can be executed in the advanced
985
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.1
II.13.2
Canned cycle
Multiple repetitive canned cycle
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.1
II.13.2
Canned cycle
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.1
II.13.2
Canned cycle
986
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.10
MIRROR IMAGE FOR
DOUBLE TURRETS
(T SERIES)
Mirror image can be applied to Xaxis with G code.
G68 : Double turret mirror image on
G69 : Mirror image cancel
When G68 is designated, the coordinate system is shifted to the mating

turret side, and the Xaxis sign is reversed from the programmed
command to perform symmetrical cutting. To use this function, set the
distance between the two turrets to a parameter (No. 1290).
Program example for double turrets.
Offset value of
tool post A
Tool post A
(3)
180
(1)
80
120
40
60
(2)
120
120
General
Offset value of
tool post B
Tool post B
X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at (1)

G68 ;
Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B
(120mm), and turn mirror image on.
X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position turret B at (2)
G69 ;
Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A,
and cancel mirror image.
X120.0 Z60.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at (3)
987
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Distance between two

turrets
1290
Distance between two turrets in mirror image
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Millimeter machine
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
Set the distance between two turrets in mirror image.
Reference Item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.6
Mirror image for double turrets
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.13.5
Mirror image for double turrets
988
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.11
INDEX TABLE
INDEXING FUNCTION
(M SERIES)
General
By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one

rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be
indexed.
Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped or
clamped .
Basic Procedure
The control axis that indexes the index table can be named A, B or C. It
will be referred to as B in the following discussion.
The positioning angle for the index table is commanded by the numerics
following B in the program command, which is an independent block.
Both absolute and incremental commands are possible, but the value after
B is the integer times the numeric set by the parameter:
(Example)
G00G90B100000;
G00G91B20.0;
Absolute command
(Positioning angle 10 degrees)
Incremental command
(Move distance 20 degrees)
There are two variations of the procedure (type A and type B) to set the
index table position; the difference is in the ON/OFF timing of the
position control servo. The sequence of events and the difference between
the variations are described below, followed by time charts showing them
graphically.
(1) Assume Bbbbb is ordered by the command program.
(2) The CNC turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP <F061#0> to 1.
(Type B -- When BUCLP is turned to 1 , the position control servo
for the B axis is turned ON.)
(3) On the PMC side, the clamp of the B axis is released; when completed,
the B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL <G038#6> turns to
0.
(4) The CNC then turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to 0, to
indicate it received the *BEUCL signal.
(5) When the PMC is notified that BUCLP has been turned to 0, the
PMC should turn *BEUCL to 1.
In type B, Baxis unclamp signal BUCLP is turned to 0, Baxis
position control is made in servoon state, Baxis is rotated, and the
B axis is stopped at the specified position. B axis always moves at
rapid traverse.
(6) When the B axis stops at the specified position, CNC turns Baxis
clamp signal BCLP<F061#1>to 1. In type A, signal BCLP is set to 1
and Baxis position control is made in servooff state.
(7) When BCLP is turned to 1 on the PMC side, the B axis is clamped
mechanically (with a clutch or shot pin, for example). When the clamp
is completed, the B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP <G038#7>
is turned to 0.
989
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
(8) When *BECLP is turned to 0, the CNC then turns BCLP to 0,

informing it received the *BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP
turns to 0, the B axis position control servo is turned off.)
(9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to 0, *BECLP is turned to
1. This completes the sequence.
The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7) (8) (9)
B command (independent) Bbbbb
B axis servo on for position control

B axis unclamp signal
BUCLP<F061#0>
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL<G038#6>

B axis rotation
B axis clamp signal
BCLP<F061#1>
B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP<G038#7>
Fig. 11.11 (a) Time chart for positioning index table (type A)
(1)
B command (independent) Bbbbb

B axis servo on for position control
BUCLP<F001#0>
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP<G038#6>

B axis rotation
B axis clamp signal
BCLP<F061#1>
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
Fig. 11.11 (b) Time chart for positioning index table (type B)
990
(6) (7) (8) (9)
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
B axis manual feed selection signal +Jb*1<G100>
B axis position control servo ON

B axis unclamp signal BUCLP<F061#0>
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP<G038#6>
B axis rotation
B axis deceleration signal DECb*1<X009>
B axis return completion signal ZPb*1<F094>

B axis clamp signal
BCLP<F061#1>

*1: b express the control axis number for B axis
Fig. 11.11 (c) Manual reference position return of B axis time chart (type A)
Type A and Type B
As described in the basic procedure, type A differs from type B in that the
servo used for Baxis position control is turned on or off at the different
timing.
Type A is suitable for a system in which the Baxis is clamped with shot
pins.
Type B is suitable for a system in which the Baxis is clamped with a
clutch.
Minimum indexing angle
When the Baxis is clamped with shot pins, the mechanism can be
indexed at only a limited number of positions. The minimum indexing
angle can be specified in parameter No. 5512. If an angle which is not a
multiple of this minimum indexing angle is specified in indexing, alarm
No. 135 is issued.
Direction of rotation
The direction of rotation can be set to one of the following.

Whichever direction has the shorter distance (INC, bit 3 of parameter
No. 5500)
Direction specified with a command
Usually the positive direction. Only when a particular M code is
specified in the same block, the axis rotates in the negative direction
Absolute/incremental
programming
Setting G90, bit 4 of parameter No. 5500, specifies absolute

programming, irrespective of G90/G91 mode.
991
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Signal
B axis clamp signal

BCLP<F061#1>
[Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or
shot pin.
[Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the
basic procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis clamp completion

signal
BECLP<G038#7>
[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the B axis clamp operation.
[Operation] The operation and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.

BUCLP<F061#0>
[Function] Instructs the PMC side to release the B axis from the mechanical clamp.
[Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the
basic procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis unclamp
completion signal
*BEUCP<G038#6>
[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the release of the B axis from the
mechanical clamp.
[Operation] The operation and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
992
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
G038
#7
#6
*BECLP *BEUCP
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
BCLP
#0
BUCLP
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
ROSx
#0
ROTx
F061
Parameter
Setting linear or rotation

axis
1006
NOTE

ROSx
ROTx
Description
Linear axis
D Inch/metric conversion is done.
D All coordinate values are linear axis type.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer toparameter No. 3624)

D Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are
rounded or not rounded by parameter No. 1008 #0 and #2.
D Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. Refer to parameter No. 3624.
D Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position return direction and the move amount does not exceed
one rotation.

D Machine coordinate values absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinatevalues are linear axis type and is not rounded in 0 to 360_.
D Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No. 3624)
D Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index
table indexing function (M series).
993
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Various setting for index

table indexing
5500
#7
IDX
#6
#5
#4
G90
#3
INC
#2
ABS
#1
REL
#0
DDP
[Data type] Bit

DDP Selection of decimalpoint input method of index table indexing axis
0 : Conventional method (Example ISB: B1; = 0.001 deg)
1 : Pocket calculator method (Example ISB: B1; = 1.000 deg)
REL Relative position display of index table indexing axis
0 : Not rounded by 360 degrees
1 : Rounded by 360 degrees
ABS Displaying absolute coordinate value of index table indexing axis
0 : Not rounded by 360 degrees
The index table indexing axis rotates 720 degrees (two rotations)
when G90 B720.0; is specified from the 0degree position. It rotates
in reverse direction 720 degrees (two rotations) when G90 B0.; is
specified. The absolute coordinate value then becomes 0 degree.
1 : Rounded by 360 degrees
The index table indexing axis is positioned in 40 degrees when G90
B400.0; is specified from the 0degree position. The index table
indexing axis does not rotate by two or more turns when this
parameter is set to 1. It also does not move when G90 B720.0; is
specified from the 0degree position.
INC Rotation in the G90 mode when negativedirection rotation command M
code (parameter No. 5511) is not set
0 : Not set to the shorter way around the circumference
1 : Set to the shorter way around the circumference (Set ABS, #2 of
parameter No. 5500, to 1.)
G90 Index table indexing command
0 : Judged to be an absolute/increment command according to the
G90/G91 mode
1 : Judged to be an absolute command
IDX Index table indexing sequence
0 : Type A
1 : Type B
Negative direction
rotation command M
code
5511
Negative0directionrotation command M code
[Data type] Byte

0 : Not use an M code that sets the index table rotation to the negative
direction. The rotation direction is specified using a command and
parameter (INC, #3 of parameter No. 5500).
1 to 255:
Sets an M code that sets the index table rotation to the negative
direction. The rotation is set to the negative direction only when an M
code set here is specified in the same block as an index table indexing
command. If the M code is not specified in the same block, the
rotation is always set to the positive direction.
994
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Set ABS, #2 of parameter No. 5500, to 1.
Unit of index table

indexing angle
5512
Unit of index table indexing angle
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm

This parameter sets the unit of index table indexing angle. A P/S alarm
is generated when movement other than integer multiple of the setting
value is specified.
NOTE
If zero is specified as the setting value, any command can
be specified irrespective of the unit of angle.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Caution
Description
135
ILLEGAL ANGLE
COMMAND
The index table indexing positioning

angle was instructed in other than an integral multiple of the value of the minimum angle.
Modify the program.
136
ILLEGAL AXIS
COMMAND
In index table indexing , another control

axis was instructed together with the B
axis.
Modify the program.
CAUTION
1 The secondary auxiliary function can be used if the address
is different from that of the indexing axis.
2 If the incremental command is used for indexing of the index
table, the workpiece zero point offset value on the index
table axis must always be 0. That is, the machine
coordinate system must always agree with the workpiece
coordinate system of the index table axis.
3 The dry run signal DRN is ineffective during positioning of
the B axis.
4 The machine lock signal MLK is functional during
positioning of the B axis. However, while the B axis is
moving, after the movement ends, the MLK is functional.
995
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 Specify a rotation axis as the index table indexing axis. (Set
1 in the ROTx bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1006).)
2 The servo off signal for the index table indexing axis is
invalid.
3 Single direction positioning (G60) cannot be specified.
4 While the index table is being positioned, input signals that
reset the CNC, such as *ESP (emergency stop), ERS
(external reset), and RRW (reset & rewind), are functional.
When reset is applied to the CNC, this operation stops.
Further, if *SP (automatic operation stop signal) turns to 0,
axis movement is stopped and the equipment enters the
automatic operation stop state.
If a stop at an any position is not suitable for the machine,
appropriate processing is required on the machine.
5 If a reset occurs while the system is awaiting the completion
of clamping or unclamping, the clamp or unclamp signal is
cleared. The CNC exits from the completion wait status.
6 Manual operation of jog feed, incremental feed and handle
feed cannot be used with the B axis, but manual reference
position return is possible. If reset is applied during the
movement of B axis, the manual reference position return
operation should be performed.
7 No movement can be performed by automatic return from
the reference position (G29), return to the second reference
position (G30), or selection of the machine coordinate
system (G53).
8 Only the fourth axis can be used as the index table indexing
axis.
Reference Item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.13.11
Index table indexing function
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.13.5
Index table indexing function
996
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.12
SCALING (M SERIES)
General
Scaling up or down
along all axes at the
same rate of
magnification
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).

The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be scaled up or
down with the same or different rates of magnification.
The magnification rate can be specified in the program.
Unless specified in the program, the magnification rate specified in the
parameter is applied.
Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
It depends on parameter SCR (No. 5400#07) which value is selected.
Specify an axis to be subjected to scaling, using parameter SCLx (bit 0
of parameter No. 5401).
If scaling P is not specified on the block of scaling (G51X_Y_Z_P_ ;), the
scaling magnification set to parameter (No. 5411) is applicable.
If X,Y,Z are omitted, the tool position where the G51 command was
specified serves as the scaling center.
SCALING UP OR DOWN ALONG ALL AXES
AT THE SAME RATE OF MAGNIFICATION
Format
Meaning of command
G51X_Y_Z_P_ ; Scaling start

Scaling is effective.
(Scaling mode)
G50 ;
X_Y_Z_ : Absolute command for

center coordinate value
of scaling
P_
: Scaling magnification
Scaling cancel
P4
P3
P4
P1
P0
P3
P2
P2
P1
P0:Scaling center
Fig. 11.12 (a) Scaling (P1 P2 P3 P4 P1P2P3P4)
997
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Scaling of each axis,

programmable mirror
image (negative
magnification)
B63003EN1/02
Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative

magnification is specified, a mirror image is applied. First of all, set a
parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) which validates each axis scaling (mirror
image).
Then, set parameter SCLx (No. 5401#0) to enable scaling along each axis.
Least input increment of scaling magnification of each axis (I, J, K) is
0.001 or 0.00001( set parameter SCR (No. 5400#7)).
Magnification is set to parameter 5421 within the range 0.00001 to
9.99999 or 0.001 to 9.999.
If a negative value is set, mirror image is effected.
If magnification I, J or K is not commanded, a magnification value set to
parameter (No. 5421) is effective. However, a value other than 0 must be
set to the parameter.
SCALING UP OR DOWN ALONG EACH AXES AT A DIFFERENT
RATE OF MAGNIFICATION (MIRROR IMAGE)
Format
Meaning of command
G51_X_Y_Z_I_J_K_; Scaling start
X_Y_Z_: Absolute command for

center coordinate value
of scaling
I_J_K_: Scaling magnification for
X axis, Y axis and Z axis
respectively
Scaling
is effective.
(Scaling
mode)
G50
Scaling cancel
a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis

c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis
0 : Scaling center
Y axis
Programmed figure
C 0
A
B
Scaled figure
Fig. 11.12 (b) Scaling of each axis
998
X axis
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Setting valid/invalid and

magnification of scaling
#7
SCR
5400
#6
XSC
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

XSC Axis scaling and programmable mirror image
0 : Invalidated (The scaling magnification is specified by P.)
1 : Validated
SCR Scaling magnification unit
0 : 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1 : 0.001 times
Valid/invalid setting to
each axis scaling
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5401
#0
SCLx

SCLx Scaling for every axis
0 : Invalidated
1 : Validated
Magnification used when

scaling magnification is
not specified
5411
Magnification used when scaling magnification is not specified

[Data type] Twoword
[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No. 5400)
This parameter sets the scaling magnification. This setting value is used
when a scaling magnification (P) is not specified in the program.
NOTE
Parameter No. 5421 becomes valid when scaling for every
axis is valid. (XSC, #6 of parameter No. 5400 is 1.)
999
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Scaling magnification for

every axis
5421
Scaling magnification for every axis

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] * 999999X* 1, 1X 999999
This parameter sets the scaling magnification for every axis.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Reference item
Description
141
CAN NOT COMMAND G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the

G51 IN CRC
tool offset mode.
Modify the program.
142
ILLEGAL SCALE RATE
143
SCALED MOTION DATA The scaling results, move distance,

OVERFLOW
coordinate value and circular radius exceed the maximum command value.
Correct the program or scaling magnification.
Scaling magnification is commanded in

other than 1 999999.
Correct the scaling magnification setting (G51 Pp, or parameter 5411 or
5421).
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.14.9
Scaling (G50, G51)
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.14.9
Scaling (G50, G51)
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.5
Scaling (G50, G51)
1000
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.13
COORDINATE
SYSTEM ROTATION
General
A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes

possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation command
when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the
programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is a pattern
comprising some identical shapes in the positions rotated from a shape,
the time required for programming and the length of the program can be
reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after
rotation.
Y
Angle of rotation
Center of rotation
Fig. 11.13 (a) Coordinate system rotation
1001
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
FORMAT
G17
G18
G19
G68 (G68.1)__R_ ; Start rotation of a coordinate system.

Coordinate system rotation mode
(The coordinate system is rotated.)
G69 (G69.1);
Coordinate system rotation cancel command
Note:G68/G69 for M series, G68.1/G69.1 for T series.

MEANING OF COMMAND
G17 (G18 or G19) : Select the plane in which contains the figure to be
rotated.
__
Absolute command for two of the x_,y_,and Z_ axes that
correspond to the current plane selected by a
command (G17, G18, or G19). The command specifies
the coordinates of the center of rotation for the values
specified subsequent to G68.
R_
Angular displacement with a positive value indicates
counter clockwise rotation. Parameter 5400#0
selects whether the specified angular displacement is
always considered an absolute value or is considered an
absolute or incremental value depending on the specified
G code (G90 or G91).
Least input increment : 0.001 deg
Valid data range
: 360.000 to 360.000
Rotation plane G17
Center of
rotation
(,)
Angle of rotation
R
Fig. 11.13 (b) Coordinate system rotation
1002
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Angle specification
method of coordinate
system rotation
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
5400
#1
#0
RIN
[Data type] Bit

RIN Coordinate rotation angle command (R)
0 : Specified by an absolute method
1 : Specified by G90 or G91
Angular displacement
used when no angular
displacement is
specified for coordinate
system rotation
5410
Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for

coordinate system rotation
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data] 0.001 degrees
This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system
rotation. When the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation
is not specified with address R in the block where G68 is specified, the
setting of this parameter is used as the angular displacement for
coordinate system rotation.
Alarm and message
Number

Message
144
Reference item
ILLEGAL
LECTED
PLANE
Description
SE- The coordinate rotation plane and arc

or cutter compensation C plane must
be the same. Modify the program.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.14.10
Coordinate system rotation

(G68, G69)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.7

(G68.1, G69.1)
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.14.8

(G68, G69)
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.6

(G68, G69)
1003
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.14
THREEDIMENSIONAL
COORDINATE
CONVERSION
(M SERIES)
General
The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the

center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular
displacement. This coordinate conversion function is quite useful for
threedimensional machining using a diesinking machine. By applying
threedimensional coordinate conversion to a program generated for
machining on XY plane, identical machining can be executed on a desired
plane.
Threedimensional coordinate
conversion
1004
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Setting relative position

and absolute position
3104
#7
DAC
#6
DAL
#5
DRC
#4
DRL
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

DRL Relative position
0 : The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool
length offset.
DRC Relative position
0 : The actual position displayed takes into account cutter compensation.
1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account cutter
compensation.
DAL Absolute position
0 : The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool
length offset.
DAC Absolute position
0 : The actual position displayed takes into account cutter compensation.
1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account cutter
compensation.
To execute absolute position display with threedimensional coordinate
conversion, the DRL, DRC, DAL, and DAC bits must be set to 1.
Setting absolute
coordinates in the
threedimensional
mode
3106
#7
#6
DAK
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

DAK When absolute coordinates are displayed in the threedimensional
coordinate conversion mode:
0 : Coordinates in the program coordinate system are displayed.
1 : Coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system are displayed.
This parameter is significant only in threedimensional coordinate
conversion mode.
1005
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
Description
047
ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT
048
BASIC 3
FOUND
5043
TOO MANY G68 NEST- G68, threedimensional coordinate

ING
conversion, was specified three times
or more.
5044
G68 FORMAT ERROR
AXIS
For startup of threedimensional tool

compensation or threedimensional
coordinate conversion, two or more
axes were specified in the same direction (basic and parallel axes.)
NOT For startup of threedimensional tool

compensation or threedimensional
coordinate conversion, the three basic
axes used when Xp,Yp, and Zp are
omitted were not specified in parameter
No. 1022.
A format error occurred in a block including G68. The alarm is issued when
any of the following takes place.
(1) In a block including G68, any of I, J,
and K is not specified (the option for
coordinate rotation is not provided).
(2) In a block including G68, all of I, J,
and K is 0.
(3) In a block including G68, R is not
specified.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
1006
II.13.10
Threedimensional coordinate
conversion (G68, G69)
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.15
RETRACE
(M SERIES)
General
A tool can retrace the tool path along which the tool has moved. This
operation is referred to as retrace. In addition, a tool can move forward
again along the path that the tool has retraced. This operation is referred
to as reforward. The tool can then resume machining according to the
program when it returns to the position where it started retrace.
Retrace signal RVS 1

Retrace end, reforwarding start
Retrace signal RVS 0
Retrace start
By using the retrace signal RVS, which is an input signal from the PMC
to the control unit, retrace and reforward can be performed. Retrace is
performed when the retrace signal RVS turns to 1. Reforward
operation is performed when the retrace signal turns to 0. In retrace, a
tool can retrace blocks that have been executed in the automatic operation
mode (memory command, tape command, manual data input), but a limit
is imposed on the number of blocks that can be retraced. For detailed
information, refer to the operators manual.
Whether to use the same federate as specified for normal operation or use
a feedrate dedicated to retrace can be determined by setting parameter No.
1414.
1007
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Retrace signal (RVS)
<G007#0>
[Function] Directs the control unit to retrace the tool along the path which the tool
was moved in automatic operation (memory command, tape command,
manual data input).
[Operation] When RVS turns to 1 while the tool is being moved forward (hereafter
referred to as forward), the tool retraces the tool path along which it was
moved. Note, however, that the tool does not start retrace immediately
after this signal turns to 1 ; the tool starts retrace after the block
performing the current forward operation is executed. When RVS turns
to 0 while retrace is in progress, the tool switches from retrace operation
to reforward. In this case also, the tool does not start reforward to
resume machining immediately after this signal turns to 0 retrace; the
tool starts reforward after retracing all commands of the block currently
subject to retrace.
The movement of a tool can be immediately switched from forward to
retrace or from retrace to reforward. For this purpose, first turn the feed
hold signal *SP to 0 to stop automatic operation. Then, change the state
of RVS after the automatic operation start inprogress signal STL turns
to 0 and the automatic operation stop state is set. And the feed hold
lamp SPL turns to 1. Next, turn feed hold signal *SP the automatic
operation start signal ST from 1 to 0 to start automatic operation.
Then, the tool can switch its movement to retrace or reforward during
execution of a block.
Retraceinprogress
signal (RVSL)
<F082#2>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that retrace is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal turns to 1when:
Tool is in retrace with the retrace signal RVS turned to 1.
This signal turns to 0
The tool is in forward or reforward with the retrace signal RVS turned
to 0.
The tool is at stop because of no block to retrace during retracing.
When the tool is in retrace, the M functions, S functions, T functions, and
second auxiliary functions are executed in the same way as when the tool
is moving forward. During retrace, this signal can be used on the PMC, if
required, to prevent these functions from being executed in the same way
as when the tool is moving forward.
Particularly when an M function, S function, T function, or second
auxiliary function is specified in a block containing a move command, the
positions where the code signals and strobe signal are output differ,
depending on whether the tool is in forward (or reforward) or retrace. So,
take action on the PMC by using this signal and distribution end signal
DEN as required.
1008
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Position to which auxiliary

function is output during
retracing
Retrace start
(Retrace signal RVS is 1)
Block in which the move command and

auxiliary function are included
Position to which auxiliary function

is output during forwarding
Retrace end
Reforwarding start
(Retrace signal RVS is 0)
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RVS
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
RVSL
#1
#0
G007
F082
Parameter
1414
Feedrate for retrace
[Data type] Twoword

This parameter sets the feedrate for retrace when the retrace function is
used.
(1) For rapid traverse
[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
[Valid data range]
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 to 240000
6 to 100000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 to 96000
6 to 48000
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 to 240000
6 to 100000
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the rapid traverse rate that
is set in parameter No. 1420 is used for retrace.
(2) For cutting feed
When a value other than 0 is specified in this parameter, the same
feedrate as an F command specified using the value without a decimal
point is set and is used for retrace. When 0 is specified in this
parameter, the programmed feedrate (F command) is used for retrace.
1009
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
While a tool is in retrace, the retraceinprogress signal RVSL is sent, and

the character string RVRS blinks on the CRT screen to signal that the tool
is currently in retrace. When a tool is in reforward, the character string
RTRY blinks to signal that the tool is currently in reforward. The
indication of RTRY continues until the tool returns to the block where
retrace was started, that is, until forward movement is resumed. When
there are no more retraceable blocks, the character string RVED blinks to
signal that no further retrace can take place.
Warning
WARNING
Positioning (G00)
If nonlinearinterpolation positioning is executed (the LRP
bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 1401) is set to 0), the retrace tool
path will not agree with the forward tool path. The
reforward tool path agrees with the forward tool path.
If the linear interpolation positioning is executed (the LRP bit
(bit 1 of parameter No. 1401) is set to 1), the retrace tool
path agrees with the forward tool path.
Nonlinearinterpolation
positioning (LRP=0)
Reference item
positioning (LRP=1)
Forward tool path

Reverse tool path
Reforward tool path
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
1010
III.4.11
Retrace function
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.16
MACRO COMPILER/
EXECUTER
General
There are two types of NC programs; those which, once created, are
scarcely changed, and those which are changed for each machining type.
The former are programs created by the custom macro, and the latter are
machining programs. If programs of these types are executed
simultaneously, a battery may run out or the custom macro may be
destroyed by error operation.
Such problems can be solved by this function. The custom macro created
by a machine tool builder is converted to an execute-form program, be
stored in the FLASH ROM module, and be executed.
Features
(1) Since the program is stored after converted to an execute-form
program, the execution speed is high. The machining time is then
reduced, and the precision is improved.
(2) Since the program is stored in FLASH ROM, there is no problem of
battery extinction or custom macro destruction by error operation.
The reliability is improved.
(3) Since the stored program is not displayed on a program screen, the
know-how of the machine tool builder is protected.
(4) Since the custom macro is stored in FLASH ROM, the program edit
memory can be used efficiently.
(5) The user can call the macro easily without knowing the stored
program. A custom macro can be created and executed in the program
edit memory as usual.
(6) An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or
selecting screens by the soft key. The machine tool builder can extend
the control function by using such functions as machining program
creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC
data read/write functions.
Note
NOTE
1 When the macro executor is attached, the order-made
macro cannot be specified.
2 To enable graphic display using the macro executor, the
graphic display option is required.
Reference item
Macro compiler/executer programming manual (B61803E1)
1011
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.17
SMALL HOLE PECK
DRILLING CYCLE
(M SERIES)
General
This is a repetition of a peck drilling cycle in which when an overload

torque detection signal (skip signal is used) is received with an arbor
having an overload torque detection function during drilling, the tool is
retracted, and the spindle speed and cutting feedrate are changed to retry
machining.
The cycle is realized by:
* X and Yaxis positioning
* Positioning at point R along the Zaxis
* Cutting along the Zaxis (first time, depth of cut Q, incremental)
Retracting
(bottom of hole minimum clearance , incremental)
Retracting
(
to point R, absolute)
Forwarding
(point R
to point with hole bottom + clearance , absolute)
Cutting
(second and subsequent times, cut of depth Q + , incremental)
Repeated until
point Z is reached
* Dwell
* Return to point R along the Zaxis (or initial point) = end of cycle
G83(G98)
G83(G99)
Initial level
Point R
Overload torque
Dwell
1012
Point Z
Point R
Overload torque
Dwell
Point Z
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Change of cutting
conditions
Changing of cutting
feedrate
The cutting conditions are changed at each pecking operation (forwarding

cutting retracting) during one G83 cycle. (Appropriate setting of
bits 1 and 2 of parameter No. 5160 can specify that the cutting conditions
are not to be changed.)
The cutting feedrate programmed with the F word is changed during each
of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5166
and 5167 specify the ratio of change for a case in which a skip signal was
received during the previous cutting operation and a case in which no skip
signal was received during the previous cutting operation, respectively.
Cutting feed rate = F
(First time) a = 1.0

(Second and subsequent times) a = a
b B 100
(where b is the ratio of change for the first time)
Skip during the previous cutting: b = b1% (parameter No. 5166)
No skip during the previous cutting: b = b2% (parameter No. 5167)
When the ratio a at which the cutting feedrate is changed becomes less
than the ratio specified in parameter No. 5168, changing the cutting
feedrate is discontinued. The upper limit to the newly specified cutting
feedrate is the maximum cutting feedrate.
Changing of spindle
speed
The spindle speed programmed with the S word is changed during each
of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Parameter Nos. 5164
and 5165 specify the ratio of change for a case in which a skip signal was
received during the previous cutting operation and a case in which no skip
signal was received during the previous cutting operation, respectively.
Spindle speed = S
(First time) g = 1.0

(Second and subsequent times) g = g
d B 100
(where d is the ratio of change for the first time)
Skip during the previous cutting: d = d1% (parameter No. 5164)
No skip during the previous cutting: d = d2% (parameter No. 5165)
If the cutting feedrate is clamped at the lower limit, the spindle speed is
not changed. The upper limit to the newly specified spindle speed is the
maximum S analog data.
1013
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Overload torque signal
SKIP<X004#7>
[Function] Retracts a tool if an overload torque is applied it.
[Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the control unit operates as follows:
S Assuming that an overload torque is applied to a tool, retracts it, and
changes the spindle speed and cutting feedrate, then retries machining.
S This signal is valid, when the drill axis is between points R and Z and
is moving forward or in cutting operation (so that the tool can retract).
NOTE
This signal is used also as a skip signal. (See Section 14.3.)
Smalldiameter peck
drilling in progress
signal PECK2<F066#5>
[Function] Indicates whether smalldiameter peck drilling is in progress.
[Output condition] This signal becomes 1 under the following conditions.
S When the tool returns from drill axis point R positioning to R
point/initial level, after it was positioned at the hole position along a
nondrill axis.
S The signal does not become 1 during positioning at the hole
position.
Signal address
X004
#7
SKIP
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
PECK2
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
NOL
#1
OLS
#0
F066
Parameter
5160
[Data type] Bit

OLS When an overload torque signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a
small diameter, the feed and spindle speed are
0 : Not changed.
1 : Changed.
1014
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque
signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feed and
spindle speed are:
0 : Not changed.
1 : Changed.
5163
M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter
[Data type] Twoword

[Unit of data]
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode
of a small diameter.
5164
Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted after an
overload torque signal is received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed
when the tool is retracted because the overload torque signal is received in
a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
S2 = S1
d1 B 100
S1: Spindle speed to be chaged
S2: Spindle speed changed
d1 is set as a percentage.
5165
Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted without
an overload torque signal received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed
when the tool is retracted without the overload torque signal received in a
peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
S2 = S1
d2 B 100
S1: Spindle speed to be chaged
S2: Spindle speed changed
d2 is set as a percentage.
1015
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
5166
B63003EN1/02
Percentage of cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted after an

overload torque signal is received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed
when the tool is retracted because the overload torque signal is received in
a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
F2 = F1
b1 B 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Changed cutting feedrate
b1 is set as a percentage.
5167
Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted without
an overload torque signal received
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate tot be changed
when the tool is retracted without the overload torque signal received in a
F2 = F1
b2 B 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Changed cutting feedrate
b2 is set as a percentage.
5168
Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a
small diameter
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting
feedrate changed repeatedly in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter to
the specified cutting feedrate.
FL = F
b3 B 100
F: Specified cutting feedrate
FL: Changed cutting feedrate
Set b3 as a percentage.
1016
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
5170
Number of the macro variable to which the total number of retractions during cutting
is output
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the number of the macro variable to which the total
number of times the tool is retracted during cutting in a peck drilling cycle
mode of a small diameter is output. The total number cannot be output to
common variables 500 to 599.
5171
Number of the macro variable to which the total umber of retractions because of an
overload signal is output
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets the common variable number of the custom macro to
which the number of times the tool is retracted after the overload signal is
received during cutting in a peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter is
output. The total number cannot be output to common variables 500 to
599.
5172
Speed of retraction to point R when no address I is issued
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] mm/min
This parameter sets the speed of retraction to point R when no address I is
issued in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
5173
Speed of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no address I is issued
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] mm/min
This parameter sets the speed of advancing to the position just before the
bottom of a previously machined hole when no address I is issued in a
1017
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
5174
Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Linear axis
(millimeter input)
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Linear axis
(inch input)
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small

diameter.
Alarm and message
Diagnostic display
520
Total number of retract operations during cutting since G83 was issued
521
Total number of retract operations due to reception of the overload torque signal
since G83 was issued
The indications of DGN Nos. 520 and 521 are cleared by G80.
522
Coordinates at which the drill axis started retracting (least input command)
523
Difference between the previous and current coordinates at which the drill axis
started retracting (least input increment: previous current)
Warning
WARNING
Forwarding or retracting is not performed by rapid traverse
positioning.
Instead, it is performed with the same
interpolation as for cutting feed. This means exponential
acceleration/deceleration is performed; however, the tool
life management function does not count the tool life during
forwarding or retracting.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II. 13.1.7 Small hole peck drilling cycle
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II. 13.1.7 Small hole peck drilling cycle
1018
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
11.18
HIGHSPEED CYCLE
MACHINING
RETRACTING
General
When highspeed cycle machining is to be interrupted, retracting can be

performed by setting the highspeed cycle machining retract signal HSRT
to 1.
It is also possible to specify and execute a special type of escape after
retracting by previously registering a retract cycle in the highspeed cycle
header.
Retracting
To use retracting during highspeed cycle machining, it is necessary to

previously set up an escape direction and speed for each axis using
parameter No. 7514 and an amount of retracting (based on the specified
distribution count) using parameter No. 7515. If the highspeed cycle
machining retract signal HSRT becomes 1 during highspeed cycle
machining, a parameterspecified escape operation is performed
simultaneously with the current cycle operation. This composite
operation enables the tool to escape while protecting the workpiece and
tool from damage.
Workpiece
rotation axis (C)
Turner axis (Y)

(Z)
(X)
Fig. 11.18 Retracting performed on lead machine
If a positive escape direction and speed (fx) for the Xaxis are
previously specified using parameters, turning on the retract signal
enables the workpiece to retract along the Xaxis simultaneously with
operation on the turner axis and rotation around the Caxis. In
addition, if an escape direction and speed for the Zaxis are specified
previously, a simultaneous operation like an XZ escape operation can
also be performed.
Retracting begins in a distribution period during which the retract signal
HSRT <G065#3> becomes 1. It ends when a retracting distribution count
specified in parameter No. 7515 expires, or when distribution for the
current cycle is completed. In this case, the cycle connection information
and the repetition cycle count are ignored, and retract operation ends at
the end of the current one cycle. Therefore, the actual distribution count
used for retracting simultaneously with usual movement can range from
1 to the distribution count specified in parameter No. 7515 or a
distribution count that is applied until the end of the corresponding cycle.
If no retract cycle is registered, the CNC causes automatic operation to
pause after retracting ends. If a retract cycle is registered, the CNC enters
a retract cycle state.
1019
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
When retracting begins, the retracting signal HSRA <F062#2> becomes

1. Once retracting begins, resetting the retract signal HSRT to 0 does not
stop retract operation.
[Example]
(1) Parameter No. 7515 setting < remaining distribution count for the
current cycle
A number of pulses for retracting based on the parameterspecified
distribution count are superimposed on a usual operation. When the
operation ends, the CNC shifts to an automatic operation pause or
retract cycle execution.
Machining cycle data
First cycle
First occurrence of
the second cycle
Retracting
Second occurrence
of the second cycle
Parameterspecified distribution count
HSRT signal
HSRA signal
Pulses superimposed for retracting

First cycle
First occurrence of
the second cycle
Automatic operation pause
If the parameter No. 7515 setting is 0, the distribution count is assumed

to be infinite, allowing retracting to continue until the current cycle ends.
1020
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
(2) Parameter No. 7515 setting >= remaining distribution count for the
current cycle
A number of pulses for retracting until the end of the current cycle are
superimposed on a usual operation. When retracting ends, the CNC
shifts to an automatic operation pause or retract cycle execution.
First cycle
First occurrence of
the second cycle
Second occurrence
of the second cycle
Parameterspecified
distribution count
Retracting
HSRT signal
HSRA signal
Pulses superimposed for retracting

First cycle
First occurrence of
the second cycle
The escape direction and speed for each axis are specified in parameter
No. 7514 (axis type parameter). An algebraic sign prefixed to the escape
speed represents the escape direction.
(Example) Parameter No. 7514: X = 10 (for metric machine)
Y = 20
Z=0
Retracting occurs at a speed of 10 mm/min in the positive direction
along the Xaxis and 20 mm/min in the negative direction along the
Yaxis, but does not occur along the Zaxis (0 mm/min).
A reset interrupts retracting.
Retract cycle
Cycle data can be registered with the cycle header. This data is used to
move the tool to a safer position or to decelerate highspeed motion about
a rotation axis and highspeed travel along other axes to a stop after
retracting ends.
Whether to enable retracting can be selected using a data type
specification variable in the cycle header. If retracting is disabled, the
retract signal is ignored. In a connection cycle, retracting begins with the
first enabledretracting cycle to appear.
If no retract cycle is registered, the CNC shifts to an automatic operation
pause (see Section 5.1) after retracting. If a retract cycle is registered,
shifting to an automatic operation pause occurs after the retract cycle is
executed.
1021
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Previously registering a retract cycle in the highspeed cycle header

causes the retract cycle to be executed after retracting. If the machining
cycle data is cycle connection information indicating that connection of
more than one machining cycle is attempted, it is possible to register
different retract cycles for each machining cycle or the same retract cycle
for all machining cycles.
A retract cycle is created using the same specification methods (including
the cycle connection, cycle repetition count, and data specification
methods) as for ordinary cycles.
The retracting signal HSRA <F062#2> remains 1 during retracting.
(Example)
First cycle
First occurrence of
the second cycle
Second occurrence
of the second cycle
Retracting
HSRT signal
HSRA signal
Retracting
First cycle
First occurrence of
the second cycle
Retract cycle 1
Cycle 2
Resetting parameter No. 7514 for retracting to all 0s makes it possible to

execute a retract cycle without retracting (additional retract movement =
0).
A reset interrupts retracting.
Learning control
When retracting begins, a command is issued to disable learning control

for all axes.
1022
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Highspeed cycle header
Bit 7 of the data type specification variable in the highspeed cycle header
specifies whether to enable retracting. If this bit is off, the retract signal
HSRT is ignored; so neither retracting nor retract cycle is executed.
Data type specification variable
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
r6 r5 r4 r3 r2 r1 RT t6 t5 t4 t3 t2 t1
RT: Retracting selection flag

= 0 : Retracting is not to be performed.
= 1 : Retracting is to be performed.
If retracting is enabled (RT = 1), the sixthaxis data specification variable
works as the retract cycle connection information. This variable specifies
a retract cycle number (1 to 999). If the variable is 0, it is assumed that
there is no retract cycle.
NOTE
When the highspeed cycle machining retract function is
used, up to five axes can be controlled for highspeed cycle
machining.
Header configuration when retracting is enabled

#20001/20017/20033..
(#200001/200017/200033..)
Cycle repetition count
#20002/20018/20034..
(#200002/200018/200034..)
Cycle connection information
#20003/20019/20035..
(#200003/200019/200035..)
Data count
#20004/20020/20036..
(#200004/200020/200036..)
Data type
RT=1
#20005/20021/20037..
(#200005/200021/200037..)
1staxis data specification variable
#20006/20022/20038..
(#200006/200022/200038..)
2ndaxis data specification variable
#20007/20023/20039..
(#200007/200023/200039..)
3rdaxis data specification variable
#20008/20024/20040..
(#200008/200024/200040..)
4thaxis data specification variable
#20009/20025/20041..
(#200009/200025/200041..)
5thaxis data specification variable
#20010/20026/20042..
Retract cycle connection information
(#200010/200026/200042..)
#20011/20027/20043..
(#200011/200027/200043..)
1staxis fixeddata count
#20012/20028/20044..
(#200012/200028/200044..)
2ndaxis fixeddata count
#20013/20029/20045..
(#200013/200029/200045..)
3rdaxis fixeddata count
#20014/20030/20046..
(#200014/200030/200046..)
4thaxis fixeddata count
#20015/20031/20047..
(#200015/200031/200047..)
5thaxis fixeddata count
#20016/20032/20048..
(#200016/200032/200048..)
(Not used)
1023
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Pcode variable numbers enclosed in parentheses apply to
data variable addition A/B.
Signal
Highspeed cycle
machining retract signal
HSRT<G065#3>
[Function] Starts highspeed cycle machining retracting.
D If highspeed cycle machining is under way, and retracting is enabled
for the current machining cycle, the control unit begins highspeed
cycle machining retracting.
Highspeed cycle
machining retracting
signal
HSRA<F062#2>
[Function] Indicates that highspeed cycle machining retracting is under way.
[Output condition] This signal becomes 1 during:
D Highspeed cycle machining retracting or retract cycle.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
HRST
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
HSRA
#1
#0
G065
F062
1024
11. PROGRAM COMMAND
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
7514
Escape direction and speed for highspeed cycle machining retracting

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
ISA, ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
30 X 240000
30 X 240000
30 X 100000
30 X 100000
Inch machine
0.01 inch/min
30 X 96000
30 X 96000
30 X 4800
30 X 4800
This parameter specifies the escape direction and speed for each axis. An
algebraic sign prefixed to the escape speed represents the escape
direction.
7515
Retracting distribution count for highspeed cycle machining retracting
[Data type] Twoword

This parameter specifies a retracting distribution count for highspeed
cycle machining retracting. If the machining cycle ends before the
specified distribution count expires, retracting ends immediately. If this
parameter is 0, it is assumed that the retracting distribution cycle is
indefinite; so retracting continues until the current cycle ends.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
11.5
1025
Highspeed cycle machining
12
B63003EN1/02
DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
1026
B63003EN1/02
12.1
DISPLAY/SET
12.1.1
Clock Function
General
Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display

screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day.
The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The time
will be told through the window on the PMC side.
Time information can be read and written.
System variables for time information
Reference item
Variable
number
Function
#3001
This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1millisecond increments at all times. When the power is turned on, the value
of this variable is reset to 0. When 65535 milliseconds is
reached, the value of this timer returns to 0.
#3002
This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1hour increments when the cycle start lamp is on. This timer preserves its
value even when the power is turned off. When 1145324.612
hours is reached, the value of this timer returns to 0.
#3011
This variable can be used to read the current date (year/month/

day). Year/month/day information is converted to an apparent
decimal number. For example, Janualy 23, 1997 is represented
as 19970123.
#3012
This variable can be used to read the current time (hours/minutes/seconds). Hours/minutes/seconds information is converted to an apparent decimal number. For example, 34 minutes
and 56 seconds after 3 p.m. is represented as 153456.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.4.5 Displaying and Setting Run

Time,Parts Count, and Time
OPERATORS MANUAL

OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)

OPERATORS MANUAL

OPERATORS MANUAL

OPERATORS MANUAL

1027
B63003EN1/02
12.1.2
Displaying Operation
History
General
This function displays a history of the key and signal operations, performed by
the CNC operator, upon the occurrence of a failure or CNC alarm. The history
can also be displayed for previously generated CNC alarms.
The following history data is recorded:
(1) MDI key operation sequences, performed by the CNC operator
Example: A ~Z, <POS>, <PAGE >, [SF1]

(2) On/off status transitions of selected input and output signals
Example: G0000.7 , SBK
(3) CNC alarm information
Example: P/S0010
(4) Time (date, time) stamp
Example: 92/01/20
09:15:30
The history data can be output to an input/output device, connected via
the reader/punch interface. Previously output history data can be input
from an input/output device.
Parameter
3106
#7
OHS
#6
#5
#4
OHD
#3
#2
#1
#0
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

OHD The operation history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
OHS Operation history sampling is:
0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed.
#7
3112
#6
#5
OPH
#4
#3
NOTE
To put this parameter setting in effect, switch the power off
then back on again.
OPH Specifies whether to enable the operation history function.

0 : Enabled.
1 : Disabled.
1028
B63003EN1/02
3122
Time interval used to record time data in operation history
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Minutes
Time data is recorded in operation history at set intervals. When 0 is
specified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed as the default.
However, note that time data is not recorded if there is no data to be
recorded at the specified time.
Note
NOTE
1 While the operation history screen is displayed, history data
is not recorded.
2 When the duration of the on/off state of an input signal is 16
msec or shorter, that state is not recorded in the history. In
addition, note that some signals are not recorded in the
history.
3 Once the memory area becomes full, the oldest data is
deleted to allow new data to be recorded. The memory area
can store information corresponding to approximately 8000
key strokes.
4 Recorded history data is held in memory even after the
power is turned off. Note, however, that the history data is
erased by performing an entirememory clear operation.
5 For the operation history function, sampling is disabled
when bit 7 (OHS) of parameter No. 3106 is set to 1.
6 Be careful to set the date and time correctly.
When the time is recorded at regular intervals, but no data
is recorded within a defined period, the time for that period
is not recorded.
To input and output operation history data, the
reader/punch interface option is required.
1029
B63003EN1/02
12.1.3
Help Function
General
The help function displays on the screen detailed information about

alarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The following
information is displayed.
Detailed information of
alarms
When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erroneous machining

program is executed, the CNC enters the alram state. The help screen
displays detailed information about the alarm that has been issued and
how to reset it. The detailed information is displayed only for a limited
number of P/S alarms. These alarms are often misunderstood and are
rather difficult to understand.
Operation method
If you are not sure about a CNC operation, refer to the help screen for
information about each operation.
Parameter table
When setting or referring to a system parameter, if you are not sure of the
number of the parameter, the help screen displays a list of parameter Nos.
for each function.
Note
NOTE
The user cannot switch the screen display from the PMC
screen or CUSTOM screen to the help screen.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.13
HELP FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13
HELP FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.13
HELP FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13
HELP FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.15
HELP FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.15
HELP FUNCTION
1030
B63003EN1/02
12.1.4
Displaying Alarm
History
General
Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on the
screen.
The following information items are displayed.
(1) The date the alarm was issued
(2) Alarm No.
(3) Alarm message (some contains no message)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.7.2
ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.7.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.2
12.1.5
Servo Tuning Screen
General
On the servo tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of

the servo motor and statuses being monitored are listed for each axis.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3111
[Data type] Bit

SVS Servo tuning screen
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
1031
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SVS
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL 5.2
16i/160i/18i/180i/ (B63005EN)
21i/210i
Servo Tuning Screen
12.1.6
Spindle Setting and
Tuning Screen
General
On the spindle setting and tuning screen, parameters required for basic
adjustment of the serial spindle and statuses being monitored are listed.
The screen is only for the main spindle connected to the first amplifier.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
3111
#2
SVP
#1
SPS
#0

SPS Spindle setting and tuning screen
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
SVP Synchronization errors displayed on the spindle setting and tuning screen
0 : Instantaneous values are displayed.
1 : Peakhold values are displayed.
Reference item
Series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL 8.1.2
16i/160i/18i/180i/ (B63005EN)
21i/210i/20i
1032
Spindle setting and tuning

screen
B63003EN1/02
12.1.7
Waveform Diagnosis
Display
General
Waveform diagnosis is classified into two main types.

(1) Oneshot type
Oneshot waveform diagnosis provides graphs of waveforms to
illustrate changes in the following data.
In oneshot waveform diagnosis, the start of data collection can be
triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal.
This function is designed to facilitate the adjustment of servo motors
and spindle motors.
a. Servo motor error value along each axis, number of distributed
pulses, torque, feedrate, current, and thermal simulation data
b. Combined feedrate for the first, second, and third axes
c. Spindle motor speed, load meter reading, and position deviation,
converted to spindle position
d. On/off status of the machine signal, specified by a signal address
(2) Stored type
In stored waveform diagnosis, changes in the following data are
recorded. When a servo alarm is issued, the recorded data can be read
and displayed graphically as a waveforms.
In stored waveform diagnosis, the end of data collection can be
triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal.
This function is designed to facilitate the determination of a faulty
location.
Stored data can be output via the reader/punch interface.
a. Servo motor error value along each axis, number of distributed
pulses, torque, feedrate, current, and thermal simulation data
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3112
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SGD
[Data type] Bit

SGD Servo waveform
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
NOTE
1033
B63003EN1/02
3120
Time from the output of an alarm to the termination of sampling (waveform diagnosis function)
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms
This parameter specifies the time allowed from the time a servo alarm
condition occurs until data collection and recording are stopped in the
waveform diagnosis function; data collection can be continued
additionally for the specified time.
Note
NOTE
1 Once the memory area becomes full, the oldest data is
deleted to allow new data to be recorded (stored type).
2 Waveform diagnosis data is held in memory even after the
power is turned off (stored type).
3 Be careful to set the date and time correctly.
4 To output stored type waveform data, the reader/punch
interface option is required.
5 Waveform diagnosis is enabled when bit 0 (SGD) of
parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. To perform waveform
diagnosis, a graphics card is required.
Usual graphic display function can not be used when
waveform diagnosis function is enable.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i/ (B63005EN)
21i/210i/20i
1034
Waveform diagnostic display
B63003EN1/02
12.1.8
Selfdiagnosis
General
When a breakdown occurs, in order to quickly determine the cause, the

following should be done.
First, it has to be determined as to whether the breakdown occurred in the
CNC internal section, or the PMC or machine side.
There are times when it appears that a breakdown has occurred even when
the breakdown has not actually occurred. For example, when the
machinery ceases to operate because it is waiting for an external signal.
In this case, the condition of the interface between the CNC and PMC, or
between the CNC and the machinery, and the conditions within the CNC
need to be investigated.
The CNC checks the following itself.
1) Abnormality of detection system
2) Abnormality of position control unit
3) Abnormality of servo system
4) Overheat
5) Abnormality of CPU
6) Abnormality of ROM
7) Abnormality of RAM
8) Abnormality in data transfer between MDI
9) Abnormality of part program storage memory
10)Abnormality in tape reader read function
11)Abnormality in data transfer between PMC
Input/output signals from PMC to CNC, or vice versa, and inner status
of the CNC can be displayed on the screen.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.7.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.7.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.3
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.7.3
1035
B63003EN1/02
12.1.9
Display of Hardware
and Software
Configuration
General
The required hardware/software configuration for CNC maintenance can

be displayed on the screen.
The system configuration screen displays the following information:
(1) Printed circuit board configuration
The type and function of the printed circuit board mounted in each slot
are displayed. When a CPU is mounted on a printed circuit board, the
software series and edition are also displayed.
(2) Software configuration
The series and editions of installed software, including the CNC software, servo software, PMC management software, and ladder programs, are displayed. For the CNC software, assembly information
is also displayed.
(3) Module configuration
The configuration of the modules or hardware mounted on each
printed circuit board (such as the type of a module or the hardware, and
whether it is mounted) is displayed.
Reference item
Series
16i/18i/21i/20i/
160i/180i/210i

(B63005EN)
1036
System Configuration Screen
B63003EN1/02
12.1.10
Position Display
Neglect
General
Indication of the current position can be suppressed by setting bit 0

(NDPx) of parameter No. 3115, or by issuing the position indication
ignore signal.
Bit 1 (NDAx) of parameter No. 3115 enables the display of positions in
the machine coordinate system only.
Signal
Position Display Neglect

Signal
NPOS1~NPOS8<G198>
[Function] Disables the display of the current position.
A separate signal is provided for each controlled axis. The number at the
end of each signal name denotes the controlled axis number.
NPOS1
11st axis current position display
22nd axis current position display
33rd axis current position display
44th axis current position display
[Operation] While a signal is set to 0, the current position in the corresponding axis
is displayed. While the signal is set to 1, the current position along the
corresponding axis is not displayed.
Signal address
G198
#7
NPOS8
#6
NPOS7
#5
NPOS6
1037
#4
NPOS5
#3
NPOS4
#2
NPOS3
#1
NPOS2
#0
NPOS1
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
3115
#1
NDAx
#0
NDPx

NDPx Display of the current position for each axis
0 : The current position is displayed.
1 : The current position is not displayed.
NDAx Position display using absolute coordinates and relative coordinates is:
0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed. (Machine coordinates are displayed.)
12.1.11
Run Hour and Parts
Count Display
General
This function displays the integrated poweron time, the integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer (started by an input
signal from PMC) on the screen. The integrated cycle operation time, the
integrated cutting time and timer can be altered and preset, using the MDI.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total
number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number
of parts machined on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter set
M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined and
the number of parts machined in memory is incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M
code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts
machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts
required, a signal is output to the PMC side.
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the
number of parts machined using MDI.
1038
B63003EN1/02
Signal
Target part count

reached signal
PRTSF<F062#7>
[Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been
machined.
[Output condition] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when:
@ Machining of the specified number of parts has been completed.
When 0 (infinity) is set as the required number of parts, this signal is
not output.
The PRTSF signal is set to 0 when:
@ Machining of the specified number of parts has not yet been
completed.
@ The system is reset.
Generalpurpose
integrating meter start
signal
TMRON <G053#0>
[Function] The CNC has an integrating meter which is started by an input signal from
the PMC, as well as integrating meters for counting the automatic
operation time and counting cutting time. The count for this integrating
meter can be displayed on the screen. The count can be preset by MDI
operation.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the integrating meter starts counting.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
TMRON
#7
PRTSF
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G053
F062
1039
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
6700
#1
#0
PCM
[Data type] Bit

PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts
0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710
1 : Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710
6710
M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 255 except 98 and 99
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.
NOTE
Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for
M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.
6711
Number of machined parts

[Data type] Twoword
[Unit of data] One piece
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total
number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by
parameter No. 6710 is executed.
NOTE
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the
number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30.
6712
Total number of machined parts

[Data type] Twoword
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or
an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
1040
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1, the
number of parts is not counted with M02 and M30.
6713
Number of required parts

[Data type] Word
This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF is output to PMC when the number
of machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of
parts is regarded as infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The
PRTSF signal is then not output.
6750
Integrated value of poweron period

[Data type] Twoword
[Unit of data] One minute
This parameter displays the integrated value of poweron period.
6751
Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

[Data type] Twoword
[Unit of data] One ms
6752
Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

[Data type] Twoword
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic
operation (neither stop nor hold time included).
The actual operation time is the sum of the values set in parameter Nos.
6751 and 6752.
1041
B63003EN1/02
6753
Integrated value of cutting time

[Data type] Twoword
6754
Integrated value of cutting time

[Data type] Twoword
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is
performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular
interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual cutting time is the sum of the values set in parameter Nos. 6753
and 6754.
6755
Integrated value of generalpurpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON

time

[Data type] Twoword
6756
Integrated value of generalpurpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON

time

[Data type] Twoword
This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signal
TMRON from PMC is on.
The actual integrated time is the sum of the values set in parameter Nos.
6755 and 6756.
1042
B63003EN1/02
6757
Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

[Data type] Twoword
6758
Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

[Data type] Twoword
This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither
stop nor hold state included). The actual operation time is the sum of the
values set in parameter Nos. 6757 and 6758. The operation time is
automatically preset to 0 during the poweron sequence and the cycle start
from the reset state.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)

OPERATORS MANUAL

OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)

OPERATORS MANUAL

OPERATORS MANUAL

OPERATORS MANUAL

1043
B63003EN1/02
12.1.12
Graphic Display/
Dynamic Graphic
Display/Background
Graphic
General
Graphic Display
It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, which

makes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing the
path on the screen.
In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen.
The drawing coordinates (parameter) and graphic parameters must be set
before a tool path can be displayed.
With T series (Twopath control) the tool paths of two tool posts are
displayed on the same screen, one on the right and the other on the left.
O0100 N0100
X
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
0.000
S 0T
MEM *** *** ***

PARAM
14:23:03
GRAPH
M series
0001 00021
X 200.000
Z 200.000
MEM STRT * * * *
G.PRM
FIN
08 : 00 : 53
GRAPH
T series
1044
ZOOM
(OPRT)
B63003EN1/02
HEAD1 O0001 N00021

X1
200.000
X1
Z1
200.000
Z1
62.5
MEM
STRT
G.PRM
***
FIN
HEAD2 O0020 N00020

X2
220.000
X2
Z2
160.000
62.5
08 : 24 : 56
GRAPH
Z2
HEAD1
ZOOM
(OPRT)
T series (Twopath control)
Dynamic graphic display

(M series)
There are the following two functions in Dynamic Graphics.

Path graphic
Solid graphic
This is used to draw the path of tool center commanded by the part program.
This is used to draw the workpiece figure machined by
tool movement commanded by the part program.
The path graphic function is used to precisely check the part program for
drawing the tool path with a line. The solid graphic function is used to
draw the workpiece figure to be machined with a program. Thus, it is easy
to recognize roughly the part program. These two functions can be used
freely by switching them.
O1126 N1126
PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)
Y
X
25.8
MEM **** *** ***

AUTO
START
10:10:40
STOP
REWIND
Tool path Graph
1045
ERASE
B63003EN1/02
O1126 N01126
SOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)
A.ST
F.ST
STOP
REWIND
Part Machined
Background graphic
(M series)
The background graphic function allows a programmed tool path to be

drawn on the screen while machining is being performed by another
program.
When the background graphic mode is set, the previously selected
program remains selected. The tool path of a desired program can be
drawn on the background graphic screen.
The parameters used in actual machining are also used in background
graphic mode. Setting and drawing with the background graphic function
are the same as with the dynamic graphic display function.
Signal
Check
drawingunderway
signal
CKGRP <F062#5>
[Function] Indicates that a dynamic graphics display (animated graphics display) is
being drawn for check purposes.
D Check drawing begins.
D A reset occurs after check drawing has ended.
Signal address
#7
F062
#6
#5
CKGRP
1046
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3003
#7
MVG
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

MVG While drawing using the dynamic graphics function (with no machine
movement), the axisinmovement signal is:
0 : Output
1 : Not output
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
3109
BGO
BGO Response when the <OFFSET> function key is pressed on the

background graphic screen
0 : Returns the display to the machining screen.
1 : Displays the background graphic offsets, offsets in the workpiece
coordinate system, and macro variables.
(In this case, BGGRP appears in the bottom right corner of the
screen. Using this screen, the background graphic data can be
checked.)
#7
#6
NZM
6500
#5
#4
#3
DPA
#2
GUL
#1
SPC
#0
GRL
DPO
[Data type] Bit

GRL Graphic display (twopath control lathe)
0 : Path 1 is displayed on the left, and path 2 is displayed on the right.
1 : Tool post 1 is displayed on the right, and tool post 2 is displayed on the
left.
SPC Graphic display (twopath control lathe) is done
0 : on two spindles and two tool posts
1 : on one spindle and two tool posts
GUL 0 : The positions of X1 and X2axes are not replaced with each other in
the coordinate system specified with parameter 6509.
1 : The positions of X1 and X2axes are replaced with each other in the
coordinate system specified with parameter 6509. (2path control)
NOTE
This parameter is used for twopath control lathe.
DPA Current position display on the graphic display screen

0 : Displays the actual position to ensure tool nose radius compensation
1 : Displays the programmed position
1047
B63003EN1/02
DPO Current position on the solid drawing (machining profile drawing) or tool
path drawing screen
0 : Not appear
1 : Appears
When the background graphic function is used, modal information
items F, S, and T are displayed, together with the current position.
When the [POS] soft key is selected in dynamic graphic display mode,
however, F, S, and T are not displayed.
NZM 0 : The screen image is not enlarged by specifying the center of the screen
and magnification. (Screen image enlargement by a conventional
method is enabled.)
1 : The screen image is enlarged by specifying the center of the screen
and magnification. (Screen image enlargement by the conventional
method is disabled.)
#7
6501
#6
#5
CSR
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
CSR
FIM
RID
3PL
TLC
ORG
[Data type] Bit

ORG Movement when coordinate system is altered during drawing
0 : Draws in the same coordinate system
1 : Draws in the new coordinate system (only for the path drawing)
TCL In solid drawing
0 : Not compensate the tool length
1 : Compensates the tool length
3PL Triplane drawing in solid drawing
0 : Drawn by the first angle projection
1 : Drawn by the third angle projection
RID In solid drawing
0 : Draws a plane without edges.
1 : Draws a plane with edges.
FIM Machining profile drawing in solid drawing
0 : Displayed in the coarse mode
1 : Displayed in the fine mode
CSR While the screen image is enlarged, the shape of the graphic cursor is:
0 : A square. ( )
1 : An X. ( )
1048
B63003EN1/02
6509
Coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (2path control)
X2
X1
GRPAX=0, 10
X2
GRPAX=1, 11
X2
X1
X2
GRPAX=3, 13
GRPAX=4, 14
X2
X1
GRPAX=2, 12
X1
X1
X2
X1
GRPAX=5, 15
X1
X2
X1
GRPAX=6, 16
X2
GRPAX=7, 17
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 to 7 and 10 to 17 (However, 0 to 7 are the same settings as 10 to 17.)
This parameter sets the coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (bit
1 of parameter 6500 = 1) for 2path control.
The following shows the relationship between the settings and the
drawing coordinate systems:
1049
B63003EN1/02
6510
Drawing coordinate system
[Data type] Byte

This parameter specifies the drawing coordinate system for the graphic
function.
The following show the relationship between the set values and the
drawing coordinate systems.
Set value = 0
Set value = 1
Set value = 2
Set value = 4
Set value = 3
Set value = 5
Set value = 6
Set value = 7
NOTE
This parameter is specified for each path in the two path
control. A different drawing coordinate system can be
selected for each tool post.
1050
B63003EN1/02
6511
Right margin in solid drawing
6512
Left margin in solid drawing
6513
Upper margin in solid drawing
6514
Lower margin in solid drawing
[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Dot
These parameters set the machining profile drawing position in margins
on the screen. The unit is a dot.
Standard set value
Parameter
No
No.
Margin
area
DPO=0
7.2/8.4
LCD
DPO=1
9.5/10.4
LCD
7.2/8.4
LCD
9.5/10.4
LCD
6511
Right
200
100
6512
Left
6513
Upper
25
32
25
32
6514
Lower
10
10
Set DPO with parameter No. 6500#5.
6515
Change in crosssection position in triplane drawing

[Unit of data] Dot
This parameter sets the change in the crosssection position when a soft
key is continuously pressed in triplane drawing. When zero is specified,
it is set to 1.
1051
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
8100
NWP
RST

RST When the reset key on the MDI panel is pressed:
0 : The reset is effective for both paths. Alternatively, the reset is
effective for both the machining side and the background graphic side
(M series).
1 : The reset key is effective only for the path selected with the path select
signal. Alternatively, the reset key cannot be used to stop machining
in background graphic mode (M series).
NWP When the background graphic function is being used, this bit must be set
to 1.
Note
NOTE
When the dynamic graphics function is used, the graphics
function cannot be used. (M series)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.12.1
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
III.12.2
DYNAMIC GRAPHIC DISPLAY
III.12.3
BACKGROUND GRAPHIC
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.12.1
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.12.1
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
III.12.2
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.12.1
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.14.1
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
III.14.2
III.14.1
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
1052
B63003EN1/02
12.1.13
Displaying Operating
Monitor
General
The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and
the serial spindle.
Display of the servo axes
The reading on the load meter can be displayed for up to three servo axes
by setting parameters 3151 to 3153.
Display of the spindle

axes
When serial spindles are used, the reading on the load meter and
speedmeter can be displayed only for the main serial spindle.
Speedmeter
Although the speedmeter normally indicates the speed of the spindle

motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting
bit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to 1.
Parameter
#7
#6
OPS
3111
#5
OPM
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

OPM Operating monitor
0 : Not displayed
1 : Displayed
OPS The speedmeter on the operating monitor screen indicates:
0 : Spindle motor speed
1 : Spindle speed
3151
Number of the axis for which the first load meter for the servo motor is used
3152
Number of the axis for which the second load meter for the servo motor is used
3153
Number of the axis for which the third load meter for the servo motor is used
3154
Number of the axis for which the 4th load meter for the servo motor is used
3155
3156
3157
3158
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0, 1, . . . , the number of control axes
Set the numbers of the axes for which measurement values on the load
meters for maximum eight servo motors are displayed. Set 0 for those
axes for which a load meter need not be displayed.
1053
B63003EN1/02
2086
Rated current parameter (RTCURR)

4127
Load meter displayed value for maximum output
Note
NOTE
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter
2086 and spindle parameter 4127.
These parameters are set by the automatic setting.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.1.8 Operating Monitor Display
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
1054
B63003EN1/02
12.1.14
Stamping the
Machining Time
General
When a program is executed, its main program machining time is

displayed on the program machining time display screen. The machining
time can be displayed, in hours, minutes, and seconds format, for up to
10 main programs. Upon the execution of the eleventh and subsequent
programs, previous data is cleared, starting from the oldest.
The time between the first start operation after a reset being performed in
memory operation mode, until another reset is performed, is counted.
When no reset is performed during operation, the time from the start of
operation until M02 (M30) is encountered is counted. While the duration
of the operation stop state is not being counted, the duration of the wait
for completion of an M, S, T, or B function is counted.
The displayed machining time can be inserted (stamped) as a comment
for a program stored in memory. The machining time is placed as a
comment after the program number.
The machining time inserted after a program number can be displayed on
the program directory screen (by setting bit 0 (NAM) of parameter No.
3107 to 1). Using this screen, the user can determine the machining time
required for each program. This data is useful for onsite process
planning.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
3107
#0
NAM
[Data type] Bit

NAM Program list
0 : Only program numbers are displayed.
1 : Program numbers and program names are displayed.
#7
3404
#6
#5
M02
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation
0 : M02 is sent to the machine, and the program is positioned at its
beginning automatically. As completion signal FIN is returned
without resetting or without resetting and rewinding, the program is
restarted from the beginning.
1 : M02 is only sent to the machine. The program is positioned at its
beginning by the reset and rewind signal.
1055
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
When M02 does not reset the control unit, and completion
signal FIN is sent to continuously reexecute the program
from the beginning (when bit 5 (M02) of parameter No. 3404
is set to 0), counting of machining time is terminated by
completion signal FIN.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.2.6 Stamping the machining time
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.2.6 Stamping the machining time
1056
B63003EN1/02
12.1.15
Software Operators
Panel
General
The software operators panel function replaces part of the control

switches on the machine operators panel with soft switches which can be
turned on or off using the MDI of the control unit.
The control switches for the functions listed in the following table can be
replaced with soft switches. Also available are eight generalpurpose soft
switches which can be used additionally by the machine tool builder.
These eight generalpurpose soft switches can be optionally named by the
machine tool builder. For control switches in groups 1 to 7, parameter
(no.7200) can be used to select whether the control switches on the
machine operators panel or soft switches on the MDI of the control unit
are used for each group.
Group1 :Mode selection
Group2 :Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse
Group3 :Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of
manual pulse magnification
Group4 :Jog feedrate override, feedrate override, rapid traverse
override
Group5 :Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 :Protect key
Group7 :Feed hold
Group8 :General purpose
The states of all soft switches are informed to the PMC by output signals.
Based on these output signals, the PMC should turn 1 or 0 input
signals related to soft switch functions. In other words, turning 1 the
soft switch assigned to single block operation, for example, does not
cause the control unit to select single block operation internally. Single
block operation is selected when the PMC turns to 1 the input signal for
single block operation, instead.
1057
Signal
B63003EN1/02
Group
Function
Output signal
Mode selection
Jog feed axis select +J10 +J40

J10 J40
<F081>
+J1 +J4
J1 J4
Manual rapid tra- RTO <F077#6>

verse
RT
Handle feed
HS1A
HS1B
HS1C
HS1D
HS1AO <F077#0>
HS1BO <F077#1>
HS1CO <F077#2>
HS1DO <F077#3>
MD1
MD2
MD4
ZRN
Handle feed magni- MP1O <F076#0>

fication
MP2O <F076#1>
MP1
MP2
Jog feed rate over- *JV0O *JV15O

ride
<F079, F080>
*JV0 *JV15
Feedrate override
*FV0 *FV7
Rapid
override
MD1O <F073#0>
MD2O <F073#1>
MD4O <F073#2>
ZRNO <F073#4>
Related input signal
*FV0O *FV7O
<F078>
traverse ROV1O <F076#4>

ROV2O <F076#5>
ROV1
ROV2
Optional block skip
BDTO <F075#2>
BDT
Single block
SBKO <F075#3>
SBK
Machine lock
MLKO <F075#4>
MLK
Dryrun
DRNO <F075#5>
DRN
Protect key
KEYO <F075#6>
KEY1 KEY4
Feed hold
SPO <F075#7>
*SP
General purpose
OUT0 OUT7
(Switch from 1st line <F072>
to the 8th line)
1058
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
F072
#7
OUT7
#6
OUT6
#5
OUT5
F073
#4
OUT4
#3
OUT3
ZRNO
#2
OUT2
#1
OUT1
#0
OUT0
MD4O
MD2O
MD1O
MP2O
MP1O
F074
F075
SPO
KEYO
F076
F077
DRNO
MLKO
ROV2O
ROV1O
RTO
SBKO
BDTO
HS1DO
HS1CO
HS1BO
HS1AO
F078
*FV7O
*FV6O
*FV5O
*FV4O
*FV3O
*FV2O
*FV1O
*FV0O
F079
*JV7O
*JV6O
:JV5O
*JV4O
*JV3O
*JV2O
*JV1O
*JV0O
F080
*JV15O
*JV14O
*JV13O
*JV12O
*JV11O
*JV10O
*JV9O
*JV8O
F081
J4O
+J4O
J3O
+J3O
J2O
+J2O
J1O
+J1O
#7
#6
OP7
#5
OP6
#4
OP5
#3
OP4
#2
OP3
#1
OP2
#0
OP1
Parameter
7200
[Data type] Bit

OP1 Mode selection on software operators panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse buttons on software
operators panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP3 Manual pulse generators axis select and manual pulse generators
magnification switches on software operators panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP4 JOG feedrate override and rapid traverse override switches on software
operators panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP5 Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, and dry run switches on
software operators panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
OP6 Protect key on software operators panel
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
1059
B63003EN1/02
OP7 Feed hold on software operators panel

0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
7210
Jogmovement axis and its direction on software operators panel
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
[Data type] Byte

On software operators panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow
key on the MDI panel when jog feed is performed.
Set value
Feed axis and direction
Not moved
First axis, positive direction
First axis, negative direction
Second axis, positive direction
Second axis, negative direction
Third axis, positive direction
Third axis, negative direction
Fourth axis, positive direction
Fourth axis, negative direction
1060
Arrow keys on the MDI panel
B63003EN1/02
Example
Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes
in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given
below. [8 ] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2] to the negative
direction of the Z axis, [6 ] to the positive direction of the X axis [4 ]
to the negative direction of the X axis, [1] to the positive direction of
the Y axis, [9] to the negative direction of the Y axis
Parameter No. 7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No. 7217 = 0 (Not used)
7220
Name of generalpurpose switch on software operators panel
7283
Name of generalpurpose switch on software operators panel
[Data type] Byte
Example
OPERATOR S PANEL
These parameters set

the names of the generalpurpose switches
(SIGNAL 1 through
SIGNAL 8) on the
software operators
panel as described below.
O1234 N5678
SIGNAL 1
SIGNAL 2
OFF
OFF
SIGNAL 3
OFF
SIGNAL 4
SIGNAL 5
SIGNAL 6
SIGNAL 7
SIGNAL 8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
These names are set using character codes that are displayed in parameter
Nos. 7220 to 7283.
Parameter No. 7220:
Sets the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7221:
Sets the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7222:
Sets the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 1.
1061
B63003EN1/02
Parameter No. 7223:

Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7224:
Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7225:
Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7226:
Sets the character code (032) corresponding to (space) of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No. 7227:
Sets the character code (049) corresponding to 1 of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235:
Set the character codes of SIGNAL 2 shown in the figure above.
The character codes are shown in character code list on the following
page.
1062
B63003EN1/02
Character to Code Correspondence Table
Char
Code
acter
Comment
Char
Code
acter
Char
Code
acter
Comment
Comment
Char
Code
acter
065
054
177
209
066
055
178
210
067
056
179
211
068
057
180
212
069
070
032
Space
181
213
033
Exclamation mark
182
214
071
034
Quotation marks
183
215
072
035
Number
184
216
073
036
Dollar mark
185
217
074
037
Percent
186
218
075
&
038
Ampersand
187
219
076
039
Apostrophe
188
220
077
040
Left parenthesis
189
166
078
041
Right parenthesis
190
221
079
042
Asterisk
191
167
080
043
Positive sign
192
168
081
044
Comma
193
169
082
045
Negative sign
194
170
083
046
Period
195
171
084
047
Slash
196
172
085
058
Colon
197
173
086
059
Semicolon
198
174
087
<
060
Left angle bracket
199
175
088
061
Equal sign
200
089
>
062
Right angle
bracket
201
090
063
Question mark
048
064
049
050
Comment
222
Dakuten
223
Han dakuten
202
161
Full stop
Commercial at
mark
203
162
Left quotation
mark
091
Left square
bracket
204
163
Right quotation
mark
092
Yen mark
205
164
Comma
051
093
Right square
bracket
206
165
Centered dot
052
094
000
Space
053
095
207
Underline
\\
208
NOTE
The dakuten and han dakuten in Katakana also
correspond to one character.
1063
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft
switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be
equipped, for example, all control switches for mode
selection should be on the machine operators panel or a
generalpurpose soft switch should be used to select the
mode for DNC operation.
Soft switches available for mode selection
Manual data input
Automatic operation
Memory edit
Manual handle feed / incremental feed
Jog feed
2 Only one soft switch is available for protection key.
However, four input signals are available for protection key
(KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 and KEY4). Generally, four input
signals are simultaneously turned to 1 or 0 according to
the state of the soft switch for protection keys.
3 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal
SPO is turned to 1. At this time, the PMC turns feed hold
signal *SP to 0.
In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold
is turned off, output signal SPO is turned 0 and the PMC
turns signal *SP to 1. For soft switches other than feed
hold and general soft switches, when an output signal
informing the state of a soft switch is turned to 1, the
corresponding input signal is turned to 1.
1064
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
4 The following table lists the override values which can be
selected by soft switches for jog feedrate.
*JV00 *JV150
15
12
(*JV0 *JV150)
8
bit
Override
values (%)
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 1 0 1
0.1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1
0.14
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 0 1 1
0.2
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
0 1 0 0
0.27
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
0.37
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1
0.52
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
0.72
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1
1.0
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1
1.4
10
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
2.0
11
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1
2.7
12
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 1
3.7
13
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1
5.2
14
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
7.2
15
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 1
10.0
16
1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
14.0
17
1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
20.0
18
1 1 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1
27.0
19
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1
37.0
20
1 1 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
52.0
21
1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
72.0
22
1 1 0 1
1 0 0 0
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
100.0
23
1 1 0 0
1 0 0 1
0 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
140.0
24
1 0 1 1
0 0 0 1
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
200.0
1065
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
5 The following table lists the override values which can be
selected by soft switches for feedrate override.
*FV0O *FV7O (*FV0 *FV7)

7
Override
values (%)
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 1 0 1
10
1 1 1 0
1 0 1 1
20
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1
30
1 1 0 1
0 1 1 1
40
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
50
1 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
60
1 0 1 1
1 0 0 1
70
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
80
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
90
10
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1
100
11
1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1
110
12
1 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
120
13
0 1 1 1
1 1 0 1
130
14
0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1
140
15
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
150
16
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1
160
17
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
170
18
0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1
180
19
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1
190
20
0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1
200
1066
B63003EN1/02
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.4.10
Displaying and Setting the Software Operators Panel
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.4.13
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.11.4.10
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.4.13
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13.4.7
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13.4.8
1067
B63003EN1/02
12.1.16
Multilanguage Display
General
The LCD screens are displayed in a parameterset language.
Parameter
#7
#6
SPN
#5
HNG
#4
ITA
#3
CHI
#2
FRN
#1
GRM
#0
JPN
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
POR
#0
DAN
3102
3119
POR

NOTE
When this parameter is set, turn off the power once.
These bits select the language to be used for the display.

POR DAN
SPN
HNG
ITA
CHI
FRN GRM
JPN
language
English
Japanese
German
French
Chinese
(Taiwanese)
Italian
Korean
Spanish
Danish
Portuguese
1068
B63003EN1/02
12.1.17
Remote Diagnosis
General
The remote diagnosis function allows CNC status monitoring and

modification to CNC data to be performed remotely by menubased
operation. The remote diagnosis function, operating under MSDOS, is
installed on a standard personal computer, connected as a service terminal
to the CNC via the RS232C interface, over a telephone line, and so on.
[Personal
computer]
[CNC machine tool]
CNC
RS232C
Telephone line
Modem card
RS232C
Modem
The remote diagnosis terminal software is sold separately.

The remote diagnosis function provides the following capabilities:
a. CNC programs
a1 Computer CNC
(1) CNC command data for verification
(2) Searching for a specified program
(3) Part program
(4) Deleting a specified program
(5) Deleting all programs
a2 CNC computer
(1) Part program
(2) Displaying a program directory
(3) Program number of a program being executed
(4) Sequence number of a sequence being executed
b. Computer CNC
(1) Parameter
(2) Pitch error data
(3) Tool offset value
(4) Custom macro variable
(5) Selecting a display screen
(6) Memory contents
(7) PMC data
(8) Displaying a specified message
(9) All parameters
1069
B63003EN1/02
c. CNC computer
(1) Alarm information
(2) Machine position
(3) Absolute position
(4) Skip position
(5) Servo delay
(6) Acceleration/deceleration delay
(7) Diagnosis
(8) Parameter
(9) Tool life management data
(10) Display screen status
(11) Modal information
(12) Pitch error data
(13) Tool offset value
(14) Custom macro variable
(15) Memory contents
(16) Ladder program
(17) Actual feedrate
(18) Status
(19) A/D conversion data
(20) PMC data
(21) Screen character data
(22) Printed circuit board information
(23) Ladder title
(24) Series and edition of PMC/ladder
(25) All parameters
d. File function selection
(1) Listing files
(2) Referencing a file
(3) Deleting a file
(4) Copying a file
(5) Renaming a file
(6) Linking a file
(7) Changing the current directory
(8) Creating a directory
(9) Deleting a directory
NOTE
An arrow indicates the direction of data flow.
1070
B63003EN1/02
12.1.18
External Operator
Message Logging and
Display
General
External operator messages can be logged in a history file.

These messages can be displayed on the external operator message history
screen.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
3112
#2
OMH
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

OMH The external operator message history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.
3113
#7
MS1
#6
MS0
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MHC
MHC External operator message history data:

0 : Cannot be cleared.
1 : Can be cleared.
(Such data can be cleared using the [CLEAR] soft key.)
MS0, MS1 A combination of the number of characters preserved as external operator
message history data and the number of history data items is set according
to the table below.
MS1
MS0
Number of history
data characters
Number of history
data items
255
200
10
100
18
50
32
CAUTION
When the values of MS0 and MS1 are changed, all
preserved external operator message history data is
cleared.
1071
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.7.1 External operator message logging and display
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
OPERATORS MANUAL
1072
B63003EN1/02
12.1.19
Erase Screen
Display/Automatic
Erase Screen Display
General
Erase screen display
Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causes
a LCD to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the screen can
be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to specify the
automatic clearing of the screen if no keys are pressed during a period
specified with a parameter.
Holding down the
CAN
key and pressing an arbitrary function key clears
the screen.
Hold down the
and
PROG
CAN
key and press an arbitrary function key (such as
POS
).
Press an arbitrary function key, when the screen is displayed again.
Automatic erase screen

display
Clearing the screen with

automatic erase screen
display
The CNC screen is automatically cleared if no keys are pressed during the
period (in minutes) specified with a parameter (No. 3123). The screen is
restored by pressing any key.
The CNC screen is cleared once the period (minutes) specified with
parameter No. 3123 has elapsed, provided the following conditions are
satisfied:
Conditions for clearing the CNC screen
D Automatic erase screen display cacel signal *CRTOF is 0.
D Parameter No. 3123 is set to other than 0.
D None of the following keys have been pressed:
MDI keys
Soft keys
External input keys
D No alarm has been issued.
Restoring the screen

with automatic erase
screen display
The cleared CNC screen is restored once at least one of the following
conditions is satisfied:
Conditions for restoring the CNC screen
D Automatic erase screen display cancel signal *CRTOF is 1.
D Any of the following keys has been pressed:
MDI keys
Soft keys
External input keys
D An alarm has been issued.
1073
B63003EN1/02

display cancel signal
Clearing the screen

using CAN + function key
If parameter No. 3123 is set to 0, clearing of the screen using the
Specified period
The period specified with parameter No. 3123 is valid only for path 1.
Alarm for another path
The screen is not cleared if an alarm is issued for path 1 or 2 or the loader
before the specified period elapses.
Automatic erase screen display cancel signal *CRTOF (G062#1) is valid

only for the signals for path 1. This signal is invalid for the signals of path
2 (G1062#1) and those of the loader (G062#1).
CAN
key
and a function key is disabled.
WARNING
Pressing any key while the screen is being cleared restores
the screen. In such a case, however, the function assigned
to the pressed key is initiated. Do not press the DELETE ,,INSERT
or
keyALTER
to restore the screen, therefore.
Signal

display cancel signal
*CRTOF <G062#1>
[Function] Enables or disables the automatic screen erase function. This signal is
used to switch the control mode.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 0, the control unit:
Enables the automatic screen erase function.
When this signal is set to 1, the control unit:
Disables the automatic screen erase function, displays the screen, and
initializes the timer.
This signal is valid only for path 1.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
G062
1074
#4
#3
#2
#1
*CRTOF
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3123
Time until erase screen display is applied
[Data type] Bytes

[Unit of data] Minutes
This parameter specifies the period that must elapse before the erase
screen display is applied. If 0 is set, the screen is not cleared.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.8
Cleaning the screen
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.8
Cleaning the screen
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.11.8
Cleaning the screen
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.8
Cleaning the screen
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13.8
Cleaning the screen
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13.8
Cleaning the screen
1075
B63003EN1/02
12.1.20
Touch Pad
General
A touch pad can be used on the LCD display, as follows:

(1) The soft keys (F0 to F9, FR, and FL) in the lower section on the
10.4inch color LCD/MDI panel are changed to those for the touch
pad.
(2) Touch pad operation substitutes for cursor control on the 10.4inch
color LCD.
(3) A touch pad can be used to create C executorbased applications such
as touch padbased software versions of a machine operators panel
and a calculator.
Hardware connection
The CNC uses RS232C serial port 2 (JD36B) on the motherboard to

connect the touch pad.
Touch pad
control board
JD36B
20PIN
LCD
MDI
Touch pad
Hardware characteristics
The hardware characteristics of the touch pad are briefly described below
for reference purposes. The user need not be aware of them when using
the touch pad.
When a point on the touch pad is pressed, the touch pad controller sends
the coordinates of the point to the CNC via an RS232C interface.
(1) Coordinate system
1) Initial coordinate system
The upper left corner of the input area of the touch pad is set as the
origin (X = 0, Y = 0) of the coordinate system. The maximum
coordinates of the lower right corner is (639, 479).
2) Coordinate system after compensation
The coordinate system can be subjected to compensation as
described later, so the initial origin and maximum coordinates can
be maintained.
1076
B63003EN1/02
(2) Reception data sampling interval

The coordinates of a point on the touch pad are output via an RS232C
interface. The information is received at sampling intervals of 50 ms.
(3) Positional precision
A positional precision of +2.5 mm can be maintained by performing
9point compensation as described later.
Software key control
When a rectangular soft key button on the screen is pressed with a finger,
the soft key button display is indented. This type of a soft key behaves
in the same manner as conventional soft keys. In addition, the touch pad
soft keys can be customized using the C executor.
Cursor control
When the cursor is displayed and can be moved (for data setting) on the
10.4inch LCD panel with a touch pad, pressing the desired point on the
screen causes the cursor to move to that point, in the same way as with
the
, and
cursor keys.
C executor
Touch padbased application programs can be created using the C

executor, which provides touch pad functions.
Refer to the C Executor Programming Manual (B62443EN3) for
details of the C executor.
Compensation
(1) Functions
Compensation functions as follows:
1) Specifies an effective input area.
2) Specifies maximum coordinates.
3) Corrects linearity.
4) Makes the panel input position match the LCD display position.
(2) Execution time
Compensation must be executed when:
1) A new touch pad is installed.
2) An existing touch pad is replaced.
3) Memory (SRAM) is cleared to all 0s.
(3) Cautions
1) If an alarm condition occurs during compensation, the alarm screen
appears when the compensation screen is exited.
2) Compensation can be made regardless of what the current mode is.
3) Once the system gets started, compensation should be made
promptly before actual operations begin.
(4) Procedure
1 Enable touch pad compensation by setting parameter DCL (bit 5
of parameter No. 3113) to 1.
2 Press the
SYSTEM
function key.
3 Press the rightmost soft key,

times.
1077
(next menu page key) three
B63003EN1/02
4 Press the [TP CAL] soft key.

The following touch pad compensation screen appears.
CALIBRATION OF TOUCH PANEL

PLEASE PUSH CALIBRATED POINTS (+ OF 9 POINTS).
IF CALIBRATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH <INPUT> KEY.
IF CALIBRATION IS CANCELED, PLEASE PUSH <CAN> KEY.
IF OPERATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH FUNCTION KEY.
5 Press the nine compensation points using the dedicated pen. When
a point is pressed exactly, the corresponding + display starts
blinking. If a point off a + display is pressed, the message
[CALIBRATED POINT DOES NOT MATCH. PLEASE PUSH
AGAIN.] appears.
6 After pressing the nine compensation points, press the
INPUT
to
complete compensation. To discontinue or rerun compensation,

press the
CAN
key.
7 When compensation ends normally, the message [CALIBRATION

WAS ENDED.] appears.
8 Pressing another function key causes you to exit the compensation
screen, enabling compensation to be terminated or canceled.
9 Once compensation was completed, disable touch pad
compensation by resetting parameter DCL (bit 5 of parameter No.
3113) to 0 in order to prevent malfunction.
Parameter
#7
#6
3113
#5
DCL
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

DCL Specifies whether to enable compensation for the touch pad.
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
#7
#6
#5
3119
#4
#3
#2
DDS
#1
[Data type] Bit

DDS Specifies whether to enable touch pad operation.
1078
#0
B63003EN1/02
0 : Enabled.
1 : Disabled.
As described in Hardware connection, the touch pad is connected to
RS232C serial port 2 (JD36B) on the CNC motherboard. When the
touch pad is used, serial port 2 (JD36B) is set up for touch pad operation,
regardless of an I/O channel (input/output unit selection) set up in
parameter Nos. 20, 21, 22, and 23. Use JD36A for other input/output
units.
The existing settings of parameter Nos. 100, and 121 to 123 are disabled
for channel 2 (JD36B), and fixed as follows:
S Baud rate: 9600 bps
S Stop bit: 1 bit
S
Parity check: None

If no touch pad is used, parameter DDS (bit 2 of parameter No. 3119) must
be set to 1.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
085
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
Description
A communication error occurred during

touch pad initialization.
It is likely that the touch pad is not connected correctly or is defective.
After removing the cause of the error,
switch the power off then back on
again.
This alarm message is used also for errors in existing input/output units. If a
conventional input/output unit is connected to RS232C serial port 1
(JD36A), this alarm message may be
displayed because of an error on serial
port 1, regardless of the touch pad.
Caution
CAUTION
1 The touch pad soft keys cannot be used after memory
(SRAM) is cleared to all 0s. In this case, it is necessary to
use the MDI (cursor and page keys) for setup.
2 After the power is switched on, do not use the touch pad until
a poweron reset sequence is completed. Otherwise, a P/S
alarm (No. 085) will occur to indicate a communication error.
3 If more than one point on the touch pad is pressed
simultaneously, it is assumed that only one point that
represents a gravity position determined according to the
way each point is pressed, is pressed. Be sure to press only
one point at a time.
1079
B63003EN1/02
12.1.21
Periodic Maintenance
Screen
General
Screen displays and

settings
The periodic maintenance screen shows the current statuses of those

consumables that require periodic replacement (backup battery, LCD
backlight, touch pad, etc.). An item whose service life has expired is
indicated by the machine run time or the like.
1 Press the
SYSTEM
function key.
2 Press the
next menu page key several times until the [MAINTE]
soft key appears.
3 Press the [MAINTE] soft key. The periodic maintenance screen
appears.
The periodic maintenance screen consists of two pages: status screen and
setup screen, either of which can be selected using the [CHANGE] soft
key.
Status screen displays

and settings
On the status screen, it is possible to register up to 10 consumables names.

The remaining lifetime and count status for each registered item are
displayed on the screen.
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
O0001 N12345
(STATUS)
ITEM NAME
REMAIN
*01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER
0H
@02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER
5000H
03 FAN MOTOR
10000H
@04 LCD BACK LIGHT
720H
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** ****
19:27:05
[
][ MAINTE ][
][
][ (OPRT) ]
[ CHANGE ][ ENTRY ][ CLEAR ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ]
][
1080
][
][
CAN
][
EXEC
B63003EN1/02
(1)Consumables names
The names of consumables to be subjected to periodic maintenance are
set up here. They can be registered using either the corresponding
menu or MDI keys.
1) Menubased setup
1 To display the setting menu, place the cursor on the desired
item, and press the [ENTRY] soft key. There are two types of
setup menus: machine consumables menu and CNC
consumables menu.
2 Pressing the [MACHIN] or [NC] soft key displays a menu that
contains typical machine or CNC model names.
3 Place the cursor on the registered item and press the [SELECT]
soft key. Now press the [EXEC] soft key to return to the status
screen where the selected item name is set up.
4 Pressing the [CAN] soft key restores the previous screen.
5 Pressing the [MAINTE] soft key displays the status screen
again.
On the machine consumables screen, item names can be registered
according to the procedure below.
(a) Programbased registration
An item name can be registered by executing a program in the
following format.
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]
x : Registration number
n : Item name
[Alphanumeric character]
(b) MDIbased registration

An item name can be registered by first keying in data in the
following format, then pressing the [INPUT] soft key (or the
INPUT
key). In addition, pressing the [+INPUT] soft key can
modify an existing item name.

NOTE
1 The asterisk (*) is used as a control code, so it cannot be
used in the item name. Likewise, square brackets [ and
] and parentheses ( and ) must be excluded from the
item name.
2 If a null item name is selected on the machine consumables
screen, the warning message EDIT REJECTED will
appear. If a null item name is selected on the NC
consumables screen, a blank will be set up.
3 When a blank item name is selected on a screen of the
machine, a warning Unable to edit is issued.
When a blank item name is selected on a screen of the NC,
a blank is set.
1081
B63003EN1/02
To delete a registered item name, place the cursor on it, and press the
[CLEAR] soft key, then the [EXEC] soft key.
[Machine consumables screen]
O0001 N12345
(MACHINE)
ITEM NAME
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** ****
19:27:05
[
][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ]
[ SELECT ][
][ CLEAR ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ]
][
][
][
1082
][
READ
][
CAN
][ PUNCH ][
][
][
CAN
][ EXEC
][
][ EXEC
B63003EN1/02
[CNC consumables screen]
O0001 N12345
(NC)
ITEM NAME
01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER
02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER
03 FAN MOTOR
04 LCD BACK LIGHT
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** ****
19:27:05
[
][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ]
[ SELECT ][
][
][
][
][
][
][
CAN
][
EXEC
NOTE
On the CNC consumables screen, it is impossible to
register, delete, input, and output item names.
2) MDIbased setup
An item name can be registered by first keying in data in the
following format, then pressing the [INPUT] soft key (or the
INPUT
key). In addition, pressing the [+INPUT] soft key can modify an

existing item name.
NOTE
The asterisk (*) is used as a control code, so it cannot be
used in the item name. Likewise, square brackets [ and
] and parentheses ( and ) must be excluded from the
item name.
To delete a registered item name, place the cursor on it, and press
the [CLEAR] soft key, then the [EXEC] soft key.
When an item name is deleted, the related service life, remaining
lifetime, and count type are also deleted.
1083
B63003EN1/02
(2) Remaining lifetime

The remaining lifetime of an item is the time allowed before it must
be replaced. It is displayed in a countdown format. When the
remaining lifetime becomes less than the percentage specified in
parameter No. 8911 of the corresponding service life, the remaining
lifetime display turns red. Countdown continues even after the
service life has expired.
NOTE
No setup can be made on the status screen. Setup is
possible only on the setting screen.
(3) Count status

The count status of each item is displayed at the left of the
corresponding item number as listed below:
Setting screen displays

and settings
Display
Count status
Blank
Counting is at a halt.
Counting is under way.
Service life has expired.
On the setting screen, it is possible to specify the service life, remaining

lifetime, and count type for each registered item. It also displays the same
count status as displayed on the status screen.
O0001 N12345
(SETTING)
LIFE
REMAIN
COUNT TYPE
*01
10000H
0H
ALL TIME
@02
20000H
5000H
LIV TIME
03
32767H
10000H
@04
1500H
720H
RUN TIME
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT *** ***** *** ****
19:27:05
[ CHANGE ][ TYPE ][ CLEAR ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ]
[ EFFECT ][
][
1084
ALL
READ
][
LIV
][
][ PUNCH ][
RUN
][
][
CUT
B63003EN1/02
(1) Service life

The service life of consumables can be specified here. To specify the
service life, key in the corresponding data and press the [INPUT] soft
key (or
INPUT
key). The same data is set up as both the service life and
remaining lifetime. In addition, the count type is indicated as:
Pressing the [+INPUT] soft key causes newly entered data to be added
to the existing service life and the remaining lifetime.
The valid data range for this item is: 0 to 65535 (hours)
NOTE
1 If an attempt is made to enter data for an item number for
which no item name has been registered, the warning
message EDIT REJECTED appears.
2 If an attempt is made to enter data that does not fall in the
valid data range, the warning message DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE appears.
3 If an attempt is made to enter data that would set the service
life or remaining lifetime below 0, they will be clamped to 0.
4 If the [CLEAR] or [TYPE] soft key is pressed, the warning
message EDIT REJECTED appears.
(2) Remaining lifetime
The remaining lifetime of an item is the time allowed before it must
be replaced. It is displayed in a countdown format. When the
remaining lifetime becomes less than the percentage specified in
parameter No. 8911 of the corresponding service life, the remaining
lifetime display turns red. Countdown continues even after the
service life has expired.
To specify the remaining lifetime, key in the corresponding data and
press the [INPUT] soft key (or
INPUT
key).
Pressing the [+INPUT] soft key causes newly entered data to be added
to the current remaining lifetime.
The valid data range for this item is: 0 to the corresponding service
life
Pressing the [CLEAR] soft key, then the [EXEC] soft key causes the
remaining lifetime to be set with the same value as the service life.
1085
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
which no item name or service life has been registered, the
warning message EDIT REJECTED appears.
2 If an attempt is made to enter data that does not fall in the
valid data range, the warning message DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE appears.
3 If an attempt is made to enter data that would set the
remaining lifetime below 0, it will be clamped to 0.
4 If the [TYPE] soft key is pressed, the warning message
EDIT REJECTED appears.
(3) Count type
The way counting is carried out can be specified here.
Pressing the [TYPE] causes the following count types to be displayed
as soft keys. Select the desired one and press the [EXEC] soft key to
set it up.
Software
Meaning
Display
[EFFECT]
No counting takes place (the counter is halted).
[ALL]
Counting continues unconditionally

(nonstop counting).
ALL
[LIV]
Counting continues as long as the power is on.
LIV
[RUN]
Counting continues throughout run time.
RUN
[CUT]
Counting continues throughout cutting time.
CUT
NOTE
which no item name or service life has been registered, the
warning message EDIT REJECTED appears.
2 Neither the [INPUT] nor [+INPUT] soft key does not
function.
3 Nonstop counting will have an error of 24 hours in a leap
year.
Inputting and outputting

the registered data
The registered data related to the service life of consumables can be output
to an external unit, using the [PUNCH] soft key. Similarly, data can be
input from an external unit for registration, using the [READ] soft key.
These input/output operations can be performed on the status, setting, and
menu (machine consumables only) screens.
EDIT *** ***** *** ****
19:27:05
[
][ READ ][ PUNCH ][
][
][
1086

][
][
CAN
][ EXEC
B63003EN1/02
Data output
In EDIT mode, pressing the [PUNCH] soft key causes registered data to
be output in the following formats.
f Status and setting screens

Format
G10 L60 P01 Aa Rr [n] Qq ;

G10 L60 P02 Aa Rr [n] Qq ;
G10 L60 P03 Aa Rr [n] Qq ;
:
f Menu screen (machine consumables only)

Format
G10 L61 P01 [n] ;
G10 L61 P02 [n] ;
G10 L61 P03 [n] ;
:
a : Service life
r : Remaining lifetime
n : Item name
[Alphanumeric character]
q : Count type
0 = No counting.
1 = Nonstop counting.
2 = Counting continues as long as the power is on.
3 = Counting continues throughout run time.
4 = Counting continues throughout cutting time.
Data input
In EDIT mode, pressing the [READ] soft key causes input data to be
registered according to a specified format (G10). Registration is possible
even if the format (G10) is already in program memory as long as the
programmable data input option is available.
NOTE
Registration may not be performed correctly unless the
input format (G10) matches the output format.
Parameter
8911
Ratio to the service life of each item on the periodic maintenance screen
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] 1%
On the periodic maintenance screen, the remaining lifetime display turns
red for warning purposes, if the remaining lifetime becomes below a
specified percentage of the corresponding service life.
1087
B63003EN1/02
12.2
EDIT
12.2.1
Part Program Storage
Length
General
One of the following part program length can be selected.

FS16i/160i (m)
FS18i/180i (m)
Alarm and message
40
80
160 320 640 1280 2560 5120
20
40
80
160 320 640 1280
FS21i/210i (m)
10
20
40
80
160 320 640 1280
FS20iTA
10
20
40
80
160
FS20iFA
10
20
40
80
160 320
Number
Message
070
Reference item
Description
NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.

MEMORY
Delete any unnecessary programs,
then retry.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.3.1 Displaying Memory Used and a

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
1088
B63003EN1/02
12.2.2
No. of Registered
Programs
General
One of the following no. of registered programs can be selected.

63/125/200/400/1000
Alarm and message
Number
072
Reference item
Message
Description
TOO MANY PROGRAMS
The number of programs to be stored

exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option), 200
(option), 400 (option), or 1000(option).
Delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
OPERATORS MANUAL

List of Programs
1089
B63003EN1/02
12.2.3
Memory Protection Key
General
A key called the data protection key is used to prevent part programs,
offset values, parameters, and setting data from being registered,
modified, or deleted erroneously.
Signal
Memory protection
signal
KEY1 to KEY4
<G046#3 to #6>
[Function] Enables the changing of the memory contents from the MDI panel. Four
signals are provided. The operations that can be performed on the
contents of memory by each signal vary depending on the setting of bit
7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290.
When KEY = 0
@ KEY1: Enables the input of tool compensation values and the
workpiece zero point offset values, and workpiece coordinate
systems shift amount.
@ KEY2: Enables the input of setting data and macro variables, and
tool life management data.
@ KEY3: Enables program loading and editing.
@ KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter data tables)
When KEY = 1
@ KEY1: Enables program loading and editing, as well as the input
of PMC parameters.
@ KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
[Operation] When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled.
When a signal is set to 1, the associated operations are enabled.
Signal address
#7
G046
#6
KEY4
#5
KEY3
1090
#4
KEY2
#3
KEY1
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
3290
#7
KEY
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
KEY For memory protection keys:

0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.
1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used.
NOTE
The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or
KEY = 1.
Alarm and message
Warning message
WRITE PROTECT
Reference item
Contents
Key input is invalid because of memory protect signal.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11
SETTING AND DISPLAYING

DATA
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11

DATA
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.11

DATA
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11

DATA
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13

DATA
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.13

DATA
1091
B63003EN1/02
12.2.4
Password Function
General
The password function locks NE9 (bit 4 of parameter No. 3202), used to
protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999, by using the PASSWD (No. 3210)
and KEYWD (No. 3211) parameters. When NE9 is locked, NE9 cannot
be set to 0. Therefore, the protection for programs numbered 9000 to 9999
cannot be released unless the correct keyword is entered.
NE9 is locked when different values are set in the PASSWD and KEYWD
parameters. The values set in the two parameters are not displayed. NE9
is unlocked when the value preset in the PASSWD parameter is set in the
KEYWD parameter. When 0 is indicated for the PASSWD parameter, a
value has not yet been set for PASSWD.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3202
#4
NE9
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit

NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999
0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing after registration
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
1092
B63003EN1/02
3210
Password(PASSWD)
[Data type] Twoword

Set a secret number to this parameter. Its value is not displayed.
CAUTION
This parameter show 0, when no value is set to this
parameter. Once a key is lock, parameter NE9 cannot
become 0 and PASSWD cannot be changed unless you
perform an unlock operation or perform the memory all clear
operation. When an attempt is made to modify the
password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning
message WRITE PROTECTED is displayed to indicate
that the password cannot be modified. When an attempt is
made to modify the password with G10 (programmable
parameter input), P/S alarm No. 231 is issued.
3211
Keyword(KEYWD)
[Data type] Twoword

When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is set to
this parameter, the locked state is released and the user can now modify
the password and the value set in bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202
becomes 0.
NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the
power is turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
231
Description
FORMAT ERROR IN G10 Any of the following errors occurred in

L50
the specified format at the programmableparameter input.
1) Address N or R was not entered.
2) A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
3) The axis number was too large.
4) An axis number was not specified
in the axistype parameter.
5) An axis number was specified in
the parameter which is not an axis
type.
6) An attempt was made to reset bit 4
of parameter 3202 (NE9) or
change parameter 3210 (PSSWD)
when they are protected by a password. Correct the program.
1093
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.9.9
PASSWORD FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.9.9
PASSWORD FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.9.9
PASSWORD FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.9.9
PASSWORD FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.9.9
PASSWORD FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.9.9
PASSWORD FUNCTION
12.2.5
Background Editing
General
Alarm and message
Editing a program while executing another program is called background

editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing
(foreground editing).
A program edited in the background should be registered in foreground
program memory.
During background editing, all programs cannot be deleted at once.
Number
Message
Description
???
BP/S alarm
BP/S alarm occurs in the same number

as the P/S alarm that occurs in ordinary
program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074
085,086,087 etc.)
140
BP/S alarm
It was attempted to select or delete in

the background a program being selected in the foreground.
Use background editing correctly.
239
BP/S alarm
Background editing was performed

while the external punch was being
executed in external I/O device control.
240
BP/S alarm
Background editing was done while in

MDI operation.
1094
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line
of the background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm
screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.9.8
BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.9.8
BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.9.8
BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.9.8
BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.8
BACKGROUND EDITING
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.8
BACKGROUND EDITING
1095
B63003EN1/02
12.2.6
Playback
General
When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode

(TJOG) and TEACH IN HANDLE mode (THND) are added. In these
modes, a machine position along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual
operation is stored in memory as a program position to create a program.
The words other than X, Y, and Z, which include O, N, G, R, F, M, S, T,
P, Q, and EOB, can be stored in memory in the same way as in EDIT
mode.
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
THD
7100
#0

THD Manual handle feed in TEACH IN JOG mode
0 : Valid
1 : Invalid
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.10.3
CREATING PROGRAMS IN
TEACH IN MODE
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.10.3
TEACH IN MODE
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.10.3
TEACH IN MODE
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.10.3
TEACH IN MODE
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.12.3
TEACH IN MODE
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.10.4
TEACH IN MODE
CONNECTION MANUAL
(This manual)
2.6
MODE SELECTION
1096
B63003EN1/02
12.2.7
Conversational
Programming with
Graphic Function
General
Reference item
Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen

while displaying the G code menu.
Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G code
menu and converstional screen.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.10.4
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC

FUNCTION
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.10.4
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC

FUNCTION
1097
13
B63003EN1/02
INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
1098
B63003EN1/02
13.1
READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE
General
The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher

interface.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Program
Offset data
Parameter
Pitch error compensation data
Custom macro common variables.
1099
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
This CNC has three channels of input/output device interfaces. The

input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel
connected to that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL.
The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an
input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in
parameters for that channel in advance.
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output
device data are provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device
interface parameters for the channels.
Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)
0020
I/O CHANNEL
Specify a channel for an

input/output device.
I/ O CHANNEL
=0 : Channel1
=1 : Channel1
=2 : Channel2
I/O CHANNEL=0
(channel 1)
I/O CHANNEL=1
(channel 1)
=3 : Channel3
I/O CHANNEL=2
(channel 2)
I/O CHANNEL=3
(channel 3)
#7
#6
#5
#4
0000

[Data type] Bit
TVC TV check
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
ISO Code used for data output
0 : EIA code
1 : ISO code
1100
#3
0101
Stop bit and other data
0102
Number specified for the input/output device
0103
Baud rate
0111
0112
0113
Baud rate
0121
0122
0123
Baud rate
0131
0132
0133
Baud rate
0134
Selection of protocol
0135
Selection of RS422 or
RS232C, and other data
#2
#1
ISO
#0
TVC
B63003EN1/02
0020
I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device

[Data type] Byte
0 : Select the device of channel 1 (I/O device connected to JD36A of
motherboard)
1 : Select the device of channel 1 (I/O device connected to JD36A of
motherboard)
2 : Select the device of channel 2 (I/O device connected to JD36B of
motherboard)
3 : Select the device of channel 3 (I/O device connected to Serial
communication board)
This CNC has three channels for interfacing I/O devices. Set the channels
for interfacing I/O devices. Set the channel to which an I/O device to be
used is connected.
NOTE
1 The input/output device used can be selected also on the
setting screen. Using the setting screen is a more common
method for selecting the device.
2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of
stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific
channel must be set in parameters for that channel in
advance.
I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to
channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the
number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.
3 JD36A, JD36B, JD28A and JD6A are the connectors on the
PCB.
1101
B63003EN1/02
This CNC
MOTHERBOARD
SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD
Channel 1
JD36A
Channel 2
JD36B
Channel 3
JD28A
RS232C
RS232C
RS232C
JD6A
RS422

Reader/puncher
I/ O CHANNEL=0
or
I/ O CHANNEL=1
Reader/puncher
I/ O CHANNEL=2
Host computer
I/ O CHANNEL=3
Host computer
I/ O CHANNEL=3
(1) Parameters common to all channels

0100
#7
ENS
#6
#5
#4
#3
NCR
#2
#1
CTV
#0

CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
0 : LF, CR, CR are output.
1 : Only LF is output.
ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0 : An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.
(2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
0101
#7
NFD
#6
#5
#4
#3
ASI
#2
#1

SB2 The number of stop bits
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bits
ASI Code used at data input
0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)
1 : ASCII code
1102
#0
SB2
B63003EN1/02
NFD Feed before and after the data at data output

0 : Output
1 : Not output
NOTE
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are
used, set NFD to 1.
0102

(when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 13.1 (a).
Table 13.1 (a)
Set value
0103
Input/output device
RS232C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/ B2)
FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor

FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
RS232C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte

Set baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL
is set to 0, with a set value in Table 13.1 (b).
Table 13.1 (b)
Set value
Baud rate (bps)
Set value Baud rate (bps)
50
600
100
1200
110
2400
150
10
4800
200
11
9600
300
12
19200
1103
B63003EN1/02

0111
#7
NFD
#6
#5
#4
#3
ASI
#2
#1
#0
SB2
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings
of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0112
Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 13.1 (a).
0113
Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL
is set to 1, with a value in Table 13.1 (b).
0121
#7
NFD
#6
#5
#4
#3
ASI
#2
#1
#0
SB2
[Data type] Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2. The meanings
of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0122
Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 13.1 (a).
0123
Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL
is set to 2, with a value in Table 13.1 (b).
1104
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Reference item
Description
001
TH PARITY ALARM
TH alarm (A character with incorrect

parity was input).
Correct the tape.
002
TV PARITY ALARM
TV alarm (The number of characters

in a block is odd). This alarm will be
generated only when the TV check is
effective.
085
COMMUNICATION ERROR

using Reader / Puncher interface, an
overrun, parity or framing error was
generated. The number of bits of input
data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect.
086
DR SIGNAL OFF

was turned off.
087
BUFFER OVERFLOW

using Reader / Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command
is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or
P.C.B. is defective.
233
DEVICE BUSY
When an attempt was made to use a

unit such as that connected via the
RS232C interface, other users
were using it.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
1105
13.2
REMOTE BUFFER
B63003EN1/02
Refer to Remote Buffer DESCRIPTIONS (B61802E1) for detailed

informetion of remote buffer.
1106
B63003EN1/02
13.3
DNC1 INTERFACE
General
Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS(B61782E) for detailed

information of DNC1 interface.
Parameter
0020

[Data type] Byte
Set value. :10
0133
Baud rate
[Data type] Byte

The baud rate of HDLC is fixed to 460 kbps for DNC1.
Set following value:
Set value. :51
NOTE
0141
System for connection between the CNC and host (DNC1 interface)
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 1 or 2
This parameter specifies the system for connection (DNC1 interface)
between the CNC and host.
Set value
1 : Pointtopoint connection
2 : Multipoint connection
NOTE
1107
B63003EN1/02
0142
Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface)
[Data type] Byte

This parameter specifies the station address of the CNC when the CNC
is connected via the DNC1 interface using multipoint connection.
NOTE
MAP SCREEN
1. COMMUNICATION
SCREEN
(1) Operational Proceclure
1) Press function key <SYSTEM>.
2) Press rightend soft key repeatedly until the
[CSERV],[COPER] are displayed shown below:
MDI
***
STOP
***
***
[COPER][CSERV][
***
][
soft
12 : 34 : 53
][ ( OPRT
) ]
(2) Description of screen

(a) Setting screen ( one page )
Press soft key [COPER] and the following screen is displayed.
1108
key
B63003EN1/02
COMMUNICATION OPERATION
DNC
>
MDI
***
FILE
O0001
SELECTION
STOP
***
***
***
[COPER][CSERV][
][
1109
12 : 34 : 53
][ ( OPRT
) ]
N00000
B63003EN1/02
(b) Service Screen

Press soft key [CSERV] and the following screen is displayed.
Three pages are available and one of the pages is selected by page key.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETER
NC APPLICATION NAME
O0001
N00000
O0001
N00000
HOST APPLICATION NAME
>
MDI
***
STOP
***
***
[COPER][CSERV][
***
12 : 34 : 53
][
][ ( OPRT ) ]
CNC STATUS ( UNSOLICITED STATUS )
RISING
UPPER
word
LOWER word
FALLING
UPPER
word
LOWER word
INFORMATION REPORT MASK
UPPER
word
LOWER word
CNC ALARM ( INFORMATION REPORT )
UPPER
word
LOWER word
00000000
11111111
00000000
01010100
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000010
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
11110001 00000000
01000001 10000111
>
MDI
***
STOP
***
***
[COPER][CSERV][
***
][
1110
12 : 34 : 53
][ ( OPRT ) ]
B63003EN1/02
PASCAL STACK ADDRESS
UPPER LIMIT
LOWER LIMIT
SERVICE MODE
1
SERVICE MODE
O0001
N00000
01ABC000
01ABC0FF
01010100
00000010
01000000
00000001
FILE REQUEST TIME OUT

12345678
REMOTE REQUEST TIME OUT
12345678
>
MDI
***
STOP
***
***
[COPER][CSERV][
***
][
12 : 34 : 53
][ ( OPRT ) ]
(3) Entry Method

1) Setting screen
DNC file selection String input
2) Service screen page 1
NC application String input
Host application String input
Status post enable Bit input
Status post mask Bit input
Alarm post Bit input
Pascal stack address Hexadecimal input
Service mode Bit input
File request time-out Integer input
Remote request time-out Integer input
String input:Details are described in Section 1.4, String Input
Mode.
Integer input: Entered as positive integers from
0 to 99999999
Bit input: Entered as 0/1;
00000000 to 11111111
Hexadecimal input: Entered as a hexadecimal number from
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
1111
B63003EN1/02
[Setting procedure]
1 Put the system in the MDI mode.
2 Cause the setting screen or service screen to appear, and press the
[(OPRT)] soft key.
3 Move the cursor to the item you want to specify, using the page and
cursor keys.
4 Enter the setting value from the keypad, and press the [INPUT] soft
key.
(4) String Entry Mode
1) On the string input screen, the cursor is placed on top.
DNC FILE SELECTION
O0001
N00000
The cursor is positioned here at first.
2) Press the [(OPRT)] key, and the following soft keys will appear on the
screen.
[ STRING ]
[ INPUT ]
CLEAR
INS. CH ]
[ DEL. CH ]
3) Press the [STRING] key, then it enters the string input mode.
DNC
FILE SELECTION
When the cursor is here, it is the string input mode.

>
MDI
***
[ STRING ]
STOP
***
[ INPUT ]
***
[
***
12 : 34 : 53
CLEAR
INS. CH ]
4) Specify the DNC file name.

(Example) O1000. PRG
1112
[ DEL. CH ]
B63003EN1/02
5) Press the [INPUT] soft key to input the values.

DNC
FILE SELECTION
O1000.PRG
>
MDI
***
[ STRING ]
STOP *** *** *** 12 : 34 : 53

[ INPUT ] [ CLEAR ] [ INS. CH ]
[ DEL. CH ]
6) Deleting the DNC file name

D If you want to delete the entire name, press the [CLEAR] soft key.
D If you want to delete a letter at the cursor, press the [DEL.CH] soft
key.
(Example) ABCDEFG
Cursor
To delete letter E, move the cursor to that letter:
ABCD E FG
Press [DEL.CH], and the result will be:
ABCD F G
7) Overwriting
(Example) When you want to overwrite letters starting at C with letters XYZ, move
the cursor to letter C.
AB C DEFG
Enter XYZ, then press the [INPUT] soft key.
ABXYZ F G
8) Inserting letters
(Example) To insert string ABC after string ABC, move the cursor to letter D.
ABC D EFG
Enter letters ABC.
ABC D EFG
Press the [INS.CH] soft key.
ABCABC EFG
9) Canceling the string input mode
If you press the [STRING] soft key, the cursor goes back to the
position shown below, and the string input mode is canceled.
J DNC file selection
O1000. PRG
NOTE
1 The page keys do not work during the string input mode.
2 Switching the CNC mode during a string input mode cancels
the string input mode.
1113
2. PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
B63003EN1/02
(1) Setting screen

D DNC file selection
To start DNC operation, specify a file name in the host computer.
Format: Oxxxx. PRG (where xxxx is a fourdigit decimal
number.)
(2) Service screen
D CNC and host application names
Specify these parameters with CNC and host application names in
the string input mode.
D Status post enable
Rising change Upper word: 11111111 11111111
Lower word: 01110000 10111110
Falling change Upper word: 00000000 00000000
Lower word: 11111111 11111111
Each bit in this parameter specifies whether to send the CNC status
information to the DNC1 board according to a local request.
The CNC status information consists of a bit pattern listed in Table A.
Each bit in the bit pattern corresponds to the bits in the rising and falling
change words.
Setting value 0: Mask
1: Post
The rising change word specifies that a status information bit change from
0 to 1 be posted, and the falling change word, 1 to 0.
NOTE
Use the lower word only.
f CNC status information bit pattern (Table A)
Lower word
15
14
13
12
11
10
Bit position: Signal name

00: RWD
01: AL
02: RST
03: SPL
04: STL
05: OP
06: SA
07: MA
08:
09:
10:
11:
12: M00
13: M01
14: M02
15: M30
1114
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
CNC status information

Rewind signal
Alarm output signal
Resetting signal
Cycle operating signal
Servo ready
CNC ready
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
M00 decode output signal (*)
02
01
00
B63003EN1/02
* For the T series (twopath control), bits 08 to 11 correspond to M00

to M30 at HEAD2 respectively, and bits 12 to 15, at HEAD1.
D Status post mask
Not used
D Alarm post
This parameter specifies whether the bit position of a CNC alarm
is posted to the host when a status change occurs according to a
local request.
Setting value
0: Not to post
1: To post
The relationships between the parameter bits and alarms are as
follows:
Upper word bit parameter
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Lower word bit parameter
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
Bit number: Alarm type

01:
P/S alarm
02:
Overheat alarm
05:
P/S 100 alarm
06:
Overtravel
12:
Servo alarm
13:
P/S 101 alarm
14:
P/S 000 alarm
16:
Battery alarm
D Service mode 2
The DNC1 allfile directory information read function works as
follows:
00000000 00000001: Only file numbers are read.
00000000 00000000: File numbers and sizes are read.
D File request time-out
D Remote request time-out
This parameter specifies when a time-out is to occur for a request
from the host.
Parameter setting: 0 to 99999999
Unit of time: ms
NOTE
1 If value 0 is specified in the parameter, a conventional fixed
time of about 25.6 seconds is specified as a time-out value.
2 The time for the time-out is counted in 32 ms units internally.
The actual time for a time-out to occur is calculated as:
Actual time-out time = (parameter setting
B 32 + 1)* x 32 [ms]*
The term enclosed in parentheses is rounded down at a decimal point.

1115
13.4
DNC2 INTERFACE
B63003EN1/02
Refer to an item of FANUC DNC2 DESCRIPTIONS ( B61992E ) for

detailed information of DNC2 interface.
1116
B63003EN1/02
13.5
EXTERNAL I/O
DEVICE CONTROL
General
It is possible to request from the outside that a program be registered,

collated, or output.
D Registeration/Collation
As triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the background
edit function saves programs from an external input unit onto tape and
verifies them.
D Output
As triggered by the external punch start signal EXWT, the background
edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program memory
to an external output device.
Signal
External Read Start

Signal EXRD <G058#1>
[Function] Programs are registered through the reader/puncher interface or remote
buffer. Or the read programs are collated with programs already stored
in the part program memory.
[Operation] When this signal becomes logical 1, the CNC operates as follows:
D In all modes other than the MDI mode, the background edit function
reads programs from an external input device, and register them on the
part program memory or collates them with programs already
registered in the part program memory.
(The memory protection key KEY3 <G046#5> determines whether to
register or collate.)
D Bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No. 3201 selects whether to register all
programs in a file or one program at a time. Bit 0 (RDL) of parameter
No. 3201 can be used to delete all programs previously stored in the
part program memory. However, it is impossible to delete programs
protected by bits 0 (NE8) and 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202.
D When programs are being registed or collated, the read/punch busy
signal (RPBSY) is kept to be logical 1.
D When the background processingactivated signal BGEACT is
logical 1 (for example, during background editing or MDI mode), the
external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
D When programs are being registered or collated, if the system is reset
or the external read/punch stop signal EXSTP becomes logical 1, the
registeration or collation is discontinued.
D If the foreground processing is already using the reader/puncher
interface (for example, during DNC operation or program reading in
the edit mode), the external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
1117
B63003EN1/02
There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can

be registered or collated. For example, a program cannot be registered
or collated, if a program with the same program number is being
executed in the foreground processing.
External Punch Start

Signal EXWT <G058#3>
[Function] Programs stored in the part program memory are output to an external unit
via the reader/puncher interface.
D In all modes other than the MDI mode, the background edit function
outputs all programs stored in the part program memory to an external
output device.
D When programs are being output, the read/punch busy signal RPBSY
becomes logical 1.
D When the background processingactivated signal BGEACT is
logical 1 (for example, during background editing or MDI mode), the
external punch start signal EXWT is ignored.
D When programs are being output, if the system is reset or the external
read/punch stop signal EXSTP becomes logical 1, the output is
discontinued.
D If the foreground processing is already using the reader/puncher
interface (for example, during DNC operation or program reading in
the edit mode), the external punch start signal EXWT is ignored.
D There are some other conditions to determine whether all programs
can be output. For example, a program cannot be output, if it is
running or protected by bits 0 (NE8) and 4 (NE9) of parameter No.
3202.
External Read/Punch
Stop Signal
EXSTP <G058#2>
[Function] When the external read/punch stop signal becomes logical 1, it stops
program registeration, collation, or output via the reader/puncher
interface and program registeration and collation via the remote buffer.
D The program registeration, collation or output triggered by the
external read or punch start signal is stopped immediately.
1118
B63003EN1/02
Background editing
signal
BGEACT <F053#4>
[Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1 when:
D The [BG EDIT] soft key is pressed to put the CNC in the background
edit mode.
D The MDI mode is selected.
D The external read or punch start signal starts program registeration,
collation, or output.
D Program upload or download is started by the DNC1, DNC2, or
MMC.
This signal becomes logical 0 when:
D The [BG END] soft key is pressed to terminate the background edit
mode.
D The CNC shifts from the MDI mode to another mode.
D Program registeration or output triggered by the external read or punch
start signal ends either normally or abnormally (reset or requested by
the EXSTP signal).
D Program upload or download started by the DNC1, DNC2, or MMC
is ended.
Read/punch busy signal

RPBSY <F053#2>
[Function] This signal indicates that program registeration, collation, or output
triggered by the external read or punch start signal is under way.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1, when:
D The external read or punch start signal triggers program registeration,
collation, or output.
This signal becomes logical 0, when:
Program registeration collation or output triggered by the external read

or punch start signal ends either normally or abnormally (reset or
requested by the EXSTP signal).
1119
B63003EN1/02
Read/punch alarm signal

RPALM <F053#3>
[Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program
registeration, collation, or output triggered by the external read or punch
start signal.
[Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1, when:
D An alarm condition occurs during program registeration, collation, or
output triggered by the external read or punch start signal.
This signal becomes logical 0, when:
The system is reset, or the external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is

input.
Signal Address
#7
#6
#5
#7
#6
#5
G058
F053
1120
#4
#3
EXWT
#2
EXSTP
#1
EXRD
#0
#4
#3
BGEACT RPALM
#2
RPBSY
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)
0020
I/O CHANNEL
Specify a channel for an

input/output device.
I/ O CHANNEL
=0 : Channel1
=1 : Channel1
=2 : Channel2
I/O CHANNEL=0
(channel 1)
I/O CHANNEL=1
(channel 1)
=3 : Channel3
I/O CHANNEL=2
(channel 2)
I/O CHANNEL=3
(channel 3)
#7
3201
#6
NPE
#5
N99
#4
#3
0101
0102
0103
Baud rate
0111
0112
0113
Baud rate
0121
0122
0123
Baud rate
0131
0132
0133
Baud rate
0134
Selection of protocol
0135
Selection of RS422 or
RS232C, and other data
#2
REP
#1
RAL
#0
RDL
[Data type] Bit

RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control
0 : The new program is registered following the programs already
registered.
1 : All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is
registered.
Note that programs which are protected from being edited are not
deleted.
RAL When programs are registered through the reader/puncher interface
0 : All programs are registered.
1 : Only one program is registered.
REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is
the same as that of an existing program
0 : An alarm is generated.
1 : The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered.
Note that if the existing program is protected from being edited, it is
not deleted, and an alarm is generated.
1121
B63003EN1/02
N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program
registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0 : Completed
1 : Not completed
#7
#6
#5
3202
#4
NE9
#3
#2
#1
#0
NE8

0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
0 : Not inhibited
1 : Inhibited
(2) Program punching (Even when punching of all programs is
specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not
punched.)
1122
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
079
BP/S ALARM
In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree with

that read from an external I/O device.
Check both the programs in memory
and those from the external device.
085
BP/S ALARM

using Reader / Puncher interface, an
overrun, parity or framing error was
generated. The number of bits of input
data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect.
086
BP/S ALARM

was turned off.
087
BP/S ALARM

using reader /puncher interface,
though the read terminate command is
specified, input does not stop after 10
characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective.
180
BP/S ALARM
Remote buffer connection alarm has

generated. Confirm the number of
cables, parameters and I/O device.
233
BP/S ALARM
When an attempt was made to use a

unit such as that connected via the
RS232C interface, other users were
using it.
239
BP/S ALARM
While punching was being performed

with the function for controlling external
I/O units ,background editing was performed.
1123
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.8.4
PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.4
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.8.4
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.4
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.4
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.8.4
1124
B63003EN1/02
13.6
SIMULTANEOUS
INPUT AND OUTPUT
OPERATIONS
(M SERIES)
General
While an automation operation is being performed, a program input from

an I/O device connected to the reader/punch interface can be executed and
stored in memory.
Similarly, a program stored in memory can be executed and output
through the reader/punch interface at the same time.
Basic procedure for input

and run simultaneous
operation
Basic procedure for output

and run simultaneous
operation
(1) Search the head of a program (file) you want to run and input.
(2) Select the DNC operation mode.
(3) Set the input and run simultaneous mode select signal STRD to
logical 1.
(4) Activate automatic operation.
(5) The system repeats to input and run one block of data alternately.
(1) Select a program you want to run and output.

(2) Select the DNC operation mode.
(3) Set the output and run simultaneous mode select signal STWD to
logical 1.
(4) Activate automatic operation.
(5) The system repeats to output and run one block of data alternately.
Signal
Input and run

simultaneous mode
select signal
STRD <G058#5>
[Function] When this signal becomes logical 1, the control unit:
D Selects the input and run simultaneous mode.
To select the input and run simultaneous mode, it is necessary to
select the DNC operation mode and to set this signal to logical 1.
1125
B63003EN1/02
Output and run

simultaneous mode
select signal
STWD <G058#6>
[Function] When this signal becomes logical 1, the control unit:
Selects the output and run simultaneous mode.

To select the output and run simultaneous mode, it is necessary to
select the DNC operation mode and to set this signal to logical 1.
Signal address
#7
G058
#6
STWD
#5
STRD
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter
3218
Program number registered in synchronous input/output operation

(for the fourdigit program number function)
[Data type] Word

This parameter sets a program number for such a program that is input by
an input/output unit in the synchronous input/output operation mode and
is executed while being stored in memory.
NOTE
1 If a value beyond the valid data range is specified, the
program number of the input program is assumed.
2 When the eightdigit program number function is provided,
the program number should not be set in this parameter but
in parameter 3219.
3219
Program number registered in synchronous input/output operation

(for the eightdigit program number function)
[Data type] 2word

This parameter sets a program number for such a program that is input by
an input/output unit in the synchronous input/output operation mode and
is executed while being stored in memory.
1126
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 If a value beyond the valid data range is specified, the
number of the input program is registered.
2 When the eightdigit program number function is not
provided, the program number should not be set in this
parameter but in parameter 3218.
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Note
Description
123

COMMAND IN DNC
DNC operation.
Modify the program.
210
CAN NOT COMAND

M198/M99
222
DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED Input and output are executed at a time
IN BGEDIT
in the background edition.
Execute a correct operation.
M198 and M99 are executed in the

schedule operation. M198 is executed
in the DNC operation. Modify the program.
NOTE
1 M198 (file access) cannot be executed in the input, output
and run simultaneous mode. An attempt to do so results in
P/S alarm No. 210.
2 A macro control command cannot be executed in the input,
output and run simultaneous mode. An attempt to do so
results in P/S alarm No. 123.
3 If an alarm condition occurs during the input, output and run
simultaneous mode, a block being processed when the
alarm condition occurs and all blocks before that are input
or output.
4 In the output and run simultaneous mode, if a device used
is a floppy disk drive or FA card, the file name is the
execution program number.
5 When a program is being executed in the output and run
simultaneous mode, if a subprogram is called, only the main
program is output.
1127
B63003EN1/02
13.7
EXTERNAL
PROGRAM INPUT
General
By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded
from an input unit into CNC memory.
When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy
Cassette is being used, a file can be searched for using the workpiece
number search signals, after which the program can be loaded into CNC
memory.
To use external program input start signal MINP <G058#0> to start data
input, the following conditions must be satisfied:
D The reader/punch interface function is enabled.
D Bit 7 (MIP) of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1.
D Programs are not protected using the memory protection signal.
D Automatic operation mode is set.
D The current state is other than the start of automatic operation, that is,
cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0. (Automatic operation signal
OP may be set to 1.)
Signal
External program input

start signal
MINP <G058#0>
[Function] This signal starts loading of a program from an input unit into CNC
memory.
D When memory operation mode is set, but no automatic operation is
being performed and program loading is not inhibited by the setting
of the memory protection key, the CNC deletes all currently loaded
programs, then loads a program from the external input unit into CNC
memory.
D When the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy Cassette is being
used as the input unit, a desired file can be searched for using the
workpiece number search signals (PN1 to PN16), after which the
program can be loaded into CNC memory.
File numbers are indicated using the workpiece number search signals,
as follows:
Workpiece no. search signal
File no.
no
PN16
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
00
01
02
1128
B63003EN1/02
Workpiece no. search signal
File no.
no
PN16
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
File No. 00 is used for special specification; specifying file No. 00 means
that no search operation is to be performed. Therefore, numbers 01 to 31
can be assigned to files.
[Application] This function is applicable to the following case:
When a program to be used for machining is too large to be loaded into
CNC memory, the program is divided into several segments. These
segments are loaded into memory and executed, one by one.
1129
B63003EN1/02
In this case, the general operation flow is as shown below.
Press the cycle start button.
Issuing the external program input start

signal (MINP) starts program input.
The automatic operation mode signal (STL)

is set to 1, then program input starts.
When input terminates, the STL

signal is set to 0.
A change to 0 in the STL signal is

detected, then CNC operation starts.
Machining by the CNC
Yes
End of machining?
No
Operation terminates.
A miscellaneous function, previously added to the

end of the program, is executed. An appropriate
code is defined for this miscellaneous function in the
machine to input the next program.
This miscellaneous function is detected, then

operation is interrupted by a single block
signal or automatic operation stop signal.
The STL signal is set to 0. Then, input of

the next program is started according to the
MINP signal.
The timing chart for data reading is shown below.

1130
B63003EN1/02
Execution of a machining program

M code command for the
next program input
Code signal
Mxxx
Strobe signal
MF
Singleblock signal
SBK
Completion signal
FIN
STL
External program input

start signal
Program input
MINP
Automatic operation
start signal
ST
M00~M31
CAUTION
The M code used for input of the next program must not be
buffered.
NOTE
While a program is being input, the automatic operation
mode signal STL is set to 1. Upon termination of program
input, STL is set to 0.
Signal Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MINP
#7
MIP
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G058
Parameter
3201

MIP Specifies whether to load a program into memory according to the
external program input start signal (MINP).
0 : Does not load a program into memory.
1 : Loads a program into memory.
1131
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 A program can be input according to the external program
input start signal only when the program has only one
program number.
To read programs having multiple program numbers, reset
the CNC each time the CNC reads one program. After
reset, search for a desired program by using the workpiece
number search signals, then input the program according to
the external program input start signal.
2 When program input is activated by the external program
input activation signal, all programs are deleted from the
CNC, at the beginning.
3 In background editing, the external program input activation
signal is ineffective.
1132
B63003EN1/02
13.8
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTIONS BASED
ON THE I/O LINK
General
Power Mate programs, parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic

(PMC) data are input/output through the FANUC I/O Link.
With the FANUC I/O Link, slaves from group 0 to group 15 can be
connected, thus enabling data input/output to and from a maximum of 16
Power Mates.
When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is used, the
external I/O device control function is associated with an I/O Link to
enable the specification of an input/output group number and program
number from the PMC. The external I/O device control function operates
in the background. This means that when no other background operation
is being performed, data can be input/output, regardless of the CNC mode
and the screen selected.
Master
FANUC I/O Link
Slave (Group #0)

Power Mate
Series 16i/18i/21i
(Group #1)
(Group #15)
Power Mate
@@@@@@@
Power Mate
The programs, parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic (PMC) data

of a slave Power Mate are stored in tape format within the part program
storage length; these data items are stored as master program data in a
master program memory area.
Data input/output can be performed between the master and the slave of
a selected group. When the ordinary data input/output function based on
the I/O Link is used, a group is selected by means of parameter setting.
When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is used, a group
is selected by issuing the DI signal. Data input/output cannot be
performed between the master and more than one groups at a time.
For details of the Power Mate signals, refer to the FANUC Power Mate
Connection/Maintenance Manual.
For details of the FANUC I/O Link, refer to the FANUC PMC
Programming Manual.
For details of the external I/O device control function, see Section 13.5.
1133
Basic data input/output

procedure
B63003EN1/02
(1) Program input/output

(a) Program input
When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link
is used
1) Specify a number between 20 to 35 as the I/O channel on
the setting screen to specify a group number.
2) Specify EDIT mode.
3) Display the program screen with function key
PROG
4) To change the program numbers, enter a new program

number as follows:
(i) Select address O.
(ii) Key in the new program number.
5) Using soft keys [(OPRT)], continuousmenu key
1)
2)
3)
4)
[READ], and [EXEC], read the program.

When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is
used
To read programs without changing the program numbers,
specify 9999. To read programs by changing the program
numbers, specify a desired number with the PMC function
instruction (WINDW). A program number thus specified
serves as the first program number when multiple
programs are received. The second and any additional
programs are numbered sequentially starting with the first
number.
Specify a desired group number with group number
specification signals SRLNI0 to SRLNI3.
Select an I/O Link by setting I/O Link specification signal
IOLS to 1.
When external punch start signal EXRD is set to 1,
programs are read from the Power Mate.
NOTE
The user cannot read a program having an arbitrary
program number registered in a Power Mate. All programs
are always read from a Power Mate.
(b) Program output

is used
1) Set a number between 20 and 35 as the I/O channel on the
setting screen used to specify a group number.
2) Set EDIT mode.
3) Display the program screen by pressing the function key
PROG
4) Select address O.
1134
B63003EN1/02
5) Key in a program number.

6) Using soft keys [(OPRT)], continuousmenu key
[PUNCH], and [EXEC], output the program

corresponding to the keyedin program number.

used
1) Using the PMC function instruction (WINDW), set the

program number of the program to be output. Specify
9999 to output all programs.
2) Specify a desired group number with group number
specification signals SRLNI0 to SRLNI3.
3) Select an I/O Link by setting the I/O Link specification
signal IOLS to 1.
4) When external punch start signal EXWT is set to 1, the
program is output to the Power Mate.
(2) Parameter input/output
A Power Mate parameter in tape format is stored as a masterside NC
program in a program memory area. The following program number
is assigned to a Power Mate parameter of group n:
(Value set in parameter No. 8760) + n
10
(a) Parameter input

is used
In step 4) of program input (described in (1).(a)), key in a
program number for a Power Mate parameter. The other
steps are the same as those for program input.

used
In step 1) of program input (described in (1).(a)), specify a
program number for the Power Mate parameters. The
remaining steps are the same as those for program input.
(b) Parameter output

is used
In step 5) of program output (described in (1).(b)), key in a
program number for a Power Mate parameter. The other
steps are the same as those for program output.

used
In step 1) of program output (described in (1).(b)), specify
a program number for a Power Mate parameter. The
remaining steps are the same as those for program output.
(3) Macro variable input/output

In the same way as for parameters, a Power Mate macro variable in
tape format is stored as a master side NC program in a program
memory area. The following program number is assigned to a Power
Mate macro variable of group n:
(Value set for parameter No. 8760) + n
10 + 1
1135
B63003EN1/02
(a) Macro variable input

is used
With Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15, specify a
start number for the macro variables to be read. With
EDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of macro variables
to be read.
program number for the Power Mate macro variables. The
other steps are the same as those for program input.
used
start number for the macro variables to be read. With
EDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of macro variables
to be read.
program number for Power Mate macro variables. The
(b) Macro variable output
is used
a program number for a Power Mate macro variable. The
other steps are the same as those for program output.
used
a program number for a Power Mate macro variable. The
remaining steps are the same as those for program output.
NOTE
The setting parameter or bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000
must be set to 1 to enable the use of the ISO code for macro
variable output. When a macro variable is output in EIA
code, the Power Mate issues alarm 001, while the Series
16i/18i/21i issues alarm 86.
(4) Diagnostic (PMC) data input/output
In the same way as the parameters and macro variables, a Power Mate
diagnostic data item in tape format is stored as a masterside NC
program in a program memory area. The following program number
is assigned to a Power Mate diagnostic data item of group n:
(Value set in parameter No. 8760) + n
10 + 2
1136
B63003EN1/02
(a) Diagnostic (PMC) data input

is used
start number for the diagnostic data items to be read. With
EDN00 to EDN15, specify the number of diagnostic data
items to be read.
program number for the Power Mate diagnostic data items.
The other steps are the same as those for program input.

used
start number for the diagnostic data items to be read. With
EDN00 to EDN15, set the number of diagnostic data items
to be read.
program number for Power Mate diagnostic data items. The
(b) Diagnostic (PMC) data output

is used
a program number for a Power Mate diagnostic data item.
The other steps are the same as those for program output.

used
a program number for a Power Mate diagnostic data item.
The remaining steps are the same as those for program
output.
NOTE
The addresses of Power Mate DI signals EDG00 to EDG15
and EDN00 to EDN15 differ between ModelD and the
other models, as indicated in the table below. For macro
variable and diagnostic data input, ensure that these
signals are processed correctly. If an invalid value or
number is set, the Power Mates external I/O device control
function is not started.
Signal name
Power Mate A/B/C/E
Power Mate D, F, H
EDG00 to EDG07
EDG08 to EDG15
G100.0 to G100.7
G101.0 to G101.7
G252.0 to G252.7
G253.0 to G253.7
EDN00 to EDN07
EDN08 to EDN15
G102.0 to G102.7
G103.0 to G103.7
G254.0 to G254.7
G255.0 to G255.7
1137
B63003EN1/02
Stopping input/output
There are two methods of forcibly terminating input/output.

(1) Termination by a reset
Input/output can be terminated by a reset. In this case, however, slave
read/write stop signal ESTPIO is not output. Therefore, the
operation of the Power Mate is not terminated even if the Power Mate
is performing input/output. To terminate Power Mate operation,
create a ladder program so that ESTPIO is set to 1 upon the
occurrence of a reset.
(2) Termination using external read/punch stop signal EXSTP
(applicable only when data input/output function B based on the I/O
Link is used)
Input/output can be terminated by setting external read/punch stop
signal EXSTP to 1. In this case, slave read/write stop signal ESTPIO
is output, and all processing is terminated once the termination of
Power Mate input/output has been confirmed. See the timing chart
for the case where the Series 16i/18i/21i issues an alarm.
Specifying the PMC

functions
The PMC function instruction (WINDW) is used to set the program

numbers used with data input/output function B based on the I/O Link.
[Data] This function is a window function for specifying the program numbers
used to perform program input/output with the I/O device control
function via the I/O Link.
Top address +0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+10
Function
code
Completion
code
Data length
Data number
Data
attribute
Data
194
Program number
( : Need not be set.)
Specify 0 in the data number and data attribute fields.

Specify 2 in the data length field.
Specify a desired twobyte program number (1 to 9999, 9999) in the data
field.
Top address +0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+10
Function
code
Completion
code
Data length
Data number
Data
attribute
Data
194
Input data
Input data
Input data
Input data
[Completion codes]
0 : Normal termination
5 : Data other than 1 to 9999 or 9999 was specified.
The data length, data number, and data attribute fields are not checked.
For details of the PMC function instructions, refer to the FANUC PMC
Programming Manual.
1138
B63003EN1/02
Power Mate state signals

(input)
Power Mate address F
When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, the
state signals for a specified Power Mate must be reported to the Series
16i/18i/21i. These signals must be posted to the Series 16i/18i/21i via the
following path:
1)
Power Mate address Y
2)
Series 16i/18i/21i address X
3)
Series 16i/18i/21i address G
1) Depends on the ladder program of the Power Mate.

2) Depends on the I/O Link.
3) Depends on the ladder program of the Series 16i/18i/21i.
For an explanation of the functions of the Power Mate state signals, see
item Signal.
Power Mate control

signals (output)
Series 16i/18i/21i address F
When the data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, Power
Mate control signals must be output from the Series 16i/18i/21i to control
the external I/O device control function of a specified Power Mate. These
signals must be posted to the Power Mate via the following path:
1)
Series 16i/18i/21i address Y
2)
Power Mate address X
3)
Power Mate address G
1) Depends on the ladder program of the Series 16i/18i/21i.

2) Depends on the I/O Link.
3) Depends on the ladder program of the Power Mate.
For an explanation of the functions of the Power Mate control signals, see
Section 13.8.(2).
1139
DI/DO signal timing

charts
B63003EN1/02
The DI/DO signal timing charts applicable when data input/output

function B based on the I/O Link is used are shown below. When the
ordinary data input/output function based on the I/O Link is used, 1)
through 4) in the figures are subject to MDIbased input/output.
(1) When ordinary input/output is performed
1) Specify a program number with the PMC function
instruction (WINDW).
2) Specify the group number of the Power Mate to be used for
input/output with group number specification signals
SRLNI0 to SRLNI3.
3) Set I/O Link specification signal IOLS to 1.
4) For input, set external read start signal EXRD to 1.
For output, set external punch start signal EXWT to 1.
5) Processing by the Series 16i/18i/21i outputs slave I/O Link
selection signal IOLNK and group number output signals
SRLNO0 to SRLNO3.
6) Using a ladder program, make the necessary preparations
for data input/output using the I/O Link.
7) Upon the completion of step 6), set the I/O Link
confirmation signal IOLACK to 1. The Series 16i/18i/21i
waits until IOLACK is set to 1.
8) The Series 16i/18i/21i outputs slave external read/write
signal ERDIO/EWTIO, and slave input/output data
selection signals EPRG, EVAR, EPARM, and EDGN.
9) The Series 16i/18i/21i waits for the external I/O device
control function of the Power Mate to start. (The Series
16i/18i/21i waits for the external I/O device control
function of the Power Mate to start.)
10) The Series 16i/18i/21i performs data input/output through
the I/O Link.
11) Upon the completion of data input/output, the Series
16i/18i/21i sets the slave external read/write start signal
and slave input/output data selection signals to 0.
12) The Series 16i/18i/21i waits for the completion of the
external I/O device control function of the Power Mate.
The Series 16i/18i/21i waits for termination or completion
of the external I/O device control function of the Power
Mate.
13) Upon the completion of the operation of the external I/O
device control function of the Power Mate, the Power Mate
read/write inprogress signal BGION is set to 0.
14) The Series 16i/18i/21i sets the slave I/O Link selection
signal IOLNK to 0.
15) I/O Link specification signal IOLS and I/O Link
confirmation signal IOLACK are set to 0.
1140
B63003EN1/02
(6)
(9)
(10)
(12)
(15)
(3)
(1) I/O Link specification signal IOLS
(4)
(2) External read/punch signal EXRD/EXWT
(15)
(5)
(3) I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK
(13)
(4) Power Mate read/write in

progress signal BGION
(5) Power Mate read/write alarm
signal BGIALM
(9)
(6) Power Mate background
busy signal BGEN
(1)
(7) Program No.
(2)
(8) Group number
specification signal SRLNIx
(9) Slave I/O Link selection signal IOLNK
(11)
(10) Read/punch inprogress

signal RPBSY
(11) Read/punch alarm signal
RPALM
(11)
(12) Background busy signal

BGEACT
(13) Slave external read/write

start signal ERDIO/EWTIO
(14) Slave input/output data
selection signals EPRG,
EVAR, EPARM, EDGN
(15) Slave read/write stop
signal ESTPIO
(16) Group number output signal SRLNOx
(5)
1141
(14)
(5)
(8)
(11)
(8)
(11)
B63003EN1/02
(2) When an alarm is issued by the Series 16i/18i/21i (including the case
where processing is stopped by external read/punch signal EXSTP)
Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output.
11) When the Series 16i/18i/21i issues an alarm, or when
external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1, slave
read/write stop signal ESTPIO is set to 1.
12) The Series 16i/18i/21i waits for the external I/O device
control function of the Power Mate to terminate. The
Series 16i/18i/21i merely waits until the external I/O
device control function of the Power Mate terminates.
13) When the external I/O device control function of the Power
Mate terminates, Power Mate read/write inprogress
signal BGION is set to 0.
14) The Series 16i/18i/21i sets slave I/O Link selection signal
IOLNK and slave read/write stop signal ESTPIO to 0.
1142
B63003EN1/02
(9)
(6)
(10) (12)
(3)
(1) I/O Link specification signal
IOLS
(15)
(4)
(2) External read/punch signal

EXRD/EXWT
(7)
(15)
(3) I/O Link confirmation signal

IOLACK
(13)

(13)

signal BGIALM
(9)
busy signal BGEN
(1)
(7) Program No.

(2)
(8) Group number specification
signal SRLNIx
(9)
(9) Slave I/O Link selection

signal IOLNK
(14)
(11)

signal RPBSY
(11)

RPALM
(11)

BGEACT
(14) Slave input/output data selection signals EPRG, EVAR,

EPARM, EDGN
(15) Slave read/write stop signal
ESTPIO
(16) Group number output signal
SRLNOx
(8)
(11)
(8)
(11)
(11)
(5)
1143
(14)
B63003EN1/02
(3) When an alarm is issued by the Power Mate

Steps 1) to 10) are the same as those for ordinary input/output.
11) When the Power Mate issues an alarm, Power Mate
read/write alarm signal BGIALM is set to 1, and Power
Mate read/write inprogress signal BGION is set to 0.
12) The Series 16i/18i/21i sets slave I/O Link selection signal
IOLNK and slave read/write stop signal ESTPIO to 0.
1144
B63003EN1/02
(9)
(6)
(10)
(3)
(1) I/O Link specification signal
IOLS
(13)
(4)
(2) External read/punch signal

EXRD/EXWT
(3) I/O Link confirmation signal
IOLACK
(7)
(13)
(11)

(11)

signal BGIALM
busy signal BGEN
(9)
(11)
(1)
(7) Program No.

(2)
(8) Group number specification
signal SRLNIx
(12)
(5)
(9) Slave I/O Link selection

signal IOLNK
(12)

signal RPBSY
RPALM
(12)
BGEACT

(14) Slave input/output data

selection signals EPRG,
EVAR, EPARM, EDGN
(15) Slave read/write stop signal
ESTPIO
(16) Group number output signal
SRLNOx
(5)
1145
(8)
(12)
(8)
(12)
Troubleshooting
B63003EN1/02
The data input/output function based on the FANUC I/O Link is

implemented by various elements such as ladder programs, I/O Link
assignment, Series 16i/18i/21i parameters, and Power Mate parameters.
So, problems may occur when the function is started.
The table below lists the symptoms of the problems that may occur,
together with their causes and corresponding corrective actions.
Symptom
Data input/output is started, but the

Series 16i/18i/21i and Power Mate
return no response.
Cause and corrective action
The background is already active (the

background busy signal BGEACT is
set to 1). In this case, the function
cannot be used.
Examples:
1) In MDI mode, the program screen

is selected.
2) Background editing has already
started.
Communication via the RS232C
interface is in progress.
Multiple communication operations

cannot be performed at the same
time, such that any subsequent attempt to start the function is ignored.
The selected slave is not a Power
Mate.
Data input/output function B based on

the I/O Link is not started if the slave
specified with a group number set
with group number specification signals SRLNI0 to SRLNI3 is other than
a Power Mate.
A ladder program error may prevent
the function from being started.
Check the ladder program for errors
such as misspecified addresses.
When an attempt is made to output

data to a Power Mate:
Series 16i/18 i/21i:

OUTPUT blinks continuously.
Power Mate : LSK blinks continuously .

(Caution)
1146
Power Mate DO signal RPBSY is not

correctly passed to Power Mate read/
write inprogress signal RPBSY of
the Series 16i/18i/21i.
B63003EN1/02
Symptom

data to a Power Mate:
I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK

is not set to 1.
Series 16i/18i/21i:
A ladder program error, I/O Link assignment error may prevent.
Power Mate : No response is returned.

(Caution)
When an attempt is made to read

data from a Power Mate:
Series 16i/18i/21i :
LSK blinks continuously.

(Caution)

parameters to a Power Mate:
Series 16i/18i/21i:

(Caution)

diagnostic data to a Power Mate:
Series 16i/18i/21i:

(Caution)
1147
PWE of the Power Mate is set to 0.
To modify the Power Mate parameters, PWE must be set to 1.
(Caution)
DWE of the Power Mate is set to 0.
To enable the modification of Power

Mate diagnostic data, DWE must be
set to 1.
(Caution)
B63003EN1/02
Symptom

macro variables to a Power Mate:
Bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 is

set to 1 (EIA code).
Alarm 86 is issued.
The EIA code does not include #,

such that an ISO code must be set.
Power Mate : Alarm 1 is issued.
When an attempt is made to read

macro variables or diagnostic data
from a Power Mate:
LSK blinks continuously.
A start number and the number of

data items to be transferred are not
set correctly in Power Mate DI signals
G100 to G103.
Examples:
1
A ladder program error or I/O allocation error prevented a start

number and the number of data
items from being transferred to
Power Mate DI signals G100 to
G103.
An invalid start number is specified, or the specified number of

data items to be transferred is invalid.

(Caution)
CAUTION
If these symptoms are detected, the Series 16i/18i/21i
waits for a condition to be satisfied in its internal processing.
While such a state exists, the screen is not updated. So, the
states of signals cannot be checked on a realtime basis on
a screen such as the PMC diagnostic screen.
Signal
Power Mate read/write

inprogress signal
BGION <G092#2>
[Function] This signal indicates that the Power Mate is performing data input/output.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 when the Power Mate is performing data
input/output.
This signal is a Power Mate state signal. The corresponding Power Mate
side signal is RPBSY <F223#2, F053#2>.
(the second address being for Power MateMODEL D, F, H, and the first
address for all other models).
1148
B63003EN1/02
Power Mate read/write

alarm signal
BGIALM <G092#3>
[Function] This signal indicates that an alarm has been issued while the Power Mate
was performing data input/output.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 upon the issue of an alarm while the Power Mate
is performing data input/output.
side signal is RPALM <F223#3, F053#3>.
Power Mate background

busy signal
BGEN <G092#4>
[Function] This signal indicates that the Power Mate is performing background
editing.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 when the Power Mate is performing background
editing.
side signal is BGEACT <F223#4, F053#4>.
I/O Link confirmation

signal
IOLACK <G092#0>
[Function] This signal indicates that the Power Mate state signals are valid.
All Power Mate state signals become valid.
For data input/output between the Series 16i/18i/21i and Power Mate, the
Power Mate state signals are used. For this purpose, ladder program
processing is required. Upon the completion of ladder program
processing, I/O Link confirmation signal IOLACK is set to 1 to make the
Power Mate state signals active.
1149
B63003EN1/02
I/O Link specification

signal
IOLS <G092#1>
[Function] This signal specifies whether those signals that are shared by the external
I/O device control function are to be used with data input/output function
B based on the I/O Link.
The signals (EXRD, EXSTP, EXWT, RPBSY, RPALM, and BGEACT)
for the external I/O device control function are used with data
input/output function B based on the I/O Link.
NOTE
I/O Link specification signal IOLS is not used with the
ordinary data input/output function based on the I/O Link.
Group number
specification signals
SRLNI0 to SRLNI3
<G091#0 to #3>
[Function] These signals specify the group number of the Power Mate that acts as a
slave when data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is used.
[Operation] The group number of the Power Mate that acts as a slave is specified with
the values of four digits binary code signals.
NOTE
Group number specification signals SRLNI0 to SRLNI3 are
not used with the ordinary data input/output function based
on the I/O Link.
Slave I/O Link selection

signal
IOLNK <F177#0>
[Function] This signal instructs the Power Mate to perform data input/output based
on the I/O Link.
When data input/output is performed
1150
B63003EN1/02
When data input/output is terminated

This signal is a Power Mate control signal. The corresponding Power
Mate side signal is IOLNK <G099#7/G251#0> (the second address being
for Power MateMODEL D, F, H, and the first address for all other
models).
Slave external read start

signal
ERDIO <F177#1>
[Function] This signal indicates that the Series 16i/18i/21i has started data output.
When data output is started
When data output is terminated
Mate side signal is EXRD <G098#1/G058#1> (the second address being
models).
Slave read/write stop

signal
ESTPIO <F177#2>
[Function] This signal forcibly terminates Power Mate data input/output.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases:
When the Series 16i/18i/21i issues an alarm
When data input/output function B based on the I/O Link is used, and
external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1
Mate side signal is EXSTP <G098#2/G058#2> (the second address being
models).
1151
B63003EN1/02
Slave external write start

signal
EWTIO <F177#3>
[Function] This signal indicates that the Series 16i/18i/21i has started data input.
When data input is started
When data input is terminated
Mate side signal is EXWT <G098#3/G058#3> (the second address being
models).
Slave program selection

signal
EPRG <F177#4>
[Function] This signal notifies the Power Mate that the input/output data consists of
programs.
When the input/output data consists of programs, and data input/output
has been started
Mate side signal is EPRG <G098#4/G251#4> (the second address being
models).
Slave macro variable

selection signal
EVAR <F177#5>
macro variables.
When the input/output data consists of macro variables, and data
input/output has been started
1152
B63003EN1/02

Mate side signal is EVAR <G098#5/G251#5> (the second address being
models).
Slave parameter
selection signal
EPARM <F177#6>
parameters.
When the input/output data consists of parameters, and data
Mate side signal is EPARM <G098#6/G251#6> (the second address
being for Power MateMODEL D, F, H, and the first address for all other
models).
Slave diagnostic data

selection signal
EDGN <F177#7>
[Function] This signal notifies the Power Mate that input/output data consists of
diagnostic (PMC) data.
When input/output data consists of diagnostic (PMC) data, and data
Mate side signal is EDGN <G098#7/G251#7> (the second address being
models).
1153
B63003EN1/02
Group number output

signals
SRLNO0 to SRLNO3
<F178#0 to #3>
[Function] These signals indicate the group number of the Power Mate that is acting
as a slave.
[Operation] The group number of the Power Mate that is acting as a slave is specified
with the values of four binary code signals.
These signals become active when the slave I/O Link selection signal
IOLNK is set to 1.
External read start signal

EXRD <G058#1>
The signals listed below are used with data input/output function B based
on the I/O Link. For details, see Section 13.5.
External punch start

signal
EXWT <G058#3>
External read/punch stop
signal
EXSTP <G058#2>
Background busy signal
BGEACT <F053#4>
Read/punch inprogress
signal
RPBSY <F053#2>
RPALM <F053#3>
1154
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
EXWT
#2
EXSTP
#1
EXRD
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
SRLNI3
#2
SRLNI2
#1
SRLNI1
#0
SRLNI0
#7
#6
#5
#4
BGEN
#3
BGIALM
#2
BGION
#1
IOLS
#0
IOLACK
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
RPALM
#2
RPBSY
#1
#0
BGEACT
#3
EWTIO
#2
ESTPIO
#1
ERDIO
#0
IOLINK
G058
G091
G092
F053
F177
#7
EDGN
#6
EPARM
#5
EVAR
#4
EPRG
#7
#6
#5
#4
F178
#3
#2
SRLNO3
SRLNO2
#1
SRLNO1
#0
SRLNO0
Parameter
0020

[Data type] Byte
This CNC provides the following interfaces for data transfer to and from
the host computer and external input/output devices:
Input/output device interface (RS232C serial port 1, 2)
Remote buffer interface (RS232C/RS422)
DNC1/DNC2 interface
In addition, data can be transferred to and from the Power Mate via the
FANUC I/O Link. (This parameter need not be set when data input/output
function B based on the I/O Link is used.)
This parameter is used to select the interface used to trnsfer data to and
from an input/output device.
Setting
Description
0, 1
RS232C serial port (connector JD36A on motherboard)
RS232C serial port (connector JD36B on motherboard)
Remote buffer interface (connector JD28A (RS232C interface) or

connector JD6A (RS422 interface) on serial communication board)
Memory card interface
Data server interface
10
DNC1/DNC2 interface, OSIEthernet
11
DNC1 interafce #2
20
21
22
|
34
35
Group 0
Gro p 1
Group
Group 2
Grou
|
Group 14
Group 15
1155
Data is transferred between the CNC and Power Mate

in group n (n: 0 to 15) via the FANUC I/O Link.
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
An input/output device can also be selected using the
setting screen. Usually the setting screen is used.
8760
Program number for data registration (data input/output function using the I/O link)
[Data type] Word

When the data input/output function using the I/O link is used, this
parameter sets the program numbers of the programs to be used for
registering data (parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic data) from
Power Mates.
For a Power Mate in group n, the following program numbers are used:
For parameters: Setting + n
10 + 0
For macro variables: Setting + n
10 + 1
For diagnostic data: Setting + n
10 + 2
Example: When 8000 is set
8000:
8001:
8002:
8010:
8011:
8012:
8020:
8021:
8022:
Parameters of group 0 (I/O channel = 20)

Macro variables of group 0 (I/O channel = 20)
Diagnostic data of group 0 (I/O channel = 20)
8150: Parameters of group 15 (I/O channel = 35)

8151: Macro variables of group 15 (I/O channel = 35)
8152: Diagnostic data of group 15 (I/O channel = 35)
NOTE
When 0 is set, the input/output of parameters, macro
variables, and diagnostic data cannot be performed, but
program input/output processing is performed.
1156
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
085
COMMUNICATION When entering data in the memory by using

ERROR
Reader / Puncher interface, or FANUC I/O Link
an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits of input data or setting
of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect.
086
DR SIGNAL OFF
When entering data in the memory by using

Reader / Puncher interface, the ready signal
(DR) of reader / puncher was off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not
connected or a P.C.B. is defective.
Or, the slave is not ready to perform data input/output (or the slave is performing background editing) if this alarm is issued when
data input/output using the FANUC I/O Link is
started. Alternatively, slaveside input/output
is stopped (with alarm output) if this alarm is
issued during input/output.
087
BUFFER OVERFLOW
When entering data in the memory by using

Reader / Puncher interface, though the read
terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted after 10 characters read. I/O unit or
P.C.B. is defective.
Alternatively, for data read using the FANUC
I/O Link, the master directs the termination of
a read operation, but the slave does not stop
output.
1157
14. MEASUREMENT
14
B63003EN1/02
MEASUREMENT
1158
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.1
TOOL LENGTH
MEASUREMENT
(M SERIES)
General
The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory
as an offset value by a soft key.
Call offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positions are also
displayed on this screen. Then select the reference tool and set it at the
fixed point on the machine by manual operation. Reset the displayed
relative position to zero. Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed
point on the machine by manual operation. The relative position display
at this point shows difference between the reference tool and the tool
measured and the relative position display value is then set as offset
amounts.
Reference tool
This difference
is set as offset
amount
Fixed point
Reference Item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.4.2 Tool Length Measurement
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.11.4.2 Tool Length Measurement
1159
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.2
AUTOMATIC TOOL
LENGTH
MEASUREMENT
(M SERIES)/
AUTOMATIC TOOL
OFFSET (T SERIES)
General
When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a

command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the
difference between the current coordinate value and the coordinate value
of the command measurement position and uses it as the offset value for
the tool. When the tool has been already offset, it is moved to the
measurement position with that offset value. If the CNC judges that
further offset is needed after calculating the difference between the
coordinate values of the measurement position and the commanded
coordinate values, the current offset value is further offset.
Signal
Measuring position
reached signals
XAE<X004#0>,
YAE<X004#1>,
ZAE<X004#2>(M series)
XAE<X004#0>,
ZAE<X004#1>(T series)
[Function] If the measuring position specified by a program command differs from
the measuring position which a tool has reached in practice, that is, the
position at the moment the measuring position reached signal has just
been turned 1, the difference in the coordinate value is added to the
current tool compensation value to update the compensation value. The
tool is first fed to the specified measuring position by rapid traverse in a
block where one of the following commands has been specified:
G37 (M series)
G36, G37 (T series)
1160
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance before the
measuring position.
The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a
parameter No. 6241. If the measuring position reached signal
corresponding to the G code is turned 1 after the tool has approached
within distance of the measuring position and before the tool overshoots
the measuring position by distance , the control unit updates the
compensation value and terminates the move command for the block. If
the measuring position reached signal is not turned 1 even after the tool
has overshot the measuring position by distance , the control unit enters
an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block without
updating the compensation value.
Presumed
measuring position
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate

Rapid traverse
Start point
Measuring speed
Measuring position reached signal
[Operation] When the signal is turned 1, the control unit works as follows:
Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and
updates the current compensation value based on the difference
between the specified measuring position and the read measuring
position in the following case: When the measuring position reached
signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where G36
(T series) or G37 is specified after the tool is within distance of the
measuring position specified by a program and before the tool
overshoots the measuring position by distance . The control unit then
stops the tool, and terminates the move command for the block.
Enters an alarm state and terminates the move command for the block
without updating the compensation value in the following case: When
the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the command
is turned 1 in a block where G36 (T series), G37 is specified after
the tool is within distance of the measuring position but before the
tool is within distance of the measuring position.
The control unit does not monitor the measuring position reached
signal for its rising edge but monitors the state of the signal. If the
signal remains 1 when the next corresponding automatic tool length
measurement (automatic tool offset) is specified, the control unit
enters an alarm state when the tool is within distance of the
measuring position.
1161
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10
msec.
2 The CNC directly inputs the measuring position reached
signals from the machine tool; the PMC does not process
them.
3 If automatic tool offset nor automatic tool length
measurement is not used, the PMC can use the signal
terminals corresponding to the measuring position reached
signal as the general-purpose input signals.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
ZAE
#0
XAE
ZAE
YAE
XAE
X004
Parameter
6241
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool offset

Feedrate during measurement of tool length automatic measurement

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Metric input
1 mm/min
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
Inch input
0.1 inch/min
6 to 6000
6 to 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
[Valid data range]
This parameter sets the feedrate during measurement of automatic tool

offset (T series) and tool length automatic compensation (M series).
6251
g value on X axis during automatic tool offset

g value during tool length automatic measurement
6252
g value on Z axis during automatic tool offset
[Data type] Twoword type

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
These parameters set the g value during automatic tool offset (T series)
or tool length automatic measurement (M series).
1162
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter
programming or the radius programming is specified.
6254
e value on X axis during automatic tool offset

e value during tool length automatic measurement
6255
e value on Z axis during tool automatic offset

[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
These parameters set the e value during automatic tool offset (T series)
or tool length automatic measurement (M series).
CAUTION
Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter
programming or the radius programming is specified.
1163
14. MEASUREMENT
Alarm and message
B63003EN1/02
Number
Message
080
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL

NOT ASSERTED
(M series)
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL

NOT ASSERTED
(T series)
081
OFFSET NUMBER NOT

FOUND IN G37
(M series)
OFFSET NUMBER NOT

FOUND IN G37
(T series)
082
083
Description
In the automatic tool length measurement function (G37), the measurement

position reached signal (XAE, YAE, or
ZAE) is not turned on within an area
specified in parameter 6254 (value ).
This is due to a setting or operator error.
In the automatic tool offset function
(G36, G37), the measurement position
reached signal (XAE or ZAE) is not
turned on within an area specified in parameter 6254, and 6255 (value ).
This is due to a setting or operator error.
Tool length automatic measurement
(G37) was specified without a H code.
(Automatic tool length measurement
function) Modify the program.
Automatic tool offset (G36, G37) was

specified without a T code. (Automatic
tool compensation function) Modify the
program.
HCODE NOT ALLOWED H code and automatic tool measureIN G37

ment (G37) were specified in the same
block. (Automatic tool length measure(M series) ment function) Modify the program.
TCODE NOT ALLOWED
IN G37
(T series)
T code and automatic tool offset (G36,

G37) were specified in the same block.
(Automatic tool compensation function)
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL AXIS
COMMAND IN G37
(M series)
In automatic tool length measurement,

an invalid axis was specified or the
command is incremental. Modify the
program.
ILLEGAL AXIS
COMMAND IN G37
(T series)
In automatic tool offset (G36, G37), an

invalid axis was specified or the command is incremental. Modify the program.
1164
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 Measurement speed, , and are set as parameters. must
be positive numbers and keep condition of >.
2 The compensation value is updated by the following
formula:
New compensation value =(Current compensation
value)+[(Current position of the
tool along the specified axis
when the measuring position
reached signal is 1)
(specified measuring position)]
The following compensation values are updated:
(1)In a M series, the compensation value corresponding to
the tool compensation number selected by an H code.
When offset memory A is used, the offset value is
changed.
When offset memory B is used, the tool wear
compensation value is changed.
When offset memory C is used, the tool wear
compensation value for the H code is changed.
(2)In a T series, the compensation value corresponding to
the tool compensation number selected by a T code and
to the specified axis (X, Z) in G36, G37.
3 The maximum measuring error is calculated as shown
below.
ERRmax = Fm
1
4
60
1000
ERRmax: Maximum measuring error (mm)

Fm
: Measuring feedrate (mm/min)
If Fm = 100 mm/min, for example, ERRmax = 0.007 mm
4 After the measuring position reached signal has been
detected, the tool moves for a maximum of 20 msec, then
stops. Values for calculating the compensation amount,
that is the coordinate of the tool where the tool reached the
measuring position are not those obtained after stop, but
those obtained at the position where the measuring position
reached signal was detected.
The overtravel amount for 20 msec is calculated as follows.
Qmax = Fm
1
1
(20 + Ts)
60
1000
Qmax: Maximum overtravel amount (mm)

Fm : Measuring feedrate (mm/min)
Ts
: Servo time constant [msec] (1/loop gain)
1165
14. MEASUREMENT
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.14.2
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH

MEASUREMENT (G37)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.6
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET

(G36, G37)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.14.2
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH

MEASUREMENT (G37)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.14.5
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET

(G36, G37)
1166
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.3
SKIP FUNCTION
14.3.1
Skip Function
General
Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move

following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input
during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed
but specified with a signal from the machine, for example, in grinding. It
is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a
custom macro because they are stored in the custom macro system
variable #5061 to #5068, as follows:
#5061 Fisrt axis coordinate value
#5062 Second axis coordinate value
#5063 3rd axis coordinate value
:
:
#5068 8th axis coordinate value
Signal
Skip Signal
SKIP<X004#7>
SKIPP<G006#6>
(T series)
[Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip
signal turns to 1 in a block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro
variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at the same
time.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to 1, the control unit works as described below.
When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit
reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time.
The control unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that
the block was supposed to be moved.
The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So,
if a skip signal continues to be 1, a skip condition is assumed to be
satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting is specified.
1167
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.
2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X004#7> from
the machine tool; the PMC no longer requires to process the
signal.
3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the
signal terminal SKIP<X004#7> corresponding to the skip
signal as a general purpose input signal.
Signal address
X004
G006
#7
SKIP
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
SKIPP
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
SKF
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
SK0
#0
GSK
Parameter
6200
SKF
SK0

GSK In skip cutting (G31), the signal SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) is:
0 : Not used as a skip signal.
1 : Used as a skip signal.
SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the
state of the skip signal SKIP (bit 7 of X004) and the multistage skip
signals (bits 0 to 7 of X004) (for the T series only).
0 : When these signals are 1, they are assumed to be input (skip).
1 : When these signals are 0, they are assumed to be input (skip).
SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip
command
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
035
CAN NOT COMMANDED

G31
(T series)
Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool

nose radius compensation mode.
Modify the program.
036
CAN NOT COMMANDED

G31
(M series)
Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation mode.

Modify the program.
1168
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Warning
WARNING
Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration (enabled with parameter No.
6200#7 SKF=1) when the feedrate per minute is specified,
allowing for reducing an error in the position of the tool when
a skip signal is input. These functions are enabled when the
feedrate per rotation is specified.
Note
NOTE
1 The G31 block is always set to G01 mode. The feedrate is
specified by an F code.
2 When the measuring motion is made by utilizing the skip
signal, program a constant feedrate; otherwise, if the
feedrate changes, the measuring error will be noticeable.
With a constant feedrate, the maximum measuring error can
be calculated as follows:
4
ERRmax = Fm 1
60
1000
ERRmax : Maximum measuring error (mm or inch)
Fm
: Measuring feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
3 Overtravel amount Qmax after skip signal has been turned
to 1 is calculated by the following:
1
Qmax = Fm 1
(20#1 + Tc + Ts)
60
1000
Qmax : Overtravel amount (mm or inch)
Fm
: Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc
: Cutting time constant (ms)
Ts
: Servo time constant (ms) (1 loop gain)
#1 : The value becomes 28 when the skip signal SKIPP
<G006#6> is used. (Also it changes according to

the processing time of ladder program).
1169
14. MEASUREMENT
Reference item
B63003EN1/02
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.16
SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.13
SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
II.4.8
SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.10
SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.6
SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.8
SKIP FUNCTION(G31)
14.3.2
Highspeed Skip
Signal
General
The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 ~

HDI7 : connected directly to the CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an
ordinary skip signal (X004#7). In this case, up to eight signals can be
input. The Series 21i/210i, however, uses just a single highspeed skip
signal (HDI0).
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 ~ 2 msec at the CNC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.004 msec
or less, thus allowing high precision measurement.
Acceleration /
Deceleration and Servo
Delay Compensation
(Type A/B)
The skip function causes the NC to memorize the current position of

the tool when a skip signal is input. However, the current position
includes a delay in the servo system. In other words, the current
position deviates by the distance corresponding to the servo delay from
the position where the tool actually was when the skip signal was input.
This deviation can be calculated from the positional error in the servo
system and the number of remaining pulses due to feedrate acceleration/
deceleration in the NC. Taking this deviation into account eliminates the
necessity to include the servo delay in a measurement error.
The deviation of the current position can be compensated for by either
of the following two types, using parameter SEA (bit 0 of parameter No.
6201) or parameter SEB (bit 1 of parameter No. 6201).
(1) Type A: The deviation is calculated from the cutting time constant
and the servo time constant (loop gain).
1170
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
(2) Type B: The deviation is assumed to be a sum of the number of

remaining pulses due to acceleration/deceleration caused
when the skip signal is turned on, and the positional error.
Direction in which the tool

moves
Pnc
Position where
the tool actually
stopped
Position of the tool when

the skip signal was input
Highspeed
skip signal
Origin of the coordinate

system
Pnc : Position where the tool actually stopped after the skip signal was
input [mm/inch]
P
: Distance to be measured [mm/inch]
Q : Servo delay [mm/inch]

Under the conditions shown above, the NC calculates the following
equation using parameter SEA (bit 0 of parameter No. 6201) or SEB (bit
1 of parameter No. 6201):
P = Pnc Q
For type A (SEA bit 0 of parameter No. 6201 is 1), the deviation is
calculated by:
Q = Fm
1/60
(a
Tc/1000 + Ts/1000)
where
Fm : Feedrate [mm/min or inch/min]
Tc : Cutting time constant [msec]
Parameter No. 1622: Exponential acceleration/deceleration
Parameter No. 1628: Linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation
If parameter SKF (bit 7 of parameter No. 6200) = 0, Tc = 0.
Ts : Servo time constant [msec]
Assuming that the loop gain (parameter No. 1825) is G (unit: 1/s):
Ts = 1000/G
: =1
= 1/2 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1171
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
For type A (parameter SEA (No. 6201 #0)=1), the skip signal
must be turned on when the tool moves at constant
feedrate.
Signal
High Speed Skip Staus
Signal
HDO0 to HDO7<F122>
[Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip
signal. The signal-to-bit correspondence is as follows:
High-speed skip signal
HDI0
HDI1
HDI2
HDI3
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
HDI7
Bit name
HDO0
HDO1
HDO2
HDO3
HDO4
HDO5
HDO6
HDO7
[Output condition] Each bit is set to 1 when:

D The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 1.
Each bit is set to 0 when:
D The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 0.
Signal address
F122
#7
HDO7
#6
HDO6
#5
HDO5
#4
HDO4
#3
HDO3
#2
HDO2
#1
HDO1
#0
HDO0
#7
#6
SRE
#5
#4
HSS
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter
6200

HSS 0 : The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals.
1 : The skip function uses high-speed skip signals.
SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:
0 : The signal is considered to be input 1.
1 : The signal is considered to be input 1.
1172
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
6201
#4
IGX
#3
#2
#1
SEB
#0
SEA

SEA When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used,
acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are:
0 : Ignored.
1 : Considered and compensated (type A).
SEB When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used,
0 : Ignored.
1 : Considered and compensated (type B).
IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP (bit 7 of X004), SKIPP
(bit 6 of G006), and +MIT1 to MIT2 (bits 2 to 5 of X004) are:
0 : Enabled as skip signals.
1 : Disabled as skip signals.
NOTE
SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) and +MIT1 to MIT2 (bits 2 to 5 of
X004) are enabled only when bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No.
6200 is set to 1 and bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200 is set
to 1. Note also that these signals are enabled only for the
T series.
6202
#7
1S8
#6
1S7
#5
1S6
#4
1S5
#3
1S4
#2
1S3
#1
1S2
#0
1S1
1S1~1S8
Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled when the G31 skip
command is issued. The bits correspond to the following signals:
0 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.
1 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
1S1
HDI0
1S2
HDI1
1S3
HDI2
1S4
HDI3
1S5
HDI4
1S6
HDI5
1S7
HDI6
1S8
HDI7
NOTE
HDI0 to HDI7 are high-speed skip signals.
Reference item
CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) 7.7

(B63003EN)
1173
HIGH SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.3.3
Multistep Skip
General
In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function

stores coordinates in a custom macro variable and cancels the remaining
distance that the block was supposed to be moved when a skip signal (8
points) or high-speed skip signal (8 points however in the case of Series
21i/210i 1 point) is turned on.
Also in a block specifying Q1 to Q4 after G04, this function skips a dwell
when the skip signal or high speed skip signal has turned on.
A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring
instrument can be used to skip programs being executed.
In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough
machining to spark-out can be performed automatically by applying a
skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining, finemachining, or spark-out operation is completed.
Signal
Skip signal
SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP8
<X004>
[Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip
signal turns to 1 in a command program block containing G31P1 (or
G31), G31P2, or G31P3, G31P4 is stored in a custom macro variable, and
the move command of the block is terminated at the same time.
Furthermore, in a block containing G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 or
G04Q4, the dwell command of the block is terminated.
In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions)
of the block are completed, machining never proceeds to the next block.
Which of the eight skip signals is applicable to blocks containing the G
codes can be determined by parameter (no. 6202 to 6206). The eight skip
signals can correspond to the G codes on a one-to-one basis. One skip
signal can also be made applicable to multiple G codes. Conversely,
multiple skip signals can be made applicable to one G code.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to 1, the control unit functions as described
below.
When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31P1 to P4) for skip
cutting, and the skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to
the command, the control unit reads and stores the current position of
the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops the axis, then
cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be
moved.
When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the
skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the
control unit stops dwell operation, and cancels any remaining dwell
time.
1174
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge, but for its state. So,
if a skip signal continues to be 1, a skip condition is assumed to be
satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell operation is
specified.
Signal address
#7
X004
SKIP
#6
ESKIP
#5
MIT2
#4
+MIT2
#3
MIT1
#2
+MIT1
#1
ZAE
#0
XAE
SKIP6
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
SKIP2
SKIP8
SKIP7
ZAE
YAE
XAE
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
SKIP2
SKIP8
SKIP7
ESKIP
SKIP
SKIP6
(T series)
(M series)
WARNING
1 SKIP2 to SKIP6 are at the same addresses as skip signal
ESKIP (axis control by PMC) and axial manual feed
interlock signals +MIT1, MIT1, +MIT2, and MIT2 (direct
input B for tool compensation measurements). Be careful
when using both. (T series)
2 SKIP2 and SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as
skip signal ESKIP (axis control by PMC) and measurement
position arrival signal XAE, YAE, and ZAE (tool length
automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (M
series)
CAUTION
If the automatic tool compensation option is used, SKIP5 to
SKIP8 cannot be used. (T series)
Parameter
#7
#6
6200
#5
SLS
#4
HSS
#3
#2
#1
#0

SLS 0 : The multistep skip function does not use high-speed skip signals
while skip signals are input.
1 : The multistep skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip
signals are input.
NOTE
Skip signals (SKIP and SKIP2 to SKIP8) do not depend on
the setting of this parameter. They are always enabled.
And, it is possible to set disable with parameter IGX bit 4 of
No. 6201.
1175
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
6202
#7
1S8
#6
1S7
#5
1S6
#4
1S5
#3
1S4
#2
1S3
#1
1S2
#0
1S1
6203
2S8
2S7
2S6
2S5
2S4
2S3
2S2
2S1
6204
3S8
3S7
3S6
3S5
3S4
3S3
3S2
3S1
6205
4S8
4S7
4S6
4S5
4S4
4S3
4S2
4S1
6206
DS8
DS7
DS6
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1

1S1~1S8, 2S1~2S8, 3S1~3S8, 4S1~4S8, DS1~DS8
Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or
G31P1 to G31P4) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are
issued with the multistep skip function.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input
signals, and commands.
The settings of the bits have the following meanings:
0 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.
1 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
Multistep skip function
Command
G31
G31P1
G04Q1
G31P2
G04Q2
G31P2
G04Q2
G31P4
G04Q4
G04
SKIP/HDI0
1S1
2S1
3S1
4S1
DS1
SKIP2/HDI1
1S2
2S2
3S2
4S2
DS2
SKIP3/HDI2
1S3
2S3
3S3
4S3
DS3
SKIP4/HDI3
1S4
2S4
3S4
4S4
DS4
SKIP5/HDI4
1S5
2S5
3S5
4S5
DS5
SKIP6/HDI5
1S6
2S6
3S6
4S6
DS6
SKIP7/HDI6
1S7
2S7
3S7
4S7
DS7
SKIP8/HDI7
1S8
2S8
3S8
4S8
DS8
Input
signal
NOTE
HDI0 to HDI7 are high-speed skip signals.
1176
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
The skip cutting commands G31 P1, G31 P2, G31 P3, and
G31 P4 are all identical, except that they correspond to
different skip signals. The tool moves along the specified
axis until the SKIP signal is set to 1 or the end point of the
specified movement is reached, while performing linear
interpolation. The feedrate is specified in the program. G31
is the same as G31 P1.
Dwell commands G04, G04 Q1, G04 Q2, G04 Q3, and G04
Q4 are also identical, except that they correspond to
different skip signals.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
II.4.17
Multistep Skip (G31)
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.14
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.11
1177
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.3.4
Torque Limit Skip
General
Specifying a move command after G31 P99 (or G31 P98) with a motor
torque limit set (for example, specifying a torque limit on the PMC
window) allows the same cutting feed as that specified with G01 to be
performed.
While the tool is moved with a motor torque limit set during cutting feed,
skip is performed when a signal indicating that the motor torque limit has
been reached is input as a result of an operation such as pushing something
against the motor.
Basic operations
When the motor torque limit is reached or the SKIP signal <X0004#7>
is input during the execution of G31 P99, the execution of the next block
starts without executing the remaining portion of the move command.
When the motor torque limit is reached during the execution of G31 P98,
the execution of the next block starts without executing the remaining
portion of the move command. (The SKIP signal does not affect the
execution of G31 P98.)
When no torque limit is specified before executing G31 P99 or P98, the
move command is executed without performing the skip operation.
For G31 P99 and P98, the coordinate, indicating the position to which the
tool is to be positioned after skip, is stored in the system variable of the
custom macro.
Alarm No. 244 occurs if errors have accumulated to an amount (32767)
that cannot be corrected in one distribution before the
torquelimitreached signal is input during the execution of G31 P99 or
P98.
Signal
Torque limit reached

signals
TRQL1 to TRQL8 <F114>
[Function] Indicates that the torque limit has been reached.
[Output condition] Set to 1 when:
The torque limit has been reached for the corresponding axis.
Set to 0 when:
The torque limit has not been reached for the corresponding axis
Numbers 1 to 8 indicate the corresponding axis numbers.
1178
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Signal address
F114
#7
TRQL8
#6
TRQL7
#5
TRQL6
#4
TRQL5
#3
TRQL4
#2
TRQL3
#1
TRQL2
#0
TRQL1
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
TSA
#2
TSE
#1
#0
Parameter
6201

TSE When a skip operation is performed by the G31 P99 or P98 command used
to specify torque limit skip:
0 : Corrects servo errors.
(1)
1 : Does not correct servo errors. (2)
TSA Selects the axes to be monitored for whether the torque limit has been
reached during the execution of the G31 P99 or 98 command used to
specify torque limit skip:
0 : Monitors all axes.
1 : Monitors the axes specified by G31 P99 or P98.
200
Position stored
in the system
variable when
TSE = 0
Position stored
in the system
variable when
TSE = 1
100
(1)
Error amount
(2)
Feed stops Torque limit Specified value
100
200
300
1179
400
500
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Alarm and message
Number
Message
Description
015
TOO MANY AXES COM- In the block including the command for
MANDED
the skip function (G31 P99/P98), to be
executed under the control of the
torque limit reach signal, no axis move
command is specified, or two or more
axes are specified.
In a single block, specify one axis only.
244
P/S ALARM
When the skip function to be executed

under the control of the torque limit
reach signal is enabled, an error value
(32767) that exceeds the maximum return value that can be handled with a
single distribution is detected before input of the torque limit reach signal.
Retry the processing after changing the
axis feedrate, torque limit, or other
conditions.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Specify a torque limit before G31 P99/P98. If G31 P99/P98
is executed with no torque limit specified, the move
command is executed without a skip operation.
2 When G31 P99 is specified, the SKIP signal causes a skip
operation. However, avoid using the highspeed skip
operation.
3 Before specifying G31 P99/P98, cancel tooltip radius
compensation with G40.
4 Set the SKF bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 6200) to 0 to disable
the dry run, override, and automatic
acceleration/deceleration functions for the G31 skip
command.
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.15
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.12
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL
II.4.9
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP
1180
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.3.5
Continuous
Highspeed Skip
Function (M series)
General
The continuous highspeed skip function enables reading of absolute

coordinates by using the highspeed skip signals (HDI0 to HDI7). Once
a highspeed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute
coordinates are read into custom macro variables #5061 to #5068. The
input of a skip signal does not stops axial movement, thus enabling
reading of the coordinates of two or more points.
The rising and falling edges of the highspeed skip signal can be used as
a trigger, depending on the parameter CSE (No. 6201#5) setting.
See 14.3.2 Highspeed Skip Signal for details of highspeed skip
signal.
Once a highspeed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute
coordinates are read into custom macro variables #5061 to #5068. These
variables are immediately updated once the tool reaches the next skip
position. The feedrate must, therefore, be specified such that the tool does
not reach the next skip position before the application completes reading
of the variables. The PMC program must be created to satisfy this
condition.
Custom macro variables
#5061
#5062
#5063
L
#5068
Highspeed skip signal
Coordinate along the first axis

Coordinate along the second axis
Coordinate along the third axis
Coordinate along the eighth axis
This function is enabled only when a highspeed skip signal is used.

The highspeed skip signal to be used is selected with bits 0 to 7 of
parameter No. 6208 (9S1 to 9S8).
End of block
Application (Example)
The G31P90 block is terminated when the tool reaches the end point.
(1) Reads custom macro variables, using the PMC window function.
(2) Saves the values in the PMC data table (address D).
(The PMC window function cannot be used to save data.)
(3) An execution or auxiliary macro is used for computation. They can
directly read PMC address D, using the address function.
Limitations
Controlled axes
Signal
Only one axis can be specified in the block for the continuous highspeed
skip function (G31P90). If two or more axes are specified, P/S alarm No.
5068 is issued.
See Subsec. 14.3.2 Highspeed Skip Signal

1181
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
6200
#6
SRE
#5
#4
HSS
#3
#2
#1
#0

SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:
0 : The signal is considered to be input at the rising edge (0
1 : The signal is considered to be input at the falling edge (1
#7
#6
6201
#5
CSE
#4
#3
#2
#1
SEB
1).
0).
#0
SEA

SEA When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used,
0 : Ignored.
1 : Considered and compensated (type A).
SEB When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used,
0 : Ignored.
1 : Considered and compensated (type B).
NOTE
Compensation can be performed in either of two ways: type
A or type B. The skip signal of the skip function causes the
NC to store the current position. The current position,
stored in the NC, is subject to the servo delay and differs
from the machine position by an amount corresponding to
the servo delay. This difference can be determined from the
position error of the servo system and the accumulated
pulses caused by feed acceleration/deceleration executed
by the NC. Provided this difference is considered, the servo
delay need not be considered as a measurement error. The
difference can be reduced by applying either of the following
methods, as determined by the parameter settings.
1) Type A:
A value calculated from the cutting time constant and
servo time constant (loop gain) is taken as the difference.
2) Type B:
The value calculated from the position error and the
accumulated pulses caused by
acceleration/deceleration, when the skip signal is
enabled, is taken as the difference.
CSE For continuos highspeed skip command G31 P90, highspeed skip
signals are :
0 : Effective at either a rising or falling edge (depending on the setting of
bit 6 (SRE) of parameter No. 6200)
1 : Effective for both the rising and falling edges
1182
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
6208
#7
9S8
#6
9S7
#5
9S6
#4
9S5
#3
9S4
#2
9S3
#1
9S2
#0
9S1

9S1 to 9S8 Specify valid highspeed skip signals for highspeed skip command
G31P90. The bits correspond to signals as follows:
9S1
9S2
9S3
9S4
9S5
9S6
9S7
9S8
HDI0
HDI1
HDI2
HDI3
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
HDI7
Set each bit as follows:

0 : The corresponding skip signal is invalid.
1 : The corresponding skip signal is valid.
6220
Period during which input is ignored for continuous highspeed skip signal

[Valid data range] 3 to 127 ( 8 msec)
If a value that falls outside this range is specified, 3 ( 8 msec) is
assumed.
This parameter specifies the period that must elapse between a
highspeed skip signal being input and input of the next highspeed skip
signal being enabled, for the continuous highspeed skip function. This
parameter is used to ignore chattering in skip signals.
(Example 1: Time interval specified when CSE (bit 5 of parameter No.
6201) = 0)
Time interval during which signals are ignored (parameter No. 6220)
This portion is ignored.
(Example 2: Time interval specified when CSE (bit 5 of parameter No.

6201) = 1)
1183
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Time interval during which signals are ignored (parameter No. 6220)
These portions are ignored.
Alarm and message
Reference item
Number
Message
5068
G31 P90 FORMAT

ERROR
Contents
No axis is specified for movement.

Two or more axes were specified for movement.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
1184
II.4.19
Continuous highspeed skip

signal
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.4
ENTERING
COMPENSATION
VALUES
14.4.1
Input of Offset Value
Measured A (T series)
General
This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece

diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard.
First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or in the cross direction
manually. When the position record signal is turned 1 (prepare a button
on the machine operators panel) on completion of the cutting, the workpiece coordinate value of X axis and Z axis at that time is recorded in the
CNC. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diameter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or measure the distance
from the standard face if the cutting was on the facing. (The reference face
is made as Z = 0.) When the measured value is entered on the offset value
display screen, NC inputs the difference between the input measured
value and the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the
offset number.
If you release the tool without moving the tool in the axis along which an
offset value is entered but moves the tool along the other axis, an offset
value can be set without using the position record signal.
The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of
directly inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used
when the coordinate system planned in the program does not match with
the coordinate system actually set.
The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a
difference of using the standard tool on the work shift screen.
Signal
Position record signal (PRC)

<G040#6>
[Function] This signal is prepared for the function of input of offset value measured
A. It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the
tool for tentative cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece,
input the measured value by the specified manual operation. The
difference is then stored as the specified tool compensation value.
[Operation] The control unit stores the current position along X and Z axes when the
signal turns to 1.
1185
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1.
Signal address
#7
#6
PRC
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
PRC
#1
#0
G040
Parameter
5005

PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift
value
0 : Not use a PRC signal
1 : Uses a PRC signal
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.4.2 Direct Input of Tool Offset

Measured
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL

Measured
Series 20i
OPERATORS MANUAL

Measured
1186
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.4.2
Input of Tool Offset
Value Measured B
(T series)
General
When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value is automatically
settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact
with the touch sensor during manual operation. The workpiece
coordinate system shift amount is also automatically settable.
D Touch sensor
This touch sensor makes contact in two directions in each axis, and
outputs four signals when it detects a tool contact. The contact faces are
selected according to the tool nose figures to be measured.
a) +MIT1 (+MITX) : Contact to X-axis (+) contact face (Contact
in X + direction)
b) MIT1 (MITX) : Contact to X-axis () contact face (Contact
in X direction)
c) +MIT2 (+MITZ) : Contact to Z-axis (+) contact face (Contact
in Z + direction)
d) MIT2 (MITZ) : Contact to Z-axis () contact face (Contact
in Z direction)
X axis () contact face
(MIT1)
Z axis (+) contact face

(+MIT2)
+X
D Setting tool offset value
Z axis () contact
face
(MIT2)
X axis (+) contact face

(+MIT1)
+Z
Touch sensor
Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference

position. In advance, set the distance from this point to the measuring
position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value, using
parameter No. 5015 to 5018. Select the tool whose offset value is to be
measured, and bring it to touch the sensor, receiving a contact detection
signal (tool compensation value write signal). The mechanical coordinate
value is the distance from the tool nose position of the measuring tool at
the mechanical reference (home) position to the measuring position; set
the difference between this value and the reference value (parameter
setting) into the tool offset value memory as the tool geometry offset
value. The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0.
1187
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
(Tool offset value to be set)

= (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write
signal has become 1) (Reference value (parameter value)
corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal)
The tool offset value to be set differs according to the method of
determining the measuring reference position.
Example 1
The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the
measuring tool nose tip position is settable as the tool offset value. Define
the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position
(machine zero position) as the measuring reference position, then set the
distances Xp, Zp, Xm, Zm, from the measuring reference position to the
contact faces of the sensor as parameters.
OFSX
Xm
(0,0)
X axis () contact face
Xt
Xp
+X
+Z
Z axis () contact face
Zt
(0,0)
Measuring reference
position (reference tool
nose position at the mechanical reference position)
Measuring tool nose

position at the mechanical reference
position
OFSZ
Zm
Zp
XP
Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (+) contact face (parameter
no. 5015)
Xm
Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis () contact face (parameter
no. 5016)
Zp
Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (+) contact face (parameter
no. 5017)
Zm
Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis () contact face (parameter
no. 5018)
Xt
X-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(X-axis machine coordinate value)
Zt
Z-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(Z-axis machine coordinate value)
(when Xt and Zt touch the X-axis () contact face and Z-axis () contact face in the
above figure)
OFSx :
Tool offset value to be set (X-axis): OFSx = Xt - Xm
OFSz :
Tool offset value to be set (Z-axis): OFSz = Zt - Zm
When the reference tool nose tip position is set as the measuring reference position
1188
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Example 2
The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary

zero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between the
imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the
mechanical reference point is settable as the tool offset value of the
measuring tool, by setting the distances from the imaginary zero point to
the respective contact faces as parameters.
OFSZ
Xt
+X
+Z
Machine
zero point
Zt
Zm
Zp
(0 , 0)
Measuring tool nose

position at the
mechanical
reference position
Xm
OFSx
Xp
Measuring reference position

(Imaginary zero point)
When the imaginary zero position is set as the measuring reference position
D Setting the workpiece
coordinate system shift

amount
The workpiece coordinate system shift amount for the Z-axis is settable
as follows: Bring the tool to touch the workpiece end face. Subtract the
tool geometry offset value of the tool (the value shifted in the coordinate
system by the tool geometry offset) from the machine coordinate value
(the distance from the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical
reference position (machine zero point) to the workpiece end face).The
result is set as the workpiece coordinate system shift value.
(Z axis workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set
(EXOFSz) )
= (Z axis tool geometry offset value of the corresponding tool
(OFSz)) (Z axis machine coordinate value(Zt))
Using the above methods, the workpiece coordinate system is set with
the workpiece end face (the contact point of the sensor) specified as
the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of the
Z-axis.
1189
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
+X
Zt
+Z
OFSZ
Machine
zero point
(0,0)
Measuring tool nose

position at the mechaniOFSX cal machine position
EXOFSZ
system zero point
(programmed zero point)
EXOFSz :
Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set
OFSz
Tool geometry offset value
Zt
Mechanical coordinate value (Distance to the workpiece end face)
Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount
To deviate the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate

system from the workpiece end face, such as adding a cutting
allowance, use the incremental input of the workpiece coordinate
system shift amount in MDI operation. By setting the distance from
the programmed zero point to the workpiece end face with a sign, the
numeric value input is added to the preset amount.
+X
Cutting
allowance
EXOFSZ(NEW)
EXOFSZ(OLD)

programmed zero point
Imaginary zero point
+Z
EXOFSZ(OLD)
Workpiece coordinate system shift amount being set by the

function of input of tool offset value measured B
Cutting allowance (incremental input value)
EXOFSZ(NEW)
Workpiece coordinate system shift amount after adding the

cutting allowance.
Setting of cutting allowance
1190
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Basic Procedure to Set

Tool Offset Value
(1) Execute manual reference position return.

By executing manual reference position return, a machine coordinate
system is established.
The tool offset value is computed on the machine coordinate system.
(2) Select manual handle mode or manual continuous feed mode and set
the tool compensation value write mode select signal GOQSM to 1.
The CRT display is automatically changed to the tool offset screen
(geometry), and the OFST indicator starts blinking in the status
indication area in the bottom of the screen, which informs that the tool
compensation value writing mode is ready.
(3) Select a tool to be measured.
(4) When the cursor does not coincide with the tool offset number desired
to be set, move the cursor to the desired offset number by page key and
cursor key.
Besides, the cursor can also be coincided with the tool offset number
desired to set automatically by the tool offset number input signals
(when parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1).
In this case, the position of the cursor cannot be changed on the tool
compensation screen using page keys or cursor keys.
(5) Near the tool to the sensor by manual operation.
(6) Place the tool edge to a contacting surface of the sensor by manual
handle feed.
Bring the tool edge in contact with the sensor. This causes the tool
compensation value writing signals (+MIT1, MIT1, +MIT2 or
MIT2) to input to CNC.
The tool compensation value writing signal is set to 1, and the :
i) The axis is interlocked in this direction and its feeding is stopped.
ii) The tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memory (tool
geometry offset value) which corresponds to the offset number
shown by the cursor is set up.
(7) For both X-axis and Z-axis, their offset value are set by the operations
(5) and (6).
(8) Repeat operations (3) to (7) for necessary tools.
(9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to 0.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking OFST indicator light
goes off.
1191
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Basic Procedure to Set

Shift Value
(1) Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance.
(2) Execute manual reference position return.
By executing manual reference position return, the machine
coordinate system is established.
The workpiece coordinate system shifting amount is computed based
on the machine coordinate system of the tool.
(3) Set the workpiece coordinate system shifting amount writing mode
select signal WOQSM to 1.
The CRT display is automatically switches to the workpiece shifting
screen, the WFST indicator starts blinking at the status indicator
area in the bottom of the screen, which inform that the workpiece
coordinate system shifting amount writing mode is ready.
(4) Select a tool to be measured.
(5) Check tool offset numbers.
The tool offset number corresponding to the tool required for
measurement, shall be set in the parameter (No.5020) in advance.
Besides the tool offset number can be set automatically by setting the
tool offset number input signal (with parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1).
(6) Manually approach the tool to an end face of the workpiece.
(7) Place the tool edge to the end face (sensor) of the workpiece by
manual handle feed.
When the tool edge contacts with the end face of the workpiece, input
the workpiece coordinate system shift amount signal WOSET.
The workpiece coordinate system shifting amount on the Zaxis is
automatically set.
(8) Release the tool.
(9) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode select
signal WOQSM to 0.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking WSFT indicator
light goes off.
Signal
Tool offset write mode

select signal
(GOQSM <G039#7>)
[Function] Selects the mode for writing tool compensation.
[Operation] When this signal is turned 1 in a manual operation mode, the mode for
writing tool compensation is selected. The control unit then automatically
switches the screen displayed on the CRT to the tool geometry
compensation screen and blinks the OFST status display in the bottom
of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for
writing tool compensation.
1192
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Tool offset write signal

+MIT1, +MIT2
<X004#2, #4>
MIT1, MIT2
<X004#3, #5> [Classification] Input signal
[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is set to 1, the manual feed
is inhibited and also the tool geometry compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool compensation memory.
[Operation] When these signals are turned 1, the control unit operates as follows:
D Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during
manual operation.
+MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive
direction along the X-axis.
MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative
direction along the X-axis.
+MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive
direction along the Z-axis.
MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative
direction along the Z-axis.
D When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool
compensation is turned 1, the manual feed interlock signal also
automatically calculates the tool geometry compensation for the tool
compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the result in
tool compensation memory.
NOTE
This signal is used as the manual feed interlock signal in
each axis direction.
Tool offset number

select signals
OFN0 to OFN5, OFN6
<G039#0 to #5, G040#0>
[Function] Selects the tool offset number.
[Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is
automatically positioned on the tool geometry compensation number
selected by these signals.
A tool offset number is specififed by 7bit binary number. Number 0 to
98 corresponds to the compensation number 1 to 99.
NOTE
This signal is available only when parameter QNI (No.
5005#5) =1.
1193
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
system shift value write
mode select signal
WOQSM <G039#6>
[Function] Selects the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate
system.
[Operation] When this signal is turned 1 in a manual operation mode, the mode for
writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system is selected.
The control unit then automatically switches the screen displayed to the
WORK SHIFT screen and blinks the OFST status display in the bottom
of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for
writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system. However,
this is not performed when the mode for writing tool compensation values
is selected.
system shift value write
signal
WOSET <G040#7>
[Function] Automatically calculates and sets the shift amount for the workpiece
coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal turns to 1 in the mode for writing the shift amount for
the workpiece coordinate system, it triggers automatic calculation and
setting of the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
Signal address
#7
#6
X004
#5
MIT2
#4
+MIT2
#3
MIT1
#2
+MIT1
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
SKIP2
#1
#0
WARNING
Since the same addresses are used for both +MIT1, MIT1,
+MIT2, MIT2 and skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP5 (multistep
skip), be careful for using two kinds of signals.
G039
#7
#6
GOQSM WOQSM
G040
WOSET
#5
OFN5
#4
OFN4
#3
OFN3
#2
OFN2
#1
OFN1
#0
OFN0
OFN6
1194
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
#4
3003
#3
DIT
#2
#1
#0
#2
#1
#0

DIT Interlock for each axis direction
0 : Enabled
1 : Disabled
#7
#6
5005
#5
QNI
#4
#3

QNI In the function of input of offset value measured B
0 : Not automatically select the tool offset number
1 : Automatically selects a tool offset number
5015
Distance (XP) betweeen reference position and X axis + contact surface
5016
Distance (XM) betweeen reference position and X axis contact surface
5017
Distance (ZP) betweeen reference position and Z axis + contact surface
5018
Distance (ZM) betweeen reference position and Z axis contact surface
[Unit of data]
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01
0.001
0.0001
mm
Inch input
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
inch
[Valid data range] 99999999 99999999
These parameters are related to the function of input of tool offset value
measured B.
They set the distance (with sign) between the measurement reference
position and sensor contact surface. For an axis under diameter programming, set it by a diameter value.
1195
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Measuring
reference
position
Xm
Xp
+X
X axis contact face
Z axis contact
face
Zm
X axis + contact
face
+Z
5020
Z axis + contact face
Zp
Tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B

[Valid data range] 0 to the number of tools to be compensated.
Set tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B
function (i.e. when workpiece coordinate system shift value is set). (The
tool offset number corresponding to the measured tool shall be set in advance.) This parameter is valid when the tool offset number is not selected
automatically (QNI, #5 of parameter 5005, is zero).
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.4.3 Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured B
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.4.3 Direct Input of Tool Offset Measured B
1196
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.4.3
Input of Measured
Workpiece Origin
Offsets
General
Reference item
By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate

system from a programmed work coordinate system, the workpiece zero
point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a command value
matches the actual measurement.
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
Series 21i/210i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
III.11.4.7
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.4.11 Input of Measured Workpiece

Origin Offsets
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63094EN)
III.11.4.7
OPERATORS MANUAL
III.11.4.11 Input of Measured Workpiece

Origin Offsets
1197
Input of Measured Workpiece

Origin Offsets
Input of Measured Workpiece

Origin Offsets
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
14.5
TOOL LENGTH/
WORKPIECE ORIGIN
MEASUREMENT B
(M SERIES)
General
Two functions have been provided to measure the tool length:

The automatic tool length measurement function (Section 14.2)
automatically measures the tool length at a programmed command (G37);
The tool length measurement function (Section 14.1) measures the tool
length after the target tool is manually moved until it touches the
workpiece top surface or other reference position. In addition to the two
conventional functions, tool length/workpiece origin measurement B has
been provided to simplify the procedure of tool length measurement. This
function facilitates the machining setup, resulting in a reduced machining
setup time. The function also makes it easy to measure the workpiece
origin offset.
With this function, the operator can program a T/M code or reference
position return by specifying a manual numeric command on the tool
length offset measurement screen.
Signal
Tool offset measurement

mode selection signal
GOQSM <G039, #7>
[Function] Selects tool offset value measurement mode.
[Operation] When the signal goes 1 in manual operation mode, tool offset
measurement mode is selected. The screen is automatically replaced with
the tool geometry compensation screen. In the status display field at the
bottom of the screen, OFST blinks to indicate that tool offset
measurement mode has been selected.
Tool offset number

selection signals OFN0
to OFN5, OFN6 to OFN9
<G039, #0 to #5; G040,
#0 to #3>
[Function] Selects a tool offset number.
[Operation] In tool offset measurement mode, the cursor automatically moves to the
tool offset number selected by the tool offset number input signal.
1198
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
The ten code signals (binary code) select a tool offset number. Code
signals 0 to 998 correspond to tool offset numbers 1 to 999.
NOTE
This signal is valid only when the QNI bit (bit of 5 parameter
No. 5005) is set to 1.
Workpiece origin offset

measurement mode
selection signal WOQSM
<G039, #6>
[Function] Selects workpiece coordinate system shift measurement mode.
[Operation] When the signal goes 1 in manual operation mode, workpiece origin
offset measurement mode is selected. The screen is automatically
replaced with the workpiece coordinate system setting screen. In the
status display field at the bottom of the screen, WOFS blinks to indicate
that workpiece origin offset measurement mode has been selected.
Skip signal SKIP

<X004, #7>
[Function] Stores the momentary position where the signal goes 1 in the workpiece
origin offset measurement, as a measurement point. At the same time, the
axial movement is stopped.
[Operation] When the skip signal is brought to 1 while the measurement probe is
touching the reference plane or the external edge of the reference hole in
the workpiece origin offset value measurement, the momentary machine
coordinates are stored as the position of the measurement point. At the
same time, the axial movement by manual handle feed or jog feed stops.
Until the skip signal is brought to 0, the interlock prevents the
movement in the direction in which the measurement probe was brought
to the current measurement point.
Signal addresses
X004
G039
#7
SKIP
#6
#7
#6
GOQSM WOQSM
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#5
OFN5
#4
OFN4
#3
OFN3
#2
OFN2
#1
OFN1
#0
OFN0
OFN9
OFN8
OFN7
OFN6
G040
1199
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
#6
5005
#5
QNI
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0

QNI When the tool length measurement B function is executed, a tool offset
number is selected:
0 : According to the selection the operator makes on an MDI unit (by
moving the cursor).
1 : According to the signal input from the PMC.
#7
#6
5007
#5
WMC
#4
WMH
#3
WMA
#2
TMA
#1
TC3
#0
TC2

TC3, TC2
TC3
TC2
Description
The toolchange position is determined by the first reference position return.
The toolchange position is determined by the second

The toolchange position is determined by the third reference position return.
The toolchange position is determined by the fourth

TMA 0 : The tool length can be measured only on the Zaxis.

1 : The tool length can be measured on any axis.
WMA 0 : The workpiece origin offset from the reference plane can be measured
only on the Zaxis.
1 : The workpiece origin offset from the reference plane can be measured
on any axis.
WMH 0 : The workpiece origin offset from the reference hole cannot be
measured.
1 : The workpiece origin offset from the reference hole can be measured.
WMC 0 : The axis of workpiece origin offset measurement is specified by
entering the axis name.
1 : The axis of workpiece origin offset measurement is selected by
moving the cursor.
This parameter is valid when the WMA bit (bit 3 of parameter 5007) is set
to 1.
1200
14. MEASUREMENT
B63003EN1/02
5022
Distance from the reference tool tip position to the base measurement surface
[Data type] 2word axis type
Increment system
ISA
ISB
ISC
Millimeter machine
0.01 mm
0.001 mm
0.0001 mm
Inch machine
0.001 inch
0.0001 inch
0.00001 inch
The distance L from the reference tool tip position to the base
measurement surface with the machine placed at the machine zero point is
set for each axis.
Machine zero
point
(reference tool
tip position)
Tool
01
OFSL
OFSL
Zm
Tool
T01
Zm
Measurement
surface
Measurement
surface
Workpiece
Hm
Reference block
Base measurement
surface
Hm
Machine table
Machine table
: Distance from the reference tool tip position to the base measurement surface
(machine coordinates of the base measurement surface)
Hm : Distance from the base measurement surface to the actual measurement surface
Zm : Distance from the tip of the tool to be measured to the measurement surface at the machine zero point
(Zt
: Distance from the tip of the tool to be measured to the base measurement surface at the machine zero point)
OFSL : Tool length offset value (OFSL = Zm Hm L)
Reference item
Series
16i/160i/18i/180i
OPERATORS MANUAL
(B63014EN)
1201
III.11.4.14 Tool length/workpiece origin

measurement B
15
B63003EN1/02
PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
1202
B63003EN1/02
15.1
PMC AXIS CONTROL
General
The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC.
In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the
CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying moving
distance and feedrate, from the PMC. This enables the control of turrets,
pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of
the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input
signal provided for that particular axis.
The PMC can directly control the following operations:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
Rapid traverse with moving distance specified

Cutting feed feed per minute, with moving distance specified
Cutting feed feed per revolution, with moving distance specified
Skip feed per minute, with moving distance specified
Dwell
Continuous feed
1st reference position return
2nd reference position return
3rd reference position return
4th reference position return
External pulse synchronization Main spindle
External pulse synchronization first manual handle
External pulse synchronization second manual handle
External pulse synchronization third manual handle (for M series
only)
Feedrate control
Auxiliary function, Miscellaneous function 2, Miscellaneous
function 3
Selection of the machine coordinate system
Torque control
The PMC is provided with four paths to control these operations using
input and output signals.
By issuing commands through these four paths, the PMC can
simultaneously control multiple axes separately. Use parameter No. 8010
to determine which path controls which axis. Commands may be issued
through one path to two or more axes, thus allowing the PMC to control
multiple axes using one path.
1203
PMC
B63003EN1/02
CNC
DI/ DO
Commands from path 1
Group A
Group B
Group C
Group D
axis control
axis control
axis control
axis control
In the following description, input/output signals from the four paths are
called group A (path 1), group B (path 2), group C (path 3), and group D
(path 4), respectively.
The name of an input/output signal used for PMC axis control always
contains a lowercase g, as in EBUFg. However, there is no such signal
as EBUFg. The actual signal names represented by EBUFg are EBUFA,
EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD, which respectively correspond to signals
of group A (path 1), group B (path 2), group C (path 3), and group D (path
4).
Basic procedure
(1) In parameter No. 8010, specify which DI/DO signal group (A, B, C,
or D) is to be used for PMC axis control on a peraxis basis.
When using the same group for simultaneously controlling two or
more axes, check that the settings of the parameters related to
feedrate (rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time
constant, diameter/radius, linear axis/rotation axis, etc.) are
identical for each axis to be controlled.
(2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection
signal (EAX1 to EAX8), that corresponds to an axis to be controlled,
to 1.
(3) Determine the operation.
The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type
of operation. The axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g)
specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to
EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data.
1204
B63003EN1/02
These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg

(described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamount
to one block executed during CNCcontrolled automatic operation.
These signals may be collectively called the axis control block data
signals.
List of Signals Determining Data, Tantamount to One Block for PMC

Axis Control
Generic name
Axis control
block data
signals
Signal name
Symbol
Data type
Block stop prohibition signal
EMSBKg
Bit type
Axis control
command signal
EC0g to EC6g
Byte type
Axis control feedrate

signal
EIF0g to EIF15g
Word type
Axis control data

signal
EID0g to EID31g Two words type
(4) When the data governing a complete operation (one block) is

determined, reverse the logical state of axis control command read
signal EBUFg (i.e., from 0 to 1 or vice versa). Note that, for this
to occur, axis control command read completion signal EBSYg must
be in the same logical state as EBUFg.
D The CNC is capable of storing axis control functions from the PMC
in its buffer so that multiple operations can be performed in series,
under the control of the PMC. This allows the CNC to accept a new
command block from the PMC during the execution of another
block if the buffer has free space.
The following figure illustrates an example in which command [1]
is being executed, commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers,
and command [4] has been issued (the axis control block data signal
is set).
PMC Commands
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
~
Setting of the axis control

block data signal
Command [1]
[4]
Command [2]
Command [3]
CNCs buffers
[3]
Input buffer
[2]
Command [4]
Waiting buffer
[1]
Command [5]
Executing buffer
~
Block n
When the execution of command [1] is completed:

1205
B63003EN1/02
command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing

buffer;
command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer;
and
command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block
(axis control block data signal).
After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue
command [5] to the CNC (the axis control block data signal is set).
The timing chart for the command operation is shown below.

[1]
Command block
(Input)
EBUFg
(Input)
[2]
(1)
EBSYg
(Output)
[3]
(2)
[4]
(3)
(4)
The buffer is full.
Input buffer
[3]
Waiting buffer
(5)
[4]
[2]
Executing
buffer
[5]
[3]
[1]
Beginning of execution
End of
execution
[2]
(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these
intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are in different logical states).
The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR

of axis control command read signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and
axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output from the
CNC.
EBUFg
EBSYg
0
Exclusive
OR
(XOR)
CNC buffer status
The previous block has already been read into the

CNC buffer. The PMC can issue the next block.
The previous block has not yet been read completely. It is just being read or waiting for the CNC
buffer to become available. Do not issue the next
block, nor reverse the logical state of EBUFg. Reversing the EBUFg state invalidates any block that
has been already issued.
1206
B63003EN1/02
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued.
When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection
signals EAX1 to EAX8 to 0. Before setting these signals to 0,
however, check that the blocks stored in the CNCs input, waiting,
and executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to
0 while a block is being executed, or while a block remains in any
of these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This alarm
suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks
stored in the input and waiting buffers.
To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks
remaining in the input or waiting buffer, check that control axis
selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0.
For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those
controlling turrets, pallets, and ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to
EAX8 signals are always set to 1. There is no need to set these
signals to 0 after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC.
When all command blocks have been executed (there are no blocks
remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops execution.
(6) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 are set 1 to
0, control is returned to the CNC.
Signal
Signal list
No.
Symbol
Signal name
EAX1 to EAX8
Control axis selection signals
EC0g to EC6g
Axis control command signals
EIF0g to EIF15g
Axis control feedrate signals
EID0g to EID31g
Axis control data signals
EBUFg
Axis control command read signal
EBSYg
Axis control command read completion signal
ECLRg
Reset signal
ESTPg
Axis control temporary stop signal
ESBKg
Block stop signal
10
EMSBKg
Block stop disable signal
11
EM11g to EM48g
Auxiliary function code signals
12
EMFg
Auxiliary function strobe signal
13
EMF2g
Miscellaneous function 2 strobe signal
14
EMF3g
Miscellaneous function 3 strobe signal
15
EFINg
Auxiliary function completion signal
16
ESOFg
Servooff signal
1207
B63003EN1/02
No.
Symbol
Signal name
17
EMBUFg
Buffering disable signal
18
*EAXSL
Control axis selection status signal
19
EINPg
Inposition signal
20
ECKZg
Following zero checking signal
21
EIALg
Alarm signal
22
EGENg
Axis moving signal
23
EDENg
Auxiliary function executing signal
24
EOTNg
Negativedirection overtravel signal
25
EOTPg
Positivedirection overtravel signal
26
*FV0E to *FV7E
Feedrate override signals
27
OVCE
Override cancellation signal
28
ROV1E, ROV2E
Rapid traverse override signals
29
DRNE
Dry run signal
30
RTE
Manual rapid traverse selection signal
31
EOV0
Override 0% signal
32
ESKIP
Skip signal
33
EADEN1 to EADEN8 Distribution completion signals
34
EABUFg
35
EACNT1 to EACNT8 Controlling signals
36
*+ED1 to *+ED8
*ED1 to *ED8
External deceleration signal
37
ELCKZg
Accumulated zero check signal
38
TRQMx
Torque control mode signal
1208
Buffer full signal
B63003EN1/02
Signal Detail
1 Control axis selection

signals EAX1 to EAX8
[Function] When the signal is set to 1, the corresponding axis becomes subject to
PMC control.
When the signal is set to 0, PMC control becomes invalid. Changing
the setting of the control axis selection signal is possible only when
control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0. Changing the
setting when *EAXSL is set to 1 results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No.
139). Alarm signal EIALg is set to 1.
When NCC, bit 5 of parameter No. 8001, is set to 0, a command issued
from the CNC is executed while the control axis selection signal is set to
1 and signal *EAXSL is set to 0. When the parameter is set to 1,
the same attempt results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No. 139). Note that
the command is invalidated when the tool is moving along the axis in
manual continuous feed mode.
If the control axis selection signal is set to 1 while the CNC is currently
executing a command, a P/S alarm is generated. In manual continuous
feed mode, setting this signal to 1 suspends the execution of the
command. While *EAXSL is set to 0, the status of alarm signal EIALg
does not change to 1 when the control axis selection signal is set to 1 and
a P/S alarm (No. 139) is generated. In this case, the axis can be controlled
from the PMC, even when the CNC is in the alarm status.
NOTE
After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 to
1, it takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue
commands to the CNC.
2 Axis control command

signals EC0g to EC6g
[Function] Specifies the following operations through each path.
Axis control
command
(hexadecimal
code)
Operation
Rapid traverse (linear acceleration/deceleration)
00h
Performs the same operation as G00, used by the CNC.
01h
Cutting feed feed per minute

(exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation)
Performs the same operation as G94 G01, used by the
CNC.
1209
B63003EN1/02
Axis control
command
(hexadecimal
code)
02h
Operation
Cutting feed feed per revolution (exponential acceleration/

deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation)
CNC.
Skip feed per minute
03h

CNC.
Dwell
04h

05h
Moves the tool in the direction of reference position return

specified by ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter No. 1006, in rapid traverse mode, then performs the same operation as manual
reference position return, done by the CNC.
Continuous feed (exponential acceleration/deceleration)
06h
Moves the tool in the specified direction in jog feed mode.

Performs the same operation as that of JOG feed, done by
the CNC.
1st reference position return
07h
Performs the same operation as done when positioning the

tool to the reference position from the intermediate point
specified by G28 of the CNC.
08h

specified by G30 P2 of the CNC.
09h

0Ah

External pulse synchronization main spindle
0Bh
Synchronizes with the main spindle.
External pulse synchronization 1st manual handle
0Dh
Synchronizes with the 1st manual handle.
1210
B63003EN1/02
Axis control
command
(hexadecimal
code)
Operation
External pulse synchronization 2nd manual handle
0Eh
Synchronizes with the second manual handle.
External pulse synchronization 3rd manual handle
0Fh
Synchronizes with the 3rd manual handle.
Speed command (linear acceleration/deceleration)
10h
Performs continuous feed at the specified speed.

Torque control
11h
Continuous feed under torque control

Auxiliary function
12h
Performs the same function as the miscellaneous function

(M function), used by the CNC.
Miscellaneous function 2
14h
Similar to the miscellaneous function of the CNC

Miscellaneous function 3
15h
Similar to the miscellaneous function of the CNC

Machine coordinate system selection
20h
Rapid traverse rate
When using the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h), the
feedrate can be specified in either the same parameter as that used by the
CNC (No. 1420) or the PMCs axis interface feedrate signals EIF0g to
EIF15g. This can be set with RPD, bit 0 of parameter No. 8002.
Feed per revolution
When using the cutting feed feed per revolution command (EC0g to
EC6g: 02h), the optional function for threading in synchronous feed
mode is necessary in the case of the M series.
This operation cannot be performed when IT0 to IT2, bit 4 to 6 of
parameter No. 7501, specify highspeed cycle machining.
1211
Reference without dogs

position return
B63003EN1/02
The reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) enables the
following operation: When DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying
reference position return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of
parameter No. 1005, specifying reference position return without dogs for
each axis, is valid and the tool has not been returned to the reference
position since the power was turned on, move each axis in the direction
specified by the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h)
(position the tool to a point near the reference position) and issue the
reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h). This returns
the tool to the reference position (positions the tool to the grid nearest the
current position) without using the deceleration signal for reference
position return.
Note that, when positioning the tool to a point near the reference position,
the tool must be moved in the direction of reference position return at such
a speed that the servo position error exceeds the value of parameter No.
1836.
The direction of the grid relative to the proximate position depends on
ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter No. 1006.
After the reference position has been established, reference position
return can be performed at high speed by issuing the reference position
return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h), irrespective of the reference
position return direction specified by ZMIx, bit 5 of parameter No. 1006.
First reference position

return for an incomplete
without dogs
When using the 1st reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g:
07h), if DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying reference position
return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx, bit 1 of parameter No. 1005,
specifying reference position return without dogs on a peraxis basis is
valid and the tool has not been returned to the reference position since the
power was turned on, issuing the 1st reference position return command
(EC0g to EC6g: 07h) results in the issue of a P/S alarm (No. 090).
1st to 4th reference

position return
When using the 1st to 4th reference position return commands (EC0g to
EC6g: 07h to 0Ah), the feedrate can be specified using RPD, bit 0 of
parameter No. 8002, in the same manner as when using the rapid traverse
command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h).
Note that, in the case of the 1st reference position return, if the tool has
not been manually returned to the reference position after the power was
turned on, the feedrate specified by parameter No. 1424 applies.
External pulse
synchronization
When using the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to

EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh), the tool moves backwards if the external pulse
has a negative value. When a manual handle interrupt is executed for the
axis to which the external pulse is being applied, the moving distance is
the sum of the external pulse and the interrupt pulse.
When a serial spindle is used, synchronization with the main spindle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh) is not possible.
Display of remaining
distance
When using the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the
external pulse synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to
0Fh), the displayed remaining distance is always 0.
1212
B63003EN1/02
Speed command
When using the speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h), specify the axis
to be controlled as a rotation axis in ROTX, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006.
While position control is being executed for the continuous feed
command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h), the speed command (EC0g to EC6g:
10h) exerts speed control over the servo motor, thus allowing the speed
to be dynamically changed during continuous feed. This makes this
command suitable for driving a rotation tool with a servo motor.
A linear acceleration/deceleration time constant can be set for each axis,
using parameter No. 8028.
Note that, while jog feed is being executed by the speed command, no
coordinate system values are changed. This will result in the loss of the
tool position. Therefore, after continuous feed has been completed,
always return the tool to the reference position before executing the move
command.
Machine coordinate
system selection
The machine coordinate system selection command (EC0g to EC6g:

20h) performs absolute positioning to move the tool in rapid traverse to
a specified position on the machine coordinate system. This command
is used to move the tool to a position specifically defined for the machine,
such as the tool exchange position.
This command can be used, irrespective of whether the optional function
for workpiece coordinate system setting is provided.
For a rotation axis, short cut rotation can also be specified. When using
this command for the T series, cancel the tool offset and the tool nose
radius compensation. For the M series, cancel cutter compensation, tool
length compensation, and tool offset.
The machine coordinate system must be set before attempting to use this
command. After turning on the power, return the tool to the reference
position either manually or by using G28. When an absolute position
detector is provided, returning the tool to the reference position is not
necessary because the tool position will be stored in memory.
Torque control command
When torque control is selected (EC0g to EC6g: 11h), the PMC

controlled axis can be subjected to torque control instead of position
control. In the torque control mode, the servo motor outputs the torque
specified by the NC.
(1) Switching from position control to torque control
a. Setting a torque control axis
Set the axis to be subjected to torque control in the TRQMx bit (bit
7 of parameter No. 2007). Set the torque control axis also in
parameter No. 2105 of torque constant. The motorspecific
standard value is automatically set in this parameter when the
power is turned on with the DGPR bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 2000)
set to 0.
b. Position management in torque control mode
In torque control mode, whether to perform followup can be
selected by setting the TQF bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1803).
1213
B63003EN1/02
When followup is not performed, an integrated travel value (error

count) exceeding the value of parameter No. 1885 causes servo
alarm 423 to be issued. When torque control is switched to position
control, followup is always performed, even if followup
suppression is selected.
The CNC manages the position even in torque control mode. After
torque control is switched to position control, no reference position
return is necessary.
c. Traveling direction and speed in torque control mode
In torque control mode, the torque specified by the axis control data
signal is output. While there is no target of torque generation or
while the output torque falls below the specified torque, the
traveling direction is determined by the plus or minus sign added
to the torque data, as in position control. When the traveling speed
exceeds the specified speed, servo alarm 422 is issued.
d. Timing of switching to torque control
A mode is switched to torque control mode after the position error
enters the effective range (inposition state).
(2) Switching from torque control to position control
(canceling torque control mode)
Torque control mode is canceled when any of the following conditions
is satisfied:
1) The reset signal ECLRg is brought to 1.
2) A servo alarm is issued.
3) An OT alarm is issued on the torque control axis.
4) An emergency stop occurs.
5) The servo motor is turned off by the servo off signal ESOFg.
a. Timing for canceling torque control
When torque control by the PMC controlled axis is canceled,
followup may or may not be performed, depending on the setting
in the TRF bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1803). If followup is
suppressed, the torque control mode signal TRQMx immediately
goes 0 when a cause to cancel torque control is detected. Then,
position control mode is selected. The execution terminates when
the position error enters the effective range. If followup is
performed, the torque control mode signal TRQMx goes 0 when
a cause to cancel torque control is detected. Then, followup starts.
When the position error falls below or equals to the cancel limit
value specified in parameter 1886, position control mode is
selected. The execution terminates when the position error enters
the effective range.
b. Command after torque control mode is canceled
When torque control mode is canceled, normal position control
mode is selected. In torque control mode, the position is managed,
and the machine coordinates are not displaced. The workpiece
coordinates, however, are shifted from the machine coordinates.
The shift must be canceled by specifying the command for setting
the workpiece coordinate system or the like.
1214
B63003EN1/02
CAUTION
1 If the torque control axis may be moved in torque control
mode, the followup parameter TRF (bit 4 of parameter No.
1803) must be set to 1.
2 If torque control mode is canceled while the torque control
axis is moving, the return to position control mode causes
a mechanical impact. A faster movement causes a greater
impact. To cancel torque control mode, decelerate or stop
the movement in advance.
3 When specifying the torque control command after a
manual reference position return is completed, set the feed
direction selection signal to 0 in advance. Alternatively,
select a mode other than manual reference position return
mode in advance.
4 In torque control mode, never detach a controlled axis by
the controlled axis detach signal DTCHx or by a setting
parameter.
The following table shows the correspondence between the axis control
commands and their data:
Command block
Operation
Rapid traverse
Axis control code

signal EC0g to EC6g
00h
Command data
Total moving distance

EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
The rapid traverse rate

is valid when PRD, bit 0
of parameter No. 8002,
is set to 1.

EID0g to EID31g
Feedrate
EIF0g to EIF15g
Cutting feed feed per

minute
01h
Skip feed per minute
03h
Cutting feed feed per

revolution
02h

EID0g to EID31g
Feed per rotation
EIF0g to EIF15g
Dwell
04h
Dwell time
EID0 to EID31g
Reference position
return
05h
None
Jog feed
06h
Feed direction EID31g

Jog feedrate
EIF0g to EIF15g
1215
B63003EN1/02
Operation
Axis control code

signal EC0g to EC6g
Command data
1st reference position

return
07h
Rapid traverse rate

EIF0g to EIF15g
2nd reference position

return
08h
3rd reference position

return
09h

is valid when PRD, bit 0
of parameter No
No. 8002
8002,
is set to 1.
4th reference position

return
0Ah
External pulse
synchronization
main spindle
0Bh
External pulse
synchronization
manual handle
0Dh
Pulse weight
EIF0g to EIF15g
0Eh
0Fh <For M series only>
Speed command
10h
Continuous feed
EIF0g to EIF15g
Torque control
11h
Maximum feedrate,
EIF0g to EIF15g
Torque data, EID0g to
EID31g
Auxiliary function
12h
Auxiliary function code

EID0g to EID15g
2
14h
code, EID0g to EID15g
3
15h
code, EID0g to EID15g
Machine coordinate
system setting
20h
Machine coordinate
system setting
(absolute value)
EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g

setting is effective when
bit 0 (RPD) of parameter
No. 8002 is set to 1.
3 Axis control feedrate

signals EIF0g to
EIF15g
[Function] (1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)
(2) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 07h)
(3) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 08h)
1216
B63003EN1/02
(4) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h)

(5) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah)
(6) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h)
For these commands, signals EIF0g to EIF15g are used to specify
the rapid traverse rate, in binary format, when bit 0 (RPD) of
parameter No. 8002 is set to 1. For 1st reference position return,
however, the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter No. 1424
is used if manual reference position return has not been performed
after the power was first turned on.
[Unit of data]
Data range
Unit
IS-B
IS-C
Data unit
ISB
Linear
axis
ISC
Metric machine
Inch machine
Rotation axis
Unit
mm/min
0.1
inch/min
deg/min
[Valid data range] Specify data within the range given in the following table.
Linear
axis
Metric machine
30 to 15000
30 to 12000
mm/min
Inch machine
30 to 6000
30 to 4800
inch/min
30 to 15000
30 to 12000
deg/min
Rotation axis
(7) Cutting feed feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)

(8) Skip feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)
For these commands, the signals are used to specify, in binary
format, the feedrate along an axis. The specified feedrate can be
magnified by ten by the setting of bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002.
[Unit of data] When bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0

Data unit
ISB
Linear
axis
Metric machine
Inch machine
Rotation axis
ISC
Unit
0.1
mm/min
0.01
0.01
inch/min
0.1
deg/min
When bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1

Data unit
ISB
Linear
axis
Metric machine
Inch machine
Rotation axis
1217
10
0.1
10
ISC
Unit
mm/min
0.01
inch/min
deg/min
B63003EN1/02

(Actual values must fall within the ranges given in the following table.)
Data range
ISB
Linear
axis
Metric machine
Inch machine
Unit
ISC
1 to 100000
0.1 to 12000.0
mm/min
0.01 to 4000.00
0.001 to 480.000
inch/min
1 to 100000
0.1 to 12000.0
deg/min
Rotation axis
CAUTION
When 0 is specified, the CNC continues to perform
buffering without moving the tool. In such a case, release
the buffering by issuing reset signal ECLRg.
Cutting feedrate clamp is disabled.
(9) Cutting feed feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)

For this command, the signals are used to specify the amount by
which the tool is moved for every rotation of the spindle.
<For T series>
[Unit of data] The data increment depends on the settings of bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of

parameter No. 8002, as listed in the following table.
Parameter
FR2
FR1
0
1
Metric input
(mm/rev)
Inch input
(inch/rev)
Rotation axis
(deg/rev)
0 0001
0.0001
0 000001
0.000001
0 0001
0.0001
0.001
0.00001
0.001
0.01
0.0001
0.01

Data range
ISB
Linear
axis
Unit
ISC
Metric input
0.0001 to 500.0000
mm/rev
Inch input
0.000001 to 9.999999
inch/rev
0.0001 to 500.0000
deg/rev
Rotation axis
<For M series>
[Unit of data] The data unit depends on the settings of bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of
parameter No. 8002, as listed in the following table.
Parameter
FR2
FR1
0
1
Metric input
(mm/rev)
Inch input
(inch/rev)
Rotation axis
(deg/rev)
0 01
0.01
0 0001
0.0001
0 01
0.01
0.1
0.001
0.1
0.01
1218
B63003EN1/02

Data range
ISB
Linear
axis
ISC
Unit
Metric input
0.01 to 500.00
mm/rev
Inch input
0.0001 to 9.9999
inch/rev
0.01 to 500.00
deg/rev
Rotation axis
WARNING
1 The value of parameter No. 8022 is used as the upper limit
for clamping the feedrate.
2 Override for the feedrate is effective. Dry run is invalid.
CAUTION
The specified feedrate can be magnified by 1, 10, or 100 by
setting bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002
accordingly.
(10) External pulse synchronization main spindle

(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
(11) External pulse synchronization first manual handle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
(12) External pulse synchronization second manual handle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh)
(13) External pulse synchronization third manual handle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)
For these commands, the signals are used to specify the weight of the
external pulses. A weight range of "1/256 to "127 can be set by using
signals EIF0g to EIF7g for the figures after the decimal point. When a
negative weight is specified, the tool is moved in the reverse direction.
When a new pulse weight is specified while the tool is moving in
synchronization with external pulses, inverting signal EBUFg causes the
tool to move with the new pulse weight.
As commands for (10) to (13) are executed without buffering, axis control
command read completion signal EBSYg usually need not be checked.
CAUTION
The pulse weight is clamped according to the value set for
parameter No. 1424 (parameter for the manual rapid
traverse rate for each axis).
1219
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx)
of parameter No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005
can be used to specify whether a radius or diameter is to be
used in a command.
(14) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h)
Set the feedrate as the same as for cutting feed feed per minute
(EC0g to EC6g: 01h). The feedrate can be changed during
continuous feed.
Specify the feedrate with signals EIF0g to EIF15g, and invert the
axis control command read signal EBUFg during continuous feed,
then the tool moves at the new feedrate.
As commands for jog feed are executed without buffering, axis
control command read completion signal EBSYg usually need not
be checked.
The specified feedrate can be magnified by 10 by setting bit 3 (F10)
of parameter No. 8002, and by 200 by setting bit 2 (JFM) of
parameter No. 8004.
D Maximum feedrate (with override of 254%)
ISB
Metric input
ISC
Inch input
Metric input
Inch input
Magnified 166458mm/
by 1
min
1664.58inch/
min
16645mm/min
166.45inch/
min
Magnified 1664589mm/
by 10
min
16645.89
inch/min
166458mm/
min
1664.58inch/
min
Magnified 1966050mm/
by 200 min
(Note 1)
1966605.00
inch/min
196605mm/
min
19660.50
inch/min
CAUTION
The maximum feedrate depends on whether override is
applied or canceled. The following table lists the maximum
feedrate when override is canceled.
1220
B63003EN1/02
ISB
Metric input
ISC
Inch input
Magni- 65535mm/min
fied by 1
Metric input
Inch input
655.35inch/
min
6553mm/min
65.53inch/min
Magnified by
10
655350mm/
min
6553.50inch/
min
65535mm/min
655.35inch/
min
Magnified by
200
13107000
mm/min
131070.00
inch/min
1310700mm/
min
13107.00
inch/min
NOTE
1 Magnification of 200 is valid only for the continuous feed
command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h).
2 The actual speed may not be displayed correctly,
depending on the feedrate.
(15) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h)
For this command, the signals are used to specify, in binary format,
the servo motor speed.
Specify a positive value for rotation in the forward direction.
Specify a negative value (twos complement) for rotation in the
reverse direction.
When a new servo motor speed is specified, inverting the axis
control command read signal EBUFg accelerates or decelerates the
servo motor until it attains the new speed.
Data range
Unit
32768 to +32767
rpm
NOTE
The servo motor speed may contain a slight error, as
follows:
Speed command
(b)
Amplifier
1221
Gears
Motor
Axis
Detector
(a)
B63003EN1/02
(a) The speed command for PMC axis control requires specification
of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate along an axis. To
specify a feedrate along the axis when gears are used to link the
servo motor and axis, the feedrate must be converted to a rotation
speed of the servo motor speed. As the motor speed must be
specified with an integer, the converted speed is subject to a
roundoff error.
(b) The minimum increment for specifying the motor speed is
calculated by the following formula and rounded to the nearest
integer:
Fmin + P
1
1000
15
Fmin : Minimum increment

for the motor speed
P :
Number of pulses per
rotation of the detector
for velocity feedback
Specify the speed command using the value calculated by the

following formula:
F+ N
P
15
1
1000
F : Speed command value

(integer)
N : Servo motor speed (rpm)
P : Number of detector
pulses issued per rotation
for velocity feedback
NOTE
In
speed
command
mode,
the
speed
after
acceleration/deceleration is specified to the servo control
unit. The loop gain for position control is invalid.
(16) When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified

Specify the maximum speed in torque control mode, in rpm.
A servo alarm (No. 422) is issued if there is no object for which a
torque is to be generated or if the feedrate exceeds the specified value
while torque control is being applied.
The maximum feedrate in torque control mode can be changed in
torque control mode by setting the new feedrate data in the signal
then inverting the logic of axis control command read signal
EBUFg.
Valid data range
Units
1 to 32767
rpm
NOTE
The data units will be cm/min when a linear motor is being
used.
1222
B63003EN1/02
4 Axis control data

signals
EID0g to EID31g
[Function]
[Unit of data]
ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
Degree input
0.001
0.0001
mm
deg
Inch input
0.0001
0.00001
inch
[Valid data range]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)

Cutting feed feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
Cutting feed feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
Skip feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)
For these commands, signals EID0g to EID31g are used to specify, in

binary format, the incremental moving distance, according to the input
increment used for the axis.

ISB
ISC
Unit
Metric input
Degree input
" 99999.999
" 9999.9999
mm
deg
Inch input
" 9999.9999
" 999.99999
inch
When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter

No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 can be used to specify
whether a radius or diameter is to be used in a command.
(5) Dwell (EC0g to EC6g: 04h)
the dwell time.
Data range
Unit
1 to 9999999
ms
When diameter programming is specified with bit 3 (DIAx) of

parameter No. 1006, bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 can be used
to specify whether a radius or diameter is to be used in a command.
NOTE
When the increment system ISC is used, the least input
increment for the dwell time can be set to 0.1 ms, according
to the setting of bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002.
For this command, signal EID31g is used to specify the direction of
continuous feed, as follows:
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
1223
B63003EN1/02
Signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined.

(7) Auxiliary functions (EC0g to EC6g: 12h)
an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC. The auxiliary
function code can be specified using either one or two bytes,
depending on the setting of bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001, in
signals EID0g to EID15g.
(8) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h)
an absolute machine coordinate, according to the increment system
used by the axis.
Example: For absolute value 10000
Input increment
inch
1.0000
mm
10.000
Output increment
mm
25.400
inch
0.3937
The direction of rotation can be specified about a rotation axis with

a parameter. To enable the rollover function, set bit 0 (ROAx) of
parameter No. 1008 to 1. Then, select whether the tool is to be
rotated in the direction corresponding to the sign of the specified
value, or in whichever direction minimizes the distance to the end
point, using bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008. The moving
distance per rotation must be set in parameter No. 1260.
(9) When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified
Specify the torque data.
Specify a positive value when the torque is to be applied in the
positive direction. Specify a negative value when the torque is to be
applied in the negative direction.
The specified torque data can be changed in torque control mode by
setting the new data in the signal then inverting the logic of axis
control command read signal EBUFg.
Valid data range
Units
99999999 to +99999999
0.00001 Nm
NOTE
The data units will be 0.001 N when a linear motor is being
used.

read signal EBUFg
[Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control.
See Basic procedure for details of the operation performed when this
signal is set from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
1224
B63003EN1/02

read completion
signal EBSYg
[Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for
PMC axis control and has stored the block in the input buffer. See Basic
procedure for details of the output conditions and the procedure.
7 Reset signal ECLRg

[Function] Resets the corresponding PMCcontrolled axis.
When this signal is set to 1, the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the
tool.
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation.
Simultaneously, all buffered commands are canceled.
command is ignored while this signal is set to 1.
Any control
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and external pulse
synchronization command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) can be
terminated by setting reset signal ECLRg to 1. When these commands
are terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, the axis moving
signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL is set to 0. Confirm that the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL has been set to 0 before issuing the next command. Do not
set reset signal ECLRg to 0 until the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL has been set to 0.
The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by
setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1. When this command is terminated,
the servo motor decelerates and stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg
is set to 0. Confirm that the axis moving signal EGENg has been set
to 0 before issuing the next command. Do not attempt to set the reset
signal ECLRg to 0 until the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to
0.
8 Axis control
temporary stop signal
ESTPg
[Function] When this signal is set to 1, the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the
tool.
1225
B63003EN1/02
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.

(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation
when auxiliary function completion signal EFINg is input.
The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to 0.
9 Block stop signal

ESBKg
10 Block stop disable
signal EMSBKg
[Function] When block stop signal ESBKg is set to 1 during the execution of a
command issued from the PMC, axis control is stopped after the block
being executed is completed. When this signal is set to 0, the buffered
command is executed. Block stop signal ESBKg is disabled when block
stop disable signal EMSBKg is set to 1 for the block.
|
ESBKg
(input)
[1]
Command
block
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
EBSYg
(output)
[2]
More than
8 msec
[3]
The buffer is full.
Input buffer
Waiting buffer
[2]
[3]
[1]
Executing
buffer
[2]
[1]
11 Auxiliary function
code signals
EM11g to EM48g
strobe signal EMFg
1226
B63003EN1/02
13 Miscellaneous
function 2 strobe
signal EMF2g
14 Miscellaneous
function 3 strobe
signal EMF3g
completion signal
EFINg
[Function] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is issued by
the PMC, the auxiliary function code is specified in a byte (using signals
EID0g to EID7g) or two bytes (using signals EID0g to EID15g),
depending on the setting of bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001.
The CNC sends the auxiliary function code specified in signals EID0g to
EID7g and EID8g to EID15g to auxiliary function code signals EM11g
to EM28g and EM31g to EM48g and awaits auxiliary function
completion signal EFINg. When the auxiliary function completion signal
EFINg is returned, the CNC starts executing the next block.
The timings for sending the auxiliary function code signals and auxiliary
function strobe signal, as well as for receiving the auxiliary function
completion signal, are the same as those for the miscellaneous functions
(M functions) under the control of the CNC. See Auxiliary function
executing signal for details.
16 Servooff signal
ESOFg

[Function] When this signal is set to 1, the servo motor for the corresponding
PMCcontrolled axis is turned off (servooff state).
When this signal is set to 0, the servo motor is turned on.
When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified,
entering the servooff state cancels torque control mode, but the torque
control state remains set. In such a case, set reset signal ECLRg to 1.
17 Buffering disable
signal EMBUFg
1227
B63003EN1/02
[Function] When this signal is set to 1, commands from the PMC are not read while
the executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is
set to 1 when any of these buffers contain a block, that block is executed
but subsequent commands are read only when the buffers are all empty.
To discriminate the buffering disabled condition, the CNC outputs the
axis control command read completion signal (EBSYg) only when a
command is read when all buffers are empty.
EMBUFg
(input)
[1]
Command
block
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
Command
disabled
EBSYg
(output)
[2]
Input buffer
Waiting buffer
Executing
buffer
[1]
Beginning of
execution
[2]
End
Beginning of
execution
Buffering is disabled, regardless of buffering disable signal EMBUFg, for

the following commands:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Skipfeed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 03h)

Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 05h)
1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 07h)
2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 08h)
3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 09h)
4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g: 0Ah)
Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g: 20h)
The following commands, for which reset signal ECLRg is used for
termination, operate as though buffering had been disabled. That is, the
subsequently specified block is not executed but canceled:
(2) External pulse synchronization main spindle
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh)
1228
B63003EN1/02

(EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)
(6) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h)
18 Control axis selection

status signal *EAXSL
[Function] When this signal is set to 0, control axis selection signals EAX1 to
EAX8 can be changed.
(1) When the tool is moving along a PMCcontrolled axis
(2) When a block is being read into a buffer
(3) When the servooff signal ESOFg is set to 1
When this signal is set to 1, control axis selection signals EAX1 to
EAX8 cannot be changed. Any attempt to change these signals results in
the output of P/S alarm No. 139.
If an attempt to change signals EAX1 to EAX8 is made when servooff
signal ESOFg is 1, P/S alarm No. 139 occurs and cannot be released
simply by setting reset signal ECLRg to 1. In such a case, restore
signals EAX1 to EAX8 or set servooff signal ESOFg to 0 before
setting reset signal ECLRg to 1.
When a command is issued for any of the four paths with PMC axis
control, signal *EAXSL is set to 1 to disable axis selection. Thus,
changing signals EAX1 to EAX8 results in the output of P/S alarm No.
139. For paths for which commands are not issued, however, axis
selection is enabled if bit 5 (DSL) of parameter No. 8004 is set
accordingly.
19 Inposition signal
EINPg
[Function] This signal is set to 1 when the corresponding PMCcontrolled axis is
in the inposition state.
When the tool is decelerated, inposition check is performed to disable
the next command until the tool enters the inposition area. The
inposition check, however, can be skipped using bit 6 (NCI) of
parameter No. 8004 to reduce the cycle time.
NOTE
When the axis fed at a very low speed, in position signal
might turn 1.
1229
B63003EN1/02
20 Following zero
checking signal
ECKZg
[Function] This signal is set to 1 when following zero check or inposition check
is being performed for the corresponding PMCcontrolled axis.
21 Alarm signal EIALg

[Function] This signal is set to 1 when a servo alarm, overtravel alarm, or P/S alarm
No. 130 or 139 occurs for the corresponding PMCcontrolled axis. This
signal is set to 0 when reset signal ECLRg is set to 1 after the alarm
is released, as described below.
D Servo alarm
Eliminate the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC.
D Overtravel alarm
Move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit, then reset the
CNC.
The following commands can be used to move the tool into the area
within the stored stroke limit during an overtravel alarm:
(1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h)
(2) Cutting feedfeed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(3) Cutting feedfeed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh)
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Fh)
D P/S alarm (130 or 139)
Reset the CNC. See Alarms and messages for details.
Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases.
Use the reset button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or
emergency stop signal *ESP.
22 Axis moving signal

EGENg
[Function] This signal is set to 1 when the tool is moving along the corresponding
PMCcontrolled axis according to commands such as rapid traverse
(EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed (EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
1230
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
This signal is set to 0 when distribution for the axis is
completed (the signal is set to 0 during deceleration).
executing signal
EDENg
[Function] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by the
PMC, this signal is set to 1 during the period from when auxiliary
function codes EID0g to EID15g are sent to auxiliary function code
signals EM11g to EM48g until auxiliary function completion signal
EFINg is returned.
Auxiliary function command

Command block
(input)
EM11g to EM48g
(output)
EMFg, EMF2g, EMF3g
(output)
TMF
TFIN
EFINg
(input)
EDENg
(output)
Next command
TMF and TFIN are set with parameters No. 3010 and 3011.
24 Negativedirection
overtravel signal
EOTNg
25 Positivedirection
overtravel signal
EOTPg
[Function] These signals are set to 1 when an overtravel alarm is detected. When
the stroke limit in the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set
to 1. When the stroke limit in the positive direction is exceeded, signal
EOTPg is set to 1. Simultaneously, alarm signal EIALg is set to 1.
1231
B63003EN1/02
These signals are set to 0 when the overtravel alarm is released and reset
signal ECLRg is set to 1. See Alarm signal EIALg for details of how
to release an overtravel alarm.
26 Feedrate override
signals *FV0E to *FV7E
[Function] Like the CNCs feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7, these signals can
be used to select the override for the cutting feedrate, in steps of 1% from
0 to 254%, independently of the CNC using bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.
8001.
These signals form an eightbit binary code and correspond to the
override value as follows:
7
Override value +
|2 i
Vi|%
i+ 0
Vi = 0 when signal *FViE is 1

Vi = 1 when signal *FViE is 0
That is, each signal has the following significance:
*FV7E
*FV6E
*FV5E
*FV4E
= 128%, *FV3E
= 64%, *FV2E
= 32%, *FV1E
= 16%, *FV0E
= 8% ,
= 4% ,
= 2% ,
= 1%
When all signals are set to 0, the override is regarded as being 0%, as
well as when all signals are 1.
27 Override cancellation
signal OVCE
[Function] When override is enabled, independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2
(OVE) of parameter No. 8001, setting this signal to 1 fixes the cutting
feed override to 100%. This signal does not affect the rapid traverse override.
1232
B63003EN1/02
28 Rapid traverse
override signals
ROV1E and ROV2E
[Function] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate,
independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001.

Override value
val e
ROV2E
ROV1E
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
100%
50%
25%
F0
F0 is the minimum feedrate specified with parameter No. 1421.
29 Dry run signal DRNE

30 Manual rapid traverse
selection signal RTE
[Function] These signals can be used to perform dry run or manual rapid traverse,
independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001.
When dry run signal DRNE is set to 1, the specified rapid traverse rate
and cutting feedrate are ignored and the tool moves at the dry run speed
(set in parameter No. 1410) multiplied by the specified override. Bit 3
(RDE) of parameter No. 8001 can be used to specify whether to enable
or disable dry run for rapid traverse.
When manual rapid traverse selection signal RTE is set to 1 during dry
run, the tool moves at the rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse and at the
maximum jog feedrate for cutting feed. When the signal is set to 0, the
tool moves at the jog feedrate. When dry run signal DRNE is set to 0,
the specified rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate is restored.
Feedrate of Dry run
Command from PMC
Manual rapid
traverse select
signal
Rapid traverse
Feed
Rapid traverse rate
Maximum cutting
feedrate
Dry run feed

rate JV(*)
Dry run feed

rate
JV
* Can also be set to the rapid traverse rate with bit 3 (RDE) of parameter
No. 8001.
1233
B63003EN1/02
31 Override 0% signal
EOV0
[Function] This signal is set to 1 when the feedrate override is 0%.
32 Skip signal ESKIP

[Function] When this signal is set to 1 during executing the skip cutting command,
the block being executed is immediately stopped and the next block is
executed. Bit 7 (SKE) of parameter No. 8001 can be used to select
whether to use signal SKIP, which is the common skip signal for the PMC
and CNC, or PMCspecific skip signal ESKIP.
NOTE
When two paths are controlled, the skip signal ESKIP is
valid for the first path. For the second path, use the SKIP
signal (X013, #7), which is used also by the CNC.
33 Distribution
completion signals
EADEN1 to EADEN8
[Function] These signals are set to 0 when the tool is moving with a command from
the PMC. The signals are set to 1 when the tool is not moving, except
when it is stopped by the issue of an axis control temporary stop signal
ESTPg during the execution of a move command.
34 Buffer full signal

EABUFg
[Function] This signal is set to 1 when the input buffer contains a command block.
35 Controlling signals
EACNT1 to EACNT8
[Function] When the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 1, signal
EACNTn corresponding to the axis being controlled is set to 1.
1234
B63003EN1/02
36 External deceleration
signals *+ED1 to
*+ED8/*ED1 to *ED8
[Function] These signals are also used by the CNC. The signals are provided for each
direction of the individual controlled axes. The plus or minus sign in the
signal name indicates the direction, and the number at the end corresponds
to the axis number of the controlled axis.
" EDx
1 Feed along the first axis is decelerated.

:
8 Feed along the eighth axis is decelerated.
+ Feed in the positive direction is decelerated.
:
Feed in the negative direction is decelerated.
When any of the following axis control command is specified while the
EDC bit (bit 0 of parameter 8005) is held 1, the external deceleration
function becomes effective:
(1) Rapid traverse
(2) Cutting feed per minute
(3) Reference position return
(4) Continuous feed
(5) First reference position return
(6) Second reference position return
(7) Third reference position return
(8) Fourth reference position return
(9) Machine coordinate system selection
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
(EC0g to EC6g:
00h)
01h)
05h)
06h)
07h)
08h)
09h)
0Ah)
20h)
While the signal is held 0, the feedrate in the corresponding direction

of axial movement can be reduced to the speed specified in parameter
1427 (external deceleration speed).
When the feedrate is lower than the external deceleration speed, the
specified feedrate is valid.
The feedrate on other axes for which the signal is not held 0 is not
affected.
1235
B63003EN1/02
37 Accumulated zero
check signal ELCKZg
[Function] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks
to be made at a subsequent cutting feed command.
(1) Cutting feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(2) Cutting feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
This enables the chopping function.
38 Torque control mode

signal TRQMx
[Function] This signal indicates which axis is placed in torque control mode under
PMC axis control.
Signal address
MTCNC
ADDRESS
X004
#7
SKIP
#6
ESKIP
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PMCCNC
ADDRESS
G118
#7
*+ED8
#6
*+ED7
#5
*+ED6
#4
*+ED5
#3
*+ED4
#2
*+ED3
#1
*+ED2
#0
*+ED1
G120
*ED8
*ED7
*ED6
*ED5
*ED4
*ED3
*ED2
*ED1
G136
EAX8
EAX7
EAX6
EAX5
EAX4
EAX3
EAX2
EAX1
G150
DRNE
RTE
OVCE
ROV2E
ROV1E
G151
*FV7E
*FV6E
*FV5E
*FV1E
*FV0E
1236
*FV4E
*FV3E
*FV2E
B63003EN1/02
For
group A
G142
#7
EBUFA
#6
ECLRA
#5
ESTPA
#4
ESOFA
#3
#2
ESBKA EMBUFA
#1
#0
EFINA
G143
EMSBKA
EC6A
EC5A
EC4A
EC3A
EC2A
EC1A
EC0A
G144
EIF7A
EIF6A
EIF5A
EIF4A
EIF3A
EIF2A
EIF1A
EIF0A
G145
EIF15A
EIF14A
EIF13A
EIF12A EIF11A
EIF10A
EIF9A
G146
EID7A
EID6A
EID5A
EID4A
EID3A
EID2A
EID1A
EID0A
G147
EID15A
EID14A
EID13A
EID12A EID11A
EID10A
EID9A
EID8A
G148
EID23A
EID22A
EID21A
EID20A EID19A
EID18A
EID17A
EID16A
G149
EID31A
EID30A
EID29A
EID28A EID27A
EID26A
EID25A
EID24A
#7
EBUFB
#6
ECLRB
#5
ESTPB
#4
ESOFB
#1
G154
#0
EFINB
G155
EMSBKB
EC6B
EC5B
EC4B
EC3B
EC2B
EC1B
EC0B
G156
EIF7B
EIF6B
EIF5B
EIF4B
EIF3B
EIF2B
EIF1B
EIF0B
G157
EIF15B
EIF14B
EIF13B
EIF12B EIF11B
EIF10B
EIF9B
G158
EID7B
EID6B
EID5B
EID4B
EID3B
EID2B
EID1B
EID0B
G159
EID15B
EID14B
EID13B
EID12B EID11B
EID10B
EID9B
EID8B
G160
EID23B
EID22B
EID21B
EID20B EID19B
EID18B
EID17B
EID16B
G161
EID31B
EID30B
EID29B
EID28B EID27B
EID26B
EID25B
EID24B
#3
#2
ESBKB EMBUFB
EIF8A
EIF8B
For
group B
1237
G166
#7
EBUFC
#6
ECLRC
#5
ESTPC
#4
ESOFC
#1
#0
EFINC
G167
EMSBKC
EC6C
EC5C
EC4C
EC3C
EC2C
EC1C
EC0C
G168
EIF7C
EIF6C
EIF5C
EIF4C
EIF3C
EIF2C
EIF1C
EIF0C
G169
EIF15C
EIF14C
EIF13C
EIF12C EIF11C
EIF10C
EIF9C
G170
EID7C
EID6C
EID5C
EID4C
EID3C
EID2C
EID1C
EID0C
G171
EID15C EID14C
EID13C
EID12C EID11C
EID10C
EID9C
EID8C
G172
EID23C
EID22C
EID21C
EID20C EID19C
EID18C EID17C
EID16C
G173
EID31C
EID30C
EID29C
EID28C EID27C
EID26C EID25C
EID24C
G178
#7
EBUFD
#6
ECLRD
#5
ESTPD
#4
ESOFD
G179
EMSBKD
EC6D
EC5D
EC4D
EC3D
G180
EIF7D
EIF6D
EIF5D
EIF4D
EIF3D
G181
EIF15D
EIF14D
EIF13D
G182
EID7D
EID6D
G183
For
group C
B63003EN1/02
#3
#2
ESBKC EMBUFC
#3
#2
ESBKD EMBUFD
EIF8C
#1
#0
EFIND
EC2D
EC1D
EC0D
EIF2D
EIF1D
EIF0D
EIF12D EIF11D
EIF10D
EIF9D
EID5D
EID4D
EID3D
EID2D
EID1D
EID0D
EID15D EID14D
EID13D
EID12D EID11D
EID10D
EID9D
EID8D
G184
EID23D
EID22D
EID21D
EID20D EID19D
EID18D EID17D
EID16D
G185
EID31D
EID30D
EID29D
EID28D EID27D
EID26D EID25D
EID24D
EIF8D
For
group D
1238
B63003EN1/02
CNCPMC
ADDRESS
For
group A
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F112
EADEN8
EADEN7
EADEN6
EADEN5
EADEN4
EADEN3
EADEN2
EADEN1
F129
*EAXSL
F130
#7
EBSYA
#2
EIALA
#1
ECKZA
#0
EINPA
EABUFA
EMFA
For
group B
F133
For
group C
For
group D
F136
#4
#3
EGENA EDENA
EM28A
#7
EBSYB
EM24A
#6
EOTNB
EM22A
#5
EOTPB
EM21A
EM18A
#4
#3
EGENB EDENB
EM14A
#2
EIALB
EM28B
#7
EBSYC
EM24B
EM22B
#6
EOTNC
#5
EOTPC
EM21B
EM18B
#4
#3
EGENC EDENC
EMFB
#0
EINPC
EABUFC
EMFC
EM21C
EM18C
EM14C
F139
#7
EBSYD
#6
EOTND
#5
EOTPD
#4
#3
EGEND EDEND
#2
EIALD
F140
EM18D
EABUFB
#1
ECKZC
EM22C
EM21D
#0
EINPB
#2
EIALC
EM24C
EM22D
#1
ECKZB
EM11B
EM28C
EM24D
EM11A
EM12B
F138
EM28D
EM12A
EM14B
F137
F141
#5
EOTPA
F134
F135
#6
EOTNA
F131
F132
EOV0
EM14D
EM12C
EM11C
#1
ECKZD
#0
EINPD
EABUFD
EMFD
EM12D
EM11D
Group A
F142
#7
EM48A
#6
EM44A
#5
EM42A
#4
EM41A
#3
EM38A
#2
EM34A
#1
EM32A
#0
EM31A
Group B
F145
#7
EM48B
#6
EM44B
#5
EM42B
#4
EM41B
#3
EM38B
#2
EM34B
#1
EM32B
#0
EM31B
Group C
F148
#7
EM48C
#6
EM44C
#5
EM42C
#4
EM41C
#3
EM38C
#2
EM34C
#1
EM32C
#0
EM31C
Group D
F151
#7
EM48D
#6
EM44D
#5
EM42D
#4
EM41D
#3
EM38D
#2
EM34D
#1
EM32D
#0
EM31D
1239
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F182
EACNT8
EACNT7
EACNT6
EACNT5
EACNT4
EACNT3
EACNT2
EACNT1
F190
TRQM8
TRQM7
TRQM6
TRQM5
TRQM4
TRQM3
TRQM2
TRQM1
Parameter
1427
External deceleration speed of each axis
[Data type] Word axis type

[Unit of data]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
[Valid data range]
#7
ISB
ISC
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 to 6000
6 to 4800
Rotation axis
1 deg/min
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
#6
#5
#4
TRF
1803
#3
#2
#1
#0

TRF In torque control mode,
0 : Followup is not performed.
1 : Followup is performed.
1885
Permissible value of integrated travel distance under torque control

This parameter sets the maximum permissible value for the integrated
travel distance in torque control mode. If the integrated travel distance
exceeds the value set in this parameter, servo alarm No. 423 is issued.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TRF (bit 4 of parameter No.
1803) is set to 0.
1886
Torque control cancel limit

This parameter sets the cancel limit value used to cancel torque control
mode.
When the position error falls below or equals to the value set in this
parameter, torque control mode is canceled and position control becomes
effective.
1240
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TRF (bit 4 of parameter
1803) is held 0.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
2000
#1
DGPRx
#0
[Data type] Bit axis type

DGPRx At powerON, the torque constant (parameter No. 2105):
0 : Is automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor.
1 : Is not automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor.
2007
#7
TRQx
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
[Data type] Bit axis type

TRQx Torque control:
0 : Is not performed for the axis.
1 : Is performed for the axis.
2105
Torque constant

[Unit of data] 0.00001 Nm/(torque command)
A torque constant is set for each motor torque characteristic.
NOTE
When a linear motor is used, the units of data are 0.001
N/(torque command).
#7
#6
#5
3105
#4
#3
#2
#1
PCF
#0

PCF Whether movement along PMCcontrolled axes is included in the actual
speed display
0 : Included
1 : Not included
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the same axis is controlled
alternately by the CNC and PMC.
1241
8001
B63003EN1/02
#7
SKE
#6
AUX
#5
NCC
#4
#3
RDE
#2
OVE
#1
#0
MLE

MLE Whether machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMCcontrolled axes
0 : Valid
1 : Invalid
NOTE
Eachaxis machine lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 are always
valid, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7
(2) Override cancellation signal OVC
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2
(4) Dry run signal DRN
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT
1: Signals specific to the PMC
(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E
(2) Override cancellation signal OVCE
(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E
(4) Dry run signal DRNE
(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE
RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0 : Invalid
1 : Valid
NCC When a travel command is issued for a PMCcontrolled axis (selected by
a controlledaxis selection signal) according to the program:
0 : P/S alarm 139 is issued while the PMC controls the axis with an axis
control command. While the PMC does not control the axis, a CNC
command is enabled.
1 : P/S alarm 139 is issued unconditionally.
AUX The number of bytes for the code of an auxiliary function (12H) command
to be output is
0 : 1 byte type (0 to 255)
1 : 2 bytes type (0 to 65535)
SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC
0 : Uses the same signal SKIP (X004#7) as CNC.
1 : Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP (X004#6) used by the
PMC.
NOTE
If SKE is set to 1 when 2path control is being applied, it is
effective only for path 1. Path 2 uses the same signal (SKIP
<X013#7>) as that for the CNC.
1242
B63003EN1/02
8002
#7
FR2
#6
FR1
#5
PF2
#4
PF1
#3
F10
#2
SUE
#1
DWE
#0
RPD

RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMCcontrolled axes
0 : Feedrate specified with parameter No. 1420
1 : Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command
DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis
control when the increment system is ISC
0 : 1 ms
1 : 0.1 ms
SUE Whether acceleration/deceleration is performed for an axis that is
synchronized with external pulses, for external pulse synchronization
commands in PMC axis control
0 : Performed (exponential acceleration/deceleration)
1 : Not performed
F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis
control
F10
Metric input
Inch input
1 mm/min
0.01 inch/min
10 mm/min
0.1 inch/min
PF1, PF2 Set the the feedrate unit of feed per minute in PMC axis control
PF2
PF1
Feedrate unit
1/1
1/10
1/100
1/1000
FR1, FR2 Set the feedrate unit for feed per rotation for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
FR2
FR1
Metric input
Inch input
0 0001 mm/rev
0.0001
0 000001 inch/rev
0.000001
0.001 mm/rev
0.00001 inch/rev
0.01 mm/rev
0.0001 inch/rev
1243
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PIM
8003
NOTE
then back on again to make the setting effective.

PIM If a linear axis is controlled solely by the PMC, the commands for that axis
are:
0 : Affected by inch/metric input.
1 : Not affected by inch/metric input.
8004
#7
NDI
#6
NCI
#5
DSL
#4
G8R
#3
G8C
#2
JFM
#1
NMT
#0
CMV
NCI
DSL
G8R
G8C
JFM
NMT
CMV

CMV If the PMC issues a command for an axis after the completion of a
movement along that axis according to a command issued by the CNC,
but before receiving the signal indicating that the miscellaneous function
is completed in the same block,
1 : The axis is handled as a PMC axis and the specified movement is
executed.
NMT If the CNC issues a command that does not result in any movement along
a PMCcontrolled axis while another command, specified for the axis, is
being processed,
JFM Specifies the units used to specify the feedrate for continuous feed (06H)
for a PMCcontrolled axis.
Increment
system
JFM
Metric input
Inch input
Rotation axis
1 mm/min
0.01 inch/min
0.00023 rpm
200 mm/min
2.00 inch/min
0.046 rpm
0.1 mm/min
0.001 inch/min
0.000023 rpm
20 mm/min
0.200 inch/min
0.0046 rpm
IS B
ISB
IS C
ISC
G8C If a cutting feed command is specified for a PMCcontrolled axis,

lookahead control is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
1244
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
The above setting is effective only when the NAHx bit (bit 7
of parameter No. 1819) is set to 0.
G8R If a rapid traverse command is specified for a PMCcontrolled axis,
lookahead control is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled.
NOTE
The above setting is effective only when the NAHx bit (bit 7
of parameter No. 1819) is set to 0.
DSL If an axis exchange is attempted while the selection of a PMCcontrolled
axis is inhibited,
0 : The attempt fails and a P/S alarm No. 139 occurs.
1 : The axis exchange is executed for the axes that belong to an
unspecified path.
NCI During deceleration along an axis controlled by the PMC, the inposition
check is:
0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed.
NDI When diameter programming is selected for a PMC controlled axis, under
PMC axis control:
0 : Radius programming is used to specify the travel distance and
feedrate.
1 : Diameter programming is used to specify the travel distance and
feedrate.
NOTE
While the CDI bit (bit 1 of parameter No. 8005) is held 0, the
NDI bit is valid for an axis of diameter programming (the
DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter No. 1006) is set to 1).
8005
#7
MFD
#6
#5
MFD
#4
#3
DRR
#2
R10
DRR
R10
#1
CDI
#0
EDC
EDC
[Data type] Bit

EDC Under PMC axis control, the external deceleration signal is:
0 : Ineffective.
1 : Effective.
CDI When diameter programming is selected for a PMC controlled axis, under
PMC axis control:
0 : Radius programming is used to specify the travel distance and
feedrate.
1 : Diameter programming is used to specify the travel distance, and
radius programming is used to specify the feedrate.
1245
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when the DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter
1006) is held 1.
2 When the CDI bit is set to 1, the NDI bit (bit 7 of parameter
8004) is invalid.
R10 When the RPD bit (bit 0 of parameter 8002) is set to 1, the units for
specifying the rapid traverse rate on the PMC axis are:
0 : 1 mm/min.
1 : 10 mm/min.
DRR During cutting feed per rotation under PMC axis control, dry run is:
0 : Not effective.
1 : Effective.
MFD : The miscellaneous function individual output of the PMC axis control
function is:
0 : Not effective.
1 : Effective.
8010
Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC
[Data type] Byte axis type

Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each
PMCcontrolled axis.
Value
Description
DI/DO group A (G142 to G153) is used.
DI/DO group B (G154 to G165) is used.
DI/DO group C (G166 to G177) is used.
DI/DO group D (G178 to G189) is used.
NOTE
If another value is specified, the axis is not PMCcontrolled.
8022
Maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMCcontrolled axis

[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Valid data range
Increment system
Unit of data
IS-A, IS-B
IS-C
Millimeter machine
1 mm/min
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
Inch machine
0.1 inch/min
6 to 6000
6 to 4800
Rotaion axis
1 deg/min
6 to 15000
6 to 12000
Specify the maximum feedrate for feed per rotation along a PMCcontrolled axis
1246
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
The maximum feedrate set to first axis is valid to all axes.
The data of after second axis are invalid.
8028
Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for jog feed specified

by the speed command for each PMCcontrolled axis

[Unit of data] msec/1000 rpm
Specify, for each PMCcontrolled axis, the time needed to increase or
decrease the speed of the servo motor by 1000 rpm, that is, the time
constant of linear acceleration/deceleration for jog feed according to the
speed specified for that axis.
NOTE
If 0 is specified, the system does not control the
Alarm and message
A servo alarm or overtravel alarm for a PMCcontrolled axis is detected

in the same way as an alarm for a CNCcontrolled axis.
If an alarm occurs, the alarm is handled by applying the normal procedure,
alarm signal EIALg being set to 1 to inform the PMC of the alarm.
(If an overtravel alarm occurs, either negative overtravel signal EOTNg
or positive overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to 1.)
If the PMC issues a command for a CNCcontrolled axis, a P/S alarm No.
130 occurs.
Commands issued by the PMC are effective if the axis is in feed hold or
single block stop mode. The command results in the issue of an alarm if
cutting feed is executed with an override of 0%, or if the interlock is
enabled.
If the CNC issues a command for a PMCcontrolled axis, a P/S alarm No.
130 occurs.
If the PMC issues a movement command for an axis in the plane of polar
coordinate interpolation in polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1),
a P/S alarm No. 130 occurs.
1247
B63003EN1/02
Number
Number

(1) P/S Alarm
Message
Description
130
ILLEGAL AXIS
OPERATION
An axis control command was given by

PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or
an axis control command was given by
CNC to an axis controlled by PMC.
Modify the program.
139
CAN NOT CHANGE PMC A PMC controlled axis was again seCONTROL AXIS
lected. Or, the CNC issued a control
command for an axis that has been set
as a PMCcontrolled axis for which no
command has been specified. Or, an
axis under control of CNC was selected
by PMC.
(2) Servo alarm
Message
Description
417
SERVO ALARM:
n AXIS EXCESS ERR
An invalid parameter is specified for

torque control. The torque constant parameter is set to 0.
422
SERVO ALARM:
n AXIS EXCESS ERR
The maximum speed permitted under

torque control has been exceeded.
423
SERVO ALARM:
n AXIS EXCESS ERR
The maximum permissible value of integrated travel distance set in the parameter under torque control has been
exceeded.
Warning
WARNING
1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses
have no effect.
2 Feed hold, single block stop, reset, or interlock of one or all
axes, performed by the CNC, does not affect a
PMCcontrolled axis. Similar control is possible by using
the equivalent signals issued from the PMC.
3 The mirror image functions (setting, parameter, input signal)
are disabled.
1248
B63003EN1/02
Caution
CAUTION
1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lock
can be disabled if the MLE bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8001)
is specified accordingly. However, machine lock for an
individual axis is always enabled.
2 In consecutive cutting feed blocks, a new block starts its
operation without waiting for the following zero of the servo
acceleration/deceleration. In other than the above blocks,
a new block starts its operation after the following zero of the
servo acceleration/deceleration is confirmed.
3 Commands for a linear axis that is controlled solely by the
PMC (not used as an axis controlled by the CNC) are not
affected by inch/metric input if the PIM bit (bit 0 of parameter
No. 8003) is specified accordingly. The current position
display, also, is not affected by inch/metric input.
4 For a PMCcontrolled axis, manual absolute mode is
always set. If the PMC starts control of an axis after manual
intervention (manual continuous feed, manual handle feed,
etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual
absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to 1), manual
absolute mode is set.
5 Under PMC axis control, all commands are handled as axis
commands. Even for the miscellaneous function, the
position check is effective.
6 When the CNC specifies the command of workpiece
coordinate system setting (G54 to G59) during an axial
movement by the PMC, a correct coordinate system cannot
be set.
Note
NOTE
1 The actual speed excluding the effect of the movement
along a PMCcontrolled axis can be displayed if the PCF bit
(bit 1 of parameter No. 3105) is specified.
2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference
position is retained in memory, even after the power is
turned off.
3 If the index table indexing function of the M series is added,
the PMC cannot control the fourth axis.
4 The individual output of the miscellaneous function is
provided by adding a signal for individual output. The timing
diagram of controlling and specifying the miscellaneous
function is not changed. The normal specifications of the
miscellaneous functions for PMC axis control function are
applied.
1249
B63003EN1/02
15.2
EXTERNAL DATA
INPUT
General
The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.
Signal name
Signal code
Data signal for external data input (input)
ED0 to ED15
Address signal for external data input (input)
EA0 to EA6
Read signal for external data input (input)
ESTB
Read completion signal for external data input

(output)
EREND
Search completion signal for external data input

(output)
ESEND
The basic external data input procedure is described below:

(1) The PMC sets address signals EA0 to EA6 that indicate the data type
and data signals ED0 to ED15.
(2) The PMC sets read signal ESTB to 1.
(3) When the ESTB signal is set to 1, the control unit reads the address.
(4)After reading the address, the control unit sets read completion signal
EREND to 1.
(5) When the EREND signal is set to 1, the PMC sets the ESTB signal
to 0.
(6) When the ESTB signal is set to 0, the control unit sets the EREND
signal to 0.
This completes the data input procedure. New data can now be entered.
ED0 to 15
EA0 to 6
32 ms or more
ESTB
EREND
0 ms or
more
Only for external program number search

ESEND
1250
End of
search
B63003EN1/02
Kind of data accessed by external data input
No
No.
Item
E
SEEE
TAAA
B65 4
EEEE
AAAA
321 0
External program
rogram number
search
1 0 0 0
External tool com

compensaensa
tion
1 0 0 1
External workpiece coordinate

system shift
1 0 1 0
axis code
External machine coordinate system shift
1 0 1 1
axis code
Alarm set
1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
Alarm clear
1 1 0 0
0 0 0 1
Oper to tor message list
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
Operator message clear
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
Message
1 1 0 0
01 1
Substitute No. of parts

arts
required
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0
ED15 to ED0
15141312
1110 9 8
7 6 5 4
3 2 1 0
Program number(BCD4 digits)
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
Offset value(BCD 4 digits with sign)
0 to 7
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
Shift value(BCD 4 digits with sign)
0 to 7
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
Machine coordinate system shift value(binary)

0 to 9999
Alarm No.(binary)
0 to 999
Alarm No.(binary)
0 to 999
Message No.(binary)
0 to 999
Message No.(binary)
0 to 999
character(Character code)
No. of parts required(BDC4 digits)
0 to 9
Substitute No. of parts

arts
machined
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
No. of parts machined(BDC4 digits)
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
WARNING
Though bits EA4 to EA6 distinguish one set of data from
another, the PMC must be interlocked in order to prevent
other function data being fed during a process for which
they are invalid.
EA3 to EA0
Axis
1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
4th axis
5th axis
6th axis
7th axis
8th axis
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
NOTE
Input an axis code according to the list below.
1251
1) External Program
Number Search
B63003EN1/02
A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from the outside and is selected

in the CNC memory.
For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can
automatically select for execution the program corresponding to a
specific workpiece.
Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the
mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state in MEM
mode.
The ESEND signal switches from 0 to 1 at the end of the external
program number search. This signal does not turn to 0 unless the cycle
start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use ESEND to
make a cycle start signal after the search.
NOTE
1 The external program number search is valid when
parameter ESR no. 6300#4=1.
2 The reset state is when the automatic operation lamp is off.
If the start button is pushed in the cycle operation stop or
hold state, search execution starts from the actual position
indicated by the pointer.
3 When there is not a program stored in memory
corresponding to the set program number, P/S alarm no. 59
will be activated.
4 Program search is not made if the program number is set to
0. When the start button is pushed, execution starts from
the position indicated by the pointer, instead.
2) External tool
compensation
These signals provide for changing the tool compensation amount via the
PMC. When the offset number is specified by a program, data input from
the PMC is added to the offset amount. The offset amount can also be used
as input data itself by specifying the input signal.
When the machine tool is equipped with automatic tools or workpiece
measuring functions, the offset amount can be corrected using this
function, by inputting the error from the correct value into the CNC via
PMC.
If the tool compensation amount is externally input when offset number
0 is specified in a program (a offset cancel) in T series, the workpiece
coordinate system shifts by the entered quantity. The external tool
compensation amount is 0 - +/-7.999mm or +/-0.7999 inch at a time.
1252
B63003EN1/02
Data specification method in external tool compensation (For M series)

Address
Data
E
A
6
E
A
5
E
A
4
E
A
3
E
A
2
E
A
1
E
A
0
E E E E E
D D D D D
15 14 13 12 11
ABS
/
INC
s
i
g
n
E E
D D
10 9
E
D
8
E
D
7
E
D
6
E
D
5
E
D
4
E
D
3
E
D
2
E
D
1
E
D
0
LSB
MSB
Offset amount
Specified by BCD 4-digit code

(0000 to 7999)
0 :+
1 :
sign
Specify 000
0 : Incremental specification
(Input value is added to present compensation amount)
1 : Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation amount)
Specify 001 for external tool offset
Data specification method in external tool compensation (For T series)

Address
E
A
6
E
A
5
E
A
4
E
A
3
E
A
2
ABS
/
INC
W
/
G
Data
E
A
1
E
A
0
X/Z/R
E E E E E
D D D D D
15 14 13 12 11
s
i
g
n
MSB
E E
D D
10 9
E
D
8
E
D
7
E
D
6
E
D
5
E
D
4
E
D
3
E
D
2
E
D
1
E
D
0
LSB
Offset amount
sign
0 :+
1 :
Specified by BCD 4-digit code

(0000A7999)
EA1
EA0
Description
Specification of X axis offset
Specification of Z axis offset
Specification of tool nose radius compensation amount
0 : Specification of tool wear offset amount
1 : Specification of tool geometry offset amount

0 : Incremental specification
(Input value is added to present compensation amount)
1 : Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation amount)

Specify 001 for external tool offset
1253
B63003EN1/02
3) External workpiece
coordinate system
shift
The external workpiece coordinate system shift adjusts the workpiece

coordinate system depending on the shift amount set via PMC. Each axis
(parameter No. 1220) has this shift amount, and it is added to all the
workpiece coordinate systems for use. The shift amount is not lost by cut
off of the power supply. It is not added incrementally, but each input shift
amount makes a new shift amount. The amount that can be input is
0-+/-7.999 mm or +/-0.7999 inch.
4) External machine
coordinate system
The machine coordinate system can be shifted by inputting shift value.

When the shift amount is input, compensation is immediately applied to
the corresponding axis and the machine starts operation. The position
accuracy can be improved by combining this function with the sensor.
The specification method for the axis to be shifted is the same as that for
the external workpiece coordinate system shift.
The compensation value is specified for the signals ED0 to ED15 by a
binary code ranging from 0 to "9.999. This compensation value should
be absolute and the amount which the machine actually moves on input
is the difference from the previously stored value. When a large amount
of compensation is applied at a time, an alarm such as excessive error on
stop may occur. In this case, input the compensation amount several
times.
shift
5) External alarm
message
(a) External alarm message

The external alarm message holds the CNC under an alarm
condition by sending an alarm number from the external unit, as
well as a message that is displayed on the CRT screen of the CNC.
Up to four alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a time; the
alarm number ranges from 0 to 999, and the CNC displays it with
1000 added. The message for one alarm number can be up to 32
characters long. The alarm condition is reset by external data.
(b) External operator message
The external operator message sends the operator message and
number from the external unit to the CNC, with a display on the
CRT screen of the CNC.
Only one message can be transmitted, with a potential message
length of 255 characters. The alarm number ranges from 0 to 999;
from 0 to 99, the CNC adds 2000 to the number, while from 100
to 999 the number is not displayed, only the message is displayed.
Data specification method in external message
E
A
6
E
A
5
E
A
4
E
A
3
E
A
2
E
A
1
E
A
0
Alarm set
Alarm No.
Alarm clear
Alarm No.
Operator message list
Message No.
Operator message clear
Message No.
Message
Character
(Note)
Item
1254
ED15 to ED0
(binary)
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Two characters are sent at a time (see ISO code given in
Table below).
ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . Character code in 1st character.
ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character.
If sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code
smaller than 20 and it will be ignored.
Character code table
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
SP
&
<
>
SP : Space code
1255
m
#
6) Substituting No. of
parts required and No.
of parts, machined
B63003EN1/02
Substitution is possible for the No. of parts required and the No. of parts
machined.
Data specifiecation method for No. of parts required and
No. of parts machined.
...
Address
Data
E
A
6
E
A
5
E
A
4
E
A
3
E
A
2
E
A
1
E
A
0
0/1
E
D
E
D
0
1
5
MSB LSB
Value of aprt nos.
BCD 4digit code

(0000 to 9999)
0 : No. of parts required
1 : No. of parts machined
Set to 110000.
Signals
Data signals for external
data input ED0 to ED15
<G000, G001>
[Function] The signals indicate the entered data.
The use of the 16 code signals varies with the data type.
Address signals for

external data input
EA0 to EA6 <G002>
[Function] The signals indicate the type of the entered data.
Read signal for external

data input ESTB
<G002#7>
[Function] The signal reports that the address and data are set in external data input.
When the signal is set to 1, the control unit reads the address and data
for external data input.
[Operation] The basic procedure describes the procedure for, and operation of, the
control unit when the signal turns to 1.
1256
B63003EN1/02
Read completion signal

for external data input
EREND <F060#0>
[Function] The signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered
data.
[Operation] The output condition and procedure are described in the basic
procedure.
Search completion
signal for external data
input ESEND <F060#1>
[Function] The signal reports that program number search, specified by external data
input, has been completed.
The program number search specified by external data input is completed.

An automatic operation is started.
A reset occurs.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G000
ED7
ED6
ED5
ED4
ED3
ED2
ED1
ED0
G001
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED9
ED8
G002
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F060
ESEND EREND
1257
B63003EN1/02
Parameter
#7
3202
#6
PSR
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0

PSR Search for the program number of a protected program
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
#7
#6
#5
#4
ESR
6300
#3
#2
#1
#0

ESR External program number search
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
Alarm and Message
Number
Message
Description
059
PROGRAM NUMBER
NOT FOUND
In an external program number search

or external workpiece number search,
a specified program number was not
found. Otherwise, a program specified
for searching is being edited in background processing. Check the program
number and external signal. Or discontinue the background eiting.
131
TOO MANY EXTERNAL

ALARM MESSAGES
Five or more alarms have generated in

external alarm message.
Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find
the cause.
132
ALARM NUMBER NOT

FOUND
No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear.

Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133
ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT.

ALARM MSG
Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external operator message. Check the PMC ladder
diagram.
1258
B63003EN1/02
15.3
EXTERNAL
WORKPIECE
NUMBER SEARCH
General
When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, a

program can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1
to PN16 from the machine side.
When the cycle operation is actuated in the memory operation mode under
reset status, the workpiece number (program number) specified by PN1
to PN16 is searched and executed from the beginning.
Signal
Workpiece Number
Search Signal PN1, PN2,
PN4, PN8, PN16 <G009#0
to #4>
[Function] Select the number of a workpiece to be machined in the memory mode.
Five code signals are provided. These signals are set as binary code to
designate a workpiece number as follows:
Workpiece number search signal
PN16
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
Workpiece
number
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
1259
B63003EN1/02
PN16
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
Workpiece
number
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Workpiece number 00 is used for special designation no search. Thus,

a workpiece number ranges from 01 to 31.
NOTE
These signals are also used to specify a file number for file
search during external program input. See Section 13.7,
External Program Input.
Signal address
#7
#6
#5
#4
PN16
G009
Alarm and Message
#3
PN8
#2
PN4
#1
PN2
#0
PN1
Number
Message
059
PROGRAM NUMBER
NOT FOUND
1260
Description
In an external program number search

or external workpiece number search,
a specified program number was not
found. Otherwise, a program specified
for searching is being edited in background processing. Check the program
number and external signal. Or discontinue the background eiting.
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 This function can be used only in memory operation. It
cannot be used during DNC operation and MDI operation.
2 Select the program number from O001 O031.
3 Program numbers from O001 to O031 can be used.
However, programs corresponding to all the program
numbers do not have to be stored in memory.
4 When a program corresponding to the specified program
number is not stored in memory, an alarm (No. 059) is
activated when the start button is pressed.
5 Program search is performed only when the start button is
pressed in the reset state. When the CNC is in the
automatic operation stop state (single block stop, etc.) or
pause state (feedhold stop, etc.), program search is not
performed even if the start button is pressed and execution
is started from the point specified by the present execution
pointer.
6 To restart program halfway through, press the start button
after sequence number search in MEM mode. The
workpiece number search is not performed; program
execution starts from the block which is searched by
sequence number search, because the OP signal is set by
sequence number search in MEM mode and the CNC reset
state is released.
7 When the start button is pressed with all PN1 to PN16 are
0, program search is not performed but execution is
started from the point specified by the present execution
pointer. To restart operation from the start of a program
which cannot be searched by this function, perform the
usual program number search operation (CRT/MDI panel
operation), turn all the PN1 to PN16 to 0 and press the start
button
1261
B63003EN1/02
15.4
SPINDLE OUTPUT
CONTROL BY THE
PMC
General
The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor,
connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog output
function.
The first, second, and third spindles all have their own individual
interfaces. By using a PMC ladder program, the user can control the
spindles as desired.
This section describes how to use the PMC to control spindle rotation and
provides example applications.
Switching control
This function can be used to specify the following:

Spindle motor speed (number of rotations)
Output polarity for each spindle motor (direction of rotation)
Usually, the CNC is used to control the speed and polarity of the first
spindle motor. If the multispindle control function is added, the CNC can
also control the second and third spindle motors.
This function allows the user to select whether the CNC or PMC is used
to control the speed and output polarity of the spindle motors.
Specifying the spindle

motor speed
The PMC can be used to specify the spindle motor speed upon executing
the following:
Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an
SINDx signal
Setting the spindle motor speed data, calculated by the PMC, in spindle
control signal R01Ix to R12Ix
When controlled by the PMC, the spindle motor speed is not affected by
any signal (for example, the spindle speed override signal) or parameter
setting (for example, the maximum speed clamp parameter) related to the
spindle speed command of the CNC spindle control function.
If the multispindle control function is added, however, the spindle stop
signal *SSTPx <G0027, #3, #4, #5> can be used to stop a PMC
controlled spindle.
The spindle motor speed data is obtained from the following expression.
Its value can range from 0 to 4095:
Spindle motor speed
4095
Remark) Usually, the spindle speed must be controlled. If a gear train is
used to connect the spindle to the spindle motor, first obtain the
maximum spindle speed at the maximum spindle motor speed.
Spindle motor speed data =
1262
B63003EN1/02
Spindle speed
4095
By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can be
obtained easily.
Spindle motor speed data =
Specifying the output

polarity for the spindle
motor
The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the
following are executed:
Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an
SSINx signal
Specifying the output polarity to the SGNx signal
Scode and SF signals
To control the spindle, the PMC may require to read the S value specified
by the CNC.
If the spindle serial output/spindle analog control function is added (if the
PMC can control the spindle), the Scode signals <F022 to F025> and SF
signal <F007, #2> can be output only when many conditions, determined
by the CNC spindle control, are satisfied. In some cases, the signals
cannot be used under standard conditions.
Specify the related bits of parameter No. 3705 according to the desired
application, then use the Scode and SF signals.
Twelve code signals

corresponding to the S
value (output)
Twelve code signals corresponding to S value R01O to R12O <F036, #0

to F037, #3> are output to the first spindle motor. The output data is
calculated from the results of the CNC spindle control. (See Section 9.3.)
Even while a spindle is subject to PMC control, an S command that is
issued to the CNC is converted to spindle output data and output.
The SIND signal determines whether the speed output command, issued
to the spindle motor, is obtained from the twelve code signals
corresponding to the S value, or from the R01I to R12I signals calculated
and specified by the PMC.
The use of this signal may simplify PMC ladder processing used to enable
PMC spindle control.
Sample application 1)
Controlling the first and second spindles of a lathe system

Share the gear stages between the first and second spindles.
(If the first spindle uses two gears, for example, specify parameters
Nos. 3743 and 3744, thus enabling the use of gears 3 and 4 for the
second spindle.)
Perform the necessary setting to enable control of the first and second
spindles by the PMC.
To specify a rotation command for the first spindle, enter the gears for
the first spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data of the twelve code
signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the data as the speed
output command for the first spindle in the PMC control interface for
the first spindle.
1263
B63003EN1/02
To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears
to be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the data
of the twelve code signals corresponding to the S value. Specify the
data as the speed output command for the second spindle in the PMC
control interface for the second spindle.
Sample application 2)
Using a lathes orientation function with the stop position of the serial
spindle specified externally, specifying the S value as the angle of the stop
position for spindle orientation after the spindle positioning mode has
been selected
Use those gears that are not being used for the first spindle.
(In this application, gear 4 is used to calculate the spindle position. Set
parameter No. 3744 to 360.)
Specify the M code used to set the spindle to positioning mode and
stop the spindle. Enter gear 4 in GR1 and GR2.
Then, specify a spindle positioning angle with the S command. (To
specify the position of 145 degrees, for example, specify S145;.)
Expression 145/360 4095 is calculated and the result is output to the
twelve code signals corresponding to the S value (output signal).
Enter the data in external stop position commands SHA00 to SHA11
<G078, #0 to G079, #3> and perform the orientation.
Signal
PMC spindle control signals

For the first spindle:
SIND, SSIN, SGN <G033#7, #6, #5>
R01I to R12I <G032#0 to G033#3>
For the second spindle: SIND2, SSIN2, SGN2 <G035#7, #6, #5>
R01I2 to R12I2 <G034#0 to G035#3>
For the third spindle:
SIND3, SSIN3, SGN3 <G037#7, #6, #5>
R01I3 to R12I3 <G036#0 to G037#3>
[Function] The above signals enable the control of a spindle motor by issuing
commands from the PMC. Both the speed and polarity of the spindle
motor (direction of rotation) can be controlled.
The speed command and polarity are usually specified by the CNC. The
use of these signals allows the user to select whether the speed and
polarity are controlled by the CNC or PMC.
Even if the multispindle control function is not provided, these signals
allow the second or third spindle to be controlled.
When the multispindle control function and type A are being used (if the
MSI bit, bit 2 of parameter No. 3709, is set to 0), the signals for the second
and third spindles cannot be used.
1264
B63003EN1/02
Details of the signals
Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx
The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is
controlled by the CNC or PMC.
1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands
(R01Ix to R12Ix) issued by the PMC.
0: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands
issued by the CNC. The spindle speed specified with the S
command is output.
Signals used to input the spindle motor speed command issued by the
PMC R01Ix to R12Ix
If the PMC is being used to control the spindle motor speed command,
specify, in binary format, the value obtained using the following
expression.
Value to be specified =
Spindle motor speed
4095
(Spindle motor speed)

Maximum
spindle motor
speed
0 rpm
0
Code signal
4095
Signal used to select the polarity of the spindle motor speed command,
SSINx
The above signal selects whether the output polarity of the spindle
motor speed command is controlled by the CNC or PMC.
1 : The spindle motor is controlled according to the polarity command
(SGNx) issued by the PMC.
0 : The CNC controls the polarity. The polarity is determined by the
TCW and CWM bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. 3706) and the
M03 or M04 command.
Signal used to specify the polarity of the spindle motor selected by the
PMC, SGNx
If the PMC is used to control the output polarity of the spindle motor
speed command, specify the polarity with this signal.
1 : The output polarity of the spindle is negative.
0 : The output polarity of the spindle is positive.
1265
B63003EN1/02
Twelve code signals

corresponding to the S
value R01O to R12O
<G036#0 to G037#3>
[Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed
output to the spindle motor that is required to control the connected
spindle. The converted value is sent to the PMC with twelve code signals,
in proportion to the spindle motor speed output.
The speed data, the final result of the CNC spindle control, is output to
the spindle motor after the spindle gear ratio, spindle speed override,
speed clamp, conversion of the surface speed into the spindle speed by the
constant surface speed control command, and other data have been
considered.
(See Section 9.3 for an explanation of the relationship between the CNC
spindle control and the speed output to the spindle motor.)
Code signal
4095
(Speed output to the

spindle motor)
Maximum spindle
motor speed
0
0 rpm
Parameter
#7
#6
#5
3701
#4
SS2
#3
#2
#1
[Data type] Bit

0 : 1 spindle
1 : 2 spindles
1266
#0
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
SFA
NSF
3705
#4
EVS
#3
#2
#1
#0
ESF
ESF

ESF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is
used, and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 7
NOTE
For the T series, this parameter is enabled when bit 4 (EVS)
of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1. For the M series, SF is not
output:
(1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
control mode
(2) When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705 is set to 1
NOTE
surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command
used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping
(G50S;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of
parameter No. 3705.
NSF: When an S code command is issued in constant surfacespeed control,

0 : SF is output.
1 : SF is not output.
1267
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
3709
#4
#3
#2
MSI
#1
#0

MSI In multispindle control, the SIND signal is valid:
0 : Only when the first spindle is selected. (SIND signal for 2nd and 3rd
spindle become invalid)
1 : For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected. (Each
spindle has its own SIND signal.)
3821
Offsetvoltage compensation value of the analog output of the thirdspindle speed

[Unit of data] Velo
Set the offsetvoltage compensation value of the analog output of the
thirdspindle speed.
[Setting method]
(1) Set 0 (standard value)
(2) Specify a spindle speed at which the spindle speed analog output
becomes 0.
(3) Measure output voltage.
(4) Set the following value to parameter No. 3731.
8191
offset voltage (V)
Set value =
12.5
(5) After the parameter has been set, command again a spindle speed
where the spindle speed analog output become 0 and confirm that
voltage becomes 0V.
1268
B63003EN1/02
Note
NOTE
1 If the spindle fails to move after the PMC issues the spindle
motor speed command, check the following:
Type A is selected (the MSI bit, bit 2 of parameter No. 3709,
is set to 0) when the multispindle control function is used.
The second or third spindle cannot be controlled. The
first spindle can be controlled only when the spindle
selection signal SWS1 is set to 1.
The spindle stop signal for each axis is set to 0 when the
multispindle control function is being used.
Spindle stop signal for each axis *SSTPx <G027, #3, #4,
#5> stops the spindle.
M03/M04 is not specified when the CNC is being used to
control the output polarity.
If the TCW bit, bit 7 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 1, the
M03/M04 command issued to the CNC changes the
output polarity for the spindle motor. If no M03/M04
command is specified after the CNC is turned on, the
specified speed output is not sent to the spindle motor
because the output polarity has not been determined.
2 The SF signal indicates that output of the S code to the PMC
has been completed. The signal does not indicate the end
of the command for specifying the spindle speed.
3 For an explanation of connecting the second or third
spindle, see Sections 9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/
SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT and 9.10 MULTISPINDLE
CONTROL.
4 If the multispindle control function is not being used, the
CNC does not issue any commands to the second and third
spindles. The output polarity is controlled by the SGNx
signal. It is not affected by the SSINx signal.
The speed output to the spindle motor can be controlled
only when the SINDx signal is set to 1.
1269
B63003EN1/02
15.5
EXTERNAL KEY
INPUT
General
MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface
signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when
the operator performs MDI key operation.
Control is realized by exchanging the following interface signals between
the PMC and CNC:
Signal name
Abbreviation
External key input mode selection signal (input)
ENBKY
Key code signals (input)
EKC0 to EKC7
Key code read signal (input)
EKSET
Key code read completion signal (output)
EKENB
Key input disable signal (output)
INHKY
Program screen display mode signal (output)
PRGDPL
The processing flow in the PMC is shown below.
(START)
1) Set the external key input control mode.
Set ENBKY = 1
< EKSET = EKENB >
no
2) Check whether a key code can be set.
yes
< INHKY = 0 >
no
yes
3) When a key code can be set:

(1) Set the key code to be input.
(2) Invert the (EKSET) signal to instruct the CNC to
read the key code.
Set key code
Invert EKSET
4) Repeat the operation for the key data to be input
no
< Has key input ended? >

yes
< EKSET = EKENB >

yes
< INHKY = 0 >
5) After reporting the last data, check that the CNC has
read the key data.
no
no
yes
6) Release external key input control mode.
Set ENBKY = 0
(END)
1270
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
Read processing is controlled by exclusiveORing (XOR)
the key code read signal (EKSET) with the read completion
signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signals
differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once
reading has been completed, the CNC inverts the EKENB
signal to match its logic with that of the EKSET signal.
In the PMC, on the other hand, a new key code cannot be
set while the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic.
Signals
External key input mode

selection signal
ENBKY <G066#1>
[Function] While this signal is turned on 1, external key input control is enabled.
In external key input control mode, any MDI key operations are ignored.
Key code read signal

EKSET <G066#7>
[Function] This signal instructs the CNC to read the input key code.
Key code signals

EKC0 to EKC7 <G098>
[Function] These signals set an input key code. (See the MDI key code table.)
Key input disable signal

INHKY<F053#0>
[Function] While this signal is 1, no key code is accepted in external key input
control mode.
1271
B63003EN1/02
Program screen display

mode signal PRGDPL
<F053#1>
[Function] This signal is on 1 while the CNC is displaying a program screen.
Key code read

completion signal
EKENB <F053#7>
[Function] This signal reports that the CNC has read a key code.
Signal address
#7
EKSET
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
ENBKY
#0
G066
G098
EKC7
EKC6
EKC5
EKC4
EKC3
EKC2
EKC1
EKC0
#7
EKENB
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
F053
#1
#0
PRGDPL INHKY
MDI key code table

Codes in the table are given in hexadecimal. For example, A
corresponds to 41H in hexadecimal. RESET corresponds to 90H in
hexadecimal.
(Note 1) and (Note 2) are explained below:
1272
B63003EN1/02
NOTE
1 For the small keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to
GRAPH
CUSTOM
For the standard keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to

0EEH is assigned to
.
.
GRAPH
CUSTOM
2 Handling of the soft keys

[F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key
codes for the soft keys. They are associated with the MDI
keys as shown below.
Key configuration for 7.2/8.4 LCD, or etc. : 5 keys + 2 keys
([F0] to [F4] and [FR], [FL])
[
[FL]
[F4]
[F3]
[F2]
[
[F1]
[
[F0]
]
[FR]
Key configuration for 9.5/10.4 LCD, or etc.: 10 keys + 2

keys ([F0] to [F9] and [FR], [FL])
[FL]
[F9]
[F8]
1273
[F7]
[F1]
[F0]
[FR]
B63003EN1/02
MDI Key Code Table(00H7FH)

0
Space
&
;
(EOB)
1274
B63003EN1/02
MDI Key Code Table(80H0FFH)

8
[F0]
(Note2)
RESET
[F1]
(Note2)
[F2]
(Note2)
[F3]
(Note2)
INSERT
[F4]
(Note2)
DELETE
[F5]
(Note2)
CAN
[F6]
(Note2)
ALTER
[F7]
(Note2)
Cursor
INPUT
Cursor
Cursor
Cursor
POS
PROG [F9]
(Note2)
HELP
OFFSET
SETTING
SYSTEM
MESSAEG
GRAPH
(CUSTOM)
(Note1)
[F8]
(Note2)
PAGE
PAGE
1275
CUSTOM [FR]
(Note1) (Note2)
FAPT
[FL]
(Note2)
B63003EN1/02
15.6
DIRECT OPERATION
BY PMC/MMC
General
Activating memory operation in memory operation mode (MEM) with

the direct operation select signal set to 1 enables machining (direct
operation) while reading a program stored in the PMCSC or MMC.
Signal
Direct operation select

signal DMMC <G042#7>
[Function] Selects the mode (direct operation mode) for performing machining while
reading a program stored in the PMCSC and MMC.
When memory operation mode (MEM) is not selected, the control unit
ignores this signal.
When memory operation mode (MEM) is selected, the control unit
selects direct operation mode and enables direct operation.
Reference Item
FANUC PMCMODEL SC/SC3/NB PROGRAMMING
MANUAL (C LANGUAGE) (B61863E1)
1276
B63003EN1/02
16
INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO
The following diagram shows the relationships between interface signals

used among the CNC, PMC, and MACRO when a machining guidance
function is implemented using the CNC macro executor.
CNC
MACRO
PMC
Part of the R area in the PMC is used as addresses for signals related to
MACRO.
1277
B63003EN1/02
16.1
SIGNALS USED BY
MACHINING
GUIDANCE
FUNCTION
(20iFA/TA)
PMC MACRO
Coordinate origin
Datum plane setup signals

Firstaxis datum plane setup signal
ORG1: Specifies a datum plane with the origin (0) set at the
current value of the first axis.
Secondaxis datum plane setup signal
current value of the second axis.
Thirdaxis datum plane setup signal
current value of the third axis (for the F series only).
The first, second, and third axes correspond to the X, Y, and Zaxes
(20iF) or the X and Zaxes (20iT), respectively. The above signals
are active when they are 1.
Using a datum plane setup signal requires that bit 5 of parameter No. 1201
(AWK) be set to 1 (for the F series only).
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
R950
#2
ORG3
#1
ORG2
#0
ORG1
Data setup
Data setup signal

Data setup signal
DEST: When this signal is 1, it reads data about the current
position of the axis specified on the data entry screen and
sets it as an entry item.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DEST
#1
GMN1
#0
GMN0
R951
Signals related to automatic operation
Machining guidance menu select signals
#7
#6
#5
R952
1278
#4
GMN4
#3
GMN3
#2
GMN2
B63003EN1/02
Machining guidance menu select

signal
Machining guidance menu to be

selected
GMN4 GMN3 GMN2 GMN1 GMN0
Not selected (machining guidance

menubased machining is not performed)
Linear machining
Circular machining Circular machining
Corner machining
Corner machining
Pocketing
Roughing
Pattern positioning Threading
Facing
Grooving
Side cutting
Hole making
Limit machining
Roughing
Hole making
Linear machining
Constant surface speed function (T series only)

Spindle stop
S05: When this signal is 1, it outputs a spindle

stop command (M05).
Spindle reverse rotation S04: When this signal is 1, it outputs a spindle
reverse rotation command (M04).
Spindle normal rotation S03: When this signal is 1, it outputs a spindle
normal rotation command (M03).
NOTE
For the 20iFA, setting bit 6 of parameter No. 9323 (SFN)
to 1 enables an S command (spindle rotation speed) to be
output together with the spindle normal/reverse rotation
command.
A value set in machining guidancecommon parameter No.
6 is used as the spindle speed.
1279
B63003EN1/02
Feedperminute specification
FMIN: When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in the
feedperminute mode.
Feedperrevolution specification
FREV: When this signal is 1, it puts the machine tool in the
feedperrevolution mode.
Constant surface speed function disable
CSF:
When this signal is 1, it disables the constant surface
speed function.
Constant surface speed function enable
CSN:
When this signal is 1, it enables the constant surface
speed function.
#7
S05
R956
#6
S04
#5
S03
#4
#3
FMIN
#2
FREV
#1
CSF
#0
CSN
Timing of constant surface speed, spindle start, stop signals
The following descriptions use the timing chart shown below as an

example.
(1) When the constant surface speed function enable button is pressed, the
PMC sets the CSN signal (bit 0 of R956) to 1 to request MACRO to
put the machine tool in the constant surface speed mode.
(2) When the CSN becomes 1, MACRO sets the SSCE signal (bit 1 of
R957) to 1 to put the machine tool in the constant surface speed mode.
(3) When the SSCE signal becomes 1, the PMC resets the CSN to 0.
(4) When the CSN becomes 0, MACRO resets the SSCE to 0 to terminate
the sequence. This timing chart applies also to the constant surface
speed function disable (CSF) signal, spindle normal rotation (S03),
spindle reverse rotation (S04), and spindle stop (S05) commands (bits
1, 5, 6, and 7 of R956).
Signals for enabling or disabling the constant surface speed function and rotating, reversing,
or stopping the spindle (pushbuttons on the machine operators panel)
(1)
R956 bit0, 1, 5, 6, 7 (CSN, CSF, S03, S04, S05)
(2)
R957 bit1(SSCE)

(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1280
B63003EN1/02
Timing of signals for specifying feed per minute and feed per revolution
example.
Feedperminute/revolution
button
FMIN/FREV
(feed per minute/revolution)
(PMC MACRO)
SSCE (feed per minute/
revolution completion)
(MACRO PMC)
GST (guidance start)
(MACRO PMC)
Mode
(PMC NC)
ST (start signal)
(PMC NC)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
G98/G99;
executed
(5)
(4)
M02 (machining end)

(NC PMC)
(4)
ERS (external reset)

(PMC NC)
RST (reset in progress)
(NC PMC)
(1) When the feedperminute/revolution button is pressed, the PMC

sets the FMIN/FREV signal to 1 to request MACRO to make
preparation for feedperminute/revolution mode switching.
(2) When the FMIN/FREV signal becomes 1, MACRO sets the SSCE and
GST signals to 1. When the SSCE signal becomes 1, the PMC resets
the FMIN/FREV signal to 0. When the FMIN/FREV signal becomes
0, MACRO resets the SSCE signal to 0 to deselect the
feedperminute/revolution feed mode.
(3) When the GST signal becomes 1, the PMC enters the MEM mode and
turns on the start signal ST, thus causing the
feedperminute/revolution command (G98/G99;) to be executed.
(4) When the feedperminute/revolution command ends, the NC
outputs M02, causing the PMC to reset the external reset signal ERS
to 0 for causing a reset.
(5) When a reset occurs, the PMC returns from the MEM mode to the
previous mode, and MACRO resets the GST signal to 0.
1281
B63003EN1/02
Teaching/playback function
Teaching (cutting)
TCH: When this signal is 1, it registers a
cutting operation that is supposed to end
at the current position in memory.
Teaching (rapid traverse) RCH: When this signal is 1, it registers a rapid
traverse operation that is supposed to
end at the current position in memory.
Playback
PLB: This signal causes a taught machining
operation to be repeated.
#7
R958
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
PLB
#1
RTC
#0
TCH
Timing of signals for teaching

example.
(1) When the teaching button is pressed, the PMC sets the TCH or RTC
(bit 0 or 1 of R956) to 1 to request MACRO to perform teaching. At
the same time, it turns on the axis interlock signal *IT to disable axis
shift during teaching by MACRO.
(2) When the TCH/RTC becomes 1, MACRO fetches teaching data and
stores it in memory, then sets the TCE (bit 0 of R957) to 1.
(3) When the TCE becomes 1, the PMC resets the TCH/RTC to 0 to
release axis interlock.
(4) When the TCH/RTC becomes 0, MACRO resets the TCE to 0 to
terminate this sequence. This timing chart applies also to M codes
M03, M04, M05, M06, M08, and M09 (bits 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 of
R959).
Teaching cutting/rapid traverse/M03/M04/M05/M06/M08/M09

(machine operators panel pushbutton) signals
(1)
R959 bit2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7(M03, M04, M05, M06, M08, M09)
R958 bit0, 1(TCH, RTC)
(1)
*IT
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(3)
R957 bit0(TCE)
1282
(4)
B63003EN1/02
Playback signal timing

example.
(1) When the playback button is pressed, the PMC sets the PLB signal to
1 to request MACRO to make preparation for playback execution.
(2) When the PLB signal becomes 1, MACRO sets the GST signal to 1
after finishing preparation for playback.
(3) When the GST signal becomes 1, the PMC enters the MEM mode and
turns on the start signal ST, thus starting playback machining.
(4) When machining ends, the NC outputs M02, so the PMC sets the
external reset signal ERS to 1 for causing a reset.
(5) When a reset occurs, the PMC resets the PLB signal to 0, and MACRO
resets the GST signal to 0, thus terminating playback.
(1)
Playback button
PLB (playback)
(PMC MACRO)
(2)
GST (guidance start)

(MACRO PMC)
(3)
Mode
(PMC NC)
ST (start signal)
(PMC NC)
(3)
MEM mode
Playback machining
(5)
(4)
M02 (machining end)

(NC PMC)
(4)
ERS (external reset)

(PMC NC)
RST (reset in progress)
(NC PMC)
M code teaching
M code teaching M03 to M06, M08, and M09:

When these signals are 1, they save M codes in memory.
R959
#7
M09
#6
M08
#5
M06
1283
#4
M05
#3
M04
#2
M03
#1
#0
MACRO CNC
B63003EN1/02
Machining data setup signals
These signals are used for manual handle/jog feed (linear/circular feed).
Address
Size
R961 1 byte
Linear feed
0:
1:
2:
3:
Circular feed
Neither linear nor circular feed is performed.

Linear feed
Circular feed (clockwise)
Circular feed (counterclockwise)
R962 to R965 4 bytes Xaxis approach direction
Xaxis coordinate for

circle center position (X0)
R966 to R969 4 bytes Y axis approach direction Y axis coordinate for

circle center position (Y0)
R970 to R973 4 bytes Distance from the origin
to the line (P)
R974 1 byte
Circle radius (R)
Travel direction when the

guidance handle is rotated forward
0: +90 degrees with
the approach
direction
0: Machining inside
the circle
1: Machining outside
the circle
1: 90 degrees with
the approach
direction
R975 1 byte
#7
#0
Reset these bits to 0.
Specify a forbidden area if the limit function

is enabled.
0: The forbidden area is in the same direction as the approach direction.
1: The forbidden area is in the direction opposite to the approach direction.
Specify whether to enable the limit function.

0: Disable
1: Enable
R979 1 byte
D
D
Setup change notification
If neither linear nor circular feed is to be performed, reset R961 to 0.

R962 to R974 may be set to any value, however.
The setup change notification signal (R979) indicates to the NC that
data for linear or circular feed has been changed.
The procedure for this follows:
1 Set data at R961 to R 974.
2 After setting the data, reset R979 to 0.
3 The NC starts reading the data.
4 When the NC finishes reading, it sets R979 to 1.
1284
B63003EN1/02
Data at R961 to R974
Reset to 0 by the
macro when setting
ends.
R979
Set to 1 by the NC when it finishes reading.
Address
Size
Linear feed
Circular feed
R980 to R963 4 bytes Distance from the current Distance from the current
position to the specified
position to the specified
line
circle
CAUTION
Be careful not change the data.
MACRO PMC
Machining guidance mode signals
Machining guidance mode signals GMD4 to GMD0:

Each of these signals indicates the current guidance mode. The
relationships between each of these signals and the selected mode are
the same as for the machining guidance menu select signal (R952)
explained above.
#7
#6
#5
R954
#4
GMD4
#3
GMD3
#2
GMD2
#1
GMD1
#0
GMD0
#1
GSP
#0
GST
Machining guidance start signal GST

Machining guidance stop signal GSP
#7
#6
#5
R955
#4
#3
#2
Pressing the [Input End] key (on the standard MDI, INSERT) sets the
GST to 1. Transfer this signal as the ST for the CNC using the PMC ladder
program. The specified machining guidance operation begins.
Pressing the [Input Restart] key (on the standard MDI, ALTER) sets the
GSP to 1. Transfer this signal as the RST for the CNC using the PMC
ladder program. The current machining guidance operation ends.
1285
B63003EN1/02
Timing of signals for machining guidancebased automatic operation

example.
GMN0 to GMN4
(machining guidance menu select signal)
(PMC MACRO)
GMD0 toGMD4
(machining guidance mode signal)
(MACRO PMC)
Start
GST (machining guidance start signal
(MACRO PMC)
MD1, MD2, and MD4
(mode select signals)
(PMC CNC)
(1)
(6)
Manual operation
Automatic operation mode
(2)
MMEM (mode selection configuration signal)

(CNC PMC)
ST (automatic operation start signal)
(PMC CNC)
(3)
(4)
STL (automatic operation starting signal)

(CNC PMC)
DM30 and DM02 (M decode signals)
(CNC PMC)
GSP (machining guidance stop signal)
(MACRO PMC)
Automatic
operation
(executable
macro)
End
Manual
operation
(7)
(5)
(5)
ERS (external reset signal)

(PMC CNC)
RST (resetinprogress signal)
(CNC PMC)
(1) When the input end key is pressed after machining data is input,
MACRO sets the GST signal to 1. When the GST becomes 1, the
PMC sets the mode select signal to automatic operation mode.
(2) On confirming that the automatic operation mode is selected, the CNC
sets the MMEM signal to 1.
(3) When the MMEM signal becomes 1, the PMC turns on the automatic
operation start signal to request to start automatic operation.
(4) When the ST signal becomes 1, the CNC begins automatic operation,
starting operation based on the machining guidance execution macro.
(5) When the execution macrobased operation ends, M02 is output.
MACRO outputs the machining guidance stop signal GSP.
When the CNC outputs M02, the PMC sets the external reset signal
ERS to 1 to reset the CNC.
When the CNC is reset, MACRO clears the GST and GSP signals to
0.
(6) When the GST signal becomes 0, the PMC returns the mode select
signal to the state previous to 2 (manual).
1286
B63003EN1/02
(7) When the GST becomes 0, and the mode select signal returns to the
previous state, the CNC resets the mode selection configuration signal
MMEM to 0 to terminate machining guidancebased automatic
operation.
Timing of signals for machining guidancebased manual operation

example.
GMN0 to GMN4
(machining guidance menu select signal)
(PMC MACRO)
(Linear or circular machining)
GMD0 to GMD4
(machining guidance mode signal)
(MACRO PMC)
GSP (machining guidance stop signal)
(MACRO PMC)
0
GST (machining guidance start signal)
(MACRO PMC)
0
MD1, MD2, and MD4 (mode select signals)
(PMC CNC)
Manual operation mode

(1)
MJ and MH
(mode selection confirmation signal)
(CNC PMC)
(2)
Start
Stop
Start
Stop
R961 to R983
(machining data setup signals)
(MACRO PMC)
Manipulation
Manipulation
ST (automatic operation start signal)
STL (automatic operation starting signal)
DM30 and DM02 (M decode signals)
ERS (external reset signal)
RST (resetinprogress signal)
Manipulation
These signal are not used.
When a line or circle is selected from the machining guidance menu, the
PMC sets the machining guidance menu select signal (one of GMN0 to
GMN4). According to this signal, MACRO sets a machining guidance
mode signal (one of GMD0 to GMD4) to inform the PMC that the
selected mode has been entered.
(1) When a manual mode is selected, the PMC sets the mode select signal
to manual mode (JOG or HANDL mode).
(Always select the manual mode for machining guidancebased
manual operation.)
When the mode select signal changes to the manual mode, the CNC
sets the mode selection confirmation signal MJ or MH.
(2) When the input end key is pressed after the machining data is entered,
MACRO sets data at R961 to R983.
(3) Rotating the handle causes the specified linear or circular machining
to be performed according to the specified machining data.
1287
B63003EN1/02
Constant surface speed function

Constant surface speed function accepted signal
SSCE: When this signal is 1, it indicates that MACRO has
accepted a request for constant surface speed control.
Teaching function
Teaching accepted signal
TCE:
When this signal is 1, it indicates that MACRO has
accepted a request for teaching.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#2
#3
#1
SSCE
R957
CNC MACRO
#0
TCE
Circular machining approach direction signal
#7
R984
#6
#5
#4
#2
#3
#1
SIN
#0
COS
Each of these signals represents the sign of a unit vector in an approach

direction when the handle is rotated clockwise during circular machining.
(0: Positive 1: Negative)
For example:
If the CNC is the FA
Yaxis
()
Approach direction when the

handle is rotated clockwise
SIN
SIN=0
COS=1
COS
SIN=0
COS=0
Xaxis
()
(+)
SIN=1
COS=1
SIN=1
COS=0
()
1288
B63003EN1/02
Xaxis
If the CNC is the TA
()
Approach direction when the

handle is rotated clockwise
SIN
SIN=1
COS=1
COS
SIN=1
COS=0
Zaxis
()
(+)
SIN=0
COS=1
SIN=0
COS=0
(+)
Cutting axis
Circular cutting clockwise/counterclockwise rotation:

CW/CCW: This signal indicates the direction of circular cutting.
1: Counterclockwise
0: Clockwise
Guidance axis shift (cutting)
GUID: When this signal is 1, it indicates that guidance
handlebased cutting caused an axis shift.
Guidance axis shift (approach)
APRC: When this signal is 1, it indicates that guidance
handlebased approaching caused an axis shift.
Firstaxis shift
1AXIS: When this signal is 1, it indicates that the first axis has
shifted.
Secondaxis shift
2AXIS: When this signal is 1, it indicates that the second axis has
shifted.
Thirdaxis shift
3AXIS: When this signal is 1, it indicates that the third axis has
shifted.
The first, second, and third axes correspond to the X, Y, and Zaxes
(20iF) and the X and Zaxes (20iT), respectively.
#7
R985
CW/CCW
#6
GUID
#5
APRC
1289
#4
#3
#2
3AXIS
#1
2AXIS
#0
1AXIS
16.2
B63003EN1/02
Limit data setup signals
SIGNALS USED FOR

POLYGON LIMIT
MACHINING (20iFA)
MACRO PMC
Address
R961
Set data
4: Specifies a line.
R962 to R965 Line tilt (COS

R966 to R969 Line tilt (SIN
230)
230)
5: Specifies a limit condition.
Inner datum point coordinate first

axis
Inner datum point coordinate second axis
R970 to R973 Distance from the origin

to the line
R974
#7
Line number (0 to 5)
R970
Number of lines (1 to 6)
R971
Outside/inside the limit area

0: Outside forbidden
1: Inside forbidden
R976
Plane selection
Lower 4 bits: Plane first axis
Upper 4 bits: Plane second axis
1: Xaxis
2: Yaxis
3: Zaxis
R978
MACRO PMC
#6
Setup change notification Setup change notification
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
R940
#0
MLMRQ
Polygon limit mode request signal

MLRQ: MACRO requests the PMC to switch to the polygon limit
mode.
PMC CNC
#7
#6
#5
G0089
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MALMT
Polygon limit enable/disable signal

MALMT: When this signal 1, it enables the polygon limit.
1290
B63003EN1/02
Timing of signals for polygon limit machining

example.
Input end key (INSERT)
MACRO
Limit data write
(R961 to R976)
Setup change notification

(R978)
CNC
Limit data read
(R961 to R976)
Polygon limit request signal

(MLMRQ)
(1), (2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(7)
Polygon limit enable signal

(MALMT)
(9)
(8)
Reset or input restart key

(ALTER)
(1) When the input end key (INSERT) key is pressed after limit figure data
is entered on the data input screen, MACRO calculates data for the
sides of the polygon and limit conditions.
(2) After entering the figure data for the first line (line tilt, distance from
the origin, and line number) at each address, MACRO resets the setup
change notification signal (R978) to 0, and informs the CNC that data
for the first line has been entered.
(3) On detecting that R978 is 0, the CNC reads data from R961 to R976,
then sets R978 to 1 to inform MACRO that data reading is completed.
(4) In response to the above notification, MACRO repeats steps 2 and 3
for all sides (lines) of the polygon.
(5) After sending data about all sides of the polygon to the CNC, MACRO
sets a limit condition definition (5) at R961, and enters limit condition
data to R962 to R976. After this, MACRO resets the setup notification
signal (R978) to 0.
(6) When the CNC detects that R978 is 0, it reads data from R961 to R976.
When reading ends, the CNC sets R978 to 1 to inform MACRO of it.
1291
B63003EN1/02
(7) MACRO sets the polygon limit mode request signal (MLMRQ) to 1.
On detecting that the signal is 1, the PMC sets the polygon limit enable
signal (MALNT) to 1. After this, the CNC enables the polygon limit
function according to the limit figure data it received so far.
(8) To disable the polygon limit function, press the reset key on the
MDI/LCD unit or press the input restart key (ALTER). On detecting
that either key has been pressed, MACRO resets the setup change
notification signal (R978) and the polygon limit mode request signal
(MLMRQ) to 0.
(9) On detecting that the MILRQ signal is 0, the PMC resets the polygon
limit enable signal (MALMT) to 0, thus disabling the polygon limit
function.
1292
APPENDIX
B63003EN1/02
INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
1295
B63003EN1/02
A.1
LIST OF ADDRESSES
A.1.1
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i
List of Addresses
(Onepath Control)
Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows:
CNC
G000
PMC
X000
MT
Y000
F000
Following shows table of addresses:

[Example 1]
Signals EXLM and ST are common signals, STLK is for T series only
and RLSOT and RVS are for M series only.
G007
#7
RLSOT
1296
#6
SA
#2
ST
#1
STLK
#0
RVS
T series
M series
B63003EN1/02
MT PMC
Address
Bit number
#3
#7
#6
#5
#4
SKIP
ESKIP
SKIP6
ESKIP
SKIP6
MIT2
SKIP5
+MIT2
SKIP4
MIT1
SKIP3
SKIP5
SKIP4
SKIP3
#2
#1
#0
+MIT1
SKIP2
ZAE
SKIP2
ZAE
SKIP8
YAE
SKIP8
XAE
SKIP7
XAE
SKIP7
*DEC3
*DEC2
*DEC1
X000
X001
X002
X003
X004
SKIP
X005
X006
X007
*ESP
X008
X009
*DEC8
*DEC7
*DEC6
X010
X011
X012
1297
*DEC5
*DEC4
(T series)
(M series)
B63003EN1/02
PMC CNC
Bit number
Address
G000
#7
ED7
#6
ED6
#5
ED5
#4
ED4
#3
ED3
#2
ED2
#1
ED1
#0
ED0
G001
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED9
ED8
G002
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
MFIN3
MFIN2
FIN
AFL
BFIN
TFIN
SFIN
EFIN
MFIN
SKIPP
OVC
*ABSM
ST
G003
G004
G005
BFIN
G006
G007
RLSOT
EXLM
*FLWU
RLSOT3
G008
ERS
RRW
*SP
*ESP
G009
SRN
STLK
RVS
*IT
PN16
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
G010
*JV7
*JV6
*JV5
*JV4
*JV3
*JV2
*JV1
*JV0
G011
*JV15
*JV14
*JV13
*JV12
*JV11
*JV10
*JV9
*JV8
G012
*FV7
*FV6
*FV5
*FV4
*FV3
*FV2
*FV1
*FV0
G013
*AFV7
*AFV6
*AFV5
*AFV4
*AFV3
*AFV2
*AFV1
*AFV0
ROV2
ROV1
G014
G015
G016
F1D
MSDFON
G017
G018
HS2D
G019
RT
HS2C
HS2B
HS2A
HS1D
HS1C
HS1B
HS1A
MP2
MP1
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
G020
G021
G022
G023
ALNGH
RGHTH
G024
1298
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
*SSTP3
*SSTP2
*SSTP1
SWS3
SWS2
SWS1
SPSTP
*SCPF
*SUCPF
GR2
GR1
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
GR31
SOV6
SOV5
SOV4
SOV3
SOV2
SOV1
SOV0
R05I
R04I
R03I
R02I
R01I
R12I
R11I
R10I
R09I
R04I2
R03I2
R02I2
R01I2
R12I2
R11I2
R10I2
R09I2
R04I3
R03I3
R02I3
R01I3
R12I3
R11I3
R10I3
R09I3
SPPHS
SPSYC
OFN3
OFN2
G025
G026
G027
CON
G028
PC2SLC
G029
G030
G031
SOV7
GR21
PKESS2 PKESS1
G032
R08I
R07I
R06I
G033
SIND
SSIN
SGN
G034
R08I2
R07I2
R06I2
G035
SIND2
SSIN2
SGN2
G036
R08I3
R07I3
R06I3
G037
SIND3
SSIN3
SGN3
G038
*BECLP *BEUCP
G039
GOQSM WOQSM
G040
WOSET
PRC
G041
HS2ID
HS2IC
G042
DMMC
G043
ZRN
OFN5
R05I2
R05I3
OFN4
*PLSST
OFN1
OFN0
OFN6
HS2IB
HS2IA
HS1ID
HS1IC
HS1IB
HS1IA
HS3ID
HS3IC
HS3IB
HS3IA
MD4
MD2
MD1
MLK
BDT1
BDT3
BDT2
DNCI
G044
G045
BDT9
BDT8
BDT7
BDT6
BDT5
G046
DRN
KEY4
KEY3
KEY2
KEY1
G047
TL128
TL64
TL32
TL16
TL08
G048
TLRST
TLRSTI
TLSKP
G049
*TLV7
*TLV6
*TLV5
1299
BDT4
SBK
TL04
TL02
TL01
TL256
*TLV4
*TLV3
*TLV2
*TLV1
*TLV0
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
*TLV9
#0
*TLV8
G051
*CHLD
CHPST
*CHP8
*CHP4
*CHP2
*CHP0
G052
RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0
G050
G053
CDZ
SMZ
UINT
TMRON
G054
UI007
UI006
UI005
UI004
UI003
UI002
UI001
UI000
G055
UI015
UI014
UI013
UI012
UI011
UI010
UI009
UI008
STWD
STRD
EXWT
EXSTP
EXRD
MINP
TRRTN
TRESC
G056
G057
G058
G059
G060
*TSB
G061
RGTSP2 RGTSP1
G062
PDT2
G063
NOZAGC
G064
RGTAP
PDT1
*CRTOF
ESRSYC
SLCSEQ RTNCY
G065
G066
EKSET
RTRCT
ENBKY IGNVRY
G067
G068
G069
G070
MRDYA
ORCMA
SFRA
SRVA
CTH1A
CTH2A
TLMHA
TLMLA
G071
RCHA
RSLA
INTGA
SOCNA
MCFNA
SPSLA
*ESPA
ARSTA
INCMDA
OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA
ROTAA
INDXA
MPOFA
SLVA
MORCMA
CTH2B
TLMHB
TLMLB
G072
RCHHGA MFNHGA
G073
G074
MRDYB ORCMB
SFRB
1300
SRVB
CTH1B
B63003EN1/02
G075
G076
#7
RCHB
#6
RSLB
RCHHGB MFNHGB
#5
INTGB
#4
SOCNB
#3
MCFNB
#2
SPSLB
#1
*ESPB
#0
ARSTB
INCMDB
OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB
ROTAB
INDXB
MPOFB
SLVB
MORCMB
SHA03
SHA02
SHA01
SHA00
SHA11
SHA10
SHA09
SHA08
SHB03
SHB02
SHB01
SHB00
SHB11
SHB10
SHB09
SHB08
G077
G078
SHA07
SHA06
SHA05
SHA04
G079
G080
SHB07
SHB06
SHB05
SHB04
G081
G082
Reserve for order made macro
G083
Reserve for order made macro
G084
G085
G086
Ja
+Ja
Jg
+Jg
SRLNI3
SRLNI2
SRLNI1
SRLNI0
BGIALM
BGION
IOLS
IOLACK
G087
G088
G089
G090
G091
G092
BGEN
G093
G094
G095
G096
HROV
G097
G098
EKC7
EKC6
EKC5
G099
1301
EKC4
EKC3
EKC2
EKC1
EKC0
G100
B63003EN1/02
#7
+J8
#6
+J7
#5
+J6
#4
+J5
#3
+J4
#2
+J3
#1
+J2
#0
+J1
J8
J7
J6
J5
J4
J3
J2
J1
MI8
MI7
MI6
MI5
MI4
MI3
MI2
MI1
MLK8
MLK7
MLK6
MLK5
MLK4
MLK3
MLK2
MLK1
+LM8
+LM7
+LM6
+LM5
+LM4
+LM3
+LM2
+LM1
LM8
LM7
LM6
LM5
LM4
LM3
LM2
LM1
*+L8
*+L7
*+L6
*+L5
*+L4
*+L3
*+L2
*+L1
*L8
*L7
*L6
*L5
*L4
*L3
*L2
*L1
*+ED8
*+ED7
*+ED6
*+ED5
*+ED4
*+ED3
*+ED2
*+ED1
*ED8
*ED7
*ED6
*ED5
*ED4
*ED3
*ED2
*ED1
PK8
PKESS2
PK7
PKESS1
PK6
PK5
PK4
PK3
PK2
PK1
G101
G102
G103
G104
G105
G106
G107
G108
G109
G110
G111
G112
G113
G114
G115
G116
G117
G118
G119
G120
G121
G122
(T series)
(M series)
PKESS2 PKESS1
G123
1302
B63003EN1/02
G124
#7
DTCH8
#6
DTCH7
#5
DTCH6
#4
DTCH5
#3
DTCH4
#2
DTCH3
#1
DTCH2
#0
DTCH1
SVF8
SVF7
SVF6
SVF5
SVF4
SVF3
SVF2
SVF1
*IT8
*IT7
*IT6
*IT5
*IT4
*IT3
*IT2
*IT1
+MIT4
+MIT3
+MIT2
+MIT1
MIT4
MIT3
MIT2
MIT1
G125
G126
G127
G128
G129
G130
G131
G132
G133
G134
G135
G136
EAX8
EAX7
EAX6
EAX5
EAX4
EAX3
EAX2
EAX1
SYNC8
SYNC7
SYNC6
SYNC5
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
G137
G138
G139
G140
SYNCJ8 SYNCJ7 SYNCJ6 SYNCJ5 SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
G141
G142
EBUFA
ECLRA
ESTPA
ESOFA
G143
EMSBKA
EC6A
EC5A
EC4A
EC3A
EC2A
EC1A
EC0A
G144
EIF7A
EIF6A
EIF5A
EIF4A
EIF3A
EIF2A
EIF1A
EIF0A
G145
EIF15A
EIF14A
EIF13A
EIF12A
EIF11A
EIF10A
EIF9A
EIF8A
G146
EID7A
EID6A
EID5A
EID4A
EID3A
EID2A
EID1A
EID0A
G147
EID15A
EID14A
EID13A
EID12A
EID11A
EID10A
EID9A
EID8A
G148
EID23A
EID22A
EID21A
EID20A
EID19A
EID18A
EID17A
EID16A
1303
ESBKA EMBUFA
EFINA
B63003EN1/02
G149
#7
EID31A
#6
EID30A
#5
EID29A
#4
EID28A
#3
EID27A
#2
EID26A
G150
DRNE
RTE
OVCE
G151
*FV7E
*FV6E
*FV5E
*FV4E
*FV3E
G154
EBUFB
ECLRB
ESTPB
ESOFB
ESBKB EMBUFB
G155
EMSBKB
EC6B
EC5B
EC4B
EC3B
EC2B
EC1B
EC0B
G156
EIF7B
EIF6B
EIF5B
EIF4B
EIF3B
EIF2B
EIF1B
EIF0B
G157
EIF15B
EIF14B
EIF13B
EIF12B
EIF11B
EIF10B
EIF9B
EIF8B
G158
EID7B
EID6B
EID5B
EID4B
EID3B
EID2B
EID1B
EID0B
G159
EID15B
EID14B
EID13B
EID12B
EID11B
EID10B
EID9B
EID8B
G160
EID23B
EID22B
EID21B
EID20B
EID19B
EID18B
EID17B
EID16B
G161
EID31B
EID30B
EID29B
EID28B
EID27B
EID26B
EID25B
EID24B
G166
EBUFC
ECLRC
ESTPC
ESOFC
ESBKC EMBUFC
G167
EMSBKC
EC6C
EC5C
EC4C
EC3C
EC2C
EC1C
EC0C
G168
EIF7C
EIF6C
EIF5C
EIF4C
EIF3C
EIF2C
EIF1C
EIF0C
G169
EIF15C
EIF14C
EIF13C
EIF12C
EIF11C
EIF10C
EIF9C
EIF8C
G170
EID7C
EID6C
EID5C
EID4C
EID3C
EID2C
EID1C
EID0C
G171
EID15C
EID14C
EID13C
EID12C
EID11C
EID10C
EID9C
EID8C
G172
EID23C
EID22C
EID21C
EID20C
EID19C
EID18C
EID17C
EID16C
G173
EID31C
EID30C
EID29C
EID28C
EID27C
EID26C
EID25C
EID24C
*FV2E
#1
EID25A
#0
EID24A
ROV2E
ROV1E
*FV1E
*FV0E
G152
G153
EFINB
G162
G163
G164
G165
1304
EFINC
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G178
EBUFD
ECLRD
ESTPD
ESOFD
G179
EMSBKD
EC6D
EC5D
EC4D
EC3D
EC2D
EC1D
EC0D
G180
EIF7D
EIF6D
EIF5D
EIF4D
EIF3D
EIF2D
EIF1D
EIF0D
G181
EIF15D
EIF14D
EIF13D
EIF12D
EIF11D
EIF10D
EIF9D
EIF8D
G182
EID7D
EID6D
EID5D
EID4D
EID3D
EID2D
EID1D
EID0D
G183
EID15D
EID14D
EID13D
EID12D
EID11D
EID10D
EID9D
EID8D
G184
EID23D
EID22D
EID21D
EID20D
EID19D
EID18D
EID17D
EID16D
G185
EID31D
EID30D
EID29D
EID28D
EID27D
EID26D
EID25D
EID24D
G174
G175
G176
G177
ESBKD EMBUFD
EFIND
G186
G187
G188
G189
G190
G191
G192
IGVRY8 IGVRY7 IGVRY6 IGVRY5 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
G193
G194
G195
G196
G197
G198
NPOS8
NPOS7
NPOS6
1305
NPOS5
NPOS4
NPOS3
NPOS2
NPOS1
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SFRC
SRVC
CTH1C
CTH2C
TLMHC
TLMLC
INTGC
SOCNC MCFNC
SPSLC
*ESPC
ARSTC
INCMDC
OVRIDC DEFMDC NRROC
ROTAC
INDXC
MPOFC
SLVC
MORCMC
SHC03
SHC02
SHC01
SHC00
SHC11
SHC10
SHC09
SHC08
G199
G200
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G206
MRDYC ORCML
RCHC
RSLC
RCHHGC MFNHGC
G207
G208
SHC07
SHC06
SHC05
G209
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
G220
G221
G222
1306
SHC04
B63003EN1/02
CNC PMC
Bit number
Address
F000
#7
OP
#6
SA
F001
MA
F002
MDRN
CUT
F003
MTCHIN
MEDT
F004
F005
MBDT9
MBDT8
#5
STL
#4
SPL
#3
#2
#1
#0
RWD
TAP
ENB
DEN
BAL
RST
AL
SRNMV
THRD
CSS
RPDO
INCH
MMEM
MRMT
MMDI
MJ
MH
MINC
MREF
MAFL
MSBK
MABSM
MMLK
MBDT1
MBDT7
MBDT6
MBDT5
MBDT4
MBDT3
MBDT2
BF
TF
SF
EFD
MF
F006
F007
BF
F008
MF3
MF2
EF
F009
DM00
DM01
DM02
DM30
F010
M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M01
M00
F011
M15
M14
M13
M12
M11
M10
M09
M08
F012
M23
M22
M21
M20
M19
M18
M17
M16
F013
M31
M30
M29
M28
M27
M26
M25
M24
F014
M207
M206
M205
M204
M203
M202
M201
M200
F015
M215
M214
M213
M212
M211
M210
M209
M208
F016
M307
M306
M305
M304
M303
M302
M301
M300
F017
M315
M314
M313
M312
M311
M310
M309
M308
F022
S07
S06
S05
S04
S03
S02
S01
S00
F023
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S09
S08
F024
S23
S22
S21
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
F018
F019
F020
F021
1307
B63003EN1/02
F025
#7
S31
#6
S30
#5
S29
#4
S28
#3
S27
#2
S26
#1
S25
#0
S24
F026
T07
T06
T05
T04
T03
T02
T01
T00
F027
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
T10
T09
T08
F028
T23
T22
T21
T20
T19
T18
T17
T16
F029
T31
T30
T29
T28
T27
T26
T25
T24
F030
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
B00
F031
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
F032
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
F033
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
GR3O
GR2O
GR1O
F034
F035
F036
SPAL
R08O
R07O
R06O
R05O
R04O
R03O
R02O
R01O
F037
R12O
R11O
R10O
R09O
F038
ENB3
ENB2
SUCLP
SCLP
F039
CHPCYL CHPMD
F040
AR7
AR6
AR5
AR4
AR3
AR2
AR1
AR0
F041
AR15
AR14
AR13
AR12
AR11
AR10
AR09
AR08
SYCAL
FSPPH
FSPSY
FSCSL
F042
F043
F044
F045
ORARA
TLMA
LDT2A
LDT1A
SARA
SDTA
SSTA
ALMA
F046
MORA2A
MORA1A
PORA2A
SLVSA
RCFNA
RCHPA
CFINA
CHPA
INCSTA
PC1DEA
SSTB
ALMB
F047
F048
F049
ORARB
TLMB
LDT2B
1308
LDT1B
SARB
SDTB
B63003EN1/02
F050
#7
#6
#5
MORA2B
MORA1B
PORA2B
#4
SLVSB
#3
RCFNB
#2
RCHPB
F051
#1
CFINB
#0
CHPB
INCSTB
PC1DEB
F052
F053
EKENB
BGEACT
RPALM
RPBSY PRGDPL
INHKY
F054
UO007
UO006
UO005
UO004
UO003
UO002
UO001
UO000
F055
UO015
UO014
UO013
UO012
UO011
UO010
UO009
UO008
F056
UO107
UO106
UO105
UO104
UO103
UO102
UO101
UO100
F057
UO115
UO114
UO113
UO112
UO111
UO110
UO109
UO108
F058
UO123
UO122
UO121
UO120
UO119
UO118
UO117
UO116
F059
UO131
UO130
UO129
UO128
UO127
UO126
UO125
UO124
F060
ESEND
EREND
F061
BCLP
BUCLP
PSAR
PSE2
PSE1
TLCHI
TLNW
TLCH
RGSPM
RGSPP
F062
PRTSF
F063
PSYN
RCYO
F064
F065
SYNMOD
F066
EXHPCC MMPCC
RTRCTF
PECK2
G08MD
RTNMVS
F067
F068
F069
F070
RMTDO7 RMTDO6 RMTDO5 RMTDO4 RMTDO3 RMTDO2 RMTDO1 RMTDO0

PSW08
PSW07
PSW06
PSW05
PSW04
PSW03
PSW02
PSW01
PSW10
PSW09
OUT2
OUT1
OUT0
MD4O
MD2O
MD1O
F071
F072
OUT7
OUT6
OUT5
F073
OUT4
ZRNO
F074
1309
OUT3
F075
#7
SPO
#6
KEYO
F076
F077
B63003EN1/02
#5
DRNO
#4
MLKO
#3
SBKO
ROV2O
ROV1O
RTAP
RTO
#2
BDTO
#1
#0
MP2O
MP1O
HS1DO
HS1CO
HS1BO
HS1AO
F078
*FV7O
*FV6O
*FV5O
*FV4O
*FV3O
*FV2O
*FV1O
*FV0O
F079
*JV7O
*JV6O
*JV5O
*JV4O
*JV3O
*JV2O
*JV1O
*JV0O
F080
*JV15O
*JV14O
*JV13O
*JV12O
*JV11O
*JV10O
*JV9O
*JV8O
F081
J4O
+ J4O
J3O
+ J3O
J2O
+ J2O
J1O
+ J1O
F082
RVSL
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090
ABTSP3 ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV
F091
F092
TRSPS
TRACT
F093
F094
ZP8
ZP7
ZP6
ZP5
ZP4
ZP3
ZP2
ZP1
ZP28
ZP27
ZP26
ZP25
ZP24
ZP23
ZP22
ZP21
ZP38
ZP37
ZP36
ZP35
ZP34
ZP33
ZP32
ZP31
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
1310
B63003EN1/02
F100
#7
ZP48
#6
ZP47
#5
ZP46
#4
ZP45
#3
ZP44
#2
ZP43
#1
ZP42
#0
ZP41
MV8
MV7
MV6
MV5
MV4
MV3
MV2
MV1
INP8
INP7
INP6
INP5
INP4
INP3
INP2
INP1
MVD8
MVD7
MVD6
MVD5
MVD4
MVD3
MVD2
MVD1
MMI8
MMI7
MMI6
MMI5
MMI4
MMI3
MMI2
MMI1
MDTCH8
MDTCH7
MDTCH6
MDTCH5
MDTCH4
MDTCH3
MDTCH2
MDTCH1
EADEN8
EADEN7
EADEN6
EADEN5
EADEN4
EADEN3
EADEN2
EADEN1
TRQL8
TRQL7
TRQL6
TRQL5
TRQL4
TRQL3
TRQL2
TRQL1
FRP8
FRP7
FRP6
FRP5
FRP4
FRP3
FRP2
FRP1
SYN8O
SYN7O
SYN6O
SYN5O
SYN4O
SYN3O
SYN2O
SYN1O
ZRF8
ZRF7
ZRF6
ZRF5
ZRF4
ZRF3
ZRF2
ZRF1
HDO7
HDO6
HDO5
HDO4
HDO3
HDO2
HDO1
HDO0
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F109
F110
F111
F112
F113
F114
F115
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
1311
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EGENA
EDENA
EIALA
ECKZA
EINPA
EABUFA
EMFA
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
*EAXSL
F130
EBSYA
EOV0
EOTNA
EOTPA
F131
F132
EM28A
EM24A
EM22A
EM21A
EM18A
EM14A
EM12A
EM11A
F133
EBSYB
EOTNB
EOTPB
EGENB
EDENB
EIALB
ECKZB
EINPB
EABUFB
EMFB
F134
F135
EM28B
EM24B
EM22B
EM21B
EM18B
EM14B
EM12B
EM11B
F136
EBSYC
EOTNC
EOTPC
EGENC
EDENC
EIALC
ECKZC
EINPC
EABUFC
EMFC
F137
F138
EM28C
EM24C
EM22C
EM21C
EM18C
EM14C
EM12C
EM11C
F139
EBSYD
EOTND
EOTPD
EGEND
EDEND
EIALD
ECKZD
EINPD
EABUFD
EMFD
F140
F141
EM28D
EM24D
EM22D
EM21D
EM18D
EM14D
EM12D
EM11D
F142
EM48A
EM44A
EM42A
EM41A
EM38A
EM34A
EM32A
EM31A
EM48B
EM44B
EM42B
EM41B
EM38B
EM34B
EM32B
EM31B
EM48C
EM44C
EM42C
EM41C
EM38C
EM34C
EM32C
EM31C
F143
F144
F145
F146
F147
F148
F149
1312
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EM48D
EM44D
EM42D
EM41D
EM38D
EM34D
EM32D
EM31D
F168
ORARC
TLMC
LDT2C
LDT1C
SARC
SDTC
SSTC
ALMC
F169
MORA2C
MORA1C
PORA2C
SLVSC
RCFNC
RCHPC
CFINC
CHPC
F150
F151
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F170
INCSTC PC1DEC
F171
F172
F173
F174
1313
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EDGN
EPARM
EVAR
EPRG
EWTIO
ESTPIO
ERDIO
IOLNK
SRLNO3
SRLNO2
SRLNO1
SRLNO0
F175
F176
F177
F178
F179
F180
CLRCH8
CLRCH7
CLRCH6
CLRCH5
CLRCH4
CLRCH3
CLRCH2
CLRCH1
EACNT8
EACNT7
EACNT6
EACNT5
EACNT4
EACNT3
EACNT2
EACNT1
F181
F182
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
1314
B63003EN1/02
A.1.2
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i
List of Addresses
(Twopath Control)
Interface addresses among CNC, PMC and Machine Tool are as follows:
CNC
G000
Path 1
PMC
X000
MT
F000
G1000
Y000
F1000
Path 2
Signals addresses for each path are usually assigned as follows:

Signal address
Contents
G000G255
Signals on path 1(PMCCNC)
F000F255
Signals on path 1(CNCPMC)
G1000G1255
Signals on path 2(PMCCNC)
F1000F1255
Signals on path 2(CNCPMC)
However, for the signals common to both paths, those signals are assigned
to path 1. Interface signals between the CNC and PMC are as shown
below:
The signals with suffix #1 are those for path 1 and the signals with suffix
#2 are those for path 2.
1315
B63003EN1/02
MT PMC
Address
#7
#6
#5
SKIP #1
ESKIP
SKIP6 #1
ESKIP
SKIP6 #1
MIT2 #1
SKIP5 #1
Bit number
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
+MIT1 #1
SKIP2 #1
ZAE #1
SKIP2 #1
ZAE #1
SKIP8 #1
YAE #1
SKIP8 #1
XAE #1
SKIP7 #1
XAE #1
SKIP7 #1
X000
X001
X002
X003
X004
SKIP #1
+MIT2 #1
SKIP4 #1
MIT1 #1
SKIP3 #1
SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1
(T series)
(M series)
X005
X006
*DEC7 #2 *DEC6 #2 *DEC5 #2 *DEC4 #2 *DEC3 #2 *DEC2 #2 *DEC1 #2
X007
X008
*ESP
*DEC7 #1 *DEC6 #1 *DEC5 #1 *DEC4 #1 *DEC3 #1 *DEC2 #1 *DEC1 #1
X009
X010
X011
X012
X013
SKIP #2 SKIP6 #2
SKIP #2
SKIP6 #2
MIT2 #2
SKIP5 #2
+MIT2 #2
SKIP4 #2
MIT1 #2
SKIP3 #2
SKIP5 #2
SKIP4 #2
SKIP3 #2
1316
+MIT1 #2
SKIP2 #2
ZAE #2
SKIP2 #2
ZAE #2
SKIP8 #2
YAE #2
SKIP8 #2
XAE #2
SKIP7 #2
XAE #2
SKIP7 #2
(T series)
(M siries)
B63003EN1/02
PMC CNC
Bit number
Address
G000
#7
#6
ED7 #1 ED6 #1
G001
ED15 #1 ED14 #1 ED13 #1 ED12 #1 ED11 #1 ED10 #1
ED9 #1
ED8 #1
G002
ESTB #1
EA1 #1
EA0 #1
EA6 #1
#5
ED5 #1
EA5 #1
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ED4 #1 ED3 #1 ED2 #1 ED1 #1 ED0 #1
EA4 #1
EA3 #1
MFIN3#1 MFIN2#1
FIN #1
EA2 #1
G003
G004
G005
BFIN #1
G008
BFIN #1 TFIN #1 SFIN #1 EFIN #1 MFIN #1
SKIPP#1
G006
G007
AFL #1
*ABSM#1
OVC #1
RLSOT #1 EXLM #1 *FLWP#1 RLSOT3 #1

ERS #1
RRW #1
*SP #1
G009
*JV6 #1
STLK #1 RVS #1
*ESP #1
*IT #1
PN16 #1
PN8 #1
PN4 #1
PN2 #1
PN1 #1
*JV4 #1
*JV3 #1
G010
*JV7 #1
*JV2 #1
*JV1 #1
*JV0 #1
G011
*JV15 #1 *JV14 #1 *JV13 #1 *JV12 #1 *JV11 #1 *JV10 #1
*JV9 #1
*JV8 #1
G012
*FV7 #1
*FV1 #1
*FV0 #1
G013
*AFV7#1 *AFV6#1 *AFV5#1 *AFV4#1 *AFV3#1 *AFV2#1 *AFV1#1 *AFV0#1
G014
ROV2 #1 ROV1 #1
*FV6 #1
*JV5 #1
ST #1
SRN #1
*FV5 #1
*FV4 #1
*FV3 #1
*FV2 #1
G015
G016
F1D #1
MSDFON#1
G017
G018
G019
HS2D #1 HS2C #1 HS2B #1 HS2A #1 HS1D #1 HS1C #1 HS1B #1 HS1A #1

RT #1
MP2 #1
G020
G021
G022
G023
ALNGH #1 RGHTH#1
G024
1317
MP1 #1 HS3D #1 HS3C #1 HS3B #1 HS3A #1
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G025
G026
G027
G028
CON #1
PC2SLC#1 SPSTP#1
G031
*SCPF#1 *SUCPF#1
*SSTP#1 SOR #1
G029
G030
*SSTP3#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP1#1 SWS3 #1 SWS2 #1 SWS1 #1
GR2 #1
SAR #1
GR1 #1
GR31 #1
GR21 #1
SOV7 #1 SOV6 #1 SOV5 #1 SOV4 #1 SOV3 #1 SOV2 #1 SOV1 #1 SOV0 #1

PKESS2#1 PKESS1#1
G032
R08I #1
R07I #1
R06I #1
R05I #1
R04I #1
R03I #1
R02I #1
R01I #1
G033
SIND #1
SSIN #1
SGN #1
R12I #1
R11I #1
R10I #1
R09I #1
G034
R08I2 #1 R07I2 #1 R06I2 #1 R05I2 #1 R04I2 #1 R03I2 #1 R02I2 #1 R01I2 #1
G035
SIND2#1 SSIN2#1 SGN2#1
G036
R08I3 #1 R07I3 #1 R06I3 #1 R05I3 #1 R04I3 #1 R03I3 #1 R02I3 #1 R01I3 #1
G037
R12I2 #1 R11I2 #1 R10I2 #1 R09I2 #1
R12I3 #1 R11I3 #1 R10I3 #1 R09I3 #1

SPPHS
SPPHS #1
SPSYC
SPSYC #1
*PLSST#1
G038
*BECLP #1 *BEUCP #1
G039
GOQSM#1 WOQSM#1 OFN5 #1 OFN4 #1 OFN3 #1 OFN2 #1 OFN1 #1 OFN0 #1
G040
WOSET#1
PRC #1
OFN6 #1
G041
HS2ID#1 HS2IC#1 HS2IB#1 HS2IA#1 HS1ID#1 HS1IC#1 HS1IB#1 HS1IA#1
G042
HS3ID#1 HS3IC#1 HS3IB#1 HS3IA#1
G043
ZRN #1
DNCI #1
MD4 #1
G044
MD2 #1
MD1 #1
MLK #1
BDT1 #1
G045
BDT9 #1 BDT8 #1 BDT7 #1 BDT6 #1 BDT5 #1 BDT4 #1 BDT3 #1 BDT2 #1
G046
DRN #1
G047
TL128 #1
G048
TLRST#1 TLRSTI#1 TLSKP#1
TL256 #1
G049
*TLV7 #1 *TLV6 #1 *TLV5 #1
*TLV4#1 *TLV3 #1 *TLV2 #1 *TLV1 #1 *TLV0 #1
KEY4 #1 KEY3 #1 KEY2 #1 KEY1 #1

TL64 #1
TL32 #1
1318
TL16 #1
TL08 #1
SBK #1
TL04 #1
TL02 #1
TL01 #1
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
*CHLD #1 CHPST #1
*CHP8 #1
*CHP4 #1
G053
CDZ #1
UINT #1
G054
UI007 #1 UI006 #1 UI005 #1 UI004 #1 UI003 #1 UI002 #1 UI001 #1 UI000 #1
G055
UI015 #1 UI014 #1 UI013 #1 UI012 #1 UI011 #1 UI010 #1 UI009 #1 UI008 #1
G050
G051
#1
#0
*TLV9 #1 *TLV8 #1
*CHP2 #1
*CHP0 #1
G052
SMZ #1
TMRON#1
G056
G057
EXWT #1 EXSTP #1 EXRD #1 MINP#1
G058
TRRTN #1 TRESC #1
G059
G060
*TSB #1
RGTSP2#1 RGTSP1#1
G061
PDT2#1
G062
G063
INFD#1
G064
ESRSYC#1
RGTAP#1
PDT1#1
NOZAGC#1
*CRTOF#1
SLSPB
SLSPA
NOWT
HEAD
SLPCB
SLPCA SLCSEQ#1 RTNCY #1
G065
G066
EKSET
ENBKY IGNVRY#1
RTRCT
G067
G068
G069
G070
MRDYA#1 ORCMA#1 SFRA #1 SRVA #1 CTH1A#1 CTH2A#1 TLMHA#1 TLMLA#1
G071
RCHA #1 RSLA #1 INTGA #1 SOCNA#1 MCFNA#1 SPSLA#1 *ESPA#1 ARSTA#1
G072
RCHHGA#1 MFNHGA#1
OVRIDA#1 DEFMDA#1 NRROA#1
ROTAA#1
INDXA#1
G073
MPOFA#1
SLVA #1
MORCMA#1
G074
MRDYB#1 ORCMB#1 SFRB #1 SRVB #1 CTH1B#1 CTH2B#1
INCMDA#1
1319
TLMHB#1 TLMLB#1
B63003EN1/02
G075
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RCHB#1 RSLB #1 INTGB #1 SOCNB#1 MCFNB#1 SPSLB#1 *ESPB#1 ARSTB#1
G076
RCHHGB#1 MFNHGB#1
INCMDB#1
OVRIDB#1
DEFMDB#1 NRROB#1
ROTAB#1
INDXB#1
MPOFB#1
SLVB#1
MORCMB#1
SHA03#1
SHA02#1
SHA01#1
SHA00#1
SHA11#1
SHA10#1
SHA09#1
SHA08#1
SHB03#1
SHB02#1
SHB01#1
SHB00#1
SHB11#1
SHB10#1
SHB09#1
SHB08#1
G077
G078
SHA07#1
SHA06#1
SHA05#1
SHA04#1
G079
G080
SHB07#1
SHB06#1
SHB05#1
SHB04#1
G081
G082
Reserved for order made macro
G083
G084
G085
G086
G087
G088
G089
G090
SRLNI3#1 SRLNI2#1 SRLNI1#1 SRLNI0#1
G091
BGEN#1
G092
BGIALM#1
BGION#1
IOLS#1
IOLACK#1
G093
G094
G095
G096
HROV#1 *HROV6#1 *HROV5#1 *HROV4#1 *HROV3#1 *HROV2#1 *HROV1#1 *HROV0#1
G097
G098
EKC7
EKC6
EKC5
G099
1320
EKC4
EKC3
EKC2
EKC1
EKC0
B63003EN1/02
#7
G100
#6
+J7#1
#5
+J6#1
#4
+J5#1
#3
+J4 #1
#2
+J3 #1
#1
+J2 #1
#0
+J1 #1
J7 #1
J6 #1
J5 #1
J4 #1
J3 #1
J2 #1
J1 #1
MI7 #1
MI6 #1
MI5 #1
MI4 #1
MI3 #1
MI2 #1
MI1 #1
G101
G102
G103
G104
G105
G106
G107
MLK7 #1 MLK6 #1 MLK5 #1 MLK4 #1 MLK3 #1 MLK2 #1 MLK1 #1
G108
G109
+LM7 #1 +LM6 #1 +LM5 #1 +LM4 #1 +LM3 #1 +LM2 #1 +LM1 #1
G110
G111
LM7 #1 LM6 #1 LM5 #1 LM4 #1 LM3 #1 LM2 #1 LM1 #1
G112
G113
G114
*+L7 #1
*+L6 #1
*+L5 #1
*+L4 #1
*+L3 #1
*+L2 #1
*+L1 #1
*L7 #1
*L6 #1
*L5 #1
*L4 #1
*L3 #1
*L2 #1
*L1 #1
G115
G116
G117
*+ED7#1 *+ED6#1 *+ED5#1 *+ED4#1 *+ED3#1 *+ED2#1 *+ED1#1
G118
G119
*ED7#1 *ED6#1 *ED5#1 *ED4#1 *ED3#1 *ED2#1 *ED1#1
G120
G121
G122
PK7#1
PKESS1 #1
PKESS2#1 PKESS1#1
PKESS2#1
PK6 #1
PK5 #1
PK4 #1
PK3 #1
PK2 #1
PK1 #1
(T series)
(M series)
G123
1321
#7
G124
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DTCH7#1 DTCH6#1 DTCH5#1 DTCH4#1 DTCH3#1 DTCH2#1 DTCH1#1
G125
G126
SVF7 #1 SVF6 #1
SVF5 #1 SVF4 #1 SVF3 #1 SVF2 #1 SVF1 #1
G127
G128
MIX7
MIX6
MIX5
MIX4
MIX3
MIX2
MIX1
*IT7 #1
*IT6 #1
*IT5 #1
*IT4 #1
*IT3 #1
*IT2 #1
*IT1 #1
G129
G130
G131
+MIT4 #1 +MIT3 #1 +MIT2 #1 +MIT1 #1
G132
G133
MIT4 #1 MIT3 #1 MIT2 #1 MIT1 #1
G134
G135
G136
EAX7 #1 EAX6 #1 EAX5 #1 EAX4 #1 EAX3 #1 EAX2 #1 EAX1 #1
G137
G138
SYNC7#1 SYNC6#1
SYNC5#1 SYNC4#1 SYNC3#1 SYNC2#1 SYNC1#1
G139
G140
SYNCJ7#1 SYNCJ6#1 SYNCJ5#1 SYNCJ4#1 SYNCJ3#1 SYNCJ2#1 SYNCJ1#1
G141
G142
EBUFA#1 ECLRA#1 ESTPA#1
ESOFA#1 ESBKA#1 EMBUFA#1
EFINA#1
G143
EMSBKA#1 EC6A #1 EC5A #1 EC4A #1 EC3A #1 EC2A #1 EC1A #1 EC0A #1
G144
EIF7A #1 EIF6A #1 EIF5A #1 EIF4A #1 EIF3A #1 EIF2A #1 EIF1A #1 EIF0A #1
G145
EIF15A#1 EIF14A#1 EIF13A#1 EIF12A#1 EIF11A#1 EIF10A#1 EIF9A #1 EIF8A #1
G146
EID7A#1 EID6A#1 EID5A#1 EID4A#1 EID3A#1 EID2A#1 EID1A#1 EID0A#1
G147
G148
1322
B63003EN1/02
#7
G149
G150
G151
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DRNE#1 RTE #1
OVCE#1
ROV2E#1 ROV1E#1
*FV7E#1 *FV6E#1 *FV5E#1 *FV4E#1 *FV3E#1 *FV2E#1 *FV1E#1 *FV0E#1
G152
G153
G154
EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1 ESOFB#1 ESBKB#1 EMBUFB#1
EFINB#1
G155
EMSBKB#1 EC6B #1 EC5B #1 EC4B #1 EC3B #1 EC2B #1 EC1B #1 EC0B #1
G156
EIF7B#1 EIF6B#1 EIF5B#1 EIF4B#1 EIF3B#1 EIF2B#1 EIF1B#1 EIF0B#1
G157
EIF15B#1 EIF14B#1 EIF13B#1 EIF12B#1 EIF11B#1 EIF10B#1
G158
EID7B#1 EID6B#1 EID5B#1 EID4B#1 EID3B#1 EID2B#1 EID1B#1 EID0B#1
G159
G160
G161
EIF9B#1 EIF8B#1
G162
G163
G164
G165
G166
EBUFC#1 ECLRC#1 ESTPC#1 ESOFC#1 ESBKC#1 EMBUFC#1
EFINC#1
G167
EMSBKC#1 EC6C #1 EC5C #1 EC4C #1 EC3C #1 EC2C #1 EC1C #1 EC0C #1
G168
EIF7C#1 EIF6C#1 EIF5C#1 EIF4C#1 EIF3C#1 EIF2C#1 EIF1C#1 EIF0C#1
G169
EIF15C#1 EIF14C#1 EIF13C#1 EIF12C#1 EIF11C#1 EIF10C#1 EIF9C#1
G170
EID7C#1 EID6C#1 EID5C#1 EID4C#1 EID3C#1 EID2C#1 EID1C#1 EID0C#1
G171
G172
G173
1323
EIF8C#1
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G174
G175
G176
G177
G178
EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1
EFIND#1
G179
EMSBKD#1 EC6D #1 EC5D #1 EC4D #1 EC3D #1 EC2D #1 EC1D #1 EC0D #1
G180
EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1
G181
EIF15D#1 EIF14D#1 EIF13D#1 EIF12D#1 EIF11D#1 EIF10D#1 EIF9D#1
G182
EID7D#1 EID6D#1 EID5D#1 EID4D#1 EID3D#1 EID2D#1 EID1D#1 EID0D#1
G183
G184
G185
EIF8D#1
G186
G187
G188
G189
G190
OVLS7#1 OVLS6#1 OVLS5#1 OVLS4#1 OVLS3#1 OVLS2#1 OVLS1#1
G191
G192
IGVRY7#1
IGVRY6#1
IGVRY5#1
IGVRY4#1
IGVRY3#1
IGVRY2#1
IGVRY1#1
NPOS5#1 NPOS4#1
NPOS3#1
NPOS2#1 NPOS1#1
G193
G194
G195
G196
G197
G198
NPOS7#1 NPOS6#1
1324
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
G199
G200
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G206
G207
G208
G209
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
1325
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
PMC CNC
Bit number
Address
G1000
#7
ED7#2
#6
ED6#2
#5
ED5#2
#4
ED4#2
#3
ED3#2
#2
ED2#2
#1
ED1#2
#0
ED0#2
G1001
ED15#2
ED14#2
ED13#2
ED12#2
ED11#2
ED10#2
ED9#2
ED8#2
G1002
ESTB#2
EA6#2
EA5#2
EA4#2
EA3#2
EA2#2
EA1#2
EA0#2
SFIN#2
EFIN#2
MFIN#2
G1003
MFIN3#2 MFIN2#2
G1004
AFL#2
BFIN#2
G1006
SKIPP#2
OVC#2
*ABSM#2
G1007
RLSOT#2 EXLM#2 *FLWP#2
RLSOT3#2
ST#2
G1005
G1008
BFIN#2
FIN#2
ERS#2
RRW#2
*SP#2
G1009
TFIN#2
SRN#2
STLK#2
*ESP#2
RVS#2
*IT#2
PN16#2
PN8#2
PN4#2
PN2#2
PN1#2
G1010
*JV7#2
*JV6#2
*JV5#2
*JV4#2
*JV3#2
*JV2#2
*JV1#2
*JV0#2
G1011
*JV15#2
*JV14#2
*JV13#2
*JV12#2
*JV11#2
*JV10#2
*JV9#2
*JV8#2
G1012
*FV7#2
*FV6#2
*FV5#2
*FV4#2
*FV3#2
*FV2#2
*FV1#2
*FV0#2
G1013
*AFV7#2 *AFV6#2 *AFV5#2 *AFV4#2 *AFV3#2 *AFV2#2 *AFV1#2 *AFV0#2

ROV2#2
G1014
ROV1#2
G1015
G1016
F1D#2
MSDFON#2
G1017
G1018
HS2D#2
G1019
RT#2
HS2C#2
HS2B#2
HS2A#2
HS1D#2
HS1C#2
HS1B#2
HS1A#2
MP2#2
MP1#2
HS3D#2
HS3C#2
HS3B#2
HS3A#2
G1020
G1021
G1022
G1023
ALNGH#2 RGHTH#2
G1024
1326
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G1025
G1026
G1027
CON#2
G1028
PC2SLC#2
G1029
G1030
G1031
SOV7#2
*SSTP3#2 *SSTP2#2 *SSTP1#2 SWS3#2
SPSTP#2
GR2#2
*SCPF#2 *SUCPF#2
SWS2#2 SWS1#2
GR1#2
*SSTP#2
SOR#2
SAR#2
GR31#2
GR21#2
SOV6#2
SOV5#2
SOV4#2
SOV3#2
SOV2#2
SOV1#2
SOV0#2
R05I#2
R04I#2
R03I#2
R02I#2
R01I#2
R12I#2
R11I#2
R10I#2
R09I#2
R04I2#2
R03I2#2
R02I2#2
R01I2#2
R12I2#2
R11I2#2
R10I2#2
R09I2#2
R04I3#2
R03I3#2
R02I3#2
R01I3#2
R12I3#2
R11I3#2
R10I3#2
R09I3#2
PKESS2#2 PKESS1#2
G1032
R08I#2
R07I#2
R06I#2
GI033
SIND#2
SSIN#2
SGN#2
G1034
R08I2#2
R07I2#2
R06I2#2
G1035
G1036
R08I3#2
G1037
G1038
*BECLP #2 *BEUCP #2
G1039
GOQSM#2
WOQSM#2
G1040
WOSET#2
PRC#2
G1041
HS2ID#2 HS2IC#2 HS2IB#2 HS2IA#2 HS1ID#2 HS1IC#2 HS1IB#2 HS1IA#2
G1042
HS3ID#2 HS3IC#2 HS3IB#2 HS3IA#2
G1043
R07I3#2
ZRN#2
R06I3#2
R05I2#2
R05I3#2
SPPHS#2 SPSYC#2
OFN5#2
OFN4#2
OFN3#2
OFN2#2
*PLSST#2
OFN1#2
OFN0#2
OFN6#2
DNCI#2
MD4#2
G1044
MD1#2
MLK#2
BDT1#2
BDT3#2
BDT2#2
G1045
BDT9#2
BDT8#2
BDT7#2
BDT6#2
BDT5#2
G1046
DRN#2
KEY4#2
KEY3#2
KEY2#2
KEY1#2
G1047
TL128#2
TL64#2
TL32#2
TL16#2
TL08#2
G1048
TLRST#2 TLRSTI#2 TLSKP#2
G1049
*TLV7 #2 *TLV6 #2 *TLV5 #2 *TLV4#2 *TLV3 #2 *TLV2 #2 *TLV1 #2 *TLV0 #2
1327
BDT4#2
MD2#2
SBK#2
TL04#2
TL02#2
TL01#2
TL256#2
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
*CHP8 #2
*CHP4 #2
G1050
G1051
*CHLD #2 CHPST #2
#1
#0
*TLV9 #2 *TLV8 #2
*CHP2 #2
*CHP0 #2
G1052
G1053
CDZ#2
SMZ#2
UINT#2
G1054
UI007#2
UI006#2
UI005#2
UI004#2
UI003#2
UI002#2
UI001#2
UI000#2
G1055
UI015#2
UI014#2
UI013#2
UI012#2
UI011#2
UI010#2
UI009#2
UI008#2
EXWT#2 EXSTP#2 EXRD#2
MINP#2
TMRON#2
G1056
G1057
G1058
TRRTN#2 TRESC#2
G1059
G1060
*TSB#2
G1061
RGTSP2#2
RGTSP1#2
G1062
PDT2#2
PDT2#1
G1063
INFD#2
G1064
ESRSYC#2
RGTAP#2
*CRTOF#2
NOZAGC#2
SLCSEQ #2 RTNCY #2
G1065
RTRCT#2
G1066
IGNVRY#2
G1067
G1068
G1069
G1070
MRDYA#2 ORCMA#2
G1071
RCHA#2
G1072
RCHHGA#2 MFNHGA#2
SFRA#2
RSLA#2 INTGA #2 SOCNA#2 MCFNA#2 SPSLA#2 *ESPA#2 ARSTA#2

INCMDA#2
G1073
G1074
MRDYB#2
SRVA#2 CTH1A#2 CTH2A#2 TLMHA#2 TLMLA#2
ORCMB#2
SFRB#2
1328
OVRIDA#2 DEFMDA#2 NRROA#2
ROTAA#2
INDXA#2
MPOFA#2
SLVA #2
MORCMA#2
SRVB#2 CTH1B#2 CTH2B#2 TLMHB#2 TLMLB#2
B63003EN1/02
G1075
#7
RCHB#2
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RSLB#2 INTGB #2 SOCNB#2 MCFNB#2 SPSLB#2 *ESPB#2 ARSTB#2
G1076
RCHHGB#2 MFNHGB#2
INCMDB#2
OVRIDB#2
DEFMDB#2 NRROB#2
ROTAB#2
INDXB#2
MPOFB#2
SLVB#2
MORCMB#2
G1077
G1078
SHA07#2 SHA06#2 SHA05#2 SHA04#2 SHA03#2 SHA02#2 SHA01#2 SHA00#2
G1079
SHA11#2 SHA10#2 SHA09#2 SHA08#2
G1080
SHB07#2 SHB06#2 SHB05#2 SHB04#2 SHB03#2 SHB02#2 SHB01#2 SHB00#2
G1081
SHB11#2 SHB10#2 SHB09#2 SHB08#2
G1082
G1083
G1084
G1085
G1086
G1087
G1088
G1089
G1090
SRLNI3#2 SRLNI2#2 SRLNI1#2 SRLNI0#2
G1091
BGEN#2
G1092
BGIALM#2
BGION#2
IOLS#2
IOLACK#2
G1093
G1094
G1095
G1096
HROV#2 *HROV6#2 *HROV5#2 *HROV4#2 *HROV3#2 *HROV2#2 *HROV1#2 *HROV0#2
G1097
G1098
G1099
1329
#7
G1100
B63003EN1/02
#6
+J7#2
#5
+J6#2
#4
+J5#2
#3
+J4#2
#2
+J3#2
#1
+J2#2
#0
+J1#2
J7#2
J6#2
J5#2
J4#2
J3#2
J2#2
J1#2
MI7#2
MI6#2
MI5#2
MI4#2
MI3#2
MI2#2
MI1#2
MLK7#2
MLK6#2
MLK5#2
MLK4#2
MLK3#2
MLK2#2
MLK1#2
G1101
G1102
G1103
G1104
G1105
G1106
G1107
G1108
G1109
+LM7 #2 +LM6 #2 +LM5 #2 +LM4 #2 +LM3 #2 +LM2 #2 +LM1 #2
G1110
G1111
LM7 #2 LM6 #2 LM5 #2 LM4 #2 LM3 #2 LM2 #2 LM1 #2
G1112
G1113
G1114
*+L7#2
*+L6#2
*+L5#2
*+L4#2
*+L3#2
*+L2#2
*+L1#2
*L7#2
*L6#2
*L5#2
*L4#2
*L3#2
*L2#2
*L1#2
G1115
G1116
G1117
*+ED7#2 *+ED6#2 *+ED5#2 *+ED4#2 *+ED3#2 *+ED2#2 *+ED1#2
G1118
G1119
*ED7#2 *ED6#2 *ED5#2 *ED4#2 *ED3#2 *ED2#2 *ED1#2
G1120
G1121
G1122
PK7#2
PKESS1 #2
PKESS2#2 PKESS1#2
PKESS2#2
PK6 #2
PK5 #2
PK4 #2
PK3 #2
PK2 #2
PK1 #2
(T series)
(M series)
G1123
1330
B63003EN1/02
#7
G1124
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DTCH7#2
DTCH6#2
DTCH5#2
DTCH4#2
DTCH3#2
DTCH2#2
DTCH1#2
SVF7#2
SVF6#2
SVF5#2
SVF4#2
SVF3#2
SVF2#2
SVF1#2
*IT7#2
*IT6#2
*IT5#2
*IT4#2
*IT3#2
*IT2#2
*IT1#2
G1125
G1126
G1127
G1128
G1129
G1130
G1131
+MIT4 #2 +MIT3#2 +MIT2 #2 +MIT1 #2
G1132
G1133
MIT4 #2 MIT3 #2 MIT2 #2 MIT1 #2
G1134
G1135
G1136
EAX7#2
EAX6#2
EAX5#2
EAX4#2
EAX3#2
EAX2#2
EAX1#2
SYNC7#2
SYNC6#2
SYNC5#2
SYNC4#2
SYNC3#2
SYNC2#2
SYNC1#2
G1137
G1138
G1139
SYNCJ7#2 SYNCJ6#2 SYNCJ5#2 SYNCJ4#2 SYNCJ3#2 SYNCJ2#2 SYNCJ1#2
G1140
G1141
EFINA#2
G1142
EBUFA#2
ECLRA#2
ESTPA#2
ESOFA#2
ESBKA#2
EMBUFA#2
G1143
EMSBKA#2
EC6A#2
EC5A#2
EC4A#2
EC3A#2
EC2A#2
EC1A#2
EC0A#2
G1144
EIF7A#2
EIF6A#2
EIF5A#2
EIF4A#2
EIF3A#2
EIF2A#2
EIF1A#2
EIF0A#2
G1145
EIF15A#2
EIF14A#2
EIF13A#2
EIF12A#2
EIF11A#2
EIF10A#2
EIF9A#2
EIF8A#2
G1146
G1147
EID15A#2 EID14A#2 EID13A#2 EID12A#2 EID11A#2
G1148
1331
EID10A#2
EID9A#2
EID8A#2
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G1149
G1150
DRNE#2
G1151
*FV7E#2 *FV6E#2 *FV5E#2 *FV4E#2 *FV3E#2 *FV2E#2 *FV1E#2 *FV0E#2
RTE#2
OVCE#2
ROV2E#2 ROV1E#2
G1152
G1153
EFINB#2
G1154
EBUFB#2
ECLRB#2
ESTPB#2
ESOFB#2
ESBKB#2 EMBUFB#2
G1155
EMSBKB#2
EC6B#2
EC5B#2
EC4B#2
EC3B#2
EC2B#2
EC1B#2
EC0B#2
G1156
EIF7B#2
EIF6B#2
EIF5B#2
EIF4B#2
EIF3B#2
EIF2B#2
EIF1B#2
EIF0B#2
G1157
EIF15B#2
EIF14B#2
EIF13B#2
EIF12B#2
EIF11B#2
EIF10B#2
EIF9B#2
EIF8B#2
G1158
G1159
EID15B#2 EID14B#2 EID13B#2 EID12B#2 EID11B#2
G1160
G1161
EID10B#2
EID9B#2
EID8B#2
G1162
G1163
G1164
G1165
EFINC#2
G1166
EBUFC#2
ECLRC#2
ESTPC#2
ESOFC#2 ESBKC#2
EMBUFC#2
G1167
EMSBKC#2
EC6C#2
EC5C#2
EC4C#2
EC3C#2
EC2C#2
EC1C#2
EC0C#2
G1168
EIF7C#2
EIF6C#2
EIF5C#2
EIF4C#2
EIF3C#2
EIF2C#2
EIF1C#2
EIF0C#2
G1169
EIF15C#2
EIF14C#2 EIF13C#2
EIF12C#2
EIF11C#2
EIF10C#2
EIF9C#2
EIF8C#2
G1170
G1171
EID15C#2 EID14C#2 EID13C#2 EID12C#2 EID11C#2 EID10C#2
G1172
G1173
1332
EID9C#2
EID8C#2
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G1178
EBUFD#2
ECLRD#2
ESTPD#2
ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2
EMBUFD#2
G1179
EMSBKD#2
EC6D#2
EC5D#2
EC4D#2
EC3D#2
EC2D#2
EC1D#2
EC0D#2
G1180
EIF7D#2
EIF6D#2
EIF5D#2
EIF4D#2
EIF3D#2
EIF2D#2
EIF1D#2
EIF0D#2
G1181
EIF15D#2
EIF14D#2 EIF13D#2
EIF12D#2
EIF11D#2
EIF10D#2
EIF9D#2
EIF8D#2
G1182
G1183
EID15D#2 EID14D#2 EID13D#2 EID12D#2 EID11D#2 EID10D#2
G1184
G1185
G1174
G1175
G1176
G1177
EFIND#2
EID9D#2
EID8D#2
G1186
G1187
G1188
G1189
G1190
OVLS7#2 OVLS6#2 OVLS5#2 OVLS4#2 OVLS3#2 OVLS2#2 OVLS1#2
G1191
G1192
IGVRY7#2
IGVRY6#2
IGVRY5#2
IGVRY4#2
IGVRY3#2
IGVRY2#2
IGVRY1#2
NPOS5#2 NPOS4#2
NPOS3#2
NPOS2#2 NPOS1#2
G1193
G1194
G1195
G1196
G1197
G1198
NPOS7#2 NPOS6#2
1333
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
G1199
G1200
G1201
G1202
G1203
G1204
G1205
G1206
G1207
G1208
G1209
G1210
G1211
G1212
G1213
G1214
G1215
G1216
G1217
G1218
G1219
1334
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
CNC PMC
Bit number
Address
F000
#7
OP#1
F001
MA#1
F002
MDRN#1
F003
MTCHIN#1
#6
SA#1
#4
SPL#1
#3
#2
#1
#0
RWD#1
TAP#1
ENB#1
DEN#1
BAL#1
RST#1
AL#1
SRNMV#1
THRD#1
CSS#1
RPDO#1
INCH#1
MJ#1
MH#1
MINC#1
CUT#1
MEDT#1 MMEM#1 MRMT#1 MMDI#1

MREF#1
F004
F005
#5
STL#1
MBDT9#1
MBDT8#1 MBDT7#1
MAFL#1 MSBK#1 MABSM#1 MMLK#1 MBDT1#1

MBDT6#1 MBDT5#1
MBDT4#1
MBDT3#1 MBDT2#1
F006
F007
BF#1
BF#1
F008
MF3#1
MF2#1
TF#1
SF#1
EFD#1
MF#1
EF#1
F009
DM00#1
DM01#1
DM02#1
DM30#1
F010
M07#1
M06#1
M05#1
M04#1
M03#1
M02#1
M01#1
M00#1
F011
M15#1
M14#1
M13#1
M12#1
M11#1
M10#1
M09#1
M08#1
F012
M23#1
M22#1
M21#1
M20#1
M19#1
M18#1
M17#1
M16#1
F013
M31#1
M30#1
M29#1
M28#1
M27#1
M26#1
M25#1
M24#1
F014
M207#1
M206#1
M205#1
M204#1
M203#1
M202#1
M201#1
M200#1
F015
M215#1
M214#1
M213#1
M212#1
M211#1
M210#1
M209#1
M208#1
F016
M307#1
M306#1
M305#1
M304#1
M303#1
M302#1
M301#1
M300#1
F017
M315#1
M314#1
M313#1
M312#1
M311#1
M310#1
M309#1
M308#1
F022
S07#1
S06#1
S05#1
S04#1
S03#1
S02#1
S01#1
S00#1
F023
S15#1
S14#1
S13#1
S12#1
S11#1
S10#1
S09#1
S08#1
F024
S23#1
S22#1
S21#1
S20#1
S19#1
S18#1
S17#1
S16#1
F018
F019
F020
F021
1335
B63003EN1/02
F025
#7
S31#1
#6
S30#1
#5
S29#1
#4
S28#1
#3
S27#1
#2
S26#1
#1
S25#1
#0
S24#1
F026
T07#1
T06#1
T05#1
T04#1
T03#1
T02#1
T01#1
T00#1
F027
T15#1
T14#1
T13#1
T12#1
T11#1
T10#1
T09#1
T08#1
F028
T23#1
T22#1
T21#1
T20#1
T19#1
T18#1
T17#1
T16#1
F029
T31#1
T30#1
T29#1
T28#1
T27#1
T26#1
T25#1
T24#1
F030
B07#1
B06#1
B05#1
B04#1
B03#1
B02#1
B01#1
B00#1
F031
B15#1
B14#1
B13#1
B12#1
B11#1
B10#1
B09#1
B08#1
F032
B23#1
B22#1
B21#1
B20#1
B19#1
B18#1
B17#1
B16#1
F033
B31#1
B30#1
B29#1
B28#1
B27#1
B26#1
B25#1
B24#1
F034
GR3O#1 GR2O#1 GR1O#1
F035
SPAL#1
R04O#1
R03O#1
R02O#1
R01O#1
F037
R12O#1
R11O#1
R10O#1
R09O#1
F038
ENB3#1
ENB2#1
SUCLP#1
SCLP#1
F036
R08O#1
R07O#1
R06O#1
R05O#1
CHPCYL#1 CHPMD#1
F039
F040
AR7#1
AR6#1
AR5#1
AR4#1
AR3#1
AR2#1
AR1#1
AR0#1
F041
AR15#1
AR14#1
AR13#1
AR12#1
AR11#1
AR10#1
AR09#1
AR08#1
SYCAL
SYCAL #1
FSPPH
FSPPH #1
FSPSY
FSPSY #1
FSCSL#1
TLMA#1 LDT2A#1 LDT1A#1 SARA#1
SDTA#1
SSTA#1
F042
F043
F044
F045
ORARA#1
F046
MORA2A#1 MORA1A#1
PORA2A#1
SLVSA#1
ALMA#1
RCFNA#1 RCHPA#1 CFINA#1 CHPA#1
INCSTA#1 PC1DEA#1
F047
F048
F049
ORARB#1
TLMB#1 LDT2B#1 LDT1B#1 SARB#1
1336
SDTB#1
SSTB#1
ALMB#1
B63003EN1/02
#7
F050
#6
MORA2B#1 MORA1B#1
#5
#4
PORA2B#1
SLVSB#1
#3
#2
#1
#0
RCFNB#1 RCHPB#1 CFINB#1 CHPB#1
INCSTB#1 PC1DEB#1
F051
F052
RPALM#1
RPBSY#1 PRGDPL
F053
EKENB
F054
UO007#1 UO006#1 UO005#1 UO004#1 UO003#1 UO002#1 UO001#1 UO000#1
F055
F056
F057
UO115#1 UO114#1 UO11
F058
F059
F060
ESEND#1 EREND#1
F061
BCLP#1 BUCLP#1
BGEACT#1
#1
F062
PRTSF#1
F063
PSYN#1 WATO#1 RCYO#1
F064
TIALM
F065
TICHK
UO112#1 UO111#1
PSE2#1
PSE1#1
TLCHI#1 TLNW#1
TLCH#1
RGSPM#1
RGSPP#1
RTRCTF#1
SYNMOD#1
PECK2#1
F066
UO110#1 UO109#1 UO108#1
PSAR#1
COSP
INHKY
G08MD#1
RTNMVS#1
F067
F068
F069
F070
PSW08#1
PSW07#1
PSW06#1
PSW05#1
PSW04#1
PSW03#1
F071
F072
OUT7#1
OUT6#1
OUT5#1
OUT4#1
ZRNO#1
F073
F074
1337
OUT3#1
OUT2#1
PSW02#1
PSW01#1
PSW10#1
PSW09#1
OUT1#1
OUT0#1
MD4O#1 MD2O#1 MD1O#1
F075
#7
SPO#1
B63003EN1/02
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
KEYO#1 DRNO#1 MLKO#1 SBKO#1 BDTO#1
ROV2O#1 ROV1O#1
F076
RTO#1
F077
RTAP#1
#1
#0
MP2O#1 MP1O#1
HS1DO#1 HS1CO#1 HS1BO#1 HS1AO#1
F078
*FV7O#1 *FV6O#1 *FV5O#1 *FV4O#1 *FV3O#1 *FV2O#1 *FV1O#1 *FV0O#1
F079
*JV7O#1 *JV6O#1 *JV5O#1 *JV4O#1 *JV3O#1 *JV2O#1 *JV1O#1 *JV0O#1
F080
*FV15O#1 *FV14O#1 *FV13O#1 *FV12O#1 *FV11O#1 *FV10O#1
F081
J4O#1
+J4O#1
J3O#1
+J3O#1
J2O#1
+J2O#1
*FV9O#1
*FV8O#1
J1O#1
+J1O#1
RVSL#1
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
ABTSP2#1 ABTSP1#1 ABTQSV#1
F090
F091
TRSPS#1
F092
TRACT#1
F093
F094
ZP7#1
ZP6#1
ZP5#1
ZP4#1
ZP3#1
ZP2#1
ZP1#1
ZP27#1
ZP26#1
ZP25#1
ZP24#1
ZP23#1
ZP22#1
ZP21#1
ZP37#1
ZP36#1
ZP35#1
ZP34#1
ZP33#1
ZP32#1
ZP31#1
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
1338
B63003EN1/02
#7
F100
#6
ZP47#1
#5
ZP46#1
#4
ZP45#1
#3
ZP44#1
#2
ZP43#1
#1
ZP42#1
#0
ZP41#1
MV7#1
MV6#1
MV5#1
MV4#1
MV3#1
MV2#1
MV1#1
INP7#1
INP6#1
INP5#1
INP4#1
INP3#1
INP2#1
INP1#1
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
MVD7#1 MVD6#1
MVD5#1 MVD4#1 MVD3#1 MVD2#1 MVD1#1
MMI7#1
MMI5#1
MMI4#1
MMI3#1
MMI2#1
MMI1#1
MDTCH7#1 MDTCH6#1
MDTCH5#1
MDTCH4#1
MDTCH3#1
MDTCH2#1
MDTCH1#1
EADEN7 #1
EADEN5 #1
EADEN4 #1
EADEN3 #1
EADEN2 #1
EADEN1 #1
F107
F108
MMI6#1
F109
F110
F111
F112
EADEN6 #1
F113
F114
TRQL7#1 TRQL6#1 TRQL5#1 TRQL4#1 TRQL3#1 TRQL2#1 TRQL1#1
F115
F116
FRP7#1
FRP6#1
FRP5#1
FRP4#1
FRP3#1
FRP2#1
FRP1#1
F117
F118
SYN7O#1 SYN6O#1 SYN5O#1 SYN4O#1 SYN3O#1 SYN2O#1 SYN1O#1
F119
F120
ZRF7#1
ZRF6#1
ZRF5#1
ZRF4#1
ZRF3#1
ZRF2#1
ZRF1#1
F121
F122
HDO7#1 HDO6#1 HDO5#1 HDO4#1 HDO3#1 HDO2#1 HDO1#1 HDO0#1
F123
F124
1339
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
*EAXSL#1
F130
EBSYA#1
EOV0#1
EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA#1
EIALA#1 ECKZA#1 EINPA#1
F131
F132
EM28A#1
EM24A#1
EM22A#1
EM21A#1
EM18A#1
F133
EBSYB#1
EOTNB#1 EOTPB#1 EGENB#1 EDENB#1
EM14A#1
EM22B#1
EM21B#1
EM18B#1
F135
EM28B#1
F136
EBSYC#1 EOTNC#1 EOTPC#1 EGENC#1 EDENC#1 EIALC#1
EM14B#1
F137
EM24C#1
EM22C#1
EM21C#1
EM18C#1
EMFA#1
EM12A#1
EM11A#1
EIALB#1 ECKZB#1 EINPB#1
F134
EM24B#1
EABUFA#1
F138
EM28C#1
EM14C#1
F139
EBSYD#1 EOTND#1 EOTPD#1 EGEND#1 EDEND#1 EIALD#1
F140
EABUFB #1
EMFB#1
EM12B#1
EM11B#1
ECKZC#1 EINPC#1
EABUFC#1
EMFC#1
EM12C#1
EM11C#1
ECKZD#1 EINPD#1
EABUFD#1
EMFD#1
F141
EM28D#1
EM24D#1
EM22D#1
EM21D#1
EM18D#1
EM14D#1
EM12D#1
EM11D#1
F142
EM48A#1
EM44A#1
EM42A#1
EM41A#1
EM38A#1
EM34A#1
EM32A#1
EM31A#1
EM48B#1
EM44B#1
EM42B#1
EM41B#1
EM38B#1
EM34B#1
EM32B#1
EM31B#1
EM48C#1
EM44C#1
EM42C#1
EM41C#1
EM38C#1
EM34C#1
EM32C#1
EM31C#1
F143
F144
F145
F146
F147
F148
F149
1340
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EM48D#1
EM44D#1
EM42D#1
EM41D#1
EM38D#1
EM34D#1
EM32D#1
EM31D#1
F150
F151
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
F170
F171
F172
F173
F174
1341
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F175
F176
F177
EDGN#1 EPARM#1 EVAR#1 EPRG#1 EWTIO#1 ESTPIO#1 ERDIO#1 IOLNK#1
F178
SRLNO3#1 SRLNO2#1 SRLNO1#1 SRLNO0#1
F179
F180
CLRCH8#1
CLRCH7#1
CLRCH6#1
CLRCH5#1
CLRCH4#1
CLRCH3#1
CLRCH2#1
CLRCH1#1
F181
F182
EACNT7#1 EACNT6#1 EACNT5#1 EACNT4#1 EACNT3#1 EACNT2#1 EACNT1#1
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
1342
B63003EN1/02
PMC CNC
Bit number
Address
F1000
#7
OP#2
F1001
MA#2
F1002
MDRN#2
F1003
MTCHIN#2
#6
SA#2
#4
SPL#2
#3
#2
#1
#0
RWD#2
TAP#2
ENB#2
DEN#2
BAL#2
RST#2
AL#2
SRNMV#2
THRD#2
CSS#2
RPDO#2
INCH#2
MJ#2
MH#2
MINC#2
CUT#2
MEDT#2 MMEM#2 MRMT#2 MMDI#2

MREF#2
F1004
F1005
#5
STL#2
MBDT9#2
MBDT8#2 MBDT7#2
MAFL#2 MSBK#2 MABSM#1 MMLK#2 MBDT1#2

MBDT6#2 MBDT5#2
MBDT4#2
MBDT3#2 MBDT2#2
F1006
F1007
BF#2
BF#2
F1008
MF3#2
MF2#2
TF#2
SF#2
EFD#2
MF#2
EF#2
F1009
DM00#2
DM01#2
DM02#2
DM30#2
F010
M07#2
M06#2
M05#2
M04#2
M03#2
M02#2
M01#2
M00#2
F1011
M15#2
M14#2
M13#2
M12#2
M11#2
M10#2
M09#2
M08#2
F1012
M23#2
M22#2
M21#2
M20#2
M19#2
M18#2
M17#2
M16#2
F1013
M31#2
M30#2
M29#2
M28#2
M27#2
M26#2
M25#2
M24#2
F1014
M207#2
M206#2
M205#2
M204#2
M203#2
M202#2
M201#2
M200#2
F1015
M215#2
M214#2
M213#2
M212#2
M211#2
M210#2
M209#2
M208#2
F1016
M307#2
M306#2
M305#2
M304#2
M303#2
M302#2
M301#2
M300#2
F1017
M315#2
M314#2
M313#2
M312#2
M311#2
M310#2
M309#2
M308#2
F1022
S07#2
S06#2
S05#2
S04#2
S03#2
S02#2
S01#2
S00#2
F1023
S15#2
S14#2
S13#2
S12#2
S11#2
S10#2
S09#2
S08#2
F1024
S23#2
S22#2
S21#2
S20#2
S19#2
S18#2
S17#2
S16#2
F1018
F1019
F1020
F1021
1343
B63003EN1/02
F1025
#7
S31#2
#6
S30#2
#5
S29#2
#4
S28#2
#3
S27#2
#2
S26#2
#1
S25#2
#0
S24#2
F1026
T07#2
T06#2
T05#2
T04#2
T03#2
T02#2
T01#2
T00#2
F1027
T15#2
T14#2
T13#2
T12#2
T11#2
T10#2
T09#2
T08#2
F1028
T23#2
T22#2
T21#2
T20#2
T19#2
T18#2
T17#2
T16#2
F1029
T31#2
T30#2
T29#2
T28#2
T27#2
T26#2
T25#2
T24#2
F1030
B07#2
B06#2
B05#2
B04#2
B03#2
B02#2
B01#2
B00#2
F1031
B15#2
B14#2
B13#2
B12#2
B11#2
B10#2
B09#2
B08#2
F1032
B23#2
B22#2
B21#2
B20#2
B19#2
B18#2
B17#2
B16#2
F1033
B31#2
B30#2
B29#2
B28#2
B27#2
B26#2
B25#2
B24#2
F1034
GR3O#2 GR2O#2 GR1O#2
F1035
SPAL#2
R04O#2
R03O#2
R02O#2
R01O#2
F1037
R12O#2
R11O#2
R10O#2
R09O#2
F1038
ENB3#2
ENB2#2
SUCLP#2
SCLP#2
F1036
R08O#2
R07O#2
R06O#2
R05O#2
CHPCYL#2 CHPMD#2
F1039
F1040
AR7#2
AR6#2
AR5#2
AR4#2
AR3#2
AR2#2
AR1#2
AR0#2
F1041
AR15#2
AR14#2
AR13#2
AR12#2
AR11#2
AR10#2
AR09#2
AR08#2
F1042
F1043
FSPPH#2 FSPSY#2 FSCSL#2
F1044
TLMA#2 LDT2A#2 LDT1A#2 SARA#2
F1045
ORARA#2
F1046
MORA2A#2 MORA1A#2
PORA2A#2
SLVSA#2
SDTA#2
SSTA#2
ALMA#2
RCFNA#2 RCHPA#2 CFINA#2 CHPA#2
INCSTA#2 PC1DEA#2
F1047
F1048
F1049
ORARB#2
TLMB#2 LDT2B#2 LDT1B#2 SARB#2
1344
SDTB#2
SSTB#2
ALMB#2
B63003EN1/02
#7
F1050
#6
MORA2B#2 MORA1B#2
#5
#4
PORA2B#2
SLVSB#2
#3
#2
#1
#0
RCFNB#2 RCHPB#2 CFINB#2 CHPB#2
INCSTB#2 PC1DEB#2
F051
F1052
F1053
BGEACT#2
RPALM#2
RPBSY#2
F1054
F1055
F1056
F1057
UO115#2 UO114#2 UO11
F1058
F1059
F1060
ESEND#2 EREND#2
F1061
BCLP#2 BUCLP#2
#2
F1062
PRTSF#2
F1063
PSYN#2 WATO#2 RCYO#2
UO112#2 UO111#2
PSAR#2
F1064
F1065
PSE2#2
PSE1#2
TLCHI#2 TLNW#2
TLCH#2
RGSPM#2
RGSPP#2
RTRCTF#2
SYNMOD#2
PECK2#2
F1066
UO110#2 UO109#2 UO108#2
G08MD#2
RTNMVS#2
F1067
F1068
F1069
F1070
PSW08#2
PSW07#2
PSW06#2
PSW05#2
PSW04#2
PSW03#2
F1071
F1072
OUT7#2
OUT6#2
OUT5#2
OUT4#2
ZRNO#2
F1073
F1074
1345
OUT3#2
OUT2#2
PSW02#2
PSW01#2
PSW10#2
PSW09#2
OUT1#2
OUT0#2
MD4O#2 MD2O#2 MD1O#2
F1075
#7
SPO#2
B63003EN1/02
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
KEYO#2 DRNO#2 MLKO#2 SBKO#2 BDTO#2
ROV2O#2 ROV1O#2
F1076
RTO#2
F1077
RTAP#2
#1
#0
MP2O#2 MP1O#2
HS1DO#2 HS1CO#2 HS1BO#2 HS1AO#2
F1078
F1079
*JV7O#2 *JV6O#2 *JV5O#2 *JV4O#2 *JV3O#2 *JV2O#2 *JV1O#2 *JV0O#2
F1080
F1081
J4O#2
+J4O#2
J3O#2
+J3O#2
J2O#2
+J2O#2
J1O#2
+J1O#2
RVSL#2
F1082
F1083
F1084
F1085
F1086
F1087
F1088
F1089
ABTSP2#2 ABTSP1#2 ABTQSV#2
F1090
F1091
TRSPS#2
F1092
TRACT#2
F1093
F1094
ZP7#2
ZP6#2
ZP5#2
ZP4#2
ZP3#2
ZP2#2
ZP1#2
ZP27#2
ZP26#2
ZP25#2
ZP24#2
ZP23#2
ZP22#2
ZP21#2
ZP37#2
ZP36#2
ZP35#2
ZP34#2
ZP33#2
ZP32#2
ZP31#2
F1095
F1096
F1097
F1098
F1099
1346
B63003EN1/02
#7
F1100
#6
ZP47#2
#5
ZP46#2
#4
ZP45#2
#3
ZP44#2
#2
ZP43#2
#1
ZP42#2
#0
ZP41#2
MV7#2
MV6#2
MV5#2
MV4#2
MV3#2
MV2#2
MV1#2
INP7#2
INP6#2
INP5#2
INP4#2
INP3#2
INP2#2
INP1#2
F1101
F1102
F1103
F1104
F1105
F1106
MVD7#2 MVD6#2
MVD5#2 MVD4#2 MVD3#2 MVD2#2 MVD1#2
MMI7#2
MMI5#2
MMI4#2
MMI3#2
MMI2#2
MMI1#2
MDTCH7#2 MDTCH6#2
MDTCH5#2
MDTCH4#2
MDTCH3#2
MDTCH2#2
MDTCH1#2
EADEN7 #2
EADEN5 #2
EADEN4 #2
EADEN3 #2
EADEN2 #2
EADEN1 #2
F1107
F1108
MMI6#2
F1109
F1110
F1111
F1112
EADEN6 #2
F1113
F1114
TRQL7#2 TRQL6#2 TRQL5#2 TRQL4#2 TRQL3#2 TRQL2#2 TRQL1#2
F1115
F1116
FRP7#2
FRP6#2
FRP5#2
FRP4#2
FRP3#2
FRP2#2
FRP1#2
SYN7O#2 SYN6O#2
SYN5O#2 SYN4O#2
SYN3O#2
SYN2O#2 SYN1O#2
ZRF7#2
ZRF5#2
ZRF3#2
ZRF2#2
F1117
F1118
F1119
F1120
ZRF6#2
ZRF4#2
ZRF1#2
F1121
F1122
HDO7#2 HDO6#2 HDO5#2 HDO4#2 HDO3#2 HDO2#2 HDO1#2 HDO0#2
F1123
F1124
1347
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F1125
F1126
F1127
F1128
F1129
*EAXSL#2
F1130
EBSYA#2
EOV0#2
EOTNA#2
EOTP#2
EGENA#2 EDENA#2
EIALA#2 ECKZA#2 EINPA#2
F1131
F1132
EM28A#2
EM24A#2
EM22A#2
EM21A#2
EM18A#2
F1133
EBSYB#2
EOTNB#2
EOTB#2
EGENB#2 EDENB#2
EM14A#2
F1135
EM28B#2
EM24B#2
EM22B#2
EM21B#2
F1136
EBSYC#2 EOTNC#2
EOTC#2
EGENC#2 EDENC#2 EIALC#2
EM14B#2
F1137
EM18C#2
EMFA#2
EM12A#2
EM11A#2
EIALB#2 ECKZB#2 EINPB#2
F1134
EM18B#2
EABUFA#2
F1138
EM28C#2
EM24C#2
EM22C#2
EM21C#2
EM14C#2
F1139
EBSYD#2 EOTND#2
EOTD#2
EGEND#2 EDEND#2 EIALD#2
F1140
EABUFB #2
EMFB#2
EM12B#2
EM11B#2
ECKZC#2 EINPC#2
EABUFC#2
EMFC#2
EM12C#2
EM11C#2
ECKZD#2 EINPD#2
EABUFD#2
EMFD#2
F1141
EM28D#2
EM24D#2
EM22D#2
EM21D#2
EM18D#2
EM14D#2
EM12D#2
EM11D#2
F1142
EM48A#2
EM44A#2
EM42A#2
EM41A#2
EM38A#2
EM34A#2
EM32A#2
EM31A#2
EM48B#2
EM44B#2
EM42B#2
EM41B#2
EM38B#2
EM34B#2
EM32B#2
EM31B#2
EM48C#2
EM44C#2
EM42C#2
EM41C#2
EM38C#2
EM34C#2
EM32C#2
EM31C#2
F1143
F1144
F1145
F1146
F1147
F1148
F1149
1348
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EM48D#2
EM44D#2
EM42D#2
EM41D#2
EM38D#2
EM34D#2
EM32D#2
EM31D#2
F1150
F1151
F1152
F1153
F1154
F1155
F1156
F1157
F1158
F1159
F1160
F1161
F1162
F1163
F1164
F1165
F1166
F1167
F1168
F1169
F1170
F1171
F1172
F1173
F1174
1349
#7
#6
B63003EN1/02
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F1175
F1176
F1177
EDGN#2 EPARM#2 EVAR#2 EPRG#2 EWTIO#2 ESTPIO#2 ERDIO#2 IOLNK#2
F1178
SRLNO3#2 SRLNO2#2 SRLNO1#2 SRLNO0#2
F1179
F1180
CLRCH8#2
CLRCH7#2
CLRCH6#2
CLRCH5#2
CLRCH4#2
CLRCH3#2
CLRCH2#2
CLRCH1#2
F1181
F1182
EACNT7#2 EACNT6#2 EACNT5#2 EACNT4#2 EACNT3#2 EACNT2#2 EACNT1#2
F1183
F1184
F1185
F1186
F1187
F1188
F1189
F1190
F1191
F1192
F1193
F1194
1350
B63003EN1/02
A.1.3
The figure below illustrates the addresses of interface signals between the
CNC and PMC.
Series 21i/210i
Address List
CNC
G000
X000
PMC
MT
Y000
F000
Following shows table of addresses:

[Example 1]
Signals EXLM and ST are common signals, STLK is for T series only
and RLSOT and RVS are for M series only.
#7
RLSOT
G007
#6
SA
#2
ST
#1
STLK
#0
RVS
T series
M series
MT PMC
Bit number
Address
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SKIP
ESKIP
SKIP6
-MIT2
SKIP5
+MIT2
SKIP4
-MIT1
SKIP3
+MIT1
SKIP2
ZAE
SKIP8
XAE
SKIP7
(T series)
SKIP
ESKIP
ZAE
YAE
XAE
(M series)
*DEC3
*DEC2
*DEC1
X000
X001
X002
X003
X004
X005
X006
X007
*ESP
X008
X009
*DEC8
*DEC7
*DEC6
X010
X011
X012
1351
*DEC5
*DEC4
B63003EN1/02
T series/M series
PMC CNC
G000
#7
ED7
#6
ED6
#5
ED5
Bit number
#4
#3
ED4
ED3
#2
ED2
#1
ED1
#0
ED0
G001
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED9
ED8
G002
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
MFIN3
MFIN2
FIN
AFL
BFIN
TFIN
SFIN
EFIN
MFIN
SKIPP
OVC
*ABSM
ST
Address
G003
G004
G005
BFIN
G006
G007
RLSOT
EXLM
*FLWU
RLSOT3
G008
ERS
RRW
*SP
*ESP
G009
SRN
STLK
*IT
PN16
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
G010
*JV7
*JV6
*JV5
*JV4
*JV3
*JV2
*JV1
*JV0
G011
*JV15
*JV14
*JV13
*JV12
*JV11
*JV10
*JV9
*JV8
G012
*FV7
*FV6
*FV5
*FV4
*FV3
*FV2
*FV1
*FV0
ROV2
ROV1
G013
G014
G015
G016
F1D
G017
G018
HS2D
G019
RT
HS2C
HS2B
HS2A
HS1D
HS1C
HS1B
HS1A
MP2
MP1
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
G020
G021
G022
G023
G024
1352
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
*SSTP3
*SSTP2
*SSTP1
SWS3
SWS2
SWS1
*SCPF
*SUCPF
GR2
GR1
GR31
G025
G026
G027
CON
G028
PC2SLC SPSTP
G029
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
SOV6
SOV5
SOV4
SOV3
SOV2
SOV1
SOV0
R05I
R04I
R03I
R02I
R01I
R12I
R11I
R10I
R09I
R04I2
R03I2
R02I2
R01I2
R12I2
R11I2
R10I2
R09I2
R04I3
R03I3
R02I3
R01I3
R12I3
R11I3
R10I3
R09I3
SPPHS
SPSYC
G030
G031
SOV7
GR21
PKESS2 PKESS1
G032
R08I
R07I
R06I
G033
SIND
SSIN
SGN
G034
R08I2
R07I2
R06I2
G035
SIND2
SSIN2
SGN2
G036
R08I3
R07I3
R06I3
G037
SIND3
SSIN3
SGN3
G038
*BECLP *BEUCP
G039
GOQSM WOQSM
G040
WOSET
PRC
G041
HS2ID
HS2IC
G042
DMMC
G043
ZRN
R05I2
R05I3
OFN5
OFN4
OFN3
OFN2
OFN1
OFN0
HS2IB
HS2IA
HS1ID
HS1IC
HS1IB
HS1IA
HS3ID
HS3IC
HS3IB
HS3IA
MD4
MD2
MD1
MLK
BDT1
BDT3
BDT2
DNCI
G044
G045
BDT9
BDT8
BDT7
BDT6
BDT5
G046
DRN
KEY4
KEY3
KEY2
KEY1
G047
TL128
TL64
TL32
TL16
TL08
G048
TLRST
TLRSTI
TLSKP
G049
*TLV7
*TLV6
*TLV5
1353
BDT4
SBK
TL04
TL02
TL01
TL256
*TLV4
*TLV3
*TLV2
*TLV1
*TLV0
#7
B63003EN1/02
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
G050
#1
*TLV9
#0
*TLV8
G051
G052
G053
CDZ
SMZ
UINT
TMRON
G054
UI007
UI006
UI005
UI004
UI003
UI002
UI001
UI000
G055
UI015
UI014
UI013
UI012
UI011
UI010
UI009
UI008
EXWT
EXSTP
EXRD
MINP
G056
G057
G058
G059
G060
*TSB
G061
RGTSP2 RGTSP1
RGTAP
G062
*CRTOF
G063
NOZAGC
G064
ESRSYC
G065
G066
EKSET
ENBKY
IGNVRY
G067
G068
G069
G070
G071
G072
MRDYA ORCMA
RCHA
RSLA
RCHHGA MFNHGA
SFRA
SRVA
CTH1A
CTH2A
TLMHA
TLMLA
INTGA
SOCNA
MCFNA
SPSLA
*ESPA
ARSTA
INCMDA
OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA
ROTAA
INDXA
MPOFA
SLVA
MORCMA
CTH2B
TLMHB
TLMLB
G073
G074
MRDYB ORCMB
SFRB
1354
SRVB
CTH1B
B63003EN1/02
G075
G076
#7
RCHB
#6
RSLB
RCHHGB MFNHGB
#5
INTGB
#4
SOCNB
#3
MCFNB
#2
SPSLB
#1
*ESPB
#0
ARSTB
INCMDB
OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB
ROTAB
INDXB
MPOFB
SLVB
MORCMB
SHA03
SHA02
SHA01
SHA00
SHA11
SHA10
SHA09
SHA08
SHB03
SHB02
SHB01
SHB00
SHB11
SHB10
SHB09
SHB08
G077
G078
SHA07
SHA06
SHA05
SHA04
G079
G080
SHB07
SHB06
SHB05
SHB04
G081
G082
Reserved for ordermade macro
G083
Reserved for ordermade macro
G084
G085
G086
G087
G088
G089
G090
G091
G092
BGEN
SRLNI3
SRLNI2
SRLNI1
SRLNI0
BGIALM
BGION
IOLS
IOLACK
G093
G094
G095
G096
HROV
G097
G098
EKC7
EKC6
EKC5
G099
1355
EKC4
EKC3
EKC2
EKC1
EKC0
#7
B63003EN1/02
#6
#5
G100
#4
#3
+J4
#2
+J3
#1
+J2
#0
+J1
J4
J3
J2
J1
MI4
MI3
MI2
MI1
MLK4
MLK3
MLK2
MLK1
+LM4
+LM3
+LM2
+LM1
LM4
LM3
LM2
LM1
*+L4
*+L3
*+L2
*+L1
*L4
*L3
*L2
*L1
*+ED4
*+ED3
*+ED2
*+ED1
*ED4
*ED3
*ED2
*ED1
G101
G102
G103
G104
G105
G106
G107
G108
G109
G110
G111
G112
G113
G114
G115
G116
G117
G118
G119
G120
G121
G122
PKESS2 PKESS1
G123
1356
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
G124
#3
DTCH4
#2
DTCH3
#1
DTCH2
#0
DTCH1
SVF4
SVF3
SVF2
SVF1
*IT4
*IT3
*IT2
*IT1
+MIT4
+MIT3
+MIT2
+MIT1
MIT4
MIT3
MIT2
MIT1
EAX4
EAX3
EAX2
EAX1
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
G125
G126
G127
G128
G129
G130
G131
G132
G133
G134
G135
G136
G137
G138
G139
G140
SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
G141
G142
EBUFA
ECLRA
ESTPA
ESOFA
G143
EMSBKA
EC6A
EC5A
EC4A
EC3A
EC2A
EC1A
EC0A
G144
EIF7A
EIF6A
EIF5A
EIF4A
EIF3A
EIF2A
EIF1A
EIF0A
G145
EIF15A
EIF14A
EIF13A
EIF12A
EIF11A
EIF10A
EIF9A
EIF8A
G146
EID7A
EID6A
EID5A
EID4A
EID3A
EID2A
EID1A
EID0A
G147
EID15A
EID14A
EID13A
EID12A
EID11A
EID10A
EID9A
EID8A
G148
EID23A
EID22A
EID21A
EID20A
EID19A
EID18A
EID17A
EID16A
1357
ESBKA EMBUFA
EFINA
B63003EN1/02
G149
#7
EID31A
#6
EID30A
#5
EID29A
#4
EID28A
#3
EID27A
#2
EID26A
G150
DRNE
RTE
OVCE
G151
*FV7E
*FV6E
*FV5E
*FV4E
*FV3E
G154
EBUFB
ECLRB
ESTPB
ESOFB
ESBKB EMBUFB
G155
EMSBKB
EC6B
EC5B
EC4B
EC3B
EC2B
EC1B
EC0B
G156
EIF7B
EIF6B
EIF5B
EIF4B
EIF3B
EIF2B
EIF1B
EIF0B
G157
EIF15B
EIF14B
EIF13B
EIF12B
EIF11B
EIF10B
EIF9B
EIF8B
G158
EID7B
EID6B
EID5B
EID4B
EID3B
EID2B
EID1B
EID0B
G159
EID15B
EID14B
EID13B
EID12B
EID11B
EID10B
EID9B
EID8B
G160
EID23B
EID22B
EID21B
EID20B
EID19B
EID18B
EID17B
EID16B
G161
EID31B
EID30B
EID29B
EID28B
EID27B
EID26B
EID25B
EID24B
G166
EBUFC
ECLRC
ESTPC
ESOFC
ESBKC EMBUFC
G167
EMSBKC
EC6C
EC5C
EC4C
EC3C
EC2C
EC1C
EC0C
G168
EIF7C
EIF6C
EIF5C
EIF4C
EIF3C
EIF2C
EIF1C
EIF0C
G169
EIF15C
EIF14C
EIF13C
EIF12C
EIF11C
EIF10C
EIF9C
EIF8C
G170
EID7C
EID6C
EID5C
EID4C
EID3C
EID2C
EID1C
EID0C
G171
EID15C
EID14C
EID13C
EID12C
EID11C
EID10C
EID9C
EID8C
G172
EID23C
EID22C
EID21C
EID20C
EID19C
EID18C
EID17C
EID16C
G173
EID31C
EID30C
EID29C
EID28C
EID27C
EID26C
EID25C
EID24C
*FV2E
#1
EID25A
#0
EID24A
ROV2E
ROV1E
*FV1E
*FV0E
G152
G153
EFINB
G162
G163
G164
G165
1358
EFINC
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
G178
EBUFD
ECLRD
ESTPD
ESOFD
G179
EMSBKD
EC6D
EC5D
EC4D
EC3D
EC2D
EC1D
EC0D
G180
EIF7D
EIF6D
EIF5D
EIF4D
EIF3D
EIF2D
EIF1D
EIF0D
G181
EIF15D
EIF14D
EIF13D
EIF12D
EIF11D
EIF10D
EIF9D
EIF8D
G182
EID7D
EID6D
EID5D
EID4D
EID3D
EID2D
EID1D
EID0D
G183
EID15D
EID14D
EID13D
EID12D
EID11D
EID10D
EID9D
EID8D
G184
EID23D
EID22D
EID21D
EID20D
EID19D
EID18D
EID17D
EID16D
G185
EID31D
EID30D
EID29D
EID28D
EID27D
EID26D
EID25D
EID24D
G174
G175
G176
G177
ESBKD EMBUFD
EFIND
G186
G187
G188
G189
G190
G191
G192
IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
G193
G194
G195
G196
G197
G198
NPOS4
1359
NPOS3
NPOS2
NPOS1
#7
B63003EN1/02
#6
#5
G199
G200
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G206
G207
G208
G209
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
G220
G221
G222
1360
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
B63003EN1/02
CNC PMC
Bit number
Address
F000
#7
OP
#6
SA
F001
MA
F002
MDRN
CUT
F003
MTCHIN
MEDT
F004
F005
MBDT9
MBDT8
#5
STL
#4
SPL
#3
#2
#1
#0
RWD
TAP
ENB
DEN
BAL
RST
AL
SRNMV
THRD
CSS
RPDO
INCH
MMEM
MRMT
MMDI
MJ
MH
MINC
MREF
MAFL
MSBK
MABSM
MMLK
MBDT1
MBDT7
MBDT6
MBDT5
MBDT4
MBDT3
MBDT2
BF
TF
SF
EFD
MF
F006
F007
BF
F008
MF3
MF2
EF
F009
DM00
DM01
DM02
DM30
F010
M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M01
M00
F011
M15
M14
M13
M12
M11
M10
M09
M08
F012
M23
M22
M21
M20
M19
M18
M17
M16
F013
M31
M30
M29
M28
M27
M26
M25
M24
F014
M207
M206
M205
M204
M203
M202
M201
M200
F015
M215
M214
M213
M212
M211
M210
M209
M208
F016
M307
M306
M305
M304
M303
M302
M301
M300
F017
M315
M314
M313
M312
M311
M310
M309
M308
F022
S07
S06
S05
S04
S03
S02
S01
S00
F023
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S09
S08
F024
S23
S22
S21
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
F018
F019
F020
F021
1361
B63003EN1/02
F025
#7
S31
#6
S30
#5
S29
#4
S28
#3
S27
#2
S26
#1
S25
#0
S24
F026
T07
T06
T05
T04
T03
T02
T01
T00
F027
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
T10
T09
T08
F028
T23
T22
T21
T20
T19
T18
T17
T16
F029
T31
T30
T29
T28
T27
T26
T25
T24
F030
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
B00
F031
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
F032
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
F033
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
GR3O
GR2O
GR1O
F034
F035
F036
SPAL
R08O
R07O
R06O
R05O
R04O
R03O
R02O
R01O
F037
R12O
R11O
R10O
R09O
F038
ENB3
ENB2
SUCLP
SCLP
F039
F040
AR7
AR6
AR5
AR4
AR3
AR2
AR1
AR0
F041
AR15
AR14
AR13
AR12
AR11
AR10
AR09
AR08
SYCAL
FSPPH
FSPSY
FSCSL
F042
F043
F044
F045
ORARA
TLMA
LDT2A
LDT1A
SARA
SDTA
SSTA
ALMA
F046
MORA2A
MORA1A
PORA2A
SLVSA
RCFNA
RCHPA
CFINA
CHPA
INCSTA
PC1DEA
SSTB
ALMB
F047
F048
F049
ORARB
TLMB
LDT2B
1362
LDT1B
SARB
SDTB
B63003EN1/02
F050
#7
#6
#5
MORA2B
MORA1B
PORA2B
#4
SLVSB
#3
RCFNB
#2
RCHPB
F051
#1
CFINB
#0
CHPB
INCSTB
PC1DEB
F052
F053
EKENB
BGEACT
RPALM
RPBSY PRGDPL
INHKY
F054
UO007
UO006
UO005
UO004
UO003
UO002
UO001
UO000
F055
UO015
UO014
UO013
UO012
UO011
UO010
UO009
UO008
F056
UO107
UO106
UO105
UO104
UO103
UO102
UO101
UO100
F057
UO115
UO114
UO113
UO112
UO111
UO110
UO109
UO108
F058
UO123
UO122
UO121
UO120
UO119
UO118
UO117
UO116
F059
UO131
UO130
UO129
UO128
UO127
UO126
UO125
UO124
F060
ESEND
EREND
F061
BCLP
BUCLP
TLNW
TLCH
RGSPM
RGSPP
F062
PRTSF
F063
PSYN
F064
TLCHI
F065
F066
PECK2
G08MD
F067
F068
F069
F070

PSW08
PSW07
PSW06
PSW05
PSW04
PSW03
PSW02
PSW01
PSW10
PSW09
OUT2
OUT1
OUT0
MD4O
MD2O
MD1O
F071
F072
OUT7
OUT6
OUT5
F073
OUT4
ZRNO
F074
1363
OUT3
F075
#7
SPO
B63003EN1/02
#6
KEYO
F076
F077
#5
DRNO
#4
MLKO
#3
SBKO
ROV2O
ROV1O
RTAP
RTO
#2
BDTO
#1
#0
MP2O
MP1O
HS1DO
HS1CO
HS1BO
HS1AO
F078
*FV7O
*FV6O
*FV5O
*FV4O
*FV3O
*FV2O
*FV1O
*FV0O
F079
*JV7O
*JV6O
*JV5O
*JV4O
*JV3O
*JV2O
*JV1O
*JV0O
F080
*JV15O
*JV14O
*JV13O
*JV12O
*JV11O
*JV10O
*JV9O
*JV8O
F081
J4O
+ J4O
J3O
+ J3O
J2O
+ J2O
J1O
+ J1O
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090
ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV
F091
F092
F093
F094
ZP4
ZP3
ZP2
ZP1
ZP24
ZP23
ZP22
ZP21
ZP34
ZP33
ZP32
ZP31
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
1364
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
F100
#4
#3
ZP44
#2
ZP43
#1
ZP42
#0
ZP41
MV4
MV3
MV2
MV1
INP4
INP3
INP2
INP1
MVD4
MVD3
MVD2
MVD1
MMI4
MMI3
MMI2
MMI1
MDTCH4
MDTCH3
MDTCH2
MDTCH1
EADEN4
EADEN3
EADEN2
EADEN1
TRQL4
TRQL3
TRQL2
TRQL1
ZRF4
ZRF3
ZRF2
ZRF1
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F109
F110
F111
F112
F113
F114
F115
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
HDO0
F123
F124
1365
#7
B63003EN1/02
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EGENA
EDENA
EIALA
ECKZA
EINPA
EABUFA
EMFA
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
*EAXSL
F130
EBSYA
EOV0
EOTNA
EOTPA
F131
F132
EM28A
EM24A
EM22A
EM21A
EM18A
EM14A
EM12A
EM11A
F133
EBSYB
EOTNB
EOTPB
EGENB
EDENB
EIALB
ECKZB
EINPB
EABUFB
EMFB
F134
F135
EM28B
EM24B
EM22B
EM21B
EM18B
EM14B
EM12B
EM11B
F136
EBSYC
EOTNC
EOTPC
EGENC
EDENC
EIALC
ECKZC
EINPC
EABUFC
EMFC
F137
F138
EM28C
EM24C
EM22C
EM21C
EM18C
EM14C
EM12C
EM11C
F139
EBSYD
EOTND
EOTPD
EGEND
EDEND
EIALD
ECKZD
EINPD
EABUFD
EMFD
F140
F141
EM28D
EM24D
EM22D
EM21D
EM18D
EM14D
EM12D
EM11D
F142
EM48A
EM44A
EM42A
EM41A
EM38A
EM34A
EM32A
EM31A
EM48B
EM44B
EM42B
EM41B
EM38B
EM34B
EM32B
EM31B
EM48C
EM44C
EM42C
EM41C
EM38C
EM34C
EM32C
EM31C
F143
F144
F145
F146
F147
F148
F149
1366
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EM48D
EM44D
EM42D
EM41D
EM38D
EM34D
EM32D
EM31D
F150
F151
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
F170
F171
F172
F173
F174
1367
B63003EN1/02
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EDGN
EPARM
EVAR
EPRG
EWTIO
ESTPIO
ERDIO
IOLNK
SRLNO3
SRLNO2
SRLNO1
SRLNO0
CLRCH4
CLRCH3
CLRCH2
CLRCH1
EACNT4
EACNT3
EACNT2
EACNT1
F175
F176
F177
F178
F179
F180
F181
F182
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
1368
B63003EN1/02
A.1.4
Series 20i Address List
The following dialog shows the relationships between the addresses for
the interface signals between the CNC and PMC.
CNC
G000
PMC
MT
X000
Y000
F000
If a signal in an item common to both T and F series is disabled for either

) as shown below.
model, its name is indicated by hatching (
[Example 1]
EXLM and ST are common to both T and F series. STLK is valid only
for the T series. RLSOT is valid only for the M series.
#7
RLSOT
G007
#6
EXLM
#2
ST
#1
STLK
#0
T series
M series
MT PMC
Address
7
Bit number
4
3
X000
X001
X002
X003
X004
SKIP
ESKIP
MIT2
+MIT2
MIT1
+MIT1
*DEC4
*DEC3
X005
X006
X007
*ESP
X008
X009
X010
X011
X012
1369
*DEC2
*DEC1
B63003EN1/02
T series/F series
PMC CNC
Bit number
Address
G000
7
ED7
6
ED6
5
ED5
4
ED4
3
ED3
2
ED2
1
ED1
0
ED0
G001
ED15
ED14
ED13
ED12
ED11
ED10
ED9
ED8
G002
ESTB
EA6
EA5
EA4
EA3
EA2
EA1
EA0
MFIN3
MFIN2
FIN
SFIN
EFIN
MFIN
G003
G004
G005
AFL
G006
SKIPP
TFIN
OVC
G007
RLSOT
EXLM
*FLWU
G008
ERS
RRW
*SP
G009
*ABSM
ST
SRN
STLK
*ESP
*IT
PN16
PN8
PN4
PN2
PN1
G010
*JV7
*JV6
*JV5
*JV4
*JV3
*JV2
*JV1
*JV0
G011
*JV15
*JV14
*JV13
*JV12
*JV11
*JV10
*JV9
*JV8
G012
*FV7
*FV6
*FV5
*FV4
*FV3
*FV2
*FV1
*FV0
ROV2
ROV1
G013
G014
G015
G016
G017
G018
HS2D
G019
RT
HS2C
HS2B
HS2A
HS1D
HS1C
HS1B
HS1A
MP2
MP1
HS3D
HS3C
HS3B
HS3A
HS4D
HS4C
HS4B
HS4A
G020
G021
G022
G023
HDLF
G024
1370
B63003EN1/02
G025
G026
G027
G028
G029
GR2
GR1
*SSTP
SOR
SAR
SOV7
SOV6
SOV5
SOV4
SOV3
SOV2
SOV1
SOV0
G032
R08I
R07I
R06I
R05I
R04I
R03I
R02I
R01I
G033
SIND
SSIN
SGN
R12I
R11I
R10I
R09I
HS2ID
HS2IC
HS2IB
HS1ID
HS1IC
HS1IB
HS1IA
HS3ID
HS3IC
HS3IB
HS3IA
MD4
MD2
MD1
MLK
BDT1
G030
G031
G034
G035
G036
G037
G038
G039
G040
G041
HS2IA
G042
G043
ZRN
DNCI
G044
G045
G046
DRN
KEY4
KEY3
G047
G048
G049
1371
KEY2
KEY1
SBK
B63003EN1/02
G050
G051
G052
G053
CDZ
SMZ
TMRON
G054
UI007
UI006
UI005
UI004
UI003
UI002
UI001
UI000
G055
UI015
UI014
UI013
UI012
UI011
UI010
UI009
UI008
EXWT
EXSTP
EXRD
MINP
G056
G057
G058
G059
G060
G061
RGTAP
G062
*CRTOF
G063
G064
G065
G066
EKSET
ENBKY
IGNVRY
G067
G068
G069
G070
G071
G072
MRDYA ORCMA
RCHA
RSLA
RCHHGA MFNHGA
SFRA
SRVA
CTH1A
CTH2A
TLMHA
TLMLA
INTGA
SOCNA
MCFNA
SPSLA
*ESPA
ARSTA
INCMDA
OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA
ROTAA
INDXA
SLVA
MORCMA
G073
MPOFA
G074
1372
B63003EN1/02
G075
G076
G077
G078
SHA07
SHA06
SHA05
SHA04
G079
SHA03
SHA02
SHA01
SHA00
SHA11
SHA10
SHA09
SHA08
Ja
+Ja
Jg
+Jg
MP22
MP21
G080
G081
G082
G083
G084
G085
G086
G087
MP42
MP41
G088
HS4ID
HS4IC
MP32
HS4IB
MP31
HS4IA
G089
G090
G091
G092
BGEN
SRLNI3
SRLNI2
SRLNI1
SRLNI0
BGIALM
BGION
IOLS
IOLACK
G093
G094
G095
G096
HROV
G097
G098
EKC7
EKC6
EKC5
G099
1373
EKC4
EKC3
EKC2
EKC1
EKC0
B63003EN1/02
G100
3
+J4
2
+J3
1
+J2
0
+J1
J4
J3
J2
J1
MI4
MI3
MI2
MI1
MLK4
MLK3
MLK2
MLK1
+LM4
+LM3
+LM2
+LM1
LM4
LM3
LM2
LM1
*+L4
*+L3
*+L2
*+L1
*L4
*L3
*L2
*L1
G101
G102
G103
G104
G105
G106
G107
G108
G109
G110
G111
G112
G113
G114
G115
G116
G117
G118
G119
G120
G121
G122
G123
1374
B63003EN1/02
G124
G125
G126
SVF4
SVF3
SVF2
SVF1
*IT4
*IT3
*IT2
*IT1
+MIT4
+MIT3
+MIT2
+MIT1
MIT4
MIT3
MIT2
MIT1
EAX4
EAX3
EAX2
EAX1
G127
G128
G129
G130
G131
G132
G133
G134
G135
G136
G137
G138
G139
G140
G141
G142
EBUFA
ECLRA
ESTPA
ESOFA
G143
EMSBKA
EC6A
EC5A
EC4A
EC3A
EC2A
EC1A
EC0A
G144
EIF7A
EIF6A
EIF5A
EIF4A
EIF3A
EIF2A
EIF1A
EIF0A
G145
EIF15A
EIF14A
EIF13A
EIF12A
EIF11A
EIF10A
EIF9A
EIF8A
G146
EID7A
EID6A
EID5A
EID4A
EID3A
EID2A
EID1A
EID0A
G147
EID15A
EID14A
EID13A
EID12A
EID11A
EID10A
EID9A
EID8A
G148
EID23A
EID22A
EID21A
EID20A
EID19A
EID18A
EID17A
EID16A
1375
ESBKA EMBUFA
EFINA
B63003EN1/02
G149
7
EID31A
6
EID30A
5
EID29A
4
EID28A
3
EID27A
2
EID26A
G150
DRNE
RTE
OVCE
G151
*FV7E
*FV6E
*FV5E
*FV4E
*FV3E
G154
EBUFB
ECLRB
ESTPB
ESOFB
ESBKB EMBUFB
G155
EMSBKB
EC6B
EC5B
EC4B
EC3B
EC2B
EC1B
EC0B
G156
EIF7B
EIF6B
EIF5B
EIF4B
EIF3B
EIF2B
EIF1B
EIF0B
G157
EIF15B
EIF14B
EIF13B
EIF12B
EIF11B
EIF10B
EIF9B
EIF8B
G158
EID7B
EID6B
EID5B
EID4B
EID3B
EID2B
EID1B
EID0B
G159
EID15B
EID14B
EID13B
EID12B
EID11B
EID10B
EID9B
EID8B
G160
EID23B
EID22B
EID21B
EID20B
EID19B
EID18B
EID17B
EID16B
G161
EID31B
EID30B
EID29B
EID28B
EID27B
EID26B
EID25B
EID24B
G166
EBUFC
ECLRC
ESTPC
ESOFC
ESBKC EMBUFC
G167
EMSBKC
EC6C
EC5C
EC4C
EC3C
EC2C
EC1C
EC0C
G168
EIF7C
EIF6C
EIF5C
EIF4C
EIF3C
EIF2C
EIF1C
EIF0C
G169
EIF15C
EIF14C
EIF13C
EIF12C
EIF11C
EIF10C
EIF9C
EIF8C
G170
EID7C
EID6C
EID5C
EID4C
EID3C
EID2C
EID1C
EID0C
G171
EID15C
EID14C
EID13C
EID12C
EID11C
EID10C
EID9C
EID8C
G172
EID23C
EID22C
EID21C
EID20C
EID19C
EID18C
EID17C
EID16C
G173
EID31C
EID30C
EID29C
EID28C
EID27C
EID26C
EID25C
EID24C
*FV2E
1
EID25A
0
EID24A
ROV2E
ROV1E
*FV1E
*FV0E
G152
G153
EFINB
G162
G163
G164
G165
1376
EFINC
B63003EN1/02
G174
G175
G176
G177
G178
EBUFD
ECLRD
ESTPD
ESOFD
ESBKD EMBUFD
EFIND
G179
EMSBKD
EC6D
EC5D
EC4D
EC3D
EC2D
EC1D
EC0D
G180
EIF7D
EIF6D
EIF5D
EIF4D
EIF3D
EIF2D
EIF1D
EIF0D
G181
EIF15D
EIF14D
EIF13D
EIF12D
EIF11D
EIF10D
EIF9D
EIF8D
G182
EID7D
EID6D
EID5D
EID4D
EID3D
EID2D
EID1D
EID0D
G183
EID15D
EID14D
EID13D
EID12D
EID11D
EID10D
EID9D
EID8D
G184
EID23D
EID22D
EID21D
EID20D
EID19D
EID18D
EID17D
EID16D
G185
EID31D
EID30D
EID29D
EID28D
EID27D
EID26D
EID25D
EID24D
G186
G187
G188
G189
G190
G191
G192
IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1
G193
G194
G195
G196
G197
G198
NPOS4
1377
NPOS3
NPOS2
NPOS1
B63003EN1/02
G199
G200
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G206
G207
G208
G209
G210
G211
G212
G213
G214
G215
G216
G217
G218
G219
G220
G221
G222
1378
B63003EN1/02
CNC PMC
Bit number
Address
F000
7
OP
6
SA
F001
MA
F002
MDRN
CUT
F003
MTCHIN
MEDT
F004
5
STL
4
SPL
0
RWD
TAP
ENB
DEN
BAL
RST
AL
SRNMV
THRD
CSS
RPDO
INCH
MMEM
MRMT
MMDI
MJ
MH
MREF
MAFL
MSBK
MABSM
MMLK
MBDT1
TF
SF
EFD
MF
F005
F006
F007
F008
MF3
MF2
EF
F009
DM00
DM01
DM02
DM30
F010
M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M01
M00
F011
M15
M14
M13
M12
M11
M10
M09
M08
F012
M23
M22
M21
M20
M19
M18
M17
M16
F013
M31
M30
M29
M28
M27
M26
M25
M24
F014
M207
M206
M205
M204
M203
M202
M201
M200
F015
M215
M214
M213
M212
M211
M210
M209
M208
F016
M307
M306
M305
M304
M303
M302
M301
M300
F017
M315
M314
M313
M312
M311
M310
M309
M308
F022
S07
S06
S05
S04
S03
S02
S01
S00
F023
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S09
S08
F024
S23
S22
S21
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
F018
F019
F020
F021
1379
B63003EN1/02
F025
7
S31
6
S30
5
S29
4
S28
3
S27
2
S26
1
S25
0
S24
F026
T07
T06
T05
T04
T03
T02
T01
T00
F027
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
T10
T09
T08
F028
T23
T22
T21
T20
T19
T18
T17
T16
F029
T31
T30
T29
T28
T27
T26
T25
T24
F030
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
B00
F031
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
F032
B23
B22
B21
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
F033
B31
B30
B29
B28
B27
B26
B25
B24
GR3O
GR2O
GR1O
R04O
R03O
R02O
R01O
R12O
R11O
R10O
R09O
F034
F035
F036
R08O
R07O
R06O
R05O
F037
F038
F039
F040
F041
F042
F043
F044
F045
ORARA
TLMA
LDT2A
LDT1A
SARA
SDTA
SSTA
ALMA
F046
MORA2A
MORA1A
PORA2A
SLVSA
RCFNA
RCHPA
CFINA
CHPA
INCSTA
PC1DEA
F047
F048
F049
1380
B63003EN1/02
F050
F051
F052
F053
EKENB
BGEACT
RPALM
RPBSY PRGDPL
INHKY
F054
UO007
UO006
UO005
UO004
UO003
UO002
UO001
UO000
F055
UO015
UO014
UO013
UO012
UO011
UO010
UO009
UO008
F056
UO107
UO106
UO105
UO104
UO103
UO102
UO101
UO100
F057
UO115
UO114
UO113
UO112
UO111
UO110
UO109
UO108
F058
UO123
UO122
UO121
UO120
UO119
UO118
UO117
UO116
F059
UO131
UO130
UO129
UO128
UO127
UO126
UO125
UO124
ESEND
EREND
RGSPM
RGSPP
F060
F061
F062
PRTSF
F063
F064
F065
F066
FEED0
G08MD
F067
F068
F069
F070
F071
F072
OUT7
OUT6
OUT5
F073
OUT4
ZRNO
F074
1381
OUT3
OUT2
OUT1
OUT0
MD4O
MD2O
MD1O
F075
7
SPO
B63003EN1/02
6
KEYO
F076
F077
5
DRNO
4
MLKO
3
SBKO
ROV2O
ROV1O
RTAP
RTO
2
BDTO
MP2O
MP1O
HS1DO
HS1CO
HS1BO
HS1AO
F078
*FV7O
*FV6O
*FV5O
*FV4O
*FV3O
*FV2O
*FV1O
*FV0O
F079
*JV7O
*JV6O
*JV5O
*JV4O
*JV3O
*JV2O
*JV1O
*JV0O
F080
*JV15O
*JV14O
*JV13O
*JV12O
*JV11O
*JV10O
*JV9O
*JV8O
F081
J4O
+ J4O
J3O
+ J3O
J2O
+ J2O
J1O
+ J1O
F082
F083
F084
F085
F086
F087
F088
F089
F090
ABTSP1 ABTQSV
F091
F092
F093
F094
ZP4
ZP3
ZP2
ZP1
ZP24
ZP23
ZP22
ZP21
F095
F096
F097
F098
F099
1382
B63003EN1/02
F100
F101
F102
MV4
MV3
MV2
MV1
INP4
INP3
INP2
INP1
MVD4
MVD3
MVD2
MVD1
MMI4
MMI3
MMI2
MMI1
EADEN4
EADEN3
EADEN2
EADEN1
TRQL2
TRQL1
ZRF2
ZRF1
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F109
F110
F111
F112
F113
F114
F115
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
ZRF4
F121
F122
F123
F124
1383
ZRF3
B63003EN1/02
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
*EAXSL
F130
EBSYA
EOV0
EOTNA
EOTPA
EGENA
EDENA
EIALA
F131
ECKZA
EINPA
EABUFA
EMFA
F132
EM28A
EM24A
EM22A
EM21A
EM18A
EM14A
EM12A
EM11A
F133
EBSYB
EOTNB
EOTPB
EGENB
EDENB
EIALB
ECKZB
EINPB
EABUFB
EMFB
F134
F135
EM28B
EM24B
EM22B
EM21B
EM18B
EM14B
EM12B
EM11B
F136
EBSYC
EOTNC
EOTPC
EGENC
EDENC
EIALC
ECKZC
EINPC
EABUFC
EMFC
F137
F138
EM28C
EM24C
EM22C
EM21C
EM18C
EM14C
EM12C
EM11C
F139
EBSYD
EOTND
EOTPD
EGEND
EDEND
EIALD
ECKZD
EINPD
EABUFD
EMFD
F140
F141
EM28D
EM24D
EM22D
EM21D
EM18D
EM14D
EM12D
EM11D
F142
EM48A
EM44A
EM42A
EM41A
EM38A
EM34A
EM32A
EM31A
EM48B
EM44B
EM42B
EM41B
EM38B
EM34B
EM32B
EM31B
EM48C
EM44C
EM42C
EM41C
EM38C
EM34C
EM32C
EM31C
F143
F144
F145
F146
F147
F148
F149
1384
B63003EN1/02
F150
F151
EM48D
EM44D
EM42D
F152
F153
F154
F155
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
F169
F170
F171
F172
F173
F174
1385
EM41D
EM38D
EM34D
EM32D
EM31D
B63003EN1/02
F175
F176
F177
EDGN
EPARM
EVAR
F178
EPRG
EWTIO
ESTPIO
ERDIO
IOLNK
SRLNO3
SRLNO2
SRLNO1
SRLNO0
EACNT4
EACNT3
EACNT2
EACNT1
F179
F180
F181
F182
F183
F184
F185
F186
F187
F188
F189
F190
F191
F192
F193
F194
F195
1386
B63003EN1/02
A.2
SIGNAL SUMMARY
A.2.1
Signal Summary
(In Order of Functions)
Function
Data input/output
with I/O Link
External I/O device

control
Signal name
Symbol
f
F
:
:
Address
Available
Available only with
2path control
Unavailable
T
M
Section
series series
F177#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
EXRD
G058#1
13.8,
13.5
External read/punch stop signal
EXSTP
G058#2
13.8,
13.5
External punch start signal
EXWT
G058#3
13.8,
13.5
I/O Link check signal
IOLACK
G092#0
Slave I/O Link selection signal
IOLINK
F177#0
I/O Link specification signal
IOLS
G092#1
f
f
f
f
f
f
RPALM
F053#3
13.8,
13.5
PRBSY
F053#2
13.8,
13.5
Group number specification signals
SRLNI0 to SRLNI3
G091#0 to #3
Group number output signals
SRLNO0 to SRLNO3
F178#0 to #3
EXRD
G058#1
EXWT
G058#3
EXSTP
G058#2
Background editing signal
BGEACT
F053#4
RPBSY
F053#2
RPALM
F053#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Power Mate background operation

signal
BGEN
G092#4
Power Mate read/write alarm signal
BGIALM
G092#3
Power Mate read/write busy signal
BGION
G092#2
Slave diagnosis selection signal
EDGN
F177#7
Slave parameter selection signal
EPARM
F177#6
Slave program selection signal
EPRG
F177#4
Slave external read start signal
ERDIO
F177#1
Slave read/write stop signal
ESTPIO
F177#2
Slave macro variable selection signal
EVAR
F177#5
Slave external write start signal
EWTIO
1387
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13 5
13.5
Function
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
Address
T
M
Section
series series
F090#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
ABTSP1
F090#1
Secondspindle abnormal load

detected signal
ABTSP2
F090#2
Thirdspindle abnormal load detected

signal
ABTSP3
F090#3
Position display neglect signals
NPOS1 to NPOS8
G198
2nd M function code signals
M200 to M215
F014 to F015
3rd M function code signals
M300 to M315
F016 to F017
2nd M function strobe signal
MF2
F008#4
3rd M function strobe signal
MF3
F008#5
Inch input signal
INCH
F002#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
Baxis clamp signal
BCLP
F061#1
Baxis clamp completion signal
*BECLP
G038#7
Baxis unclamp signal
BUCLP
F061#0
Baxis unclamp completion signal
*BEUCP
G038#6
Inposition check
Inposition signals
INP1 to INP8
F104
F 1digit feed
(M series)
F 1digit feed selection signal
F1D
G016#7
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Error detection
(T series)
Error detection signal
SMZ
G053#6
*+L1 to *+L8
G114
Overtravel signal
Overtravel signals
*L1 to *L8
G116
Alarm signal
AL
F001#0
BAL
F001#2
Servo axis abnormal load detected

signal
ABTQSV
Firstspindle abnormal load detected

signal
Alarm signal
Abnormal load
detection
Position display
neglect
Multiple M
commands in a
single
g block
Inch/metric
conversion

(M series)
Override cancel
OVC
G006#4
Feedrate override
Feedrate override signals
*FV0 to *FV7
G012
Optional block skip signals
BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9
G044#0, G045
Optional block skip check signals
MBDT1, MBDT2 to
MBDT9
G004#0, F005
External key input mode selection

signal
ENBKY
G066#1
Key code signals
EKC0 to EKC7
G098
EKSET
G066#7
Key code read completion signal
EKENB
F053#7
INHKY
F053#0
Program screen display mode signal
PRGDPL
F053#1
*+ED1 to *+ED8
G118
*ED1 to *ED8
G120
O tional block
Optional
skip/addition of
optional block skip
External key input

in ut
Externaldeceleration
External
deceleration External deceleration signals
1388
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
24
2.4
2.10
9.15
12.1.10
83
8.3
11.4
11 11
11.11
7.2.6.1
7.1.5
7.2.6.3
231
2.3.1
7.1.7.4
7.1.7.2
5.5
15.5
719
7.1.9
B63003EN1/02
Function
Signal name
Symbol
Address
T
M
Section
series series
F060#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
ESEND
F060#1
EF
F008#0
11.8
External program
input
External program input start signal
MINP
G058#0
13.7
External workpiece
number search
Workpiece number search signals
PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8,

PN16
G009#0 to 4
Machining restart start signal
RTNCY
G064#0
Machining restart point selection signal
SLCSEQ
G064#1
Machining restart completion signal
RCYO
F063#5
Machining start point signal
RTNMVS
F066#3
Input signals for custom macro
UI000 to UI015
G054, G055
UO000 to UO015
F054, F055
UO100 to UO131
F056 to F059
Target part count reached signal
PRTSF
F062#7
Generalpurpose integrating meter

start signal
TMRON
G053#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Automatic screen erase disable signal
*CRTOF
G062#1
Retract signal
RTRCT
G066#4
Retract completed signal
RTRCTF
F065#4
EGB mode signal
SYNMOD
F065#6
Simple synchronous axis selection

signals
SYNC1 to SYNC8
G138
f
f
f
f
Simple synchronous manual feed axis

selection signals
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8
G140
NOZAGC
G063#5
1.11
Path selection signal (tool post

selection signal)
HEAD
G063#0
2.7
Tool axis direction handle feed mode

signal
ALNGH
G023#7
3.4.1
Tool axis rightangle direction handle

feed mode signal
RGHTH
G023#6
3.4.2
Data signals for external data input
ED0 to ED15
G000, G001
Address signals for external data input
EA0 to EA6
G002#0 to #6
Read signal for external data input
ESTB
G002#7
Read completion signal for external

data input
EREND
Search completion signal for external

data input
External motion
function (M series)
E ternal data input

External
inp t
Machining return and

restart
(M series)
Custom macro signal

Output signals for custom macro
Run hour and part

count display
Screen
erase/automatic
screen erase
Simple electronic
gearbox
(M series)
Sim le synchronous
Simple
control
Angular axis
Angular axis control disable signal for
control/arbitraryaxis
perpendicular axis
angular axis control
Path selection
Tool axis direction
handle feed
function/tool axis
B (M series)
1389
15 2
15.2
15.3
5.13
5.13
5.13
5.13
11.6.1
12.1.11
12.1.19
1.13
1.13
1.13
16
1.6
Function
Tool life management
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
Automatic
A
t
ti tool
t l length
l
th
measurement (M
series)/automatic
tool offset (T series)
TLCH
F064#0
TLRST
G048#7
f
f
Individual tool change signal
TLCHI
F064#2
Individual tool change reset signal
TLRST
IG048#6
Tool skip signal
TLSKP
G048#5
New tool selection signal
TLNW
F064#1
TL01 to TL256
G047#0 to
G048#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
TL01 to TL64
G047#0 to #6
Tool life count override signals
*TLV0 to *TLV9
G049#0 to
G050#1
TRESC
G059#0
TRACT
F092#3
Tool return signal
TRRTN
F059#1
TRSPS
F092#5
XAE
X004#0
f
f
f
f
f
YAE
X004#1
ZAE
X004#2
ZAE
X004#1
GOQSM
G039#7
+MIT1, +MIT2
X004#2, #4
MIT1, MIT2
X004#3, #5
Tool offset number selection signals
OFN0 to OFN5,
OFN6
G039#0 to #5,
G040#0
f
f
f
f
f
Workpiece coordinate system shift

value write mode selection signal
WOQSM
G039#6
Workpiece coordinate system shift

value write signal
WOSET
G040#7
Position record signal
PRC
G040#6
Miscellaneous function completion

signal
MFIN
G005#0
Spindle function completion signal
SFIN
G005#2
Tool function completion signal
TFIN
G005#3
BFIN
G005#4
f
f
f
f
BFIN
G005#7
2nd M function completion signal
MFIN2
G004#4
3rd M function completion signal
MFIN3
G004#5
f
f
External operation signal for

highspeed interface
EFD
F007#1
f
f
f
f
External operation function completion

signal
EFIN
G005#1
Tool offset value write signals
Input of tool offset

value measured A (T
series)
2nd auxiliary function completion signal

Highspeed M/S/T/B
interface
f
f
Measuring position reached signals
Tool offset value write mode selection

signal
Direct in
input
ut of tool
offset value
measured B (T
series)
T
M
Section
series series
Tool change signal
Tool grou
group number selection signals
Tool retraction and

return
Address
1390
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
10 3
10.3
58
5.8
14 2
14.2
14.4.2
14.4.1
f
f
f
8.4
B63003EN1/02
Function
Signal name
Symbol
Address
T
M
Section
series series
Highspeed skip
signal
Highspeed skip status signals
HDO0 to HDO7
F122
14.3.2
Canned cycle
(M series)/canned
cycle for hole
machining (T series)
Tapping signal
TAP
F001#5
11.7
Servo off
(mechanical handle)
Servo off signals
SVF1 to SVF8
G126
1.2.8
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Servo/spindle motor
Servo/spindlemotor
velocity detection
Motor velocity detection function enable

MSDFON
signal
G016#0
Servo motor velocity detection signals
Y(n+0)
DSV1 to DSV8
2.11
2.11
2.11
Spindle motor velocity detection signals DSP1, DSP2, DSP3
Y(n+1)#0 to #2
Cycle start signal
ST
G007#2
Feed hold signal
*SP
G008#5
OP
F000#7
STL
F000#5
SPL
F000#4
Cs contour control change signal
CON
G027#7
Cs contour control change completion

signal
FSCSL
F044#1
Axis moving signals
MV1 to MV8
F102
Axis moving direction signals
MVD1 to MVD8
F106

output
Actual spindle speed signals
AR0 to AR15
F040, F041
Constant surface
speed control
Constant surface speed signal
CSS
F002#2
Spindle stop completion signal
SPSTP
G028#6
SUCLP
F038#1
Spindle unclamp completion signal
*SUCPF
G028#4
SCLP
F038#0
Spindle clamp completion signal
*SCPF
G028#5
SHA00 to SHA11
G078#0 to
G079#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
SHB00 to SBH11
G080#0 to
G081#3
SHC00 to SHC11
G208#0 to
G209#3
9.15
Spindle simple synchronous control

signal
ESRSYC
G064#6
9.16
First spindle parking signal
PKESS1
G122#6
(G031#6)
9.16
Second spindle parking signal
PKESS2
G122#7
(G031#7)
Phase error monitor signal
SYCAL
F044#4
f
f
f
f
Cycle start/feed hold
Cs contour control
Outputting the
movement state of
an axis
Spindle positioning
Spindle orientation
Spindle simple
synchronous control
Spindle orientation external stop

position command signals
1391
5.1
9.9
125
1.2.5
9.7
9.5
9.8
f
9 13
9.13
9.16
9.16
Function
Polygonal turning
Polygonalturning
with two spindles
Signal name
Symbol
Address
Polygon spindle stop signal
*PLSST
G038#0
Spindle polygon speed reached signal
PSAR
F063#2
Master axis not reached signal
PSE1
F063#0
Polygon synchronous axis not reached

signal
PSE2
F063#1
TLMLA
G070#0
TLMLB
G074#0
TLMLC
G204#0
TLMHA
G070#1
TLMHB
G074#1
TLMHC
G204#1
CTH1A, CTH2A
G070#3, #2
CTH1B, CTH2B
G074#3, #2
CTH1C, CTH2C
G204#3, #2
SRVA
G070#4
SRVB
G074#4
SRVC
G204#4
SFRA
G070#5
SFRB
G074#5
SFRC
G204#5
ORCMA
G070#6
ORCMB
G074#6
ORCMC
G204#6
MRDYA
G070#7
MRDYB
G074#7
MRDYC
G204#7
ARSTA
G071#0
ARSTB
G075#0
ARSTC
G205#0
*ESPA
G071#1
Emergency stop signals (serial spindle) *ESPB
G075#1
*ESPC
G205#1
SPSLA
G071#2
SPSLB
G075#2
SPSLC
G205#2
MCFNA
G071#3
MCFNB
G075#3
MCFNC
G205#3
Torque limit command LOW signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Torque limit command HIGH signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Clutch/gear signals (serial spindle)
CCW command signals (serial spindle)
CW command signals (serial spindle)
Spindle serial
output/spindle
analogoutput
analog
output
B63003EN1/02
Orientation command signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Machine ready signals (serial spindle)
Alarm reset signals (serial spindle)

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Power line switch completion signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
1392
T
M
Section
series series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
6.10.2
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
92
9.2
9.15
B63003EN1/02
Function
Signal name
Soft start/stop cancel signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Speed integral signals (serial spindle)
Output switch request signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Power line status check signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Orientation stop position change

command signals (serial sspindle)
indle)
Rotational direction command signals

for orientation stop position change
(serial spindle)
Spindle serial
output/spindle
analogoutput
analog
output
Shortcut command signals for

orientation stop position change
(serial spindle)
Differential speed mode command

signals (serial sspindle)
indle)
Analog override signals (serial spindle)
Incremental command externally set

orientation signals (serial sspindle)
indle)
Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact

status signals (serial sspindle)
indle)
Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact

status signals (serial sspindle)
indle)
Magnetic sensor orientation command

indle)
Symbol
Address
SOCNA
G071#4
SOCNB
G075#4
SOCNC
G205#4
INTGA
G071#5
INTGB
G075#5
INTGC
G205#5
RSLA
G071#6
RSLB
G075#6
RSLC
G205#6
RCHA
G071#7
RCHB
G075#7
RCHC
G205#7
INDXA
G072#0
INDXB
G076#0
INDXC
G206#0
ROTAA
G072#1
ROTAB
G076#1
ROTAC
G206#1
NRROA
G072#2
NRROB
G076#2
NRROC
G206#2
DEFMDA
G072#3
DEFMDB
G076#3
DEFMDC
G206#3
OVRIDA
G072#4
OVRIDB
G076#4
OVRIDC
G206#4
INCMDA
G072#5
INCMDB
G076#5
INCMDC
G206#5
MFNHGA
G072#6
MFNHGB
G076#6
MFNHGC
G206#6
RCHHGA
G072#7
RCHHGB
G076#7
RCHHGC
G206#7
MORCMA
G073#0
MORCMB
G077#0
MORCMC
G207#0
1393
T
M
Section
series series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
92
9.2
9.15
Function
Signal name
Symbol
Address
SLVA
G073#1
SLVB
G077#1
SLVC
G207#1
MPOFA
G073#2
MPOFB
G077#2
MPOFC
G207#2
ALMA
F045#0
ALMB
F049#0
ALMC
F168#0
SSTA
F045#1
SSTB
F049#1
SSTC
F168#1
SDTA
F045#2
SDTB
F049#2
SDTC
F168#2
SARA
F045#3
SARB
F049#3
SARC
F168#3
LDT1A
F045#4
Load detection signals 1 (serial spindle) LDT1B
F049#4
LDT1C
F168#4
LDT2A
F045#5
Load detection signals 2 (serial spindle) LDT2B
F049#5
LDT2C
F168#5
TLMA
F045#6
TLMB
F049#6
TLMC
F168#6
ORARA
F045#7
ORARB
F049#7
ORARC
F168#7
CHPA
F046#0
CHPB
F050#0
CHPC
F169#0
CFINA
F046#1
CFINB
F050#1
CFINC
F169#1
RCHPA
F046#2
RCHPB
F050#2
RCHPC
F169#2
Subordinate operation mode command

indle)
Motor power cutoff command signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Alarm signals (serial spindle)
Speed zero signals (serial spindle)
Speed detection signals (serial spindle)
Speed arrival signals (serial spindle)
Spindle serial
output/spindle
analogoutput
analog
output
B63003EN1/02
Torque limit signals (serial spindle)
Orientation completion signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Power line switch signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Spindle switch completion signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Output switch signals (serial spindle)
1394
T
M
Section
series series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
92
9.2
9.15
B63003EN1/02
Function
Signal name
RCFNB
F050#3
RCFNC
F169#3
SLVSA
F046#4
SLVSB
F050#4
SLVSC
F169#4
PORA2A
F046#5
PORA2B
F050#5
PORA2C
F169#5
MORA1A
F046#6
MORA1B
F050#6
MORA1C
F169#6
MORA2A
F046#7
MORA2B
F050#7
MORA2C
F169#7
PC1DEA
F047#0
PC1DEB
F051#0
PC1DEC
F170#0
INCSTA
F047#1
INCSTB
F051#1
INCSTC
F170#1
Spindle stop signal
*SSTP
G029#6
SOR
G029#5
Spindle speed override signals
SOV0 to SOV7
G030
Spindle speed arrival signal
SAR
G029#4
ENB
F001#4
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Gear selection signals (output)
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
F034#0 to #2
Gear selection signals (input)
GR1, GR2
G028#1, #2
S 12bit code signals
R01O to R12O
F036#0 to
F037#3
Spindle fluctuation detection alarm

signal
SPAL
F035#0
G038#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
Spindle synchronous control signal
SPSYC
G038#2
Spindle phase synchronous control

signal
SPPHS
Spindle synchronous speed control

completion signal
FSPSY
F044#2
Spindle phase synchronous control

completion signal
FSPPH
F044#3
Spindle synchronous control alarm

signal
SYCAL
F044#4
Position coder orientation proximity

signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
Magnetic sensor orientation completion

indle)
Magnetic sensor orientation proximity

indle)
Position coder onerotation signal

detection status signals (serial spindle)
s indle)
Incremental orientation mode signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Spindle speed
Spindle synchronous
control
T
M
Section
series series
F046#3
Subordinate operation status signals

(serial sspindle)
indle)
Spindle speed
control
Address
RCFNA
Output switch completion signals
(serial sspindle)
indle)
Spindle serial
output/spindle
analogoutput
analog
output
Symbol
1395
92
9.2
9.15
9.3
9.6
9.12
Function
Manual
linear/circular
interpolation
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
Address
G018#4 to #7
f
f
HS3A to HS3D
G019#0 to #3
HS4A to HS4D
G020#0 to #3
MP1, MP2
G019#4, #5
MP21, MP22
G087#0, #1
MP31, MP32
G087#3, #4
f
f
f
MP41, MP42
G087#6, #7
HS1IA to HS1ID
G041#0 to #3
HS2IA to HS2ID
G041#4 to #7
f
f
HS3IA to HS3ID
G042#0 to #3
HS4IA to HS4ID
G088#4 to #7

selection signal
ZRN
G043#7
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f

selection check signal
MREF
F004#5
Reference position return deceleration

signal
*DEC1 to *DEC8
X009
Reference position return end signal
ZP1 to ZP8
F094
Reference position establishment

signal
ZRF1 to ZRF8
F120
Feed axis and direction selection

signals
+J1 to +J8
G100
J1 to J8
G102
Manual feedrate override signals
*JV0 to *JV15
G010, G011
Manual rapid traverse selection signals
RT
G019#7
CNC ready signal
MA
F001#7
Servo ready signal
SA
F000#6
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
SKIP
X004#7
Small hole peck drillinginprogress

signal
PECK2
F066#5
RPDO
F002#1
Cutting feed signal
CUT
F002#6
Single block signal
SBK
G046#1
MSBK
F004#3
SKIP
X004#7
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
SKIPP
G006#6
Feed axis and direction selection

signals

signals
+Jg, Jg, +Ja, Ja
G086#0 to #3
HS1A to HS1D
G018#0 to #3
HS2A to HS2D
Manual handle feed
Manual handle feed amount selection

signals (incremental feed signals)
Manual handle
interrupt
Manual reference
position return
Jog feed/incremental
feed
Manual handle interru

interruptt axis selection
signals
CNC ready signal
Small hole peck

eck
drilling cycle
(M series)
Status output signal
Single block
Skip function
T
M
Section
series series
Skip signals
1396
f
f
f
f
f
f
3.5
32
3.2
33
3.3
4.1
31
3.1
22
2.2
11.17
28
2.8
533
5.3.3
14 3 1
14.3.1
B63003EN1/02
Function
Start lock/interlock
Stored stroke limit
Stored stroke limit

2, 3
Controlled axis
detach
Lookahead control
(M series)
Software operators
panel
Signal name
Symbol
Address
T
M
Section
series series
Start lock signal
STLK
G007#1
Interlock signal
*IT
G008#0
Interlock signal for each axis
*IT1 to *IT8
G130
Manual feed interlock signal for each

axis and direction
+MIT1, +MIT2
X004#2, #4
f
f
f
f
Manual feed interlock signal for each

axis and direction
MIT1, MIT2
X004#3, #5
Interlock signal for each axis and

direction
+MIT1 to +MIT4
G132#0 to #3
MIT1 to MIT4
G134#0 to #3
Stored stroke limit change signal
EXLM
G007#6
+LM1 to +LM8
G110
LM1 to LM8
G110
Stroke limit release signal
RLSOT
G007#7
Stroke limit 3 release signal
RLSOT3
G007#4
Controlled axis detach signals
DTCH1 to DTCH8
G124
Controlled axis detach status signals
MDTCH1 to MDTCH8
F110
f
f
f
Lookahead control mode signal
G08MD
F066#0
Software operators panel signal (MD1)
MD1O
F073#0
MD2O
F073#1
MD4O
F073#2
Software operators panel signal (ZRN)
ZRNO
F073#4
Software operators panel signals

(+J1 to +J4)
+J1O to +J4O
F081#0, #2, #4,

#6

(J1 to J4)
J1O to J4O
F081#1, #3, #5,

#7
Software operators panel signal (RT)
RTO
F077#6
Software operators panel signal

(HS1A)
HS1AO

(HS1B)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F077#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
HS1BO
F077#1

(HS1C)
HS1CO
F077#2

(HS1D)
HS1DO
F077#3

(MP1)
MP1O
F076#0

(MP2)
MP2O
F076#1
Software operators panel signals (*JV0

*JVO0 to *JV15O
to *JV15)
F079, F080

(*FV0 to *FV7)
F078
Stroke limit external setting signals
*FV0O to *FV7O
1397
2.5
232
2.3.2
2.3.3
124
1.2.4
7.1.13
12.1.15
Function
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
Address
T
M
Section
series series
F072
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
*AFV0 to *AVF7
G013

completion signals
ZP21 to ZP28
F096

completion signals
ZP31 to ZP38
F098

completion signals
ZP41 to ZP48
F100
Multistage skip
Skip signals
SKIP2 to SKIP6,
SKIP7, SKIP8
X004#2 to #6,
#0, #1
14.3.3
Canned cycle (M
series)/multiple
repetitive turning
canned cycle
(T series)
Chamfering signal
CDZ
G053#7
11.9
Chuck/tailstock
barrier (T series)
Tailstock barrier selection signal
*TSB
G060#7
2.3.4
Chopping pause signal
*CHLD
G051#7
CHPST
G051#6
Chopping speed override signals
*CHP8 to *CHP0
G051#0 to #3
Chopping mode signal
CHPMD
F039#2
Chopping operation signal
CHPCYL
F039#3
f
f
f
f
f
Torque limit reached signals for

butttype reference position setting
CLRCH1 to CLRCH8
F180
DNC operation selection signal
DNCI
G043#5
DNC operation selection confirmation

signal
MRMT
F003#4
f
f
f
f
Software operators
panel
anel
Second feedrate
override
Second reference
position return/3rd,
4th reference
position return
Chopping function
Butttype reference
position return
setting
DNC operation

(ROV1)
ROV1O
F076#4

(ROV2)
ROV2O
F076#5
Software operators panel signal (BDT)
BDTO
F075#2
Software operators panel signal (SBK)
SBKO
F075#3
Software operators panel signal (MLK)
MLKO
F075#4
Software operators panel signal (DRN) DRNO
F075#5

(KEY1 to KEY4)
KEYO
F075#6
Software operators panel signal (*SP)
SPO
F075#7
Software operators panel

generalpurpose switch signals
OUT0 to OUT7
Second feedrate override signals
1398
12.1.15
7.1.7.3
4.5
1.12
1.12
1.12
1.12
1.12
4.7
5.11
B63003EN1/02
Function
Synchronous control
Signal name
Symbol
Address
Synchronous control axis selection

signals
SYNC1 to SYNC8
G138
Parking signals
PK1 to PK8
G122
Synchronous control under way signals SYN10 to SYN80
F118
Synchronous control axis selection

signals
G138#0 to #6
SYNC1 to SYNC7
T
M
Section
series series
f
f
f
F
Synchronous/composite/superimposed
SYN10 to SYN70
control under way signals
F118#0 to #6
Dry run signal
DRN
G046#7
MDRN
F002#7
Torque limit reached signals
TRQL1 to TRQL8
F114
Spindle command selection signals
SLSPA, SLSPB
G063#2, #3
Spindle feedback selection signals
SLPCA, SLPCB
G064#2, #3
COSP
F064#5
F
f
f
f
F
F
F
Input and run simultaneous mode

selection signal
STRD
G058#5
Output and run simultaneous mode

selection signal
STWD
G058#6
Thread cutting
THRD
F002#3
Tool post
interference check
(T series, twopath
control)
Tool post interference check signal
TICHK
F064#6
Tool post interference alarm signal
TIALM
F064#7
ROV1, ROV2
G014#0, #1
1% step rapid traverse override

selection signals
HROV
G096#7
1% step rapid traverse override signals
*HROV0 to *HROV6
G096#0 to #6
HDLF
G023#4
FEED0
F066#2
Direct operation selection signal
DMMC
G042#7
Control axis selection signals

(PMC axis control)
EAX1 to EAX8
G136
EC0A to EC6A
G143#0 to #6
EC0B to EC6B
G155#0 to #6
EC0C to EC6C
G167#0 to #6
EC0D to EC6D
G179#0 to #6
EIF0A to EIF15A
G144, G145
EIF0B to EIF15B
G156, G157
EIF0C to EIF15C
G168, G169
EIF0D to EIF15D
G180, G181
Dry run
Torque limit skip
(T series)
Spindle speed
control for twopath
lathe
Simultaneous input
and output operation
(M series)
Rapid traverse
override
Handle synchronous Handlesynchronous feed signal

Handlesynchronous
feed
Feed zero signal
Direct operation by
PMC/MMC
PMC axis
control/PMC axis
speed control
function
Axis control command signals

(PMC axis control)
Axis control feedrate signals

(PMC axis control)
1399
f
F
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
18
1.8
19
1.9
f
f
532
5.3.2
14.3.4
9.4
f
f
f
13 6
13.6
6.4.1
235
2.3.5
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
7.1.7.1
38
3.8
15.6
15 1
15.1
Function
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Axis control command read signals

(PMC axis control)
Axis control data signals

(PMC axis control)
Axis control command read completion

com letion
signals (PMC axis control)
Symbol
Address
EBUFA
G142#7
EBUFB
G154#7
EBUFC
G166#7
EBUFD
G178#7
EID0A to EID31A
G146 to G149
EID0B to EID31B
G158 to G161
EID0C to EID31C
G170 to G173
EID0D to EID31D
G182 to G185
EBSYA
F130#7
EBSYB
F133#7
EBSYC
F136#7
EBSYD
F139#7
ECLRA
G142#6
ECLRB
G154#6
ECLRC
G166#6
ECLRD
G178#6
ESTPA
G142#5
ESTPB
G154#5
ESTPC
G166#5
ESTPD
G178#5
ESBKA
G142#3
ESBKB
G154#3
ESBKC
G166#3
ESBKD
G178#3
EMSBKA
G143#7
EMSBKB
G155#7
EMSBKC
G167#7
EMSBKD
G179#7
EM11A to EM48A
F132, F142
EM11B to EM48B
F135, F145
EM11C to EM48C
F138, F148
EM11D to EM48D
F141, F151
EMFA
F131#0
EMFB
F134#0
EMFC
F137#0
EMFD
F140#0
Reset signals (PMC axis control)
PMC axis
i
control/PMC axis
speed control
function
Axis control tem

temporary
orary sto
stop signals
(PMC axis control)
Block stop signals (PMC axis control)
Block stop
sto disable signals
(PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function code signals

(PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function strobe signals

(PMC axis control)
1400
T
M
Section
series series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15 1
15.1
B63003EN1/02
Function
Signal name
Auxiliary function completion

com letion signals
(PMC axis control)
Symbol
Address
EFINA
G142#0
EFINB
G154#0
EFINC
G166#0
EFIND
G178#0
ESOFA
G142#4
ESOFB
G154#4
ESOFC
G166#4
ESOFD
G178#4
EMBUFA
G142#2
EMBUFB
G154#2
EMBUFC
G166#2
EMBUFD
G178#2
*EAXSL
F129#7
EINPA
F130#0
EINPB
F133#0
EINPC
F136#0
EINPD
F139#0
ECKZA
F130#1
ECKZB
F133#1
ECKZC
F136#1
ECKZD
F139#1
EIALA
F130#2
EIALB
F133#2
EIALC
F136#2
EIALD
F139#2
EGENA
F130#4
EGENB
F133#4
EGENC
F136#4
EGEND
F139#4
EDENA
F130#3
EDENB
F133#3
EDENC
F136#3
EDEND
F139#3
EOTNA
F130#6
EOTNB
F133#6
EOTNC
F136#6
EOTND
F139#6
Servo off signals (PMC axis control)
Buffering disable signals (PMC axis

control)
Control axis selection status signals

(PMC axis control)
Inposition signals (PMC axis control)
PMC axis
control/PMC axis
speed control
function
Following zero checking signals (PMC

axis control)
Alarm signals (PMC axis control)
Axis moving signals (PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function executing signals

(PMC axis control)
Negative direction overtravel signals

Negativedirection
(PMC axis control)
1401
T
M
Section
series series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15 1
15.1
Function
Signal name
Symbol
Address
G151
f
f
f
f
f
OVCE
G150#5
Rapid traverse override signals (PMC

axis control)
ROV1E, ROV2E
G150#0, #1
Dry run signal (PMC axis control)
DRNE
G150#7

(PMC axis control)
RTE
G150#6
Override 0% signal (PMC axis control)
EOV0
F129#5
Skip signal (PMC axis control)
ESKIP
X004#6
Distribution completion signals (PMC

axis control)
EADEN1 to EADEN8
F112
EABUFA
F131#1
EABUFB
F134#1
EABUFC
F137#1
EABUFD
F140#1
EACNT1 to EACNT8
F182
SIND
G033#7
SIND2
G035#7
SIND3
G037#7
R01I to R12I
G032#0 to
G033#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
R01I2 to R12I2
G034#0 to
G035#3
R01I3 to R12I3
G036#0 to
G037#3
SSIN
G033#6
SSIN2
G035#6
SSIN3
G037#6
SGN
G033#5
SGN2
G035#5
SGN3
G037#5
*ESP
G008#4
*ESP
X008#4
Allaxis VRDY off alarm ignore signal
IGNVRY
G066#0
Eachaxis VRDY off alarm ignore

signal
IGVRY1 to IGVRY8
G192
Followup signal
*FLWU
G007#5
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F130#5
EOTPB
F133#5
EOTPC
F136#5
EOTPD
F139#5
Feedrate override signals (PMC axis

control)
*FV0E to *FV7E
Override cancellation signal

(PMC axis control)
Buffer full signals (PMC axis control)
Controlling signals (PMC axis control)

selection signals
Spindle motor speed command signals

Spindle output
control by the PMC
Spindle motor command polarity

selection signals
Spindle motor command polarity

command signals
Emergency stop
VRDY off alarm

ignore signal
Followup
T
M
Section
series series
f
f
f
f
f
EOTPA
Positive direction overtravel signals
Positivedirection
(PMC axis control)
PMC axis
control/PMC axis
speed control
function
B63003EN1/02
Emergency stop signal
1402
15 1
15.1
15.4
21
2.1
2.9
1.2.7
B63003EN1/02
Function
Signal name
Symbol
Address
T
M
Section
series series
Floating reference position return end

signals
FRP1 to FRP8
F116
SRN
G006#0
Program restart under way signal
SRNMV
F002#4
Position switch signals
PSW01 to PSW10
F070#0 to
F071#1
Miscellaneous function code signals
M00 to M31
F010 to F013
Miscellaneous function strobe signal
MF
F007#0
DM00
F009#7
DM01
F009#6
DM02
F009#5
DM30
F009#4
S00 to S31
F022 to F025
SF
F007#2
T00 to T31
F026 to F029
Tool function strobe signal
TF
F007#3
2nd auxiliary function code signals
B00 to B31
F030 to F033
BF
F007#4
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
BF
F007#7
End signal
FIN
G004#3
DEN
F001#3
Auxiliary function lock signal
AFL
G005#6
Auxiliary function lock check signal
MAFL
F004#4
Polygon synchronization under way

signal
PSYN
F063#7
Allaxis machine lock signal
MLK
G044#1
Eachaxis machine lock signal
MLK1 to MLK8
G108
Allaxis machine lock check signal
MMLK
F004#1
Waiting M code
(twopath control)
Nowait signal
NOWT
G063#1
Waiting signal
WATO
G063#6
Manual absolute
on/off
*ABSM
G006#2
Manual absolute check signal
MABSM
F004#2
SWS1
G027#0
SWS2
G027#1
SWS3
G027#2
*SSTP1
G027#3
*SSTP2
G027#4
*SSTP3
G027#5
GR21
G029#0
GR31
G029#2
Floating reference
position return
Program restart
Position switch
Decode M signals
Spindle function code signals

Miscellaneous
function/2nd auxiliary Spindle function strobe signal
function
Tool function code signals
2nd auxiliary function strobe signal
Auxiliary function
lock
Polygonal turning
Machine lock
Multi s indle control

Multispindle
(T series)
Individual spindle stop signals
Gear selection signals (input)
1403
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
4.6
57
5.7
1.2.9
8.1
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
F
f
f
82
8.2
6.10.1
5.3.1
85
8.5
54
5.4
9 10
9.10
Function
Signal name
2nd position coder selection signal
(T series)
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Address
PC2SLC
G028#7
ENB2
F038#2
ENB3
F038#3
Mirror image signals
MI1 to MI8
G106
Mirror image check signals
MMI1 to MMI8
F108
Memory protection signals
KEY1 to KEY4
G046#3 to #6
Mode selection signals
MD1, MD2, MD4
G043#3 to #2
Manual data input selection check

signal
MMDI
F003#3
Automatic operation selection check

signal
MMEM
F003#5
Memory edit selection check signal
MEDT
F003#6
Manual handle feed selection check

signal
MH
F003#1
Spindle enable signals
Mirror image
Memory protection
key
Mode selection
Highprecision
contour control by
RISC (M series)
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Incremental feed selection check signal MINC
F003#0
Jog feed selection check signal
MJ
F003#2
TEACH IN selection check signal
MTCHIN
F003#7
RGTAP
G061#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
RGSPP
F065#0
Spindle rotation direction signals
RGSPM
F065#1
Rigid tappinginprogress signal
RTAP
F076#3
Rigid tapping spindle selection signals
RGTSP1, RGTSP2
G061#4, #5
f
f
HPCC mode signal
MHPCC
F066#6
EXHPCC
F066#7
ERS
G008#7
RRW
G008#6
Resetting signal
RST
F001#1
Rewinding signal
RWD
F000#0
f
f
f
f
Retrace signal
RVS
G007#0
Retraceinprogress signal
RVSL
F082#2
Input signals for remote buffer
RMTDI0 to RMTDI7
G052
Output signals for remote buffer
RMTDO0 to RMTDO7 F069

Rigid tapping
T
M
Section
series series
Reset and rewind
Retrace (M series)
Remote buffer
Interrupt type custom
Interrupt signal for custom macro
macro
UINT
1404
G053#3
f
f
f
9.10
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
126
1.2.6
12.2.3
2.6
9.11
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
7 1 14
7.1.14
52
5.2
11 15
11.15
13 2
13.2
11.6.2
B63003EN1/02
A.2.2
List of Signals
(In Order of Symbols)
Group
Symbol
Signal name
f
F
:
:
Address
Available
Available only with
2path control
Unavailable
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
*+ED1 to *+ED8
G118
*+L1 to *+L8
Overtravel signal
G114
*-ED1 to *-ED8
G120
*-L1 to *-L8
Overtravel signal
G116
*ABSM
G006#2
*AFV0 to *AFV7
2nd feedrate override signal
G013
f
f
f
f
f
f
*BECLP
B-axis clamp completion signal
G038#7
*BEUCP
B-axis unclamp completion signal
G038#6
*CHLD
G051#7
*CHP8 to *CHP0
Chopping feedrate override signals
G051#0 to #3
*CRTOF
Automatic erase CRT screen display cancel signal
G062#1
*DEC1 to *DEC8
Deceleration signal for reference position return
X009
*EAXSL
Control axis selection status signal(PMC axis

control)
F129#7
*ESP
X008#4
*ESP
G008#4
*ESPA
G071#1
*ESPB
Emergency stop signal (serial spindle)
*ESPC
G075#1
G205#1
*FLWU
Follow-up signal
G007#5
*FV0 to *FV7
Feedrate override signal
G012
*FV0E to *FV7E
Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control)
G151
*FV0O to *FV7O
Software operator's panel signal(*FV0 to *FV7)
F078
*HROV0 to *HROV6
1% step rapid traverse override signal
G096#0 to #6
*IT
Interlock signal
G008#0
*IT1 to *IT8
G130
*JV0 to *JV15
Manual feedrate override signal
G010,G011
*JV0O to *JV15O
Software operator's panel signal(*JV0 to *JV15)
F079,F080
*PLSST
G038#0
1405
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
7.1.9
2.3.1
7.1.9
2.3.1
5.4
7.1.7.3
11.11
11.11
1.12
1.12
12.1.19
4.1
15.1
21
2.1
9.2, 9.15
1.2.7
7.1.7.2
15.1
12.1.15
7.1.7.1
2.5
2.5
3.1
12.1.15
6.10.2
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
*SCPF
G028#5
*SP
Feed hold signal
G008#5
*SSTP
Spindle stop signal
G029#6
*SSTP1
*
*SSTP2
G027#3
G027#4
Stop signal in each spindle
*SSTP3
G027#5
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
G028#4
*TLV0 to *TLV9
Tool life count override signal
G049#0 to
G050#1
*TSB
Tailstock barrier select signal
G060#7
+J1 to +J8
Feed axis and direction selection signal
G100
+J1O to +J4O
Software operator's panel signal(+J1 to +J4)
F081#0,#2,#4,#
6
+Jg, Jg, +Ja, Ja
Feed axis and direction selection signals
G086#0 to #3
f
f
f
f
+LM1 to +LM8
Stroke limit external setting signal
G110
+MIT1,+MIT2
Manual feed interlock signal for each axis
X004#2,#4
+MIT1,+MIT2
X004#2,#4
f
f
+MIT1 to +MIT4
Interlock signal for each axis and direction
G132#0 to #3
J1 to -J8
G102
J1O to -J4O
Software operator's panel signal(-J1 to -J4)
F081#1,#3,#5,#
7
f
f
LM1 to -LM8
G112
MIT1,-MIT2

X004#3 #5
X004#3,#5
f
f
MIT1,-MIT2
MIT1 to -MIT4
G134#0 to #3
ABTQSV
Servo axis abnormal load detected signal
F090#0
ABTSP1
First-spindle abnormal load detected signal
F090#1
ABTSP2
Second-spindle abnormal load detected signal
F090#2
AFL
Miscellaneous function lock signal
G005#6
AL
Alarm signal
F001#0
ALMA
A
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
*SUCPF
Address
ALMB
F168#0
F049#0
ALMC
ALNGH
Tool axis direction handle feed mode signal
G023#7
AR0 to AR15
Actual spindle speed signal
F040,F041
ARSTA
ARSTB
G071#0
Alarm reset signal (serial spindle)
ARSTC
G075#0
G205#0
1406
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F045#0
Alarm signal (serial spindle)
f
f
f
f
f
f
9.8
5.1
9.3
9.10
9.8
10.3
2.3.4
f
f
f
f
3.1
12.1.15
3.5
2.3.2
2.5
14.4.2
f
f
f
f
2.5
3.1
12.1.15
2.3.2
2.5
14.4.2
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
2.5
2.10
2.10
2.10
8.2
2.4
9.2, 9.15
3.4.1
9.7
9.2, 9.15
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Address
B00 to B31
2nd auxiliary function code signal
F030 to F033
BAL
F001#2
f
f
BCLP
B-axis clamp signal
F061#1
BDT1,BDT2 to BDT9
Optional block skip signal
G044#0,G045
BDTO
Software operator's panel signal(BDT)
F075#2
BF
F007#4
f
f
f
F007#7
G005#4
G005#7

BF
B
BFIN
BFIN
BGEACT
F053#4
BGEN
Power Mate background busy signal
G092#4
BGIALM
G092#3
BGION
Power Mate read/write inprogress signal
G092#2
f
f
f
f
BUCLP
B-axis unclamp signal
F061#0
CDZ
Chamferring signal
G053#7
CFINA
CFINB
F269#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F046#1
Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle)
F050#1
CFINC
F169#1
CHPA
F046#0
CHPB
Power line switch signal (serial spindle)
CHPC
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
Signal name
Group
F050#0
CHPCYL
F039#3
CHPMD
Choppinginprogresssignal
F039#2
CHPST
G051#6
CLRCH1 to CLRCH8
Torque limit reach signals for butttype reference

position setting
F180
CON
Cs contour control change signal
G027#7
COSP
F064#5
CSS
F002#2
CTH1A,CTH2A
CTH1B,CTH2B
G070#3,#2
Clutch/gear signal (serial spindle)
CTH1C,CTH2C
CUT
G074#3,#2
G204#3,#2
Cutting feed signal
F002#6
1407
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
8.1
2.4
11.11
5.5
12.1.15
81
8.1
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
84
8.4
13.8, 13.5
13.8
13.8
13.8
11.11
11.9
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
1.12
1.12
1.12
4.7
9.9
9.4
9.5
9.2, 9.15
2.8
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
DEFMDA
DEFMDB
G072#3
Differential mode command signal (serial spindle)
DEFMDC
DEN
Address
G076#3
G206#3
F001#3
DM00
F009#7
DM01
F009#6
Decode M signal
DM02
F009#5
DM30
F009#4
D
DMMC
Direct operation select signal
G042#7
DNCI
DNC operation select signal
G043#5
DRN
Dry run signal
G046#7
DRNE
G150#7
DRNO
Software operator's panel signal(DRN)
F075#5
DSP1, DSP2, DSP3
Spindle motor speed detection signals
Y(n+1)#0 to #2
DSV1 to DSV8
Servo motor speed detection signals
Y(n+0)
DTCH1 to DTCH8
Controlled axis detach signal
G124
EA0 to EA6
Address signal for external data input
G002#0 to #6
EABUFA
F131#1
EABUFB
F134#1
Buffer full signal (PMC axis control)
EABUFC
F137#1
EABUFD
F140#1
EACNT1 to EACNT8
Controlling signal (PMC axis control)
F182
EADEN1 to EADEN8
Distribution completion signal(PMC axis control)
F112
EAX1 to EAX8
Control axis select signal (PMC axis control)
G136
EBSYA
EBSYB
EBSYC
F130#7
Axis control command read com
completion
letion signal
(PMC axis control)
EBSYD
F133#7
F136#7
F139#7
1408
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
9.2, 9.15
8.1
81
8.1
15.6
5.11
5.3.2
15.1
12.1.15
2.11
2.11
1.2.4
15.2
15 1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Group
Signal name
Address
EDGN
F177#7
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
EF
F008#0
EFD
External operation signal for high speed interface
F007#1
EFIN
External operation function completion signal
G005#1
EBUFA
EBUFB
EBUFC
G142#7
Axis control command read signal(PMC axis
control)
G154#7
G166#7
EBUFD
G178#7
EC0A to EC6A
G143#0 to #6
EC0B to EC6B
G155#0 to #6
Axis control command signal (PMC axis control)
EC0C to EC6C
G167#0 to #6
EC0D to EC6D
G179#0 to #6
ECKZA
F130#1
ECKZB
F133#1
Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control)
ECKZC
F136#1
ECKZD
F139#1
ECLRA
G142#6
ECLRB
G154#6
Reset signal (PMC axis control)
ECLRC
G166#6
ECLRD
G178#6
ED0 to ED15
Data signal for external data input
EDENA
E
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
EDENB
EDENC
F130#3
Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis
control)
EDEND
EFINC
F133#3
F136#3
F139#3
EFINA
EFINB
G000,G001
G142#0
Auxiliary function com
completion
letion signal (PMC axis
control)
G154#0
G166#0
EFIND
G178#0
EGENA
F130#4
EGENB
F133#4
Axis moving signal (PMC axis control)
EGENC
F136#4
EGEND
F139#4
EIALA
F130#2
EIALB
F133#2
Alarm signal (PMC axis control)
EIALC
F136#2
EIALD
F139#2
1409
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15.2
15 1
15.1
13.8
11.8
8.4
8.4
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
EID0A to EID31A
Address
G146 to G149
EID0B to EID31B
G158 to G161
Axis control data signal (PMC axis control)
EID0C to EID31C
G170 to G173
EID0D to EID31D
G182 to G185
EIF0A to EIF15A
G144,G145
EIF0B to EIF15B
G156,G157
Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control)
EIF0C to EIF15C
G168,G169
EIF0D to EIF15D
G180,G181
EINPA
F130#0
EINPB
F133#0
In position signal (PMC axis control)

EINPC
F136#0
EINPD
F139#0
EKC0 to EKC7
Key code signal
G098
EKENB
F053#7
EKSET
key code read signal
G066#7
EM11A to EM48A
F132,F142
EM11B to EM48B
F135,F145
Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control)
EM11C to EM48C
F138,F148
EM11D to EM48D
F141,F151
EMBUFA
G142#2
EMBUFB
EMBUFC
G154#2
Buffering disable signal

(PMC axis control)
G166#2
EMBUFD
G178#2
EMFA
F131#0
EMFB
F134#0
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control)
EMFC
F137#0
EMFD
F140#0
EMSBKA
G143#7
EMSBKB
EMSBKC
G155#7
Block sto
stop disable signal
(PMC axis control)
G167#7
EMSBKD
G179#7
ENB
F001#4
ENB2
F038#2
ENB3
ENBKY
F038#3
External key input mode selection signal
1410
G066#1
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15.5
15.5
15.5
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
9.3
9 10
9.10
-
15.5
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Group
Signal name
Address
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
ESTPIO
F177#2
EVAR
F177#5
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
EXHPCC
F066#7
EOTNA
EOTNB
EOTNC
F130#6
Negative direction overtravel signal (PMC axis

control)
F133#6
F136#6
EOTND
F139#6
EOTPA
F130#5
EOTPB
EOTPC
Positive direction overtravel signal (PMC axis

control)
EOTPD
F133#5
F136#5
F139#5
EOV0
- -
- -
F129#5
EPARM
F177#6
EPRG
F177#4
ERDIO
F177#1
EREND
ERS
- -
--
- -
G008#7
ESBKA
ESBKB
F060#0
G142#3
- -
G154#3
- -
Block stop signal (PMC axis control)

ESBKC
G166#3
ESBKD
ESEND
E
ESKIP
G178#3
- -Skipsignal(PMCaxiscontrol)
- -
X004#6
ESOFA
ESOFB
F060#1
G142#4
--
G154#4
- -
Servo off signal (PMC axis control)

ESOFC
G166#4
ESOFD
G178#4
ESRSYC
Simple spindle synchronous control signal
ESTB
--
- -
G002#7
ESTPA
ESTPB
ESTPC
G064#6
G142#5
- -
Axis control tem

temporary
orary sto
stop signal (PMC axis
control)
ESTPD
G154#5
G166#5
G178#5
EXLM
Storedstrokelimitselectsignal
EXRD
G058#1
EXSTP
G058#2
EXWT
G058#3
EWTIO
F177#3
1411
G007#6
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15 1
15.1
15 1
15.1
15.1
13.8
13.8
13.8
15.2
5.2
15 1
15.1
15.2
15.1
15 1
15.1
9.16
15.2
15 1
15.1
13.8
13.8
7.1.14
2.3.2
13.8, 13.5
13.8, 13.5
13.8, 13.5
13.8
Symbol
Group
Signal name
- -
Address
F1D
F1 digit feed select signal
G016#7
FEED0
Feed zero signal
F066#2
FIN
Completion signal
--
FRP1 to FRP8
F
B63003EN1/02
FSCSL
FSPPH
- - Cscontourcontrolchangecompletionsignal
Spindlephasesynchronouscontrolcompletion
-
Spindle synchronous speed control completion

signal
G08MD
Lock ahead control mode signal
GR1,GR2
G
GR1O,GR2O,GR3O
F044#2
F066#0
F044#1
FSPSY
GOQSM
F044#3
F116
signal
- - Tooloffsetvaluewritemodeselectsignal
Gearselectionsignal(input)
Gearselectionsignal(output)
f
f
f
f
f
G004#3
Floating reference position return end signal
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
G039#7
G028#1,#2
--
F034#0 to #2
f
f
-
HEAD
- - Pathselectionsignal-Tool post selection signal
HROV
1% step rapid traverse override select signal
G096#7
HS1A to HS1D
Manual handle feed axis selection signal
G018#0 to #3
HS1AO
Software operator's panel signal(HS1A)
F077#0
HS1BO
Software operator's panel signal(HS1B)
F077#1
HS1CO
Software operator's panel signal(HS1C)
F077#2
HS1DO
Software operator's panel signal(HS1D)
F077#3
HS1IA to HS1ID
Manual handle interruption axis select signal
G041#0 to #3
HS2A to HS2D
G018#4 to #7
HS2IA to HS2ID
G041#4 to #7
HS3A to HS3D
G019#0 to #3
HS3IA to HS3ID
G042#0 to #3
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
HS4A to HS4D
G020#0 to #3
HS4IA to HS4ID
G088#4 to #7
GR21
G029#0
Gear selection signal (input)

GR31
HDLF
G029#2
Handlesynchronous feed signal
--
HDO0 to HDO7
G023#4
High speed skip status signal

(
F122
G063#0
1412
f
f
f
f
f
f
7.1.5
3.8
8.1
4.6
9.9
9.12
f
f
7.1.13
14.4.2
f
f
9.12
9.3
9.3
9 10
9.10
-
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
3.8
14.3.2
2.7
7.1.7.1
3.2
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
3.3
3.2
3.3
3.2
3.3
3.2
3.3
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Group
IGNVRY
--
IGVRY1 to IGVRY8
INCH
Signal name
- - - Each-axisVRDYOFFalarmignoresignal
Inchinputsignal
All axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
INCMDA
INCMDB
F002#0
G076#5
F047#1
Incremental method orientation signal (serial
sspindle)
indle)
INCSTC
F051#1
F170#1
INDXA
INDXB
G192
G206#5
INCSTA
G066#0
G072#5
Incremental command external setting type
orientation signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
INCMDC
INCSTB
Address
G072#0
Orientation stop position change signal (serial
sspindle)
indle)
INDXC
G076#0
G206#0
INHKY
F053#0
INP1 to INP8
In-position signal
F104
INTGA
INTGB
G071#5
Signal for controlling velocity integration (serial
sspindle)
indle)
INTGC
G075#5
G205#5
IOLACK
I/O Link confirmation signal
G092#0
IOLNK
F177#0
IOLS
G092#1
KEY1 to KEY4
Memory protect signal
G046#3 to #6
KEYO
Software operator's panel signal(KEY1 to KEY4)
F075#6
K
LDT1A
LDT1B
F045#4
Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle)
F049#4
LDT1C
F168#4
LDT2A
F045#5
L
LDT2B
LDT2C
F049#5
F168#5
M00 to M31
Miscellaneous function code signal
F010 to F013
M200 to M215
2nd M function code signal
F014 to F015
M300 to M315
3rd M function code signal
F016 to F017
MA
CNC ready signal
F001#7
MABSM
F004#2
MAFL
Miscellaneous function lock check signal
F004#4
MBDT1,MBDT2 to
MBDT9
Optional block skip check signal
F004#0,F005
1413
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
2.9
2.9
11.4
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
15.5
7.2.6.1
9.2, 9.15
13.8
13.8
13.8
12.2.3
12.1.15
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
8.1
8.3
8.3
2.2
5.4
8.2
5.5
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Address
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
MH
Manual handle feed select check signal
F003#1
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
MHPCC
HPCC mode signal
F066#6
MI1 to MI8
Mirror image signal
G106
MINC
Incremental feed select check signal
F003#0
MINP
External program input start signal
G058#0
MIX1 to MIX7
Composite control axis selection signals
G128#0 to #6
MJ
JOG feed select check signal
F003#2
MLK
All-axis machine lock signal
G044#1
MLK1 to MLK8
Each-axis machine lock signal
G108
MLKO
Software operator's panel signal(MLK)
F075#4
MMDI
Manual data input select check signal
F003#3
MMEM
Automatic operation select check signal
F003#5
MMI1 to MMI8
Mirror image check signal
F108
MCFNA
MCFNB
G071#3
Power line switch completion signal (serial spindle)
MCFNC
G075#3
G205#3
MD1,MD2,MD4
G043#0 to #2
MD1O
Software operator's panel signal(MD1)
F073#0
MD2O
F073#1
MD4O
F073#2
MDRN
F002#7
MDTCH1 to MDTCH8 Controlled axis detach status signal
F110
MEDT
Memory edit select check signal
F003#6
MF
Auxiliary function strobe signal
F007#0
MF2
F008#4
MF3
F008#5
MFIN
G005#0
MFIN2
G004#4
MFIN3
G004#5
M
MFNHGA
MFNHGB
G072#6
Main spindle MCC status signal while changing
sspindles
indles signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
MFNHGC
G076#6
G206#6
1414
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
9.2, 9.15
2.6
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
5.3.2
1.2.4
2.6
8.1
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.4
8.4
9.2, 9.15
2.6
7.1.14
1.2.6
2.6
13.7
1.9
2.6
5.3.1
5.3.1
12.1.15
2.6
2.6
1.2.6
B63003EN1/02
Group
Symbol
MMLK
Signal name
- -
All axis machine lock check signal
MORA1A
MORA1B
G087#6,#7
F050#7
F169#7
MORCMA
G073#0
Command for spindle orientaion with a magnetic
sensor (serial spindle)
s indle)
G077#0
MORCMC
G207#0
MP1,MP2
G019#4,#5
MP21,MP22
MP31,MP32
Manual handle feed amount selection signal

(incremental feed signal)
MP41,MP42
M
G087#3,#4
F046#7
SIgnal for approximate spindle orientation with a
magnetic sensor (serial sspindle)
indle)
MORA2C
MORCMB
F050#6
F169#6
MORA2A
G087#0,#1
MP1O
Software operator's panel signal(MP1)
F076#0
MP2O
Software operator's panel signal(MP2)
F076#1
MPOFA
MPOFB
G073#2
Motor power stop signal (serial spindle)
G077#2
MPOFC
G207#2
MRDYA
G070#7
MRDYB
Machine ready signal (serial spindle)
MRDYC
G074#7
G204#7
MREF
Manual reference position return selection check

signal
F004#5
MRMT
DNC operation select check signal
F003#4
MSBK
F004#3
MSDFON
Motor speed detection function enable signal
G016#0
MTCHIN
TEACH IN select check signal
F003#7
MV1 to MV8
Axis moving signal
F102
MVD1 to MVD8
Axis moving direction signal
F106
NOWT
No-wait signal
G063#1
NOZAGC
Perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal
G063#5
NPOS1 to NPOS8
Position display neglect signal
G198
N
NRROA
NRROB
G072#2
Shortdistant movement command while changing
the orientation stop
sto position
osition signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
NRROC
G076#2
G206#2
1415
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F004#1
F046#6
Signal for completion of spindle orientation with a

magnetic sensor (serial sspindle)
indle)
MORA1C
MORA2B
Address
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
5.3.1
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
12.1.15
12.1.15
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
4.1
5.11
5.3.3
2.11
2.6
1.2.5
1.2.5
8.5
1.11
12.1.10
9.2, 9.15
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
PC2SLC
G028#7
PDT1
Conversation mode selection signal
G062#4
PDT2
Restart operation notification signal
G062#5
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
PECK2
Small-diameter peck drilling in progress signal
F066#5
PK1 to PK8
Parking signals
G122
PK1 to PK7
Parking signals
G122#0 to #6
PKESS1
First spindle synchronous control signal
G122#6
(G031#6)
f
F
f
PKESS2
Second spindle synchronous control signal
G122#7
(G031#7)
PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,
PN16
G009#0 to 4
OFN0 to OFN5,OFN6
Tool offset number select signal
G039#0 to
#5,G040#0
OP
F000#7
ORARA
ORARB
F045#7
Orientation completion signal (serial spindle)
F049#7
ORARC
F168#7
ORCMA
G070#6
ORCMB
O
Address
Orientation command signal (serial spindle)
ORCMC
G074#6
G204#6
OUT0 to OUT7
Software operator's panel general-purpose switch

signal
F072
OVC
G006#4
OVCE
Override cancellation signal (PMC axis control)
G150#5
OVLS1 to OVLS7
Superimposed control axis selection signals
G190#0 to #6
OVRIDA
OVRIDB
G072#4
Analog override command signal (serial spindle)
OVRIDC
G206#4
PC1DEA
PC1DEB
F047#0
Signal indicating the status of the detected
one-rotation position
osition coder signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
PC1DEC
F051#0
F170#0
PORA2A
PORA2B
G076#4
F046#5
Signal for approximate spindle orientation with a
position
osition coder (serial sspindle)
indle)
PORA2C
F050#5
F169#5
PRC
G040#6
PRGDPL
program screen display mode signal
F053#1
PRTSF
Target parts count reached signal
F062#7
PSAR
Spindle polygon speed arrival signal
F063#2
1416
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
14.4.2
5.1
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
12.1.15
7.1.7.4
15.1
1.9
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
9.10
11.17
1.8
1.9
9.16
9.16
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
15.3
9.2, 9.15
14.4.1
f
f
12.1.11
6.10.2
15.5
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Group
Signal name
G032#0 to
G033#3
G034#0 to
G035#3
G036#0 to
G037#3
F036#0 to
F037#3
F169#2
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Master axis not arrival signal
F063#0
PSE2
Polygon synchronous axis not arrival signal
F063#1
PSW01 to PSW10
F070#0 to
F071#1
PSYN
Polygon synchronization under way signal
F063#7
R01I to R12I
R01I2 to R12I2
Spindle motor speed command signal
R01I3 to R12I3
R01O to R12O
S12-bit code signal
RCFNA
RCFNB
F046#3
Output switch completion signal (serial spindle)
F050#3
RCFNC
F169#3
RCHA
G071#7
RCHB
Power line status check signal (serial spindle)
G075#7
RCHC
G205#7
RCHHGA
G072#7
RCHHGB
Highoutput MCC status signal while a magnetic

sensor (serial sspindle)
indle)
G076#7
RCHHGC
G206#7
RCHPA
F046#2
RCHPB
Output switch signal (serial spindle)
RCHPC
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
f
f
f
f
f
PSE1
Address
F050#2
RCYO
Retry complete signal
F063#5
RGHTH
Tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode

signal
G023#6
F065#1
F065#0
RGSPM
Spindle rotation direction signal
RGSPP
RGTAP
G061#0
RGTSP1,RGTSP2
Rigid tapping spindle selection signal
G061#4,#5
RLSOT3
Stroke check 3 release signal
G007#4
RMTDI0 to RMTDI7
Input signal for remote buffer
G052
RMTDO0 to RMTDO7 Output signal for remote buffer
F069
ROTAA
G072#1
ROTAB
Rotation direction command while changing the

orientation sto
osition signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
stop position
ROTAC
ROV1,ROV2
G076#1
G206#1
Rapid traverse override signal
1417
G014#0,#1
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
6.10.2
6.10.2
1.2.9
6.10.1
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15.4
9.3
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
5.13
3.4
9 11
9.11
9.11
9.11
2.3.3
13.2
13.2
9.2, 9.15
7.1.7.1
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
RST
Reset signal
F001#1
RT
G019#7
RTAP
Rigid tapping in-progress signal
F076#3
RTE
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis

control)
G150#6
RTO
Software operator's panel signal(RT)
F077#6
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
RTNCY
Retry start signal
G064#0
RTNMVS
Retry point signal
F066#3
RTRCT
Retract signal
G066#4
RTRCTF
Retract completion signal
F065#4
RVS
Retrace signal
G007#0
RVSL
Retrace-in-progress signal
F082#2
RWD
Rewinding signal
F000#0
S00 to S31
Spindle speed code signal
F022 to F025
SA
Servo ready signal
F000#6
SAR
G029#4
ROV1E,ROV2E
Rapid traverse override signal(PMC axis control)
G150#0,#1
ROV1O
Software operator's panel signal(ROV1)
F076#4
ROV2O
Software operator's panel signal(ROV2)
F076#5
RPALM
F053#3
RPBSY
Read/punch inprogress signal
F053#2
RPDO
F002#1
RRW
Reset&rewind signal
G008#6
RSLA
RSLB
G071#6
Output switch request signal (serial spindle)
RSLC
Address
G205#6
SARA
SARB
G075#6
F045#3
Speed arrival signal (serial spindle)
SARC
F049#3
F168#3
S
SBK
Single block signal
G046#1
SBKO
Software operator's panel signal(SBK)
F075#3
SCLP
F038#0
SDTA
SDTB
F045#2
Speed detection signal (serial spindle)
SDTC
F049#2
F168#2
1418
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15.1
12.1.15
12.1.15
13.8, 13.5
13.8, 13.5
2.8
5.2
9.2, 9.15
5.2
3.1
9.11
15.1
12.1.15
5.13
5.13
1.13
1.13
11.15
11.15
5.2
8.1
2.2
9.3
9.2, 9.15
5.3.3
12.1.15
9.8
f
f
f
9.2, 9.15
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Group
Signal name
Address
SF
Spindle speed strobe signal
F007#2
SFIN
G005#2
SFRA
SFRB
G070#5
CW command signal (serial spindle)
G074#5
SFRC
G204#5
SGN
G033#5
SGN2
Spindle motor command polarity select signal
SGN3
G035#5
G037#5
SHA00 to SHA11
S indle orientation external sto
Spindle
stop position
osition command
signal
SHB00 to SHB11
G078#0 to
G079#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
G208#0 to
G209#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Skip signal
X004#7
X004#7
SKIP2 to SKIP6,
SKIP7,SKIP8
Skip signal
X004#2 to #6,
#0,#1
SKIPP
Skip signal
G006#6
f
f
SLCSEQ
Retry point selection signal
G064#1
SLPCA,SLPCB
Spindle return select signal
G064#2,#3
SLSPA,SLSPB
Spindle command select signal
G063#2,#3
Spindle orientation stop position external command

signal
SIND
SIND2
G033#7
Spindle motor speed command select signal
SIND3
G035#7
G037#7
SKIP
SLVA
SLVB
G073#1
Slave operation command signal (serial spindle)
G077#1
SLVC
G207#1
SLVSA
F046#4
SLVSB
Slave operation status signal (serial spindle)
SLVSC
SMZ
G053#6
SOCNA
SOCNB
F050#4
F169#4
Error detect signal
G071#4
Soft start/stop cancel signal (serial spindle)
SOCNC
G075#4
G205#4
SOR
G029#5
SOV0 to SOV7
Spindle speed override signal
G030
SPAL
Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal
F035#0
SPL
F000#4
1419
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
G080#0 to
G081#3
f
f
f
f
f
SHC00 to SHC11
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
F
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
8.1
8.4
9.2, 9.15
15.4
9 13
9.13
9.15
15.4
14.3.1
11.17
14.3.3
14.3.1
5.13
9.4
9.4
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
7.2.6.3
9.2, 9.15
9.3
9.3
9.6
5.1
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
ST
G007#2
STL
Cycle start signal
F000#5
STLK
Start lock signal
G007#1
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
STRD
Input and run simultaneous mode select signal
G058#5
STWD
Output and run simultaneous mode select signal
G058#6
SUCLP
F038#1
SVF1 to SVF8
Servo off signal
G126
SPO
Software operator's panel signal(*SP)
F075#7
SPPHS
Spindle phase synchronous control signal
G038#3
SPSLA
SPSLB
G071#2
Spindle select signal (serial spindle)
SPSLC
G075#2
G205#2
SPSTP
Spindle stop complete signal
G028#6
SPSYC
G038#2
SRLNI0 to SRLNI3
G091#0 to #3
SRLNO0 to SRLNO3
F178#0 to #3
SRN
G006#0
SRNMV
F002#4
SRVA
SRVB
G070#4
CCW command signal (serial spindle)
G074#4
SRVC
G204#4
SSIN
G033#6
SSIN2
S
Address
G035#6
SSIN3
G037#6
SSTA
F045#1
SSTB
Speed zero signal (serial spindle)
SSTC
F168#1
SWS1
SWS2
F049#1
G027#0
G027#1
Spindle selection signal
SWS3
G027#2
SYCAL
Spindle synchronous control alarm signal
F044#4
SYCAL
F044#4
SYN1O to SYN8O
Synchronous control under way signals
F118
1420
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
12.1.15
9.12
9.2, 9.15
9.8
9.12
13.8
13.8
5.7
5.7
9.2, 9.15
15.4
9.2, 9.15
5.1
5.1
2.5
13.6
13.6
9.8
1.2.8
9.10
f
f
-
9.12
9.16
1.8
B63003EN1/02
Symbol
Group
Signal name
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
SYN1O to SYN7O
Synchronous composite superimposed control

under way signals
F118#0 to #6
SYNC1 to SYNC8
Simple synchronous axis select signal
G138
SYNC to SYNC8
Synchronous control axis selection signals
G138
SYNC to SYNC7
G138#0 to #6
F
f
f
F
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8
Simple synchronous manual feed axis select signal
G140
SYNMOD
EGB mode signal
F065#6
T00 to T31
Tool function code signal
F026 to F029
TAP
Tapping signal
F001#5
TF
F007#3
TFIN
G005#3
THRD
F002#3
TIALM
Tool post interference alarm signal
F064#7
TICHK
F064#6
TL01 to TL64
G047#0 to #6
Tool group number select signal
TL01 to TL256
f
f
f
f
f
F
F
f
G047#0 to
G048#0
TLCH
Tool change signal
F064#0
TLCHI
F064#2
TLNW
F064#1
TLRST
G048#7
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
TLRSTI
G048#6
TLSKP
Tool skip signal
G048#5
TMRON
General purpose integrating meter start signal
G053#0
TRACT
F092#3
TRESC
G059#0
TRQL1 to TRQL8
Torque limit reached signal
F114
TRRTN
Tool return signal
G059#1
TRSPS
F092#5
TLMA
TLMB
Address
F045#6
Torque limit signal (serial spindle)
F049#6
TLMC
F168#6
TLMHA
G070#1
TLMHB
Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial spindle)
G074#1
TLMHC
G204#1
TLMLA
G070#0
TLMLB
Torque limit command LOW signal (serial spindle)
TLMLC
G074#0
G204#0
1421
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
19
1.6
18
.
1.9
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
6.4.1
2.3.5
2.3.5
1.6
1.13
8.1
11.7
8.1
8.4
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
10.3
10.3
10.3
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
9.2, 9.15
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
12.1.11
5.8
5.8
14.3.4
5.8
5.8
Symbol
Group
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Address
UI000 to UI015
Input signal for custom macro
G054,G055
UINT
G053#3
U
UO000 to UO015
F054,F055
Output signal for custom macro
UO100 to UO131
F056 to F059
WATO
Waiting signal
F063#6
WOQSM
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write

mode select signal
G039#6
WOSET
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write

signal
G040#7
T
M
Referen
series series
ce item
f
f
f
f
F
f
X004#0
f
f
X004#1
ZAE
X004#1
ZAE
X004#2
XAE
YAE
ZP1 to ZP8
F094
ZP21 to ZP28
2nd reference position return end signal
F096
ZP31 to ZP38
3rd reference position return end signal
F098
ZP41 to ZP48
4th reference position return end signal
F100
ZPX
Spindle orientation completion signal
F094
ZRF1 to ZRF8
Reference position establishment signal
F120
ZRN
Manual reference position return selection signal
G043#7
ZRNO
Software operator's panel signal(ZRN)
F073#4
1422
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
11.6.1
11.6.2
11 6 1
11.6.1
8.5
14.4.2
14.4.2
f
f
14 2
14.2
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
4.1
4.5
4.5
4.5
9.8
4.1
4.1
12.1.15
B63003EN1/02
A.2.3
List of Signals
(In Order of Addresses)
f
F
:
:
Available
Available only with
2path control
Unavailable
T
series
M
series
XAE
YAE
X004#1
ZAE
f
f
X004#2
ZAE
Address
Signal name
Symbol
X004#0
X004#1
X004#2,#4
+MIT1,+MIT2
X004#2,#4
+MIT1,+MIT2
X004#2 to #6,#0,#1
Skip signal
SKIP2 to SKIP6,
SKIP7,SKIP8
X004#3,#5
-MIT1,-MIT2
X004#3,#5
-MIT1,-MIT2
X004#6
Skip signal (PMC axis control)
ESKIP
X004#7
Skip signal
SKIP
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
X004#7
SKIP
X008#4
*ESP
X009
Reference position return deceleration signal
*DEC1 to *DEC8
Y(n+0)
Servo motor speed detection signals
DSV1 to DSV8
Y(n+1)#0 to #2
Spindle motor speed detection signals
DSP1, DSP2, DSP3
G000,G001
Data signal for external data input
ED0 to ED15
G002#0 to #6
Address signal for external data input
EA0 to EA6
G002#7
ESTB
G004#3
End signal
FIN
G004#4
MFIN2
G004#5
MFIN3
G005#0
MFIN
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
G005#1
External operation function completion signal
EFIN
G005#2
SFIN
G005#3
TFIN
G005#4
BFIN
G005#6
Auxiliary function lock signal
AFL
f
f
f
f
G005#7
BFIN
G006#0
SRN
G006#2
*ABSM
G006#4
OVC
1423
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
14 2
14.2
f
-
2.5
14.4.2
14.3.3
14.4.2
14.4.2
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
15.1
14.3.1
11.17
2.1
4.1
2 11
2.11
15.2
15.2
15.2
8.1
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.4
8.2
8.4
5.7
5.4
7.1.7.4
Address
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
G006#6
Skip signal
SKIPP
G007#0
Retrace signal
RVS
G007#1
Start lock signal
STLK
G007#2
Cycle start signal
ST
G007#4
Stroke check 3 release signal
RLSOT3
G007#5
Follow up signal
*FLWU
G007#6
Stored stroke limit select signal
EXLM
G007#7
Stroke limit release signal
RLSOT
G008#0
Interlock signal
*IT
G008#4
*ESP
G008#5
Feed hold signal
*SP
G008#6
RRW
G008#7
ERS
G009#0 to 4
PN1,PN2,PN4,
PN8,PN16
G010,G011
Manual feedrate override signal
*JV0 to *JV15
G012
Feedrate override signal
*FV0 to *FV7
G013
2nd feedrate override signal
*AFV0 to *AFV7
G014#0,#1
Rapid traverse override signal
ROV1,ROV2
G016#0
Motor speed detection function enable signal
MSDFON
G016#7
F1 digit feed select signal
F1D
G018#0 to #3
G018#4 to #7
HS1A to HS1D
HS2A to HS2D
G019#0 to #3
HS3A to HS3D
T
series
M
series
Referen
ce
Item
14.3.1
11.15
2.5
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
G019#4,#5
Manual handle feed amount selection signal (incremental

feed signal)
MP1,MP2
G019#7
RT
G020#0 to #3
HS4A to HS4D
G023#4
Handlesynchronous feed signal
HDLF
G023#6
Tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed mode signal
RGHTH
G023#7
Tool axis direction handle feed mode signal
ALNGH
G027#0
G027#1
SWS1
SWS2
Spindle selection signal
G027#2
SWS3
G027#3
*SSTP1
G027#4
*SSTP2
Stop signal in each spindle
G027#5
*SSTP3
G027#7
Cs contour control switch signal
CON
G028#1,#2
Gear selection signal (input)
GR1,GR2
1424
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
5.1
2.3.3
1.2.7
2.3.2
2.3.2
2.5
2.1
5.1
5.2
5.2
15.3
3.1
7.1.7.2
7.1.7.3
7.1.7.1
2.11
7.1.5
3.2
3.2
3.1
3.2
3.8
3.4
3.4.1
9.10
9.10
f
f
9.9
9.3
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
M
series
Referen
ce
Item
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.10
G033#7
SIND
G034#0 to G035#3
R01I2 to R12I2
G035#5
SGN2
G035#6
SSIN2
G035#7
SIND2
G036#0 to G037#3
R01I3 to R12I3
G037#5
SGN3
G037#6
SSIN3
G037#7
SIND3
G038#0
*PLSST
G038#2
SPSYC
G038#3
Spindle phase synchronous control signal
SPPHS
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
G038#6
B axis unclamp completion signal
*BEUCP
*BECLP
f
f
f
f
14.4.2
14.4.2
14.4.2
14.4.1
14.4.2
G028#4
*SUCPF
G028#5
*SCPF
G028#6
Spindle stop complete signal
SPSTP
G028#7
PC2SLC
G029#0
GR21
Gear select signal (input)
G029#2
GR31
G029#4
SAR
G029#5
SOR
G029#6
Spindle stop signal
*SSTP
G030
Spindle speed override signal
SOV0 to SOV7
G032#0 to G033#3
R01I to R12I
G033#5
SGN
G033#6
G038#7
SSIN
B-axis clamp completion signal
G039#0 to
#5,G040#0
Tool offset number select signal
OFN0 to OFN5,
OFN6
G039#6
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode

select signal
WOQSM
G039#7
Tool offset value write mode select signal
GOQSM
G040#6
PRC
G040#7
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal
WOSET
G041#0 to #3
G041#4 to #7
HS1IA to HS1ID
Manual handle interrupt axis selection signal
G042#0 to #3
HS2IA to HS2ID
HS3IA to HS3ID
G042#7
Direct operation select signal
DMMC
G043#0 to #2
MD1,MD2,MD4
1425
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
9 10
9.10
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
9.3
9.3
9.3
9.3
15.4
15 4
15.4
15.4
15.4
15.4
15.4
15.4
15.4
15.4
15.4
15.4
6.10.2
9.12
9.12
11.11
11.11
3.3
15.6
2.6
Address
B63003EN1/02
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
TL01 to TL64
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
TL01 to TL256
Signal name
Symbol
G043#5
DNC operation select signal
DNCI
G043#7
Manual reference position return selection signal
ZRN
G044#0,G045
Optional block skip signal
BDT1, BDT2 to
BDT9
G044#1
All-axis machine lock signal
MLK
G046#1
Single block signal
SBK
G046#3 to #6
Memory protect signal
KEY1 to KEY4
G046#7
Dry run signal
DRN
G047#0 to #6
Tool group number select signal
G047#0 to G048#0
G048#5
Tool skip signal
TLSKP
G048#6
TLRSTI
G048#7
TLRST
G049#0 to G050#1
Tool life count override signal
*TLV0 to *TLV9
G051#0 to #3
Chopping feedrate override signals
*CHP8 to *CHP0
G051#6
CHPST
G051#7
*CHLD
G052
Input signal for remote buffer
RMTDI0 to RMTDI7
G053#0
General-purpose integrating meter start signal
TMRON
G053#3
UINT
G053#6
Error detect signal
SMZ
G053#7
Chamferring signal
CDZ
G054,G055
Input signal for custom macro
UI000 to UI015
G058#0
External start signal program input
MINP
G058#1
EXRD
G058#2
EXSTP
G058#3
EXWT
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
G058#5
Input and run simultaneous mode select signal
STRD
G058#6
Output and run simultaneous mode select signal
STWD
G059#0
TRESC
G059#1
Tool return signal
TRRTN
G060#7
Tail stock barrier select signal
*TSB
G061#0
RGTAP
G061#4,#5
Rigid tap spindle select signal
RGTSP1, RGTSP2
G062#1
Automatic erase CRT screen display cancel signal
*CRTOF
G063#0
Path selection signal (Tool post selection signal)
HEAD
G063#1
No-wait signal
NOWT
G063#2,#3
Spindle command select signal
SLSPA,SLSPB
G063#5
Perpendicular/angular axis control disable signal
NOZAGC
1426
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
F
F
f
Referen
ce
Item
5.11
4.1
5.5
5.3.1
5.3.3
12.2.3
5.3.2
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
10 3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
1.12
1.12
1.12
13.2
12.1.11
11.6.2
7.2.6.3
11.9
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
11.6.1
13.7
13.8, 13.5
13.8, 13.5
13.8, 13.5
13.6
13.6
5.8
5.8
2.3.4
9.11
9.11
f
F
F
12.1.19
2.7
8.5
9.4
1.11
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
G064#0
Retry start signal
RTNCY
G064#1
Retry point selection signal
SLCSEQ
G064#2,#3
Spindle feedback select signal
SLPCA,SLPCB
G064#6
Simple spindle synchronous control signal
ESRSYC
G066#0
All axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
IGNVRY
G066#1
External key input mode selection signal
ENBKY
F
f
f
f
G066#4
Retract signal
RTRCT
G066#7
EKSET
G070#0
TLMLA
G070#1
TLMHA
G070#3,#2
CTH1A,CTH2A
G070#4
SRVA
G070#5
SFRA
G070#6
ORCMA
G070#7
Machine ready completion signal (serial spindle)
MRDYA
G071#0
ARSTA
G071#1
*ESPA
G071#2
SPSLA
G071#3
MCFNA
G071#4
Soft start stop cancel signal (serial spindle)
SOCNA
G071#5
Signal for controlling velocity integration (serial spindle)
INTGA
G071#6
RSLA
G071#7
RCHA
G072#0
Orientation stop position change signal (serial spindle)
INDXA
G072#1

orientation stop position signal (serial spindle)
ROTAA
G072#2
Shortdistant movement command while changing the

NRROA
G072#3
DEFMDA
G072#4
OVRIDA
G072#5
Incremental command external setting type orientation

G072#6
M
series
f
f
-
Referen
ce
Item
5.13
5.13
9.4
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
INCMDA
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Main spindle MCC status signal while changing spindles

MFNHGA
92
G072#7
Highoutput MCC status signal while a magnetic sensor

(serial spindle)
RCHHGA
92
G073#0
Command for spindle orientaion with a magnetic sensor

(serial spindle)
MORCMA
G073#1
SLVA
G073#2
MPOFA
G074#0
TLMLB
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
1427
9.16
2.9
15.5
1.13
15.5
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
92
92
92
.
9.2
92
92
.
.
.
92
.
9.2
92
9.2
Address
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
G074#1
TLMHB
G074#3,#2
CTH1B,CTH2B
G074#4
SRVB
G074#5
SFRB
G074#6
ORCMB
G074#7
Machine ready completion signal (serial spindle)
MRDYB
G075#0
ARSTB
G075#1
*ESPB
G075#2
SPSLB
G075#3
MCFNB
G075#4
SOCNB
G075#5
INTGB
G075#6
RSLB
G075#7
RCHB
G076#0
INDXB
G076#1

ROTAB
G076#2

NRROB
G076#3
DEFMDB
G076#4
OVRIDB
G076#5

INCMDB
f
f
f
f
G076#6

MFNHGB
9.2
G076#7

(serial spindle)
RCHHGB
9.2
G077#0

(serial spindle)
MORCMB
G077#1
SLVB
G077#2
MPOFB
MP31,MP32
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
MP41,MP42
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
G078#0 to G079#3
SHA00 to SHA11
Spindle orientation external stop position command signal
G080#0 to G081#3
G086#0 to #3
SHB00 to SHB11
Feed axis and direction selection signals
+Jg, Jg, +Ja, Ja
G087#0,#1
G087#3,#4
MP21,MP22
Manual handle feed travel distance select signal
(incremental feed signal)
G087#6,#7
G088#4 to #7
Manual handle interrupt axis select signal
HS4IA to HS4ID
G091#0 to #3
SRLNI0 to SRLNI3
G092#0
I/O Link confirmation signal
IOLACK
G092#1
IOLS
1428
f
f
f
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9 13
9.13
3.5
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.3
13.8
13.8
13.8
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
T
series
M
series
MLK1 to MLK8
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
+LM1 to +LM8
-LM1 to -LM8
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Symbol
G092#2
Power Mate read/write inprogress signal
BGION
G092#3
BGIALM
G092#4
Power Mate background busy signal
BGEN
G096#0 to #6
1% step rapid traverse override signal
*HROV0 to *HROV6
G096#7
1% step rapid traverse override select signal
HROV
G098
Key code signal
EKC0 to EKC7
G100
+J1 to +J8
G102
-J1 to -J8
G106
Mirror image signal
G108
Each axis machine lock signal
MI1 to MI8
G110
G112
G114
*+L1 to *+L8
Overtravel signal
G116
*-L1 to *-L8
G118
*+ED1 to *+ED8
G120
*-ED1 to *-ED8
G122
PK1 to PK8
Parking signals
G122#0 to #6
PK1 to PK7
G122#6 (G031#6)
First spindle synchronous control signal
PKESS1
G122#7 (G031#7)
Second spindle synchronous control signal
PKESS2
G124
Controlled axis detach signal
DTCH1 to DTCH8
G126
Servo off signal
SVF1 to SVF8
G128#0 to #6
Composite control axis selection signals
MIX1 to MIX7
G130
*IT1 to *IT8
G132#0 to #3
f
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
F
f
+MIT1 to +MIT4
-MIT1 to -MIT4

G134#0 to #3
G136
Control axis select signal (PMC axis control)
EAX1 to EAX8
G138
Simple synchronous axis select signal
SYNC1 to SYNC8
G140
Simple synchronous manual feed axis select signal
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8
G138
SYNC to SYNC8
G138#0 to #6
SYNC to SYNC7
G142#0
Auxiliary function completion signal (PMC axis control)
EFINA
G142#2
Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control)
EMBUFA
G142#3
ESBKA
G142#4
ESOFA
G142#5
Axis control temporary stop signal (PMC axis control)
ESTPA
G142#6
ECLRA
G142#7
Axis control command read signal (PMC axis control)
EBUFA
1429
f
f
-
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
13.8
13.8
13.8
7.1.7.1
7.1.7.1
15.5
31
3.1
1.2.6
5.3.1
232
2.3.2
231
2.3.1
719
7.1.9
.
1.9
18
9.16
9.16
1.2.4
1.2.8
19
2.5
25
2.5
15.1
1.6
1.6
.
1.9
18
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
Address
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
G143#0 to #6
EC0A to EC6A
G143#7
Block stop disable signal (PMC axis control)
EMSBKA
G144,G145
EIF0A to EIF15A
G146 to G149
EID0A to EID31A
G150#0,#1
Rapid traverse override signal (PMC axis control)
ROV1E,ROV2E
G150#5
Override cancel signal (PMC axis control)
OVCE
G150#6
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control)
RTE
G150#7
DRNE
G151
Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control)
*FV0E to *FV7E
G154#0
EFINB
G154#2
EMBUFB
G154#3
ESBKB
G154#4
ESOFB
G154#5
ESTPB
G154#6
ECLRB
G154#7
EBUFB
G155#0 to #6
EC0B to EC6B
G155#7
EMSBKB
G156,G157
EIF0B to EIF15B
G158 to G161
EID0B to EID31B
G166#0
EFINC
G166#2
EMBUFC
G166#3
ESBKC
G166#4
ESOFC
G166#5
ESTPC
G166#6
ECLRC
G166#7
EBUFC
G167#0 to #6
EC0C to EC6C
G167#7
EMSBKC
G168,G169
EIF0C to EIF15C
G170 to G173
EID0C to EID31C
G178#0
EFIND
G178#2
EMBUFD
G178#3
ESBKD
G178#4
ESOFD
G178#5
ESTPD
G178#6
ECLRD
G178#7
EBUFD
1430
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
G179#0 to #6
EC0D to EC6D
G179#7
EMSBKD
G180,G181
EIF0D to EIF15D
G182 to G185
EID0D to EID31D
G190#0 to #6
Superimposed control axis selection signals
OVLS1 to OVLS7
G192
Each axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
IGVRY1 to IGVRY8
G198
Position display neglect signal
NPOS1 to NPOS8
G204#0
TLMLC
G204#1
TLMHC
G204#3,#2
CTH1C,CTH2C
G204#4
SRVC
G204#5
SFRC
G204#6
ORCMC
G204#7
Machine ready signal (serial spindle)
MRDYC
G205#0
ARSTC
G205#1
*ESPC
G205#2
SPSLC
G205#3
MCFNC
G205#4
SOCNC
G205#5
INTGC
G205#6
RSLC
G205#7
RCHC
G206#0
INDXC
G206#1

ROTAC
G206#2

NRROC
G206#3
DEFMDC
G206#4
OVRIDC
G206#5

INCMDC
f
f
f
f
G206#6

MFNHGC
9 15
G206#7

(serial spindle)
RCHHGC
9 15
G207#0

(serial spindle)
MORCMC
G207#1
SLVC
G207#2
MPOFC
G208#0 to G209#3
Spindle orientation stop position external command signal SHC00 to SHC11
F000#0
Rewinding signal
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
RWD
1431
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
19
2.9
12.1.10
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9 15
9 15
9 15
.
9.15
9 15
9 15
.
.
.
9 15
.
9.15
9 15
9.15
5.2
Address
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F000#4
SPL
F000#5
STL
F000#6
Servo ready completion signal
SA
F000#7
OP
F001#0
Alarm signal
AL
F001#1
Resetting signal
RST
F001#2
BAL
F001#3
DEN
F001#4
ENB
F001#5
Tapping signal
TAP
F001#7
CNC signal
MA
F002#0
Inch input signal
INCH
F002#1
RPDO
F002#2
CSS
F002#3
THRD
F002#4
SRNMV
F002#6
Cutting feed signal
CUT
F002#7
MDRN
F003#0
Incremental feed select check signal
MINC
F003#1
Manual handle feed select check signal
MH
F003#2
Jog feed select check signal
MJ
F003#3
Manual data input select check signal
MMDI
F003#4
DNC operation selection confirm signal
MRMT
F003#5
Automatic operation select check signal
MMEM
F003#6
Memory edit select check signal
MEDT
F003#7
TEACH IN select check signal
MTCHIN
F004#0,F005
Optional block skip check signal
MBDT1,MBDT2 to
MBDT9
F004#1
All axis machine lock check signal
MMLK
F004#2
MABSM
F004#3
MSBK
F004#4
Auxiliary function lock check signal
MAFL
F004#5
Manual reference position return selection check signal
MREF
F007#0
Miscellaneous function strobe signal
MF
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F007#1
Externaloperationsignal for high speed interface
EFD
F007#2
Spindle speed function strobe signal
SF
F007#3
TF
F007#4
BF
f
f
f
BF

F007#7
1432
Referen
ce
Item
5.1
5.1
2.2
5.1
2.4
5.2
2.4
8.1
9.3
11.7
2.2
11.4
2.8
9.5
6.4.1
5.7
2.8
5.3.2
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
5.11
2.6
2.6
2.6
5.5
5.3.1
5.4
5.3.3
8.2
4.1
8.1
8.4
8.1
8.1
81
8.1
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
Symbol
F008#0
EF
F008#4
MF2
F008#5
MF3
F009#4
DM30
F009#5
DM02
Decode M signal
F009#6
DM01
F009#7
DM00
F010 to F013
Miscellaneous function code signal
M00 to M31
F014 to F015
2nd M function code signal
M200 to M215
F016 to F017
3rd M function code signal
M300 to M315
F022 to F025
Spindle speed code signal
S00 to S31
F026 to F029
Tool function code signal
T00 to T31
F030 to F033
2nd miscellaneous function code signal
B00 to B31
F034#0 to #2
Gear selection signal (output )
GR1O,GR2O,
GR3O
F035#0
Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal
SPAL
F036#0 to F037#3S
12 bit code signal
R01O to R12O
F038#0
SCLP
F038#1
SUCLP
F038#2
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
-
ENB3
f
f
f
f
f
f
ENB2
F038#3
T
series
F039#2
Choppinginprogresssignal
CHPMD
F039#3
CHPCYL
F040,F041
Actual spindle speed signal
AR0 to AR15
F044#1
Cs contour control switch completion signal
FSCSL
F044#2
Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal
FSPSY
F044#3
Spindle phase synchronous control completion signal
FSPPH
F044#4
Spindle synchronous control alarm signal
SYCAL
F044#4
SYCAL
F045#0
ALMA
F045#1
SSTA
F045#2
SDTA
F045#3
SARA
F045#4
LDT1A
F045#5
LDT2A
F045#6
TLMA
F045#7
ORARA
F046#0
CHPA
F046#1
CFINA
1433
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
11.8
8.3
8.3
81
8.1
8.1
8.3
8.3
8.1
8.1
8.1
9.3
9.6
9.3
9.8
9.8
9 10
9.10
-
f
f
-
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
1.12
1.12
9.7
9.9
9.12
9.12
9.12
9.16
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
Address
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
F046#2
RCHPA
F046#3
RCFNA
F046#4
SLVSA
F046#5
Signal for approximate spindle orientation with a position

coder (serial spindle)
PORA2A
f
f
f
f
F046#6

magnetic sensor (serial spindle)
MORA1A
92
F046#7
SIgnal for approximate spindle orientation with a magnetic

MORA2A
92
F047#0
Signal indicating the status of the detected one rotation

position coder signal (serial spindle)
PC1DEA
F047#1
Incremental method orientation signal (serial spindle)
INCSTA
F049#0
ALMB
F049#1
SSTB
F049#2
SDTB
F049#3
SARB
F049#4
LDT1B
F049#5
LDT2B
F049#6
TLMB
F049#7
ORARB
F050#0
CHPB
F050#1
CFINB
F050#2
RCHPB
F050#3
RCFNB
F050#4
SLVSB
F050#5

PORA2B
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F050#6

MORA1B
92
F050#7

MORA2B
92
F051#0

PC1DEB
F051#1
INCSTB
F053#0
INHKY
F053#1
Program screen display mode signal
PRGDPL
F053#2
Read/punch inprogress signal
RPBSY
F053#3
RPALM
F053#4
BGEACT
F053#7
EKENB
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
1434
9.2
9.2
92
92
.
.
.
92
9 25
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
9.2
92
92
.
.
.
92
9 25
15.5
15.5
13.8, 13.5
13.8, 13.5
13.8, 13.5
15.5
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
12.1.11
6.10.2
6.10.2
6.10.2
F060#0
EREND
F060#1
ESEND
f
f
f
f
F061#0
B-axis unclamp signal
BUCLP
F061#1
B-axis clamp signal
BCLP
F062#7
Target part count reached signal
PRTSF
F063#0
Master axis not arrival signal
PSE1
F063#1
Polygon synchronous axis not arrival signal
PSE2
F063#2
Spindle polygon speed arrival signal
PSAR
f
f
f
f
F063#5
Retry complete signal
RCYO
F063#6
Waiting signal
WATO
F063#7
Polygon synchronization under way signal
PSYN
F064#0
Tool change signal
TLCH
F064#1
TLNW
F
f
f
f
F064#2
TLCHI
F064#5
COSP
F064#6
TICHK
F064#7
tool post interference alarm signal
TIALM
F
F
F
RGSPP
RGSPM
F054,F055
UO000 to UO015
Output signal for custom macro
F056 to F059
UO100 to UO131
F065#0
Spindle rotation direction signal
F065#1
F065#4
Retract completion signal
RTRCTF
F065#6
EGB mode signal
SYNMOD
F066#0
Lock-ahead control mode signal
G08MD
F066#2
Feed zero signal
FEED0
F066#3
Retry point signal
RTNMVS
F066#5
Small-diameter peck drilling in progress signal
PECK2
F066#6
HPCC mode signal
MHPCC
F066#7
EXHPCC
F069
Output signal for remote buffer
RMTDO0 to
RMTDO7
F070#0 to F071#1
PSW01 to PSW10
F072
Software operator's panelgeneral-purpose switch signal
OUT0 to OUT7
F073#0
Software operator's panel signal (MD1)
MD1O
F073#1
MD2O
F073#2
MD4O
F073#4
Software operator's panel signal (ZRN)
ZRNO
F075#2
Software operator's panel signal (BDT)
BDTO
F075#3
Software operator's panel signal (SBK)
SBKO
1435
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F
-
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
11 6 1
11.6.1
15.2
15.2
11.11
11.11
5.13
8.5
6.10.1
10.3
10.3
10.3
9.4
2.3.5
2.3.5
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
9 11
9.11
1.13
1.13
7.1.13
3.8
5.13
11.17
7.1.14
7.1.14
13.2
1.2.9
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
Address
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
F075#4
Software operator's panel signal (MLK)
MLKO
F075#5
Software operator's panel signal (DRN)
DRNO
F075#6
Software operator's panel signal (KEY1 to KEY4)
KEYO
F075#7
Software operator's panel signal (*SP)
SPO
F076#0
Software operator's panel signal (MP1)
MP1O
F076#1
Software operator's panel signal (MP2)
MP2O
F076#3
Rigid tapping mode signal
RTAP
F076#4
Software operator's panel signal (ROV1)
ROV1O
F076#5
Software operator's panel signal (ROV2)
ROV2O
F077#0
Software operator's panel signal (HS1A)
HS1AO
F077#1
Software operator's panel signal (HS1B)
HS1BO
F077#2
Software operator's panel signal (HS1C)
HS1CO
F077#3
Software operator's panel signal (HS1D)
HS1DO
F077#6
Software operator's panel signal (RT)
RTO
F078
Software operator's panel signal (*FV0 to *FV7)
*FV0O to *FV7O
F079,F080
Software operator's panel signal (*JV0 to *JV15)
*JV0O to *JV15O
F081#0,#2, #4,#6
Software operator's panel signal (+J1 to +J4)
+J1O to +J4O
F081#1,#3, #5,#7
Software operator's panel signal (-J1 to -J4)
-J1O to -J4O
F082#2
Retrace-in-progress signal
RVSL
F090#0
Servo axis abnormal load detected signal
ABTQSV
F090#1
First-spindle abnormal load detected signal
ABTSP1
F090#2
Second-spindle abnormal load detected signal
ABTSP2
F090#3
Abnormal load detection for the third spindle
ABTSP3
F092#3
TRACT
F092#5
TRSPS
ZP1 to ZP8
Spindle orientation completion signal
ZPX
F096
2nd reference position return end signal
ZP21 to ZP28
F098
3rd reference position return end signal
ZP31 to ZP38
F100
4th reference position return end signal
ZP41 to ZP48
F102
Axis moving signal
MV1 to MV8
F104
In-position signal
INP1 to INP8
F106
Axis moving direction signal
MVD1 to MVD8
F108
Mirror image check signal
MMI1 to MMI8
F110
Controlled axis detach status signal
MDTCH1 to
MDTCH8
F112
Distribution completion signal (PMC axis control)
EADEN1 to
EADEN8
F114
Torque limit reached signal
TRQL1 to TRQL8
F094
1436
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
9.11
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
12.1.15
11.15
2.10
2.10
2.10
9.15
5.8
5.8
4.1
9.8
4.5
4.5
4.5
1.2.5
7.2.6.1
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.4
15.1
14.3.4
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
Symbol
F116
Floating reference position return end signal
FRP1 to FRP8
F118
Synchronous control under way signals
SYN1O to SYN8O
F118#0 to #6
Synchronous composite superimposed control under way

SYN1O to SYN7O
signals
F120
Reference position establishment signal
F122
High speed skip status signal
HDO0 to HDO7
F129#5
EOV0
F129#7
Control axis selection status signal (PMC axis control)
*EAXSL
F130#0
EINPA
F130#1
ECKZA
F130#2
EIALA
F130#3
Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control)
EDENA
F130#4
EGENA
F130#5
Positive direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)
F130#6
ZRF1 to ZRF8
Negative-direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)
EOTPA
EOTNA
F130#7
Axis control command read completion signal (PMC axis

control)
EBSYA
F131#0
EMFA
F131#1
Bufferful signal (PMC axis control)
EABUFA
F132,F142
EM11A to EM48A
F133#0
EINPB
F133#1
ECKZB
F133#2
EIALB
F133#3
EDENB
F133#4
EGENB
F133#5
F133#6
EOTPB
EOTNB
F133#7

control)
EBSYB
F134#0
EMFB
F134#1
Bufferful signal (PMC axis control)
EABUFB
F135,F145
EM11B to EM48B
F136#0
EINPC
F136#1
ECKZC
F136#2
EIALC
F136#3
EDENC
F136#4
EGENC
F136#5
F136#6
1437
EOTPC
EOTNC
T
series
M
series
f
f
F
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
4.6
18
19
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
.
.
4.1
14.3.2
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
Address
B63003EN1/02
Signal name
Symbol
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
F139#7

control)
EBSYD
F140#0
EMFD
F140#1
EABUFD
F141,F151
EM11D to EM48D
F168#0
ALMC
F168#1
SSTC
F168#2
SDTC
F168#3
SARC
F168#4
LDT1C
F168#5
LDT2C
F168#6
TLMC
F168#7
ORARC
F269#0
CHPC
F169#1
CFINC
F169#2
RCHPC
F169#3
RCFNC
F169#4
SLVSC
F169#5

PORA2C
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F169#6

MORA1C
9 15
F169#7

MORA2C
9 15
F170#0

PC1DEC
F170#1
INCSTC
F177#0
IOLNK
F177#1
ERDIO
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
F136#7

control)
EBSYC
F137#0
EMFC
F137#1
EABUFC
F138,F148
EM11C to EM48C
F139#0
EINPD
F139#1
ECKZD
F139#2
EIALD
F139#3
EDEND
F139#4
EGEND
F139#5
F139#6
1438
EOTPD
EOTND
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9.15
9 15
9 15
.
.
.
9 15
9 15
13.8
13.8
B63003EN1/02
Address
Signal name
Symbol
F177#2
ESTPIO
F177#3
EWTIO
F177#4
EPRG
F177#5
EVAR
F177#6
EPARM
F177#7
EDGN
F178#0 to #3
SRLNO0 to SRLNO3
F180
Torque limit reach signals for butttype reference position

CLRCH1 to CLRCH8
setting
F182
Controlling signal (PMC axis control)
EACNT1 to
EACNT8
1439
T
series
M
series
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
Referen
ce
Item
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
13.8
4.7
15.1
Index
B63003EN1/02
Note
Volume 1 : Up to Page 696 / Volume 2 : Page 697 and later
Numbers
Clock function, 1027

CNC ready signal, 226
2nd reference position return/3rd, 4th reference position return,

384
Command format, 822

Composite control, 124
Connection among spindle, spindle motor, and position coder,
812
Constant surface speed control, 747
Abnormal load detection, 278
Continuous highspeed skip function, 1181
Absolute position detection, 50
Controlled axes, 2
Acceleration/deceleration control, 638
Controlled axes detach, 14
Actual spindle speed output (T series), 759
Conversational programming with graphic function, 1097
Advanced preview control (M series), 563
Coordinate system rotation, 1001
AI contour control (M series), 615
Corner control, 659
Alarm signal, 258
Cs contour control, 781
Alarms and messages, 141
Custom macro, 951
Angular axis control/arbitrary angular axis control, 182
Custom macro variables common to twopath control (T series

(twopath control)), 964
Automatic acceleration/deceleration, 638
Cutter compensation, 922
Automatic corner deceleration (M series), 555
Cutter compensation B, C (M series), 922
Automatic corner override (M series), 545
Cutting feedrate clamp, 527
Automatic feedrate control function, 587
Cycle start/feed hold, 404
Automatic operation, 403
Cylindrical interpolation, 482
Automatic setting of a workpiece coordinate system, 122

Automatic tool length measurement (M series)/automatic tool
offset (T series), 1160
Auxiliary function, 665

Auxiliary function lock, 680
Data input/output functions based on the I/O Link, 1133
Axis control, 1
Decimal point programming/pocket calculator type decimal

point programming, 930
Definition of warning, caution, and note, 142
Differences between superimposed control and ordinary
synchronous control, 129
B
Baxis control (T series), 167
Direct operation by PMC/MMC, 1276
Background editing, 1094
Display data on the diagnosis screen, 818
Backlash compensation, 39
Display of hardware and software configuration, 1036
Balance cut (2path control for T series), 440
Display/set, 1027
Bellshaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed

interpolation, 650
Display/set/edit, 1026
Displaying alarm history, 1031
Butttype reference position setting, 390
Displaying operating monitor, 1053

Displaying operation history, 1028
DNC operation, 442
DNC1 interface, 1107
Canned cycle (M series)/canned cycle for hole machining (T

series), 966
DNC2 interface, 1116

Dry run, 417
Canned cycle (T series)/multiple repetitive canned cycle (T

series), 979
Chopping function (M series), 186
Chuck/tailstock barrier (T series), 243

Circular interpolation, 458
Edit, 1088
i1
INDEX
B63003EN1/02
Note
Emergency stop, 223
Helical interpolation B (M series), 517
Entering compensation values, 1185
Help function, 1030
Erase screen display/automatic erase screen display, 1073
High speed cycle cutting, 945
Error compensation, 30
Highprecision contour control by RISC (M series), 572
Error detect (T series), 663
Highspeed cycle machining retracting, 1019
Exact stop/exact stop mode/tapping mode/cutting mode (M

series), 438
Highspeed linear interpolation (M series), 635
Examples of applications, 118, 125, 128, 149
Highspeed skip signal, 1170
Exponential interpolation (M series), 512
Hobbing machine function (M series), 197
External data input, 1250
Hyponential axis interpolation, 516
Highspeed M/S/T/B interface, 686
External deceleration, 549

External I/O device control, 1117
External key input, 1270

External motion function (M series), 977
Inposition check, 659
External operator message logging and display, 1071
Inposition check independently of feed/rapid traverse, 661
External program input, 1128
Inch/metric conversion, 940
External workpiece number search, 1259
Increment system, 7
Independent control and interpolation between the X1 and
Z2axes and between the X2 and Z1axes, 156
Independent control and interpolation for the X1 and Z2axes,
151
F
F1digit feed (M series), 534
Independent control and superimposed control for the Z1 and

Z2axes, 160
Feed forward in rapid traverse, 664

Feed per minute, 529
Independent control and synchronous control of the Z1 and

Z2axes, 149
Feed per revolution/manual feed per revolution, 532
Index table indexing function (M series), 989
Feed stop function, 551
Input of measured workpiece origin offsets, 1197

Input of offset value measured A (T series), 1185
Feedrate, 128
Input of tool offset value measured B (T series), 1187
Feedrate clamping by arc radius (M series), 552
Input/output of data, 1098
Feedrate control, 524
Interface between CNC and PMC, 1295
Feedrate control/acceleration and deceleration control, 523
Interfaces related to Series 20i MACRO, 1277
Feedrate inverse time specification (M series), 537
Interpolation function, 452
Feedrate override, 541
Interruption type custom macro, 961
Floating reference position return, 387
Involute interpolation (M series), 478
Followup, 22
Items common to synchronous, composite, and superimposed

control, 143
FSSB setting, 51
Items related only to synchronous control, 144
G code system (T series), 932
Jog feed/incremental feed, 295
Graphic display/dynamic graphic display/background graphic,

1044
L
H
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation,

646
Handlesynchronous feed, 350
Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed

interpolation, 653
Helical interpolation, 476
i2
INDEX
B63003EN1/02
Note
Linear interpolation, 455
Notes on interface with the PMC, 832
Linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks, 397
NURBS interpolation (M series), 521
List of addresses, 1296

List of signals, 1387
List of signals (in order of addresses), 1423

List of signals (in order of functions), 1387
Optional block skip/addition of optional block skip, 426
List of signals (in order of symbols), 1405
Outofsynchronization detection, 121
Lookahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, 575
Outputting the movement state of an axis, 17

Override, 538
Override cancel, 544
Overtravel check, 228

Overtravel signal, 228
M code group check function, 693

M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block, 840
Machine coordinate system, 69
Machine lock, 414

Macro compiler/executer, 1011
P/S alarms, 141
Manual absolute on/off, 423
Parameters related to servo, 45
Manual handle feed, 303
Part program storage length, 1088

Password function, 1092
Manual handle interruption, 311

Manual intervention and return, 445
Path selection/display of optional path names (twopath

control), 272
Manual linear/circular interpolation, 325
Periodic maintenance screen, 1080
Manual numeric command, 345
Playback, 1096
Manual operation, 294
PMC axis control/PMC axis speed control function, 1203
Manual reference position return, 358
PMC control function, 1202
Manual rigid tapping (M Series), 342
Polar coordinate interpolation, 479
Measurement, 1158
Polygonal turning, 486
Memory protection key, 1090
Polygonal turning (T series), 485
Mirror image, 19
Polygonal turning with two spindles, 491
Mirror image for double turrets (T series), 987
Position display neglect, 1037
Miscellaneous, 162
Position switch, 26
Miscellaneous function/2nd auxiliary function, 666
Positioning, 453
Mode selection, 264
Positioning by optimul acceleration, 611
Move command after switching between independent control

and synchronous control, 122
Preparations for operation, 222
Move commands after the control mode is switched between

independent control and composite control, 126
Program configuration, 937
Program command, 929

Program restart, 431
Multilanguage display, 1068
Programming, 118, 124, 127
Multispindle control, 797

Multistep skip, 1174
Multiple M commands in a single block, 682
R
Rapid traverse bellshaped acceleration/deceleration, 643
Rapid traverse override, 538
Rapid traverse rate, 524
Name of axes, 5
Reader/puncher interface, 1099
No. of registered programs, 1089
Reading the coordinates during synchronous, composite, or

superimposed control, 147
Normal direction control (M series), 508
i3
INDEX
B63003EN1/02
Note
Reference position establishment, 357
Simple spindle synchronous control, 891
Reference position return, 381
Simple synchronous control, 80
Reference position return and its check during synchronous

control, 121
Simultaneous input and output operations (M series), 1125

Single block, 420
Reference position return during composite control, 126
Single direction positioning (M series), 474
Reference position shift, 378
Skip function, 1167
Remote buffer, 1106
Small hole peck drilling cycle (M series), 1012
Remote diagnosis, 1069
Smooth interpolation (M series), 514
Reset and rewind, 409
Software operators panel, 1057
Restrictions imposed during synchronous, composite, and

superimposed control, 145
Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters, 844

Specifying the rotation axis, 10
Retrace (M series), 1007
Spindle control, 126
Retraction for rigid tapping (M series), 446
Spindle orientation, 876
Rigid tapping, 810
Spindle output control by the PMC, 1262
Rigid tapping specification, 817
Spindle output switching, 879
Rotary axis roll over, 77
Spindle positioning (T series), 760
Run hour and parts count display, 1038
Spindle serial output/spindle analog output, 699

Spindle setting and tuning screen, 1032
Spindle speed control, 707
Spindle speed control for twopath lathe, 735
Scaling (M Series), 997
Spindle speed fluctuation detection, 754
Second feedrate override, 543
Spindle speed function, 697
Selfdiagnosis, 1035
Spindle speed function (S code output), 698
Sequence number comparison and stop, 430
Spindle synchronous control, 872
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i list of address (onepath control), 1296
Spiral interpolation, conical interpolation (M series), 518
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i list of address (twopath control), 1315
Stamping the machining time, 1055
Series 20i address list, 1369
Start lock/interlock, 260
Series 21i/210i address list, 1351
Status output signal, 274
Servo alarms, 142
Status output signals for an axis under synchronous, composite,

or superimposed control, 148
Servo off (mechanical handle), 24
Stored pitch error compensation, 30
Servo tuning screen, 1031
Stored stroke check 1, 231
Servo/spindle motor speed detection, 288
Stored stroke limit 2, 3, 235
Setting, 118, 124, 127
Straightness compensation, 41
Setting each axis, 5
Stroke limit check before move, 254
Setting the reference position without dogs, 371
Superimposed control, 127
Settings related to servocontrolled axes, 45
Synchronous control, 117
Settings related with coordinate systems, 69
Synchronous control (T series), 104
Signal operation, 118, 124, 127
Synchronous control and composite control (T series (twopath

control)), 114
Signals for the rigid tapping function, 826

Signals related to gear switching, 828
Signals related to S code output, 827
Signals related to second spindle rigid tapping, 830

Signals used by machining guidance function (20iFA/TA),
1278
Tandem control, 95
Signals used for polygon limit machining (20iFA), 1290
Terminating synchronous, composite, or superimposed control,

147
Simple electric gear box (G80, G81) (M series), 210
Testing a program, 414
i4
INDEX
B63003EN1/02
Note
Thread cutting, 465
Torque limit skip, 1178
Thread cutting cycle retract (T series), 472
Touch pad, 1076
Threedimensional coordinate conversion (M series), 1004
Troubleshooting, 163
Threespindle serial output, 881

Timing charts for rigid tapping specification, 835
Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode, 848

Tool axis direction handle feed function, 314
Using composite control, 153
Tool axis direction handle feed function/tool axis direction

handle feed function B, 314
Using synchronous control, 152
Tool axis perpendicular direction handle feed function, 319

Tool compensation value/tool compensation number/tool
compensation memory, 907
Tool function, 904
VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal, 276
Tool functions, 903

Tool length measurement (M series), 1159
Tool length/workpiece origin measurement B (M series), 1198

Tool life management, 914
Waiting M code (twopath control), 691
Tool nose radius compensation (T series), 926
Waveform diagnosis display, 1033
Tool offset during composite control, 126
When M29 is specified before G84 (G74), 836
Tool post interference check (T series, twopath control), 249
Workpiece coordinate system/addition of workpiece coordinate

system pair, 70
Tool retraction and return, 434
i5
Sep., 99
Apr., 97
Date
02
01
Edition
Addition of Series 20iA
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isMODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B63003EN1)
Revision Record
No part of this manual may be

reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

63003en1.PDF Fanuc

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

63003en1.PDF Fanuc

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

63003en1.PDF Fanuc

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i Model A

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Copyright 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

CONSTITUTION OF THIS MANUAL

This Manual (B63003EN1) is composed of the following 2 volumes.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

3. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

CYCLE START/FEED HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

7. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . 523

8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

TOOL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

10.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922

11. PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/

12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

12.1.18 External Operator Message Logging and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098

14. MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202

PMC AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. INTERFACES RELATED TO Series 20i MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277

SIGNALS USED BY MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION (20iFA/TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

FANUC Series 16iTA

FANUC Series 16iMA

FANUC Series 160iTA

FANUC Series 160isTA

FANUC Series 160iMA

FANUC Series 160isMA

FANUC Series 18iTA

FANUC Series 18iMA

FANUC Series 180iTA

FANUC Series 180isTA

FANUC Series 180iMA

FANUC Series 180isMA

FANUC Series 21iTA

FANUC Series 21iMA

FANUC Series 210iTA

FANUC Series 210isTA

FANUC Series 210iMA

FANUC Series 210isMA

FANUC Series 20iTA

FANUC Series 20iFA

For ease of understanding, the models are categorized as follows:

[For twopath control]

One address accommodates eight signals.